Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

Chapter Text

Part 1 - The Mission

The Mayor sniffed with his nose exaggeratedly turned up, “Smells.”

The night air that would have normally been cool and calming was acrid and heavy.

“I bet the smell will stay all week. Rotten old pigs. They’ll bother me even after they’re dead.”

The other members of the council shifted awkwardly in their positions. They all stood in a row at the entrance to the village court, aimlessly looking forward yet not looking at all. The Mayor stood in the center, surrounded by his guards in case someone tried to attack him.

Screams filled the night as members of the revolt were burned, one by one, before the entire council’s eyes. Twenty-four men, making up a quarter of the village’s male population. Their widows would writhe in pain tonight. Their families were ruined forever.

The executioners threw burning fluid on each man, setting him ablaze with his animal cries deafening everyone.

“You bastard! You will pay for this!” Declared one of the men tied to the poles that had been erected in the courtyard. These were ones specially reserved for such mass punishments. Such ceremony was common in this quaint little town, though normally it would have happened in daylight, where all citizens could observe and take note. However, this had been a special incident and the Mayor had not wanted to delay the burning any longer.

“I believe it was you who actually paid, Gu Won.” The Mayor smirked as he levelled his gaze to the peasant who struggled against his restraints. “Where are your assassins now? Hmm? Run away with your money, did they?”

Gu Won glared, not uttering a word. A trail of blood slowly dripped from his forehead.

“What happened? Did you get duped by con artists claiming to be the Shadowmen? You should know better than to believe in the folk tales mothers use to scare their children.”

Another man screamed as he caught fire. The air smelt of metal and the smoke made the Mayor hunger for meat.

Gu Won shuddered as one by one, his fellow men were burned alive. Soon it would be his turn. Saved for last since he was the one leading the attempt on the Mayor’s life.

“You seem down, Gu Won. What happened to the fire within you?” The Mayor cackled at his own pun.

“Why don’t you come here and I’ll show you?” Gu Won spat, jerking forward as if he would strangle the Mayor. The only thing holding him back from strangling the man who had been bleeding his village dry through exploitation and corruption were the ropes tying him to the pole.

The Mayor, though quite a distance from Gu Won, still jumped back. “Cover me! Cover me!” He smacked the arm of one of the guards. In one swift, graceful motion, the four guards moved in closer, covering the Mayor from all sides. One guard covered the front, nearly eclipsing the Mayor with his tall, taut frame.

“You don’t deserve the position you have.” Gu Won screamed. “You don’t deserve to be our Mayor. Our children die of hunger and disease while you sit around in your office enjoying luxuries from our taxes!”

“Ha! A traitor to his country, questioning my position? What a laugh!” The Mayor said from behind the guard.

“How are we the traitors? You are the one that steals.”

“Fire! Set him on fire!” The Mayor ordered.

“I was not duped!” Gu Won continued. “The assassins will get you! The assassins—” The rest of Gu Won’s words were lost as another man began to scream. Another one of his friends burned to ash.

“There are no Shadowmen!” The Mayor yelled. “It is all a lie!” To his guards he said, “I have had enough of this. It smells awful.”

The rest of the village council stayed observing the punishment while the Mayor retreated inside the courthouse. The four guards surrounding him from all sides.

“Those ungrateful bastards,” the Mayor mumbled to himself. “Paying off assassins to kill me. Me!”

Badly lit halls led to a badly lit office. Fire from the lanterns flickered in the dark, casting long shadows everywhere. The wooden panels that made up the door slid open as the guards came in with the Mayor in tow.

In the safety of his office, the Mayor’s façade collapsed and his face fell into worry. “It is simply folklore. A fairytale. Nonsense.” The Mayor said to himself, as if in a trance.

“My Lord?” One of the guards—a portly figure—gestured to the Mayor, shaking him out of his mumblings.

“Ah, yes.” The Mayor sat down on his desk, folding his legs up beneath him. In the Kingdom, all officials had floor desks. Only the King had a seat, and that seat was the throne. The Mayor wondered what that throne felt like. His own cushion felt rock solid, despite its feathery bounce.

“Something the matter, my Lord?” The tall guard that had been covering the front inquired. He bent down in front of the desk. His voice deep and low sounded ominous in the confines of the room. His hawk like stare unperturbed the Mayor.

“No…” the Mayor trailed off before affirming, “No. It is nothing. You may leave.”

The four guards looked at each other. “My Lord,” the first one spoke, the one with the resonant voice. “Are you sure you will be safe?”

“Safe? Of course, I’m safe.”

The second guard spoke, his voice as soft as his features. “But my Lord, the assassins could still attack you.” He came and sat by to the Mayor’s right.

“Pah! What nonsense! There are no assassins.” The Mayor said confidently, but his shaking hands gave him away. He rubbed them together nervously. “They are a myth created by the present King. He needed a scape goat for when he—” the Mayor stopped short, his eyes shifting around.

“Yes, my Lord?” The second guard encouraged. His charming face beguiling the Mayor to speak.

The Mayor leaned close and whispered, “When he had King Lee Chang and his family killed.”

“But that happened twenty something years ago. I have heard that the assassins were around from way before then.” The third guard, the portly one, said. The fourth guard hissed at him to shut up.

“Foolish! It was only after the royal family were murdered that people started spreading rumors about some secret guild of assassins who go around killing everyone. But those are all lies. I’ve caught them myself! Con artists pretending to be the Shadowmen, taking everyone’s money then running away. It’s all a sham! A lie! No men go around hiding in the shadows. And even if they did, why would they ever kill for some peasants? Gu Won is an idiot. Thinking he could have me killed. Foolish!”

The fourth guard came and sat by the Mayor’s left. “But my Lord, what if Gu Won wasn’t duped. What if he actually did pay off the assassins?”

The Mayor stared at the guard. He was young. Too young to be speaking out so boldly. “Shut up. Are you all here to talk? Go outside and stand guard.” He waved the men away and bent down on his desk. After a moment’s pause he looked up again.

The guards were still there. And it was only then that he realized that the third one had crept up behind him. How had someone so big in constitution walk past the Mayor so quietly?

“Wh-Wh-Why are you still here?”

The flames in the lanterns flickered across their faces, casting deep shadows. The second guard, who’s face was quite attractive, looked ghastly in this light. The fourth guard’s goofy grin looked menacing. The only one not out of place was the first guard. The one with the deep voice and hawk like eyes. He appeared as if he belonged in these shadows—with his face unreadable and posture so straight and graceful that even the King would look ill-bred.

The Mayor examined his circumstance carefully. And it was here that he remembered that these guards had been new hires. Recruited when his original staff had disappeared.

“You… you… you’re them, aren’t you?” The Mayor whispered, unable to say it out loud lest this horrifying statement be true.

“Who? The Shadowmen?” The first guard spoke, his deep voice making him sound like a demon. “I thought they were just folklore.”

“A fairytale.” Said the second guard.

“Nonsense.” Said the third.

“How could we be them, when they don’t exist?” The fourth said.

The Mayor suddenly found it hard to breathe and each breath he did take seemed too loud—exaggerated by the fact that the guards were so quiet and unmoving.

“Assassins.” The Mayor’s voice could barely be heard.

All four guards smiled.

The first one unsheathed his sword with surprising silence. The Mayor cried out when he felt the blade on his neck, “Don’t!” He yelped.

“My, my. Weren’t you acting all high and mighty just now?” The second guard said, tilting his head.

“Look at him, trembling.” The fourth joined in.

The Mayor felt the third guard’s blade poking his back.

“All men tremble when they know they’re about to die.” The first guard said, standing tall as if he owned the office and not the other way around.

“P-Please,” the Mayor said, “I’ll pay you. I’ll pay you more than they did.”

“Sorry, but once a contract is established we do not accept any more payment.” The third guard said from behind.

“Can’t go back on our word, can we?” The fourth agreed.

“A man’s only as good as his word.” The second nodded. “And if we start breaking contracts then no one would ever hire us.”

“People should be able to rely on assassins.”

“Especially when they can’t rely on their leaders.” The first one twisted his blade. The Mayor could feel warm blood trickling down his cold skin.

The Mayor rubbed his hands together, pleading, “I’ll leave. I’ll leave and never come back. You won’t see me again. I promise. You can tell them you killed me. They will never know.”

The fourth guard shook his head, “Not possible, my Lord. You see, we need to take your head.”

“Unattached to your body.” The third elaborated. “Otherwise, our contract remains unfulfilled.”

“Even if you do end up dead.” The second chimed in.

“No head, no deal.”

The Mayor was shaking uncontrollably now. The pungent smell of urine rose in the air.

“Ugh!” Three of the guards groaned. Only the first remained unfazed.

“There is no shame in fear, my Lord” the first said. “Fear is honorable. Fear is honest.”

“But piss is disgusting.”

The first guard ignored the second’s comment, “Wouldn’t you rather be honest at least once, before dying?”

“Pl—” The Mayor’s words were cut short as the first guard’s blade sliced through his throat. At first nothing happened. Then blood began to pour from the cut. And then his head, with his expression frozen in place, fell off cleanly. His body fell back, with the third guard jumping away as it did.

The second guard picked up the head, placing it in a wooden box that was stuffed with straw. “Well, that was quite something.”

“Playing with the target before killing them is boring.” The first guard complained with a monotone drawl, his face expressionless as he sheathed his sword. “It’s rather beneath us, don’t you think?”

“Don’t ruin our fun, Dan Ho, just because you’re boring.” The second chided.

“I kinda agree with Dan Ho. It seems unnecessarily cruel.” The portly third guard said nervously, eyeing the headless body as it bled out on the floor.

“You’re too green, newbie. A couple of weeks doing this, and you’ll want to play around too. Ain’t that right, Hwang Rin?” The fourth pointed to the second.

“Dong Su’s right, Sam Chul. This job starts getting to ya, if you don’t detach yourself. You can’t let yourself see the targets as people.” Hwang Rin, the second guard said. “Now let’s get out of here.”

Sam Chul looked back at the dead man. He jumped when Dan Ho smacked him in the back.

“You alright?” Dan Ho asked. His deep voice oddly comforting.

“Um-hmm.” Sam Chul nodded.

The four assassins discarded their uniforms, revealing black clothing beneath and put on masks to hide their faces.

“But they already know what we look like.” Sam Chul asked the three veterans.

“They won’t remember. Them elite lot never remember the faces of their lowly staff.” Dong Su explained.

“Shh. Quiet.” Dan Ho warned and the four all ventured outside.

Hidden by the shadows, the four assassins found it relatively easy to creep out of the council office. Most of the councilors and guards were too occupied by the punishment being doled out in the courtyard to bother seeing four men sneaking about.

Even from the backside, screams of people being burned alive could still be heard. Sam Chul stopped in his tracks as yet another man’s screams filled the air. Smoke traveled upwards in grey spirals.

“Come on!” Whispered Hwang Rin. Sam Chul obeyed.

The four of them made their way to the courtyard wall, with Hwang Rin leading them. Out of the four, Hwang Rin knew most about short blades. When they reached the wall, Hwang Rin produced small knives with long hilts that he carefully jammed into the wall. Carefully, Hwang Rin began to climb over, using the blades as footholds. He made a pathway for the rest of them as he moved up.

Sam Chul was the next to follow, with Dong Su and Dan Ho close behind. Dan Ho, being the last, would be removing the knives, to hide all traces of their escape.

“Hurry up!” Dong Su said to Sam Chul when he stopped in the middle of the wall when yet another cry rang out.

“They’re killing them.” Sam Chul said absently.

“Of course they are. That’s why we take advance payment. Now move, you big lug.” Dong Su readjusted the box with the Mayor’s head under his arm as he urged Sam Chul on.

“Hwang Rin, gimme a dagger.” Sam Chul asked Hwang Rin who was sitting on the wall, ready to climb down the other side with the same makeshift footholds from knives.

“What? Why?”

“Just send it. Hurry!”

Hwang Rin threw a dagger in Sam Chul’s direction, gently. He caught it between his teeth and began to climb again. Sam Chul sat down on the top plate with one leg dangling on each side.

“Here.” Dong Su handed Sam Chul the box. Sam Chul took it and handed it over to Hwang Rin who safely carried it down the other side. Sam Chul took this moment to examine the council grounds.

While the assassins were hidden by the council building, the courtyard could still be seen. Charred black masses remained where once rebellious villages had been, the wooden post they had been tied to having burned along with them.

Nearly half of them were dead now. Sam Chul could see Gu Won, their leader still struggling to break free, yelling at the council for their betrayal of their people.

“What are you doing, newbie?! We can’t just sit around.” Dong Su said as he looked up at the assassin blocking his path.

“Here goes nothing.” Sam Chul said to himself, ignoring Dong Su. While Hwang Rin was the one with the better aim, Sam Chul was the one with the most strength among them. Praying to heaven above, Sam Chul flung his arm back and sent the blade flying through the air towards the villagers tied up.

Dong Su stared bug eyed, not believed what he was seeing. “Did you just…”

Below Dong Su, Dan Ho similarly watched open mouthed as the blade landed on a wooden post, missing the ropes by just an inch.

“Oh shit.” Hwang Rin cried from the other side. “Sam Chul you idiot!”

The villager who Sam Chul had tried to help saw the silent blade in wonder as it appeared out of thin air, quite literally. He looked around and saw the faint outlines of three men trying to climb the walls of the courtyard.

“The assassins…” The villager realized, “THE ASSASSINS ARE HERE! They’re here! We’re saved!”

“What did you do?!” Dan Ho yelled. It was a rhetorical question. All four of them knew exactly what Sam Chul had done.

“We can’t just leave them! Hwang Rin, gimme another dagger.”

“I am not giving you anything! Get the hell down from there! You’ll kill us all!”

“Just give it!”

Sounds of men shouting and swords unsheathing came over the dying wails. Hwang Rin in desperation, sent another dagger flying up in the air that Sam Chul caught and sent flying towards the tied up villagers. This time too he missed and it landed on one of the legs of the villagers who yelped in pain.

“Stop throwing daggers and run!!” Dan Ho shouted.

Sam Chul, seeing the guards approaching them, made a beeline down the other side of the wall. Dong Su and Dan Ho soon followed. Arrows came flying at the men, barely missing them.

One arrow lodged itself in the rocks of the wall, right beside Dan Ho’s face. Dan Ho looked at it, looked at the guards coming closer and the screaming villagers still burning. “Sam Chul you ass.” He said to himself as he dislodged the arrow with one hand while taking out his bow with the other whilst also balancing himself on the daggers stuck in the wall. In one swift motion, Dan Ho fired the arrow; killing two birds with one shot.

Instead of the guards, the arrow went flying towards the villagers, slicing through the air and through the bindings of a couple of the men. With the guards now all focused on the assassins, the remaining men now had a chance to escape. Using the daggers Sam Chul had thrown, the men freed the others while the councilors could only shout and watch.

“Get them! No, not the assassins, the villagers! Wait! The assassins are escaping! What are you doing?”

The guards, now confused who to target, could only run about in panic—failing to capture both the villagers and the assassins. The villagers managed to run away into the village streets while the assassins escaped into the woodlands where they could easily hide away.

Once they had reached a safe distance, Dong Su turned around and punched Sam Chul, sending the portly man tumbling backwards.

“Hey!”

“Yah, you bastard. You nearly got us killed!” Dong Su grabbed the Sam Chul’s collar and shook him.

“Let him go.” Dan Ho said, putting a calm hand on Dong Su’s shoulder.

“Yah, Dan Ho-ya. This is why I was against bringing a newbie into our mission. They always mess things up.” Hwang Rin said, wiping the sweat from his brow.

“He’ll learn.” Dan Ho said, bending down. Dong Su let Sam Chul’s collar go and walked away in a huff.

“Yah!” Hwang Rin called after him.

“Give him a minute.” Dan Ho advised Hwang Rin. To Sam Chul, he said, “Do you know what happens to us if we get caught?” He asked calmly, but Sam Chul knew enough of Dan Ho to know that calmness was always a dangerous sign with him.

“We-umm, we—”

“We get slayed. Someone from our own clan will be sent to kill us before we can say anything. Of course, that is when we have failed to take our own lives. You know this, don’t you?”

“Yes, Dan Ho.” Sam Chul nodded.

“Did they not teach you our laws before you left the school?” Dan Ho’s hawk like eyes bore into Sam Chul’s. All Sam Chul could do was nod. “Then what do they say about going beyond what our contract specifies?”

Sam Chul gulped, “Not get involve—”

“Not get involved! That’s what it says!” Hwang Rin erupted. “We aren’t supposed to do anything not specified in the contract, you idiot! You dolt! You nuisance!”

“Hwang Rin.” Dan Ho commanded but Hwang Rin ignored it.

“Our job is to kill the target, and that’s it! Just kill! We aren’t heroes, Sam Chul-ah. We aren’t here to help people. We’re here just to get paid! The only person we do help is the Grim Reaper. And no one else! How do you mess up such a simple concept?”

“I just thought—”

“What? What did you think? What? What?”

“They hired us to kill the Mayor because they needed help. What good would killing the Mayor have done, if they died too?”

“That’s not our job to worry about! The villagers should have thought about this before they hired us.”

“He’s right, Sam Chul.” Dan Ho added, “Our job isn’t to help the client. Our job is just to kill the target. We are always impartial to the consequences.”

“It’s the only reason we have managed to survive this long.” Dong Su reappeared behind them. All three turned. “Yah, didn’t you ever wonder why no one from our organization was ever caught and hanged? Didn’t you ever question how the King has allowed people like us to fester in his Kingdom?”

“It’s because of our impartiality. We remain unaffiliated.” Dan Ho answered for Sam Chul.

“And thus, incorruptible. If we don’t get involved, then we can’t take any political sides.” Hwang Rin added.

“Or favor any one house.” Dong Su continued.

“Or influence the Kingdom’s affairs.” Hwang Rin said. “All we do, is kill people.”

Dan Ho nodded, “And we do it for money. Anyone with enough money can hire us.”

“So it’s a fair game. Equal opportunity.”

“It’s a delicate balance. And if you ruin it, then you not only jeopardize our lives, but the lives of the entire guild. Our school, our brothers and sisters, our Headmaster. Everyone.”

“Do you get it now, Sam Chul?” Dan Ho asked. Sam Chul nodded, thoroughly humbled now.

“I get it. I’m sorry.” Sam Chul got to the ground, bowing before his brothers, pressing his forehead on the ground. “Forgive me, please.” He said solemnly.

“I should slay your head right here, right now.” Dong Su grumbled, walking past Sam Chul.

“That’s what the Headmaster would have done.” Hwang Rin raised a brow to Dan Ho.

“I think she would have let this one go, since this was Sam Chul’s first mission.” Dan Ho reasoned.

“Whatever,” Hwang Rin shrugged and went after Dong Su. “You’re the Headmaster’s pet. You know better.”

Dan Ho sighed and patted Sam Chul’s back. “Get up. We have to get to get to Eun Dan and deliver the head.”

“And that’s a week long journey!” Hwang Rin called back, stretching his arms and yawning. Dan Ho picked up his sword and went ahead.

Sam Chul sat up straight and looked down at his hands. A few droplets of blood had been caught in his palm. He rubbed it away, feeling strange and subdued. He turned back to look at the other assassins, who walked ahead without any worry or care.

Dong Su stalked forward, grumbling to himself. Hwang Rin strolled behind Dong Su with an easy going swagger, humming to himself. Dan Ho, the one with the most presence among them, walked quietly, without sound, gliding behind Hwang Rin with a strange balance of regal grace and confidence that only he could manage.

Gathering his wits, Sam Chul trudged behind like a guilty child, glad that his mistake hadn’t cost them their lives.

Chapter Text

The assassins had changed out of their dark attire and wore plainclothes—indistinguishable and inconspicuous. They blended so far into the crowd that no one noticed the four outsiders walking on the street in broad daylight. It helped that Dan Ho and Hwang Rin had their faces covered, for theirs were faces that turned many a female head their way. Sam Chul would have been envious if this talent wasn’t so problematic for their profession. Assassins couldn’t have people recognizing their faces. Sam Chul was happy he had a plain, chubby and a generally forgettable face.

“Always take note of your surroundings. Make it a habit. It can be the difference between life and death.” Dan Ho instructed quietly to Sam Chul as they made their way through the capital city. Sam Chul’s eyes darted about, trying to absorb everything in at once and in doing so, he managed to notice nothing at all.

“No, no, no.” Dan Ho whispered into Sam Chul’s ear. “Don’t just try to look at everything at once. Try to find the connection points. Take for example the man about to walk past us.” Dan Ho nudged Sam Chul’s attention towards a sour faced man who was patting his clothing, searching for something as he walked on.

“He’s looking for his coin purse. Now ask yourself why that is. Did he forget it at home? Did he lose it?”

“How will I know that?” Sam Chul asked.

“Look at those kids playing over there. They were running about just a second ago, weren’t they? Now they’re all huddled together.”

“Can’t that just be another game?”

“Look closer. They’re sharing something amongst themselves. They’re pickpockets. They nicked that man’s money. And they’ll try the same on Dong Su. Watch.”

Dong Su had been walking up ahead of the group, with his hat bent low and his gaze to the ground. Sam Chul noticed the kids all eyeing him and then giving each other subtle nods. One of the kids made a show of running across the street and calling out to the others. The others then called back and ran across as well. In this hullabaloo, one of the kids bumped into Dong Su and quickly jumped back, apologizing.

“That fool doesn’t know it yet, but that kid’s got Dong Su’s coin.” Dan Ho said. Sam Chul noticed how the kid seemed to have his hands behind his back. It seemed to be a gesture of politeness but now Sam Chul could see, that the child was hiding something.

Dong Su scolded the kid but continued walking off. Hwang Rin, who had been walking behind Dong Su seemed to have sharper eyes and immediately caught the boy by the arm as he tried to run away. Hwang Rin shook the boy gently, who seemed to be denying any wrongdoing. Behind the boy, another child was quietly sneaking up to take Dong Su’s coin purse.

When this other child turned to run away, he bumped into Dan Ho who stood with his arms crossed and his hawk like eyes sternly eyeing the boy.

Without a word, the boy returned the coin purse and ran away, terrified. Dong Su, unaware of all of this, kept walking onward. The other three joined him, Hwang Rin and Dan Ho surprising Dong Su by placing their arms around his shoulder from opposite sides. Dan Ho thrust the purse into Dong Su’s chest.

“What… how did you—”

“Pickpockets. They always get you.” Dan Ho raised a brow.

“Every time.” Hwang Rin laughed. Sam Chul smiled at his brothers.

“You see, Sam Chul? You have to be vigilant. Keep an eye on everything and everyone. That way, you can gather intel. And information is crucial for an assassin.” Dan Ho put his arm around Sam Chul.

“Ugh, is he giving his keep your eyes open speech?” Dong Su poked his elbow in Dan Ho’s ribs.

“He gives it to all newbies.” Hwang Rin grinned. “Dong Su never heard the end of it last year.”

“He still needs more lessons.” Dan Ho said with such seriousness that none of them was sure whether he was being funny or not. Nonetheless, they all still laughed.

The quartet turned the corner to cross the main street but found themselves unable to pass. People had gathered on the sides while the entire wide road lay empty. Men in red uniforms were pushing people out of the way.

Sam Chul frowned. “Red. Those are—”

“The Royal Guard, yes.” Hwang Rin informed grimly. “Keep your head down.”

“What’s going on?” The assassins heard someone ask.

“Royal procession. The Prince and Princess are passing through.” Someone else replied in awe.

“The royal family! Oh, heaven has blessed us!”

“Indeed! Normally they stay inside the palace. It is truly an honor to have them visit us.”

The mood on the street suddenly turned jovial. People rushed to the side of the street to get a better view of the oncoming procession. The Royal Guard struggled to keep people at bay.

“Does this happen often?” Sam Chul asked. He had never been in the capital city before, having spent all of his life behind the walls of the assassin school.

“The royals don’t come into the city very often so no, this is rare.” Hwang Rin answered. “That’s why everyone’s excited.”

The royal procession crawled its way through the street at an agonizingly slow speed. Dong Su fidgeted about where he stood. “Eun Dan must be waiting.” He said, rocking to and fro on his heels.

“Why do you care?” Hwang Rin asked immediately. His eyes narrowed to slits.

“Your lady friend does not interest me,” Dong Su assured, “but she does get testy if we’re late.”

“She does not. You take that back.” Hwang Rin defended.

“Shut. Up. Both of you.” Dan Ho said through clenched teeth. Hwang Rin and Dong Su became aware of some of the stares they were getting and quieted.

The palanquins finally reached nearby. Sam Chul stared at the ornate designs with his mouth open. Life inside the assassin school had left him depraved of such sights. As his eyes followed the intricate bronze work, he noticed the curtain in the palanquin window blow to the side. Through the opening slit, he saw glimpses; of long, silken hair, of the side of a nose, and two fingers in a hand.

“A woman’s in there.” He said absently.

“I think that’s the princess.” Dan Ho said without looking. His eyes were on the guards.

Like Sam Chul, others also tried to get a better look at the Princess, but the palanquin passed by and all they could see were the few glimpses that Sam Chul had seen.

“Did you see her?” Someone whispered.

“No. Did you?”

“I couldn’t.”

“I’ve heard Princess Song Hwa is the most beautiful woman in the kingdom.”

“I’ve heard that even foreign princes have tried asking for her hand in marriage.”

“I wonder what she looks like.”

“I want to see her!”

Sam Chul saw Dan Ho shake his head at these remarks. “Has no one ever seen the royal family?” Sam Chul asked.

“Not commoners, no.”

“The second palanquin must be the prince.” Hwang Rin guessed as the procession continued.

“Shouldn’t he be on horseback?” Dong Su inquired. “Only women ride inside the palanquin.”

“His feet must’ve hurt.” Hwang Rin said dryly. The comment earned him some scathing looks from the people around them.

“You can’t disrespect royalty like that, young man.” A woman standing nearby said.

Hwang Rin flashed her an apologetic smile and she turned away, blushing. Even with older women, Hwang Rin’s charm has no bounds.

Dan Ho nudged Sam Chul, directing his attention ahead. “Look now. Across the street. Something’s going to happen.” He said. “Start practicing what I told you.”

Sam Chul frowned, not understanding what Dan Ho meant. He looked into the crowd trough the many guards and servants that passed by in the procession. He saw nothing out of the ordinary. Just people waiting on the sidelines.

Quite out of nowhere, an old man appeared, pushing people away. His glare was fixed on the second palanquin that was just passing now. He was clutching something in his hand. And before Sam Chul could figure out what it was, the man hurled it at the second palanquin. It was a ball of mud. It landed with a loud thud on the palanquin.

Gasps rose among the crowd. No one could quite believe their eyes.

“Thieves!” The old man yelled. “Cowards! Betrayers!”

Everything went still. And for such a number of people, this level of silence felt surreal. Yet it was just so. Because no one knew what to make of an old man who had dared disrespect the most powerful family in the kingdom. They all just gawked at the man’s audacity.

“Observe,” Dan Ho instructed, unaffected. “Look at his clothes. They’re in tatters. Almost falling off. His body. He’s all skin and bones. And he’s gone dark from being too much in the sun. He looks homeless. A beggar.”

“He looks suicidal.” Dong Su added in whisper.

“Because he has nothing to lose.” Dan Ho countered. “That is a man with no possessions and only pains.”

“A potential client?” Hwang Rin suggested.

“He has no money, Hwang Rin.” Dan Ho pointed out.

“We don’t know that.”

“Hwang Rin has never managed to apply any of my teachings.” Dan Ho rolled his eyes.

“What’s going to happen to him?” Sam Chul said in worry as the man now picked up more dirt from the ground and threw it at the palanquin. Again, and again and again.

“Death.” Dan Ho said nonchalantly.

“They can’t just kill him.” Sam Chul said, shocked.

“Why not? He just disrespected the Prince.” Dong Su raised a confused brow.

“Shouldn’t the Prince be benevolent and forgiving?”

Dong Su and Hwang Rin looked at each other, not knowing what to respond to that.

“Why do you think that?” Dan Ho inquired.

“Well… he’s so beloved by everyone… I just assumed…”

Their conversation was interrupted by the situation that was escalating on the street. Guards had seized the old man now and were pushing him out of the way. The palanquin door flew open, and out came a furious looking young man. He had a haughty air about him, and the most lavish set of clothes, made from the finest cloth, embroidered in intricate gold designs. Sam Chul figured this man to be the prince. No one else could ever look so privileged.

People standing near Sam Chul began to whisper.

“Oh, it’s the Chief State Councilor’s son.”

“Cho Jang Hyun? What is he doing here?”

“He looks so handsome!”

“And he’s so tall.”

“That awful man. How could he throw dirt at the Chief Councilor’s son?”

“What’s going on here? Who is this man?” Cho Jang Hyun demanded impatiently. He seemed more inconvenienced by the stall in the procession rather than the disrespect shown by the beggar.

“He is no one, my Lord. Just a street urchin.”

The Chief Councilor’s son eyed the mud sliding down the palanquin. “Did he do this?”

The guards hesitated. “Yes.” Said one of them. “We were just removing him from your path, my Lord.”

Jang Hyun waved his hand. The guards looked at each other and backed away from the man, leaving him kneeling on the ground. Jang Hyun bent forward and leveled his eyes to the beggar. “Do you realize what trouble you have caused this Kingdom, old man? My time is precious. The entire Kingdom suffers if I suffer.”

The man gave Jang Hyun a disgusted sneer.  Before anyone could stop him, the beggar sent mud flying in Jang Hyun’s face. “We suffer not because you suffer, but because you exist. You are scum! You are plague!” The man spat on Jang Hyun’s shoe.

The Royal Guards immediately took a hold of the man as Jang Hyun unsheathed his sword. He wiped the dirt off his face and stepped forward, raising the blade high.

Thwack!

The guards and Lord Jang Hyun jumped back in shock. The beggar’s mouth lay open. He blinked disbelievingly. Mud came flying through, this time from the side. Everyone looked wide eyed as the beggar was knocked back by more and more mud that was sent his way.

“Four.” Thwack. “Five.” Thwack. “That’s how many times you hit us, didn’t you?”

After hearing whispers about her beauty, to finally see the Princess herself felt surprisingly underwhelming. Sam Chul had made up an image of a large eyed, black haired, fair skinned beauty. A woman with a perfectly sleek face and a tall, skinny stature. And while the Princess seemed to be all those things, there was something off putting about her.

Slim but not skinny, pale but not fair, tall but not statuesque. She had dark eyes but they glared, and red lips but they sneered. And quite ungracefully, she was hurling mud at the beggar the same way he had hurled them at the Councilor’s son.

Sam Chul heard someone choking back laughter. He turned to see Dan Ho with his eyes shut and his hand covering his mouth. His shoulders shook as he tried to hold back his amusement. Sam Chul didn’t see anything funny about this. What the Princess was doing was undignified and cruel. The old man kept getting knocked back with each ball of mud thrown at him. It hit him squarely in the chest with a sickening thwack. Sam Chul was sure he even heard a rock at one point.

The beggar looked pathetic. His state had already been in shambles. But now he was covered in mud and dirt. Sam Chul’s heart went out to the man. He couldn’t believe the Princess. A person of her position should not be hurting her own people this way.

“Aren’t you going to count this, dear Princess? He hit me too. Not just the palanquin.” Jang Hyun pointed to his face.

“Oh, right.” The Princess said. She stuck her hand in the mud again and threw another ball at the poor beggar. “Six. That should be enough.” She straightened her back and took out a handkerchief to wipe her hands on. “Go away old man. Unless you want me throwing more mud at you.”

“You witch!” The old man said through clenched teeth.

The Princess, instead of being taken aback like any normal person would, smiled. A wide, sly smile that didn’t quite reach her cold eyes. “Aw, who told you? I should have thought I hid my demons well.” She bent forward, eyes boring into the old beggar’s. “You best run along now. Unless you want my demons chasing after you at night.”

The old beggar shook all over, crawling back on all fours till he found enough strength to get to his feet. He ran away, without a single word.

“What are you doing? You’re letting him get away?” Jang Hyun demanded of the guards.

The Princess turned to the haughty Lord. “What? You’re going to use waste our time to chase after some old peasant? The man will die on the street anyways. Why make things easier for him?” As she spoke, the Princess wiped her hand on Jang Hyun’s shirt, streaking it with mud. Given their differences in status, the son of the second most powerful man in the kingdom, the Chief State Councilor, couldn’t do anything to stop her. “Let him live. His life is punishment enough for him,” the Princess grinned. A shiver went down Sam Chul’s spine. He had never seen such an evil grin before.

“We’re leaving this pathetic town!” The Princess announced. She stalked back up to her palanquin and got in without ceremony.

Jang Hyun looked down on his dirty clothes, seething at the sight. But he too, got back into his palanquin without a word. The procession continued, leaving behind a trail of whispers and speculations.

“My… the Princess…” Sam Chul heard someone say, “She is… as beautiful as rumored.”

“Yes. She is… beautiful.”

It was only now that Sam Chul heard the uncertainty and the hollowness in everyone’s words. He also noted, how no one was discussing the Princess’s behavior or even the Lord Jang Hyun’s.

“The Lord Jang Hyun and the Princess must be close, since they are traveling.”

“Yes! They must be close. The Chief State Councilor is a dear friend of the King.”

“A fine pair the Princess and the Lord make. A mighty fine pair.”

This chattering continued on till the procession had finally left and people were allowed to use the road again. The four assassins continued on their way, with Sam Chul anxiously following his three seniors.

“What the hell is going on?” Sam Chul asked Hwang Rin. “Why isn’t anyone speaking up about what the Princess just did to that poor man.”

Hwang Rin and Dong Su gave each other another look. Dan Ho explained. “Anyone heard speaking against the royal family is executed.” He said it as if he was explaining that the Sun rose from the East, as if it was something of common sense.

“What? Why? That’s ridiculous.”

“That’s the way it is. We don’t question what we can’t control, Sam Chul-ah. Just try to survive it.”

Sam Chul stopped as the rest of the assassins continued forward. He looked at the people around him; the city folk, all bustling about with their work and their lives. He had heard what life outside the school was like. It had sounded blissful and hopeful, a place where boys his age were allowed to be boys, instead of being taught ways to shed their humanity.

But now that he was out, he could see that the world beyond the assassin school, was just another cage, and everyone was trapped in it. Just like him.

"One thing's bothering me." Sam Chul heard Dan Ho say as he caught up with his party.

"What?" Dong Su asked.

"Where was the Prince? He and the Princess were supposed to be traveling together."

"He must've changed his route." Hwnag Rin suggested with a shrug.

Dan Ho furrowed his brow. "I don't know. Maybe."

"Why does that bother you?" Sam Chul asked.

"Dan Ho hates getting wrong intel." Hwang Rin grinned. He patted his friend on the back, "Relax, Dan Ho-ya. The Prince doesn't have anything to do with us."

Dan Ho nodded. But the four assassins didn't know, that soon they would have everything to do with the Prince. And it would come at a great cost.

Chapter Text

It was nightfall when the quartet finally neared their destination—the brothel district. It appeared as one would expect such a place to; strange, loud and excessive. It was lit with dim street lanterns that played with shadows to create an eerie atmosphere. People dressed in gaudy, over the top clothing flitted about chatting and laughing loudly, drunk off their minds. Women hung from the men’s arms, no doubt paid to do so. Men threw around their money as if they had not a care in the world. There was no dignity to be maintained here. No honor to uphold. All of that was left outside the district border.

The assassins stood out among the crowd, not for their height and lean stature, but in how they managed to maintain more dignity than the noblemen who went about the dirty street. Dan Ho in particular stood out, which put Sam Chul on edge. He walked ahead of them, graceful as a swan, his neck craned high as he looked for something. His steps were confident as always, and he had a regal air about him.

Many women turned in his direction as he made his way forward. People got out of his way when he passed. It took a minute for Sam Chul to realize why people were treating him with such reverence. They were in a nobleman’s clothes.

All four of them were dressed in aristocratic attire, having changed out of their plainclothes once they had reached the brothel district. Many were dressed this way, and no one was foolish enough to question a nobleman as to who they were or why they were in such a place.

Of course, people were thinking they were noblemen too. But no one would give other noblemen such attention as was given to Dan Ho. But the assassin wasn’t alone in this. He had competition. Hwang Rin too, attracted a lot of stares, but for completely different reasons.

While Dan ho inspired intimidation, Hwang Rin was like nectar to a bee. His honey like smile, his easy going manner and the loose swagger with which he walked all ensured that every woman who laid eyes on him was trapped by his honey charm and magnetism.

To put it simply, Hwang Rin was beautiful. His face could have rivaled the most coveted courtesan. Several men even turned his way, willing to offer all of their riches to Hwang Rin. But no one dared bother someone in a nobleman’s clothes. So Hwang Rin went about, undisturbed.

Sam Chul noted that Dong Su didn’t like being left out of the attention Dan Ho and Hwang Rin were receiving. He skulked behind the two, grumbling to himself. Sam Chul himself was unbothered. Beyond worrying that somehow they would be caught, he didn’t care. And his worry too only stemmed from the fact that he was carrying the box with the Mayor’s head in it.

The box had been wrapped in ornate red silk. “Red incase it leaks. It won’t look suspicious.” Dan Ho has explained. Sam Chul was still squeamish about carrying a dead man’s head but he insisted that he do it himself.

“You two attract two much attention,” he had said to Hwang Rin and Dan Ho. “And you I don’t trust.” He said to Dong Su. None of the other three had taken offence.

They stopped at a small street stall with small trinkets and jewelry on display. The assassins were interested in neither. They wanted something else.

“Masks, please.” Dan Ho said, taking out his coin purse.

“Masks?” Sam Chul asked Hwang Rin quietly. Hwang Rin had become someone Sam Chul could rely on with his questions.

“For the noblemen who visit the brothels and don’t want their identities to be known.”

Indeed, when Sam Chul looked about, he saw that many of the men who were in noble attire, also wore masks. They were warped shapes, false faces to put over their own. Masks were normally a sacred artifact in the kingdom, sometimes used to represent deities or significant beings. But these ones were comical. An ironic representation of the noblemen revealing their true nature after hiding their face.

This confused Sam Chul who asked, “But why? Everyone knows that all noblemen visit the brothel district.”

“Because the women of upper class society like to believe that all noblemen other than their husbands, brothers, sons are visiting such places. They like to believe that their men would never engage with prostitutes. Even though all men do. And the noblemen kindly oblige in this fantasy.”

“It also adds to the thrill,” Dan Ho—who had overheard them with his sharp ears—added. “You’re in a mask. No one knows your identity. You can be anyone you want to be. And when you’ve got a pocket full of coin, who knows what pleasures the night might lead to?”

“Oooh, I’m getting goosebumps.” Dong Su rubbed his arms. Sam Chul noticed something else on Dong Su’s arm. In particularly, his sleeve. The outlines of something tucked within it. As Dong Su moved closer to examine one of the masks strung up on the cart, his other hand slyly reached out and quickly pocketed a pair of cheap rings.

Sam Chul narrowed his eyes, not sure whether what he saw was real or his imagination. He kept his eyes on Dong Su’s hands but they never strayed again.

“Oh. Well that’s a little outside my price range.” Sam Chul heard Hwang Rin say as he held up a mask. Which was a strange statement considering they just completed a mission and their purses were about to be replenished by Eun Dan once they delivered the Mayor’s head. Nonetheless, the pretty assassin smiled at the woman running the card, rubbing his head sheepishly.

The cart woman, a cranky old lady with a mean disposition, seemed to melt—quite literally. The wrinkles of her face deepened, making it look like her skin was dripping, as she smiled to Hwang Rin. “Ah, well, maybe for you young man, I could make a discount.”

That discount ended up being down to almost nothing when Hwang Rin worked more of his charm on her. Sam Chul looked at him in both awe and disgust.

“What?” Hwang Rin asked when he felt Sam Chul’s stare. “At least I’m not light fingered like our Dong SU here.” Hwang Rin stared pointedly at Dong Su.

“I am offended at that false accusation.” Dong Su said indignantly. As Dong Su pouted, Sam Chul saw Dan Ho deftly fish out a fan and two rings from his wide sleeve, without Dong Su noticing. He still didn’t notice the stolen items were missing from his person when Dan Ho replaced them back in the cart.

“How much for everything?” Dan Ho asked the woman. To Sam Chul’s relief, Dan Ho was neither light fingered nor a humbug. He paid for their masks, which were practically free due to Hwang Run working his magic on the woman. Sam Chul noticed that one of the masks felt out of place. It was too comical and tacky looking.

“I’m going to get this for Eun Dan.” Hwang Rin said, holding up the comical mask.

“She will hate it.” Dan Ho replied, rolling his eyes.

“Exactly.” Hwang Rin grinned.

While Sam Chul had never met Eun Dan, he had heard about her from Hwang Rin. And hearing how he talked about her—about her beauty, her wit, her kindness, Sam Chul knew Hwang Rin liked her. Sam Chul wondered what kind of woman had managed to capture the heart of such a beautiful man as Hwang Rin. She would have to be a great beauty herself.

As Sam Chul thought of this, his eye fell on a hair pin. It was bright pink, a dainty looking thing. Something that someone with a lot of grace and poise would wear.

This would fit Eun Dan better than the mask, Sam Chul thought.

Apparently, Dan Ho had the same thought as he picked up the hair pin. “I’m getting this for Eun Dan.” He declared.

“Of course, you would.” Hwang Rin rolled his eyes. “This is why she never chose you. You’re too typical.”

Choose Dan Ho? Sam Chul wondered. Was there something between Eun Dan and Dan Ho? Given how touchy Hwang Rin was on the subject, Sam Chul didn’t dare breach the subject. It was better to let his curiosity lie, unsatisfied.

“Should I get something for Eun Dan too?” Sam Chul wondered, since the rest of them were buying something or the other for her.

“Yes. She would love it.” Dong Su said brightly.

“No. She would kill you.” Dan Ho poked Dong Su with his elbow.

With their purchasing complete, the quartet made their way to the brothel at the end of the district, the most well lit building in the area. It was the most well maintained too, with a bright, white façade and gold doors promising a good time to all who entered.

To call the place a respectable brothel would be an oxymoron, however the term still applied. The place was frequented by many (and only) noblemen who came from all over the kingdom to have a taste of some of the finest women the kingdom had to offer. This was because only the noblemen could afford the kisaengs of this establishment. The women here were highly skilled in providing certain services. But what most people didn’t know, was that the brothel also doubled for many of the Shadowmen to check in and receive their contracts.

Given the clientele, the brothel did very well for itself. It was furnished lavishly with dark wood and bronze work. Fake flowers filled the tall vases around every corner of the room. Wooden floors led to wooden paneled doors behind which all kinds of debauchery went on.

Sam Chul stared in awe.

“Close your mouth. And stop staring at the women. It is rude.” Dong Su scolded.

“But… how can I stop? They’re so pretty.” Sam Chul absently waved at a few women dressed tackily in excessive clothing and covered in too much makeup.

The three assassins looked at each other. A certain understanding passing between them.

“Sam Chul-ah. You didn’t finish your training, did you?” Hwang Rin casually put an arm around Sam Chul, covering his left.

“I did too!” Sam Chul defended.

“Really? You get queasy around dead bodies and you’re not indifferent to women. In our time they beat those needless emotions out of us till we felt nothing.” Dan Ho said, eyeing him scathingly from the front. Dan Ho’s hawk like eyes made Sam Chul jump out of his skin.

“We still feel nothing.” Dong Su added, coming up from the right.

“I-well I mean… I mean I technically passed…”

“But?” Dan Ho asked. His tone bordered on casual yet it was grim. Sam Chul suddenly felt he had made a terrible mistake.

He gulped as he suddenly realized what they were doing. They were covering him from all sides, like animals on the hunt. Like they had with the Mayor. Dan Ho always took the front, because he was the unofficial lead, and his eyes could intimidate anyone into talking. The three assassins pushed Sam Chul back till he hit a wall. Sam Chul was quite literally cornered.

“But?” Dan Ho prompted again. His voice oddly kind this time.

“I did pass… all of the combat tests… but the others…”

Dong Su pumped his fist, “I knew it! I knew it was weird when you showed up without an escort. You forged the letter from the Headmaster, didn’t you?”

“Ugh. This is appalling.” Hwang Rin rolled his eyes in disgust, putting his hands on his hips.

Sam Chul felt his stomach lurch, “I’m sorry, you guys. I only did it because I didn’t want to be held back another year.”

All three assassins groaned simultaneously. “Another year? You’ve failed twice?” Dan Ho demanded in his deep, demon like voice.

“I just wanted to get out, see what the world was like beyond the school. I’ve never been out, you know.” Sam Chul squirmed as Dan Ho’s gaze got colder.

Hwang Rin asked gravely, “Does the Headmaster know?”

“He wouldn’t be alive if she did.”

Sam Chul opened his mouth to answer but another voice interrupted, “Gentlemen! Quite late, aren’t we?”

The head courtesan greeted the men. She was a tall, beautiful woman who ran the place; managing the girls and ensuring all of the extra-curricular activities ran uninterrupted. All assassins knew and respected her.

“We’re going to deal with this later.” Dan Ho said under his breath before turning to greet the woman.

“My Lady.” The three assassins bowed. Sam Chul clumsily followed.

“I see you have someone new among you.” The courtesan eyed Sam Chul as they raised their heads.

“Yes. Very new. Fresh from the school.” Dan Ho answered calmly. But knowing what he now knew, Sam Chul could tell that Dan Ho was nervous.

“The Headmaster didn’t inform me there were four of you.”

Hwang Rin chuckled, “Perhaps the letter is enroute. Sam Chul here was a very last minute addition to our party. You know it takes three days just to get from the school to the city.”

“Yes. Quite right.” The courtesan said, seemingly satisfied with this. “Come along now. Eun Dan is getting impatient.”

“Don’t say anything in front of Eun Dan. Don’t tell her your name. Don’t even breathe. Just let us do all the talking.” Hwang Rin whispered to Sam Chul.

“I’m sorry, Hwang Rin. I just wanted to go on a mission. I didn’t think it would be a big deal.”

“Shut up. I can hear you two.” Dong Su whispered from the other side.

Quietly, they followed the head courtesan as she led them to a secluded room in the back. The wooden paneled door slid open and they all went in, Hwang Rin going in first. Sam Chul followed Dan Ho in, making sure to stay behind him. But it would be hard to hide the portly assassin-in-training. He was too wide to be hidden behind the lean and wiry Dan Ho.

“Who’s he?” Sam Chul heard a woman say as the wooden doors behind them slid shut.

Sam Chul stepped out from behind Dan Ho and looked up and realized why Hwang Rin was so in love with the woman.

She was beautiful. She glowed like moon in the night sky, reclining on the floor cushions as if she was the Queen herself. Full, petal like lips were pursed disapprovingly towards Sam Chul as large brown eyes scanned him from head to toe. Sam Chul gulped, looking down, not wanting to disrespect Hwang Rin.

“Newbie.” Dong Su answered.

“Really? Why wasn’t I informed?” Eun Dan narrowed her eyes.

“Last minute addition.” Hwang Rin said.

Eun Dan’s eyes narrowed further. “Headmaster never does anything last minute.”

“Why? You don’t trust us?” Dan Ho said. Sam Chul realized that questioning Eun Dan was smarter than giving her straight answers. It made her doubt her own suspicions. Sam Chul could see a momentary uncertainty cloud her face.

“I never said that. There is the matter of your payment, however. It decided was for the three of you.” Eun Dan reached back and opened up a drawer from the wooden chest behind her. She took out a ratty old coin purse and a folded piece of paper.

Without a word, Dan Ho took the box from Sam Chul and presented it to Eun Dan, sitting down in front of her. Everyone else followed suit, sitting with their legs folded beneath them. Without a word, Eun Dan opened the box and confirmed its contents.

The smell made Sam Chul retch and he made the mistake of looking into the box, which made him glad he hadn’t eaten anything before seeing the decaying head of the Mayor. His tongue had rolled out and was a disturbing black color. Blood had congealed where the head had been severed.

Eun Dan compared the head with a drawing on what Sam Chul realized was the contract. Satisfied, she folded up the paper again and replaced the lid on the box.

“Very good.” Eun Dan motioned for one of the servants standing in one corner. Sam Chul had failed to notice the other people in the room, having been so taken by Eun Dan. The servant took the box away and Eun Dan handed over the payment to Dan Ho. Another servant stood in the other corner, waiting diligently for orders.

“Next time, confirm the number of men in your party.” Eun Dan warned.

After a second of silence, Eun Dan motioned the other servant to leave. Now it was just the five of them.

Suddenly, she grinned. All pretense of a strict attitude melted away as she revealed her innocent smile.

“Boys, it’s been too long.”

The three seniors smiled. Sam Chul looked at them uncertainly.

“It has,” Dan Ho said, giving Eun Dan what appeared to be a smile. But that couldn’t be right. Dan Ho never smiled. “How have you been, Dan-ah?”

“Good. And how have my boys been?” She beamed at the three of them.

Hwang Rin grinned back while Dong Su chuckled, blushing. It was strange, seeing the assassins and their handler exchange pleasantries. The four of them talked casually, exchanging news and gossip before Eun Dan turned her attention to Sam Chul.

“Exactly how new is this one?” Eun Dan jerked her chin towards Sam Chul. “He doesn’t seem old enough to be in your company.”

“Ayy, don’t bully our friend here for being baby faced.” Hwang Rin said, barely managing to conceal his nervousness.

“Besides, age does not matter. Didn’t our Dan Ho start taking on missions when he was just fourteen?” Dong Su added, trying to take Eun Dan’s attention off Sam Chul.

“Dan Ho was a prodigy. The Headmaster still says there has never been a student like him.” Eun Dan said, sounding like a proud mother.

“Have you been to the Headmaster?” Dan Ho said, looking curious. Again, it was the most animated Sam Chul had seen Dan Ho. It made Sam Chul realize that Dan Ho was only ever his true self among certain people, and not even the other two assassins qualified for that. He wondered what it was about Eun Dan that made Dan Ho open up so easily.

He didn’t have to wonder too much. It was a courtesan’s job to get men to open up. The more they believed they were understood, the more they spent on their women. And certainly, the women of this brothel were skilled in this regard.

“Yes. She asked about you. You should visit the school once in a while. When you get some time off from work.”

Hwang Rin stretched his arms above his head and yawned, “Dan Ho and time off? Those are two terms you can never use in the same sentence. Dan Ho never not works.”

“Yeah. His mind is on, even when he’s sleeping.” Dong Su leaned against Dan Ho.

“Alright, alright. Enough of this.” Dan Ho said gently.

“Eun Dan-ah. Forget about this loser.” Hwang Rin leaned forward, shoving Dan Ho playfully out of the way. “Didn’t you miss me?”

Eun Dan blushed and blinked furiously. With a fan she took out of her long trailing sleeve, she smacked Hwang Rin on the head. “You idiot. You never change, do you?” She sounded angry but the furious blush on her face made it seem otherwise.

“Ah, you did.” Hwang Rin grinned, unperturbed by the hit on his head. “I missed you too.” He said quietly. Dong Su made a disgusted face as Hwang Rin looked lovingly in Eun Dan’s eyes.

“Ugh. Get a room.” Dong Su said to the two of them.

Sam Chul felt that comment was disrespectful, given Eun Dan’s profession. But Eun Dan was unbothered by it. “He’ll have to pay double if he wants my services.” She gave Hwang Rin the side eye.

“Double? Dan-ah, you break my heart.” Hwang Rin made a show of being in pain, even going so far as to clutch his chest.

“Triple. For all these disgusting lines you throw at me.” Eun Dan declared.

“Aw. And after I got this precious gift for you? How cruel you are, Dan-ah.” Hwang Rin took out the hideous mask wrapped in a pink cloth.

Eun Dan’s interest was certainly piqued. She raised a brow at the present. “You got me something?” There was a tinge of happiness in her voice. Dan Ho smiled at this.

“Yes. And it’s so precious that I had to fight for my life to get it.”

Eun Dan gave Hwang Rin a skeptical look before unwrapping the pink cloth. “Well this better be— WHY YOU LITTLE!” Hwang Rin made a run for it as Eun Dan chased him around the room. Dan Ho and Dong Su hugged each other as Eun Dan hurled the mask at Hwang Rin.

“YOU FIEND! YOU—YOU SWINE!”

Hwang Rin couldn’t stop laughing, “Looks just like you, doesn’t it.”

“From what angle do I look like a demon!” Eun Dan hurled a cushion at Hwang Rin who caught it and held it up as a shield from the other things Eun Dan sent his way.

“From this angle right here, you can certainly see the resemblance!” Hwang Rin’s head poked out from behind the cushion.

“You monster!”

Sam Chul couldn’t help but choke on laughter as the dignified Eun Dan chased Hwang Rin around in such an undignified manner. Eventually, Hwang Rin came full circle and fell on top of Dong Su and Dan Ho.

“Help! She’ll kill me.” He whispered harshly. Dan Ho immediately produced the pretty hair pin.

“I knew this would happen.” Dan Ho said wisely.

“Thanks! You always think of everything.”

As Eun Dan lunged for Hwang Rin once more, Hwang Rin got to his feet and took safety in one corner.

“W-W-W-Wait! I got you something else! I got you something else!”

“What?” Eun Dan lowered the very heavy looking wooden jewelry box she was ready to throw at Hwang Rin’s head.

Hwang Rin showed her the pretty pink pin. Eun Dan’s hands immediately lowered.

“You got this? For me?”

Hwang Rin nodded. Eun Dan looked fascinated by the pin. She took the delicate thing tentatively from Hwang Rin’s fingers. “It’s so pretty.” She said. “It’s just what I wanted.” She sucked in her lower lip.

Sam Chul looked to Dan Ho, whose eyes were fixed on Eun Dan’s expression. Sam Chul wondered whether Dan Ho really did buy the pin because he knew Eun Dan would be mad at the mask or because he wanted to buy it for her himself.

Eun Dan straightened up her skirt that had become all crumpled from the chasing. She brushed away the stray strands from her face and cleared her throat. “Thank you. This is lovely.” She put the pin in her light brown hair.

Now that this matter was settled, Hwang Rin breathed a sigh of relief. Dong Su and Dan Ho suddenly realized they were holding each other and smacked the other away in disgust. Eun Dan sat back down, touching the pin on her head to make sure it was in place.

Dan Ho suddenly whipped his head around, craning his neck. Everyone’s attention turned to him. “What is it?” Eun Dan asked.

Dan Ho blinked. “Nothing.” But he kept staring at the door.

“What?” Dong Su shoved him.

Dan Ho clicked his tongue unsurely, “I don’t know. I thought I heard...” And before he finished his sentence, Dan Ho got to his feet and unsheathed his sword. “Get up! I think there’s—”

The wooden paneled door burst open, breaking off from the frame. Eun Dan screamed and the other three assassins all took out their swords.

There were many of them. Too many. They quickly overpowered the assassins—men dressed in all red. Sam Chul didn’t even have time to process what was happening before his hands were bound behind him and his mouth gagged. He saw that the same had happened to the others.

We’re not dead, he realized. They haven’t killed us.

The assassins were all lined up against one wall in the room, with Eun Dan held apart, a sword held to her throat. “Make one move and she dies.” The man said. All assassins stood still. 

Sam Chul could see that more of the men stood outside. Sam Chul tried to count but he couldn’t see. All he could make out were shadows of men standing in the hall by the dozen. He could hear screams come from different sections of the brothel, which further added to his confusion.

A raid? An attack? Why this brothel? Why now? Sam Chul had too many questions and no answers.

Someone was coming. Their soft footsteps could be heard. From the shadows, Sam Chul saw men parting and bowing for this new person. It was this gesture that made him realize that the men who attacked them were Royal Guards, clad in red uniform with golden embroidery.

Sam Chul noticed the sleeve of the closest guard. It was a special kind of embroidery, one he had been taught to avoid at all costs. These were no ordinary Royal Guards. The four clawed dragon adorning the guards’ sleeves showed that these were guards of the highest ranking.

These were guards of the crown Prince Young Hwa.

Shadows grew longer as the footsteps came closer and as Sam Chul suspected, there stood the prince himself. He wore the same colors that Sam Chul had seen on his sister, dark purple and black. Sam Chul could also see the resemblance. Sleek black hair, cold, dead eyes and an evil smile.

“Well, well, well. If it isn’t the Shadowmen.”

The Prince held up something. Sam Chul smelled it before he saw it. The Mayor’s head, on full gory display, with the tongue hanging out and flies buzzing around it. The Prince held it up by the hair.

“Gentlemen, I believe you and I have something to discuss.”

Chapter Text

The Mayor’s head taunted the assassins, with its mouth wide open, the tongue handing out. Sam Chul’s nose crinkled in disgust, but the Prince remained unaffected. Sam Chul wondered whether this meant that the Prince was used to the presence of the dead.

They were in the Head Courtesan’s room. This was where she conducted her business and dealt with new clients. The Prince sat in her seat, lounging back like he was the Courtesan. The four assassins sat in front of him on their knees, each with their own Royal Guard keeping a sword to their neck in case they made one wrong move. None of them would dare to. Not with the Head Courtesan’s body lying beside the Prince, bleeding out and twitching.

The Prince smirked. “Imagine my surprise when I go to visit my dear cousin and learn that he had been murdered by the infamous Shadowmen. I thought you lot were only rumors started by the clansmen when they wanted to blame someone for their murders. Turns out that was only half true.” The Prince put his hand on the Mayor’s head, petting it as if it were alive.

“You lot are smart,” the Prince continued. “I’ve been searching for you for nearly a year. Chasing after every rumor, every murder, every time there was even a whiff of an assassination. I investigated every rotting body that was missing its head. That’s what you lot do, isn’t it? Take the head?” The Prince raised a brow. Dong Su gulped. Hwang Rin glared. Sam Chul shook all over. Dan Ho did nothing. He was still as a statue.

“But wherever I went, I always came up empty. You lot never left a single trace. Not even a hair.” The Prince leaned forward as he took something out of his pocket. “Until now.”

He jammed a dagger on the wooden tabletop. The assassins looked at it, wide eyed. They all turned to Sam Chul in anger. Sam Chul’s face went ashen.

It was the dagger he had thrown to help the captured villagers.

The dagger bore the mark of the assassins. The same mark that all of their rendezvous points also carried. The same mark as the brothel.

Dong Su hissed at Sam Chul as he struggled against the guard holding him. Sam Chul wished the Earth would open up and swallow him whole. How could he have been so stupid?

“I’m guessing this was you?” The Prince dislodged the dagger from the table and pointed it towards Sam Chul. None of the assassins made any movements to respond.

“Well I can see who’s the weakest link. But one of you is also smart.” The Prince took out something else from beneath his Jeonbok; a long vest with intricate embroidery. It was an arrow. Standard issue for officers and guards. There was nothing special about it. “Who shot this arrow?”

The Prince looked at the assassins one by one. Dong Su was looking down. Hwang Rin stared the Prince right back, Sam Chul was at his wits end. Only Dan Ho remained unaffected.

“Using our own arrows so that we wouldn’t be able to trace yours. You should have lent that intelligence to your friend here.” The Prince said, studying Hwang Rin, Dong Su and Dan Ho’s faces. “And setting a villager free as distraction. Quick thinking. I’m guessing the dagger was an accident.”

Sam Chul looked down in shame.

“So who was it? Was it the pretty one here?” He pointed the arrow at Hwang Rin. “No. Pretty ones are never smart. Not a matter of nature. It’s just you never have to be. How about you? The one with the clumsy look about him? No. Your eyes seem too dull. Now, how about…” The Prince smiled and pointed the arrow at Dan Ho. “You. With the angry eyes. I’m guessing you’re the shooter.”

Dan Ho lifted his chin up. “Are you here to play games or do you actually want something from us?” His deep voice shook the room.

“A man who gets to the point. How boring… Song Hwa is going to love you.” The Prince grinned, nodding his head approvingly. “Very well. Here it is. I have a job for you.” The Prince motioned for his guards. Two men entered the room, carrying a small but heavy looking box. They opened it to reveal gold coins and jewels inside, filled so high they were spilling out.

“And that’s just half your pay.”

Dan Ho spoke what the others were thinking, “You didn’t have to cause so much chaos. There are other ways we can be reached.”

“And we never decide any contracts directly.” Dong Su spoke. “The Hea—” Hwang Rin shoved Dong Su to shut up.

The Prince narrowed his snake like eyes. “You think I’m stupid enough to have my name be forever held hostage by that sly Headmaster of yours?” The shock on the assassins’ face must be evident because the Prince added. “I know all about your Headmaster. That viper pretends the assassination contracts are anonymous. But in truth, she uses that information to her advantage, bending us poor souls to her will. Unless we want our name besmirched. All your rules about impartiality and anonymity are shit. The Headmaster blackmails the people who do business with her. No. I will not have this coming back to me. You will do as I say and do it quietly. Without your Headmaster knowing.”

Dan Ho clenched his jaw. Sam Chul knew from experience that Dan Ho hated the Headmaster being disrespected. “Your information is false.” Dan Ho said calmly. “We do not blackmail any customers. Their names are simply for our own safety. To ensure that word about our existence does not get out.”

The Prince tut-tuted, “If you believe that then she has you fooled too. Along with the rest of the world. But no matter. I don’t need you to believe me. I just need you to do your job.”

“And why would we?” Hwang Rin said through clenched teeth.

The Prince laughed at his anger. “I suppose it was foolish of me to believe you would want the women here to live.” He flicked his wrist to the guards who had carried in the gold. The guards gave a swift bow and went outside.

“Wait. No.” Hwang Rin tried to move but the blade on his throat kept him in place. Outside, a scream sent shivers up everyone’s spine. But what made Sam Chul’s blood run cold was the abrupt cutting off of this scream. Someone else started screaming. A group of women, by the sound of it.

“Wasn’t one of those whores part of your little group? Eun Dan, was it?” The Prince picked at his nails, without a care in the world.

“I’ll do it! I’ll do it, just stop!”

It wasn’t Hwang Rin like Sam Chul was expecting. It was Dan Ho, looking wild and helpless. The blade near his neck was cutting into his skin. A drop of blood trickled down his throat, but he kept pushing forward. “I’ll do it. Stop killing the women.”

“Stop killing your sweet little friend, you mean? She mean something special to you?”

Dan How scowled. It was the most expressive Sam Chul had ever seen him. Having Dan Ho lose his unflinching composure meant that the four of them were in real trouble now. Sam Chul could feel the walls closing in on him.

“Bring me the heads!” The Prince shouted jarringly. The same guard returned, now carrying two heads by their long, silken, blood soaked hair. It killed Sam Chul to know he felt better seeing that neither of the two heads belonged to Eun Dan.

“There. Your friend is safe. And as long as you four do as I say, she will remain safe. Along with the rest of the women here.” The Prince assured.

“We’ll do it. Just don’t kill anyone else.” Hwang Rin said.

“I know you will.” The Prince placed both hands on the table, “Or I will slay everyone here, and everyone who has ever carried—even accidentally—the assassin’s mark.” The Prince held up the dagger with the mark to prove his point.

The guards put away their swords from the assassins’ necks. Dong Su slumped forward, gasping for breath. Sam Chul’s eyes watered.

With his nose upturned, the Prince rattled off orders, “You will be given positions among the Royal Guard for this job. You will be provided with the appropriate identities in order to do so. Mu Won will provide you with your papers and tags. I want the head. That’s your standard isn’t it? Make sure to get me the head so I know you haven’t lied to me.

“Given the nature of your target, you will have my guards at your disposal, should you need them. However, at any point if you get caught, I will have you killed. At any point if you try to run away, I will have you killed. At any point if you try to call for help from the other assassins or worse, your Headmaster, I. Will. Have. You. Killed. The whores will die too, of course. That goes without saying.”

The assassins absorbed all of this in. Dan Ho asked, “Who’s the target?”

The Prince sighed, “My sister. Princess Song Hwa.”

To everyone’s surprise, Hwang Rin burst out laughing. The Prince’s smug smirk contorted to an angry scowl. The guard behind Hwang Rin put his sword to Hwang Rin’s throat again.

“And what exactly is so funny?”

“If you think that the King’s most beloved little Princess can be killed, you’ve lost your mind.” Hwang Rin wiped a tear, unaffected by the blade being pressed to his long, swan like neck. “Ah, I think I understand why you didn’t go through the Headmaster. She wouldn’t take the contract, would she?”

The Prince clenched his jaw, “I assure you, that is not the case.”

“I bet she told you to piss off. I bet the other assassin guilds said the same. No one is foolish enough to go after the royal family. Unless they want a target on their heads.”

Dong Su leaned towards Hwang Rin. “Shut up, you idiot. You’ll get us killed.” He whispered.

 “If it’s the Princess he wants, then we’re as good as dead anyway.”

“He’s right.” Dan Ho said reasonably. “Killing the Princess means suicide. Everyone knows how much the King favors your sister. He would never let her death go. He would turn the kingdom over to hunt us down.”

The Prince’s face turned sour, “Well. If that is your answer then I suppose I shouldn’t waste my time any further.” He jerked his chin to his guards, “Kill the—”

“I never said it was impossible.” Dan Ho quickly added. “We will need more from you than just identity papers and money.”

“What more, then?” The Prince raised a brow.

“Time. We need time to ensure we can cover our tracks once the deed is done.”

“How much?”

“A month.”

“Ha! No way. Kill the—”

“You’ve asked for her head. This would have been easier if you had requested poisoning.”

“You think poisoning will kill her? It won’t. I’ve tried. That brat is like a cockroach. And she’s skilled in medicine. She works on her own remedies. She knows how to treat herself. And as a member of the royal family, she is trained to be immune to most poisons. No, I need the head.”

“Then I need a month.”

The Prince pursed his lips as he considered Dan Ho’s request. He clicked his tongue. “Al right. You four have a month. But if I don’t have her head by then…”

“We know.” Dan Ho nodded.

“And just so I know you will complete your mission, I will keep all of your lady friends here, with my guards watching them till you four return.”

Sam Chul, Hwang Rin and Dong Su looked to each other.

“We will return.” Dan Ho promised. “With the Princess’s head.”

Chapter Text

Once, when the quartet had been spying on the Mayor, Dan Ho had said, “I’m glad this Mayor is an idiot. I hate smart people.”

Sam Chul had scratched his head in confusion, since Dan Ho was always telling him to act more intelligently. “Don’t you value intelligence?”

“I do. But smart people make this job harder than it needs to be.”

Sam Chul hadn’t understood this sentiment till now.

The Prince was smart. He didn’t leave anything up to chance. The moment the assassins had agreed to kill the Princess, they had been bound, gagged and blindfolded. Some form of sedative had been put into the cloth that was used to gag them because they all passed out and woke up as they were being transported.

None of them knew how long they had been traveling, or even through what means. All they could sense was the ground shaking beneath them and then suddenly stopping. They heard people talking nearby but the sounds were too muffled to make out.

“Ack!” Dong Su screwed up his eyes as the blindfold was removed and the Sun shone right into them. “You asshole!” He yelled.

Dan Ho struggled, trying to speak, when he heard Dong Su. Hwang Rin was the next to be released. Then Dan Ho and Sam Chul.

“Alright, out you go.” A guard pulled them off of a cart one by one. They all squinted their eyes, trying to adjust to the bright sunlight.

“What time is it?”

“Where are we?”

“S-s-sir, what is going on?”

Only Dan Ho remained silent as his eyes adjusted and he tried to observe their surroundings.

“Shut up. You’ll get your answers soon. Lord Mu Won! They’re all yours!” The guard called to someone.

“Ah, my new recruits.” Again, Sam Chul smelled before he saw a tall, bulky man with beady little eyes and tanned skin. “Welcome to the royal guard. Follow me and I will give you your papers.”

Remembering Dan Ho’s advice, Sam Chul tried to scope out their surroundings. The area was plain, brown where sand was and green in patches where grass was allowed to grow. Tall, grey stoned walls with the royal flag waving on top of each pillar kept them separated from the outside. They were in some kind of training ground, Sam Chul saw to one far corner, a row of targets lined up for archery practice and another plain, sanded, ground where no doubt people learned hand to hand combat.

It reminded him of home—of his school. But this place paled in comparison. Home had lush green grounds and mountain walls with pockets of waterfalls and valleys. Home had birds chirping and wild deer running through the wood that served as walls. Home was better.

But like home, this place too bred fighters. Just for a different cause.

The assassins were escorted to a small building where they were led to baths to wash up, under supervision of course, and then taken to separate rooms to change into the typical red uniform of the royal guard. Sam Chul tried to look for a way to speak to the others but the constant presence of the Prince’s men made that impossible.

There was no way out of this. The assassins would be killing the Princess.

Guilt weighed heavy on Sam Chul, making his stomach turn in knots. This was all his fault. If he hadn’t tried helping those villagers, then they wouldn’t be in this mess. And Eun Dan and the rest of the courtesans would have been safe.

The assassins were led back to Mu Won who motioned for them to sit at the dinner table. The room was small and quiet. Cozy and inviting; had the situation not been forced upon them. A feast was laid out before them but none of them made any moves to eat. None of them could.

Guards placed papers and a jade stone tile in front of each assassin.

“Your new identities, gentlemen.” Mu Won explained. “From now on, you are nobility.”

Sam Chul touched his tile. A thin, smooth jade stone with the title Kim Sam Chul carved into it. Kim—his new last name. Last names were a privilege bestowed upon nobility for their bravery and efforts for the Kingdom, by the King himself. One did not simply walk around bearing a last name. The others had similar tiles that bore their fake last names too. Dan Ho was Park Dan Ho. Hwang Rin was Lee Hwang Rin and Dong Su was Lee Dong Su.

It had to be done. The Royal Guard was part of elite soldiers, all hailing from nobility and aristocratic families. They were highly regarded among the upper class and their families were given praise based on how much the guards proved themselves in the name of royalty.

Sam Chul flipped over the tile. Etched in gold was the same symbol he had seen on the Prince’s guards and even on the Prince’s clothes. A dragon with flames roaring out of its mouth. It meant that the assassins were part of the Prince’s party. No one would ever question the authority of someone carrying the dragon symbol. The assassins could do anything they wanted.

“I hope you all understand the seriousness of this situation. You may have gotten easily in, but getting out, might prove to be a challenge.” Mu Won said, sipping in his tea. Unlike the rest of them, Mu Won did not seem to be suffering from a loss of appetite.

Dan Ho shifted in his place, “What can you tell us about it? About the palace?”

“I can tell you one thing, the Princess’s guards won’t be the only obstacle you four will have to face. Things are never as simple as they appear. Beware of anyone that tries to befriend you before you befriend them. They most likely want something from you. Ans especially beware of anyone who appears to be selfless. They are only pretending.”

Dong Su chuckled once more. This time Dan Ho shoved him to set him straight.

“Yah, you’re telling us things we already know. Don’t trust anyone. That’s the gist of it, right?”

Mu Won studied Dong Su, tilting his head curiously. “Not a bright one are you?” His eyes flicked to Dan Ho. “But you. You have an intelligent look about you. So, I will speak to you only. The rest can simply choose to follow or choose to die.”

Dong Su frowned, offended. “It’s only a bunch of over fed brats who think too little and take too much. I think we Shadowmen can handle them.”

Mu Won narrowed his eyes to Dong Su. “Young man, I do not know what kind of world you hail from, especially to be in such a profession as yours, but I can tell you this. The politics that goes on within the palace walls is nothing that can be matched by what goes on the outside. There is no line the rich will not cross to gain power. And no matter how high you get, even if you become the King, there is no satiating that hunger.” Mu Won leaned in closer, slowly, dramatically. “I have heard rumors of the secret commandments of the assassins. You serve only money and no other power. Well, I am here to tell you that money has no meaning inside the palace. It is all about influence. And those who crave it, would go to any lengths to achieve it. So my advice to you is to keep your heads down, and not be seen.”

Mu Won leaned back, relaxing. “The more invisible you are, the better. Trust me, you do not want to get involved in the games these royalties and nobilities play.”

“We will not be getting involved with any nobility. Our work is only restricted with the Royal Guard.” Dan Ho spoke.

Mu Won smiled. “The guards are all sons of families looking to pick up the scraps the rich and powerful leave for them. You don’t think there is politics involved in the Royal Guard too? You are mistaken, young one. The guards, the maids, all of the staff, they are the sneakiest of the lot. And the most resentful. They want power, and they are so close to it that they can taste it. But they can never have it. Be careful. These people will have your back in a fight but will just as easily stab it if it means they can get a higher rank. Listen to me. Keep your head down. And don’t catch anyone’s attention.” Mu Won’s eyes flicked to Hwang Rin, “Especially the attention of any noble ladies.”

Dan Ho nodded. “Thank you. We will use your guidance.” He bowed respectfully. The others followed suit. When he sat back up he asked, “When will we be taken to the palace? We should get started as soon as possible.” Dan Ho said, the hidden implication being that the sooner they started, the sooner this nightmare would end.

Mu Won chuckled, “Young man, you are already in the Palace.”

Dan Ho down contemplatively. Sam Chul could see the cogs turning in his mind. His head quickly shot up once he came to a conclusion. “Only two of us will go in as guards.”

“What?” Mu Won and Dong Su said at the same time, one in surprise, the other in protest.

“Why?” Mu Won raised a quizzical brow.

“You can’t be serious.”

“I am,” Dan Ho said to Dong Su before facing Mu Won, “One of us is a trainee. The other lacks finesse,” Dong Su huffed, knowing Dan Ho was talking about him, “it might create complications. This needs to be done with a swift, surgical hand. With as little intrusion as possible. It’s better if only two of us go.”

Mu Won thought about this. “The Prince has agreed to this?”

“The Prince only wants his sister dead. He made no demands about our methods beyond bringing in her head.”

Mu Won made a series of clicks with his tongue as he considered. “Fine. I’ll arrange for the other two to have accommodations outside the palace.”

“And clothing to blend into the capital. I will need them to gather intel for me from the outside.”

“Why the outside?”

Dan Ho hesitated, “To cover all our bases. Don’t want the Princess escaping now, do we?” And to ensure that they were able to escape. Dan Ho didn’t need to say that part for the assassins to understand.

Mu Won nodded, seemingly satisfied. “All will be arranged. Which two of you will go?”

Dan Ho looked to all of them before speaking. “Hwang Rin and I.”

~~~~~~~~~~~~~

Sam Chul couldn’t help but wonder, why it was that Dan Ho chose to keep Sam Chul out of the palace walls. The action stung, exacerbating his already growing guilt.

“I know what you’re thinking.” Dan Ho told him quietly as the assassins were given a few moments alone before they split up. “But I chose you and Dong Su to stay out to keep you two safe.”

Lies. He’s only saying that to make me feel better. Sam Chul thought as he prepared to say goodbye to Dan Ho and Hwang Rin.

“I’m not saying that just to make you feel better. I mean it. This is better if its just a few of us.”

“And besides,” Hwang Rin added, “we’ll need to you to help us get out when it’s all over.”

“You know what to do?” Dan Ho asked Dong Su. Dong Su just nodded quietly.

“This is a suicide mission.” Sam Chul said bitterly.

“I know.” Dan Ho bit his lower lip. “It’s better if the damage is limited to just us.” He pointed to himself and Hwang Rin.

“We’re the most senior, aren’t we? We should do at least this much.” Hwang Rin smiled but it didn’t reach his eyes. The terms senior in the assassin’s world did not mean age. It represented the person with the most kills. Sam Chul felt like crying.

“This isn’t your fault.” Dan Ho assured. Dong Su scoffed audibly and rolled his eyes but Dan Ho ignored him. “What’s happened has happened. Just look to making the most of what we have.” Dan Ho wrapped his arms around Sam Chul. Covertly, he whispered, “Try to get in touch with the Headmaster.”

With that, the two assassins parted to join the Royal Guard.

“Stay safe!” Dong Su and Sam Chul said together as the guards escorted Dan Ho and Hwang Rin to their horses.

Sam Chul watched the two ride off into the distance till they were just two dots in the horizon of the palace grounds. It would be a while when Sam Chul would meet Dan Ho again. But in a way, Sam Chul would never meet him again. Sam Chul never got the chance to learn what exactly transpired on this mission, but he did know this. That it changed Dan Ho forever. It changed all of their lives.

END OF PART 1

Chapter Text

Part 2

Dan Ho knew himself to be a stoic person. That meant that anyone who met him felt he was emotionless. However, that wasn’t true. He was just good at hiding what he felt. His fear was hidden behind a mask of bravado, his uncertainly behind an air of confidence, his insecurities behind a false smirk and his anger behind stone, cold, calmness.

Dan Ho felt anxious. And he knew why he felt so. They were going in blind. Normally the assassins would scope out every inch of the places their target would visit and plan out every move before they even thought about whether infiltration was the way to go or not. But this situation, this sudden assignment into the Royal Guard had been thrust upon them without a second thought and Dan Ho didn’t like it. He didn’t like not knowing exactly what he had gotten himself into.

This turmoil however, was undetectable on his stony composure. The guards escorting them tried to sneak looks at him as they led the two assassins to their sleeping quarters, and they were always surprised by how impenetrable his face looked. Only Heaven could tell what went on in Dan Ho’s mind.

Heaven wasn’t the only one with this knowledge. There were two people in the world could ever tell what Dan Ho was truly feeling. One of them had been captured by the Prince’s men. The other was her lover, and Dan Ho’s best friend, who looked just as worried as he felt.

“I don’t suppose you have a way of getting out of this?” Hwang Rin whispered beside him.

“I’ve been working out every scenario.” Dan Ho admitted in a low voice. “Things don’t look good.” This was Dan Ho’s way of saying there was no way to avoid their task.

Hwang Rin gulped nervously. “That damn newbie…”

“I don’t understand how Sam Chul was able to leave the school without passing. The exit is only known to graduates. No one else knows how to get out of the school.”

“Me neither. Do you think the Headmaster’s caught on?”

“She must have by now.”

“Isn’t that good for us? If she comes looking for Sam Chul she might find us.”

“Maybe…” Dan Ho trailed off. “Rin-ah… I’ve been thinking, what happens if we do complete this mission and somehow manage to come out alive?”

“You’re talking about the impossible.”

“But what if we do?”

Hwang Rin sighed. “I don’t think the Headmaster will be pleased that we took on a contract without her approval.”

“Pleased? She’s going to kill us.”

“Us. Not you. You’re her favorite, remember?”

Dan Ho clicked his tongue, “Headmaster doesn’t bend the rules for anyone. Not even me.”

“So, what do you suggest we do? We don’t do this, we die. We do, do this, we die.”

“I’m still working on it.”

Their escort guards suddenly came to a halt. The assassins realized they were in the stable area where the war horses were kept. The guards stood on attention, saluting to someone approaching. Dan Ho and Hwang Rin mimicked the gesture.

“What’s the meaning of this?” The man said. He had on dark indigo clothing, representing high status and wealth. Dull, gold embroidery lined his long vest. His long hair was tied up in a half bun.

“New recruits. The Prince thought the Princess might need more men since you’re traveling through the Abandoned Lands.” One of the guards stepped forward and gave the man a letter. The man gave it a quick read.

“We have enough men. Tell Mu Won I don’t need new trainees.” The man handed the letter back.

“I’m afraid that’s not up to you, Captain Chung Myung. Nor Mu Won. It’s the Prince’s orders.”

Dan Ho and Hwang Rin blinked. They were standing in front of the Captain of the Guard: Go Chung Myung. A man the assassins avoided at all costs. A man who could have them arrested and thrown in jail—if he knew their real identities.

Chung Myung cursed under his breath. “Has the Prince ever heard of too many cooks spoiling the broth?” The Captain eyed Hwang Rin and Dan Ho. It felt jarring to have their faces be revealed to the Captain in such a casual way. After hiding in the shadows all their lives, the assassins were now out in broad daylight. And Dan Ho didn’t like it.

“Fine. Position these two in the left flank. We leave in an hour.”

When Chung Myung left, Dan Ho grabbed the guard by his sleeve, “I thought we were supposed to keep our head down.”

“You are.” The man shoved his hand away.

“Then what’s the meaning of this? We just got here, and we’re already being sent off on an expedition.” Hwang Rin demanded.

“Relax.” The other guard said. “This is part of the plan.”

Dan Ho grabbed the first guard’s collar. “And what plan is that?”

“I don’t know. Ask the Prince. I only do as I’m told.” The guard wasn’t able to shove Dan Ho away this time. His grip was too tight.

“Listen here. I don’t like being played like some pawn. If the Prince wants me to participate in his stupid plans, he has to tell me what the hell is going on.”

Hwang Rin put a calming hand on Dan Ho’s arm, “Let him go. He doesn’t know anything.”

With great effort, Dan Ho let the guard go. The two guards backed away, leaving Dan Ho and Hwang Rin to figure out their positions.

“What the hell is that royal ass doing?” Dan Ho wondered out loud.

“I dunno. Maybe giving us a chance to get this job done as quickly as possible. Whatever it is, keep your head down.”

Dan Ho and Hwang Rin joined up a line from where they received their weapons. A bow and arrow set and a standard issue sword. Two daggers and a knife.

Dan Ho looked at his sword glumly, “I miss my blade.” He grumbled to Hwang Rin.

“I miss my bow.” Hwang Rin grumbled back. The Prince had been quick to remove their weapons back at the brothel house. Dan Ho and Hwang Rin wondered if they would ever get to see them again. Dan Ho in particular was very attached to his sword, given that it had been gifted to him by the Headmaster upon graduating.

The assassins joined the other guards on the left side of a palanquin—for the Princess and her companions—and the rows of carts carrying food and supplies. Their distinct faces earned them some sideways glances but no one took much notice of them.

“Everyone. I want your attention.” Captain Chung Myung stood at front, on top of a platform. He had his armor on now and a headband that carried his clan’s sigil. He announced their itinerary, a simple journey to visit someone named General Ahn. The name sounded familiar to Dan Ho, but he couldn’t quite place the memory. “We will be taking the route through the Abandoned Lands. As we all know, the bandits reside in those parts. And they tend not to be kind to traveling passengers. So we be vigilant and be ready. We might face some trouble.”

“Attention! Princess Song Hwa is arriving!” Someone else announced. The Captain immediately descended the platform swiftly. Everyone else got into attention position, with their backs taut and eyes and ears on high alert.

Dan Ho and Hwang Rin stood on the wrong side of the palanquins so they could not see the Princess arrive with her entourage from the other side. But Dan Ho was stationed right by the palanquin window. He could feel the palanquin shake a little when the Princess got on. The window had the curtains drawn but the light shining through revealed the opaque shapes of two women inside.

Dan Ho held his breath as he thought about it: pulling away the curtain and slitting the Princess’s throat right then and there. The openings between the palanquin window’s design would give him enough room to do so. She was just a hand’s reach away, and none the wiser about what kind of a man stood right outside. And the guards would never see it coming. He and Hwang Rin could escape and that would be the end of it.

But Dan Ho couldn’t let wishful thinking get to him so easily. This wasn’t a rational plan. And it wouldn’t work. The Captain had seen their faces. Sketches of them would be plastered all over the kingdom by the next morning. A bounty would be set on their heads and their guild might come under jeopardy.

No, Dan Ho had to do this job seamlessly, so that no trace could be left of him and the other Shadowmen. He had to do this the right way. If only he could figure out what it was.

Their journey began, with Chung Myung leading the pack. As they had witnessed before in the capital city, the procession moved at a snail’s pace, nearly crawling through the roads and stopping every now and then to give their horses a rest and to replenish their water supply.

Dan Ho and Hwang Rin found themselves getting bored. As did the other guards, Dan Ho noticed. Many of them already knew each other and moved their horses closer to chat and gossip. Dan Ho overheard many interesting things this way. He learned that many of the men were jealous of Captain Chung Myung and the fact that most ladies swooned over him. He learned that the guards were afraid of Princess Song Hwa because she had a reputation to lash out unexpectedly. And, most importantly, he learned that tensions were brewing between the king and his council, the reasons why were not discussed by the guards.

The procession passed through the lush green lands of the capital, through the stony lanes of the neighboring city and through deep hills that opened towards the Abandoned Lands.

The Abandoned Lands were a patch of rocky, desert area. Nothing of value grew here and no one would be able to survive the heat and lack of water. Only the banished Bandit Clans resided in these rocks and they often survived on stolen loot from unsuspecting travelers.

The troop made their way through the winding path of the Abandoned Lands and so far, nothing seemed out of place. Perhaps the Bandits were smart enough not to earn the ire of a royal who might send the cavalry after them if they dared attack.

Feeling quite underwhelmed by the uneventful journey so far, Dan Ho pulled his horse up next to Hwang Rin who was nearly asleep. “I’ve been wondering--”

Hwang Rin jumped, “Wah! Huh? What?” He said, clutching his chest in case his heart fell out. Dan Ho steadied the man.

“I’ve been wondering, why does the Prince want the Princess… you know.” Dan Ho didn’t dare say anything that might allude to the assassination, in case anyone did manage to overhear their hushed voices.

“I dunno. Why does anyone want anyone dead? Money, hate, lust, revenge, jealousy. Take your pick.”

“The Prince has no want for money. No reason to hate his sister—”

“I could name a few. Remember how she was in the capital market?”

“—I doubt he lusts after her. And if its revenge, then revenge for what? And if not that, then what is he jealous of?”

“Why not ask him? And while you’re doing so, you can tell him to piss off and find someone else to do this dirty job for him.”

Dan Ho shoved Hwang Rin away, making Hwang Rin almost fall off his horse. He was no use when he was this cranky.

“Look, wondering about things like these won’t do you any good. Let’s just keep it simple and do what needs to be done.”

Dan Ho exhaled loudly. “I just want to know what it is we have gotten ourselves into. I don’t like playing into someone else’s scheme.”

Hwang Rin grinned. He knew how much Dan Ho preferred to run schemes of his own. He put an arm around Dan Ho. “Don’t worry, old friend. Once this is over, I’ll hire you, to put that git Prince in his place.”

Dan Ho would have grinned back at his friend, except right at that moment, an arrow came flying through the air and hit the palanquin, barely missing Dan Ho by an inch. A second arrow followed right after and instinctively, Dan Ho caught it with his bare hand as it was about to hit him squarely in the chest.

Someone shouted, “It’s the bandits!” and that led to everything erupting in chaos.

More arrows flew through the air, hitting some guards and the servants that traveled with them. The sound of racing horses sounded as the bandits descended upon the procession from all sides. The guards simultaneously unsheathed their sword, ready for battle.

Swords clanged the instant the bandit riders clashed with the guards. The servants ran for cover, panicking and screaming while the guards tried to keep them out of harm’s way.

Dan Ho broke the arrow in his hand in half, unsheathing his own sword. Beside him, Hwang Rin was already shooting arrows. He had killed five bandits at this point.

“Dan Ho, what do we do?” Hwang Rin turned to his friend for orders.

“Pretend we’re guards and keep shooting!”

The palanquin curtain flew to one side as the Princess and her companion peered through. Dan Ho only caught a glimpse of her worried face as he was attacked from behind by a man trying to get to the Princess.

Both ladies gasped as Dan Ho made swift motions to kill the man instantly. Dan Ho moved to cover for Hwang Rin who was taking down bandits left and right with his arrows.

“I’m running out.” Hwang Rin suddenly declared, shooting the last of three arrows.

Dan Ho moved to get more from the man he had taken down. He turned over the man to unbuckle the quiver when he noticed something odd.

“Rin.” Dan Ho called to the fellow assassin.

“What?” Hwang Rin came over, having shot the last of his arrows.

“The Bandit clans are the impoverished exiles, right? Surviving on scraps of the desert?”

“What’s your point?”

“Have you ever seen such a plump bandit?”

Indeed, the man laying dead on the ground had full cheeks and a round belly.

“He’s fat.” Hwang Rin said, catching his breath, “So what?”

“Look at his clothes.” Dan Ho pointed. Indeed, now that Hwang Rin looked at the man, he could see that the clothes weren’t really tattered. They were torn, deliberately. And the complexion of the man too revealed that he hadn’t been out in the sun much. He wasn’t tan enough and his skin not worn enough.

“This isn’t a bandit.” Dan Ho said quietly.

The pair looked around at the bandits and guards fighting each other. None of the bandits seemed malnourished in the slightest nor did they appear as scrappy as a lot of peasantry did. They all seemed to be bulky and hefty, fighting with brute strength, and appearing to be winning against the guards.

“What do you think this is?”

“I think this is the Prince. Remember, the guard said this was part of his plan.”

“Are we to do the deed now, then?”

An arrow whipped through the air, aiming again for the palanquin. Dan Ho sliced it in half with his sword. He looked around, sizing up the situation. There were too many witnesses. Too many variables to calculate. And something about this whole ambush didn’t sit well with Dan Ho.

“No. My instinct says to lay low.”

“Chung Myung!” Came a woman’s voice. Both assassins turned back to see the Princess looking out of the palanquin window in grave concern. They both turned to her line of sight.

The Captain of the guard was shouting orders from the front, all the while fighting off the bandits left and right. The guard who had been covering the Chung Myung’s back was taken down by an arrow. Another arrow came straight for Chung Myung’s head but he swiftly sliced through it.

Without thinking, Hwang Rin took aim and launched an arrow towards the direction in the mountains where he felt the shooter was stationed. Fortune smiled on Hwang Rin, as a man did indeed fell from the rocks the moment his arrow made contact.

The Captain sent an approving nod to Hwang Rin before being taken down by a man running up behind him. Dan Ho’s instinct was to run to the Captain, but someone beat him to it.

“Go Chung Myung!” The same female voice sounded as the Palanquin door flew open. The Princess, in all her pink, silken luxury, ran out. Her hair whipping behind her as she unsheathed a small sword, made to be handled by a woman. Her companion shouted after her to stop but there was no stopping her. Dan Ho and Hwang Rin both watched with their jaws hanging and the Princess ran to the Captain of the Guard.

“She’ll die.” Hwang Rin stated the obvious. “Do we let her?”

Dan Ho saw the Princess clumsily try to stab the man about to strike the Captain. The Captain swiftly moved out of the way and took the man down from the front while Princess Song Hwa attacked him from behind.

“Get back in the palanquin!” Chung Myung shouted.

“I’m not leaving you!” The Princess declared.

“Dan Ho? Do we let her?” Hwang Rin repeated.

Dan Ho looked at Hwang Rin and looked back at the situation. The Princess was exposed for danger. She could be easily killed. No one would suspect a stray arrow that may hit her from the side. And Hwang Rin was fast enough to shoot without being noticed. Dan Ho could later retrieve her head and the job would still be done.

In all essence, this was the perfect opportunity. But something still nagged at Dan Ho. Something about this felt a little too convenient.

“No.” He told Hwang Rin and made a run for the Princess.

“Go back, Song Hwa!” The Captain was yelling. Dan Ho made note of that informal manner of address. But it was something he would ponder on later. For now, he made a quick grab for Song Hwa’s wrist, which was surprisingly thick. Not at all dainty like most ladies. Before Song Hwa could react, Dan Ho was dragging her back to the safety of the palanquin.

The Captain gave Dan Ho a brief nod of approval before returning to the fight.

“What the hell are you doing? Who are you to touch me?” The Princess yelled in his ear, dragging him back. Dan Ho made no response, instead, picking up the Princess in his arms. The Princess’s eyes went wide in shock. She gasped but said nothing, too stunned for words.

 “If you’re going to act like an idiot, do it when I’m not around.” He scolded. 

“How dare you address your Princess in such a manner!” The Princess sounded most scandalized.

“Shut up.”

The Princess was so shaken, that she just gaped at him as Dan Ho deposited her back into the palanquin.

“Stay here and don’t cause trouble.” He pointed a finger at her. “I’m leaving you in charge.” He said to her companion and closed the palanquin door shut.

“Rin! Guide the archers about where to hit.” Dan Ho shouted to Hwang Rin who nodded back and ran to the royal archers. Dan Ho himself fought off the bandits as he made his way back to the Captain.

Dan Ho saved the man just as two of them managed to disarm him. Dan Ho stabbed one in the back while the Captain retrieved his sword to finish off the other.

Chung Myung turned to Dan Ho and gave him a smile of gratitude. “You’re handy with a sword.”

“Thanks.”

The two made short work of the bandits who fell one by one. Knowing that the Captain would not be used to his rapid pace, Dan Ho instead matched the Captain’s style and provided him cover wherever he needed it. And with Hwang Rin helping the guards take down the bandit archers, the fight quickly turned in their favor. Soon the bandits were retreating, scrambling to save the lives of what little of them remained.

Just as it had begun, the fight was over. The guards captured the injured bandits, tying them up to take them as prisoners. The dead bandits were pushed aside to clear the way.

“We go back!” was the command passed down the line. “The journey has been cancelled.”

Indeed, with many of the guards and servants injured and dead, it would be impossible for the procession to continue. Dan Ho was grateful. The fight had taken a toll on his energy.

Exhausted and panting, Dan Ho slumped down on his knees, trying to catch his breath. A hand thrust itself in his face, an offering of help. He looked up to the sweating Captain, who was grinning at him.

“Great work today, newbie.” The Captain helped him stand back up. “What was your name again?”

It again bothered Dan Ho, that the man could see his face so openly. “Da—Park Dan ho.” Dan Ho stammered. “My name is Park Dan Ho.”

The Captain nodded and clapped Dan Ho on the back. “Welcome to the guard, Dan Ho!”

At the back, Hwang Rin was getting a similar welcome. The archers clapped his back and yelped about how much he had helped them.

For the second time, the palanquin door flew open. No one worried about the Princess this time. The bandits were long gone. And even if they weren’t, no one would ever dare come in the Princess’s path. Not after seeing that angered look on her face, and her determined stalk as she made her way to Dan Ho.

Smack! The slap rang loud through the rocky mountains. Everyone became deadly silent. The only sound that could be heard were the birds up above the sky, looking for carrion.

Dan Ho felt the sting on his cheek. The impact stunned him, not just because it came out of nowhere, but because of the sheer force of it. Most women he met were delicate creatures. But this Princess was no dainty thing.

She raised her hand again, to slap him in the face a second time. Dan Ho caught her hand midair, glaring at her. He kept his tongue silent, clenching his jaw to maintain control over his anger.

“Wha—Wh—What are you doing, Song Hwa?” The Captain asked, too stunned for words.

The Princess ignored the Captain. “You touch me like that again, and I will chop your head off. I’ll chop it off myself.” She spat the words out.

Dan Ho pulled her closer, because he didn’t want the Captain to hear what he wanted to say. The Princess gasped, a little shocked by the intrusion of her personal space.

She smelled distinctly of jasmine. No doubt she bathed in it. Her hair had come loose when she had ran to save the Captain previously, so it framed her face messily with stray strands flying about. Sam Chul had briefly mentioned about how unpretty the Princess was. And Dan Ho felt like agreeing. Her eyes were cold and dead, her nostrils perpetually flared in anger and her mouth, an arrogant line curled up in disdain.

“When someone saves your life,” Dan Ho said, low and deep and condescending, “you thank them instead of punishing them.”

The statement was simple. But it angered the Princess even further. She raised her other hand but the Captain shouted, “Princess! Calm yourself!”

The Princess shook, as if coming out of a trance. She looked at the Captain, her expression changing from anger to shame. She lowered her hand, pulling away the one Dan Ho was holding.

“He acted out of turn.” She said to Chung Myung.

“He saved your life, Princess. I would have done the same.” The Captain defended.

Apparently, that was all it took to settle the Princess. Her anger seemed to dissipate as her shoulders sagged and she pressed her lips tightly together. She threw a brief glance at Dan Ho before stalking back to her palanquin, with her tail tucked between her legs. She didn’t say a single word to anyone.

The Captain shouted orders for all of the guards to check what had been damaged and what could still be used among their supplies. The injured servants were all checked out. The Princess’s companion descended from the palanquin to provide treatment to everyone. She seemed to have good knowledge on medicine.

“The Princess taught me.” She explained as she patched up the cut Hwang Rin received from a stray arrow. “And she’s the best doctor in the kingdom. Even the palace physicians come to her for advice.”

Dan Ho was in no mood to hear praises of that spoilt, selfish Princess so he separated himself from the group and helped the guards gather everything. Dan Ho had managed to avoid getting any injuries, but the slap on his face still stung. He was sure one part of his face was bright red, and that made him seethe.

By nightfall, the procession was ready to return to the palace. And by daybreak they had made their way safely back, much to the shock of the palace guards who were not expecting such a quick return and at such an odd hour.

“Dan Ho.” The Captain stopped the assassin as the guards began to retire to their bunk beds. “Come meet me tomorrow. I want to discuss your position here.” Dan Ho noticed some of the palace guards throw scathing looks his way as the Captain said this.

“Why?” Dan Ho asked, his voice gravelly from exhaustion.

“Just come. Bring the other one too. The archer.”

Dan Ho informed Hwang Rin of this invitation when he managed to catch up with him.

“Why?” Hwang Rin had the same question.

“I don’t know.” Dan Ho said, watching carefully as the guards threw glances their way, while trying to appear as if they weren’t watching. A few of them whispered to each other as the assassins passed them by. “Rin, do you remember how Mu Won said to keep our heads down? I have a feeling that might not be possible anymore.”

Chapter Text

Not much could shake an assassin. They were the monsters that went bump in the night. The shadows that children ran away from. The tales that men feared. But standing in front of the King, facing the entire upper echelon of the court, Dan Ho and Hwang Rin shivered like street dogs in the winter rain.

To be accurate, they weren’t facing the King directly. The two pretenders were stationed to the side while the Captain addressed the court. The seven Princes and Princesses, elder children of the king, sat beside their father on either side. Song Hwa and Young Hwa sat nearest. A sign not only of their higher rank, but also of their inheritance. The crown prince always sat by the King, to his left while the princess sat by the Queen.

The Queen was presently absent. As she normally was for such proceedings. Dan Ho was happy with this. Queen Yoo was known to be quite shrewd and cunning. Rumor had it that she was the reason the previous Queen, Princess Song Hwa and Prince Young Hwa’s mother, died so young.

The King was questioning the Captain, getting all of the details of the attack the Princess’s party had faced in the Abandoned Lands. Dan Ho felt a surge of respect for Chung Myung as he calmly faced the King without any hesitation.

“It appears that the Bandit Clans are getting stronger,” one of the State Councilors said after the Captain had finished his recount.

“Yes,” agreed another Councilor. “I believe they might be raiding our weapons reserve.”

“With all due respect, my Lords,” Chung Myung interjected. “These men seemed far better trained than any Bandit I have come across. They may be dressed like bandits, but I--”

The Council laughed. “Boy, you defend the Bandits?”

“In front of your King?”

“Did you lose your brain in the Abandoned Lands?”

The King himself leaned forward and with just this simple gesture the Council silenced immediately. His voice was as ordinary as his appearance. But the hard lines of his face and the cold gaze gave Dan Ho shivers. As an assassin, Dan Ho could tell apart people who had taken a life from people who had never hurt a fly. And just from the side, Dan Ho could tell, that the King was someone used to dealing in death.

“Chung Myung, my boy. Do you dare defend the Bandits that killed your previous King? My best friend. My sworn brother and his entire family? You dare defend the banished clans in our court?” His voice was strangely soft yet cold. Tempered yet firm. It was the voice of a man who was in full control of himself and the people around him.

Chung Myung didn’t miss a beat and bowed, “Your Highness, My Lords, I meant no disrespect. I was simply reporting what I had observed.”

To Dan Ho’s surprise, Princess Song Hwa spoke. “Perhaps we should listen to him, Your Highness. He may have some justified concerns.”

“I don’t see why we should listen to a lowly guard.” Prince Young Hwa clicked his tongue.

The Princess cast a loaded glance at her brother. “Perhaps he might be able to help us discover why such an unusual attack occurred on my party.” She said in a measured tone.

The King leaned back slightly. His snake like eyes observing the Princess and then the Captain of the guard. “Raise your head. Tell me of your concerns.”

Chung Myung stood straight. “The men appeared too practiced with the sword. From what I have encountered of the Bandits, and you may know Your Highness that I have captured many, they mostly rely on they knowledge of the mountains and their ability to fight in the dark. They never attack in open light and mostly survive on stolen supplies. They are not people who can afford the artillery we saw yesterday.”

The King rubbed his chin. “My son.” He called to Prince Young Hwa. “I want you to look into this.”

The Prince lowered his head in acceptance. “I accept your order, Your Highness.”

The Princess spoke up, “But Your Highness, Chung Myung is the one—”

“I do not recall asking for your opinion, daughter.” The King cut Song Hwa off abruptly. “Your brother is more than capable of investigating into this attack. If someone out there is foolish enough to think they can harm my family, then Young Hwa will teach them a lesson.”

The Princess bit her lower lip and only bowed in assent.

 “Now, bring forth the men who saved my daughter’s life today.” The King’s tone became lighter.

Dan Ho panicked. He could tell Hwang Rin felt the same as the assassin bumped shoulders with him. Neither man spoke, not even in whisper, lest they draw attention towards themselves.

This was the worst outcome possible. For anyone else, this would be a moment of pride. But for the assassins, it was death. The entire council would now see Dan Ho and Hwang Rin’s face and their identities would no longer remain hidden in the shadows. This would considerably complicate things not just for this job, but for their entire lives.

“Why single out but a few men, Your Highness?” The Prince spoke out of turn, “They are all Chung Myung’s men. And they would not have been able to save the Princess had it not been for his leadership.”

The King’s attention went to Chung Myung again. Dan Ho let out a breath he didn’t know he had been holding.

The Princess scoffed, “Weren’t we just discussing how Chung Myung was a betrayer but a second ago? Simply because he spoke his opinion on the Bandits?”

“That was then, sister. This is now. I believe we should honor our Captain, for his bravery and leadership, even if he needs to learn how to hold his tongue.”

The Princess narrowed her eyes but said nothing.

“My Prince, if I may. These guards were the ones who turned the tide in our favor. We were outnumbered and disadvantaged. It was the archery skills of Lee Hwang Rin that helped snipe off the enemy’s archers, and it was Park Dan Ho’s swordsmanship that saved the Princess herself from direct attacks. I believe their valor should be acknowledged.”

On any other day, under any other circumstance, Dan Ho would have admired the Captain for giving credit to them instead of taking it all for himself. But given that his anonymity was currently in jeopardy, Dan Ho was inwardly cursing toward the noble Captain.

Take the credit, you fool. Quit being so honorable!

“My, my. Such honor. I now understand why my sister favors you so.” The Prince said tauntingly. Dan Ho felt the air in the room become tense. He noticed the King’s eyes harden and the Prince himself realize he had crossed some invisible line. The Prince cleared his throat. “I meant. I see your value, as the rest of my family does.”

So, the Princess favors the Captain. And the King doesn’t like it, he thought, putting that nugget of information away for later use.

“I heard there was another incident. One involving disrespect towards the Princess.” The King said.

The Captain threw a nervous glance back to Dan Ho who caught it and returned an equally nervous look.

“I can see you know what I am referring to.” The King said knowingly. “So it is true then? Your guard laid a hand on my daughter and dragged her away like a disobedient child?”

The King’s tone was dangerous. Dan Ho held his breath, as if the executioner’s sword would fall on his head any second. It was only now, that the Princess looked Dan Ho’s way. She had been decidedly ignoring him throughout this meeting. Even from a distance, Dan Ho could see the smugness on her face. The pure satisfaction of knowing that she had more power than him in every capacity.

Chung Myung responded carefully, “Yes, Your Highness. You heard correctly. However, it was for the Princess’s own good. She had stepped out into open ground. She could have been gravely injured had she not been escorted to safety.”

“Does the Princess agree with this sentiment?”

Dan Ho felt the Princess’s eyes on her, boring into him, challenging him, mocking him. He wasn’t quite sure, but he felt she was smirking. Oh, what he would give to wipe that smirk off her pompous, ugly face.

“No, Your Highness,” Chung Myung replied with resignation, “she did not.”

The King took in a deep breath. Dan Ho felt Hwang Rin shift beside him. This was it. This was their end. Dan Ho sent out a prayer to whoever was listening and hoped that whatever waited him on the other side wasn’t as painful as many had made it seem.

“Well done!” The King laughed.

Dan Ho and Hwang Rin’s eyes nearly fell out of their sockets as the King guffawed heartily. The Princess carried a similar expression as did nearly half the court.

“Well done! This brat needs a telling off now and again. Good job, Chung Myung! I am pleased to know that I have men who are willing to go even against their masters in order to serve them.”

“Father, you cannot be serious.” Song Hwa appealed. “I was humiliated. In front of all my servants.”

The King’s mirth simmered a bit, “Cut their heads off, if they speak ill of my daughter.” He ordered—a bit too casually—to the court. To his daughter he said, “But my child, had it not been for that guard, I would not have you still, by my side.”

“But, Your Highness—”

“Silence!” The King’s tone turned harsh. The Princess’s fingers shriveled into a tight fist. The King addressed the court, “This is why women are unfit to lead. They are foolish in their judgement and only think of fickle things. That is why I have conferred with my son on this matter at length. He has come up with a wise decision on this matter, one that I wholly agree with. Chung Myung, your men did a service to my Kingdom in saving my daughter. Whoever it was who went against her…” The King paused. Dan Ho held his breath, not sure of what this unpredictable King would say next.

“Appoint him as her personal guard.”

“But Father!” The Princess stood up in protest. A few of the Councilors gasped in surprise.

Even Chung Myung’s brows shot up, “Sire?”

“You heard me. Appoint that man as her personal guard. From this day onwards, he is personally responsible for the Princess Song Hwa’s life.”

Dan Ho’s eyes met the Prince’s. With just a flick of his brow, the Prince confirmed Dan Ho’s suspicions. The attack had not been by the Bandit clan. It was by the Prince’s own men. The Prince knew that the assassins were far better skilled than any of the Royal Guard. He knew they would stand out in that situation.

This was all a set up to get the assassins near Song Hwa.

The fuss created by the King’s announcement raised enough noise for Hwang Rin to whisper to Dan Ho. “Shit. That bastard is smart.”

“Hwang Rin… I think we are in way over our heads with this one.”

Hwang Rin turned to Dan Ho in worry but wasn’t able to speak.

“I will call this council to an end.” The King stood up, not listening to the protests of his daughter. Princess’s Song Hwa’s pleas went unheard as the Councilors gathered around the King to discuss the Bandit situation.

Dan Ho and Hwang Rin were led outside by Chung Myung as everyone dispersed. The assassins followed the Captain silently through the wooden floored corridor.

“Congratulations.”

The three turned around to find the Prince standing alone behind them. He looked at Dan Ho but addressed Chung Myung.

“Your men have been trained well.” The Prince said.

“Apologies my Prince but these two are your men.” Chung Myung stated. “They happened to be assigned to the Princess’s party that day.”

“Of course. And as I said,” the Prince eyed the two, “they’ve been trained well.” Seeing Chung Myung’s serious face, the Prince rolled his eyes, “Funny how my men are always just a bit better than yours.”

Chung Myung’s mouth became a straight, unimpressed line but he said nothing. The man was wise enough to know which battles to ignore. Dan Ho decided he liked the Captain.

“Is there anything else, my Prince?”

“No. As long as the guards know their duty… their job, I have nothing more to add.”

Dan Ho was in a daze the entire way to the guard training ground. He could hear Chung Myung say something to them, something about duties and honor. He could hear Hwang Rin respond to him when Dan Ho didn’t. But none of the words registered with him.

It was only when he heard the whoosh of an arrow heading his way that he snapped to attention. With its trajectory, it wouldn’t have hit him, but it was close enough to shock.Out of reflex, he caught the arrow midair. Oohs and aahs came from left and right. Dan Ho became very aware of the hundreds of eyes that were watching him. Frustrated, he snapped the arrow in half.

“Are you out of your mind?!” He heard Chung Myung shout. Was it at him? No. Dan Ho noticed Chung Myung facing two men who were sauntering towards them like they owned the grounds. They wore the same guard uniforms as him. Once of them had a bow in his hand.

“Apologies, my Captain. I missed.”

“Yeah, right. You’re lucky if I don’t report you to Mu Won.” Chung Myung glared at the man.

“And what can Mu Won do? Do you not know which clan we belong to?” The other man said.

“Hey, hey. Knock it off.” Another guard came over. “Sorry Chung Myung. We were practicing.”

Chung Myung appeared to let it go. The shooter of the arrow still in Dan Ho’s hand eyed the two assassins. Dan Ho had a feeling this wasn’t actually an accident.

“Come on. We should get you two settled in.” Chung Myung said, leading the pretenders to their sleeping areas.

“You okay?” Hwang Rin asked quietly.

“No. I need some time to figure things out.” Dan Ho’s brain was going haywire. Too many things were happening at once. He needed a moment to find his bearings and figure out his next move. If only he could have some time to do so.

“Well figure it out fast. I don’t think we’ll be getting any recon time like the usual jobs.”

“Here you are.” Chung Myung led them inside the shared housing for the guards. Four guards shared one room together. Chung Myung showed them around the communal baths and eating areas before letting them get back to their rooms to settle in.

“Rest. You two have had quite a lot to deal with.”

Dan Ho looked around the room, his head spinning.

“What was the longest we stayed awake before this?” He asked Hwang Rin. When he got no response, he turned to find Hwang Rin already fast asleep on the quilt bed.

Tiredness. That was it. In the mess of it all, Dan Ho didn’t even notice how exhausted he was. He needed rest and then he would be able to get his brain working again.

Dan Ho didn’t remember going to sleep. But a deep horn awoke him at dawn. At first he was shocked. The walls seemed strange and unfamiliar. And the bed was not his. Instinctually he flattened himself against the darkest corner of the wall while his eyes adjusted to the surrounded.

Three other men were in the room with him and they began to stir at the sound of the horn too. The outline of one of them seemed familiar. That outline did what Dan Ho had done and tried to hide in the same corner as Dan Ho.

“Ah! What? Who?” Hwang Rin whispered harshly.

“Shut up, it’s me.” Dan Ho said, realizing who it was.

“Where are we?”

It all came back in a flash: the prince, their capture, Eun Dan being taken hostage, their new identities, the Princess.

Dan Ho touched his face, remembering the slap she laid on him. For a woman, she was quite strong. And quite vindictive. Part of him was glad that the King had gone against her wishes and appointed him as her personal guard. The horror on her face had been worth it.

Someone in the room lit a lantern. “Gah!” The other two guards screamed when they saw the pale faced assassins standing flat against the walls. “What are you doing?”

“Stealth exercises.” Dan Ho quickly covered. His wits having returned after having rested properly.

Acting like they knew what they were doing, the pair followed the other guards and dressed. They all marched towards the dining hall where they sat in a far corner, eating as inconspicuously as possible. This proved impossible however, as every guard seemed to be eyeing them as they whispered amongst each other.

Dan Ho and Hwang Rin stood out in two ways. The first was their appearance. It was something Dan Ho didn’t care for. But apparently the others did. He kept hearing whispers about their faces and tall, lean statures. About how Hwang Rin was prettier than a woman and how Dan Ho sat gracefully like a King.

The second way they stood out, was by the reputation they had earned by saving the Princess. The news of two new recruits earning praise from the King himself had reached the training grounds before the recruits themselves had. And now this fame had ballooned into legend status, quite literally overnight. Things were compounded by the fact that Dan Ho had quite casually caught an arrow as it was flying past him.

“Is he a demon?”

“He sounds like one. He looks supernatural.”

“Have you seen his eyes?”

“I bet the girls will swoon all over him now.”

“Nah, Captain Chung Myung is still the best looking man.”

“You haven’t seen the other one. He rivals even the Princess.”

“Pfft-haha, the Princess aint’ pretty. They just say that because she’s the King’s daughter.”

“I think she’s pretty.”

“Shut up.”

Dan Ho kept his focus on his food, but for a man of the shadows, it was difficult being the center of attention. The rice felt too dry as it crawled down his throat and the side dishes felt tasteless. Even water didn’t help.

Hwang Rin looked similarly uncomfortable. Dan Ho could see him pretending to eat by taking small bites.

“Force it down. We’ll need our strength.”

“For what?” Hwang Rin asked.

“I don’t know. But I don’t trust that Prince not to try another scheme. So, eat and stay alert.”

Dan Ho and Hwang Rin had no assignments for their day. Given that this was officially their first day inside the palace, they were put into training. The tasks seemed simple enough. Almost elementary compared to the training they had received as children. They did drills to warm up and then practiced basic skills that Dan Ho and Hwang Rin could do in their sleep. Dan Ho almost found it boring but then realized—as he was practicing with his sword, that he was drawing everyone’s attention once again.

Crowds of guards started gathering to watch him fight the wooden pole with swift and precise movements.

“Did you see that? He moves like the wind.”

“How does he move so fast? I didn’t even see his hand just then.”

“He’s like a ghost. See how his blade doesn’t even make a sound?”

From across the field, Dan Ho saw the concerned look of the head trainer Mu Won. Dan Ho didn’t have to guess what the trainer was thinking because the man came over and made his thoughts known.

“I thought I told you both to keep your heads down.”

“I am trying—”

“Your trying isn’t good enough! Do you realize how much trouble you’re attracting by continuing like this?” Mu Won hissed.

“Well I don’t exactly have a choice, do I?”

Mu Won growled low and angry like an animal. “Kid, I’m saying this for your own good. Don’t get popular here. Or your days will get shorter than they already are.” He was scolding Dan Ho, but there was concern hidden beneath it all. Dan Ho got the feeling that the man might actually be looking out for him.

Dan Ho nodded. “I’ll keep my head down.”

So, Dan Ho toned down his skills, forcing his hand to move slower, pretending not to be two steps ahead of his practicing partner and even missing a few shots in archery. Hwang Rin followed suit without being told.

It was good in a way. Not focusing on his tasks allowed Dan Ho to focus more on the guards. He could see what Mu Won meant about the inside politics. Despite wearing the same uniform, many of the men were divided into groups. If you looked closely, you could tell the difference between the ones who came from noble families—the ones with the unscratched hands and chubby disposition—from the ones who came from humble backgrounds—the ones with the worn uniforms and dirty fingernails.

The noblemen moved in packs, often following one leader. They tended to do their jobs poorly, leaving menial tasks like cleaning up practicing space and putting away the equipment to the commoners who did these odd jobs willingly, not wanting to disrespect any nobleman lest he start bullying them. The commoners tended to move in solitude, choosing not to befriend anyone. Dan Ho only saw them moving around in twos or threes but not more. It seemed the commoners feared each other just as much as they feared the noblemen.

Despite the hostile environment, Dan Ho got to know some of the guards closely. Dan Ho’s one-on-one combat partner kept complaining about his wife and the child they were about to have.

“Yeah, I might be on leave any time now. Have to go home to be there for the birth. I can’t believe I am a father already. I still feel like a child me self.”

Another guard chatted with Dan Ho about his parents and their expectations of him. “I’m here because my father thought this job would be good for me. Plus, I have seven other brothers and my father couldn’t keep me anymore. I’m the youngest you see.”

Many others tried to make conversation with Dan Ho, talking about their lives, their families, their lovers or wives. Initially Dan Ho was confused but he later realized that they were trying to gain his friendship because they thought he was a nobleman.

This realization brought with it a tinge of disappointment, but Dan Ho still welcomed all banter that came his way. He listened to all of the guards attentively, only nodding and smiling. He came off as a quiet, reserved man, but fact of the matter was, Dan Ho didn’t know what to say to them.

He had neither a so called “home” beyond the assassin school, no life beyond his job. He had nothing that could help him connect with these people and their foreign lives. He had no parents to complain about, no lovers to miss, no wives to nag him or siblings to be jealous of. All he had were jobs to complete and move on from.

It would have made him sad, had he not made his peace with this already. From the time he had killed his first contract, Dan Ho knew that he could never have the life of a normal man. He would never have an elder scold him out of worry, he would never have a friend laugh with him over nonsensical things, he would never have a lover hold him in her arms. He would never have children to fuss over. All he would ever get, were his assassin brethren.

He could tell Hwang Rin was feeling a similar melancholy when the pretty young lad sought him out after lunch.

“I hate these people.” He huffed.

Dan Ho smiled. “I know. They’re actually decent.”

“We’ll probably have to kill some of them when we get the witch.”

“The who?”

“That’s what they call the Princess around here. No body seems to like her. Apparently Her Royal Hiney tends to throw a lot of tantrums. She makes the lives of her servants and guards a living hell.”

“Not surprising given what we’ve seen so far.”

They both paused as they watched the other guards go about joking around and completing their tasks for the day.

“We’ll probably have to kill some of them.” Hwang Rin repeated. His voice dry and cracking.

“Let’s hope it doesn’t come to that.”

“I was hoping they’d be meaner. Mu Won made it seem like—”

Whoosh! An arrow flew right between the two assassins and landed on the ground, barely missing another guard.

Dan Ho turned to see the same man as before, grinning triumphantly as Dan Ho pushed his anger down.

“Yah, aren’t you the asshole from yesterday?” Hwang Rin asked cheekily.

“Shh, you ass. Remember what Mu Won said?” Dan Ho whispered.

“What did you just call me?” The man came forward, his chest puffed out aggressively.

“Rin.” Dan Ho warned.

“Nothing buddy.” Hwang Rin said calmly. “I made a mistake.”

“You’re damn right you did.” The man came over and shoved Hwang Rin back. Hwang Rin appeared to stumble back a bit, but Dan Ho knew how well Hwang Rin knew to maintain his balance. The stumble was just for show.

The main waited for Hwang Rin to retaliate but Hwang Rin only held up his palms in a show of peace. He turned to walk away but the man grabbed his collar from behind, pulling him back.

“Yah, Cho Dae Sang. Stop it.” Someone said but the man ignored it. Others called out for Dae Sang to stop too but they went unheard.

Cho Dae Sang, Dan Ho noted. This man belonged to the same clan as the Chief State Councilor. If there was anyone apart from the King who was the most powerful man, it was the Chief State Councilor. Belonging to his clan, meant you were practically royalty.

“Buddy, I said it was a mistake.” Hwang Rin repeated calmly.

The man did not seem to care for Hwang Rin’s reasoning. “You think you can talk like that to me? Do you know which family I belong to, you little shit?”

“We don’t want trouble.” Dan Ho stepped in, placing a calm hand over the man’s shoulder.

“What makes you think I care what you want?”

“My friend made a mistake. He shouldn’t have called you an asshole. He is sorry.”

“Not as sorry as he’s going to be when I’m through with him.” The man yanked at Hwang Rin’s collar, but this time Hwang Rin didn’t budge. Not even an inch. He maintained his stance even as the man used both hands to yank at his collar.

Dan Ho didn’t understand. They had apologized and tried to react calmly. Yet the man seemed intent on making a scene.

The politics that goes on within the palace walls is nothing that can be matched by what goes on the outside. There is no line the rich will not cross to gain power.

Dan Ho could hear Mu Won in his head. This wasn’t just an ordinary confrontation. This man was simply looking for an excuse to fight.

“My, my. Look at how they’re disrespecting you, Dae Sang.” Another soldier came up, smiling slyly. He poked Dan Ho in the chest. “Don’t they teach you boys how to show your elders respect?”

“Our fight isn’t with you.” Hwang Rin said.

“So you admit there’s a fight?” Dae Sang interjected.

“What? No, that’s not what I said.”

“Everyone hear that? This guy wants a fight!” Dae Sang shouted.

“That’s not what he said.” Dan Ho tried to cover quickly.

Dae Sang got in Dan Ho’s personal space, “You lot think that you can just waltz in and win a favor with the King? Just like that?”

The other man joined in, “You think you can just show off how better you are? Did you know our revered friend here had the guts to give orders to the Princess’s archers? Not even a proper trainee and he’s out there ordering around the other guards.”

“Is he now?” Dae Sang asked dramatically, as if it was a great offense to show off one’s talent.

“Yes! And this hero here,” the man pointed to Dan Ho, “is supposedly a demon who moves faster than the wind.”

“My, my. That almost sounds like a challenge to me, doesn’t it?”

“Quite right, it does!”

Dan Ho and Hwang Rin were unimpressed with this show. Eyes, half lidded out of boredom, Dan Ho’s eyes bore into the two men while Hwang Rin’s mouth became a thin line.

“I’d get out of my face if I were you.” Dan Ho warned, in his deepest growl. Dae Sang’s confidence seemed to shake a little but the other man was unmoved.

“I’d leave this city and go back to the trash, piss poor dump you crawled out of. If I were you.”

“How do you suggest we settle this then?”

“Wait, Dan Ho—” Hwang Rin tried to calm his friend but Dan Ho was beyond seething now. He didn’t care for keeping his head down anymore.

“The games ground. Tonight. After rounds.”

“We will see you there.”

Seemingly satisfied with this, the two men walked away. Only then did Dan Ho see how many guards had surrounded them to witness this argument.

“I thought we were going to try not to kill any of them.” Hwang Rin asked under his breath.

“Meh. I changed my mind.”

Chapter Text

“Do you lot know what you’ve done?” Mu Won scolded as he tried to keep up with the tall assassins walking briskly towards the games grounds.

“We know.” Dan Ho said, shame now replacing the anger that had pushed him into making such a stupid decision.

“This is exactly the opposite of what I told you two to do.”

“We know.” Hwang Rin said, tightening the straps around his wrist for support.

“You two could ruin everything.”

The two assassins stopped and faced the trainer. “We know.” They both said.

The games grounds—while well maintained—were rarely used. Their sole purpose was to host dances during festivals and exhibition fights for the royals and their guests. The grounds were bigger than the training area and it was surrounded by rows of seats for the audience to enjoy the show. There was no audience today, however. Just the guards and some footmen gathered around the sides, watching the two assassins approach the two guards who had challenged them.

A table had been laid out in the center of the ring. An array of weapons were laid out before Dan Ho and Hwang Rin. A sword that could be wielded with both hands, a long bow, a multi-tipped spear, and a set of short daggers.

“Choose.” Dae Sang said. Behind him, the other guard, Baek Hyun stood watching smugly.

Any of the weapons would be deadly in their hands, but Dan Ho knew he had to choose wisely. Working with swords was something every young man in the Kingdom knew, but working with bows and spears were a rare skill and daggers would just be a dead giveaway, given how well the Shadowmen were known for it.

Dan Ho saw Hwang Rin eye the daggers. He knew how much Hwang Rin loved to play with daggers. They were efficient and got the job done with the least amount of fuss. But Dan Ho pressed Hwang Rin’s hand nonchalantly, letting him know to go for the more obvious choice.

Dan Ho chose the sword. It was something he was proficient in and also something that wouldn’t give too much away about his training. Hwang Rin wisely chose the bow. It wasn’t the dagger, but it was the best choice to make use of Hwang Rin’s incredible aim.

Dae Sang and Baek Hyun appeared satisfied with Dan Ho’s and Hwang Rin’s choices. No doubt happy over the fact that the two didn’t pick anything too difficult for a guard to work with.

Dae Sang took the sword. Baek Hyun took the bow. The men turned to leave.

“You haven’t explained the rules yet.” Dan Ho said.

Dae Sang and Baek Hyun both turned and looked at the pair in confusion. “What? You two’ve never been challenged before?” Baek Hyun said as if the answer should have been obvious.

Dan Ho realized he had slipped up.

“We have.” Hwang Rin answered boldly. “We just want to make sure you guys understand what is allowed and what isn’t.”

Dae Sang and Baek Hyun glanced at each other. “What exactly are you inferring? We’re not cheats. The mean looking one fights with Dae Sang and the pretty one fights with me. The winner stays. The loser leaves the guard.”

The last part gave Dan Ho pause. “What do you mean loser leaves the guard?”

“Which ever of us loses, has to go back home. Have you two seriously never been in a challenge?” Dae Sang asked, eyeing Dan Ho from head to toe.

“No way.” Hwang Rin threw the bow on the ground. “We’re not doing this.”

Someone from the crowd yelled, “You can’t back out of a challenge! You’ll be branded a coward for the rest of your life!”

So this was their plan, Dan Ho realized. The whole fight had been just a means to get the two kicked out.

“Your choice, fellas.” Dae Sang grinned.

Dan Ho looked at Hwang Rin determinedly. “Let’s show these losers what we’ve got.”

~~~~~~~

It was in the Captain’s duty to make rounds of the palace during the day. It helped keep the guards on their toes and let Chung Myung know which part of the palace seemed most vulnerable. Part of his rounds led him through the games grounds that were usually silent and eerie.

But today, Captain Chung Myung heard giggling and whispers and hushed cheers as he came around the corner of the royal seats, the designated area from where the King and his children would watch the exhibition fighting. These were located in the far corner, in the opposite direction to the grounds so that any stray daggers, mistaken shots or lost arrows might not hit the royal family.

“Ooh! He’s taking his shirt off! He’s taking his shirt off!” One of the palace maids was squealing.

“Oh my, is that the new trainee?” One of the Princesses—the third Princess—craned her neck higher to see beyond her jumping maids.

“He’s taking his shirt off!”

“So is the other one.” The second Princess remarked, unimpressed.

“That’s just Cho Dae Sang, my Princess,” the older Princess’s maid explained, “He’s part of the Cho clan.”

That seemed to get everyone’s attention. All women now looked at the other fighter.

“Ugh. I do not see what women find fascinating about sweaty men.” The fourth Princess, the youngest among them, said. All women turned to the youngling, baffled.

“You’ll understand when you’re older.” The thrid Princess said and her maids erupted in cackles.

“Ladies. Should you all be here?” Chung Myung made his presence known, greeting them all with a bow.

“Oh, Chung Myung.” The Princesses and their maids bowed in return. “What brings the Captain of the guard here?”

“Doing my rounds. May I ask why the Princesses are at the games grounds?”

The women pointed towards the grounds below. The clang of metal was accompanied by the exasperated groans of two sweaty, half bleeding guards hitting and deflecting with their swords. Chung Myung’s brows shot up at the sight of his two guards fighting each other. He leapt towards the edge of the parapet, bug eyed and ashamed.

Guards, footmen and even servants were gathered below, watching the two men go at each other with the ferocity of soldiers in a battle. Chung Myung called to the guard closest to them.

“What are those two idiots doing?!”

The guard jumped at the sight of the Captain looking down angrily. “Gah! Captain! I-uh-they-uh—“

“Park Dan Ho challenged Cho Dae Sang and Lee Baek Hyun to a duel.” A different guard explained.

Chung Myung was seething, but the second Princess held him back. “Let them fight. This is about the only entertainment we’ll have today.” She said, her eyes half lidded with boredom.

“My Princess, this is unseemly.”

“They’re men. Men are always unseemly. I don’t know what you all find so fascinating.” The fourth Princess crinkled her nose. The third Princess stuck out her tongue towards the youngest.

“Watch with us, Chung Myung. Perhaps you’ll learn something too.” The second Princess said.

Puffing his chest out a bit, Chung Myung joined her. “My Princess, I am one of the best fighters in the Kingdom. If anyone is going to be learning anything, it will be them.”

The Princess eyed him from the side, “Had you said this yesterday, I would have believed you. But today… well you might have found a worthy contender, Chung Myung.”

Confused, Chung Myung looked to the ground below.

Both Dan Ho and Dae Sang had small cuts around their shoulders, their abdomen and even one on Dae Sang’s cheek. Sweat missed with blood dripped from their ripped bodies.

It was evident from first glance that Park Dan Ho was the better fighter. His body moved lithely, making Dae Sang look old and worn in comparison. His jabs were precise and his deflections were swift. Chung Myung felt that at a few points, he didn’t even see Dan Ho move due to his speed.

But Dae Sang was one of the best fighters among the Royal Guard. Second only to Chung Myung, Dae Sang had always been the top contender for any combative sports they had held. It was this level of skill, coupled with his family’s illustrious background had made the man hard to work with, but even with this, Chung Myung would still want Dae Sang to fight by his side. That is how good of a fighter he was.

The two men circled each other as the time and strain weighed on both of them. Both were panting from exhaustion yet both were unwilling to yield.

“The new one’s going to lose.” The third Princess said glumly. “It’s a pity. I like the new one.”

“You only like his face.” The second Princess remarked.

“Not just his face, sister.”

“How do we know who will win?” The fourth Princess asked.

“The first to fall loses.”

The fourth Princess looked to the fight in deep thought. “I think the new one will win. He looks like he’s holding back.”

The elder Princesses chuckled.

“Such a child.”

“So clueless.”

“Apologies for disagreeing, my Princesses, but I agree with her Highness,” Chung Myung smiled to the younger Princess. “I also get the feeling that he’s holding back.”

“My, my. A party? Without me?”

The atmosphere around the Princesses suddenly soured. The maids and Chung Myung bowed to welcome the first Princess, Song Hwa while the other Princesses only acknowledged her with unamused gazes and tight lipped mouths.

“Not a party. Just passing by.” The second Princess said.

“We chanced upon the guards practicing.”

“And you all decided to gather around?” Song Hwa said, raising a brow towards Chung Myung. “Why?”

Without waiting for an answer, Song Hwa looked over to the grounds below. Now both brows shot up, much like Chung Myung’s had.

“Is this allowed?” She asked.

Chung Myung began, “No, my Prin—“

“I allowed it.” The third Princess declared. “This is for my entertainment.”

Song Hwa eyed the shirtless men. Her snake like eyes narrowed to slits. “Hmm. I should have guessed.” The words were innocuous but the tone suggested scandal. “You are always at the center of such… events, aren’t you sister? I wish I had some of your liveliness.”

The third Princess fumed. “Well, not all of us have the Captain of the guard to keep us company.”

Song Hwa’s lips twitched at the implication.

“Apologies, my Princess.” Chung Myung took the lead. “I should be spending time protecting all of you myself. But the King has assigned me to the Princess Song Hwa. But rest assured, I have left you all in safe hands.”

Song Hwa’s shoulders visibly relaxed as Chung Myung turned the defaming implication made by the third Princess into something unassuming.

The third Princess opened her mouth to speak again but her elder and wiser sister put an arm on her shoulder. “We’re missing the show.”

The third Princess clamped her mouth shut and turned her attention to the guards who were still fighting.

“This has to be the longest fight I’ve ever seen.” One of the maids remarked.

“You seem upset.” Song Hwa whispered to Chung Myung so that the others couldn’t hear.

“They shouldn’t be fighting like this.” Chung Myung whispered back.

“Why not? Competition is good for the guards.”

“It’s not just a fight. It’s a challenge.” Chung Myung explained. Song Hwa picked up on the implication. That if the challenge was lost, the losing guard would be sent home.

“You’re worried about losing a good fighter.” Song Hwa said it as both a question and a statement.

“After seeing how well they spar, yes. I am.”

Song Hwa looked at the Captain and his determined face. He seemed unaware of her attention, focusing only on the fight.

The other Princesses noticed this too. The first and the second looked at each other conspiratorially. “Chung Myung!” The second called to the Captain. “Why stand at the edge? Join us here!”

Chung Myung, without a second glance to Song Hwa, stepped back to stand by the Princesses. “As you wish, my Princess.”

Song Hwa stepped back to join him. Her black and purple court attire rustling as she moved. “Have you—“

“What do you think, Chung Myung? Who will win?” The second Princess said loudly, eyeing Song Hwa.

Song Hwa clenched her teeth but said nothing.

“I do not know, my Princess. It is anybody’s guess at this stage.”

“I think it will be Park Dan Ho. What do you think, sister?” The third said to the second.

“I agree. What about you, sister?” The second said to the fourth.

“I don’t care.” The fourth didn’t pick up the signal.

Everyone turned to Song Hwa. “I—I think it shall be Cho Dae Sang.”

This seemed to satisfy the second Princess, who turned to Chung Myung. “And what does our Captain think? Don’t say it could be either. Pick a side.”

Chung Myung thought about it. “I agree with you, my Princess. I think Dan Ho will win.”

Song Hwa’s mouth shrank. The second Princess grinned with glee while Chung Myung remained clueless.

“You hear that, Song Hwa? Chung Myung agrees with us.”

“Well,” Song Hwa squared her shoulders, not looking at her sisters. She stepped back up to the front. “We will just have to wait and see, won’t we?”

~~~~~~~

Clang! Clash! Clang!

Park Dan Ho found it hard to pretend that he was running out of breath but he knew he had to keep up appearances. His strategy had been simple, to wear Dae Sang down till he finally gave up. His win would be based not on skill, but endurance. Dan Ho silently thanked his Headmaster for having pushing him in to building both. Now his abilities would not be revealed and he would get out of this situation without much hassle.

“You--- you won’t win this, you hear me?” Dae Sang’s voice cracked as he struggled to level his breathing. Meanwhile Dan Ho had to make a show of being out of breath.

“I hear you.” Dan Ho said.

“Shut up!” Dae Sang went for him once more, this time Dan Ho easily dodged the blow. A series of clapping erupted from the sides as the guards cheered the two on.

A considerable crowd had gathered, but Dan Ho had zoned them all out. He didn’t care how many watched or what they thought of him. He only cared about winning. If he lost, it would be the end of their contract and Eun Dan’s life would be in danger.

Clang! Clang! Whoosh! Their swords flew in the air, Dan Ho maintaining the same level of deflection whilst Dae Sang became more and more worn. Dan Ho let the man get a few hits in to maintain an even score but he never let Dae Sang get the upper hand.

“Go Park Dan Ho!” Someone yelled. Dan Ho ignored it. But then he heard the yell again, this time from a female voice.

“Go Park Dan Ho!”

Dan Ho gave a quick glance. There, up on the King’s seating area, stood a cluster of women. Most of them wore the hanboks of the palace maids but three of them were dressed in luxurious court attire.

Princesses.

Dan Ho didn’t care about their presence. He had no time to worry about royalty of any kind. But he also picked up on the uniform of the Captain of the guard and that worried him. Surely this fight was not permissible. The Captain of the guard would definitely give him grief later on.

Just win, Dan Ho. Deal with all of that later, he told himself.

“Go Cho Dae Sang!” A female voice ran out. Unmistakably hers. That annoying, condescending tone could not be matched by any other woman.

Dan Ho couldn’t help but turn. She’s here too? The Princess Song Hwa stood to one side, shrouded in shadow that hid her and her dark clothing well. “Cho Dae Sang, win!” She yelled.

Clang! Dae Sang’s sword came seemingly out of nowhere, almost knocking Dan Ho down.

Damn it! I got distracted! Dan Ho scolded himself as he tried to recover from Dae Sang’s blow. He quickly matched Dae Sang’s next advance and pushed the guard back with swift, easy movements.

Time to end this. Dan Ho decided he had prolonged the inevitable long enough. With just three moves, he had a bewildered Dae Sang on the ground, disarmed with his sword flying away from him.

“What the…” Dae Sang just looked at Dan Ho wide eyed and confused. “What just happened?”

Silence came over the crowd. Followed by hushed whispers.

“Did you see that?”

“He moved like a ghost!”

“So scary! I didn’t even see him when he knocked Dae Sang over.”

“He’s like a demon.”

“I win.” Dan Ho declared quietly. Dae Sang just looked on, unsure of what just happened. Dan Ho glared towards the Princesses before retrieving his fallen, tattered shirt from the ground. He glared at the Princesses once, more, feeling prickly all over.

Guards approached him, surrounding him like moths to a flame.

“You were amazing!”

“How did you do that?”

“Can you teach me? Oh, please teach me!”

Hwang Rin came to his side, grinning. “That ending...”

“I don’t want to talk about it.”

“But you just—“

“No talking.”

So Hwang Rin remained quiet while Dan Ho went to sit in the sidelines to recover his strength. Someone brought him water to drink while other guards offered him something to eat.

Baek Hyun recovered Dae Sang from the ground as he sat there, still shocked. “I-I lost. Baek, I lost.”

“I know. Come on. Let’s get you patched up.”

“But I lost.”

The next challenge began, a bit too soon in Dan Ho’s opinion. He didn’t have any time to even recover from his fight and give Hwang Rin a proper strategy to win.

“I’ve got this. Relax.” Hwang Rin assured.

Targets were propped up in the farthest corner of the grounds. Dan Ho felt relaxed when he saw it was a simple task of shooting arrows. But then they brought horses with targets on them and a small shiver of panic went down Dan Ho’s spine.

“What’s with the horses?” Hwang Rin asked Baek Hyun.

“You didn’t think this would be as easy as hitting targets, did you?” Baek Hyun said. “That’s just the first round.”

“But Dan Ho didn’t get any rounds.”

“No.” Baek Hyun eyed Dan Ho who was watching from the side benches. “But he should have. We underestimated you two. But not anymore.”

Dan Ho swallowed hard. With his last move, he had given away their training. Now Baek Hyun had a better idea of who he was dealing with. Baek Hyun would ensure with everything he had that Hwang Rin would lose.

“I got this!” Hwang Rin yelled out to Dan Ho, sensing his worry. He held up a fist in the air. Dan Ho did the same, though he smiled bitterly with guilt.

As expected, the first round was easy. Hwang Rin was able to hit the target every single time, even once splitting a previous arrow in half. But Baek Hyun proved equally proficient. He hit the bulls eye every time, though he never managed to split any arrows.

“I knew I underestimated you two.” Baek Hyun leaned on his bow. “You’re good. Very good. But this was just a still target. How well can you hit something that moves?”

“Guess we’ll have to find out.” Hwang Rin smiled and this sent the Princesses and their maids into a frenzy. They all squealed as Hwang Rin sent a wink their way. All except Song Hwa whose attention appeared fixated on the Captain.

Another guard came to the center to explain the rules to the two fighters. “The second round is simple. The horses with the targets will be released on the grounds. You two shall be on horseback as well.” Hwang Rin rolled his eyes as the guard continued. “The one to hit the most targets, wins. The targets are also numbered so if you hit the bullseye, that’s the highest point from that target. If you maim any horse, you lose points. Clear?”

“Clear.” Hwang Rin and Baek Hyun affirmed.

“This is ridiculous.” Dan Ho heard one of the crowding footmen say. “They don’t even teach us this sort of exercise. Only the elite knights get to train like this.”

“Didn’t you see the first guard? He seemed like an elite knight himself.”

Dan Ho shook his head but kept his mind on Hwang Rin. Towards one side were a couple of men holding back the horses. Each horse had a target hanging from the saddle. At the sound of a horn, the horses were released onto the ground while Hwang Rin and Baek Hyun rode after them.

Hwang Rin drew the bow string while holding three arrows, one between each finger. He shot all three of them, one by one, hitting the bullseye every time. Meanwhile Baekyun struggled to shoot his arrows, missing a target and hitting one right on the edge of the target board.

“I thought you weren’t going to underestimate me!” Hwang Rin shouted out to Baek Hyun who glared back.

Angrily, Baek Hyun shot another arrow that hit a target right at the center.

Dan Ho looked towards the Princesses. They seemed to have lost interest in the fight and were talking amongst themselves. The Captain seemed to be enjoying their conversation, nodding his head and joining in when spoken to. Princess Song Hwa stood right at the edge of the parapet, slightly removed from everyone. Her maid held a shade over her head. Her face faced the grounds but her eyes seemed fixed on Chung Myung. This only seemed to confirm Dan Ho’s suspicions that she liked the Captain.

But he doesn’t like her. He noticed.

Something in his periphery caught Dan Ho’s eye. A movement. Dan Ho followed it, catching someone appearing from the far corner, beneath the royal seats. There were a lot of people crowded at the grounds, but this person seemed suspicious, appearing overly cautious and jittery.

Pretending he was stretching his arms, Dan Ho and got up and began leisurely strolling alongside the wall. As he got nearer, he heard a low whistle. One of the horses with the highest scoring target turned and galloped towards the man. Just then, Dan Ho saw Hwang Rin pull back the bow string to make a shot.

Time slowed as Dan Ho’s brain connected a hundred dots at once. The horse was galloping on the side of the royal seats, where it wasn’t allowed. If Hwang Rin tried hitting it now, the arrow would face the Princesses. That in itself—shooting towards the King’s children—could get him into trouble. But no, this wasn’t that simple. Dan Ho was just noticing how the man calling the horse was also carrying a bow and arrow. Before Dan Ho even realized what he was doing, he began to ran.

The royal seats were high, but any assassin worth his dime could climb up that wall. Luckily for Dan Ho, he worth ten assassins.

Hwang Rin shot the arrow, not realizing where he was aiming at till it was too late. His eyes went wide as the shot went in the direction of the royal seats. From the side, Hwang Rin saw the man Dan Ho had spotted. Hwang Rin’s arrow hit the target on the horse. Meanwhile, the man shot his arrow from the side.

“Dan Ho!” Hwang Rin cried out to his friend who was on the edge of the royal seats. The suspicious man’s shot went straight for Princess Song Hwa, but Dan Ho reached her just as the arrow was about to hit.

The Princesses squealed as suddenly Park Dan Ho appeared from the parapet. Blood splattered on the women as the arrow went through his left shoulder. They all gasped as Dan Ho yelled out in pain.

Dan Ho found himself face to face with Song Hwa, her eyes wide, her mouth open in shock. He lost the grip from his left hand and desperately held onto the edge with his right. He didn’t have the strength to climb over. All he had been thinking about was climbing up. He hadn’t thought about how he would get down with an arrow going through him.

“Catch him!” The Captain yelled as guards seized Hwang Rin below.

“Oh my goodness. Song Hwa, he just saved your life.” The second Princess said.

Dan Ho looked into Song Hwa’s eyes. Was that worry he saw? No, it couldn’t have been. Because the Princess’s face appeared blank and unaffected.

“How pathetic.” She said as she pushed Dan Ho’s head away with her finger. Dan Ho found himself losing his grip and falling back. He heard the thwack of his body hitting the ground but he didn’t feel anything as he blacked out.

Chapter Text

It was night. Something was beating, deep and fast, with a steady rhythm. It took him a minute to realize it was his heart. Shadows danced along a long hallway. Fire from the floor lanterns flickered against a quiet breeze. Sliding doors lined the wall on each side. All of them were dark. The only room lit was the one near the end. That was his destination.

Soundlessly he moved through the hallway, a shadow among shadows. An invisible man of the night. Equally soundlessly, he slid open the doors to the lit room. Tall columns held up the roof, an endless marble floor stretched out before him. A wooden bed was posed in the center. The bed had a curtain. The silhouette of a figure could be seen behind it.

It was a woman. She was waiting for him. She was expecting him.

He ventured in, quiet as a mouse and unsheathed his sword. She turned her head, as if she could hear him. A hand reached from between the curtains holding on to it but not pulling away.

“I can hear you.” She said, her voice soft and low. Surprisingly, she didn’t seem afraid.

He knew he shouldn’t speak, but he couldn’t help it. “Then you should know why I am here.”

Her hand tightened around the curtain. His own tightened around the hilt of the sword.

“I don’t suppose begging for my life would make a difference.”

“You could try. Everyone else does.”

“I am not like everyone else. I am a Queen.”

“I should have expected a Queen to be so haughty.”

She let out a breathy chuckle. He couldn’t believe he was having this conversation.

“I don’t suppose you could tell me who sent you.”

“No.”

A pause.

“I don’t need to ask however. I already know…”

He didn’t say anything. Just lifted his sword high to strike.

“She does this out of jealousy. There is no benevolence in this.” She reasoned.

He remained quiet.

“Tell me… was there any way I could have avoided this?”

“I don’t know.”

“Only following orders, I see.”

“Yes.” He said confidently.

“Just another one of her soldiers?”

“Yes.” He said, less confidently.

Another pause.

“Is she worth it? Is she worth this loyalty?”

“Are you, your Majesty? You expect it from your subjects, don’t you?”

She countered quickly, “Is the Kingdom’s ruin worth this loyalty?”

He hesitated. “The Kingdom will be set right by this.”

“Do you believe that?” The curtain parted. “Do you really believe that, Park Dan Ho?”

Dan Ho gasped awake. Remnants of his dream still swam in his vision; the dark corridor, the hand holding the curtain, the voice of the Queen.

“Lie back, you’ll reopen your wound.” The nurse said, speaking softly to him. “Bad dream?”

Dan Ho felt damp. He was out of breath and in great pain. His wound pulsated, each throb reminding him of the arrow that had been there.

“Yes. Bad dream.” He wanted to speak further but stopped short when he realized that the nurse wasn’t a nurse at all.

It was Princess Song Hwa.

Dan Ho became very still. His target, the woman he was meant to kill was mere inches away from him. He looked around. They were in the medical facilities where the soldiers and guards were treated for ailments. There was nobody around but them. He could easily strangle her neck right now and escape with Hwang Rin before they even discovered her body.

She turned to pick something up, her hair falling to the other side. At this distance, Dan Ho could see the worn lines around her eyes, the puckered space between her furrowed brows and her lips—full and wide—pressed together in a hard line.

She turned to him and he immediately looked away, suddenly feeling a strange tingle on his cheeks. She pressed something wet and cold to his wound. Dan Ho hissed and writhed like an animal.

“Oh, do be quiet. You’re a grown man! Bear it.”

Dan Ho clenched his jaw and curled his hand up in a fist as Song Hwa continued pressing what he realized was medicated cloth. When she finally removed it, Dan Ho saw the neat stiches.

“You’re welcome.” Song Hwa said, guessing his thoughts.

He looked at her unsurely. She seemed different from the Princess he was used to seeing. There was no angry glare, no haughty upturn of the nose, not even her signature condescending tone. Dan Ho wasn’t sure whether this was all real or if he was still dreaming.

“Why isn’t the physician here?” Dan Ho asked. It was not just unusual that the Princess was here, tending to her servant, but rather unheard of.

Song Hwa avoided his gaze. She bandaged his shoulder and said, “You are lucky this was just a flesh wound. Your hand movement will be limited for a while, but I think you’ll be fine once this heals.”

Dan Ho looked at his hand and tried bending his fingers. They seemed to work fine, although any and all movement seemed uncomfortable at the moment.

“Why is it you, and not the physician tending to me?” Dan Ho posed the question again, boring his gaze right into the Princess’s.

She couldn’t look away this time. “Take it as a show of gratitude… for saving my life.”

Dan Ho recalled the man and what happened with the horse. More importantly, he remembered what happened to Hwang Rin. He sat up, grabbing the Princess by her arm, “My friend. Hwang Rin. He was taken away, he—”

“Your friend is fine.” The Princess put a hand on Dan Ho’s chest, pushing him back to lie down. “They interrogated him and the other guards.”

“There was another man. Someone controlling one of the horses.”

“Yes, yes. All of this has already discovered. Please calm down before you reopen your stitches.”

“Did you find the man?”

“No. He got away.”

Song Hwa’s hand still lingered on his chest. Dan Ho had to stare at it uncomfortably for a while before the Princess got the message.

“Oh. Sorry.” She recoiled her hand as if Dan Ho had stung her. After a moment’s hesitation, she said, “Your other two friends, I’m afraid, have been sent home. I understand they instigated some duel and lost. Chung Myung doesn’t take that kind of thing lightly. And it is in the rules of the duel… I am sorry but you won’t get to see them again.”

Dan Ho sighed in relief after hearing this. Having disgruntled guards with a grudge would have hindered their plans. “They weren’t my friends. I am glad they’re gone.”

An awkward silence ensued. Neither had anything else to say to each other. Dan Ho waited in case the Princess had something further to discuss but she seemed to simply be killing time. She sat back on her seat, watching him like a hawk watching it’s prey.

Dan Ho stared back, returning her gaze. Something seemed off about her. She seemed unsure and uncomfortable. Angry yet holding it back. Perhaps it was the medicine, perhaps it was the pulsating pain, but Dan Ho felt bold enough to ask, “What’s bothering you?”

Surprised by the question, she blurted out, “I can’t seem to figure you out.” Dan Ho could see the immediate regret on her face as she confessed this.

“Why is that important?”

After what appeared like an internal debate, the Princess continued, “I can figure out everyone. They’re all the same. People either want money or power or glory or more money. But you… you who dares slap royalty and risk your life… you are irritatingly elusive.”

This made Dan Ho smile for some reason.

“What is so amusing?” She frowned at him.

“I find you irritating as well.”

That surprised her even more. Her brows shot up at the insolence. Dan Ho felt he might have gone a bit too far. She could have him hanged for that statement or kicked out of the palace or at the very least, she would slap him. And in his current state, that would hurt very much.

The Princess stood, gathering her rather overbearing court dress. As if lost in thought, she said, “Irritation, huh? That is a dangerous sentiment to have.” She turned to leave the room.

That had to be a threat. But it didn’t feel like it. “Why?” Dan Ho asked. "Why is it dangerous?"

She stopped at the door. “Because it means that we can’t be indifferent to each other anymore.”

~~~~~~~

“They’re probably thinking we’ve died.” Hwang Rin said as he wrapped the black cloth around his face. Dan Ho sucked in his lower lip as he did the same. Having to move his arm caused him great pain, but this was something that needed to be done with great urgency. His healing could wait.

A midnight rendezvous was the common practice among the assassins whenever they had to split up. Sam Chul and Dong Su would have understood if Dan Ho and Hwang Rin did not show up on the first night or maybe even the second, but it had been four days and the two pretenders had yet to report back. Dan Ho was sure that Dong Su was going insane with worry. And knowing Sam Chul, he might already be mourning their loss.

“You sure you’re up for this?” Hwang Rin cast a doubtful look on Dan Ho’s shoulder.

“I’m fine.” Dan Ho grit his teeth.

The two assassins sneaked out of the infirmary where Dan Ho was still supposedly recuperating. They wore their black uniform and moved among the shadows without a sound. Not even the wind picked up their presence.

Sneaking out of the palace proved easier than it had been to get in. In no time, the pair were in the capital city that was still somewhat awake. Night travelers roamed through the dimly lit streets and some shops still twinkled open, offering food to ones awake at odd hours. Most of the people about were people who wouldn’t be able to move in the light of day—smugglers, thieves and miscreants. These regulars of the night were now joined by two assassins.

The house Mu Won had arranged for Sam Chul and Dong Su was a bit isolated from the city, hidden within the woods. This served the assassins well as no one would be questioning the sudden arrival of two strangers in the city.

“Dan Ho,” Hwang Rin whispered as they neared the house. “Follow my lead. I want to try something.”

Dan Ho nodded and even though it was pitch dark in the woods, Hwang Rin felt it and continued ahead. The dim lights of from the windows let them know when they were near the house. Dan Ho followed Hwang Rin as he crept around the house.

“Why are we sneaking in?” Dan Ho asked, not liking that he didn’t know what Hwang Rin was doing.

“The Prince is smart, right? I’m not sure he would just have Sam Chul and Dong Su stay here without them being on watch.”

That made sense. Satisfied, Dan Ho followed Hwang Rin as they snuck in as quietly as if they would a target’s own house. It was dark inside. The only thing lighting the halls was the moon light. The study was well lit. That was the light they had seen from outside. Sam Chul and Dong Su must be inside.

“Dan Ho, look in to see if they’re alone. I’ll cover for you.” Hwang Rin said before disappearing into the darkness. Dan Ho went ahead and put his ear to the wooden paneled door. He could hear the low voices of Sam Chul and Dong Su.

“We have to go into the palace.”

“They told us to keep put.”

“It’s been almost a week and we still haven’t heard from them.”

“It’s only been three days.”

“Four!”

Dan Ho smiled to himself. It was touching how worried his fellow brethren seemed to be. He slid the door apart just a crack, enough to ensure there was nothing suspicious going on inside before he went in.

He bent down in front of the door as he peered through with one eye. The study walls were lined with scrolls and books. Two tables were set up on the floor where Sam Chul and Dong Su were sitting. There was no one else present but them.

Dan Ho was just about to reveal his presence with the bird call they normally used on missions when suddenly he felt a large presence behind him. He saw a flapping sheet from the corner of his eye and suddenly the door swooshed open to a very startled Sam Chul and Dong Su.

“Aaaaah!” Both men screamed, holding onto each other in absolute terror while the person behind Dan Ho went, “Boooo!”

Dan Ho turned and screamed out too. It was an apparition. It was a ghost. It stood as tall as the roof with its large, shapeless white form looming over him.

Dan Ho crawled backwards into the room. If it was one thing any assassin feared, it was the ghost of their victims coming back to haunt them. Their guild didn’t even mention the dead unless it was absolutely necessary, lest they end up conjuring up a spirit from the dead.

The apparition floated above the floor, screaming out, “Boooo!” once more. All three assassins screamed in terror. The screaming must have scared it because the apparition doubled over, shaking. It made a strange, choking sound.

It was then that Dan Ho noticed that the apparition wasn’t actually floating but rather standing on a stool. Dan Ho could see its wooden legs from beneath what was, obviously, a white sheet.

“YAH!” Dan Ho yelled as he kicked at the stool and Hwang Rin toppled over him, still shaking from laugher.

Hwang Rin removed the sheet, revealing his red face with tears streaming down his cheeks as he guffawed.

“You monster! You fiend!” Sam Chul yelled out. His cheeks too were wet with tears, although of a different kind.

“You always do that! Why do you always do that?!” Dong Su hissed like a snake.

Dan Ho simply kicked Hwang Rin, given that he couldn’t punch him without hurting himself. Hwang Rin took it all, laughing.

“How could you impersonate a spirit? You could anger them!” Sam Chul clutched his heart. Dong Su was already on his knees, praying to appease any spirits that may have been offended.

“Oh, please! Ghosts don’t exist! But you should have seen the look on your faces. Bwahahaha!”

“I am glad you find this funny.” Dan Ho growled.

“Why did you fall for it?!” Dong Su accused Dan Ho.

“I didn’t think this was the time for pranks!” Dan Ho said, red from embarrassment.

“Haha! Look at you all!” Hwang Rin rolled over, holding his stomach. “Aah, I’m gonna die laughing.”

“You bastard.” All three men said through their teeth.

It took a while before the assassins were done gathering their wits. Sam Chul in particular seemed shaken as this was the first time Hwang Rin had pranked him. Dong Su on the other hand, was used to Hwang Rin and his antics.

“Admit it, I got you.”

“No one’s denying it!” Dong Su yelled.

“Shh. Quiet. We don’t want the entire city waking up.” Dan Ho said.

“Relax. No one can hear us out here.” Dong Su said.

“Yeah. It’s been nice staying here. Quiet and relaxing.”

Dan Ho looked at the two, feeling relieved. He had been worried about how the two would get on. Part of that worry had also been guilt since it was he who made them stay behind.

“It is good to see you all again.” Dan Ho said.

“Dan Ho-ya!” Sam Chul suddenly threw himself at Dan Ho and Hwang Rin, enveloping them in a hug. “We missed you too!”

Dan Ho laughed and winced at the same time.

“What? You’re hurt?” Dong Su narrowed his eyes. “Let me get our ointment. I might have some left over from the last mission.”

Having risked their lives for the kill, the Shadowmen had developed their own medicine to help them heal and stay protected from many ailments. In many ways, their medical knowledge was far beyond what any royal physicians would be aware of.

“These stitches were done by a deft hand. I’m glad you at least have the royal physician looking after you. What happened though?” Dong Su asked as he took out the ointment.

“You won’t believe me when I tell you.”

Dan Ho relayed the entire events of the past four days to Sam Chul and Dong Su.

“The attack on the Princess’s procession might not have been about getting you in her guard.” Sam Chul noted. “It could have been a good chance to let you kill her.”

“The situation could have gone either way. We had a chance to kill the Princess. It could have easily looked like one of the bandits got to her. And if she didn’t die… well it would still make us look like her saviors. Everyone there risked their lives. We only got the recognition because the Prince pointed us out.”

“And because the Princess slapped you.”

“The Princess slapped you?” Sam Chul and Dong Su said in unison, eyes nearly falling out of their sockets. Dan Ho gave Hwang Rin the death glare.

“Regardless, the Prince got what he wanted… which worries me. The man isn’t some brainless brat who grew up with a silver spoon. He has brains. Which means double crossing him is out of the question.”

Dan Ho then told everyone about what happened with the guards and the duel.

“I am not sure whether that man was sent by the Prince or not.” Dan Ho admitted. “It doesn’t make sense for him to do so.”

“Unless he wanted you to get more attention somehow.” Sam Chul said.

Dan Ho thought about it. The event did manage to get him on closer to the Princess. Although whether that was a good thing or a bad thing was still under debate.

“The Princess didn’t even care for Dan Ho when he took the hit for her.” Hwang Rin said sourly. “That woman has no heart.”

Dan Ho neglected to mention how Song Hwa had been the one to tend to him. It would only lead him to be teased and he wanted none of it. Especially not after the scream fest they all had which Hwang Rin would never let Dan Ho forget.

“That was all we could find for now. We didn't get any chances to do a proper look over of the palace grounds. But we’ve gotten to know the Royal Guard’s ins and outs pretty well.” Dan Ho said as he put his shirt back on. With their ointment, the wound would heal faster than it would normally have. He would be back in action in just a couple of days.

“Yes. And now that Dan Ho will be part of the Princess’s entourage, it’ll be all the more easier to get to her.”

“Good. Now for our intel.” Dong Su brought forth a jar of sand and spilled it all out on the floor. He started first smoothing out the sand in a wide square shape, then as he spoke, he drew out a map of the palace. “We’ve been doing recon from the outside. Perimeter scoping. I’ve highlighted a couple of blind spots we may be able to use.” He marked the spots with ‘X’s. “We can use these two routes to escape on the night of the kill. And this pathway here for me and Sam Chul to enter.”

Dong Su pointed out all paths taken by the various maids, guards, servants, advisors, court visitors, royalty and any other human being that had anything to do inside and out the palace. Once everything was laid out in the sand, the assassins studied it and committed each path to memory. Then Dong Su erased the drawing, leaving no trace and replaced the sand back into the jar.

“If we do this right, we might be able to actually pull this off.” Sam Chul said, a little hopeful. “We might be able to get out of this mess.”

Dan Ho’s thoughts went to Eun Dan, a woman he had known half of his life. His friend and the woman his best friend loved. He knew Hwang Rin was thinking about her too from his expressions. Dan Ho put a comforting hand on Hwang Rin’s shoulder.

“Sam Chul’s right. We just might be able to do this.”

Chapter Text

Beauty

Once upon a time, a young girl named Hae Soo lived in a poor village with her two sisters. Hae Soo was known throughout the village for her beauty, both inside and out. Hae Soo had long, silken black hair, a face as fair as the moon, eyes wide with innocence and lips as red as blood. And despite the beauty that would make any woman arrogant, she was as gentle as a flower. She was kind to everyone, caring towards her sisters and innocent to a fault. With grace that could rival the Queen, she captured every man’s attention. Her sisters kept her hidden away in their little home, to keep her safe from prying eyes that may hold unwanted intentions.

But the young girl, full of wonder and excitement, would often sneak out from her home to roam around the woods nearby. She would wander among the trees, chase the little children playing about and collect herbs for her grandmother. She knew well enough to stay away from men and every time she would hear the chatter of deep voices or the deep footsteps of weary workers, she would hide herself among the trees, waiting silently till the coast was clear.

On one expedition to the woods, she faced such a situation. She was out collecting roots for her sister’s cold. As she looked about for the healing roots, she heard the click-clacking of horses running at full speed. Quick as a rabbit, she hid among the large bushes, making sure she couldn’t be seen. To her horror, she saw three men—with two chasing the third man who was wearing a large, black cloak. The two men were dressed in red uniforms and appeared to be part of the Royal Guard. The cloaked man’s clothes were torn and soaked in blood, he held on to his horse for dear life, but it toppled over right by the bush where Hae Soo was hiding.

The other men attacked the cloaked man who tried to fight back but failed. Hae Soo covered her mouth as she saw the cloaked man get stabbed by the guards. The cloaked man fell on the ground and lay there, unmoving. As the guards drew closer to check on the lifeless body, they heard a group of men passing by. Not wanting to be caught, the guards got on their horses and ran away. The cloaked man’s horse too ran away chasing after the guards.

Hae Soo sat in the bushes, holding her breath for a very long time. Some woodcutter passed by. And some animals. No one noticed the cloaked man. Hae Soo expected to be discovered at any moment, but no other soul wandered near her hiding place. Finally, she stood up, surveying the area before revealing herself completely.

She stared at the cloaked man who lay on the ground, bleeding. Hae Soo had heard about how often people were killed, but she had never seen a dead body before. She ventured towards the man to see if she could recognize him from anywhere. As she neared the body, she realized that the man wore a mask that covered half his face. Finding this to be odd, she reached out with a trembling hand, to remove the man’s mask. Suddenly, his hand shot up and grabbed her wrist. Hae Soo screamed and tried to back away but the man’s grip was strong.

“Don’t… don’t see my face.” The man said before passing out. Hae Soo ran. She ran and ran and ran all the way home where she told her older sisters about what she had seen.

“We must help him. He might still be alive.” Her eldest sister said.

“But he might be dangerous.” The second sister cautioned.

“No time for that. We can’t let someone die whilst there is still a chance to save them.”

The three of them went and fetched the man from the woods, carrying him in their handcart. They covered his body in a sheet to avoid any suspicion.

“No! Don’t remove his mask.” Hae Soo told her sister when she tried to do so. “He told me not to.”

The women tended to the man, nursing his wounds and feeding him whenever he gained consciousness. They took turns watching over him—Hae Soo would watch him in the day when her sisters were away at work. The eldest would watch him in the afternoons when she returned and the middle sister would watch him at night.

The man eventually became well enough to tell them his story. He was Lee Chang, one of the fourteen Princess of the Kingdom. His brother, tried to take away his right to the throne by having him killed. But because of the women, he survived. The Prince also revealed that his face had a hideous scar that he did not want anyone seeing. He appreciated that Hae Soo let him wear his mask instead of removing it.

The Prince promised the women riches and wealth if they would let him stay with them till he was well enough to ride. The women agreed, for they all wanted to help the Prince.

As the women spent time with the Prince, they each fell in love. The sisters agreed that they would try to win over the Prince, but that it would be a fair game. They promised to respect the Prince’s choice and not resent each other afterward.

“How can you two be so bold?” Hae Soo asked, blushing deeply. She felt shy about her feelings and refused to even admit she had any.

“My dear sister, when you reach our age, boldness is the only thing you have to sustain you.”

The eldest sister was more forthright. She asked the Prince in straight terms if he would consider her as one of his consorts. The Prince appreciated her candor, but said that he did not love her so he could not marry her.

The second sister was sneakier. She tried to appeal to the Prince with her body but that angered the Prince. He ordered her never to come near him again and warned that he would banish her if she approached him like this.

The Prince waited for Hae Soo to make her move. But the innocent girl never did. She simply tended to the Prince’s wounds and complained to him about her rabbits.

“Don’t you have something you want from me, Hae Soo?” The Prince asked.

“What could you possibly give to me that I don’t already have? I have a roof over my head, a meal for each day and a family that loves me. I have everything I need.”

The Prince was perplexed by this response, “But… what about something that you want?”

Hae Soo thought about it. “Want… No, I suppose there is nothing. Why? Is there something you want, Your Highness?”

The Prince, having spent his life surrounded by people who only wanted things from him, was surprised that someone would care about his own desires.

“What I want? What would you do, pretty Hae Soo, if I tell you what I want?”

“Why I will get it for you, of course! Tell me what you want, your Highness. I will get it for you. Tell me, do you desire one of my rabbits? Or flowers from the woods? I can also sing for you if you wish. Or perhaps you would like something to eat? I can cook for you.”

The Prince smiled and took Hae Soo’s hand in his. “My pretty Hae Soo, thank you for offering me your rabbits and flowers and your song and your food. I do not desire any of these things… what I desire… is you.”

And so, Prince Lee Chang chose Hae Soo as his consort. He was smitten not only by her outer beauty, but her inner purity and innocence. He took Hae Soo to the palace with her, rewarding her sisters in gold to keep them in comfort. Hae Soo lived on her days in the palace with the Prince, where the two of them lived happily ever after.

THE END.

Song Hwa ran a finger over the lower corner of the page. THE END, it read. She closed the story book shut just as her palace maid came up to her and said, “My Princess, your bath is ready for you.”

Song Hwa looked at her blankly. “What do you think happens to the characters once the story is over?” She held up the book. “Do you think that just because the ending is happy, the rest of their lives are happy too?”

The palace maid’s mouth opened slightly in confusion. She looked to the other maid for help. Song Hwa rolled her eyes and said, “Nevermind. Take me to my bath.”

The steaming water was infused with flowers and herbs to help keep Song Hwa young looking and healthy. It was also supposed to have relaxing properties. But despite the comforting water and the palace maids massaging her shoulders, Song Hwa felt all wound up.

“You are tense, my Princess.” The palace maid commented. Song Hwa chose not to respond. The maids tended to speak unnecessarily, and she didn’t want to encourage them. “You are so lucky, my Princess. Only the Queen gets to have such a special treatment. The King gifted these special bathing salts to you to help your skin appear fairer.”

After she was all washed up, the water in the bath was replaced with milk which too was fragrant with smells of flowers and herbal roots. All to make her skin softer, whiter and much more appealing to touch. Song Hwa silently listened as the various maids droned on and on about how beautiful Song Hwa would appear after her bath.

Eventually, the chatter became too grating for Song Hwa. She wanted the maids to shut up, and knew just how to do it.

“So, are you insinuating that I was ugly before?” She said in the calm tone that often indicated a hidden anger.

The maids all halted in their speech and passed worrying glances at each other. Song Hwa heard one maid faintly whisper to the one that had spoken, “You idiot! You made her angry!”

“What did I say?” The maid whispered back.

“Don’t you know how short tempered the Princess is? She would use any excuse to chop her head off.”

“Shut it! Both of you.” A third maid whispered.

Did these idiots not know she could hear them? Song Hwa chose to pretend that she hadn’t heard a word.

The senior palace maid wisely spoke up, “We-We meant no offence, y-your Highness. Forgive us for creating such an impression.” The women all bowed in panic.

Song Hwa sighed. “Forget it. What’s next?”

After her skin had been thoroughly pruned by the milk, Song Hwa was led away to another room where creams and oils were massaged into her skin and into her wet hair.

“This will help your hair appear silkier. Queen Yoo also applies this to her head and all women in the Kingdom envies her long, dark locks.”

Song Hwa wished she could ask the maids to stop talking, but she knew a Princess stating such a thing would carry unnecessary weight and might cause the maids to panic more. After the scare her previous statement had caused, Song Hwa chose to keep her thoughts to herself.

Once the oils and creams were applied and Song Hwa’s skin had become as soft as a child’s, the maids moved on to dressing her. Today she had a lavish pink and white hanbok, made from the finest silks and decorated with delicately embroidered flowers.

After the dressing was complete, color was applied to Song Hwa’s face to make her appear prettier. Powder on her face made her look even more fairer, color on her lips made them appear red and black powder around her eyes made them appear wider.

Once done, the Princess was shown herself in the mirror.

Long, silken black hair, and a face as fair as the moon. Eyes wide with innocence and lips as red as blood. Is this what Hae Soo looked like?

The Princess ran her fingers through her long, silken black hair. She saw her reflection in the mirror and felt like she was staring at a stranger. The pale skin, made whiter by the powder on her face, made her seem like a ghost. The hint of pink on her cheeks felt out of place and her lips, colored red, were pressed in a hard, mirthless line. The extra black around her eyes was supposed to make them wider but it made her appear more cunning than usual.

“You look beautiful, Princess.” The maids beamed in pride at their hard work. Song Hwa’s throat felt dry.

Beauty was a curse for women. Song Hwa didn’t want the attention this attire would get her. She knew exactly why she was being prepared like a sacrificial lamb was prepared for its slaughter. This was her father’s way of forcing her to be chosen for marriage. A union born from some political gain, no doubt. A marriage to quite possibly an some wrinkly greybeard who already has too many consorts to his name and who bedded his women for only his own pleasure and nothing else. Song Hwa felt trapped. The walls of her room seemed to have shrunk for some reason. She looked at the maids standing about, waiting to be praised for their hard work. She felt a great violence towards all of them.

“I believe that this is enough. Leave me.” She commanded, waving a dismissive hand towards the maids.

The maids all looked at each other, disgruntled by how ungrateful the Princess was behaving towards them after they had worked so hard to make her so presentable.

“Leave!” Song Hwa yelled, finding it hard to breathe in the tightly wrapped court dress. The women all left, whispering among themselves about how ill-mannered the Princess was.

Song Hwa knew this behavior would only add fuel to her already damned reputation. And no doubt the news of this little outburst would reach the ears of her step-mother, Queen Yoo who would use this information to gain favor with her father. But Song Hwa couldn’t worry about Queen Yoo. She had more pressing matters to attend to.

Gathering her wits, she calmed herself and prepared to leave. The guards came to fetch her for the meeting. Among them was the man who had saved her life not once but twice.

“I see you have healed quite fast.” She said to him as the entourage walked her to the court dining hall.

“Yes, your Highness.” Either the was smart enough to know that she wouldn’t want him mentioning how she tended to him, or foolish enough not to use her actions to show off his importance. Regardless of the reason, Song Hwa was glad that people were unaware that a Princess had shown any concern for a mere guard. Such news would have made Queen Yoo squeal with joy. It would have been the perfect scandal to use against her. Song Hwa had been foolish to even risk it in the first place.

The court dining hall was already full of people. The King and Queen sat on their seats, a little removed from the long row of state councilmen who sat at the table, chatting amiably amongst themselves.

“You are late, Princess.” Her father, the King, reprimanded as soon as Song Hwa’s arrival was announced.

All eyes turned to her as she took her place between the Queen and her sisters. She stood out with her pale face and rosy cheeks. Her long silken hair shined in the light of the lamps and the jewels handing from her ears and neck glittered like water. Song Hwa felt a little overdressed for the occasion. But then, that had been the point.

“Apologies, great father. But as you know, we women could spend endless hours preparing ourselves.” Song Hwa lowered herself in apology. Her statement was bait. She was hoping her brother would take it.

“Wasn’t it you, sister, who argued that this stereotype against women was incorrect?” Her brother said. Song Hwa smiled.

“Did I? I must have forgotten. You know how fickle the female mind can be.” Song Hwa smiled sweetly. Her brother smiled back but his smile didn’t reach his eyes. 

“Fickle, yes. And forgetful. Not a great trait for someone the Kingdom looks to for leadership.” Young Hwa continued in an obvious attempt to sully his sister’s name.

I bet he is thinking that by saying such things, he will make Father think I am an unfit Princess. Little did Young Hwa know, that this was exactly what Song Hwa wanted her father to think. An unfit Princess was unfit to marry.

“Oh brother, you know so much better than I.” Song Hwa surprised Young Hwa by agreeing with him. The Crown Prince had been expecting some biting remarks that Song Hwa was typically known for.

“Sit. We must begin our welcome to the State Councilor’s son.” The King announced, unamused by his children’s antics.

Councilman Cho’s son? Song Hwa thought darkly, He’s the one I am being presented to?

Song Hwa eyed the Chief State Councilor Cho who sat beside Young Hwa. He was a handsome man, of tall height and muscular build. He had fought alongside her father in many wars before he had become King. Her father trusted Chief Councilman Cho’s advice above all else. Even his own daughters.

This dinner had been called among the state councilors to welcome Councilman Cho’s son, Cho Beom Pal. He had returned from reclaiming a captured valley in the north and was being honored by the King for his achievements.

Cho Beom Pal sat on the other end of the table and was waited on hand and foot by various maids and servants. Like his father, Cho Beom Pal was handsome and well built. And like his father, he appeared arrogant and cruel. He leaned against his chair, spreading his legs in a most unseemly manner, as if he was King and not her father. Song Hwa hated him instantly. Just from a glance she could tell that he was the type of person who would manipulate his woman to keep her in her box. Song Hwa felt suffocated with just the thought of him being a husband to any woman.

The King began his address to the Councilman’s Son. Song Hwa drowned out her father’s words as she covertly tried to look around for the one person whose presence always offered her reprieve from the stuffy affairs of the state.

A few high ranking guards were present and sure enough, Chung Myung sat among them, watching her father as he spoke. Look at me. Look at me, Song Hwa willed through her mind. But the Captain never turned. Song Hwa was disappointed. If she was dressed so exuberantly, then at least Chung Myung should see her. Surely, when he saw her, he would see how beautiful she was. He would see that Song Hwa was better than any commoner that Chung Myung would end up marrying.

But no, Chung Myung’s eyes ever wandered from the King. And after the speech was done, he went back to conversing with his fellow guards without even passing a glance her way. The only person who was looking at her was Cho Beom Pal. His leering gaze made Song Hwa want to throw up. No man would have dared look at the Princess with such open intentions. But Song Hwa knew that Beom Pal had reason to be so callous.

“What is wrong Princess. Do you not like the feast laid before you?” The second Princess asked in mock worry. Song Hwa knew the woman was only trying to run salt in her wounds. It was obvious to everyone why only the oldest Princess was dressed so heavily at a dinner that was held to welcome a most eligible bachelor.

“A woman should eat in moderation, lest she start to look portly. But I see that you do not care for such vanity, my dear sister. All the well, your greatest appeal is your… personality.” Song Hwa retorted, forcing some meat down her dry throat.

The second Princess’s eyes blazed in fury. Her nostrils flared and her mouth shrank as she held back the curses she desperately wanted to hurl a bowl at Song Hwa. The third Princess placed a hand on her sister to calm her anger. Song Hwa heard them whisper.

“Why engage with her? She is always so rude.”

“Forget that, do you see her face? She is painted like a prostitute.”

No one heard these whispers. They were only meant for Song Hwa’s ears.

Queen Yoo, took a sip from her cup and with the cup still hiding her mouth, added, “You look like your mother. She dressed like a harlot too.”

Song Hwa suddenly saw red. Quietly and deliberately, she said, “Queen Yoo, I didn’t hear you properly. Could you repeat your words?”

The Queen smiled, not backing down. Loudly, she stated, “I said, you look just like your mother.”

Song Hwa would have held herself in, but she felt angry and she needed to give Beom Pal a reason to reect her. Always one to kill two birds with one stone, Song Hwa decided to take this chance to cause the Queen some pain and cause herself to be removed from the table. In a display of rage, she swiped away the plates on the table, screamed at the top of her lungs and grabbed the Queen by her  the Queen.

“Princess! Calm yourself!” The palace maids tried to hold back Song Hwa but she proved too strong for them. The guards had to grab her arms to keep her from causing further damage.

“Your Highness, see what your daughter is doing!” The Queen yelled as Song Hwa yanked at her hair. “This is what the Princess has become! An animal!”

A strong hand gripped Song Hwa’s wrist in a very strange way. He pressed his fingers at key nerve points and as if by magic, Song Hwa’s fingers became loose. She looked at Park Dan Ho’s unaffected expression as he pulled her away from the Queen.

“Unhand me.”

“You should know by now that your commands don’t work on me.”

Song Hwa raised her other hand to hit Dan Ho, but he easily grabbed her it too, disarming her. The palace maids grabbed Song Hwa by the waist, dragging her away. Her father’s angry glare assured her that there would be repercussions for this. But Song Hwa didn’t care. As she looked out into the shocked faces of the councilmen and the repulsed look on Beom Pal’s face, she couldn’t help but grin.

The Queen saw Song Hwa’s grin and looked at her in bewilderment. “Dear God, she’s gone mad. She’s actually smiling.”

“Take the Princess to her rooms. Make sure she doesn’t leave. I will be visiting her tomorrow when she has regained some of her sanity.” The King ordered.

Song Hwa was dragged away to her rooms where in she immediately pulled out the various ornaments stuck in her hair and unwrapped the hanbok that seemed to be choking her. She wiped the color from her lips and eyes, rinsing her face with water. She looked like a madwoman in the mirror.

She laughed to herself. The Queen must have thought she won tonight by provoking Song Hwa, but instead, she did Song Hwa a favor.

A soft tap-tap-tap came from one of the windows of her rooms. The quick beat of it was a familiar sound she often looked forward to.

“You can get in trouble for being here.” She said as soon as she opened the window.

“Taking risks is part of my job.” Chung Myung said. “How are you doing?”

“I have had worse dinners than this.”

“I can imagine. What was with all of the…” Chung Myung passed his eyes over Song Hwa’s strange appearance.

“My father had me dress up for Cho Beom Pal. He’s going to have me marry that savage man.”

“Has the King said so?”

“He doesn’t have to. I know he will. Tonight wasn’t about honoring Beom Pal. Father was trying to offer me up to the Chief Councilor as a daughter-in-law.”

“It would certainly be an advantageous marriage. The Cho clan has quite a strong hold on the north and west.”

Song Hwa avoided Chung Myung’s eyes, “You would be okay with entering a loveless marriage?”

“Political marriages don’t have to be loveless. With the way Beom Pal was looking at you tonight, it was certain he liked you.”

“You noticed him looking at me?” Song Hwa’s eyes lit up with hope. Chung Myung noticed another man looking at her. Certainly, that was a sign of jealousy. And jealousy was a sign that Chung Myung wasn’t entirely indifferent to her.

“Of course. I was trying to get his opinion on the weapon’s budget and he kept ignoring my inquiries to gawk at you.” Chung Myung complained.

Song Hwa’s face became flat. “Ah, my poor Captain and his worn-out weapons,” she said dryly.

“My men need better artillery! And no one takes me seriously!” Chung Myung said comically. Song Hwa laughed at his over-the-top frustration.

“It is a pity my father does not welcome women on his council. Otherwise, I could have gotten you your budget.” Song Hwa said lightheartedly. But Chung Myung took her words seriously.

“The idea of you being on the council might not be too farfetched. I have heard some councilors saying how you seem to have a good head on your shoulders. Your father too seems to agree, that you are brighter than your brother.”

Song Hwa’s smile fell. “My father said that?”

“I only heard rumors though, so don’t quote me.”

“Don’t worry I won’t.” Song Hwa said absently.

“Are you sure you are okay?” Chung Myung asked again.

Song Hwa took a second to unabashedly stare at his face before replying, “I am fine, Captain. You should get going before someone sees you.”

“Alright, Princess. Have a good night’s rest.”

Song Hwa watched him walk away, all the way till she could no longer see his form. Out of everyone in the palace, Chung Myung was the only person who was ever sincere with Song Hwa. Her maids simply wanted to gossip about her, her sisters wanted to disgrace her, and everyone else just wanted to use her for her position.

As Song Hwa got ready for bed, she picked up the book of fairytales from before. The story of Hae Soo and her sisters was a well known fable that her maid used to read to her as a child. Song Hwa felt jealous of Hae Soo and her beauty. Perhaps if Song Hwa had been as beautiful and innocent as the girl in the story, some Prince, or rather a certain Captain, would have rescued her from this miserable life a long time ago.

~~~~~~~

Braun

Once upon a time, there was a headstrong girl by the name of Ji Ahn. Ji Ahn was born taller than most girls, and as strong as most men. Using her strength, Ji Ahn used to help her father do trade and travel among the various cities of the Kingdom. Her father was a disabled tradesman who had once been a soldier with much potential to rise among the ranks and gain nobility. Unfortunately, before he even had the chance to show his talents, he suffered a nearly fatal injury that cost him his arm and his ability to serve his Kingdom. Having retired early, her father decided to spend the rest of his days taking care of his motherless daughter.

While it was unusual for a woman to fight, Ji Ahn’s father still taught her the ways of the sword and the bow. He showed her his secret tips for handling the weapons and even had his soldier friends train her in hand to hand combat.

Ji Ahn showed an aptitude for the skill and soon surpassed even her father in her ability to fight and strategize. Having grown up without the restraint of propriety, Ji Ahn lived as she pleased, without any worry or care about her gender and the rules that society ran on.

“Papa, why don’t you ever scold me for not wearing a dress?” Ji Ahn asked her father one day. “Jin Hee’s father screamed at her today when she tried dressing like me.”

“Women normally wear dresses, not pants and tunics. But it will be hard for you to fight in them. That is why I dressed you like this.”

“But shouldn’t I wear dresses? Jin Hee says it is improper for a woman to dress like me.” Ji Ahn scrunched up her nose as she recalled Jin Hee’s scathing remarks.

“You can wear a dress if you want to, my dearest. But do not do something just because others are doing it. Use this,” her father put his hand over her head, “your brain to make decisions for yourself. Live the life you want, my child. Not the life others want you to have.”

“Are you living the life you want, Papa?”

Ji Ahn’s father sighed and paused. “I had once wanted to become the greatest swordsman of the Kingdom. I could have earned us a much better life but… this,” he held up his unmoving hand that had been rendered useless by nerve damage, “this keeps me away from it all. However, you remain my one and truly greatest achievement, Ji Ahn. I am forever grateful that I get to be your father.”

Ji Ahn hugged her father and vowed to herself, that if her father couldn’t live his dream, then she would achieve it for him.

Every year, the Kingdom held a tournament where fighters from all corners of every city were invited to prove their talent. Commoners and noblemen alike fought and competed to become champion. The tournament allowed commoners a chance to rise above the ranks and it also helped the Kingdom recruit talented soldiers. And while many commoners attempted to win the tournament no one had ever managed to get past the first few rounds. None of the commoners ever had the means to learn enough skill to win such a tournament. They always failed to the noblemen who had been trained by the best of teachers.

That year, the year that Ji Ahn competed, barriers were broken not only for commoners, but for women as well.

There was no law prohibiting women from participating. The law did not exist because no one had ever thought that a woman would be interested in such activities. As it was, Ji Ahn was the first woman to ever apply. And despite the resistance from the other participants, the councilors that oversaw the tournament could not prevent her from joining.

“Do not worry, my fellow men. There is no way a woman could pass even the first round.”

That councilman had to eat his own words when Ji Ahn not only passed the first round, but also managed to win her city’s championship and qualify for the final rounds that were held in the capital city.

It was in the capital, that Ji Ahn met an arrogant young warrior by the name of Deok Hwa. Deok Hwa was a capital native and had won the tournament in the previous year. He claimed he would be the undefeated champion for that year’s tournament too.

“A woman, huh? The King’s going to love this.” Deok Hwa laughed when he saw Ji Ahn in the battle ground. “Pick your weapon, my Lady. I will let you choose for this round.”

“You don’t want to put up a fit about fighting a woman?” Ji Ahn asked, surprised by Deok Hwa’s response. Till now, all of the fighters had claimed that they would not fight Ji Ahn because she was a woman. This claim would then be retracted when the men would realize Ji Ahn’s skills.

“Why would I? You’re here for a fight, aren’t you? Unless you are looking for special treatment. In which case I would suggest you look elsewhere. I don’t dole out special treatment for anybody.”

Like all of the men before him, Deok Hwa too found himself face down on the ground while Ji Ahn poked his back with her sword.

“Had enough?” She asked, grinning.

“Not a chance.”

Deok Hwa put up an impressive fight. Ji Ahn almost lost a couple of times but eventually, she emerged the victor. Ji Ahn won the tournament that year, defeating every man who had gone against her. This win was unprecedented and King Lee Chang himself invited her to the palace to receive her reward.

It was here that Ji Ahn was informed that not only was Deok Hwa the champion from last year’s tournament, but also the General of King Lee Chang’s army. Ji Ahn was invited to become a Colonel under the General’s tutelage.

Ji Ahn accepted and became the first woman to join the Kingdom’s army. When she returned home, her father greeted her with open arms and tears in his eyes. His daughter had earned him his dream and they could now live easy lives amongst the noblemen.

THE END.

Song Hwa raged against the wooden post while she attacked it—quite sloppily—with her sword. Her frustration over the confining life of the palace was growing by the minute. It was exacerbated by Beom Pal’s arrival. Her sources confirmed her suspicions that the Cho family was looking to secure a line to the throne and the sure way to do that was to marry one of the Princesses.

“Curse being born the eldest. Curse my stupid age and curse that stupid Beom Pal. Curse everyone to hell!”

The Cho family had always had their sights set on the throne. And Song Hwa would not have cared for this useless ambition had it not meant danger to her family. No one ever chased after the throne without first destroying the ruling clan. It was what had happened to the King who came before her father. And that King had done the same to the previous ruler.

This was how dynasties in their Kingdom continued: through violence and betrayal. The fact that the Cho clan chose a more peaceful resolution towards their goal was admirable. Song Hwa would have appreciated it more if it hadn’t involved her sacrificing herself.

She whacked at the wooden pole again and again till her arms hurt. She liked this pain. It was something one earned after great effort and hard work. Song Hwa’s blows were strong and managed to cut into the wood, but she lacked the precision and practice of even the low ranking fighters of the royal guard.

Song Hwa wished she could fight properly. But alas, she was a woman and it was considered improper for a lady to learn such a trade. Ji Ahn might have broken boundaries in her time, but no one else was able to follow in her footsteps. Ji Ahn remained to this day the only female warrior in the Kingdom’s army. She had eventually risen up the ranks and become General, but no one knew what happened to her afterward. Her story was lost in time and wasn’t even considered important enough to record. Her legend became a thing of fairytales and therein it remained.

With each new strike, the sword felt heavier. Song Hwa’s wrist ached as did her arms and shoulders.

“You’re holding it wrong.”

“Chung Myung.” Song Hwa started, surprised by the Captain’s sudden appearance.

Chung Myung gently grabbed her hand and took the sword from her. “Here. You hold it like this.” Song Hwa held in her breath as he put his hand over hers, showing her the angle to curl her fingers around the hilt. She appeared unaffected when he let go of her hand but she could not stop the small shiver that went down her spine.

“Try it now.”

Indeed, it was much easier to wield the sword like this. But the blade was still too heavy. Song Hwa’s body was not equipped to handle such a weapon. She found this to be incredibly frustrating and equally humiliating.

Chung Myung let Song Hwa have a moment’s peace while she tried her hand at the sword again. Eventually, he made his purpose known. “Your father has sent me to fetch you, Princess.”

“I don’t want to see him right now.” Song Hwa admitted in a small voice.

“You might not have a choice in the matter.”

“I never have any choice in any matter.” Song Hwa sighed. “Very well. Lead the way.”

It was just her father in the small office when Song Hwa entered. He ordered Chung Myung to leave as well, giving the father and daughter some privacy.

“Sit.” The King ordered. Song Hwa obeyed although she slowed her steps leading up to her seat. Carefully, she sat down, folding her legs beneath her.

People often compared Song Hwa to her father, saying their faces were quite similar. Song Hwa didn’t see the resemblance. Her father’s face was a mask of deceit. He appeared cordial and welcoming, with a wise look about him. But Song Hwa knew him better. She knew the cunning behind his warm brown eyes, and the wrinkled lines on his face that hardened when he got angry. She knew how well he lied and how easily he manipulated the people around him.

Song Hwa was about the only one who knew the full truth about her father. She wondered if this was the reason that despite being a misogynist, he favored her over all of her siblings.

“You are not as irrational as to let your feelings for Queen Yoo misguide you.” He began and even in just once statement, he revealed many things. That Song Hwa hated the second Queen. That Song Hwa hid this hatred. And, that Song Hwa was smart enough not to let her emotions lead her actions. “So, as I understand it, your little stunt was to deter Beom Pal’s attention. Which leads me to ask, who told you? Who revealed to your that I had planned to give away your hand in marriage to the Cho clan?”

Song Hwa appreciated that her father didn’t beat around the bush. He normally did so with others, but at least with his eldest daughter, he maintained a strange form of honesty.

“What makes you think I knew?”

“Come now, child! You find your father that foolish? You wanted to set a bad impression. There was no one else there who’s change of opinion would have any impact on your life other than Beom Pal’s. Unless you already knew what I had in store for you both.”

Reluctantly, Song Hwa smiled. Despite their differences, she and her father thought the same way. “Noone told me, Father. I figured out your plan on my own.” She admitted, almost proudly. Like it was something the father and daughter could share. “You pushed me to dress well for the occasion and you have never done so before. I have passed the marriageable age which means you are now on the look out for my suitor. And the Cho clan have considerable power in the kingdom. You would want to avoid the Cho clan getting out of control. Ergo, a political marriage to achieve two things in one stroke.”

“Three things, my child. You forget, your brother needs punishing too.”

Song Hwa blinked in confusion. “I don’t think I understand.”

The King waved his hand dismissively, “It does not matter. You don’t need to concern with the politics of men.”

Song Hwa nodded obediently. Not because she believed it wasn’t her concern, but because obtaining information from her father was futile. Once he decided to conceal something, he would never reveal it. She would figure out his statement on her own.

“But I am proud you. You have inherited my brain, if not anything else. Perhaps your mother was good for something after all.”

Song Hwa kept her face still. She had something else to achieve today. She would fight for her mother’s dignity some other time.

Her father continued, “Since you are smart enough to understand my designs, I expect you will be wise enough to not go against them.”

“Father—”

“You will marry Beom Pal. He is a good soldier, and he has proven his worth to me time and time again.”

“But Father—”

“No buts! You will do as instructed. Women are most useful when they do not argue.”

“Father please—”

“Do. Not. Argue. With me!”

Song Hwa clamped her mouth shut. Tears threatened to fall but she willed them to stay. She had to think fast. She had to come up with a way to change her father’s mind. Because it was one thing to spend an entire childhood in the suffocating life of the palace. It was quite another to live the same life as an adult.

“I understand, Father.” Song Hwa said to placate the King. “However, I do wonder if the Cho clan is the best option for my marriage.”

This piqued her father’s interest. “Which other clan as a strong a hold over the Kingdom as the Cho clan?”

“The Cho clan may have a strong hold, but only because the people fear them. Fear is a great motivator to keep people in line. But Father, I have found that respect is far more potent. And the people respect the Go clan. And now that one of their own, Go Chung Myung, has proven his worth as the Captain—”

Song Hwa never got to finish her sentence. A sharp slap in the face nearly slammed her head onto the floor. She struggled to breathe as her cheek became red with a throbbing pain.

“You dare use such manipulation on me?” Her father’s tone was grave, his voice low and menacing. He was half standing in his anger. “You dare try to scheme against your King? Your ruler? I am far superior to the commoners and guards you string around and play your stupid games with, you plague of a child! Who do you think you are you impudent, insolent, WENCH?!” The King’s nostrils flared as his eyes blazed with white hot rage. He leaned over his daughter who was still on the ground, too scared to move.

Her father’s outbursts always came as a surprise. His anger always reared its ugly head just as suddenly as it passed. She never knew what might become a trigger, which was why she always spoke carefully around him.

But being careful right now wasn’t an option. This was about Song Hwa’s life. This decision could make her miserable for the rest of her days. If she didn’t speak now, it would all be over.

“Who do I think I am? I… I thought I was your daughter, your Majesty. I thought you would want me to be happy when I got married.” The tears started pouring now. Leaving hot, salty trails over her face.

The King scoffed. “Women. Always so sentimental. It is this weakness that is your undoing, Princess. You would do better by killing this sentimentality.” he spat out the word.

“I am your daughter before I am a Princess.” Song Hwa sat up. This earned her another slap which sent her back to facing the cool, marble floor. She thought it best to stay down this time till her father’s anger had simmered.

“I have heard enough of this nonsense. You will marry Cho Beom Pal. I will have the arrangements made.” He leaned in closer, speaking quietly. “Do not fight me on this. You have not yet seen my true anger. Do not tempt me to reveal it to you.”

With this, the King left. Song Hwa lay on the floor, paranoid that he might return for another row. But after a few minutes passed and she was sure that the King was well and truly gone, she forced herself to sit up.

Her hair had come undone, wisps fell about her face as her hair pin dangled on one side. Her eyes felt swollen as did her left cheek. She knew she looked pathetic. And that made her cry even more.

A hand reached out, offering a handkerchief to wipe away her tears. Her eyes went up the hand, to the arm, to the face of a guard. He looked oddly desperate and sad. As if he couldn’t bear to look at her this way.

“Please do not cry, Princess.” He offered the handkerchief again.

Sympathy. A lowly guard was showing her sympathy. She, who was the Princess and the daughter of his ruler. She was being pitied and looked down upon by someone of a lower rank and existence. That was how pathetic she was.

Anger replaced her despair and suddenly Song Hwa’s face hardened. “You… you insolent guard. You think you can simply order me and tell me what to do? Who do you think I am?”

“Princess, I—”

Song Hwa sprang up to her feet. “Shut up! Just shut up! I should have your tongue cut out! I should have you thrown into prison! How dare you offer me this—” she snatched the handkerchief and threw it on the ground, “this pathetic whatever this is and how dare you expect me to receive such an insolent sentiment. Aren’t men not supposed to be sentimental? Yet here you are, you stupid imbecile!” She pushed the guard. “Get away! Get away from me!” She kept pushing and pushing at the guard till his back was against the wall.

It felt nice, hurting instead of being hurt. Song Hwa liked this feeling of having power over another person. It made her feel less pitiful, less like a helpless little girl. She almost understood why her father was the way he was. “Listen here, do not ever speak to me again. Your rank is too low to have even the privilege of looking my way. You lot always try to get close to my kind, always try to befriend a royal just so you can get some sort of favor. Well guess what? We barely remember you. All of you pathetic losers look the same. You are all beneath us. And you will never have the intelligence to even comprehend why you are so inferior. But you are, inferior in every way!” She pushed him back a final time, slamming him against the wall.

Eyes blazing, she slammed open the doors to the room where the rest of her guards were waiting. They jumped at her arrival. “Nobody follow me.” She commanded. The guards knew better than to go against her words.

“I told you not to go in there.” Song Hwa heard one guard say.

“Now we’ll all get in trouble.”

“Everyone knows Princess Song Hwa’s temperament. She’s too cruel for any kindness.”

Song Hwa couldn’t hear any more once she had gone around the corner. She knew she had overreacted. And now Queen Yoo would hear of this incident too; another thing she would use against Song Hwa. No doubt the guard would now leave her entourage and join Queen Yoo’s instead. The Queen was known for her gentle demeanor and saccharine attitude. A honey trap for the flies.

The palace felt too confining. She needed air and fresh grass. She needed a place where there weren’t any people. Song Hwa looked about to see if the coast was clear. She couldn’t see anyone about in the halls, but then again, someone could always be hiding. Taking the chance, she slipped through the corridor, through a room that held a secret passage. The passage led to the farther grounds of the palace that few people knew about.

Song Hwa poked her head out of the hidden opening in the wall to check if anyone was about. There was no one. She could breathe easily now.

A lake ran through this part of the palace grounds. The grass was a bit unkempt and had grown tall due to neglect, but Song Hwa preferred it that way. It allowed her to feel safe and unseen.

Song Hwa washed up her face in the lake water. It was freezing and felt good against her pulsating cheek. Putting a wet hand on the base of her neck also calmed her. She took out the pins and ties in her hair, letting it fly loose in the wind and leaned back against the tree on the shore. She closed her eyes, hoping to wipe recent memory from her brain, but she couldn’t. A deadline loomed over her head. She would be getting married soon, and to a man who belonged to the most vicious and cruel clan in the Kingdom.

As a child, Song Hwa had seen many things: the ignorant life of privilege that she and her siblings enjoyed, the destruction of clans that were innocent of any crime, the needless killing of men over land, and of course, the death of her mother after the emotional abuse put forth by her father and his consorts.

Song Hwa had promised herself that she would get out of this life once she was a grown adult. She had promised herself she would not let her privilege make her lose her humanity. She would make herself learn the reality of people less fortunate than her. She would not cause innocent lives to be taken. She would save them instead, by learning medicine. SHe would not partake in a loveless marriage like her mother had. She would marry someone who genuinely wanted her, who would cherish her and care for her.

These promises had kept her going all these years. They had given her hope for the future, for a time to look forward to. Alas, not one of those promises had been fulfilled. She was known as a cruel princess who abused her servants. She wasn’t allowed to practice medicine as it was considered a profession unbecoming of her rank. And now, she would be marrying a man she barely knew, purely because of their familial ties and nothing more.

Once more, Song Hwa felt pathetic. Nothing about her life made sense, nothing about her life was part of her own choice. Tears welled up in her eyes again and this time she let them fall freely. She balled herself up, hugging her knees and cried like the little girl she felt she still was. She cried till her sleeve was soaked in tears and snot and she had nothing else to wipe her nose on.

“Will you take this now?” A handkerchief appeared in front of her again.

“Aah!” Song Hwa yelled as she backed away in shock. “Where did you come from?” She clutched her chest, eyes nearly falling out of their sockets.

The guard was back again, this time looking unamused and unafraid. “Take it, you clearly need it.”

With snot running down her nose, Song Hwa had no choice but to take the handkerchief. “Did you follow me? How did you find me? I didn’t hear anyone, how did you come here? Were you watching me all this time?”

The guard scratched his ear, ignoring all of Song Hwa’s questions. He stood quietly while Song Hwa blew her nose in the handkerchief and wiped her tears. She offered the wet cloth back to him.

“Courtesy dictates you get that cleaned before you return it. Or do you believe your mucus is worth some gold?”

Song Hwa glared at him. “I can get you hanged for that.”

With a tired groan, the guard sat beside her, almost bumping shoulders. “If you wanted me hanged, you would have done so already.”

This was an odd position for the Princess. On the one hand, she was greatly offended. How dare this useless guard behave so familiarly with her? She had half a mind to have him publicly flayed. On the other hand… she didn’t mind his company. Which made things even more odd, since the only company she enjoyed was Chung Myung’s.

“Oh, believe me, I want you hanged. I just haven’t had the time to issue the punishment.” Song Hwa knew the argument was weak. But she still had her pride and it refused to yield to the guard.

The guard laughed. A soft, airy chuckle. His shoulders shook with mirth as he revealed a wide, shark like grin. His high, pinched cheekbones became pink. He was laughing at her but again—very oddly—she didn’t mind.

“Well, if you do issue the punishment, remember to get my name right. I don’t want some innocent guard getting hanged instead of me,” he said with a twinkle in his eye.

The Princess scoffed, “Tch. What a ridiculous thing to say. Of course, I will remember. Park. Dan. Ho. There is no other guard with that name.”

Dan Ho’s brows shot up, “Oooh. I’m surprised you remember me. I would have thought you got all of us guards confused with each other, given how you can barely remember losers like me.”

Song Hwa’s face contorted in pain as she remembered her behavior just a while back. She looked away, feeling her face go hot in embarrassment. Her conscience informed her that now was the time to apologize to the man for overacting earlier. But her pride kept the words lodged in her throat. The Princess could not bear to lower herself to a guard and admit her mistake.

But she could admit something else. Something she wasn’t sure she should say, but felt it was better than saying nothing. She looked back at him, eyes following the hairline on his forehead, the bridge of his nose, right down to the point of his chin. Her eyes went back to his. He was watching her with curiosity.

“Yours isn’t a face one can easily forget.”

A pink on his cheeks became bright red. He looked away, suddenly feeling the need to clear his throat. “You are quite bold, Princess.”

Princess Song Hwa sighed. “It’s not an advance towards you. It’s…” She looked at his face intently. “You remind me of someone. Someone from a long time ago. Someone the Kingdom seems to have forgotten.”

Before Dan Ho could ask her what she meant by saying such cryptic words, Song Hwa got up. She had already said too much. She couldn’t allow herself to remain in his presence. She felt like she would say something else that would come back to bite her.

“You have helped me too many times now. I am in your debt. So let me repay it with this advice. Do not let my father see you. He is not as reasonable as I.”

“Why? What would he—”

The Princess was already walking away, leaving a baffled Dan Ho behind. “Like I said, yours isn’t a face once can forget.”

~~~~~~~

Brain

The Princesses were all gathered around, lounging on silk sofas, eating sweets and spilling tea as they laughed and gossiped. Should Queen Yoo or any of the elders have been around, they would have fainted in shock as the Princesses were known as the symbol of utmost grace and poise. But no one knew that when left to their own devices, the Princesses proved as rowdy as any soldier or sailor.

Even Song Hwa skulked in one corner, lying on her back with her legs stretched out in a most unseemly manner. Her eyes were on her book but her eyes were on her sisters. Several books lay about—on the table, on the floor, poking out of shelves, half shoved in, half falling out. Thrown about without a care; half open, facing down. Song Hwa was reading a book on astrology. The other Princesses were laughing over fairytales.

“Shall I tell you a story, my dear sisters?!” The second Princess got on top of a table and asked the third and fourth Princess, leaving Song Hwa out.

“Here, here! Tell us your story!” The third and fourth Princesses declared, laughing.

The second Princess read from the book. “Once upon a time, a young girl named Hae Soo lived in a poor village with her two sisters…”

Song Hwa rolled her eyes as her sister recited the story of Hae Soo and how she and the Prince lived happily ever after. She cringed as her sisters squealed over the ending.

“Can you imagine? Being swept off your feet by a Prince?” The fourth Princess said in a daze as she rolled over on the plush sofa.

“I bet we can get twice as many men,” The fourth Princess held up an oval hand mirror to admire her own reflection. “I am fairer than Hae Soo.”

“Read another one! Another one!” The fourth Princess hugged a cushion to her chest as she pleaded with her sister.

“Well…” The second Princess bent down to pick through the other books spilled over the table. She picked up and threw away a couple of books before she got to one she liked. “Aa-ha!” She stood tall again on the table. Song Hwa kept one eye on her sister, lest she fall down and hurt herself.

The second Princess held the book up. “Ladies! Shall I tell you a story?”

“Here, here! Tell us your story!”

The Princess opened the book and read, “Once upon a time, there was a headstrong girl by the name of Ji Ahn. Ji Ahn was born taller—”

The Princess read out the legend of Ji Ahn as her two sisters avidly listened. Song Hwa tried to concentrate on her book but her eyes kept flicking to the second Princess, who stood on the table like an announcer.

“Can you imagine? A woman becoming a war General?” The fourth Princess said dreamily.

“I could never. How unsightly would it be if we started picking up swords,” The third Princess turned up her nose.

“The legend of General Ji Ahn happens to be my favorite.” The second Princess said, finally sitting down albeit on the table. Her legs dangled off the edge as she tried to sift through the pile of books for another story. “Let’s see here. Which should we tell next?”

The third Princess sat up straight, leaning towards her sisters. “How about something that isn’t in any book? One that actually happened and in the recent past.”

Her two sisters all perked up their ears and leaned in closer. Song Hwa nonchalantly tilted her head to listen better.

“Is this like the time you told us the story about the ghost that lives in Mother’s room?” The fourth Princess asked.

“Ugh. Please don’t do that again. Mother made us memorize so many scriptures after that debacle.” The second Princess said.

“No, no, no! I promise this time I have a genuine tale to tell. One that even you would enjoy.” The third Princess lowered her voice and with great dramatic effect, spoke, “So how about it? Shall I tell you a story? About the assassin, and the Queen? About how he was sent to kill her, but fell in love instead?”

The second and fourth Princesses exchanged excited looks as their sister continued, “Shall I tell you a story? About the assassin and the Queen? About the war for the throne? And about the betrayal, that destroyed them both?”

Once upon a time, in a land not too far away, in a time not too long ago, there lived a clever and cunning Queen. In fact, she was the Queen that reigned just before the present clan had taken over. She was the Queen consort of King Lee Chang and was greatly respected by all. Beyond her beauty and charm, the Queen Daemok was known for her sound mind and rational logic. She was even smart enough to turn an assassin sent to kill her into her loyal follower, simply with her wit and words. But that’s jumping ahead of the story.

The King often turned to Queen Daemok for council, even going against his Chief State Councilor, if her advice conflicted his. With her by his side, King Lee Chang brought peace and prosperity to the land. His greatest achievement, which was suggested to him by his wife, was the even distribution of wealth among the people. Through taxation of the overtly rich, King Lee Chang provided basic necessities like food, water and a roof to all people of the Kingdom. People didn’t die of starvation like they do now. They lived good, fulfilling, happy lives.

The people that had greatly benefited from the King’s reforms, was the clan that has since been stripped of its title and name. They are now known as simply, the Bandit Clan. These people were once an esteemed tribe. They were often cited as the King’s favorite as one of his lesser-known consorts, the late Lady Hae Soo, had belonged to this tribe. These people were a peaceful race. Their main trade was farming. No one had ever seen them as contenders for the throne, even with Lady Hae Soo as the King’s consort.

But the throne is a devious thing. It fools you into thinking that you are invincible. It tempts you with promises of great power and endless wealth. It blinds you to the loss of your humanity, as you do every vile deed imaginable to attain it.

The Bandit clans were blinded too. They fell prey to the lust for the throne and they betrayed the King, in the worst way imaginable. This was something even the clever Queen Daemok could not have predicted.

On the night of the winter solstice, after everyone had retired from the great festival, mysterious assassins came into the castle. For anyone else, it would have been impossible to even enter the palace grounds without being killed by the guard. But these were no ordinary assassins. They were men who walked in shadow, who could walk through walls and appear out of thin air, who could kill a person in a locked room and escape without having any means of doing do, men who were like ghosts, or perhaps they really were ghosts.

These men, who would later become known as an elite group of assassins called the Shadowmen, came into the palace in the middle of the night and killed everyone. The King, his six sons, his two daughters, his thirteen brothers, their sons… everyone. Even the servants weren’t spared that night. And of course, the guards.

The villagers awoke to streets filled with blood the next day. The entire palace was colored red. The Kingdom was in chaos. All councilors had to make an emergency gathering to decide the matters of state. With no one left to rule from the royal family, the second most powerful man in the Kingdom, the Chief State Councilor, was appointed as the King.

People of the Bandit clan were then hunted down and killed. Many of them fled to the Abandoned lands, where they live on to this day, robbing passersby to make ends meet. The Kingdom mourned the loss of their King for months on end, but they eventually moved on. The Kingdom prospered once again under the rule of King Deok Hwa and everyone soon forgot the tragedy of the Winter Solstice from ten years ago.

But… the people didn’t realize, that not everyone from the royal family had died that night. This was kept a secret from everyone, but when the bodies of the King and Queen were being prepared for their funeral, it was discovered that the Queen’s body wasn’t actually hers. It was her chambermaid’s.

The Royal Guard searched for the Queen’s body among the dead, it wasn’t there. They realized that the Queen had somehow survived and managed to escape that night. The Guard scoured the entire Kingdom in hopes of finding their Queen, but they never could. To this day no one knew what happened.

Some speculated that it was the Queen who had betrayed her husband and tried to get her own clan on the throne. Other believed the Queen had acted in jealousy, since the King had always favored his consort, the Lady Hae Soo, instead of her. But recently, a man claiming to be a Shadowman, caught by the Royal Guard, revealed what had actually happened.

On the night of the winter’s solstice, when the assassins were raiding the palace, the Queen was in her chambers, getting ready for bed. She was alone and her chambermaid had gone.

The assassins snuck in the palace so quietly, that she did not hear them even as they killed her maids in the next room. It was only when one of the assassins entered her room that she realized what was happening.

Everyone else, when confronted with the assassin, either tried to fight them or cowered in fear. But the Queen was clever. She knew what the assassin would expect from her. So, she did the unexpected. She didn’t grovel or defend. She didn’t even use her beauty to beguile him.

Instead, she spoke to him.

Nobody knows what she said, but she managed to change his mind with just her words. And when he finally drew the curtains around her bed, he fell in love at first sight.

The Queen knew it was too late to help her husband. He was already gone. The best thing she could do, was save herself and live to avenge her people. She and the assassin ran away that night, leaving behind the body of her chambermaid as a decoy. Since the assassins all removed the heads, this ruse wasn’t caught till it was too late.

The Queen is said to be still out there, living in hiding with her assassin lover. Some say she might return some day, seeking vengeance on the Bandit clan. Others say she already has by providing evidence against them. But all agree that she lives peacefully now, out in the mountains with the assassin.

The Princesses stared at their sister in awe. They suddenly squealed and laughed together.

“An assassin falling in love with his target! Eeee!” The third Princess kicked her legs in excitement.

“Can you imagine? Making a man fall in love with you just with your words?” The fourth Princess looked up, lost in fantasy.

“I could never. But then, I think my looks would be enough.” The third flicked her hair.

The fourth Princess, the youngest of the three daughters of Queen Yoo, looked to Song Hwa sulking in her corner. Unlike her sisters, she didn’t feel compelled to hate the eldest Princess simply because of her maternal background.

“Song Hwa, what did you think?” The fourth Princess asked innocently.

The second and third Princess stopped squealing and shot angered glares at their sister. Song Hwa saw this and responded diplomatically, “I wasn’t listening.”

Princess Song Hwa, while the eldest of the King’s daughters, was still not yet a mature adult. She had yet to learn, that children could not be lied to so easily.

“Liar, you were totally listening.”

“Shut up, you runt. She said she wasn’t.”

The fourth Princess ignored her sisters. “You’ve been reading the same page for the past ten minutes. Stop lying Song Hwa. You like these fairytales too, don’t you?” The fourth Princess patted the sofa beside her. “Come join us.”

Song Hwa suppressed her smile at the tenaciousness of the fourth Princess. It was something they both shared. Song Hwa moved to sit up, opening her mouth to tell her sister she would join her.

“Song Hwa doesn’t like fairytales. Isn’t that right, Song Hwa?” the second Princess declared, putting a firm arm around the youngest who was too naïve to know that she couldn’t invite Song Hwa over.

It was a discreet way to let her know that her company was unwelcome. Song Hwa would have retaliated, but she appreciated the second Princess’s diplomacy. Despite their differences, the second Princess always maintained a certain dignity. Song Hwa respected that and chose to respond in kind.

“She’s right, kiddo.” She rubbed the youngest’s head, “I don’t like fairytales. Now excuse me, sisters. I will be in my rooms.”

As Song Hwa turned, the third Princess, who lacked her elder sibling’s finesse, giggled and said, “Of course she hates these books. These belonged to her mother. Did I ever tell you how lame the previous Queen was?” The third Princess said to the fourth.

Song Hwa’s hand halted at the door handle, shaking. She gulped down her anger and curled up her fingers in a fist.

“Shut it.” The second Princess warned in whisper.

“The previous Queen was always so starved for attention that she used to run around us, peddling fairytales for our company. She was always so desperate to get us to like her.”

“Will you shut up?”

“Was she really?” The fourth Princess asked.

Song Hwa steeled her self and turned, a sly smile playing on her cunning face. “Ah, you lot. You are all so stupid.”

“Excuse me?” The second sister glared.

“Not you.” Song Hwa walked up to the fourth sister, staring down at her. “You I still have hope for. But these two, are a lost cause.”

“How dare you—” The third sister advanced but Song Hwa pushed her away.

“They’re filling your head with lies little one.” Song Hwa ignored the second and third Princess and looked straight into the big brown eyes of her youngest sibling. “Do you wanna know why I really hate fairytales? Because they’re all a bunch of lies. Haven’t you ever thought about what really happens the women who get rescued by princes, after the story ends? Do you know what happened to the pretty little Hae Soo? She came to the palace thinking she would become the Prince’s wife, but no. Shortly after she arrived, the Prince was crowned the King and was married to another woman from a stronger clan. Hae Soo became just another consort for the King, one who was belittled and treated like a cheap whore because she was poor and had no rank to justify her presence in the court. Hae Soo died not long after Prince Lee Chang became King. She couldn’t handle the pressures of the palace.”

“I believe that is enough, Princess,” the second Princess said, but Song Hwa put up her hand to shut her up.

“And you know what else? General Ji Ahn was hated by almost everyone. Men didn’t like having a woman boss them around. And women hated her because she rose above them in rank purely through her skill. A skill most women aren’t allowed to have. General Ji Ahn isn’t even listed in the ranks of past generals. She isn’t honored nor is she remembered. She was swept under the rug like a dirty little secret. That is how much she was devalued by the Kingdom she served so diligently.”

The second Princess ground her teeth, “She is just a child. Leave her out of this.”

 Song Hwa smiled smugly. “She’s old enough to learn the truth. After all, wasn’t I the same age when my mother died?” Leaning down to the fourth Princess’s height, Song Hwa continued, “Shall I tell you an honest fairytale, dearest sister? Once upon a time, there was an average looking woman, with an average background. She was neither pretty nor ugly, neither rich nor poor. She was kind and sweet but not clever or witty. She was married to King Deok Hwa as the Queen consort. And while she was unqualified, she vowed to live with the other consorts with peace and love among them. My mother truly believed that if you were kind enough, people would care for you.”

“She was wrong of course. The other consorts took advantage of her naivete and lack of cunning and tortured her. Emotionally, mentally… sometimes physically. It all became too much for her. She died eventually. Just like Hae Soo died. She was forgotten, just like Ji Ahn. All she had ever wanted, was to be loved. And all she had ever gotten, was hate. Now that’s, a fairytale you can believe in.”

The second and third Princess looked to each other, each wearing a disgusted expression of varying degree. Song Hwa loved these moments when she could outshine her sisters. She wasn’t as popular as the second Princess, not as beautiful as the third and certainly not as innocent as the fourth but she was smarter than them all, and Song Hwa liked rubbing that in.

She stood straight, addressing the third Princess, “Now, this ridiculous rumor about Queen Daemok. Need I remind you that falsifying events of the great massacre is considered treason and is punishable by hanging?” Song Hwa gave a pointed look.

“I wasn’t making it up. It really happened.”

“Says who?” Song Hwa raised a brow. She knew that her sisters had guards of their own that they “favored”. Only they never got caught pining after them.

“My source is reliable.” Was all the third Princess was willing to say.

Song Hwa tut-tutted. “Do you know how dangerous it is teaching her about how assassins who come to kill you will fall in love with you if you say just a few sweet words to them?” She pointed a finger at fourth Princess. “There are people out to kill us. That’s the life of a Princess. That’s what you get when you are the inheritors of a seat that everyone covets.” Song Hwa looked down on the fourth Princess, “Do not be fooled by such silly rumors. If an assassin breaks into your room, rest assured he will kill you. He won’t fall in love with you. And he will never save you. Believing such an obvious lie is foolish.”

“If it’s a lie then how do you explain why the Queen Daemok’s body was never found? I’ve read the historical accounts myself. They say so that the body found was that of the concubine. And no one knows that information. Not even the scholars.” The second Princess defended.

“Dear sister, if you had actually read through the entire historical accounts like I have, instead of just pretending to, then you would have also read that the Queen’s body was discovered a year later in a dumpy old village. And do you know what else? The assassin did help her escape.”

The Princesses were shocked that Song Hwa chose to validate one of their claims.

“See? I told you I was right.” The third declared.

“It wasn’t because he loved her, you idiot. Queen Daemok was two months pregnant. It was predicted to be a boy. I know this because that is how they discovered that the body they had found did not belong to the Queen but rather the chambermaid. The body they found wasn’t carrying a child. And a year later when the Queen was discovered, she had already given birth. The assassin didn’t save her because she was some siren with magic words. He was taking the only remaining heir to the throne… someone who could threaten our reign, someone who could be used against the current royal family, should the need arise.”

This was a heavy revelation. The mood of the room became grim and bleak. Song Hwa half regretted saying anything. This information was a secret even from the scholars. Song Hwa had found this out during her perusing through the forbidden texts of the historic archives. She wouldn’t have shared such key information had she not realized how advantageous it would be if word of this reached Queen Yoo’s ears. No doubt her sisters would tell their mother about everything.

If the Queen took the bait, then Song Hwa would have achieved two kills with one stone. Queen Yoo would not let some heir apparent to King Lee Chang live, not when he could threaten the royal family’s hold over the Kingdom. She would go after him and kill him. Which Song Hwa believed was to everyone’s advantage. The royal family was already at each other’s throats for the throne. They didn’t need another contender in the mix.

With the Queen busy in her hunt, Song Hwa would be free to do as she pleased. At least till the time the Queen found the missing Prince or Princess. And by then, Song Hwa would have figured out a way to get out of this marriage arrangement without the Queen present to thwart her plans.

Yes, this could work. Song Hwa was sure of it.

Satisfied that she had said, enough, Song Hwa decided to leave. “You lot can joke about fairytales all you want. But believe me, it is all a lie. The sooner you realize this, the better it will be for you.” Song Hwa looked at the youngest. “Especially you.”

She left her sisters to simmer in their anger. She knew they would speak ill of her, and she wanted to give them enough space to do so. Song Hwa smiled to herself when she thought about the Princesses tattling on her to their mother. The Queen would think that Song Hwa had slipped up in her arrogance. But the Queen would be wrong, and her underestimation of Song Hwa would prove to be fatal.

“You’re going to regret what you did, Queen Yoo.” Song Hwa said to herself. “You’re going to regret what you did to my mother.”

AUTHOR'S NOTE:

I'm posting this here because you can't add pictures in notes. I'm really sorry for the late update!

Chapter Text

White sand was poured onto the marbled floor of the study once again. The entire palace blueprint was drawn out carefully with long, slim, delicate fingers. Three of the four assassins poured over it to memorize each and every corner. This drawing was more detailed than the last time, with new entrances and exits, hidden passageways and even more blind spots identified.

“Hwang Rin, you should have been an artist.” Sam Chul said as he admired the palace map.

“I am, dear Sam Chul. I am.”

“Those ghostly figures you draw are not art. They’re ugly and scary.” Dong Su said, making a face.

“Beauty is in the eye of the beholder. And this beholder likes scary things.”

“You and Eun Dan… I never understand you two.” Dong Su shook his head. Upon seeing Sam Chul’s confusion, Dong Su elaborated. “Hwang Rin makes these ghostly sketches about ghosts and goblins who lurk about in the dark and attack people. Eun Dan seems to love them just as much as this idiot.” Dong Su pointed to Hwang Rin.

“You have no taste, Dong Su. No taste.”

“What’s this narrow passage here?” Sam Chul said, suddenly spotting a long pathway that led through the entire portion where the Princesses and the Queen resided.

“Good eye Sam Chul! That’s one of the secret passages we used to spy on the Princess.” Hwang Rin explained. “It begins here, in the outer side where the servants go in and out and goes all the way here, to the baths.” Hwang Rin pointed to a large section containing large squares representing the pools where the Princesses bathed.

“Ugh, I still can’t believe that the royals bathe in milk. The people are dying of hunger and the Princess is just wasting such precious resource for her beauty regimen.” Dong Su curled his lip in disgust. Hwang Rin had told them all about Princess Song Hwa’s preparation for the dinner held in honor of Cho Beom Pal.

“It won’t do her any good. She won’t get better looking.” Hwang Rin chuckled.

“How is she though? Up close?” Sam Chul inched closer. Dong Su pretended not to be interested but his ears were turned to Hwang Rin.

Hwang Rin thought about it and after careful deliberation, he said, “She’s pretty… till she speaks. Or does something completely mental.”

“Aish, that tells me nothing.” Sam Chul backed away, dissatisfied by the vague answer. “Still… I can understand why she’s mental. The King sounds insane.”

“All men with power are. That’s how the world works.” Hwang Rin said.

“If that’s how the noble and revered King acts then I’m glad that we’re not like him. I was glad that Dan Ho comforted the Princess.” Sam Chul replied.

“Agreed. We may be killers, but we’re not animals. It’s better if the Princess’s last days are spent in peace.” Dong Su nodded.

“Our job isn’t to worry about her wellbeing.” Hwang Rin corrected. “We don’t get involved. Period. But Dan Ho knows best, so I trust his decisions. However, I don’t want you two getting any ideas. Especially you, newbie.” Hwang Rin pointed a scroll at Sam Chul. “You’re still too soft. And I don’t just mean your chubby body.”

“I know, I know.” Sam Chul said dejectedly. Going back to the map, he traced the hidden pathway with his finger. “Where are the Princess’s rooms? Did you manage to find a way to sneak in there?”

“Not yet. This pathway only goes to the common rooms the Princesses share and their private studies. This one,” Hwang Rin put a firm finger on a perfectly drawn rectangle, “this study is Princess Song Hwa’s. She uses it every afternoon before lunch and every night after dinner, right before she retires to bed. And sometimes she doesn’t retire at all. She often falls asleep while she’s going through her scrolls.”

“Then I think our plan will work. We could make an attempt tomorrow even.” Dong Su said, rubbing his hands together.

Now that Hwang Rin and Dan Ho had spent enough time in the palace spying on the Princess, the assassins believed they had gathered all the information they needed to carry on their mission. The best opportunity to find the Princess on her own was during her study hours before bed. She normally dismissed her maids and the only people around were her guards, two of whom were Hwang Rin and Dan Ho. The assassins decided they would switch out the other two guards with Sam Chul and Dong Su and do the deed before anyone even realized what had happened. Since the Princess had a habit of spending nights in her study, her body wouldn’t be discovered till the morning, giving the assassins plenty of time to get away.

“I don’t know… I’m still worried that something might go wrong.” Hwang Rin rubbed his face. “I don’t know what it is. But I get a bad feeling every time I think about ending this.”

Dong Su put a comforting hand on Hwang Rin’s shoulder. “You’re worried about Eun Dan?”

Hwang Rin rubbed his face furiously. “I don’t know what is happening to her. If she’s okay or not. What condition they’re keeping her in. We can’t even reach the Headmaster and ask for help—”

“And believe me, Sam Chul and I tried.” Dong Su said.

“Yeah, me and Dong Su tried to get away but the Prince has guards keeping an eye on this place. They even know when you guys come and go.”

“So that’s what that was. Dan Ho said he felt eyes on us every time we came here.”

“Speaking of Dan Ho, hey man, you with us?” Dong Su shook the silent assassin.

Dan Ho had been sitting quietly since he and Hwang Rin had arrived. His face was scrunched up in concentration as if he was working through a headache.

Dan Ho’s continued silence gave all three of his friends pause.

“Dan Ho?” Hwang Rin called.

“I don’t like her,” Dan Ho declared. The others waited for him to elaborate but he didn’t continue.

“What do you mean?” Dong Su finally broke the silence.

“She’s smart. I hate it when they’re smart.”

“She can’t be smarter than you.” Sam Chul said supportively.

The three assassins waited for Dan Ho to agree. Because if there was one thing Dan Ho was vain about, it was his intelligence. When a full minute passed, and Dan Ho didn’t speak, the three assassins looked at each other in worry.

“Dan Ho,” Hwang Rin repeated, more assertively, “she’s not smarter than you.”

Dan Ho looked beyond the men, into some corner, as he spoke, “If they’re smart that means they can be quick on their feet. And if they’re quick that means they can manage to escape. And that can’t happen. Not this time… If we fail…”

Hwang Rin nodded in understanding, “Eun Dan…”

“And the others.” Sam Chul added.

“We know, Dan Ho. We know.” Dong Su, Hwang Rin and Sam Chul put their hands on Dan Ho’s shoulders to comfort him.

Dan Ho blinked, as if getting out of a daze. “We need to wait. I need to observe her more.”

“I think we’ve observed plenty.” Hwang Rin added sourly. “Honestly, the woman is insane. One minute she seems fine, the next she starts screaming for no damned reason. Like at the dinner reception for that whatshisface, that Cho boy. And the way she shouted at you in the King’s office still gives me shivers. And why did you let her push you around? I mean I get why she was upset but you could have stood your ground a little.”

Dan Ho shook his head, “That’s not what I’m getting at! Do you all remember that day in the city, when that man threw mud over the royal procession?”

The three spoke together, “Yes.”

“Do you remember the Chief Councilor’s younger son drawing his sword before the Princess came along?”

All three blinked, unsure of where this was going. “Yeees,” they stretched out the word.

“She acted like a real wench that day.” Hwang Rin made a face.

“I’ve never seen a woman be so violent,” Sam Chul shivered.

“You’re an assassin. Violence is our job.” Dong Su reprimanded.

“I can prefer peace and still kill people.”

“No! You can’t! That is literally the one thing you cannot do!”

Hwang Rin put his hands on Dong Su’s and Sam Chul’s mouths to shut them up, “What’s your point?”

Dan Ho looked at him gravely, “She did that on purpose. Because she knew if she acted worse than Cho Jang Hyun, then he would back off.”

“Are you telling me that that brat is actually nice?”

“I’m telling you that she’s clever enough to know exactly what to do and what to say to get others to react a certain way. She’s smart enough to realize she is being prepped to marry and she’s smart enough to know that if she acts violently towards the Queen then it would make her an undesirable bride to have.”

“Is that what she was trying to do? I didn’t even notice.” Hwang Rin said.

“That doesn’t seem like a smart thing. She’s going to be hated now, because of this.”

“It’s smart if you understand her intentions. And I do. I eavesdropped on her conversation with her father. I know for a fact that the gathering was to offer Princess Song Hwa as a bride to the Cho clan. And I know that she’s trying to get out of it.”

“You think she and the Captain…” Hwang Rin let his words hang in the air.

“I am most certain of it. But I don’t think the Captain might feel the same way.”

“He may not show it. After all, if he does the King will chop his head off.” Hwang Rin said.

“True. Captain Go Chung Myung isn’t from a high ranking clan. Unless he does some great service for the Kingdom or some heroic deed, he won’t be considered a candidate for the Princess.” Dan Ho agreed.

“Dan Ho, if the Princess really is to be married, then we don’t have much time. We have to get to her before the wedding.” Dong Su said.

“Weddings take months to prepare. And the King will most certainly take his time announcing the news. I think we have a fair amount of time before then. We’ve been here for two weeks. We still have two more till time’s up. I think we need to observe her for one more week before attacking. We shouldn’t rush this if we don’t need to.”

With that declaration from Dan Ho, the group decided to wait another week till killing the Princess. Dan Ho worked out the final plan, marking down the exact path they would follow that night, the Princess’s location and even what weapons they would use.

“We’re going to act like Royal Guards. So we can only carry the weapons they would carry.”

“We need more than just a sword and a bow and arrow.” Hwang Rin argued.

“Well we can’t have them thinking that this was an outside job. We need whoever investigates the murder of the Princess to think that someone from the Royal Guard was involved. If the King gets even a whiff that the Shadowmen had anything to do with this then he would burn our entire guild. We won’t just lose Eun Dan and the women from the brothel. We’ll lose everyone. Even our school.”

No one could argue with that logic. Hwang Rin chewed on his lower lip as he considered this information.

“They will find out anyway when they find you and me missing.”

“They won’t. Mu Won provided you two with real identities. Park Dan Ho and Lee Hwang Rin are real people. They’re not from well known families but they’re still real. I told Dan Ho all this last time when you had been watching the Princess.” Sam Chul added.

“Yeah, what a waste of time that was.” Hwang Rin frowned.

“Not at all. We at least got to know that the Princess’s sleeping habits. If she frequents her study then our original plan should succeed. And if we do it well, then no one will catch wind of our true identities.”

“Do you think that will help us continue working as assassins?” Sam Chul asked.

Dan Ho sighed. “We will worry about that later. For now, we worry about getting through this.”

“May luck be on our side.” Hwang Rin said.

It was still dark as the assassins were returning back to the palace. From the present silence it was evident that the entire world was asleep. No one was moving about but the two Shadowmen. Dawn would break any time now and in a few hours they would have to get back up for their palace duties which meant that this night too they would only get a couple of hours of sleep.

Hwang Rin stretched his back, yawning with his mouth wide open. “I cannot wait for this to be over. Guard duties are the worst. We haven’t gotten any sleep this week.”

“Just one more week, Rin-ah. Then we go home and hopefully back to our lives.”

Dan Ho and Hwang Rin hugged the walls of the palace as they climbed over. “Do you really think we’ll have our old lives back?” Hwang Rin asked as soon as they reached the top.

Dan Ho had his back to Hwang Rin. His shoulders slumped at Hwang Rin’s question. Hwang Rin knew that while Dan Ho might give diplomatic answers to the others, he would always say the blunt truth to Hwang Rin.

“No.” Dan Ho said, “Our faces are exposed now. Dong Su and Sam Chul might still have a chance but you and I… we’re done.”

Hwang Rin took a minute to take this in as the two of them slid down the wall on the other side. “So what, we become teachers at the school? Or try to change our faces?”

“Teaching might not be the worst thing. Or maybe the Headmaster may have other use of us.”

“What if she tries to kill us?”

“She won’t do that. She’s not the cruel.” Dan Ho stated as the two passed through the princesses’ palace.

“She might not kill you. You’re her favorite.”

“You know that’s not true.”

Hwang Rin chuckled to himself, “Being a teacher might not be bad. Maybe Eun Dan and I could finally settle down. Maybe even—”

“Shhh!” Dan Ho suddenly pulled Hwang Rin away to the corner, flattening himself against the wall. “We have company.”

Hwang Rin looked out into the night but saw nothing. He squinted his eyes, as if they could help him see in the dark. “I don’t see anything.”

“Over there,” Dan Ho whispered, “The trees.”

It was then that Hwang Rin noticed something moving in the shadows. A small, petite figure, climbing up the tree that led straight to the patrol path. A patrol was moving past. Dan Ho and Hwang Rin could make out the headband of the Captain of the Guard as he did his early morning rounds. The Captain got up earlier than the rest, and was the last to retire to bed. Dan Ho had his patrol schedule memorized.

From down below, the duo saw the group of patrol guards advance ahead while the Captain stayed behind. He seemed to be fascinated by the parapet. Once the patrol guards were out of sight, the slight shadow emerged from the tree and like an acrobat, leapt off from the branches to the edge of the parapet.

The dim lights of the lanterns lit in every corner illuminated the shadow’s face. It was a woman, and a beautiful one at that. With a face as bright as the moon and lips red as blood. She wore her hair up in a bun and had bandages around her fingers, no doubt to protect them from scratching. Especially if she was going around climbing trees all night.

She was dressed in dreary clothes—sandy colored shirt and pants, brown like the dunes of a desert, ratty and old as if she had worn the same clothes for quite some time. She had an equally brown and ratty scarf wrapped around her neck, no doubt to cover her face if anyone saw her. As Dan Ho scanned the figure, there was no doubt in his mind that this person belonged to the Bandit clan. Only the Bandit clan dressed in all browns. It wasn’t even the true color of their clothes. But living in the Abandoned lands where it was always scorching and the only things about were sand and rocks muted all colors of clothing and made a person appear as though they were part of the land itself, all brown and ratty.

The figure approached the Captain. Dan Ho watched with bated breath, expecting the Captain to unsheathe his sword and slay the girl. But the Captain only turned and seemed to speak. Dan Ho couldn’t understand the words, but he knew something was being said.

The Captain neared the girl. One cautious step. Two. Three. Then he raised his hand and caressed her cheek.

“Well this is interesting. The Captain has a lover from the Bandit clan.” Dan Ho said to Hwang Rin.

“That’s not all.” Hwang Rin whispered, pointing to a higher tower.

A window was lit, a silhouette stood at the edge, watching this scene unfold below. There was no mistaking it, from the outline of her dress to the haughty stance she had, the silhouette belonged to Princess Song Hwa.

“How happy do you think our violent Princess is going to be about this?” Hwang Rin asked rhetorically.

Dan Ho gulped. “I guess luck isn’t favoring us after all.”

Chapter Text

She combed through her hair with her fingers, looking far away into the distance. Her ear was turned to him, but her eyelids were drooping, half closed with disinterest. Irritation was forced into inexpression on her face. Dan Ho pressed his lips together lest he start grinning at this scene. He wished Hwang Rin was here to see this, but Hwang Rin had other matters to attend.

“And I even killed a bear once,” the Chief Councilor’s eldest son said, listing out yet another one of his many accomplishments, something he had been doing without pause for almost an hour. “It was a mighty beast. Fairly terrifying. For the common man, of course.”

Cho Beom Pal. He was almost a twin of his younger broker, Jang Hyun, whom Dan Ho had seen when he had encountered the Princess’s procession in the capital. Both sons of the Chief State Councilor had the same air of senseless superiority about them. Both had an overconfident posture, as if they owned everything. This seemed fairly foolish to Dan Ho, since Cho Beom Pal was sitting in front of a woman who genuinely could boast that she owned everything.

“But I was not afraid. Even when the bear stood up and tried to tear me to shreds with its mighty claws, I stood my ground and chopped its head off with one swoop.”

Song Hwa’s voice was dry and monotone, “Wow. What an accomplishment. Chopping the head of a defenseless animal after you disturbed it in its home.”

Cho Beom Pal wasn’t able to read the subtext. He grinned at Song Hwa’s words, thinking he was being complimented. “Thank you, my Princess. Of course, my accomplishments would only pale when compared to yours.”

Song Hwa’s brow quirked, “Pray tell, what accomplishments of mine could ever compare to emptying out villages because they didn’t pay taxes, chasing down Bandits and killing animals?”

“Why Princess,” Beom Pal took Song Hwa’s hand without any prompt, “you are the most beautiful woman in the Kingdom. Nothing I could do would ever make me worthy of a woman like you.”

Song Hwa’s eyes went wide at the man’s audacity. She tried to retract her hand subtly but Beom Pal held on. “Beauty isn’t an accomplishment. Also, I am no more worthy of you than any other woman in the Kingdom, Lord Cho.” Song Hwa yanked her hand back, hiding it beneath the table where Beom Pal couldn’t reach it.

“Oh, how modest!” Beom Pal exclaimed suddenly, making Song Hwa cringe visibly at the man’s overdramatic flare. “Modesty is so attractive on such a fair maiden as yourself.”

Song Hwa narrowed her eyes, “I’m actually not that fair,” she said in a cool manner. “My younger sisters are fairer than I. And wasn’t it you who compared them to the moon just a year ago? You seemed to exclude me from that compliment back then.”

Beom Pal seemed to process this. “Well… I cannot deny… aaah! Princess, you are so modest, so humble! Even now you put your sisters above yourself.”

“Not really. I actually hate my sisters.” Song Hwa sighed, tired of this conversation.

Beom Pal blinked rapidly, “Well… You are still quite beautiful… Princess. You have such sharp features.”

Even from the distance, Dan Ho could see the satisfaction on Princess Song Hwa’s face as Cho Beom Pal struggled to find more words to impress her with. Apparently, this young Princess loved breaking people’s confidence. Dan Ho filed that information away for later use. He wished he could have stood on the other side so that he could see Beom Pal’s face up close. But alas, the guards were stationed in only the corners of the room and all he could hear was the low voices of their conversation—that too made possible because his ears were sharper than most.

“No, I’m not.” Dan Ho heard Song Hwa say in a bored tone. “There are peasants with more appealing faces than I. I know because you are bedding one of them.”

Dan Ho nearly choked in shock at such a bold statement and by the sound of the stifled, cough, Beom Pal did too.

“Princess I—”

“I really don’t care who you bed, Lord Cho.” Song Hwa waved a dismissive hand. “As long as you don’t get caught, of course.”

“How… how kind of you.” Beom Pal said, recovering from the Princess’s blunt remarks. “See? You are so kind as well. Such generosity, such benevolence, is truly a rare virtue.”

“My servants call me a witch though.” Song Hwa tilted her head. “On account of how cruel I am.”

Beom Pal laughed nervously. “Hahaha. How insolent! You should behead such people. How could they talk about you like this?”

Song Hwa looked down her nose at Cho Beom Pal. “Beheading servants isn’t so generous though, wouldn’t you agree? I guess you won’t be able to call me benevolent anymore.”

Beom Pal tugged at his collar nervously. It was fascinating how Song Hwa had managed to turn the pompous man into an insecure puddle of mumbling words with just her wit. Dan Ho was almost impressed.

Almost.

More remarkable than the Princess was Lord Cho in how quickly he managed to recover from the Princess’s attempts to rebuff him. Immediately, he responded with another compliment. “Well… uh… even if you doubt all other traits, you cannot deny, that your intelligence is next to none. Even Queen Daemok would pale in comparison to you, Princess.”

Song Hwa didn’t pause a second. “I can’t be that smart. I haven’t been able to get rid of you, no matter how hard I try.”

Beom Pal’s jaw dropped and remained that way for a considerable amount of time before he managed to recover from that blow. The Princess herself seemed unaffected. She stifled a yawn, trying to hide it behind a hand covering her mouth. For Princess Song Hwa, doling out such insults and making new enemies was just another, ordinary day.

Cho Beom Pal curled his hand into a fist but kept his tone tempered. Even with his family’s backing, he still could not speak out of turn in front of the Princess. “What a fine sense of humor you have,” he said curtly. “Humor is needed to keep a marriage fresh.”

Song Hwa’s brow quirked, “Our marriage is simply a suggestion. Nothing has been set in stone.”

This appeared to be the last straw for the man. He, quite suddenly, threw his cup against the wall behind Song Hwa. “Enough of this! Enough! I have had it!” He stood up, fumbling with the many layers of his extravagant clothing.

Princess Song Hwa merely blinked uninterestedly and checked her nails.

“You.” Beom Pal bent down and pointed a finger in Song Hwa’s face. “This ridiculous behavior is why you have such a bad reputation. Do you know what everyone says about you?”

Song Hwa met Beom Pal’s eye. “That I’m cruel and violent? That I only know how to use people? That I kill those who oppose me and silence everyone who’s witnessed the atrocities I’ve committed? Oh no wait, that’s what people say about you, isn’t it?”

Beom Pal chuckled darkly. He moved closer, face only an inch away. “I tried being nice to you, Princess. I gave you a chance to prove your worth to me. You didn’t take it. Now when we get married, I will make sure you truly learn your place.”

“Get away from me, Lord Cho.” The Princess spoke low.

Cho Beom Pal backed up, standing up straight. He looked down on the Princess and said, “I’ve heard you’ve been meeting with the councilmen in private. Perhaps you are trying to weasel your way out of this marriage. Your schemes are in vain, Princess. This marriage will happen.” He turned to leave, and Dan Ho saw the cruel look on his face. He looked as if he was angry enough to kill.

“My meetings with the Councilors was not about you.”

Cho Beom Pal stopped.

“Clearly no one here remembers that an attempt on my life was made by the Bandit clan. They attacked my procession as we were going through the mountain pass.” The Princess said in a broken voice. Dan Ho narrowed his eyes at the sudden change.

Cho Beom Pal turned, “I thought you said the men who attacked you were only pretending to be Bandits.”

The Princess looked down as if embarrassed. “What do I know? I’m only a woman. I don’t even remember what happened. I was so scared.”

Liar, Dan Ho thought, fascinated by how convincingly shaken the Princess looked.

Beom Pal’s shoulders relaxed while his hands remained curled into fists. “When you are my wife, Princess, no man will dare harm you. I can assure you of that.”

“What good is your assurance if the Bandit clan is still out there. Or does it not bother you that such an obvious threat to the throne exists and yet we do nothing about it?” The Princess looked at the man with wide, pleading eyes. A stark contrast from the woman antagonizing her would-be-husband just a mere minute ago.

Cogs were turning in Cho Beom Pal’s head. He paused to consider Song Hwa’s words. “While the Cho clan supports the royal family, Princess Song Hwa, no harm will come to it. That I promise you.” Cho Beom Pal turned to leave again, and this time Dan Ho saw his anger replaced with conviction. It was bewildering how swiftly the Princess had diverted his attention from her to the Bandits. Clearly she was playing him. This made more evident by the barely concealed smugness that played on her lips as Cho Beom Pal left.

That smugness remained while the Princess moved with her entourage to her next meeting, her third meeting of the day. This was a break from her usual routine that consisted of mostly spending time in either her rooms or her study. As Cho Beom Pal had said, the Princess had been meeting a lot of councilors in the past few days. Dan Ho had not been present for all of them, but they few he did attend painted a very dangerous picture of what was about to come.

“I thought you said that the people who attacked us were pretending to be the Bandits.” Dan Ho couldn’t help but ask the Princess as she made her way to the outer gardens. The other guards in their group looked at each other, wide eyed at Dan Ho’s audacity.

“I don’t recall giving you permission to speak, guard.” The Princess replied curtly.

“I don’t recall asking for it. What made you change your mind?” Dan Ho prodded, suspecting he knew the answer already.

The Princess turned on her heels swiftly, facing him with a stony expression. “I will not have my intentions questioned by a mere servant. Leave your post if you cannot watch your tongue in my presence.” Her face was unreadable, but her skirt balled up in her fist and her shallow breathing betrayed her unease.

“As you wish, Princess.” Dan Ho stepped back into line, lowering his gaze. The Princess continued her journey into the gardens where she was to meet Lord Ahn Hyun.

The gazebo in the gardens had been set up for tea. Lord Ahn Hyun was already there waiting for the Princess.

“You’re early, Lord Ahn Hyun.” The Princess uncharacteristically grinned.

“I knew you would try to beat me by showing up an hour before our appointed time, so I showed up two hours before.” The Lord grinned back. He looked worn and weathered with his grey, almost white, hair and wrinkly face. Yet his eyes betrayed a youthful mischief and his smile a childlike innocence.

The man looked frail with his lean build, but that was misleading as Lord Ahn Hyun had been a feared warrior and an esteemed nobleman even having trained the legendary General Ji Ahn when she had joined the kingdom’s army and had chosen her as his successor. He had even served as a temporary Chief State Councilor when the original royal family had been massacred.

With his glory days now behind him, the old man was living out his remaining life in a far away valley, away from civilization. He was widely rumored to be a recluse as people rarely saw the man anymore. The fact that he had journeyed to the palace meant was greatly significant.

Even more significant, was the way Princess Song Hwa addressed him. “Aish! You old troll, can’t you let me win just once?” Song Hwa kicked the ground like a petulant child.

Dan Ho expected the Lord to unsheathe his sword at such disrespect. But instead, the old man guffawed, looking more childish that the Princess who was only one-third his age. “Never! You must learn the taste of true victory. A false win is never as sweet.”

“Liar. You just don’t want to lose.” The Princess huffed as she sat down.

“Aye, that too.” He chuckled. “Here, I’ve brewed you some soothing tea. You must be in desperate need of it if you have summoned me here on such short notice.”

He doesn’t know why he’s here, Dan Ho noted. This told him that the Lord valued the Princess greatly if he could arrive without any reason.

“I have indeed missed your tea.” Song Hwa said. “But that is not why I have called you here, Lord Ahn Hyun—”

The Lord put his hand up. “Tea first. Let’s not ruin our meeting with talks of politics just yet.” His smiled carried a tinge of resistance. As if he was tasting something unpleasant.

Song Hwa pressed her lips together and said nothing. The old man poured out the hot, fragrant liquid. The two sat in silence, sipping on the tea and admiring the view. The Princess smiled as she drank.

“My mother used to love this. It would always soothe her nerves.” Song Hwa smiled wistfully.

“She was too nervous for her own good, your mother. Pah! Don’t you dare be like her!” The Lord scolded.

“Why not? My mother was amazing. And how dare you? She respected you so much. She always saw you as the brother she never had.” Song Hwa made a face.

“Respect has nothing to do with it. Your mother would have agreed with me anyways.”

They put their cups down solemnly. Play time was over. Lord Ahn Hyun’s expression became grave and all hints of childish humor left. The wrinkles on his face rearranged themselves to form harsh lines. He stared at Song Hwa not as a young girl, but an equal he was facing off in battle. For her part, the Princess was undeterred.

“I had forgotten how intimidating you could be at times.” She said quietly.

Lord Ahn Hyun softened a bit, “My dear girl, never be afraid. If I have taught you anything, let it be that.”

Song Hwa nodded. “I am sure your little spies have told you about the incident in the mountain pass. The incident in the Abandoned Lands.”

The Lord laughed, a little too loudly. “Oh, ha ha ha ha! Oh what spies. How you love to joke, Princess.” Leaning closer, he whispered, “You brat. I don’t want people knowing about that.”

The Princess grinned. “Everyone knows about your spies, you old troll. Stop pretending it’s a secret.”

The Lord leaned back, grumbling to himself. Dan Ho looked to the other guards for their reactions. They were all grinning to themselves. The men who had accompanied Lord Ahn Hyun were also smiling.

It was then that Dan Ho realized his mistake. He had been so focused on the Princess’s conversation, and the stark change in her attitude that he had completely ignored Lord Ahn Hyun’s men. And now that he stared at them, he couldn’t look away. The hair on his arm rose as he eyed the tall, men in dark blue uniforms.

They appeared like ordinary swordsmen, accompanying a nobleman, as they should. But something about them felt off. They had very little presence, almost invisible even when standing out in the open in broad daylight—which was why Dan Ho had missed them. Their stance was relaxed but their hands were near the hilt of their sword and through the various folds of their outer vest, Dan Ho could make out several concealed weapons. Concealed the same way the Shadowmen did. In fact everything about these guards, from the way they were scanning everything to the way they were clothed, reminded Dan Ho of his own brothers.

“So, what about the attack do you wish to discuss?” Lord Ahn Hyun’s voice snapped Dan Ho out of his reverie.

Song Hwa spoke with steady conviction. “The Bandit clans, they are getting out of hand. First, they attack my entourage. Next, they will attack my father. We cannot stand by and idly watch them threaten the order in the Kingdom. We must act. Now.”

The Lord tilted his chin up and eyed the Princess. “The Bandit clans are no threat. They are an impoverished people who live on stolen scraps. As long as we leave them in the Abandoned Lands, they will leave us in our cities.”

With Lord Ahn Hyun’s unblinking eyes observing her face closely, Song Hwa gulped. Dan Ho could sense her unease at being scrutinized. He guessed that the Lord was shrewder than he appeared and that the Princess knew of this.

“It is because of our leniency that the Bandit clans have grown stronger. If we—”

“What is it you really want, my girl?” The Lord narrowed his eyes.

The Princess’s eyes hardened. Dan Ho could see that she wasn’t really present, her mind was some where else. “I want the Bandit clan eradicated.” He said coldly. A chill ran down Dan Ho’s spine. Song Hwa looked like she really could kill someone.

Lord Ahn Hyun seemed to find her expression amusing. “Ho-ho! That’s a mighty statement, my girl. Careful, you might just get your wish.”

Song Hwa lookd confused, “Why do you say it like it’s a bad thing?”

The Lord reached out with both his hands over the table. Song Hwa took them without hesitation. He held on to her like a father holding on to her daughter, “My girl, my child, do you think you would be able to go through with it? The needless massacre of people, the killing of innocent souls. Do you think you can live with yourself afterwards?”

“I think I can manage,” Song Hwa said stubbornly as she tried to pull her hand away. The Lord quickly grabbed on to her wrists, albeit gently.

“What is it you’re really after, Princess?”

“Let go.” The Princess tried to retract her hand.

“Tell the truth now, no more dramatics.”

“I. Just. Want. Our. Safety.” Song Hwa said, yanking her hands with each word. But the Lord held on tight.

“I’ve known you since you were a colicky babe. I can tell when you’re lying.”

“I’m not lying. I’m—” The Princess’s eyes widened. “You’re checking my pulse! You old troll, you’re checking my pulse to see if I’m lying!” Song Hwa yanked her hands with such great force that she sent the teapot flying off the table. It crashed on to the grass, breaking into pieces.

“Ah, that was my favorite pot.” The Lord looked on mournfully.

“You troll.” Song Hwa said, rubbing her wrists and looking slighted.

“You’re young, but you’re not far from a hag yourself, my girl.” The Lord leaned back, grinning.

Despite herself, the Princess chuckled. Then returned to looking hurt. “I want you to help me, Lord Ahn Hyun. I know that with your men—”

“I do not partake in any killings, Princess. Nor do my men.”

“But they’re the best swordsmen in the kingdom. Why train them when they won’t fight for their King?”

“I train them so that they don’t have to fight. And be it for the King or for all of humanity, I will not kill.” The Lord gazed down and quietly said, almost to himself, “Not anymore. Not ever.” Looking back up again, he sighed. “Why do this, Princess? The Bandits have done nothing but steal petty change.”

“They rob every person who passes through the Abandoned Lands. Since when do we overlook thievery?”

“They rob only the wealthy and take only as much as they need to survive. It is petty change for people like you and me. They are no threat to the kingdom, nor your father.”

“They are a threat to me!” The Princess clenched her jaw. “You won’t help me then?” Her voice cracked.

The Lord looked heartbroken. “You can lie to your father, Song Hwa. And you can lie to yourself. But you cannot lie to me. I know you too well. And I know your temper. I can see that something has deeply angered you. And if you want, my little girl, I can help you through what is really bothering you. But this is not about the Kingdom’s safety. You and I both know that.”

The Princess said nothing. She looked at Lord Ahn Hyun with angry, glistening eyes. “Leave then.” She said in a small voice. “You are of no use to me.”

The Lord got up and motioned his men to pack up his things. Swiftly, they all gathered the tea paraphernalia and were all packed within a minute. The Lord walked to Song Hwa, who didn’t bother to stand and bow to bid him farewell. The old man put a gentle had on her head and shook it.

“Your will is strong, just like your father’s. Pray you don’t become as cruel as him too.”

A tear fell down Song Hwa’s cheek as he left. Her mouth shriveled up as she sniffled. Dan Ho watched the Lord admiringly as he walked past him. The man had to be truly cunning to see through Song Hwa so easily.

Lord Ahn Hyun nodded his head to each guard in goodbye as he passed them. A humble gesture that every man appreciated. Dan Ho, now used to being ignored, did not feel like he had to cover his face up from the man. All Lords treated guards and servants like ornaments anyway.

As the Lord passed by Dan Ho, he did a double take. He nearly made Dan Ho jump out of his skin when he suddenly stopped and stared at him with eyes nearly falling out of their sockets.

“Dear God, am I looking at a ghost?” He took Dan Ho by the arms, as if to confirm he was actually there. Dan Ho couldn’t think of anything to say. He was completely confused by the Lord’s strange behavior. Every bone in his body was telling him this was bad. The Lord had seen his face. Surely, Dan Ho was done for.

Does he know I am a Shadowman? Has he seen through me as well? Does he know I am here to kill his beloved Princess? Dan Ho knew that panic was his enemy, but he couldn’t stop himself.

“What is your name, my boy?” Lord Ahn Hyun asked.

“P-Park Dan Ho.”

As if catching himself, Lord Ahn Hyun retreated back. “Forgive me… I… Excuse me.” With a nod the man walked away, looking more shaken than he had seemed during his entire conversation with Princess Song Hwa.

Dan Ho found the Princess eyeing him curiously. She said nothing. Only wiped her tears and got up to leave.

“I am too drained for my meeting with Councilor Chung. I will retire to my chambers.” She told her maid.

“I will send a messenger to the Councilor.” Her maid bowed.

Dan Ho followed the Princess along with the other guards. As they neared her rooms, the other guards stepped away, but Dan Ho continued to follow.

“Lord Ahn Hyun’s right. Going after the Bandit clan won’t solve what’s bothering you.” He said.

“And what do you know of what is bothering me, Park Dan Ho?” The Princess looked at him scathingly.

Dan Ho couldn’t tell her that he had seen Chung Myung with his secret lover, or that he knew that the Princess had seen them too. “I know that whatever it is, it is driving you to make irrational choices. And you might regret them later on.”

“If there is regret, it will be mine. It is no concern of yours.” Song Hwa turned her nose up to him.

“That may be so, Princess. But I have seen enough death to know that life is unpredictable and short. You don’t know when your last breath will be. Do you really want to go from this world as someone who destroys an entire clan over anger?”

Song Hwa narrowed her eyes. “And why are you so sure I will die so soon, Park Dan Ho?”

“We all die. Every single one of us. Your privilege may have you thinking that you will live forever, but that is a foolish concept. And if you believe in that, then you aren’t as intelligent as I have found you to be.”

The Princess closed the distance between them, studying Dan Ho’s face closely. “You know for a man so wise about life, you sure do have a death wish. One of these days—”

“Yeah, yeah. You’ll have me hanged. I know the gist.”

Dan Ho felt for a second that the Princess almost smiled. But that must have been a trick of the eyes because her face was completely void of any mirth. She looked tired and worn.

“Leave me, Park Dan Ho. I have had enough advice for today.”

Good. Dan Ho thought. I’ve had enough of you too. With a huff, Dan Ho left. He stalked to the training grounds to reconvene with Hwang Rin. Dozens of guards passed him by, sending him small greetings as they did. Ever since Dan Ho and Hwang Rin had displayed their skills in the duel, none of the guards dared to bother them. Many were quick to befriend the pair, thinking the would be able to use their popularity for their own advantage. Those guards were wrong, because all they achieved was helping Dan Ho and Hwang Rin work out the ins and outs of almost everyone in the palace.

“Rin-ah, you would not believe the day I have had.” Dan Ho entered their rooms with this declaration and stopped when he saw that he and Hwang Rin weren’t the only ones in the room.

Prince Young Hwa stood there, yanking at Hwang Rin’s collar. His eyes were wide and red rimmed. He looked like an animal ready to pounce.

Dan Ho’s hand instinctively went to his sword. The Prince’s eyes caught this subtle movement. He chuckled in disbelief, “Look at you, all ready to slay my head.”

“Why are you here?”

“What, a Prince can’t catch up with his guards?”

“We’re the Princess’s guards. Not yours.”

“Oh her guards, are you? Tell me, are you her assassins too?”

“Quiet! You want everyone to know who we are?” Dan Ho hissed in a low voice.

“I will not be silenced!” The Prince shouted. Hwang Rin took this opportunity to free himself from his grasp and twist his arm behind his back. The Prince struggled but Hwang Rin held him in a tight grip with one hand, while he kept the Prince’s mouth covered with the other hand. The Prince screamed but the only sound he could produce was a muffled “Mmph!”

“Shut. Up. You idiot! Do you want the whole Royal Guard to know about your plot against your sister?” Hwang Rin whispered harshly in the Prince’s ear.

This appeared to placate the Prince who stopped resisting against Hwang Rin’s grip.

“Now will you promise to remain calm and quiet if I let you go?” Hwang Rin asked. The Prince nodded. Hwang Rin cautiously released Prince Young Hwa from his grasp. Young Hwa straightened up his ruffled clothes as he glared at Hwang Rin.

“Half a month has gone by and she is still alive.” The Prince said through gritted teeth. “What have you useless buffoons been doing?”

“We need this time to gather information—” Dan Ho began and was promptly cut off.

“Information? What possible information could you need? You just walk up to her and slice her throat, that’s it!”

“Calm down.” Hwang Rin said.

“We can’t have this discussion here, Your Highness.” Dan Ho reasoned, worried that at any moment, the two other guards they shared their room with would arrive.

“The hell we can’t! You,” the Prince pointed at Dan Ho, “you’re scheming against me aren’t you? I know Song Hwa. She’s like a snake, she turns everyone against me and manipulates my every move in her favor. She’s gotten to you, hasn’t she? Huh? Answer me!”

Dan Ho’s brows furrowed. “I assure you she has not turned us. But you are correct, your sister is smart. Which is why I need to make sure she won’t be able to weasel her way out of our trap once she’s caught.”

Hwang Rin added, “And this job is not as simple as you think. There are guards here at almost every entrance. Even if we kill her, the guard would seize us and then they would question us.”

“And then they would learn who it was that hired us.” Dan Ho said.

“After which of course they would kill not only us but our entire guild.” Hwang Rin continued.

“Which would start a war between the Shadowmen and the Kingdom.”

“And I assure you, the Shadowmen won’t go down without a fight.”

“It will be a blood bath.”

The two assassins gave a moment of silence to let this sink in. The Prince looked to a corner in a daze as he processed this information. Dan Ho gave a worried look to Hwang Rin. Hwang Rin passed a worried look back.

The Prince took a deep breath. “Do you know what my father plans to do? He plans to strip me of my status as Crown Prince.”

Dan Ho and Hwang Rin looked at each other.

The Prince smiled bitterly, “That’s right. I’ve won no wars, conquered no land, I haven’t even contributed to his council. To my father, I am useless. But Song Hwa… my father considers her a better successor than I. She has his cunning and his ruthlessness. She is just like him. But he can’t just give the throne to her, so he is marrying her off instead and giving the throne to that idiot Beom Pal. Because he knows Song Hwa can play him and retain power over the kingdom. And because Beom Pal is from the Cho clan, he will be able to suppress their resistance to his position.”

“Killing two birds with one stone.” Dan Ho said absently.

The Prince gripped at Dan Ho’s arm. “If Song Hwa gets married, then all of this would have been for nothing. Even if she dies then, the throne will go to Beom Pal, do you understand? You have to kill her. You have to kill her before she gets married.”

“You haven’t thought of one thing,” Hwang Rin said. “Lord Cho Beom Pal can still marry one of the other Princesses. He can still be King.”

“It is not about making him King, it is about her! Why do you think I’m having her killed? Song Hwa is the only person who can hold her own against the Cho clan. Father would never agree to this union with any other daughter. The Cho clan would easily overtake our clan and bring their own people into power. If Song Hwa dies, father has no choice but to keep me as his successor. He won’t ever give the throne to anyone else.”

The room fell silent as the two assassins mentally processed this information. “When is she to be married?” Hwang Rin asked.

The Prince shook his head, “I don’t know. But everything has been set. All the King has to do is announce the news.”

“You know you don’t have to kill her.” Dan Ho said reasonably. “Your sister doesn’t want this marriage to happen also. I am sure that if you talk to her—”

The Prince laughed, “Ha! Talk? Have you not seen how things work in the palace? There is no room for talk! If you want something, you have to take it. And Song Hwa would never give up a chance to show me up. Even now she’s meeting with the councilors, planning to win father over by going after the Bandit clan. She knows father hates them. That’s the only reason she’s suddenly changed her tune about them.”

Dan Ho and Hwang Rin looked at each other but said nothing. They knew that the Princess’s covert campaign against the Bandit clan had nothing to do with pleasing her father and everything to do with a certain Captain of the Guard and his secret friend.

“From what I have observed of her sister,” Dan Ho said carefully, “she appears to be—”

The Prince grabbed Dan Ho’s collar. “Why do you keep defending her, huh? Are you planning on turning against me?” Dan Ho didn’t flinch. The Prince shove him but instead of pushing Dan Ho away, he found himself being thrust backward with the force of his push, while Dan Ho remained unmoving like a rock.

His hard eyes bored into the Prince’s. Evil looking eyes that looked cold and calculating. The Prince moved a step back.

“I think you two are forgetting who’s in charge here.” The Prince said as he reached into his pocket and pulled something out. Dan Ho and Hwang Rin’s eyes went wide when they saw the dainty pink hairpin shining in the light.

The same hairpin the boys had chosen for Eun Dan.

Some hair was still stuck on it, as if it had been pulled harshly from someone’s head. Hwang Rin immediately snatched it from the Prince’s hand.

“A reminder, of what’s at stake if you both fail. Don’t forget. I still have your friends with me. Whether I become King or not, they will die if Song Hwa doesn’t.”

Hwang Rin curled his fingers around the pin slowly. “We’re planning on killing her by the end of the week. Wait until then.” He looked at Dan Ho who nodded in affirmation, “It will be done.”

Chapter Text

“This is getting more and more dangerous every day.” Sam Chul said gravely.

“Shut up. So, let’s recap one more time. We enter through here,” Dan Ho made a cross in the sand, “I pretend to be sent by the King. Meanwhile Hwang Rin will stand guard while I kill the Princess. I expect her to scream so we’ll have to escape through here.” He made another cross. “This is the fastest way to the secret tunnel that leads to the outer grounds.”

“That Prince seems to be going mad. He just showed up in public to see you two? Is he mad?” Dong Su asked Hwang Rin.

“Silence.” Dan Ho said. “The Guard will be chasing us, and if there’s more of us then they have more of a chance at catching one of us. So, I think only Hwang Rin and I—"

No one was listening to Dan Ho. The three assassins were only interested in finding out the details of the meeting with the Prince. Hwang Rin spoke over Dan Ho, “The bastard threatened me with Eun Dan’s pin. I can’t stop thinking about how she is, what she’s doing, how scared she must be.”

“Listen to me!” Dan Ho scolded.

“We have. Three times already.” Dong Su pouted. “We know the plan already.”

“Well memorize it.” Dan Ho retorted. “Make sure you know it inside and out. I want you to be able to recite it in your sleep.”

“We know the plan, Dan Ho. Stop being so anxious.” Hwang Rin reasoned.

Dan Ho’s nostrils flared as he exhaled. “We need to make sure that everything happens perfectly. There’s too much going on in the palace right now, too many unpredictable variables. We’re right in the middle of a covert political takeover. The Princess is throws violent tantrums, the King is a manipulative psychopath and the Prince apparently is becoming unhinged. I can’t leave anything up to chance. Not this time. Not when we have so much to loose.”

“The Prince seemed so cool headed when he was holding us at knife point.” Sam Chul said, irritating Dan Ho who himself was starting to look as unhinged as the Prince.

“Right? I thought he was a smart one. He really surprised me when he showed up at the Guard house. That was quite a foolish move. If anyone saw him, they would immediately pin the assassination on him.” Hwang Rin agreed.

“Panic makes people do stupid things.” Dan Ho said.

“Yeah, like making us learn your plan over and over again even though we know it already.” Hwang Rin punched Dan Ho’s arm playfully.

Dan Ho sighed. “Yes, I’m panicking too… I just don’t like it when things get chaotic.”

Sam Chul’s brows shot up, “Speaking of chaos, the Princess—”

“Ugh, her.” Hwang Rin said with disdain.

“Are we going to do something about her little evil plan?” Sam Chul continued.

“We don’t do that sort of thing.” Dong Su said.

Dan Ho nodded. “We don’t. But in this case, we might have to. The Princess has openly put a target on the Bandit clan’s head. Which means that if she dies—”

“They get the blame. Most likely they will face a full scale genocide.” Hwang Rin completed.

“But that’s good for us.” Dong Su said. “No one will be looking to the Shadowmen then.”

“And it won’t be a simple catch and kill situation.” Dan Ho said darkly, “Political plots will be hatched. Schemes will be laid. Every other clan will try to exacerbate the situation to make the kingdom unstable enough to carry out their own agendas. It will ruin our operations.”

“I was thinking more along the lines of saving the Bandit clan from being killed.” Sam Chul said. “They’re innocent in all of this. And it’ll be our fault if they get blamed for something they didn’t do. I think it’s our responsibility… to…” Sam Chul stopped when he noticed the furrowed brows of his assassin brothers.

“Aish!” All three senior assassins groaned.

“You baby.” Dong Su complained.

“You really can’t be that soft, newbie.” Hwang Rin complained.

“If it makes you feel any better, I did try to convince her not to do it. She didn’t listen.” Dan Ho said.

“When does she ever? Honestly, you need to stop engaging with her so much.” Hwang Rin said.

“Um-hmm.” Dan Ho made a non-committal sound and did not make eye contact with Hwang Rin.

“Maybe try again.” Sam Chul said in an uncharacteristically assertive tone. “If we do this, we should at least minimize the damage we cause.”

“Sam Chul, we can’t worry about that. We’re not the good guys. We don’t save people, we kill them. We’re the villains here.” Dan Ho reminded.

“Ah-nee…” Sam Chul’s breath quivered, “that may be our job, but we’re still people aren’t we? How will we be okay after all of this is over? How will you guys be? Does none of this truly bother you?”

The other three assassins were silent. Hwang Rin and Dong Su looked to Dan Ho to speak.

“Sam Chul, do you know what is the thing that causes the most pain in the world?” Dan Ho asked. Sam Chul shook his head. “It’s giving birth. Women go through so much pain just to bring one tiny life into this world, that some of them die in the process. A woman goes through the grave and back when a baby is born. But despite that pain, women still give birth. Despite all of the discomfort and agony it causes, they bear it. We have to bear it too.”

That’s right.” Dong Su added. “It’s not like we’re completely heartless. But we have to ignore all of that to do our jobs. Do you understand?”

Sam Chul put his head down and was silent for a long time. Long enough that the other three began to give each other looks of confusion. Then he put his head up and said, “We’re all orphans, are we not?” He asked. All three assassins replied. “All of us, every last one of the Shadowmen is either an orphan or an abandoned child. Most of us were babies when we were taken in. But I was a teenager when I came to the school. Headmaster said I am the oldest recruit she has ever taken in. I still remember what my parents look like, what kind of life we had together. I guess that is not the same for you three.”

The assassins shook their head. None of them remembered anything beyond their life at the assassin school.

“My mother used to tell me, that men are brilliant creatures. We make amazing things, accomplish incredible feats. But we also are quite skilled in making excuses.” Sam Chul turned to Dan Ho. “You just equated birth to taking a life. Giving birth is a miracle. it is astounding that it even happens. But taking a life… we’re cutting off that person’s ability to do anything. That person’s made plans that will never come to fruition. They have people who love them and will miss them when they’re gone. If I give birth, then only I will face pain. If I kill someone, then everyone else will be in pain.”

Now it was the turn of the three assassins to be silent. This time too, Dan Ho spoke up.

“We don’t exactly have a choice. You once you’re a Shadowman, you either do your job, or you get killed. The guild does not allow anyone to leave. Anyone.” Dan Ho emphasized. “Trust me, many have tried.” He jerked his chin at Hwang Rin who looked away, not bothering to explain anything.

Dong Su added, “You haven’t faced certain death yet, Sam Chul. But for the rest of us, when the Headmaster found us, we were nearly dead. Nobody wanted us, nobody cared for us. We were on the streets, dying of hunger and disease. When you’re faced with death at your door and someone gives you a chance to live, you take it. Even if it means taking someone else’s life.”

“But we have a choice here. We have to kill, but we can choose to save instead.”

Dan Ho chuckled darkly. “Sam Chul, no one enters this life because they have a choice.”

“No one.” The three assassins said.

“If you want to sit this one out, do that. But you need to get over your conscience. It will get you killed in our world.” Hwang Rin said.

“Now enough of this,” Dan Ho declared, changing the subject. “Let’s go over the plan again. We enter through here.”

“Not again!” Dong Su, Hwang Rin and Sam Chul groaned in unison.

~~~~~~~

Shadows danced that night as strong winds blew, indicating that winter was near. As two shadows exited the palace, a third shadow entered it. This shadow did not wear any Bandit clothes nor did it sneak around like a Shadowman. This shadow stood tall and moved gracefully, silently, as if it was the wind itself. It knew each covert path in the palace and each hidden entrance. Like a ghost, it entered the palace walls and followed the path that led to the Prince’s rooms.

The warm lights of the room did away with the darkness that covered this shadow and revealed a tall well-built woman clothed in dark green clothes. She wore strange clothing that was cut differently than what anyone else would normally wear. It was a man’s jeonbok that normally military men wore but it was shaped to a woman’s form and had less layers for ease of movement. Her hair was cropped short and her large unblinking eyes glowed in the lamp light. Silently, the woman approached the Prince who was half asleep at his desk.

“Gah!” The Prince clutched his panting chest. “You nearly killed me with fright.”

“I can kill you with far less.” The woman’s voice quiet and soft, yet clear as a bell. “What did you want to see me for? You know how dangerous it is for me to enter the capital, so I am assuming this is urgent.”

“Those men… those wretched assassins. They still haven’t done their job. The keep wasting time!” The Prince wrung his hands together. “I’m getting worried now. I keep getting a bad feeling about this.”

“Calm now. They asked for a month, didn’t they? There’s still time left.”

“There is no time!” The Prince said in a panic. “You were completely right. My father is planning on giving the throne to Song Hwa.” The Prince grit his teeth. “What a joke. All this time he kept saying that women can’t lead, yet he changes his tune when it comes to her.” The Prince’s words were filled with venom.

The woman tilted her chin up, observing the Prince. In a measured tone, she said, “You know I have a saying. Panic makes people do stupid things. And that is what you are doing right now, Your Highness.”

This seemed to humble the Prince. “I have good reason to panic.” He said sourly.

“Have I ever misguided you, Your Highness?” The woman asked indignantly.

The Prince considered this. “No. No, you haven’t.”

“Have I ever let you come into harms way, even when some of your mistakes were near treason and punishable by death?”

“No.”

“Who else here has looked after you, cared for you, nurtured you like I have? Who else has treated you more like a son than your father?”

“You.”

“That’s right. Me. Because I know that you, and only you are worthy of the throne. So trust me. I will never let you walk into danger. Was I not right about the Shadowmen? You were able to capture them, weren’t you?”

“Yes, you were completely right.”

“See? I was right then, and I am right now. Trust me. And trust the Shadowmen. They will do their job. They always do.”

The Prince let out a long sigh. “Yes. Yes, you’re right. You’re right. I must trust your plan and not panic.”

The woman smiled, “Exactly. Just put your faith and me and simply wait. You will be in your rightful place soon.”

Once this conference with the Prince was over, the woman retreated back into the shadows but she wasn’t quite done yet in the palace. There was another person she had to visit. Quieter than the night, lighter than the wind, the woman in green moved through the halls till it reached a secret passage hidden in the walls. The passage led straight to a maze of interconnected rooms, wide and lushly decorated.

The woman moved through the rooms till it reached the innermost bed chamber where Queen Yoo lay at her ornately carved vanity, preparing for bed.

An almost invisible figure, shrouded in darkness, appeared on the side of her mirror. Unlike the Prince, the Queen was not one to scare easily.

“My, my, my. How strange to find you here in my bedchamber at this hour. I don’t suppose you are here to ask after me, snake that you are.” The Queen’s voice was dripping with sweet sounding venom. Her eyes were slits, focused on the woman as she came into the light.

“You’re just as vain as ever. I bet you still brush your hair a hundred times before you sleep.” The woman said, her voice full of contempt.

“This coming from someone who chooses to chop of all of their hair? Sounds more like bitterness than an actual insult.”

“Enough!” The woman said, shaking her head violently, as if to dispel all irritation. “I am not here for this nonsense.” As tempered as the woman had been with the Prince, she was surprisingly the opposite with the Queen.

The Queen turned and smiled a thin, humorless smile. “What do you want?” She said curtly. “I have to get to sleep.”

“I heard some interesting news.” The woman said. “You’re looking for the Shadowmen. Why?”

“Aw, did I offend you?” The Queen narrowed her eyes to slips. “You’ve been keeping secrets from me.” She stood up, walking with swanlike grace in her white sleeping gown.

“You’re chasing after fairytales.”

“Is it? Princess Song Hwa doesn’t seem to believe so?”

Now the woman narrowed her eyes, “What do you mean?”

The Queen sighed. In a sing song voice, she said, “Should I tell you, shouldn’t I tell you? What should I do?”

“Don’t tell me. Then we can tell the Prince together just who it was who suggested to the King that he wasn’t fit for the throne. I am sure he would love to hear how you manipulated his father into abandoning him.”

The Queen’s smile fell into a snarl, she shot daggers at the woman. “You know you are responsible for that. You know it. You told me the King would choose my son over Young Hwa. Instead he’s chosen that wench, Song Hwa. He’s even going to marry her off into the Cho clan. She’ll be unstoppable if that happens.”

“I told you before, you had to get rid of Song Hwa first, then go after the Prince. You’re the one who didn’t listen. Even when I practically hand you the throne on the plate.”

“The King loves that wench.” The Queen hissed. “Going after her is suicide and you know it. I am not stupid enough to fall for such an obvious trap.”

“It wasn’t a trap.”

“That brat has Lord Ahn Hyun wrapped around her little finger. You remember who Lord Ahn Hyun is, don’t you? I seem to recall you running away with your tail between your legs last time you faced him.”

The woman’s face became dangerously dark. It felt as if the shadows in the room grew longer as she became angrier. “I have changed since I last saw Ahn Hyun. And he’s a decrepit old man now. I have nothing to fear from him. Nor do you. Of course, luck only favors the bold. And you were never one to take any risks were you? Always attacking from behind. Never having any guts to face anyone head on.”

The Queen’s lip curled in anger. “No guts, you say? Well I will have you know that I am about to undo all of your pathetic attempts at weaseling your way back into the Kingdom after your disgraceful departure.”

The woman laughed in disbelief, “Ha! As if you could have anything over me.”

The Queen’s eye twitched. “You don’t believe me. Even when I know that you have Queen Daemok’s son?”

The smug grin slowly faded from the woman’s face, “What?”

The Queen smiled in satisfaction. “Yes. I know what really happened with Queen Daemok. That idiot Song Hwa—the King says she’s smart but she’s not really—she let it slip that Queen Daemok had been pregnant at the time of the massacre. And that tale about one of the Shadowmen running away with her was true. But he didn’t run away with her for love. He ran away because the Queen was pregnant. And apparently the child is still alive.”

The woman’s expression was first unreadable, but then her face contorted into laughter. The woman laughed heartily, almost bending over. The Queen stared on in such comical confusion that it made the woman laugh even harder. Finally, when the woman simmered down, she wiped her tears and said, “Ah, Queen Yoo. You are stupider than I had thought. The Princess was fooling you.”

“Don’t insult me.” The Queen warned.

“It is not I that insults you. It’s your favorite brat. My, my she’s clever. She had you chasing around a fictional child while she was off plotting to wipe out the Bandit clans.”

“What?”

“Oh, I’m sorry,” the woman said mockingly. “Did you not know about the Princess’s meetings with the Councilmen? Or the fact that Lord Ahn Hyun personally came here to visit her? Tsk, tsk. I would have thought you’d had at least some control over your own house.”

The Queen blinked. She had heard that Song Hwa had been meeting with councilors one by one but as the woman said, she had been too worried about the unknown heir to the previous King to look too deeply into Song Hwa’s latest actions.

“She dangled a carrot in front of you and like a donkey you chased it around. Meanwhile she did as she please because she didn’t have you getting in the way. Aw, how sad.” The woman pulled a mock sympathetic face. The Queen looked flabbergasted. She gulped down her embarrassment as the truth dawned on her.

The woman tilted her head, regarding the Queen. “Ah, I had always thought of you as an equal, Queen Yoo. An adversary, but an equal. But you’ve been bested by a girl half your age. Perhaps I overestimated you.”

The Queen cleared her throat. “Do not forget, I am still Queen of this kingdom. You cannot speak to me this way.”

“People always pull rank when they have nothing else to support their argument. Pity, for I was just starting to have fun.” The woman began to walk back, sinking back into the shadows that seemed to swallow her up as one of their own.

“Just for old time’s sake, I will leave you with this. Song Hwa is a threat, but her marrying into the Cho clan is actually a blessing for you. Because she won’t marry that man. You know this too. She has eyes for another.”

The shadows had completely enveloped the woman now. The Queen couldn’t see her anymore. All she heard was a voice. “The sooner the King announces her marriage, the better.”

“Why?”

“Because she will run away. You know she will. And when she does, the King will be in disgrace. The Prince will have been disowned by then so the King will have no choice but to give the throne—”

“To one of my daughters,” the Queen said, her eyes shining. “Oh, any one of my girls will be perfect for the Cho clan!”

Like a snake pulling a mouse in its trap, the woman hissed. “Precisely.”

~~~~~~~

Heavy. Her heart, her chest, her stomach. All of it felt heavy. Even her shoulders felt weighed down. Song Hwa didn’t know what this feeling was. But she didn’t like it. Her hands were clammy all the time. She was starting to lose focus and drift off into daydreams. Her precise decisions started to feel like a mess.

Her mind was out of sorts. Since learning of Chung Myung’s hidden love, everything seemed to be going wrong. It felt like a betrayal, even though Song Hwa knew that the Captain had made no promises to her. Yet she felt hurt as if he had cheated.

If she thought about it rationally, then it made sense why Chung Myung would hide his association with someone from the Bandit clan. It would have been considered a betrayal to his King and thus, an act of treason. But rationality was rarely present where the heart was involved. All Song Hwa could see was that Chung Myung had belonged to her and someone from the Bandit clan had stolen him.

Did Chung Myung not care that Song Hwa had been attacked? Did Chung Myung not see that Song Hwa needed him more than some random Bandit girl? How could Chung Myung even look at someone from the dirty and underprivileged Bandit clan when a better woman, a Princess no less, was willing to do anything for him, even give up her life as a Princess?

No, this had to be stopped. Something had to be done. And Song Hwa knew exactly what. Everything was in place now. Everything would be set to order in just a short time. The Bandit clan would be gone, and so would that wretched woman, whoever she was.

Do you think you would be able to go through with it? The needless massacre of people, the killing of innocent souls. Do you think you can live with yourself afterwards?

Perhaps her father wasn’t the only one who knew Song Hwa well. How scarily accurate Lord Ahn Hyun’s deduction been? Song Hwa shivered at the man’s intellect and his sharp eyes. His words still echoed in her mind and like a splinter, lodged into her heart and pained her constantly. Guilt rose and fell like a wave, pushing it’s weight like a headache.

No, she couldn’t fall weak now. Weakness was a bad habit, her father always said. It had to be eradicated. Song Hwa kept her resolve steady. The groundwork of her plan had been laid. Now all she had to do was let things happen on their natural course.

Why do this, Princess? The Bandits have done nothing but steal petty change.

Shut. UP! The Princess covered her ears and closed her eyes, but it was no use. The voices were coming from within. She felt her breath shaking as she pushed back all of her emotions. Emotions were useless anyway. She didn’t need any of them. All she needed was Chung Myung by her side.

Chung Myung, who always saved her whenever she was in trouble. Chung Myung, who knew everything about her and yet still didn’t till ill of her. Chung Myung, who was the only person to see how lonely she felt, the only one to reach out to her and try to get to know her, the real her.

Normally Song Hwa went to Chung Myung when she felt burdened in her heart. But given the circumstances, she couldn’t go to him. This certainly wasn’t because she felt guilty or anything. No, most certainly not that. But Chung Myung would feel a conflict of interest and Song Hwa didn’t think that him knowing about this was the wisest of choices.

Her second choice was Lord Ahn Hyun. He had always been like the father to Song Hwa. The man had lost his daughter a long time ago. Song Hwa felt that somehow, she had become a replacement. But no matter the reason, the man always made himself available to her. However, his reluctance at helping her plainly proved that he too saw her as others did; as a vicious and spoiled girl. Song Hwa would not be going to him again for help ever.

The only other person that Song Hwa could think of was her father and that was an avenue Song Hwa only thought of in desperation.

Ever since she was a little girl, Song Hwa had always favored her father over her mother. Even as a child, she had a connection with him that she never managed to have with her mother. Her mother could never quite understand her, and her father never needed any explanations. He knew Song Hwa better than anyone and her mother knew her the least.

It was strange. Song Hwa loved her father. But at the same time, she hated him. The man had always abused her. Her would slap her senseless at every mistake, humiliate her and call her inferior because she was a woman and disregard her every desire.

Yet, he was the only one she felt like running to when she felt cornered. And she felt cornered now.

The King was in his chambers, preparing for bed. He was unaware that a shadow was lurking around his palace, visiting his son and his wife. He was unaware that Song Hwa had sneaked into his rooms and was hoping for an informal audience with him. All he was aware of was a massive headache and a pinching pain in his stomach.

His food wasn’t digesting well these days and he often found himself overstressed and exhausted. He asked one of his consorts to oil his hair that night. Song Hwa found him on a chair as the woman massaged his head.

“I am not feeling well these days.” He said to the consort as Song Hwa came up from behind.

“What ails you, my King?” The consort asked. “You seem stressed.”

The King growled. “It is that child, Song Hwa. She has become the bane of my existence. Damn girl never does anything right. This is why I wanted sons. Instead, all I got were daughters. And that useless Young Hwa. Always so stupid. If Young Hwa had half the brains Song Hwa had he could have had the throne already! But no, he has to use his heart, not his brain. And brains are wasted on a woman. Women have no use for them!”

Song Hwa had heard such sentiments many times from many different people. She was used to them now, from others that is. Having strangers tell her she was inferior due to her gender meant nothing. But these words coming from her father—a man she still loved dearly—always stung.

Quietly, Song Hwa snuck up behind the consort and tapped her shoulder. When the consort turned she jumped but Song Hwa put a finger on her lips to quiet her. The King did not notice. He was still complaining about his various troubles.

“Everyone is against me. Every last one. That Cho clan would have my head on a platter if they could. And what a brute clan they are! No sophistication. No intellect. Just intimidation.”

Song Hwa took over for the consort, massaging oil into her father’s scalp. She used to do it all the time for her mother, who had said that Song Hwa had a healer’s hands.

With her father’s head in her hands, Song Hwa realized that he was completely vulnerable. He had no idea who was behind him. Song Hwa could have snapped his neck and he wouldn’t be able to stop her. She looked at her father’s thinning hair; grey from age and stress. The familiar scent of wood that often came from him made her tear up. She smelled this scent every time she hugged him as a child. His arms had felt so safe then. His arms were all skin and bones now, his shoulders thin and pointy, and his posture was less proud than before.

He was getting old, getting weak. Despite his brain and his intimidation, he was still a human being. He was still her father. And that made Song Hwa very sad. That while he did abominable things, she still cared for him.

“I’m on your side, Abeo-nim.” Song Hwa said meekly. It was perhaps the most honest thing she had ever said in her life.

The King leapt to his feet. “How did you get here? What do you think you are doing?” He said with his eyes blazing.

Song Hwa jerked back at his harsh reaction. “I came to talk to you.”

“Get out! You’re trying to sneak up on me?! Get OUT!”

Song Hwa shrank back and slowly exited her father’s room. This was not the outcome she had wanted, but then again, this wasn’t completely unexpected.

Trembling, Song Hwa rushed to her chambers. Her mind felt like it was away, like she wasn’t truly present. “Stop it. Stop it!” She said to herself in harsh whisper.

She leaned forward on her dresser. She needed something to support her as she stood. Something moved in the mirror. A figure. Gasping, she turned.

“My goodness. What the hell has you in this state?” It was her father. He had followed after her. His long, straight hair fell about both shoulders and he had a long robe wrapped around him. Even in this state, he looked most dignified.

“Abeo-nim.” Song Hwa felt like a little girl calling out to a parent. Her father didn’t reach out to her as she thought he would. But he didn’t reprimand her either, which is what she expected of him.

“Is this any way for a Princess to behave?” He scolded. “Calm yourself! What is wrong with you?” He demanded.

“I don’t know.” Song Hwa rubbed her neck nervously. “I…” Should she tell him, about her little scheme? Should she tell him, the reason behind it?

Her father’s annoyance simmered. “You surprised me just now. Don’t ever approach me like that.” He said in a reasonable tone. “I am assuming you have something important to discuss. Tell me, what is it?”

Song Hwa let out an exhale of relief. Her father may be cruel, but he was still her father. He still had some love in him. This little sign of concern that her father showed seemed to lessen the load on Song Hwa’s heart. Suddenly she could stand on her own. Suddenly her shoulders didn’t feel so heavy.

Song Hwa opened her mouth to tell the King that she had done something bad, something reprehensible. She wanted to say that she did it for love and that she would do it again in a heartbeat if it meant that for once in her life, she would be happy with the only person who seemed to truly like her. She wanted to tell her father everything. But none of her explanations would have been enough. None of those things could have conveyed her one true desire. Because all of it, all of her actions and her feelings boiled down to one simple fact.

“I don’t want to marry Beom Pal.”

The King clicked his tongue, “This again.”

“I’m serious. I will not do it. I will burn this kingdom down if I have to, but I will not marry him.” With her voice breaking a little, she added, “I can’t.”

“Why not? Every other woman before you has been married off in the same way. Why can’t you just be useful for once and do as you’re told!”

Women before her included her mother, the woman who had wasted away pining for the affection of a man who loved nothing but himself. There was no way Song Hwa would ever end up like her mother. This was one promise Song Hwa intended to keep for herself.

“I mean it, Father. I will burn this kingdom down. But I won’t let you turn me into a tragedy like you did my mother. I won’t let you.” Song Hwa said like a child throwing a tantrum.

The King chuckled incredulously. “You shouldn’t have provoked me, child. I have been too soft on you. Now you will face the true consequences that you should have faced a long time go.”

Song Hwa’s face went white. “Father.”

The King raised his hand. “Do not provoke me further by appealing to me. You know how much begging annoys me.”

“Please don’t do this.” A hot tear streamed down her cheek. “Please. He will beat me up. He will use me. He will make me miserable. I don’t want to be miserable anymore.” The tears were a steady stream now. Her nose was burning.

Her father grimaced. “Ugh, I hate it when women use this tactic. Don’t you have any self respect?”

“Abeo-nim!” Song Hwa reached out and grabbed his arm.

“Get away!” He pushed her back and she fell on the ground. “Don’t let yourself be seen by anyone in this state. I will not be associated by someone so pathetic.”

“Please!” She pleaded.

Her father bent down and grabbed her hair. “You really won’t listen will you.” His eyes turned cold. The lines of his face hardened even though his face barely moved. “I have heard some interesting things lately from some of the councilmen.”

Song Hwa’s eyes widened and she stared at her father.

“Apparently opinions have changed about the Bandit clan. Suddenly is was them who attacked your procession. I wonder how that came about. I couldn’t have been from you, could it? Not after you defended the clan and said they were being framed.”

Song Hwa didn’t breathe, didn’t blink. She didn’t dare move.

“What really interests me is how the Bandit clan got so audacious. From all accounts of the incident, they seemed confident that they could attack you. Perhaps they had someone helping them… someone from your procession.”

Song Hwa didn’t know where this was going, but she didn’t like it.

“And all witnesses agree, that the Bandit clans appeared to be well trained and even had artillery that they could not have gotten their hands on. I am beginning to wonder if someone from our side actually helped them plan the attack. I’m beginning to wonder… if a certain Captain had anything to do with it.”

“No.” The word was barely above a whisper. Song Hwa couldn’t believe this.

“Doesn’t it make sense? The attack seemed too well coordinated. And out of everyone, the Captain seemed to be the only one not seriously injured. And you were only saved by Young Hwa’s man, that new guard who slapped you. None of your own guard seemed to care. Not even the Captain bothered to protect you.”

“He was fighting.” Song Hwa drew out each word to emphasize her point.

“Was he really? Did he actually kill any of the Bandits? Did he catch any of them? I don’t think he did. Perhaps I should bring this up to the council, next time we convene. Which conveniently is tomorrow.” The King turned to leave.

No, nonononononono. Song Hwa was panicking, which was bad, because bad decisions were made when people panicked. Think, think. Get Chung Myung out of this. Get him out! Song Hwa took a deep breath to control her emotions, and as she did, an idea bloomed.

“Your plan won’t work.” She told her father right as he reached the door.

He turned, “And why ever not?”

The Princess stared right into her father’s eyes, “It won’t work if Chung Myung is the one to capture and kill the Bandit clan. That will prove his loyalty. And you won’t have any arguments to make against him.”

Cogs turned in the King’s brain as he realized that Song Hwa was right. His entire reasoning would be disproven if Chung Myung destroyed the people he was accused of conspiring with.

“That almost makes me proud.” The King said, with a hint of a smile. Song Hwa waited for him to finish. “But there is still a flaw in your plan. Yet again, you prove you are not as smart as I.” He turned back.

Song Hwa looked confused. “What was my flaw?”

“You told me. Of course, I will come up with something else now.”

With this the King left Song Hwa shaking in misery. The Princess didn’t sleep at all that night. She wracked her brain, trying to figure out her father’s next move. She didn’t have to wait long. Dawn broke through her windows. Sunlight poured in, letting her know that the entire night had passed. Song Hwa dismissed her maids, telling them she was unwell and would not be doing any of her usual tasks. Her head hurt, her heart hurt, everywhere on her body, it just hurt.

At noon the maids banged at her door again.

“Go away!” Song Hwa yelled.

“Princess! You have to come out!” The maid said. “Your father has made an announcement! We must hurry!”

The council had convened that day. They had been woken early from their beds and brought to the King to discuss an urgent matter. It was reported that Queen Yoo was present at this meeting as well, which was odd since the King usually didn’t allow any women beyond Princess Song Hwa in his court.

The royal messengers and announcers were sent all over the kingdom to spread the outcome of that council meeting. Invitations were hurriedly drawn up and sent along with carriages to carry the guests back to the capital.

“We have to get you ready by tonight! Oh goodness me! Who can ever arrange a wedding in one day?”

The Princess shot up from bed, “WHAT?!”

Outside, the announcement was hung up on walls. People crowded around to get a good look and confirm for themselves what was happening.

The two Royal Guards called Park Dan Ho and Lee Hwang Rin stared were at the front of the crowd, staring at the announcement with true terror on their faces. They both were bug eyed and slack jawed.

The announcement read as thus:

By order of the King who hath Heaven appointed, that this day be known as wedding day of her Royal Highness Princess Song Hwa and Lord Cho Beom Pal of Cho clan. The wedding is to take place tonight. The kingdom shall rejoice at this most auspicious union.

“Dan Ho…” Hwang Rin said absently.

“This is bad. This is really bad.” Dan Ho was rambling to himself.

“Dan Ho…”

“We had three more days. We needed those three days.”

“Dan Ho… What are we going to do?”

Dan Ho and Hwang Rin looked at each other.

“We’re doomed.” Dan Ho said.

Chapter Text

It was funny how one day could stretch out into what felt like an entire year. The chaos that had erupted at dawn—when the palace staff had realized that they were given the impossible task of arranging a wedding in one day—had settled into a quiet calm by dusk, as everyone reveled in their ability to pull off the impossible. Only Princess Song Hwa did not revel in this achievement. She was outright distraught. And with each receding ray of the sunset, Song Hwa’s heart sank deeper and deeper into despair.

All day long she had been poked, prodded, scrubbed and lathered in all sorts of things. She had had her face painted, body wrapped around in suffocating silks and hair pulled into a headache inducing up do. She had thrown up several times, to which her maid had exclaimed, “Would you stop? You’ve made all of our lives miserable all this time. Can’t you be reasonable just once?”

Song Hwa swallowed down the bile that rose in her throat after that statement, along with her pride. The fact that a maid felt impertinent enough to lash out to her was the final nail in the coffin. Song Hwa had lost. Her father had won. All semblance of happiness vanished before her eyes. She would never get to have a peaceful life now. She would never get to be happy. She would never see Chung Myung again.

As if to cope, Song Hwa imagined what it would be like for Chung Myung to suddenly show up and rescue her; to break into her room, take her hand and run away with her into the sunset. She prayed to whatever power listened that her fantasy would come true, that all of the fairytales she had grown up listening to would prove true and that her secret belief in them would rewarded.

Alas, as the last rays of the sun dissipated, so did Song Hwa’s last ray of hope. No one was going to rescue her. No one was going to save her. No help was coming.

“Ah, please don’t ruin my hard work.” The maid from before said, wiping the tears off of Song Hwa’s face with a frightening force. “See? The color from your cheeks has wiped off.”

That’s because you rubbed it away. Song Hwa thought but saw no reason to say it out loud.

Clicking her tongue dismissively, the maid reapplied the color on her face to make her appear beautiful again.

“Why are you here?” Song Hwa asked. “If you despise me so much?”

The maid pressed her lips together and said nothing. All day long she had been by Song Hwa’s side like a hawk. If Song Hwa wasn’t so tired and her head not throbbing like a million hammers, she might have deduced the answer herself. But as it was, Song Hwa was tired of playing guessing games and for once in her life wanted a straight answer.

“Did my father order you by my side?”

Silence.

“Did my brother?”

More silence.

“The Queen then.”

A small flare of the nostril let Song Hwa know she had hit the mark. Song Hwa had long suspected that one of her maids had been the Queen’s informant and now Song Hwa finally knew which maid it was.

“So it was you who kept the Queen updated on my plans.” Song Hwa was surprised by the hurt in her own voice. “Well, is the Queen happy now that I am finally out of her way?”

The maid looked up, a frightening rage in her eyes. She seized Song Hwa by the arm, “Yes. We are all happy. Princess.” The maid spat out the last word.

Song Hwa wasn’t one to back down in the face of anger. “Why do you hate me so much? I’ve been nothing but kind to all of you.”

“If by kindness you mean you haven’t had any of us killed off, then thank you. Your graciousness all these years has been truly a blessing.” Each word dripped with venomous sarcasm.

“The Queen has had entire villages burned because they disrespected her. What have I ever done?”

The maid’s nails dug into Song Hwa’s arms. “Nothing. That’s your problem. All you do is enjoy every comfort in life while the rest of us wait on you hand and foot. My Queen looks after us. She takes care of our families.”

“She buys loyalty and holds your family hostage.”

“Shut up!” The maid slapped Song Hwa who was knocked against the dresser. All of the bottles and jars toppled over, spilling their contents. Recovering herself, the maid straightened up. “Just shut up. Don't make me hurt you on your last night here.” The maid turned to the dresser to clean up the spill. “Princess.” She added as an afterthought.

~~~~~~~

The corridor to the Princess’s room was dark and uninhabited. Moon light shined in from the side, covering everything in white. Cold air bit Dan Ho where his skin was exposed. He walked in shadow, taking careful steps to not make any of the floor boards creak.

The door to her rooms slid open without a sound. Surprisingly, it was dark inside the room too. White sheets were drawn over her bed. Her silhouette was lit by the moon. But it seemed strange. Her form was different. Although Dan Ho hadn’t known her long, he could tell… that it wasn’t the Princess.

Suddenly the lanterns in the room lit up and the landscape changed. The crying of a baby could be heard from far away. Dan Ho rubbed his eyes. The silhouette was holding a baby, shushing it to no avail.

“Please stop crying, please.” The woman, whoever she was, was pleading with the baby. The baby didn’t obey.

“Here, give him to me.” A man appeared beside the woman. He took the baby from her and as if by magic, the baby calmed down.

“How do you always manage to do that?” The woman asked in wonder.

“Silence is ingrained in us since childhood. The child senses silence in me and thus doesn’t cry. You on the other hand, are a mess: inside and out. The child can sense your distress.”

“How impudent. You speak to your Queen, Park Dan Ho.” The woman said, not sounding offended in the slightest.

“Forgive me, my Queen.” The man said with an air of formality.

The Queen sensed that her jest was not received well. “I was merely… never mind.”

Dan Ho tried to deduce the man’s identity from his form. A short figure with stocky build and a soft voice that was the exact opposite of his own. He began to hum a low tune. A soft lullaby that began to echo throughout the room. The melody seemed to call to something buried deep inside Dan Ho’s heart. A memory that he couldn’t quite place.

With his heart beating like a hummingbird, he reached out and slid aside the curtain, and suddenly the room changed again. This time he stood in front of a woman in red wedding clothes. Her face was covered in a red silk veil. She pulled it off to reveal a beautifully painted face.

That familiar sullen expression and those bored eyes brought a strange comfort to Dan Ho’s wild heart. Her face was covered in too much color; white to make her appear fair, black to make her eyes bigger, red to make her lips appear like petals. He wanted to reach out and touch those full, blood red lips and see if the color came off on his fingertips. But he didn’t dare move an inch.

She scanned Dan Ho up and down, studying him with her eyes. “You sure about this?” She asked, tilting her head towards the sword in Dan Ho’s hand.

Was he sure? He didn’t feel so.

“I hope you remember, your Headmaster didn’t sign off on this contract.”

Dan Ho blinked. How would the Princess know about his Headmaster?

“Anyway, you’re going to be late if you stay here.” She said.

“What?”

“I said—”

“—we're going to be late, Dan Ho!” Hwang Rin was shaking him violently. “Do I need to get a bucket of water?”

“Waaah, Dan Ho who used to be a light sleeper is now sleeping like a log. Yah, Dan Ho! Wake. Up!” Dong Su began to shake him too.

“I’m up, I’m up!” Dan Ho said, yawning. The group had decided to catch some shut eye before the main event. They needed all of their strength for the job.

The time had finally come. This was all about to end right here, tonight. They would be reunited with Eun Dan again and all would go back to normal.

Dan Ho felt a strange taste on his tongue. A bitter taste like bile. “I have a bad feeling.” He declared.

The assassins all stopped packing up their things, looking to each other while Dan Ho rubbed his sleepy face.

“What do you mean?” Hwang Rin asked.

What did he mean? Dan Ho had no clue. “Ignore me. I had a bad dream.” He said, not remembering what he had seen. “Are we ready?”

“Yup.” The three assassins stood up, looking regal and dignified in their guard uniforms. Dan Ho and Hwang Rin especially so.

The uniforms felt a little stuffier as they had their assassin clothing beneath it. Sam Chul tugged at his vest uncomfortably. He wished they could have stuck to their original plan with him resting in their little hide out while Dan Ho and Hwang Rin collected the Princess’s head. But given the circumstances, Dan Ho had decided that he needed Sam Chul and Dong Su there as well.

“In case me and Hwang Rin fail, you guys will be the one to finish the job.” Dan Ho had explained before.

“Wh-why do you think you will fail?” Sam Chul had asked.

“I don’t know what might happen. Things are too unpredictable. But no matter what, I want all of you to remember this. One of us needs to get out safe and sound with her head. If you see an opening, take it. Don’t wait for the other to catch up, understood?”

All assassins had nodded their heads solemnly. Now that it was finally time to put their plan to action, Sam Chul was feeling queasy. The rest of the boys were ready to die for this mission. Sam Chul felt less inclined to do so. This was why he and Dong Su were meant to stay outside the Princess’s rooms while Dan Ho and Hwang Rin were to go in.

The assassins destroyed all evidence that someone had stayed in the little house that Mu Won had provided and left without looking back. What little they needed, they carried with them. The rest they hid among the trees to be fetched later, if later ever came.

The entire city was lit with lanterns and flaming streetlights. There was sparse shadow to travel in. Which was fine, since the assassins roamed around conspicuously in guard uniforms. Nobody questioned them or stopped them. Few spared glances at them—even at Hwang Rin and Dan Ho—because everyone was still rushing to make the impossible wedding possible.

The guards made their way to the palace where Chung Myung scolded them. “Where have you been? We need every man we can get today. Go stand by the Princess’s quarters and make sure she doesn’t run away.”

Chung Myung didn’t notice the two new faces. He barely looked at Dan Ho and Hwang Rin because his attention was on a million things at once. Moving on from Chung Myung the assassins passed by Mu Won, the guard trainer.

Mu Won seized Hwang Rin’s arm gently and whispered in his ear, “This is cutting it way too close. The Prince is getting antsy.”

“Just focus on keeping the Princess’s quarters clear. It will be done.” Hwang Rin replied quietly, pushing away Mu Won’s hand.

Mu Won eyed Sam Chul and Dong Su and said nothing. Only nodded and walked away.

Through the main palace courtyard, past the grand hall where the Prince and Princess were to be married, to the latter part of the palace grounds where Princess Song Hwa’s house was. This part of the palace was sparsely populated, and that too mostly with palace women who were getting the Princess ready.

The sun was lowering behind the trees. The last orange rays twinkled out as Dan Ho and Hwang Rin relieved the guards on duty to take their place.

“Captain Chung Myung’s orders.” Dan Ho explained when the guards had looked to each other with uncertainty. There was no way to confirm this since the Captain was so busy. And even if there was, the guards knew Dan Ho. They would not suspect him.

With the place now theirs, the assassins went to work. Sam Chul and Dong Su were to wait outside while Dan Ho and Hwang Rin went in. The Princess’s housing had multiple buildings closely splattered on the grounds together A servant quarters, a kitchen, a bath house and a few other buildings they had scoped out before. The roof of the kitchens directly overlooked the room where the Princess was staying in. Dong Su and Sam Chul climbed the side of the building and perched themselves on to the roof like two crows. Their clothes were not meant for such exposure but light was sparse in this part of the palace grounds and there was no one on this side of the building.

Through the closed window, the two assassins could make out the Princess’s silhouette. The room was lit in yellow by the lanterns of her room. She sat in the middle, waiting to be escorted to the wedding.

Sam Chul and Dong Su waited quietly, keeping an eye out for any trouble. They watched the buildings, lit up by the lights and the full moon. Tonight was not a night for any shadows.

After what felt like an hour, Sam Chul shifted a little. His legs felt numb and he needed to stretch out. As quiet as a mouse, he leaned backwards and unfolded his legs. As he did so, he felt Dong Su’s angry eyes on him and when he turned, indeed Dong Su’s eyes glared from the darkness. He could feel Dong Su scolding him internally.

There’s no one here, Sam Chul thought, hoping that the words would reach Dong Su too. As he leaned further back, he stopped, becoming still as a rock. He flicked his brows at Dong Su who only glared back.

Dong Su didn’t pick up what Sam Chul was doing at first. Then he realized that Sam Chul had become still as a rock and was trying to point at something behind Dong Su with his eyes. Cautiously, Dong Su turned. At first he saw nothing. Then, among the trees, almost hidden between the branches, was the outline of a man.

Dong Su first thought his eyes were deceiving him. Why would anyone be crazy enough to hide themselves up in a tree? But the more Dong Su looked on, the more his heartbeat rose. The man was wearing all black, just like a Shadowman, but not quite the same. His posture, his clothing, all seemed to be mimicking them but something was just a little off. The shirt didn’t wrap around his body the same way theirs did. The cloth on his face was wound too tightly around the mouth. He sat too poorly. Shadowmen usually mimicked birds when trees were the only means of hiding themselves.

Dong Su also trembled a little when he thought that he spotted two heads on the man’s body instead of one. But he came to his senses immediately when he realized that he was seeing another man beyond the first one, just a little farther away.

Men hiding in the trees. Men looking like they had no business being there. Dong Su and Sam Chul exchanged looks of concern.

The men hadn’t spotted the Shadowmen perched on top of the building, for even in the conspicuous clothing of the royal guard, the assassins still knew how to be invisible. It was only a matter of time, however, that they would be noticed. The moon was out in all its glory. The moon was the enemy of all shadows.

A sound brought their attention back to the Princess’s silhouette in the closed window. The paper pane covering the window made her form appear larger than it was. Or perhaps it was due to her wedding dress. The Princess’s head raised, as if someone had entered her room. They heard the muffled voice of a woman but they couldn’t make out what was being said.

Suddenly a scream rang out but it was short lived. Dong Su and Sam Chul saw the unmistakable, graceful form of Dan Ho come into the window and slice the Princess’s head off in one swift motion. His sword moved so fast that it didn’t even cast a shadow on the window. The Princess’s head just fell off and a large splatter of red blood just sprayed across the window pane.

Tree branches began to shift and crack, as if the trees themselves had come alive. But no, there were men, emerging from the trees and the shrubbery like ghosts. Dong Su and Sam Chul looked to each other, eyes wide in horror. Sam Chul’s hand went to the hilt of his sword but he stopped when he saw Dong Su shake his head ever so slightly.

Figures began emerging from the shadows on the ground. From corners of the buildings, behind bushes and rocks. Figures dressed in guard uniforms. The guards below looked up and signaled to the men in the trees. Sam Chul’s breath shuddered. Inside, opaque forms were moving around. It was confusing to see what was what. The men from the trees, unaware of Dong Su and Sam Chul’s presence, jumped on to the roof of the Princess’s quarters and advanced towards the windows and the balconies. The sheer number of men made Sam Chul break out in sweat. Four from the trees and four down below. Two for each of the assassins.

Dong Su and Sam Chul looked to each other again, this time in panic. This was not a simple assassination. This was an ambush.

~~~~~~~

Dan Ho shot one last glance at Dong Su and Sam Chul as the two parted from Hwang Rin and himself. He worried about Sam Chul but was glad that he had Dong Su with him. Inside the people around were sparse. Palace women were returning to their posts after having prepared the Princess. Most of the staff was at the grand hall, ready to wait on the guests that would arrive at any moment.

There was not a second to lose. Quietly, covertly, Dan Ho and Hwang Rin made their way to the Princess’s chambers. Dan Ho knew this corridor well from his time as her guard, but somehow it felt different. Dream like. His hand shook around his sword as he and Hwang Rin advanced. As they neared the door, Dan Ho stopped.

“What’s wrong? Why are you stopping?” Hwang Rin whispered behind him.

Dan Ho knew what came next. The door would slide open and there would be a woman behind the bed curtains and she would say strange things that he would not remember later.

“Dan Ho?”

Dan Ho slid the doors open. The room was ordinary; the same as he had observed before when he had been spying on her with Hwang Rin. Like his dream, there were thin curtains drawn around the bed. The Princess’s form could be seen through the light but she wasn’t the only one in the room.

Another woman, a maid, sat at the foot of her bed. Dan Ho knew her as Queen Yoo’s informant. He had often seen her report back to the Queen after hours, after the Princess had retired. Dan Ho was indifferent to the woman, but he still felt bad that she was at the wrong place at the wrong time.

She looked up at Dan Ho as demanded, “Is it time to escort her?” She had mistaken them as guards, given their uniform.

In one swift motion, Dan Ho did away with her head. But he wasn’t fast enough to quash the scream she let out when he raised his sword.

“What’s going on?” Dan Ho heard the Princess say. He had to hurry. With shaking hands, he parted the curtain revealing a very distraught looking Princess.

She was wearing red, just like in his dream. Her face was painted excessively; skin pale as the moon, eyed lined darkly and lips as red as blood. Her expression changed immediately at the sight of him, from great distress to great relief. It surprised Dan Ho that she would seem almost happy to see him.

“Park Dan Ho.” She gasped, saying his name under her breath, almost to herself. Her shoulders sagged in relief, eyes glinting in almost a smile. Dan Ho felt stuck in place. This was a strange reaction, but then his mind sparked with the answer.

She thinks I’m here to rescue her.

This sentiment on the Princess’s face faded as she spotted the blood splatter on Dan Ho’s uniform. Her eyes first went to Hwang Rin, standing behind him with his sword on the ready and then to the headless maid lying on the floor. The Princess’s reflex was to rise but Dan Ho swiftly put a blade to her throat.

“Don’t move.” He said, his voice deep and demon like.

“I should have known.” The Princess clenched her teeth. Her hands were shaking in anger, her eyes blazing in fury.

“Dan Ho, hurry up.”

“Your brother captured people very close to me and is holding them hostage in exchange for your head.” Dan Ho said. “Tell me where I might find them.” He said to the Princess, implying freedom if she did so.

The Princess was not so easily fooled. “If I tell you, will you spare my life?”

Damn. Dan Ho had been hoping to gain some information from the Princess. Alas, he would gain nothing. “No. But you’ll die knowing you did something nice for a change.”

“Is this really the time for sarcasm?”

“Hurry up, will you? I think someone’s coming.” Hwang Rin said.

“Tell me where he might be hiding them. You’re his sister. Surely, you must know.” Dan Ho couldn’t’ hide the desperation.

There were three things people did when they were about to die. Bargain, which was always futile. Beg, which always irksome. And tremble, which was what everyone did when they realized they were about to take their final few breaths. Dan Ho wondered which route Princess Song Hwa would take first. Usually, the bargaining came first, and Dan Ho had just handed her a pretty solid chip to offer a deal with.

Granted bargaining would still be useless in this situation. But the Princess didn't know that.

The Princess's eyes bore into his, unblinking. “You must not be that smart, if you think you I will simply give you information only to have you kill me right after.”

Normally, people did give Dan Ho the information he wanted. Panic always tended to bring out the best of people’s stupidity. But Princess Song Hwa, using to having her life threatened, managed to keep her wits about her.

Dan Ho almost smiled. “I suppose I should have expected better from you.”

“Seriously, Dan Ho. I think I hear movement.” Hwang Rin tugged at Dan Ho's arm.

“You’re losing time, Park Dan Ho… I don’t suppose that’s your real name. Mind telling me what it is before you end this?” Dan Ho saw her shift ever so slightly and realized she was distracting him in the conversation.

He sliced down on the side of her bed, near the hand that was trying to reach the blade concealed in her dress. “Don’t bother reaching for any weapons. You can’t possibly hope to win.”

“Not win, just hurt you.” She brandished the blade, slow enough for him to reflexively reach out and grab her wrist but fast enough that she managed to cut into his cheek.

“I hope that hurt.” Song Hwa said, trembling.

“Not as much as this will.” He raised his sword and at the same time, men broke in through the window.

Hwang Rin, Dan Ho and the Princess all gasped as men broke in from seemingly everywhere. Some were in all black, others wore the guard uniform.

“Guards! Help!” The Princess cried out.

Two guards attached Dan Ho while two men in black went for Hwang Rin. Dan Ho made quick work of the two that attacked him and counted six other men in the room.

“What’s this? I thought you signaled she was dead?” One man dressed as a guard spoke to one in all black. The black clothing, Dan Ho noted, seemed similar to what the assassins normally wore.

“She was. At least I thought she was…” The man in black eyed the Princess who turned to the guard hopefully.”

The guard lunged for her and tried to stab her. The Princess jumped back, holding up her small blade pathetically. She leapt off the bed, unaware there was another guard behind her, looking to stab her from behind.

An arrow shot through the guard before he could bring his blade down on her. “Gwenchana?” Sam Chul appeared in the window. Song Hwa stared at him in wild confusion, not knowing what to make of the chubby man in the guard uniform. Was he on her side?

“Watch out!” Dong Su cried as he leapt in from a different window. He threw a dagger at one of the men Hwang Rin was fighting with.

Four men were down. Four men remained. Three guards and one man in black. They circled the assassins who stood back to back.

“Who are you?” Dan Ho demanded. “What is this?”

Dan Ho recognized one of them. “Yah, you know me don't you? What are you doing here?”

“Wouldn’t you like to know?”

“I would actually. That’s why I asked.”

“Funny.” The guard said, making a face. He lunged for Dan Ho but met his blade instead. Hwang Rin took on one guard while Dong Su fought off another. While the three of them were busy with the uninvited guests, Sam Chul saw an opening to go to the Princess.

Song Hwa was trying to take advantage of the chaos and inch her way to the door. Sam Chul was on her in a second. He jabbed his blade in the wall beside her face. “Not so fast, Princess.”

Song Hwa looked up at the unfamiliar man, waiting for the final blow to land. Slowly, Sam Chul raised his blade to strike down the Princess. Her eyes were wide with fright, she trembled as many men before her had when they faced off a Shadowman. She clutched her useless knife as she waited for Sam Chul to make his move. Sam Chul grimaced at the thought of hurting her, even though he knew he had to. But his hand refused to move. His sword remained suspended in the air.

“I can’t do this.” He said, lowering his weapon. “Leave.” He told the Princess.

Song Hwa didn’t argue. She ran to the door, opening it to find Mu Won standing there with three more guards behind him. Not knowing whether to run to him or from him, Song Hwa slowly backed away.

The assassins only noticed Mu Won standing there once Dan Ho pulled out his sword from the last of the guards.

“Princess, get behind me.” Sam Chul said, pulling the Princess away from Mu Won.

Dan Ho, always the clever one, put two and two together. “So, the Prince never planned to let us live, did he? We were going to die as soon as she was dead.”

“And the guards were going to enjoy medals of valor for having killed the assailants. It was going to be clean and contained.” Mu Won said. With a flick of his head, he motioned the guards behind him to kill the assassins and the Princess.

A flaming anger washed over Dan Ho in waves. He felt fury course through his veins and emanate from his hawk eyes. His gaze didn’t stray from Mu Won even once as he sliced open one man after the other. Hwang Rin and Dong Su backed away, not wanting to get in Dan Ho’s way when he was like this.

Mu Won quickly realized that this situation wasn’t going in his favor. He chose to run instead of staying to fight. Hwang Rin sent a dagger flying after him. It hit hi on the base of his neck, hitting his spine. Mu Won fell but he wasn’t dead. Dan Ho felt it was better he stay alive. His body couldn’t move anyway. It would never move, not anymore.

Dan Ho approached the Princess who was clutching on to Sam Chul for dear life.

“Dan Ho…” Sam Chul wanted to appeal to Dan Ho but couldn’t find the words nor the courage to speak up to him.

Dan Ho gently pushed Sam Chul aside. The Princess stood her ground, squaring her shoulders even though Dan Ho could see the obvious fear on her face.

“You’re right,” she said, her voice shaking, “I do know where my brother might be keeping your friends.”

Dan Ho nodded. “And you will take us there.”

“Will you let me live then? Afterwards, will you let me live?”

“We can’t,” Hwang Rin reminded Dan Ho, speaking softly in his ear. “We don’t violate contracts.”

“This was never an authorized mission, remember? Headmaster doesn’t know about this.” Dan Ho said, the thought suddenly entering his mind. The cogs began to turn, puzzle pieces fell into place as Dan Ho worked out a plan.

Dan Ho held out his hand. “Payment. For the contract.”

At first Song Hwa didn’t understand. Then it hit her, Dan Ho was asking to make her request official.

She didn’t have anything on her, except her wedding jewelry. She took it all off, her earrings, her gold hairpins, her neck lace, everything and handed it to Dan Ho.

“Seriously? We’re doing this?” Dong Su asked.

Dan Ho took out a handkerchief and used it to wrapped up the jewelry. Then he took out a piece of paper and a stick of charcoal. With surprising penmanship, he wrote out what looked to be an assassin’s contract. He handed it over to Hwang Rin. “Make sure this is proper.”

“Who is the mark?” Hwang Rin read the paper.

“No one. We keep the Princess alive, and she goes with us till this matter is sorted.”

“I’m not going with you.” The Princess protested.

“Oh? Would you rather stay here where your brother can easily finish the job?”

Song Hwa had no reply.

Dan Ho pulled out a dagger from one of the bodies lying on the floor and cut into his thumb. He then pressed it on the paper once Sam Chul was done.

He held out his hand to her. “I can’t let you cut me.” She said indignantly. “Women are worthless if they have scars.”

“You won’t scar.” Dan Ho pulled at her hand and make a tiny cut on her thump. She winced as he pressed it on the paper.

“There. We have a contract, Princess. Your life is safe in our hands. Now take off your wedding dress.”

The Princess’s eyes bulged. “Are you insane?”

“Did I stutter?”

“Yah, what are you asking?” Sam Chul asked.

Dong Su rolled his eyes, “Relax. No one here cares about women or their bodies.”

Dan Ho pointed his sword to the fallen body of the maid he had killed when he had entered. “Take off your clothes and swap with her.” He turned away before the Princess was able to ask any questions and began to take off the clothes from the dead maid’s body. She was about the same size and height as the Princess, which was lucky for Dan Ho and the plan he had in mind.

Sam Chul quickly got one of the sheets from Song Hwa’s bed and held it up for her to have some privacy. “I would do what he says if I were you.”

“What are you thinking?” Dong Su and Hwang Rin were on Dan Ho immediately.

Gently, Dan Ho removed the maid’s clothes while silently apologizing to the dead woman. “Give me the wedding dress when you have it.” He said to Sam Chul. To Dong Su and Hwang Rin he said, “I’m giving the Prince what he wanted. A dead Princess. Now make sure to collect the maid’s head.”

Chapter Text

Nobody alive knew this about Dan Ho, but after he received payment for his first contract he had cried.

He had been fourteen then. A young boy on the cusp of manhood, having his youth robbed by a vile line of work. He had been working with a senior assassin who was guiding him in applying all that he had learned at the school.

“Don’t spend it all on one girl.” The assassin had said, before he let himself be pulled away by one of the girls.

It was strange to see such a young boy at a brothel, all bright eyed and innocent, standing in a house full of scandalous happenings. But it was not strange for Dan Ho. Shame and modesty had been trained out of him a long time ago and he had made quite a few friends with the prostitutes that were trained at school. While any other man would have seen a piece of flesh to be conquered, all Dan Ho saw were more potential friends.

That’s how most assassins saw their handlers. These women who safe guarded their payment and handed out the contracts. Being good to them meant you got to have the juicier deals and first pick at some of the more expensive targets.

“Don’t listen to that geezer.” The handler had advised when the man was gone. “Save your money. Put it away for a rainy day. If you make a habit of spending it all here or you’ll always be in debt. Headmaster hates that.”

Dan Ho had looked down on the small pouch of coin but said nothing. He felt strange, as if he were in a dream. The last scream of the man they had killed still echoed in his mind. The expression the target’s face had made felt like it was permanently etched into his eye lids. He saw it every time he blinked.

The prostitute must have seen this on Dan Ho’s face because she said, “Aigoo, is this your first time?”

Dan Ho nodded, feeling ashamed and exposed.

“Phabo, you shouldn’t wear your heart on your sleeve like that.” She scolded. “Forget about your target. Try to think about where you will go next.”

Dan Ho nodded obediently and tried to do what she said. He concentrated on the next target but felt like throwing up just at the thought of killing again.

The prostitute sighed, getting Dan Ho a bowl of rice and a plate of side dishes. “Eat. When you have strained yourself so, you must eat.”

Despite his stomach’s protests, Dan Ho stuffed his face with food. Then promptly threw it up when his body could take it no longer.

“Aish!” The woman jumped back. “You ruined my best dress you brat!”

For some reason, it was the scolding that brought tears to his eyes.

“Yah, are you crying?” The woman sad, bewildered.

“He must not have been trained well.” Another woman said.

“Aigoo, send him back to school. It’s too early for him to be out here.”

“He’s going to get himself killed.”

The handler got up, “Shut up, all of you.” She grabbed Dan Ho by the hand and dragged him away to a corner where no one could see. “Are you serious? You’re a Shadowman. Shadowmen don’t cry.” She said.

Dan Ho tried to hold his tears back, but the more he did, the harder they fell, streaking salty lines all over his young cheeks.

“Yah,” the woman said more gently. “Come on now. Don’t cry. You’ll get used to it.”

“What if I don’t want to get used to it? What if I don’t want this?”

The woman considered his words. Gently, slowly, she took him into her arms.

Dan Ho stood in place awkwardly, confused by the gesture. Was the woman coming on to him? She was certainly too old to do so. In fact, she was reaching the age when brothels began to turn out the women, letting them fend for themselves on the street. Not many did survive past this age.

That thought made Dan Ho very sad.

“Do you want me to pay you?” Dan Ho asked.

The prostitute pushed him away but held on to his arms. “What?”

“Headmaster says we shouldn’t indulge in any desires, but she said it would be okay if it’s with our handlers.” He said innocently.

“I’m not making a move on you, you dolt.” The woman sounded offended, “I am comforting you.”

“What’s that?”

“You don’t know what it means to comfort someone?”

Dan Ho shook his head.

“Didn’t anyone ever hug you when you got hurt or felt sad?”

Dan Ho was perplexed by the very idea. “We’re not allowed to dwell on pain or feelings. Assassins don’t have time for that.”

The woman sighed, taking Dan Ho back in her arms again. “How do you feel when I hold you like this?”

Dan Ho thought about it. With his body not having reached his full height, his face ended up being pressed in the woman’s collarbone, making it hard for him to breathe. “Suffocated.” He said.

The woman chuckled. “Alright. How does this feel?” She patted his back gently. A strange sort of warmth spread through him. His shoulders that he had been hunching unconsciously, relaxed.

“That feels nice.” He said in a quiet voice.

The woman hugged him tighter. “When someone is hurting or in pain, you hold them like this. It keeps them from falling apart.” Dan Ho sniffled, understanding what she meant. “Do you know what you have to do now, if you don’t want to become like the others?”

Dan Ho shook his head.

The woman pulled herself away to look at him. “You have to become just like them. Emotionless, fearless. And you have to hide your true feelings.”

“How is that any different than what I have to do now?”

“It’s different because you don’t kill the feeling. You just hide it away so that no one can take it from you. You protect it. Understand?”

Dan Ho didn’t. But he nodded anyway.

“Now come on. Let’s go eat. And don’t worry. I won’t tell anyone about what happened today.”

Dan Ho nodded furiously, wiping away his tears.

True to her promise, no one found out that young Dan Ho had cried after his first kill. The next time Dan Ho visited the brothel, the woman was gone, having been expelled due to her age. Dan Ho had found her dead on the street a week later. But by then he was used to death and decided he didn’t need to have any one to have a cry with.

Assassins were all orphans, or children who had been abandoned by family. Society didn’t want them, saw them as a burden. So the Headmaster would take them in, offering them a family that would never leave them. But that was a lie. All the school gave the assassins was a loss in humanity, and a life of shadows; always hidden, always alone.

These women who worked in their brothels, they were considered a stain on society. But to the assassins, they were the last source of warmth, the only people who made them feel human again. It was among the handlers, that the assassins felt they were allowed to laugh, allowed to cry, allowed to have small moments as normal people. They offered the assassins news of the outside world and gossip from town. They gave the assassins a small reprieve from the cold and harsh reality they all lived in.

Dan Ho considered these women as more than just handlers. They were his friends. They were the family he chose for himself.

Dan Ho couldn’t wait to have his friends be back where they belonged, safe and sound. Away from the Prince and his men. The assassins hurried to the location the Princess had pointed out on their map. Going by foot wasn’t an option, so they had stolen horses from the palace during their escape and after a day’s journey were finally at the Prince’s hide out.

It is a solemn looking place, high up in the rocky mountains. They are awfully close to the Abandoned Lands, though not quite close enough to worry. The fortress is hidden deep in the rocks that it was built out of. The openings in its walls that served as windows were all black in shadow.

“This better not be a lie, Princess.” Dan Ho poked his sword into Song Hwa’s back.

“I don’t fancy having you kill me out of rage, Park Dan Ho.” The Princess said his name like an insult. She stood in the front, her arms tied up with rope behind her back while the four assassins eyed the fortress behind her.

“It looks deserted.” Sam Chul said. True, the place appeared lifeless, with no movement or sound to be detected beyond the cawing of crows circling up above.

A dark feeling settled in the pit of Dan Ho’s stomach. As if voicing his thoughts, the Princess said. “This is the place my brother would hide away people, assuming he hasn’t killed them already.”

“Why would he kill our friends? He would need them for leverage.” Dong Su said.

“He was planning on killing you all, wasn’t he? Why would he do that and keep your friends around?”

Dan Ho poked his sword into her back again, “Shut up. Dong Su, you stay here. The rest of you are coming with me.”

The three of them cautiously made their way into the seemingly abandoned fort, keeping to the corners so as not to be seen. But the deeper they ventured in, the more they realized that all efforts to hide their presence was in vain. There was no one there.

That fact alone was not that dreadful. But the sight—or rather the smell—that lingered in the fort, was.

Something rotten and rancid floated through the empty halls. Signs of recent activity existed. The place was fully furnished and here and there Dan Ho saw plates and cups meaning food had been served at some point. There was no decoration however. This place was purely for functional use.

They followed the smell into the inner rooms where it was the strongest. The source of it brought tears to Dan Ho’s eyes.

The concubines, all of them, lay on a decaying pile of flesh and bones. Judging by the look of it, they had been killed weeks ago. They never had a chance at rescue.

Women who had been cast out by society, women who had no means of protecting themselves and who only had their bodies to rely on. Women who gave the assassins a little bit of life in a job that only had death to offer. They all lay there, dead like their targets.

The assassins stared at their friends in anger. Hwang Rin wordlessly began to search the pile for Eun Dan. He looked wild as he checked the faces of all of the women. Dan Ho had to look away.

“She’s not here.” Hwang Rin declared once he had inspected all of the faces of the women.

“Are you sure?” Dan Ho let out a breath he didn’t know he had been holding.

Hwang Rin nodded, his eyes red as tears threatened to fall. “She’s not here. I would know my Eun Dan.”

Sam Chul had been quietly counting the women at this point. “How many women were at the brothel, do any of you know?”

“Twenty seven. Why?”

“Right? I thought so. There’s only sixteen here.”

Dan Ho counted the bodies. Sam Chul was right. This wasn’t all of the women from the brothel.

“Check the other rooms.” Dan Ho ordered. The assassins split up and went through every inch of the place. There were no other bodies to be found.

“Do you think they managed to escape?” He consulted Hwang Rin when the three met up again.

“I’ve taught Eun Dan a lot of tricks to defend herself with. It’s possible she might have managed to make it out.” Dan Ho’s heart squeezed at the hope in Hwang Rin’s voice. Hope was a silent killer and he didn’t want his friend to have it in vain.

“Well how do we find them, if they’ve escaped?” Dan Ho wondered aloud.

“The nearest brothel.” Hwang Rin suggested. “Surely they must have gone to one of our hideouts.”

It made sense. Eun Dan and the others would know to report this incident first thing. It gave Dan Ho a little bit of hope, knowing that she might still be out there.

“Alright. The nearest brothel is only a couple of hours away from here. We go after we bury the women.” Dan Ho said.

“There’s no time. The Prince might also be after them.” Hwang Rin said.

“They’ve been gone for a long time. If the Prince is after them they either he’s found them or they’re too far gone. Either way, we need to bury our women.”

Hwang Rin considered the state of the dead bodies. Some of the limbs bore bite marks, as if animals had been at them.

“I will go and search for Eun Dan. You and Sam Chul stay here to send off our friends.”

Without seeking any permission, Hwang Rin stalked away. Dan Ho and Sam Chul looked at each other. Quietly, the two picked up two bodies and carried them outside.

Dong Su was there with the Princess, looking ever confused. “What’s going on? Hwang Rin just rode off without saying anything.”

Song Hwa narrowed her eyes at Dan Ho and the woman he carried in his arms. “They’re all dead, aren’t they?”

Dan Ho didn’t bother answering her question. His silence was enough. Dong Su let out a hiss of frustration. His hold on Song Hwa’s hand got tighter and she tried her best not to flinch.

“That’s actually quite clever for Young Hwa.” Song Hwa said to no one in particular. “He’s usually not the kind to think things through.”

One by one, Sam Chul and Dan Ho carried out the bodies, laying them down one by one. There was no cloth to cover them up so Song Hwa was subjected to the unfiltered horror of rotting flesh and faces contorted in pain.

It was sunset by the time Sam Chul and Dan Ho were done burying the women. Dong Su, who had been watching Song Hwa, grew tired and restless. He glanced at Song Hwa from the corner of his eye. The Princess seemed to have almost passed out, leaning against the tree she was tied to. Figuring that she was too weak to do anything, he walked up to Dan Ho.

“What’s the plan now? Do we kill her or what?”

“Eun Dan and some of the women might still be alive.” Sam Chul informed Dong Su. “We didn’t find some of the bodies. We’re assuming they escaped somehow.”

Dong Su connected the dots. “And Hwang Rin’s gone to a brothel to check things out?”

“And to report what happened to us. We don’t know what happened here but it’s safe to assume the Headmaster still doesn’t know. Otherwise, she would have come for us.” Dan Ho said.

“Or had us killed by now.” Dong Su added.

“No.” Dan Ho insisted. “She would have come to save us.”

“Ugh, you are always too much of a teacher’s pet.”

“Hey, who’s watching the Princess?” Sam Chul asked.

“Relax. She’s right over—” Dong Su pointed to what he was now noticing was an empty tree trunk. “Ah! No!”

The three assassins chased after the figure who was trying her best to run away from her captors. While the Princess was wiry and strong, she was no match for the animal speed of the assassins. Dan Ho caught up to her first, jumping on her and pinning her down on the ground.

The Princess struggled, growling in anger. “Let go. Let GO!”

“No way, Princess. We had a deal.” Dan Ho said.

“And I fulfilled my end of it. You’ve found your friends.” She said through clenched teeth as she pushed against Dan Ho. Dan Ho had his arm pressing down on her. With his entire weight on top of her, Song Hwa was surprised to find he wasn’t that heavy. But his grip was strong, and it was near impossible to get him to budge even an inch.

“No. The deal was you stay with us till all of this is sorted. To. The. End.” Dan Ho’s breath hit Song Hwa in the face.

The Princess grunted and yelled, pushing against Dan Ho but it was of no use. He was too strong. She screamed in his face out of anger, yet he didn’t even flinch.

“Give up.” He said gently. “You won’t escape from us.”

Song Hwa stopped struggling. Dan Ho wondered whether she had decided to be reasonable. He saw her eyes become red, and tears form in the corners. His grip on her softened when she said, in a pathetic voice, “I don’t want to die, Park Dan Ho.”

Dan Ho raised himself up from her. It was true, the probability of Song Hwa getting out of this situation alive was slim to none. She had seen their faces, she knew their names, keeping her alive wasn’t an option. It was just a matter of her usefulness. Once that ran out, Dan Ho would have to finish the job.

Dan Ho had been ignoring this obvious conclusion to their dilemma in hopes that he would be able to figure something out. So far, he had come up blank.

“I told you I would keep you alive till the end, Princess.” Dan Ho said, neglecting to mention what would come after the end. “And I fully intend to—”

The swish of the metal came before Dan Ho realized what had happened. Out of reflex, he had unsheathed his sword and swung without even blinking. His blade hit the small knife the Princess had taken off his person, while he had been distracted by her tears.

They were standing on opposite ends, Dan Ho with his blade in front of him and Song Hwa with the knife poised to strike him. She bared her teeth, twisting her mouth almost in a smile. Her false tears now covered in dirt.

The other assassins had caught up to them. Dong Su put his blade on Song Hwa’s throat. “Put it down.” He said coolly. “Before I get angry.”

Seeing she was outnumbered; Song Hwa lowered her blade which Sam Chul promptly took off her and handed to Dong Su. Dong Su tied her hands behind her while Dan Ho stood frozen, his hand still high in the air.

As Sam Chul dragged Song Hwa away, Dan Ho and Dong Su stayed behind. “How the hell does a dainty Princess almost overpower the fastest swordsman in the kingdom?”

“She didn’t overpower me.” Dan Ho didn’t meet Dong Su’s eye.

“Then how did she manage to steal your knife?” Dong Su handed the blade over to Dan Ho who snatched it from his hands.

“I got distracted.” Dan Ho began to walk away. The thought of falling for the Princess’s act angered him.

“You’ve always had a soft spot for women and children.” Dong Su sighed as he followed closely behind. “Let’s just kill her, Dan Ho-ya. She’s dead weight now. We don’t need her.”

Dan Ho stopped in his tracks, eying Song Hwa who was still being walked back to the horses by Sam Chul. “We may still have some use of her. I want to take her to the Headmaster. The Headmaster will know what is the best course of action.”

This seemingly satisfied Dong Su. The two of them made their way over to the horses. Princess Song Hwa had already mounted one of them. She would ride with Dong Su—who had learned his lesson and would not be letting her out of his sight anytime soon.

“We’ll hide out in the forest while Hwang Rin returns.” Dan Ho ordered.

As the group rounded their horses to the direction of the woods, Dan Ho glanced at his friends who now lay in the ground and sent them a final goodbye. Nobody alive knew this about Dan Ho, but on the ride to the forest, Dan Ho silently cried. Tears formed in his eyes and disappeared into the air as he raced his horse ahead of the others.

No one saw how red his nose was, no one heard his silent sniffles. By the time the group had reached their destination, Dan Ho’s face was back in it’s usual, dark expression sans tears or any sign of emotion. For showing humanity was forbidden for assassins. So, Dan Ho kept his hidden away. Not suppressed or killed off, but protected, deep in his heart, where no one could ever find it.

Chapter Text

There was sunlight streaming through the pattern in the curtain. Princess Song Hwa reclined on her favorite couch in the library that she and her sisters shared. As always, the Princesses were doing everything but reading, save Princess Song Hwa who was pretending to read while she listened in on her sisters’ conversation.

“Of course! What else do we have but our looks?” The third Princess was guiding the fourth. “All that nonsense about strength and brains is useless for women.”

The fourth Princess objected, “But General Ji Ahn had strength. And she was—"

“She isn’t even remembered by history anymore. Soon she will be forgotten. What’s the use of her legendary strength if all she has become is a folktale. Trust me, a woman needs beauty to get ahead in life. And beauty has nothing to do with looks, it is all about,” the Princess dramatically threw her hair over her shoulder, “seduction.”

“You shouldn’t teach her that.” Song Hwa said in an uninterested tone, not bothering to look up from her book.

The three Princesses looked at her, two of them offended, the youngest merely surprised that her eldest had deigned to address them.

“I thought you were supposed to be smart. Don’t you know that the only way a woman can get ahead is through seduction?” The second Princess weighed in. Personally, she disagreed with the third Princess, but she wanted to defend her nonetheless, simply because it was Song Hwa who had opposed her ideas.

Song Hwa snapped her book shut. She swung her legs around, sitting upright, “A woman does not need such tactics if she proves herself a good companion. You need skills in cooking, sewing, art, home management… frankly you need more qualifications than a man would. Simply learning how to seduce a man in bed is no solution.”

“Oh? And you have all of these skills you speak of?” The second Princess asked.

Song Hwa looked away and grumbled in a small voice, “No.”

“Don’t listen to her.” The third Princess said. “She’s resigned herself to being an old maid. Trust me, seduction is a woman’s only weapon against man. Learn how to wield it, and you will never need anything else. Get a man hooked, and he will hire a cook, a maid, an artist… anything you need, he will get it done for you.”

“It is a man’s world, little one,” the second continued, “so to have any power in this world, you need to learn how to control a man.”

“And you do that by,” the third Princess dramatically threw her hair over her shoulder, this time on the other side, “seduction. Ow, my neck! Ow, ow.”

“You’re corrupting her by such talk.” Song Hwa said.

“You would do good to listen to us. You won’t get ahead if all you do is turn your nose up at everyone, claiming to be smarter.” The second sister said in an odd display of sincerity.

Song Hwa threw her a sidelong glance, “I don’t need to seduce anyone.”

“I bet she can’t even if she tried.” The third Princess said under her breath.

“No wonder the Captain doesn’t spare a glance at her.” The second agreed. The two of them tittered while Song Hwa went red. The fourth Princess frowned but said nothing.

Song Hwa turned away from her sisters, lying back on the couch with her back to the sisters. But the minute she turned, the couched turned to hard ground and day became night. Thin twigs cut into her shoulder. With a gasp, the Princess sat up straight.

Where did the library go? Where did her sisters? What happened to the sun?

There were tall trees around her. Inky black sky peeked from between their branches. Nearby a fire offered some warmth and light but the flames flickered, sending shadows dancing all around.

Confused and suddenly very distraught, Song Hwa tried moving her hands, but something was cutting in her wrists. She pulled against it but all that seemed to do was hurt her even more. It took a minute for the Princess to remember the events of her wedding, all that had led up to it and all that came after.

Her brother… the assassins…

Where were the assassins?

Song Hwa spotted the one that had been keeping a watch on her dozing in one corner. His head had fallen back against the tree and he drooled with his mouth wide open. A soft snore could be heard. He must have fallen asleep after Song Hwa had, though Song Hwa had no recollection of coming to this small clearing in the woods or when she had lost consciousness.

Song Hwa spotted three figures in the distance, between the trees. One of them was Park Dan Ho, if that was his real name. Song Hwa figured he was the leader since the others seemed to follow his orders. The second was the chubby one who had saved Song Hwa. Song Hwa felt a surge of warmth towards him but reminded herself that he too was one of the assassins and she shouldn’t let her feelings guide her actions. The man could still kill her if he wanted.

The third man was the pretty one known as Lee Hwang Rin who seemed to have rejoined them while Song Hwa had fallen asleep. The three of them were talking animatedly, unaware they were being watched.

This was a chance. Song Hwa had blown the moment earlier when she had tried to run away. She would not mess up a second time. Song Hwa looked down on her bindings. A rope firmly held her hands behind her back. But her legs were free to move.

Idiots, she thought, but then remembered that they had to walk some way and that was why her legs weren’t bound. She smiled, perhaps luck was on her side.

As quiet as she could manage, Song Hwa stood up. She could stand on her own but having her hands so tightly bound was a big disability. Song Hwa moved around a bit to check herself for injuries. So far the only thing that hurt were her wrists. She was sure the rope had cut into them but she chose not to think about it. She couldn’t let herself fret or panic.

Calmly, Song Hwa thought through a plan. She was sure that the sleeping assassin would wake if she neared him, so she didn’t bother trying to get a weapon off of him. These assassins didn’t seem like ordinary men. She herself had seen how skilled with the sword Park Dan Ho and Lee Hwang Rin were. And her own failed attempt at escape had proven just how inhumanly fast they were.

She couldn’t fight them. And running was no longer an option. They would just catch up with her. She needed to lure them away to give herself some time. General Ahn Hyun had always told her that the eye of the storm was always the safest place. Song Hwa felt this could apply to her now.

Soundlessly, Song Hwa neared the place where the three assassins stood. She got close enough that she could hear them but was safely hidden behind a wide tree.

“The handler was acting too strange. As soon as I began to ask questions about Eun Dan she clamped up.” Lee Hwang Rin was saying, sounding very frustrated.

“No, that’s a good thing.” Park Dan Ho’s deep voice made Song Hwa shiver. He sounded like a demon in the night. “That means they know something. I will personally go there tomorrow and see what she knows.”

“Didn’t you see any of the others at the brothel?” The chubby one asked.

Song Hwa’s brows furrowed in confusion. Their friends just got murdered and he’s going to the brothel?

Silence. Song Hwa guessed Lee Hwang Rin had shaken his head because she heard a despondent sigh from the chubby one.

“Hwang Rin, she’s going to be fine.” Park Dan Ho said.

Hwang Rin must be his real name if he’s using it when it’s just them, Song Hwa deduced.

“What if she isn’t? What if they dumped her body elsewhere?”

“Why would they do that? They have no reason to.” Park Dan Ho reasoned.

“Yeah,” the chubby one chimed in, “don’t worry Rin-ah. We’ll find her.”

Who is Eun Dan? And why is finding her so important? Song Hwa wondered.

“Sam Chul is right. Worrying won’t get you anywhere. Besides, we can’t let ourselves be distracted now. We have much to figure out.” Park Dan Ho said.

So, the chubby one is Sam Chul.

Park Dan Ho continued, “Did you hear any news from the palace?”

“The Princess was declared dead this morning. You did good switching her clothes with the maid’s.”

“We couldn’t risk letting it be known that the Princess was kidnapped. They would send the Royal Guard after us.”

“Yeah, but I heard something strange. Cho Beom Pal was found dead too. Everyone’s assuming that whoever killed the Princess, also killed him.”

“Doesn’t matter. To hell with the politics of court.” Park Dan Ho said in a dark and calm rage. “I just want our friends back, safe and sound. The royals can burn each other alive for all I care.”

“Yeah, but if they blame us for something we didn’t do…” Lee Hwang Rin didn’t finish the thought.

“The Shadowmen have always been blamed for crimes we did not commit. This is no different.”

Song Hwa covered her mouth as she gasped uncontrollable.

Shadowmen… these assassins are Shadowmen. Song Hwa trembled. I should have guessed. Normal men don’t move like they do. If these men were the Shadowmen, then this situation was much more dangerous than Song Hwa had anticipated. Escaping them would not be easy.

And now Song Hwa knew their names. She had seen their faces. No one had ever seen a Shadowman and lived to tell the tale. Song Hwa knew now that there was no way she was getting out of this situation alive. She had to escape, by any means necessary.

The conversation was interrupted by the sleeping assassin, who was now wide awake and running towards the other three. “Guys! She’s gone!”

“Again? Dong Su what the hell?” Park Dan Ho scolded.

“What do you mean again? She’s escaped before?” Lee Hwang Rin asked.

“This idiot keeps letting her escape.” Park Dan Ho smacked the back of the man he called Dong Su.

“Hey! Don’t blame me! I’m trained to kill people. Not kidnap them.”

“None of us have ever kidnapped anyone. But all of us know that when you take a person, you keep an eye on them.” Lee Hwang Rin reprimanded, punching Dong Su in the shoulder.

“Let’s just leave her, guys. We don’t need her.” Sam Chul suggested.

“Don’t be a fool. We can’t let her escape.” Lee Hwang Rin said. “Let’s search the perimeter, she can’t have gone that far.”

From behind the tree, Song Hwa watched the assassins walk back to where they had set up camp. She saw The assassins light up torches from the fire. Park Dan Ho pointed which directions he wanted them to take and they each went off their separate ways. None of them bothered to go back in the direction they had just come from, the assumption being that since they had been standing there, they would have caught the Princess if she had come their way. This was exactly what Song Hwa had been hoping they would think.

Song Hwa waited, still as a statue, hugging the tree. She needed the assassins to put some distance from this place before she could run. Song Hwa counted down in her mind and once she was sure the assassins were out of ear shot, she ran like a rabbit.

Song Hwa was lucky that the moon was out, shining silver light through the trees. It would have been hard to see where she was going otherwise. She couldn’t risk lighting any fires since that would give her away in an instant.

She ran for what felt like an hour but in reality, was only a minute. Her legs protested against such strain; her lungs struggled to breathe but Song Hwa refused to stop. There would be no point in catching her breath if it would be her last one. She would only relax when she knew she was safe.

Despite her best efforts, Princess Song Hwa didn’t make it that far. All that time being confined to her Princess duties meant she didn’t have time to develop any strength in her body. She only managed to put little distance between her and the assassins before her legs gave out and she fell down. With her hands still tied up, it was difficult to find her balance again.

Get up! Get. Up!

She couldn’t risk saying put. The assassins would be on her in no time. Pushing herself up, Song Hwa dragged herself forward.

Something rustled the leaves nearby. The Princess became very still. She turned her head this way and that but she couldn’t hear much between the sounds of the woods. Night creatures were out and about with crickets and bugs of varying kinds chirping away and nocturnal birds were hopping branch to branch. With so many wild animals, anything could be roaming around in the forest.

Anything that might have found a new prey.

Not hearing anything, Song Hwa braved another attempt at moving forward. The rustling sound came again, this time closer.

Something was following her.

Song Hwa’s breath became shaky and loud. She tried to control her trembling body, but it proved impossible.

Steps: soft and cautious, as if they knew someone else was there. Closer and closer they came and then a small light came in to view. It was a lantern, not too far away, covered in cloth to dim the light. As if the person holding it also didn’t want to be seen.

Please just pass me by, please.

~~~~~~~

Back at the camp site the assassins had returned, not having found the Princess.

“This is insane. Has she really escaped?” Dong Su said in despair.

“This is your fault.” Hwang Rin scolded.

A piercing scream rang out in the night, preventing Hwang Rin from saying the next insult that was on the tip of his tongue.

“The Princess.” Sam Chul said.

“She couldn’t have gone that way.” Hwang Rin said. “We would have seen her pass us by!”

Dan Ho stood still. He was just realizing what had happened. The Princess had tricked them, made them think she had escaped while she had remained hidden in their camp. And while they were out looking for her, she had managed to escape. He couldn’t stop half suppressed chuckle that escaped his lips.

“We’ve been played,” he told the others.

All four Shadowmen ran towards the sound of the scream. Its origins were unmistakable. Like vipers in the sand, the men traversed through the trees with ease, not disturbing a single branch as they zipped through.

They reached the source of the scream. Two figures stood in the trees; one having fallen back while the other stood still in shock. As if waking from a dream, the standing figure turned to run but Dan Ho caught them.

“Nice try, Princess.” Dan Ho told Song Hwa who looked white as a sheet. She was still shaking, half in fear and half from exhaustion.

“Eun Dan?” Hwang Rin approached the woman who had fallen on her back. She was pointing at the Princess, mumbling.

“G-g-ghost. There’s a g-ghost.” Indeed, it was Eun Dan, dressed like a regular maiden instead of her extravagant getup.

Hwang Rin leaned over her. “Where?”

Eun Dan pointed a finger in Song Hwa’s direction. “H-her. She’s supposed to be dead!”

“I’m the ghost? You’re the one screaming like a ghoul!” Song Hwa retorted. She had run into Eun Dan accidentally, and when the girl had let out such a blood curling scream, Song Hwa’s body had become frozen in fright.

Eun Dan held on to Hwang Rin who couldn’t believe his eyes. “Dan-ah.” Hwang Rin called to her, his eyes glistening. He pulled her into his arms, holding on tightly as if she would disappear if he let her go. “Is it really you? Are you here?”

Eun Dan snapped out of her shock. She held Hwang Rin back, smiling. “Yes. It’s me, Rin-ah. I’m here.”

Song Hwa hissed as Dan Ho’s grip on her arm got painfully tight. She looked up at Dan Ho in anger but noticed he wasn’t looking her way. His eyes were fixed on Eun Dan and Hwang Rin, his mouth closed in a tight line, his face strained as if he was holding back what he really felt. Song Hwa looked between Dan Ho and the young couple. Understanding dawned in her eyes.

“What happened? How are you alive?” Hwang Rin asked.

“Me and some of the girls managed to escape. They cam after us but we went to the brothel—”

“Was it the one in the village nearby?” Hwang Rin inquired. “We went there but—”

“The handlers there didn’t help you, did they? I told them not to trust anyone. We didn’t know what was happening or how deep the Prince had infiltrated our people.”

“Did you try reaching the Headmaster?”

“I did but I don’t know if she got my—”

Park Dan Ho loudly cleared his throat, letting Hwang Rin and Eun Dan know that their conversation had an unwanted audience.

“Guys, lets go back to camp. Eun Dan, have you eaten?” Sam Chul said, changing the subject.

Dan Ho dragged the Princess back to where they had set up the fire. Song Hwa’s stomach growled like a caged animal from hunger.

“I’ve brought food.” Eun Dan said, grinning to the boys. “When they told me Hwang Rin had come by I figured you guys were with him and that you might be hungry.”

“We caught a deer.” Sam Chul informed. “You can have some of that too.”

“Where were you?” Hwang Rin asked Eun Dan.

“I’ll tell you everything. I have so much to tell you all. But first you have to tell me what happened with you.” Lowering her voice she said, “Why is the Princess still alive?”

“All in due time, Eun Dan-ah.” Park Dan Ho said. Song Hwa observed how even the way he said her name was different than how he addressed everybody else.

When they reached back, Dan Ho commanded, “Hwang Rin, you’re staying back with the Princess.” He began to bind Song Hwa back to the tree. This time he remembered to tie up her feet.

“What? No. Eun Dan just came back.” Hwang Rin whined.

“And she has much to report. I will first hear what she has to say—”

“What does it matter?” Hwang Rin argued. “We can all stay here and listen.”

“Someone has to watch the Princess. Dong Su has failed too many times—”

“Hey!” Dong Su’s protest went unheard.

“—and Sam Chul is too keen on saving lives than taking them. You have to stay behind.”

“Why does it matter if she hears? She’s going to be—”

Dan Ho hissed, stopping Hwang Rin from stating the obvious: that they wouldn’t let Song Hwa live for much long.

“You do as I say, or you can explain yourself to the Headmaster.”

A tense silence passed in which Hwang Rin and Dan Ho silently stared at each other. Hwang Rin, despite the anger on his face, still managed to look incredibly attractive. Song Hwa half wondered how someone with such a perfect looking face exist. Park Dan Ho on the other hand, looked cold and intense. His hawk like eyes bore into Hwang Rin. He was also helped by the one inch in which Dan Ho towered over Hwang Rin.

“Come on, come on!” Sam Chul tried to break the tension. “No more fighting. We’re all tired and hungry and have been on the run for the past few days. Not to mention what this past month has been like. Of course, this is going to take a toll on us. Let’s not take it out on each other.”

Dan Ho and Hwang Rin eased up. “Sam Chul, you and Dong Su stay behind.” Dan Ho said. “And if she escapes this time,” Dan Ho paused meaningfully, looking at Dong Su, “you’d better escape with her. Or else I will be taking three heads, instead of one.”

Somehow his words didn’t seem as cold as they should have, the Princess noted. It felt more like a scolding than a threat.

Hwang Rin and Dan Ho left with Eun Dan. Song Hwa watched the three of them and how they moved. Hwang Rin had his arms around Eun Dan. Park Dan Ho kept throwing glances her way but did nothing. His fingers were curled in a fist as if he was trying very hard to control his actions.

How very interesting, Song Hwa thought.

~~~~~~~

Song Hwa remembered when she fell asleep this time and wasn’t as startled when she woke this time. She looked around, having a better view of their surroundings now that it was day time. As she shifted, she saw the assassin Sam Chul sitting incredibly close and jumped in surprise. “What are you doing?” She said, trying to sound cold but only coming off as surprised.

Sam Chul looked up, “Ah-nee, I was just… your wrists… they were bleeding.”

Song Hwa twisted around as best as she could. Indeed, the rope had cut into her skin and was slightly damp with blood. Sam Chul had been wrapping a soft cloth around her wrists to protect them. Song Hwa looked at the man with his chubby cheeks and massive build. He felt as huge as a bear that could crush her in an instant, but he had the same aura as a young puppy.

Without meaning to, Song Hwa grabbed his huge hand, feeling like she did when she was six and had struggled to hold her father’s hand with her small fingers. “Thanks.” She muttered.

Sam Chul patted her head, much like how one patted a pet. The gesture felt oddly familial. “You hungry?”

Song Hwa’s stomach answered for her, grumbling loudly.

“I’ll get you something to eat.” Sam Chul said.

Since her hands were tied up, Sam Chul fed her. Used to the luxury of the palace, the simple meal made from roots and overcooked meat tasted disgusting and appeared unsanitary. However, Song Hwa didn’t have any other option, so she ate silently, her stomach grateful for the sustenance.

Song Hwa tried to assess her situation as her mind got energy to work again. The other assassins seemed to be gone. Song Hwa had been tied by the waist to Sam Chul instead of Dong Su. This made her relax a little as Sam Chul appeared to be kinder than the rest.

“This reminds me of the time my Noona got sick.” Sam Chul said, taking Song Hwa out of her thoughts. “She was stubborn and arrogant like you.”

“I am a Princess, assassin. You cannot me like that.” Song Hwa reprimanded but Sam Chul only chuckled.

“She got really sick one time. Ma and Pa had to go into the city to get the doctor. We lived in a small fishing village you see, didn’t have many doctors there. So, I had to stay back and take care of her. She used to make the same face you are making when eating. It doesn’t taste good, does it?”

Song Hwa hadn’t realized she had let her mask down. Normally her true feelings were inscrutable to others. The recent events must be weighing down on her if she had become so open.

“What happened to your sister?” Song Hwa asked when she had swallowed the last bite.

Sam Chul didn’t meet her gaze. “She died. She wasn’t that strong, not like you.”

Song Hwa forbade herself for feeling any empathy for Sam Chul. No matter his past, he was still a Shadowman and they were ruthless killers. “I’m not that strong. I wasn’t even able to run away from you guys.”

Sam Chul laughed quietly. “Strength isn’t about what you can do with your body, your Highness. I’ve seen grown men soil their trousers in front of Dan—I mean my friends.”

“I already know his name.”

“Then you also know how scary he can be.”

He can? Song Hwa thought about it. Beyond his skill as an assassin, Song Hwa didn’t find anything scary about him.

Sam Chul continued, “Either way, he is a terrifying person. Yet you remain unafraid. That is true strength, your Highness. If my sister had only half your will—well, it’s no point in wondering that now.”

Sam Chul cleared away the plates and threw away the inedible parts in the fireplace, to be burned later. He seemed like an old maid as he cleaned up the small camp. He reminded Song Hwa of an elderly palace woman who used to take care of her as a baby. She had died too after getting severely ill, like Sam Chul’s sister.

“Eun Dani and Hwang Rin went to the town nearby and fetched you some clothes. Would you like to wash up?” Sam Chul asked. Song Hwa nodded. Her clothes smelled of metal and sweat and had become stiff with dried blood. A bath and a change of clothes were a welcome reprieve.

Sam Chul led her to a nearby stream and tied the rope from his waist and on to a tree. “I’m supposed to stay here, but I don’t think that a gentleman should intrude on a lady this way. You wouldn’t like me here anyway, would you?”

Song Hwa nodded, unsure of what to say.

“Let’s make a deal. You promise not to run away, and I promise not to bother you while you bathe.”

Song Hwa blinked. This man could not be that simple minded, could he?

“I’m going to leave you and come back after thirty minutes. Try to get clothed by then.” Sam Chul turned to leave Song Hwa on her own but as if another thought occurred to him, turned back. “Dan Ho said he would kill me, and you, if you escaped. I would appreciate if you didn’t let that happen. Dan Ho isn’t one to make false threats.”

Song Hwa nodded, again, unsure of what to say. Sam Chul left her with her hands and feet still bound together. The rope around her feet had been tied up like shackles, so she could still walk, albeit in small steps. She couldn’t run though, which was a shame.

Song Hwa looked all around. She seemed to be truly alone. She looked up in the trees, expecting one of the Shadowmen to be hidden up there but saw nothing. Nor did there seem to be anybody watching her from behind a rock or a tree. She thought about trying to break free again but remembered the threat Park Dan Ho had given. If she got tried to escape this time, he would kill her. And Sam Chul.

Her body was still sore from all of the running before and her mind was still not completely present. Deciding she had made enough attempts at escaping, Song Hwa gathered the clothes she had been given and entered the stream. She stayed near the edge, moving alongside the bank till she reached a spot where the water came up to her waist. It was just the right amount of depth to wash in.

Standing there, Song Hwa chanced upon her reflection in the water. When she saw herself, she finally understood why that girl Eun Dan had screamed so horribly.

Her face was still white from all of the powder her maids had slathered over her face. Her lips were red but the lipstick was smudged. The black color around her eyes made her look almost like a panda. The neck of her dress was caked in her maid’s blood. And the red streaks that Song Hwa had mistaken for the design, turned out to be blood too. Her hair was in disarray, with wisps escaping from the sides and her style now skewing sideways. She looked a fright.

The Princess couldn’t believe the state she was in. Never before had she felt so dirty and out of place. For some reason, this one thing proved to be her breaking point. At first, she let out a chuckle of disbelief. Then laughter bubbled up in her throat. Strange, maniacal laughter.

Her entire body shook as she laughed. And why shouldn’t she laugh, she looked like a clown? The water rippled as she shook, making her image even more distorted, which made her laugh even more.

She laughed and laughed and laughed till her eyes began to tear up. And when the tears fell, they didn’t stop. Her laughter quieted into sobs and Song Hwa began to cry. She hugged herself as she thought of all she had lost in one single night.

Her life, her family, her peace of mind. Everyone now thought she was dead. Princess Song Hwa did not exist anymore. Song Hwa wondered if she was being missed by anyone; if her father was feeling bad everything he had done to her, if her brother was regretting his actions, if her sisters were hoping they had treated her better.

Despite her desire to believe otherwise, Song Hwa knew the truth. No one was missing her. Queen Yoo would be rejoicing in her death by now. Her brother would happy that he had achieved his goal and her father would only see this as a hindrance to his plans.

No one would be sad that Princess Song Hwa was gone. And that thought made her miserable.

Song Hwa jumped when out of nowhere, a hand appeared, holding a handkerchief. She followed the hand up the arm and to the shoulder that was attached to one Park Dan Ho. His face wore a cold and imperceptible expression. He was bent down, leaning against the edge.

“To wipe your tears with,” he explained.

Song Hwa looked at the handkerchief and slapped the hand away. She would die before she accepted anything from Park Dan Ho.

“Get lost. I’m supposed to be bathing.”

Park Dan Ho tilted his head, “I’m not Sam Chul. I’m not stupid enough to leave you alone.”

“Relax, I’m not running.”

Dan Ho chuckled darkly, “As if I would buy that, Princess.” He said her title like it was in insult, mirroring how she took his name.

“How am I supposed to bathe with you standing there?!” Song Hwa argued.

“Nobody here desires you, Princess. Be as naked as you want. We’ve seen it all. You have nothing new to offer.”

Song Hwa’s eyes widened at such a scandalous statement. “ARE YOU CRAZY?!” She yelled, cupping water from the stream and throwing it towards Park Dan Ho. “Look away you lewd man!”

“Ah! Yah! Stop that!” Dan Ho covered his face while Song Hwa showered him with water. “YAH! You’ll drench me!”

“Look away!”

“Alright! Alright! Stop showering me!” Park Dan Ho relented, grumbling profanities under his breath as he shook the water off his soaked sleeves. “Crazy woman, ruining my clothes.”

The water from the stream was cold, which was equally uncomfortable as having a man stand with his back turned to her while she tried to wash off the dirt, sweat and blood.

“I can still hear everything.” Park Dan Ho called back. “So don’t think of running.”

“I’m not!” Song Hwa replied, making a face at him. She worked fast, not wanting to stay longer than needed. The clothes Eun Dan had fetched her seemed to be a bit too loose, but it was better than the blood soaked maid’s hanbok.

“I’m done.”

Park Dan Ho took the clothes Song Hwa had discarded and bundled them up in a ball. She was sure he would burn them to leave no trace behind. Song Hwa caught Park Dan Ho eyeing her from head to toe. The action sent a shiver down her spine. She worried if she had let her mask slip like before, if Park Dan Ho could read her thoughts. From his expression, she guessed he could.

Something about his cold gaze and how he scanned her reminded something her sisters had once told her, a long time ago.

Seduction is a woman’s only weapon against man. Learn how to wield it, and you will never need anything else.

“Good. We can go back now.” Dan Ho said, grabbing onto her bindings. He looked down at the cloth Sam Chul had wrapped around her wrists but said nothing. Pushing her ahead of him, he led them both back to the camp site.

The other assassins and the girl called Eun Dan were back, eating and talking animatedly. Song Hwa saw how Eun Dan leaned into Hwang Rin and laughed, how Hwang Rin looked at her with glowing eyes. She also felt how Park Dan Ho sucked in his breath as they neared the group. This reminded her of something else, something Sam Chul had said.

We’re all tired and hungry and have been on the run for the past few days. Not to mention what this past month has been like. Of course, this is going to take a toll on us. Let’s not take it out on each other.

Song Hwa tried not to smile as a plan formed in her head. Perhaps her hope of escape was not so farfetched after all.

Chapter Text

In a field of endless green grass, with clumps of trees here and there, Princess Song Hwa ran. The sky was a mix of orange and purple as the sun set over the horizon. The air smelled sweet and was cool to the touch.

The Princess was running towards a man, who was riding a horse towards her. “Chung Myung!” She cried out to him.

Chung Myung dismounted from the horse as it slowed down and ran towards her at full speed. They met in the middle, Chung Myung immediately taking Song Hwa into his arms.

“You’re alive?” he said, bewildered. “I can’t believe this. You’re alive!”

“Yes,” Song Hwa said into his arm. “I’m alive and I’m back. I came back.” There were tears in the Princess’s eyes.

Chung Myung pulled back to look at Song Hwa. “Princess, you have no idea how much I’ve missed you. No idea.”

“Yeah?”

“From now on, you are not leaving my side. I am keeping you with me. Forever.”

“Chung Myung…” Song Hwa had no words.

“Thinking you were gone forever… it made me realize how much I loved you.”

“But what about that girl?”

“What girl? Princess there has always been only one person in this world for me. And that is you. You are really special Song Hwa. The most special girl in the world.”

The orange sky behind Chung Myung slowly dissolved into flickering flames. Chung Myung’s face disappeared like smoke and Princess Song Hwa was transported back to the campsite where night had already fallen and the assassins were cooking food over the fire.

With nothing much to do—given that she was tied up to a tree—the Princess spent her time daydreaming about escaping from this hell and returning to her old life, returning to Chung Myung.

It was the thought of him that gave Song Hwa hope. Every time she jolted awake from sleep and realized in a panic that she was still a captive of the Shadowmen, she reminded herself that escape was near. All she had to do was stay focused.

And of course, entertained.

The Princess had figured out that no matter what, the assassins would not kill her. This she knew from the snippets of conversations she had overheard, and the few slip ups made by Sam Chul. The four of them couldn’t kill her because they needed her to meet the Headmaster, and as such, the Princess was in no danger till they reached their destination.

They had been traveling for three days now. And from what she knew of navigation, they were going up north towards the mountain ranges. Not many people could be found near the mountains. Their paths were treacherous and they were rumored to be haunted by armies of past rulers. It would be three more days till they arrived there. Which meant that for three days, Song Hwa could do whatever she wanted, without any repercussions. And Princess Song Hwa knew exactly what she wanted. Suffering—of the assassins that were making her suffer.

And if there was anything Song Hwa knew best, it was how to be insufferable.

“Is this all you are going to give me?” Song Hwa asked when the food was portioned out by Eun Dan.

The girl cowered away from Song Hwa while Dan Ho glared at her, his eyes emphasized by dark circles under his eyes. “We have talked about this before Princess. We gave you plenty of food at breakfast—”

“And lunch!” Dong Su added, he too had dark circles and was looking gaunt and miserable.

“And even now as well. That is plenty for you.”

“Have you not seen the food served at the palace? How can you expect me to keep up my energy with just these morsels?” Song Hwa jerked her chin haughtily.

“You don’t need much energy, do you?” Hwang Rin said. The dark circles under his eyes made them appear bigger. Somehow the man looked more handsome sleep deprived. “You sleep all day while we travel.”

Song Hwa had developed quite a skill for falling asleep whilst being strapped to the horse with a Shadowmen riding with her.

“I still need energy. You have to give me more.” The Princess demanded.

“There is no more. You have the largest portion out of all of us.” Dong Su said miserably as he eyed the small bits of food on his plate.

“Well, this is not enough!” Song Hwa said in her most annoying, petulant tone.

All four assassins groaned in frustration.

“Yah, just put a gag on her.” Dong Su suggested.

“You can’t do that!” Song Hwa said hysterically. “I’ll die if you gag me! And if I don’t eat, I’ll starve and then I’ll die from hunger!”

“Here! Have some of mine.” Eun Dan quickly emptied her plate onto Song Hwa’s.

“Wait, Eun Dan, you have to eat.” Hwang Rin said and before he could give some of his food to her, Dan Ho emptied his plate on to hers.

“You have to eat too.” He told Hwang Rin. “I can chew on the roots we collected today.”

“Wait. Let’s all have a little of all of this.” Sam Chul said, dumping his portion and Hwang Rin’s on Eun Dan’s plate and redistributing the food between himself and the others. Dong Su meanwhile chewed on his food as fast as he could, lest he be called upon to put in his share as well.

The group ate what little remained while Song Hwa stuffed herself in food she didn’t really care to eat. She would later ask to go relieve herself and quietly throw up the food. The purpose of this act wasn’t to fill her own belly, but to keep the assassins hungry, and therefore irritable.

Plus, it was fun seeing them irritated by her demands and tantrums.

With the meal eaten, the group put out their beds and prepared to rest for the night.

“Princess,” Dan Ho said the title with contempt, “are you sure you don’t need to make another visit?” He said, inferring that she relieve herself before bed.

“I am sure. Now aren’t we all sleeping? I am so tired?” She faked a yawn, but that made Sam Chul genuinely yawn. And his yawn was caught by Dong Su and pretty soon everyone was yawning. Dan Ho clenched his jaw and Song Hwa could tell he was holding himself back.

“Dong Su, you’re on first watch.” Dan Ho declared.

“What? Why?” Dong Su complained.

“I’ll take second so stop complaining.”

The camp soon settled in for the night. Sam Chul reduced the flames so that the wood burned in a nice, low glow; enough to keep everyone warm without ruining their sleep.

The night was never silent. There was always some buzzing or chirping of some insect or unknown creature. Night birds made strange calls to one another and trees swished against the wind. Song Hwa could never sleep through the nocturnal orchestra. Every creaking branch, every cracking twig made her jump in fright. And every time she closed her eyes, she found herself dreaming about men in black, with masked faces and mean looking eyes, coming at her with knives and swords, looking to cut her throat.

Song Hwa stayed in a strange state, in and out of sleep. Not really unconscious but not fully conscious either. But there came a time in the middle of the night when the sky was at its darkest and even the insects had calmed down. Their fire was nearly out and darkness enveloped everything except the thin trails of moonlight that shone through the trees leaving patches of whitewashed ground.

It was at this time that Song Hwa would force herself to wake and sit up straight. She first checked whether everyone was asleep. Indeed, they all were. Even Dong Su who was supposed to keep watch.

“I need to pee!” Song Hwa yelled into the night. Dan Ho jumped to his feet in seconds, confused as to what was happening. Sam Chul sat up whilst his eyes were still closed.

“I need to—” Her cry was cut off by a frustrated groan.

“Whyyy?” Wailed Sam Chul.

“What? What is it?” Eun Dan sat up in confusion at the sudden fuss.

Dan Ho put his hands on his hips, glaring at the Princess. The small grumble from his lips was not entirely audible but Song Hwa was sure he cursed.

“Ugh, Hwang Rin! Shut her up!” Complained Dong Su sleepily from above Song Hwa’s tree where he was perched.

Hwang Rin merely changed sides, covering his head with his arms to block out the sound.

“Dong Su. Take her to the stream.”

“But Dan Ho, I need to.”

“Just take her!” Dan Ho yelled. Dong Su jumped by the sheer power of Dan Ho’s deep growl and fell from the tree.

“Ow.” He painfully winced. Collecting himself, he said, “Come on, Your Highness. Let’s get you to the stream.” In his half-conscious state, he clumsily untied Song Hwa from the tree and led her to the nearby stream where he let her do her business while he had his back turned to her.

“I don’t suppose you could just let me go, could you?” Song Hwa said nonchalantly. As if she was asking about the weather or the time.

“I think you already know the answer to that.” Dong Su yawned through the sentence.

“You’d be able to finally sleep with me not around.” Song Hwa said, cleaning herself up.

“I don’t fancy dying at Dan Ho’s hands,” was all Dong Su said, his voice husky from sleep.

“I’m done.” The Princess declared.

“Already? You woke everyone up for just a squirt of pee?”

The Princess, not used to such crude speech, shuddered, glad to have the cover of night hiding her disgusted expression. She bit back the icy retort on the tip of her tongue and instead said in a sweet tone, “Sorry. I didn’t mean to bother you.”

Perhaps Dong Su was shocked or perhaps he was too sleepy, but he said nothing as he secured the rope around her wrists. Quite deliberately, Song Hwa’s fingers brushed against Dong Su’s. The assassin didn’t jump in surprise rather ignored the touch and pushed Song Hwa forward.

“I don’t suppose you could tell me a bed time story to help me sleep?” Song Hwa asked in what she hoped was a flirty tone. She took small, slow steps to delay reaching the camp sooner.

“No. Walk faster.”

“I can’t see in the dark.”

“It’s not that dark.”

“Not for a Shadowmen. But for a regular person—”

“Who said we were Shadowmen?” Dong Su said abruptly.

Song Hwa stopped and turned. Moonlight shone brightly at this patch of the wood. Song Hwa could see Dong Su’s confused face. He might not be as sharp as the others, but he was still smart in his own right.

“Well, aren’t you?” She asked.

Dong Su paused. Then without a word, gently turned her back in the direction of the camp, prompting her to walk on. They had not walked two steps when Song Hwa twisted her leg to make herself trip forward. She let out a dramatic “Oh!” and would have fallen flat on her face had Dong Su not caught her by the waist and spun her around to face him.

They were very close, just as she had hoped. Song Hwa could feel his breath on her cheek. She didn’t dare breathe or even blink lest she mess up this opportunity. Dong Su seemed surprised by this turn of events. Song Hwa’s lips parted and she moved to push back a lock of Dong Su’s hair that had escaped his headband. It was an intimate gesture, one she hoped would—

Smack! She found herself on the ground, her behind sore from the impact.

“Ugh, how heavy,” said Dong Su, clicking his tongue in disapproval. “You’ve been eating far too much of our food.”

The Princess’s eyes widened in shock, “Excuse me?” She couldn’t believe the disrespect. Dong Su had dropped her.

“What’s taking so long?” Dan Ho’s demon like voice made both of them jump.

“Nothing. We were just coming back.” Dong Su answered.

Dan Ho looked from Dong Su to Song Hwa but said nothing. He waited for her to collect her skirt, and her dignity, and followed her back to where they all slept. Song Hwa spent the night quietly, too embarrassed to make any further demands, even when she genuinely had to go pee.

~~~~~~~

“Is this all you can give me to wear? Don’t you have anything better?”

Groans rose all around the camp from the men. Eun Dan simply flitted her eyes from the assassins to the Princess. Song Hwa noticed Eun Dan always got worried every time she spoke. The girl was more scared of her than any of her maids had ever been.

“You will wear what we give you.” Dan Ho declared as if that was the end of the conversation. His curt tone would have worked, had it been anyone else he had been addressing.

“I will complain. And you shall all have to listen.”

All camp members groaned again, save Eun Dan.

“Why not? If I suffer, you all have to suffer with me.”

“Princess, we already suffer because of you.” Hwang Rin said, large bags under his eyes making him look haggard. “You don’t let us sleep because you have to pee all the time. You don’t let us eat because you’re always hungry all the time. And now you want clothes.”

“Well, there has to be something better than these rags! Honestly, what self-respecting woman would wear something so drab?”

“Um…” Eun Dan shyly raised her hand. Those were her clothes.

“Oh,” was all Song Hwa said by way of apology.

“You will wear what we give you.” Dan Ho repeated with more assertiveness. Song Hwa could tell she had offended him.

“Then you will hear my opinions on it. Non. Stop.” Song Hwa sent him a challenging smile. Do your worst, assassin, she thought.

“No!” Dong Su got to his feet. “Dan Ho. We must get her some clothes. We must!”

“Park Dan Ho and Lee Hwang Rin must go.” Song Hwa ordered. At the questioning looks she received, she clarified, “They have seen my wardrobe in the palace. They know my preferences.”

“We are not in the palace, Your Highness. We cannot get you your usual attire.” Hwang Rin reasoned.

“At least get me something better than this!” Song Hwa held up her sleeves, bare of any embroidery, made from commoner’s cotton.

“Dan Ho!” Dong Su wailed, grabbing Dan Ho’s sleeve. “Please shut her up. Please!”

With a long, frustrated sigh, Dan Ho relented. He and Hwang Rin changed into common swordsmen uniforms and packed up enough supplies to go to the nearest village, which was about three hours away.

“Dong Su, Sam Chul. If anything happens—”

“You can’t kill me.” Song Hwa pointed out snarkily. “Contract.”

“Maim her. Cut her in the leg so she can’t run.” Dan Ho said, looking Song Hwa straight in the eye—unblinking and unrelenting.

The two assassins said their goodbyes, Sam Chul following them a little way. “Do you really want me to cut her?” He asked when they were out of earshot.

“Of course not!” Dan Ho said in uncharacteristic frustration. The lack of sleep and proper meals was taking its toll on him. “Just keep that crazy woman quiet. And don’t let her escape.”

“Get us something to eat too.” Sam Chul rubbed his stomach. “The Princess ate the last of the meat. Ah-nee, how can such a tiny woman eat so much?”

Hwang Rin chuckled. “It’s almost as if she’s throwing it in a bottomless pit.”

This made Dan Ho stop abruptly.

“What?” Hwang Rin asked.

“Nothing. Remind me about this when we return. For now, let’s hurry to the village.”

Sam Chul didn’t follow them from there on and returned to the camp. Dong Su had tied himself to the Princess as he usually did, and was now snoring loudly, leaning against the tree. His head was nearly on the Princess’s shoulder.

Sam Chul moved forward to push Dong Su away from her, but Song Hwa shook her head. “Let him sleep,” she said. Thinking she felt guilty about keeping them all up at night, Sam Chul smiled and let Dong Su be.

Eun Dan was clearing up the site, with Song Hwa’s eyes trailing her every move. The girl eventually felt the Princess’s gaze on her and looked up. And just as quickly, she looked away.

“What? Still think I’m a ghost?” Song Hwa said. Dong Su’s head leaned dangerously close to hers, but the Princess paid no heed.

Eun Dan looked up from behind long lashes. Her eyes were wide and innocent. She looked like a child who was caught stealing. “N-no, Your Highness.”

“Then what is it?” Song Hwa demanded. “Did Park Dan Ho order you not to talk to me?”

“His name isn’t Park.” Eun Dan said quickly.

“What?”

“His name isn’t Park. Hwang Rin isn’t a Lee.”

Song Hwa nodded. Of course, last names only belonged to nobility. And the only commoners with last names were ones with great accomplishments—who were acknowledged by a member of the royal family. Song Hwa felt foolish for thinking the assassins had last names. She had just assumed they did, given their talents with the sword.

“My clothes… they are not drab.” With that Eun Dan scurried off.

Song Hwa rested her head back against the tree. “I know.” She said to herself, quietly.

Dong Su’s head finally fell on her shoulder. Song Hwa looked at him sideways, raising a brow. It wasn’t as if the man was ugly or even plain looking. He had quite nice features. But Song Hwa felt nothing for him.

She would have preferred to seduce the beautiful Hwang Rin. At least he was nice to look at. Everything about him felt like art. Song Hwa could stare at his face for hours. But his attention was already taken by the other girl and it would have been hard to steal him from her.

She couldn’t go after Dan Ho either. He would have seen through her act in a second. No, Song Hwa needed someone foolish enough to believe that she would actually want them.

And the only person who fit that bill was Dong Su.

Song Hwa felt the weight of his head on her shoulder, and in that moment, she closed her eyes and let herself believe that it was Chung Myung’s head instead. She told herself that this is what it would feel like when she returned. She told herself that this was what she was working towards.

Song Hwa jerked the assassin awake.

“What is it? What’s happening?” Dong Su blinked. Then he suddenly found himself looking into the Princess’s eyes, very closely. “Woah!” Dong Su jumped back. Since the assassin was tied to the Princess, the rope connecting their waists jerked her forward, pulling her on top of Dong Su.

The Princess made no effort to move off him. Instead, she leaned in closer. “You have specs of green in your eyes.” She said softly. Dong Su did not have specs of green in his eyes.

“I do?”

Hearing Sam Chul approach, Song Hwa pushed herself off Dong Su. She winced a little and held her waist.

“Omo, are you hurt?” Dong Su asked, suddenly worried he had bruised the Princess. Sam Chul passed by without glancing their way. He whistled while he worked to gather more wood for the fire. Song Hwa waited till he was out of earshot.

“I’ll be fine.” Song Hwa said bravely, looking down and grimacing overdramatically. “I’ve made it this far. I can make it further.” She looked up at him in what she hoped was a vulnerable gaze. Acting like a damsel in distress was exhausting. But she knew that in order to get any man’s attention, she had to act like a clueless waif.

Dong Su’s mouth shrunk. “I’m sorry Princess. This must be hard for you. But it’s hard for us too, you know. It’s not like we were ever trained for any of this.”

“Kidnapping requires training?”

“Well yeah. Killing requires training too, doesn’t it? How can kidnapping be different? And we’ve never taken anyone before. We only kill, you see. And that too… this is our first time dealing with a female target.”

The Princess couldn’t hold back her scoff, “Let me guess, you have a code to never kill women or children.” She said dryly. It angered her that her captors would even consider themselves as moralistic, given the line of trade they were in.

“No. We can kill anyone, as long as the contract terms are met, and the payment is made on time. But Hwang Rin and Dan Ho are picky about their targets. No women and children. And no old people. Dan Ho says contracts on the old are redundant. But this is the first time we had to deal with a woman. And not only kill… well you can see we weren’t prepared to have you as a guest.”

This bit of information was interesting. Song Hwa probed further. “How strongly do you all follow your contracts? Have you ever broken them?”

“Never. We break a deal, we die. But… all of our contracts till now had the Headmaster’s approval. I think that’s why Dan Ho’s taking you to the school. We don’t have—” Dong Su stopped himself. He realized he had revealed more than he should have.

Song Hwa put her hand on his arm to assuage him. “Dan Ho and Hwang Rin… they don’t really appreciate you, do they?" It was a little on the nose for Song Hwa. She wished she had thought of something subtler to say but Dong Su seemed to eat it up.

“Re-really, Princess? You feel so too?”

How simple minded. “I see it with my own eyes. The two of them don’t respect you at all. Even at night, they always sleep while you have to deal with me.”

“Right? It always bothers me that they boss me around like a lackey while they decide everything that goes down.”

This was untrue. Dan Ho himself had tended to Song Hwa almost a dozen times two nights ago when she had decided she would start to annoy the assassins into sleeplessness. Dong Su had been snoring at the time and thus was unaware of this. And Hwang Rin had often been told to keep a watch on Song Hwa while Dong Su lazed about doing nothing.

“I’m grateful to you, Dong Su.” Song Hwa said, leaning closer. Her hand was still on Dong Su’s arm. “I’m sorry I have been so bothersome to you all. This is all new for me too.” Song Hwa had to swallow down the bile that rose in her throat from saying all of this to her captor. And in such a sweet and compliant manner too.

Dong Su put a hand over hers. “It’s okay Princess,” said the assassin who had been the most vocal about how annoying the Princess had been. “We’re all just doing our best here.”

Song Hwa heard Sam Chul return with the wood and let go of Dong Su’s arm. She smiled to him, concluding their conversation.

“Dong Su, help me chop these up.” Sam Chul said.

Song Hwa gave Dong Su a look. There he goes again, disrespecting you. She rolled her eyes at Dong Su, as if it was a secret between them.

“Yah, why do you always ask me for these silly jobs? Go ask Dan Ho!” Dong Su said.

Sam Chul blinked, surprised at the outburst. “Dan Ho isn’t here though.”

Dong Su took a second to remember that Dan Ho and Hwang Rin had gone. “Ah. Right. Well ask them when they return! I’m not doing it!”

Sam Chul didn’t argue. Just made a sad face and went on chopping the wood on his own.

No one saw the small smile that played on Song Hwa’s lips.

~~~~~~~

“They’re not back yet.” Eun Dan said gravely.

It was getting dark. Dan Ho and Hwang Rin had been gone most of the day. They should have been back an hour ago and the rest of the group was beginning to worry.

“They’ll be back.” Sam Chul assured her, putting a comforting arm around her shoulders. “Should I make you some tea? I made some for the Princess earlier. I can warm it up again.”

“No. Thank you, though.” Eun Dan smiled graciously at Sam Chul.

The scene made Song Hwa roll her eyes. It annoyed her for some strange reason. But then Eun Dan in general annoyed her. Song Hwa didn’t know whether it was her meekness or her child like attitude, but something about her just made her want to punch a tree. And this dark, illogical feeling was only growing more and more as time went on.

“Would you like some more tea, Princess?” Sam Chul asked her, and the minute he did, all of Song Hwa’s worries and gloomy emotions went away.

“No.” Song Hwa shook her head.

“Should we go search for them?” Eun Dan asked.

“Relax, Dan-ah. You worry too much.” Dong Su said as he lay back on a bed of grass.

“How can I not worry? Hwang Rin is never late. Never.”

Song Hwa took this opening as a chance. “I am sorry you have to worry about your friends because of me.” She said as apologetically as she could muster. All his playacting was starting to weigh in on her.

Eun Dan shook her head. “Don’t worry, Your Highness,” she said sweetly, “I am sure they will be back.” She sounded confident, but the way she bit her nails said something else.

“They are lucky to have you. I unfortunately, don’t have any friends who worry about me.” Song Hwa said, sighing in what she hoped was an audible enough manner. “Especially female friends. Even my sisters didn’t like me.” Take the bait, Song Hwa thought, hoping she could will her desires into being, take it!

“I-I could be your friend… Princess.”

Yes! The joy on Song Hwa’s face was genuine, although not for the reasons Eun Dan thought it was for. “Would you? I would love to have a woman’s company. Being surrounded by these boys all the time…”

“I know! I understand completely!” Eun Dan’s face glowed.

“Hey! We’re good company.” Sam Chul pouted.

“Oh shush, you know I don’t mean it like that.” Eun Dan grinned at him.

No one noticed Song Hwa’s wide smile turn into a grimace for just a second. She quickly corrected her expression. “Say, when the boys come back, why don’t you try on some of the clothes too? We can help each other get dressed. Maybe even do our hair.” Do girls do that? Song Hwa hoped her words sounded authentic. She had no idea what women did together to bond. All she knew were snippets she had heard from her sisters’ discussions.

“Of course!” Eun Dan squealed, overjoyed. But then her enthusiasm deflated. “Of course, that we can do when the boys return.”

“Have faith. I have seen Park—I mean Dan Ho fight. And Lee—I mean Hwang Rin as well. They will return safely.”

“I know he’s a good fighter, but I can’t help but worry. I always worry when he’s not in my sight. Every time they accept another contract my heart lodges in my throat. I always pray they he returns safely.”

“Dan Ho is intelligent. He will be fine.” Song Hwa said.

“Dan Ho? No I was talking about Hwang Rin. Dan Ho can take care of himself. He’s the best we have in our guild. Even Headmaster agrees.”

Song Hwa’s lips twitched in smile. “Hwang Rin? I thought you would be more worried about Dan Ho.”

“Why?”

“Well, aren’t you two together? I thought as his lover you would care about his safety.”

A strange silence took over. Dong Su and Sam Chul looked at each other.

Eun Dan’s face was a peculiar mix of awkward and embarrassed, confused and hesitant. “Um…” she looked down, “my lover is Hwang Rin. Not Dan Ho.”

Bulls eye. “Oh?” Song Hwa feigned ignorance. “I always thought it was Dan Ho, especially with the way he looks at you.”

Unconsciously, Eun Dan’s hand went to a pink hair pin she was wearing. “No. Dan Ho doesn’t look at me in any way,” she asserted in a small voice.

“Oh. Sorry. I apologize. I said something I shouldn’t have.” The Princess focused her attention on the pin. “That’s a pretty pin. Where did you get it?”

“It was a gift.”

“Oh? Who gave it to you then? I must ask them where they got it.”

“Hwang Rin got it for me.” Eun Dan said. But at the same time, Sam Chul said, “Dan Ho got it.”

“Huh, Dan Ho got the pin?” Eun Dan asked.

Sam Chul bit his tongue. Song Hwa’s eyes widened in glee. She could hug Sam Chul if her hands weren’t tied up.

“Sam Chul.” Eun Dan demanded.

“Dan Ho… bought… it.” Sam Chul admitted reluctantly. “But you hated the mask Hwang Rin got so much that Dan Ho gave it to Hwang Rin instead.”

Eun Dan took the pin off her hair and stared at it. It was a beautifully made piece, even if it was cheap by Song Hwa’s standards. Dan Ho appeared to have good taste.

The conversation halted abruptly when there was a rustling sound from the trees and Dan Ho and Hwang Rin appeared, holding two large sheets that were bound around a bundle of clothes.

“Here you go, Princess.” Dan Ho growled at Song Hwa. “All the clothes in the Kingdom.”

“Did you buy all these?” Song Hwa eyed the bundle suspiciously.

“Of course not. Stole them off a nobleman. Do we look like we’re made of money?”

Song Hwa untied the knot on the sheet and silks upon silks spilled out. The materials seemed expensive, but the embroidery was shoddy and the colors were gaudy. Only one piece appeared to match Song Hwa’s taste. A pretty, understated, pink and white hanbok.

Hwang Rin reached into the pile of clothes and picked out the pink one. “Dan-ah. That one’s for you.”

Again, that sting of a dark feeling coursed through Song Hwa’s veins. She couldn’t identify the feeling exactly. Anger? Annoyance? Sadness? It felt like a foreign cocktail of many things and it all converged to a hatred of the girl.

The pink of the hanbok matched the pink of Eun Dan’s pin. Both girls realized this at the same time. Song Hwa’s dark feeling subsided as she realized this worked in her favor.

Eun Dan looked at the pin, and then the hanbok. “You picked it out for me?” She asked Hwang Rin.

“Of course. Who else would?”

Eun Dan didn’t probe further. But Song Hwa could tell she didn’t believe him. Song Hwa cut in before Eun Dan had a chance to clarify her question and settle the matter amicably.

“Eun Dan, why don’t we try out these clothes together? We can help each other get ready.”

Hwang Rin and Dan Ho looked to each other. The Princess addressing Eun Dan so familiarly was a new development for the two of them.

“Yes, lets.” Eun Dan agreed immediately.

“Did something happen while we were gone?” Hwang Rin quietly asked Dong Su.

“Nothing much.” Dong Su shrugged noncommittally.

Dan Ho gave Song Hwa what felt like a warning look. But every look from Dan Ho was cold and angry so Song Hwa gave it no thought. Sam Chul was sent along with the girls to keep an eye on them but really, it was because Sam Chul was the one to least bother them while they dressed.

They went to the stream to bathe and dress. Song Hwa found her companion to be quite a welcome presence. She smiled openly, without reserve and asked Song Hwa questions about the palace. She wanted to know how princesses bathed— “We each have a communal bath house and then a small bath in our private quarters.”— how they dressed— “A royal tailor is available to the court ladies and princesses but my sisters and their mother have their own tailors.”— if they shared any clothes— “No, my sisters didn’t like sharing… with me.”

To every answer Song Hwa provided, Eun Dan gave answers from her own experience. She spoke about her friends whom she used to live with. They were women that Eun Dan wasn’t related to— “I was taken in as an orphan. All of us were orphans.”— yet they sounded more sisterly than Song Hwa and the other princesses. The women all lived together, ate together, bathed together. They shared clothing and gave each other advice on how to dress.

“If we ever got a new girl, we would always make sure she knew what she was doing with her first client. Most women in our line of work are withholding. They don’t want some new, fresh youngster to take their earnings. But we made sure that which ever girl joined us was well taken care of. I am always grateful to our Headmaster for teaching us that, teaching us to look out for each other.”

Song Hwa was confused by some of Eun Dan’s words but didn’t say anything. She wondered if Eun Dan was a killer like the rest and whether Song Hwa had made a mistake in underestimating her. But no, the more Song Hwa observed the girl, the more she realized that Eun Dan had no agendas or hidden meanings behind her words. The girl was transparent to a fault.

The girls helped each other dress. Eun Dan skillfully helped Song Hwa with her hanbok while Song Hwa fumbled to help Eun Dan, who laughed and said, “I apologize, Your Highness. I shouldn’t have asked you to dress me.”

“Nonsense.” Song Hwa said absently as she tried to figure out the various layers of the hanbok, “This is common. If my maids can do it for me then I can figure out how to do it for you. If I can just… ugh! Who designed this thing?”

Eun Dan laughed again. A warm, vibrating sound that made Song Hwa feel less ashamed about her lack of ability to do this one simple thing. “Here, let me.” Eun Dan took the burden off of Song Hwa’s hands and dressed herself.

Next the girls moved on to hair. This Song Hwa knew how to do since her mother taught her and she had often practiced on the fourth Princess before the girl had become old enough to learn that Princess Song Hwa was not to be consorted with.

“You are very pretty, Your Highness.” Eun Dan remarked suddenly, making Song Hwa blush. Many had told her she was beautiful. None had ever meant it. It was something that was simply said, about all princesses. That they had “unparalleled beauty”, despite logic stating that if all princesses had beauty that was unmatched, then none of them had it.

“You are quite pretty yourself, Eun Dan.” Song Hwa remarked quietly. The sentiment was genuine. Eun Dan grinned. Song Hwa caught herself before she could enjoy Eun Dan’s company too much. There was a purpose for this activity. And Song Hwa had to see it through. “I bet the boys all bother you, since you’re so pretty.”

“Who, these boys?” Eun Dan chuckled, “No they would never bother any woman.”

“Right. Dan Ho has told me that they are immune to feminine charms.” Song Hwa said scandalously, as if she was sharing gossip and not fishing for information.

“Well… I wouldn’t call it immune. Dong Su certainly isn’t. Although Dan Ho and Hwang Rin keep him from straying. And I think Sam Chul had someone back in school—I heard one of the girls gossiping about it when he first arrived—but none of us are allowed to be in relationships, so I doubt he is still in touch with that girl.”

“You aren’t allowed to have relationships?”

Eun Dan shook her head violently, as if Song Hwa had suggested a great crime. “Oh no! Headmaster would have our heads if any of us are caught with someone else.”

“Why not? That doesn’t seem fair.”

“It is an unnecessary distraction. And having someone we love means having a weakness that can be used against us. With the line of business we are in, relationships just don’t fit.”

Song Hwa frowned. This was going to put a damper in her plans. “But you and… Hwang Rin.” Song Hwa approached the subject cautiously.

Eun Dan looked down, hiding from Song Hwa’s perceptive gaze. “I know.” She chuckled sadly. “It’s stupid when we know the consequences. But certain things… they can’t be helped, can they?”

Song Hwa understood. Her feelings for Go Chung Myung were foolish. A Princess in love with the Captain of the guard? She would become a laughingstock in court. Yet, she had never been able to keep them at bay. They always spilled out, filling her heart completely every time she laid her eyes on him.

“You’re right. They can’t.” Then, unconsciously, she ended up asking, “How did you and Hwang Rin… I mean how did that happen?” Song Hwa was genuinely curious.

Eun Dan shrugged. “When I think about it… I can’t really tell the how or the why. I just know that we connected. He likes ghost stories the same way I do. He sees the world the same way I see it. And he used to be very cold and aloof, you know.”

“He did?” That didn’t sound like the easy going man she had seen.

Eun Dan smiled, “Yes. He kept himself isolated for a very long time. Girls used to go crazy for him for his looks. The boys used to hate him because of it. Even the Headmaster said his face caused her a lot of trouble in taming the girls. It made him hate people. He used to never care about anybody else’s feelings but his own. And then we met… I had never seen him at school, although I had heard a lot about him. But once I was put to work, and made his handler... we got to know each other and the rest just happened.”

“Did you meet Park—I mean, Dan Ho around the same time?”

“No, Dan Ho I got to know much later. He was working with Hwang Rin but he never came in to select the contracts. Always sent Hwang Rin.”

Song Hwa scoffed. “Was he too busy to even bother?”

“No. I think he hated the rumors the women spread about him. Hwang Rin is quite handsome, but Dan Ho is the best assassin we have. He’s something of a legend. Even the Headmaster calls him her favorite student.”

“What rumors did the women spread?”

“You know how it is. Women often lie about having been with him. And since Dan Ho is so popular, the stories about him always get a little out of hand. And the fool never corrects any of it, that idiot.” Eun Dan shook her head as if an unbelievable thought occurred to her. “I mean, some of them even have the audacity to claim that they were his first and that he was as skilled in bed as he is in battle,” she laughed. Upon seeing Song Hwa’s confused expression, Eun Dan clarified, “Even with Dan Ho’s brains—and he has a lot, don’t get me wrong—but even with that intelligence, there is no way he can be that good. I know for a fact that all men are clumsy their first time.”

It was here that the Princess realized just what exactly it was that Eun Dan did. She became very quiet as she processed this information.

“Shall we head back?” Eun Dan asked innocently, and it took all of Song Hwa’s wits to nod in response. Eun Dan called to Sam Chul, “Sam Chul-ah! We’re all done!”

Eun Dan didn’t notice the change in the Princess’s attitude and walked ahead with Sam Chul while Song Hwa followed back slowly. All her life, she had heard that prostitutes were a low class of women who had been forced into a heinous life. They were to be pitied and looked down upon but never to be respected and considered as equals, especially not by women born into royalty. Song Hwa had always pictured prostitutes as women void of any humanity; bodies of flesh that lived and breathed to satisfy men.

But here was Eun Dan, a lively girl who appeared just as innocent as her own youngest sister and who smiled brightly at everything despite her vocation. Song Hwa couldn’t believe that someone who was so warm and welcoming knew about the pleasures that men sought in unsavory hours of the night.

The sun had gone down now, leaving dark blue and purple streaks in the sky. Pale stars twinkled up ahead. The assassins had lit a fire as they had waited for the girls to return. When the girls and Sam Chul reached them, they all stood up.

When they returned, the boys all stood up and admired Eun Dan who twirled around for them to see. Song Hwa didn’t know whether the act was lecherous or innocent. Her mind was still boggled.

“Woah! Who braided up your hair like that?” Dong Su asked and by his tone, Song Hwa knew that he meant nothing beyond wholesome admiration.

“The Princess did.” Eun Dan said bashfully. Song Hwa expected the men to comment something to her about Eun Dan’s hair, but they paid her no heed.

“She had a beautiful subject to work on.” Hwang Rin said, putting an arm around her.

“Of course, she did. Our Eun Dani has always been so pretty.” Dong Su said, sounding like a father.

“You look pretty, Dan-ah.” Dan Ho said and to Song Hwa’s surprise. He was smiling, albeit only slightly. Song Hwa realized that she had never seen him smile before. It appeared unnatural on his face, as if his lips weren’t used to the gesture.

The pink and white hanbook really suited Eun Dan. It even fit her perfectly, as if made to measure. With the firelight illuminating her and the inky sky behind her, Eun Dan looked ethereal. The gaudy colored hanbok Song Hwa wore made her feel unsightly. The fit too was loose and made her appear out of shape and disproportionate. Song Hwa was all the happier that the boys only gave Eun Dan any attention. She would have hated to be scrutinized by them.

~~~~~~~

They had continued their travel the next day, after having been delayed by the Princess’s demand for more clothes. Dan Ho warned her not to issue anymore useless requests or he would gag her. This was fine by the Princess as she had no more demands to make anyway.

As always, Dan Ho rode up ahead, making sure their way was clear. If it wasn’t he would give them a signal, which was a piece of red string tied around a sapling tree. Song Hwa waited till Dan Ho was out of sight. Then she let out a breath of relief. It was always easier to breathe when Dan Ho wasn’t around. His hawk like eyes always watched her like he could tell what she was thinking.

Song Hwa was tied up to the horse. Sam Chul would ride with her. Dan Ho always ordered Sam Chul to stay with Song Hwa when they were traveling. Song Hwa didn’t know whether if this was due to Sam Chul’s gentle treatment of her or whether Sam Chul was a more competent assassin than he had led on. Song Hwa guessed it was the latter. Dan Ho wasn’t kind enough to care how Song Hwa got treated.

Song Hwa looked at the ropes tying her hands together. They had tied her hands up in the front this time, since she kept “accidentally” falling so much. The knots were tight but the strips of cloth Sam Chul always tied around her wrists kept them protected.

“Too tight?” Sam Chul came up to her. Song Hwa nodded. As expected, Sam Chul loosened up the knots. “Don’t tell anyone, okay?” Sam Chul said.

Song Hwa couldn’t fully commit to her smile. She didn’t like what she was about to do.

Her legs couldn’t be tied up when they were riding. But they did have her tied to the horse so she couldn’t escape it. With her hands now bound on the front and loose enough to move, she could undo the rope around her waist.

She looked at Sam Chul as the rope fell away. I’m really sorry, she thought as she leapt off the horse and sprinted in the other direction.

“Wha…” Was all Sam Chul could manage when he saw Song Hwa run.

“She’s escaping!” Dong Su yelled and ran after the Princess. Sam Chul soon followed.

“Princess stop!” Sam Chul yelled.

Hwang Rin, who had been busy talking with Eun Dan, finally noticed what had happened. He sprinted after them like a leopard, fast and swift. He ran past Sam Chul and even Dong Su, finally catching up to the Princess.

Hwang Rin rammed his body into hers, taking them both down.

“I thought you were smarter than this, Princess.” Hwang Rin said ruefully as he pinned Song Hwa to the ground. Dong Su and Sam Chul caught up to them as Song Hwa struggled under Hwang Rin’s grip.

“I got her.” Dong Su said, helping Hwang Rin haul Song Hwa up and back to the horses.

“I’m sorry!” Song Hwa said to Sam Chul, who watched with his jaw hanging open. “I’m sorry!”

~~~~~~~

She knew Dong Su wouldn’t be the one to ride with her. He complained enough about her already and Hwang Rin was too hungry and too tired to argue with him. Sam Chul couldn’t be trusted with her anymore, so the only option left was for her to ride with Hwang Rin.

“Nice weather we’re having.” Song Hwa said. Hwang Rin’s only response was to ignore her. “A fine day to plan an escape.” Song Hwa laughed at her own joke.

Hwang Rin sighed. “You know we’re going to always catch you. Why bother? All it gets you is tighter binds.” He said, referring to the fact that her hands were now firmly bound behind her back and even her legs were bound together, swinging from one side of the horse.

“Oh, getting caught was part of the plan,” Song Hwa said, sounding like she was covering up a bruised ego when really, it was the truth.

Hwang Rin chuckled, “Oh yeah? Your plan was to piss everyone off?”

“Nope. My plan was to ride with you.” She leaned back into his chest for good measure.

He jerked his body to push her away, grunting in disgust. The gesture stung a little.

“I’m kidding, of course,” she said. A part of her realized that if it had been Dan Ho, then he would have seen right through her plan. He would have known that she wasn’t foolish enough to attempt an escape in part of a wood she had never been in. Because even if she had evaded the assassins—which was highly unlikely—she still wouldn’t have been able to survive; mother nature would have taken her. And Song Hwa was smart enough to know that. She knew that at this point, her chances of staying alive were higher with the assassins than without them.

This realization made her go a little pink in the face; that Dan Ho would not have taken her as lightly as the others did.

They rode in silence for a while, watching out for the markers Dan Ho had left behind. Black strings tied to saplings to show that it was safe to follow.

“Eun Dan is a pretty girl.” Song Hwa started the conversation again. Hwang Rin continued to ignore her. “Dan Ho’s lucky to have her.”

The horse neighed loudly as Hwang Rin pulled the reigns back. It kicked the air, almost throwing its passengers off.

“Excuse me?” Hwang Rin said darkly when the horse calmed a little.

“Dan Ho. She’s with him, isn’t she?”

“No, she is absolutely, positively not.” He asserted.

“What’s wrong?” Dong Su, who had been riding behind them, asked.

“Nothing. Keep riding.” Hwang Rin ordered harshly.

Dong Su made a face but said nothing. Song Hwa shot him a look of sympathy. He smiled back and moved on. Sam Chul, who had been riding ahead of them with Eun Dan, was unaware that they had stopped.

“What makes you say Eun Dan is with Dan Ho? Did you see something?”

Hwang Rin’s eyes were red from exhaustion, the dark circles beneath them had gotten darker. His nostrils flared in irritation, his mouth was a hard line and he looked so wound up that he might snap at any second.

This was just as Song Hwa wanted.

“I didn’t see anything. Eun Dan was just telling me about the pin Dan Ho got her.”

“Dan Ho didn’t give her that pin, I did.”

“But he bought it, didn’t he? At least that’s what Eun Dan told me.”

Hwang Rin jerked back as if he had been slapped. “Eun Dan knows?”

“Dan Ho told her, I think.” Song Hwa said innocently.

Hwang Rin clenched his jaw and stared into space. Song Hwa could see the wheels in his mind turning, albeit at a slow pace.

“Shouldn’t we join up with the others?” Song Hwa said.

“Huh?” Hwang Rin snapped out of his thoughts. “Yeah. Right.”

Song Hwa remained quiet throughout the way, smiling to herself.

Now the real fun begins, she thought.

Chapter Text

The atmosphere was heavy and dense, and not just because they were in the thick of the woods. Silence accompanied the group like a uninvited guest as they went about setting up camp. Each person knew what they had to do so they went about setting up the traps and laying out the bedding without any fuss .

“Let me help.” Eun Dan said, getting up.

“We can do it.” All four of the men said together. Despite their heads hanging limply from tired bodies and limbs moving at a snail’s pace, they managed to get everything ready before it got too dark to see.

The fire they lit was as weak as the conversation between them. Sam Chul cooked a tasteless meal that he quietly served out. Song Hwa didn’t bother putting up any tantrums this time. She knew the fuse she had lit would blow in its own time.

Hwang Rin kept glancing at Dan Ho, when he felt like no one was watching. Dan Ho in turn, kept rubbing his neck, as if he felt Hwang Rin’s eyes on him. Eun Dan, oblivious to anything, ate in peace with Hwang Rin by her side.

Song Hwa must have been quite tired herself, because it took her a while to realize that Eun Dan wasn’t wearing the pink pin anymore. It took another minute for Dan Ho to notice this too.

Song Hwa watched his face in fascination as realization dawned on his eyes. His brows flicked just a little. He didn’t blink, just stared. And for one fleeting second, Song Hwa thought she saw pain on his face. The expression vanished in a blink, making Song Hwa wonder if she had actually seen it or simply imagined it.

“What happened to your pin?” Song Hwa spoke up. All eyes first turned to her, then to Eun Dan’s hair.

“Uh, I uh,” Eun Dan smiled sheepishly, “I lost it.” She said, clearly lying. Unconsciously, she touched her head where she had been wearing the pin.

“Aw, it was so pretty.” Song Hwa lamented exaggeratedly, leaning back.

A loaded pause settled in where Dan Ho eyed Eun Dan and Hwang Rin watched Dan Ho.

“We’ll get you another one, Dan-ah.” Hwang Rin said, not taking his eyes off of Dan Ho. “I’ll choose it myself.”

Dan Ho said nothing.

They finished up dinner and cleared everything out in silence. This was unsatisfactory as Song Hwa really needed them to start fighting now.

When Eun Dan passed by her, Song Hwa called to her. “Eun Dan!” she whispered, “Come here.”

Eun Dan came over grinning. “What, Song Hwa-ya?”

Since when did we get close enough for her to refer to me so casually? Song Hwa thought. She knew she should have felt insulted. But she felt something else entirely. Something she didn’t have time to ponder on. “Did I get you into trouble?”

“Trouble? What for?”

“When I pointed out about your pin missing just now. I felt like I had said the wrong thing.”

Eun Dan shook her head vehemently, “Oh no! Not at all! Please don’t be sorry, you did nothing wrong.”

Song Hwa leaned as far as she could and said in a quiet voice, “It’s not lost, is it?”

Eun Dan gasped, “How did you know?”

“I could tell.”

“Omo, you’re so smart, Princess.” Song Hwa felt smug at the compliment. “You’re right. I still have it.”

“You didn’t know Dan Ho was the one who got you the pin, did you?”

Eun Dan shook her head. “I mean… it’s not odd for Dan Ho to give me gifts. I have plenty of things from him. It’s just… I thought Hwang Rin picked it out for me.”

“I understand. And it was such a pretty little thing too. Dan Ho will be so disappointed now that it’s not being used anymore.”

Eun Dan considered this. “Should I just pretend I don’t know and put it back on?”

“Well… maybe that’s not such a good idea. It is after all, quite an intimate gift.” It wasn’t. But Eun Dan was naïve enough to believe Song Hwa. “Perhaps you should return it?”

“What? No, I couldn’t possibly. Dan Ho’s feelings would be hurt.”

Park Dan Ho has feelings? Song Hwa doubted that. The only display of emotion she had seen from him was anger, more anger, subdued anger, calm anger, deep anger, and an expression of annoyance for when he was done with her antics. The only timed he had seemed human was when he had smiled to Eun Dan. “I think it would be worse if you kept giving him hope.”

Eun Dan looked confused. “Hope?”

“You know what I mean? He clearly likes you. I can see it in his eyes every time he looks at you.”

Eun Dan blushed. Song Hwa wondered if she had been too blunt. “I mean I… I have a lot of men who… but Dan Ho is my friend. My best friend.”

Song Hwa wanted to roll her eyes but persisted in keeping an encouraging expression. “He’s Hwang Rin’s friend too, isn’t he? I wonder how Hwang Rin feels that his friend is giving his lover gifts.”

“Hwang Rin has never minded before.”

“Or he hasn’t shown it before. Didn’t you hear what he said at dinner? He wanted you to have something he chose.” Song Hwa let this point stew in Eun Dan’s mind for a bit before continuing. “I say, you should return the pin to Dan Ho. But silently, so that he’s not hurt. If you place the pin back in his satchel, he might get the message.”

“Dan-ah! What’s taking so long?” Dan Ho called to her.

“Coming!” Eun Dan scurried away from Song Hwa before the Princess had a chance to put another word in.

Dan Ho stared at the Princess in question. Song Hwa simply flicked her hair back and returned Dan Ho’s stare defiantly. The two continued to look at each other without blinking. There was a sort of unspoken understanding between them that the first person to blink or look away would lose. Song Hwa tried to keep her eyes open but eventually she had to blink and the embarrassment of losing made her look away. When she looked back up again, Dan Ho was gone.

“What were you saying to Eun Dan?”

“Ah, kkamjjagiya!” Song Hwa jumped when Dan Ho suddenly showed up by her side. “Where did you come from?”

“Answer the question.”

“I was just making small talk.”

“Liar.”

“Ask her. I was just talking about dinner.”

Dan Ho lowered himself to eye level and glared at her. “I know your kind, Princess. You don’t like fraternizing with anyone beneath you. You’re not fooling anyone when you pretend to be Eun Dan’s friend.”

Song Hwa glared back, head on. “If I’m not fooling anyone, then you don’t have anything to worry about. Isn’t that so?” 

“I don't want you messing with her for your entertainment like you're messing with us. Eun Dan isn’t like us. She’s innocent. ”

There it was again, that dark, angry feeling. Song Hwa suddenly hated the girl, even though a part of her acknowledged that Eun Dan had done nothing to deserve this treatment from her. “She’s a prostitute. I doubt she’s that innocent.” Song Hwa had wanted to sound mean, instead the words came out as pathetic and petty.

Impossible as it seemed, Dan Ho’s eyes grew darker, his brows furrowing into an angry arch. He moved dangerously close and spoke in a low and quiet voice that made Song Hwa tremble, “Eun Dan may be a prostitute, but she has more honor, more decency and more nobility than you will ever have, Princess.”

Song Hwa hated the way Dan Ho said her title. She hated how it always sounded more like a slap in the face than a respectful title. Humiliation stung her eyes and flamed her cheeks. Wanting to strike back, Song Hwa said, “Of course you would say that. You love her, don’t you?”

Dan Ho was taken aback by this, “What?”

“Doesn’t it feel bad? Always pathetically stealing looks at her while she cuddles up to your friend?” Song Hwa raised her chin up at him. “Eun Dan can’t be that innocent though if she managed to ensnare not one but two of you. I’m almost impressed, especially since she’s so ugly looking.” Song Hwa didn’t really know what she was saying. She only knew that she was hurt and wanted Dan Ho to feel the same.

Dan Ho’s expression hardened. He took a moment and then he smiled. “Is that so, Princess?” He tone was uncharacteristically saccharine. Song Hwa felt pain in her teeth and heavy in her stomach, like the feeling she got when she had eaten too many sweets.

Dan Ho moved even closer, his mouth hovering above her ear. The way he spoke; the closeness, the tilt of his head, seemes like a man was sharing secrets with his lover. But his tone was dark and his words dripped in hate. “Sure, you may be pretty on the outside and sure, you can call Eun Dan ugly too. She’s never had the luxuries you’ve had, and she’s been abused in the worst way possible. Of course, it’s taken its toll on her. But my Eun Dan... my Eun Dan is ten times the woman you could ever be. You…” his cheek grazed hers, “you are ugly to your core.”

Dan Ho backed up, his eyes briefly flicking to her lips. He looked smug, knowing he had defeated the Princess in this round of this strange invisible game they were playing. She had nothing to strike back with, no response to cut his words.

Dan Ho went back, leaving Song Hwa to her thoughts. She saw Dan Ho walk up to Eun Dan to take what she was carrying off her hands. Hwang Rin then showed up from behind, making Eun Dan jump as he poked her in the waist. Eun Dan yelped and laughed. Dan Ho let the couple be and went ahead. Hwang Rin then gave Eun Dan a flower he had been hiding behind his back.

Song Hwa watched this with envious eyes and finally realized what this dark, cold feeling that had been bothering her was. It was jealousy. The Princess was jealous of a lowly prostitute.

Why? She has nothing that I desire. Song Hwa reasoned with herself. But then her heart answered. It was the care that the assassins showed for her. They all worried about her well being, they all looked after her and made sure she was safe and happy. Eun Dan was loved by them.

Eun Dan was cherished.

And Song Hwa realized, that since the death of her mother, no one had truly cherished her. No one would ever rush to her when she fell, no one would worry about her carrying a heavy burden, or give her flowers simply because they wanted to.

No one wanted her.

The Princess, despite having so many people wait on her hand and foot, had no one that truly liked her. And it was probably a given by this point, that despite her being dead, no one was really missing her.

~~~~~~~

Everyone began to settle in for the night. As always, Dan Ho ordered Dong Su to take the first shift with Song Hwa. Dong Su came over to check Song Hwa’s bindings.

“You look so tired,” she said sympathetically.

“Because a certain someone keeps everyone up at night.” Dong Su replied. His tone was softer than usual and his voice low, as if he didn’t want the others to hear this conversation. This told Song Hwa that her plan was working.

“I almost wish you had the watch for the entire night.” Song Hwa looked into his eyes. Dong Su’s mouth hung open as he struggled to think of what else to say. Song Hwa chuckled. “Although, it is a bit unfair for you,” she added.

“Ah, yes.” Dong Su nodded, unable to say much else. Song Hwa silently laughed at his awkwardness. She had to admit that Dong Su carried an endearing charm. But if she asked herself whether she liked him, the answer always came up no. Her heart was firmly fixed on one person, and one person only.

If only he were here, Song Hwa sighed. A deep-rooted longing nestled into her heart. It was her constant companion, this lonely feeling.

The Princess brought up her fantasy again as she stared at the waning fire. She thought about running into Chung Myung’s arms when this was all over. She thought about telling everyone the story of how she bravely bested the Shadowmen. She thought about being the first person who ever saw the Shadowmen and lived to tell the tale.

Something interrupted her fantasy. She tried hard to return to the image of Chung Myung walking beside her, arm in arm but nearby shouting pulled her out of it.

“This stupid stoic act of yours. It’s all pretend, isn’t it?” Hwang Rin was yelling.

“Stop it! Both of you!” Eun Dan was saying.

Song Hwa shook, as if waking from a dream and realized that she was about to miss the results of her hard work.

“You have no idea what you are talking about.” Dan Ho got in Hwang Rin’s face, eyes blazing hotter than the fire. His voice was low and dangerous.

“Oh, I don’t? Then how do you explain this? I found this in your belongings.” Hwang Rin held up something that glittered in the firelight. It was pink.

Dan Ho looked at it in confusion. “I don’t know how that got there.”

“Stop lying!” Hwang Rin threw the pin in the fire with incredible force. Eun Dan jumped back.

“I’m not lying!”

“Then tell me how Eun Dan found out that you’re the one who got this for her. Or are you going to pretend that you didn’t tell her?”

“What are you talking about?”

“Eun Dan,” Hwang Rin turned to the girl, “did you know, that Dan Ho bought this pin for you?”

Eun Dan stood frozen. Sam Chul had his arm around her from behind to support her.

“Tell me!”

“Don’t yell at her.” Dan Ho grabbed Hwang Rin’s collar.

“I did.” Eun Dan said in a small voice but was unable to say anything else.

Dan Ho let go of Hwang Rin, a little shocked at this news. “You knew?”

Eun Dan nodded.

“Are you going to pretend you weren’t the one who told her?” Hwang Rin pushed Dan Ho back.

“Yah, yah, yah. We’re all too tired for this.” Dong Su tried to calm things down. “Lets sleep on it and discuss in the morning.”

“Shut up, Dong Su. You’re not a part of this.” Hwang Rin said.

This rubbed Dong Su the wrong way. He grabbed Hwang Rin’s arm, “How am I not a part of this? All this time watching you two pretend that there’s nothing wrong while silently fighting over Eun Dan, how the hell am I not a part of it?”

“Dong Su, this isn’t about you.” Dan Ho said.

“Of course, it isn’t! Nothing is ever about me! You guys treat me like some lackey while you two decide everything on your own.”

“Nobody treats you like a lackey.” Dan Ho said.

“Don’t be so dramatic.” Hwang Rin agreed.

Dong Su scoffed, rolling his eyes, “You guys are such assholes.”

“Guys, lets stop. This isn’t the time to fight.” Sam Chul tried to intervene.

“Shut up!” All three assassins said together. Sam Chul jumped back.

“If we’re such assholes, then why are you always so desperate to come with us on missions?” Hwang Rin pushed Dong Su away.

“It’s not like we forced you to join us.” Dan Ho said.

“Guys, don’t gang up on him.” Eun Dan’s small voice went unheard.

Dong Su looked lost for words.

Dan Ho stepped forward, “All you do is sit around and complain. Every task we give you, you either mess up or just refuse to do. How exactly do you expect us to treat you when you treat everything so lightly?”

Dong Su barely managed to keep his head up as Dan Ho’s harsh words hit home.

“Just leave for now, Dong Su.” Hwang Rin said. "We're not the best company right now."

Dong Su backed away.

Eun Dan managed to squeeze in between Dan Ho and Hwang Rin, “This is enough. I think we need to—”

“Dan-ah, this is between me and Dan Ho.” Hwang Rin told her gently.

“Why? You don’t want her to have a say in all of this?” Dan Ho argued.

Dong Su watched the two bickering friends with Eun Dan sandwiched between them. Sam Chul could only watch from the sides, wisely avoiding the argument.

Feeling humiliated, Dong Su walked up to the Princess and untied her from the tree.

“What are you doing?” Song Hwa asked.

“Come on, we’re going to the stream.”

Song Hwa said nothing. She glanced back at the group as Hwang Rin and Dan Ho went head to head with each other while Eun Dan and Sam Chul jumped in to keep them apart. Her plan had worked. But it didn’t feel as satisfying as it should have.

Dong Su led her to the stream. He went ahead and sat down on a rock by the edge while Song Hwa just stood and watched. The Princess was still tied to Dong Su, but if she wanted to, she could have run.

“Don’t pay attention to what those guys said,” Song Hwa told him. “I am sure they did not mean it.” What am I doing? Song Hwa wondered. But she couldn’t help it. “They’re just hungry and tired.”

Song Hwa watched Dong Su’s shoulders sag. He let his head hang while he threw rocks into the water.

“I hate this life, you know. I hate every second of it.” He said.

“Then why do you do it?”

Dong Su chuckled morosely, “It’s not like any of us have a choice. We are all here because we don’t have any other place to go.”

“Why not try to leave now? You’re all skilled. You can still have a good life.”

“No way. No one leaves the guild. Not alive at least.”

Song Hwa looked at Dong Su carefully, his body outlined by the moon. In some ways, the assassins were just like her. They were kids, her age, who were forced into the life they had no control over and made to do things they didn't want. They were puppets, run by an invisible hand. Song Hwa was the same.

Suddenly, Dong Su didn't seem like a scary ghost story. Suddenly, he was human. Just a boy who only wanted to survive. He wasn't that handsome, nor that skilled compared to the other assassins. But those qualities made him seem all the more attainable. They made him seem like someone who could fall for Song Hwa, someone who wouldn't worry about the dark and wicked parts of her. Dong Su appeared like someone who would not mind loving her.

Something warm and hopeful unfurled inside her. A part of her that wished to find a person who would accept her and see her as human too. Song Hwa came over and sat beside Dong Su, her shoulder touching his. “Do you want to run away with me?” The statement came out like vomit, uncontrollably and quite suddenly. Song Hwa herself was surprised with what she was saying. “Should we just get away from here? Leave everyone behind? I’ll forget I was a Princess. And you can forget you were an assassin. And we can live normal lives together.”

Her hands were trembling, her heart was racing. She had never said anything like this to any man before and she felt oddly nervous. It was the anticipation of Dong Su’s answer. She was worried about what he was thinking about her clumsy confession. Song Hwa worried about what impact her statement would have on her plan and decided she didn't care. For just one minute, she wouldn't care about anything but this strange feeling in her heart. 

Dong Su took Song Hwa’s hand in his and Song Hwa felt a quiver go down her spine. In that instant, every part of her said yes. She could see herself living in a far away village in a humble abode, working as a farmer or a seamstress or whatever occupation commoners had. She could see herself laughing, sharing jokes with Dong Su who would give her flowers and tell her that she was pretty. She could see all of this so vividly that when she caught herself, she shook.

What am I doing? Had she developed feelings for the man she had meant to seduce? She looked at Dong Su and realized that no, she had not. There was no intense desire that she felt like when she was with Chung Myung. But the idea of being loved, just the thought of it, had such a powerful pull that she would run away with Dong Su and sincerely remain with him, even though he was not her beloved Captain.

Such were Song Hwa's complicated feelings that she had missed half of what Dong Su was saying, or even the fact that he was speaking. She only came to when he said, “… and I don’t want to lose that chance. Not when I have her back.”

“Huh?”

“You didn’t hear what I said?”

Song Hwa sheepishly shook her head.

Dong Su gulped, “I was saying Princess… your feelings. I mean what I’m trying to say is… I already have someone.”

“What?” Song Hwa’s heart sank. All this time, I was seducing a taken man? She could see her hard work going to waste.

“She was with Eun Dan when they were taken. We weren’t particularly close, her and I. Shadowmen are not allowed to have any relationships, it’s against the rules. I always told myself that what I had with her meant nothing. However, when I thought she had died… I don’t know what that feeling was but I felt like I had died with her. And when Eun Dan came to us, and she told us that my girl had made it out alive… I promised myself that I would go back to her and we would be together again." Dong Su put Song Hwa’s hand back in her lap. "Your attention was very flattering, Princess. But I’m afraid I can’t return it.” 

Even though it was a reasonable rejection, even though she did not like Dong Su and even though this was all a part of her scheme, it still hurt. It felt like Song Hwa wasn’t good enough for anyone, even Dong Su.

The coldness returned to the Princess's heart. That warm, fuzzy feeling subsided, leaving behind a calculating mind. Stop wallowing in childish feelings, Song Hwa told herself. Get back on track!

 “I’m happy you have someone, Dong Su.” Song Hwa said softly, “I hope she will make you happy. At least you have someone to appreciate you, unlike Dan Ho and Hwang Rin.”

“Thank you, Princess.” With a sigh he said, “I never realized how badly Dan Ho and Hwang Rin treated me before. Although, isn’t it ironic? I’ve known these guys for so many years, but it seems that you’re the only person who actually cares about me.”

"I suppose we can be friends then."

Dong Su grinned, happy at the thought, "Yes! We can be friends."

Song Hwa smiled to him, satisfied that she had Dong Su right where she wanted him. She wondered what it meant that just a second ago, she was ready to run away with him, and now she was playing him like a fiddle.

You don’t have time to worry about morals, she reminded herself, this is your chance.

"It would be nice to be friends," she said. "I never had any back home. Now I have you and Eun Dan and Sam Chul..."

"Life is better here, isn't it?" Dong Su said foolishly.

"Yes." Song Hwa said absently. She lowered her head, as if to hide tears that were not there, “It's sad though, that we only have each other for a short time."

"Why, Princess? We can be friends for as long as you want."

"But then, I don't have very long do I?" Song Hwa tried to sound as if she was crying when really, the tears weren't coming. Which was surprising given that she felt like wailing every other time.

"I don't... oh." Dong Su finally understood what she meant and realized the crucial factor in their relationship that he had forgotten. That she was still their captive.

"Dong Su, am I going to live after all of this? Or is Dan Ho going to kill me?” Song Hwa couldn’t see his face but could feel him shift uncomfortably.  “You… you might get to have a good life with that girl. Hwang Rin will have Eun Dan. Dan Ho—”

“He will have Sam Chul.” Dong Su joked.

Song Hwa bit back a laugh but a stifled chortle still managed to escape. Song Hwa hoped it sounded like crying. She continued “I… I won’t have a life, a love… I won’t have anything after all this is over. I’ll just die, and then I’ll be nothing. I doubt people will even remember me.”

Song Hwa waited for Dong Su to say something or do something. But he was eerily quiet. Song Hwa wondered if she needed to lay it on thicker to drive in the guilt. Did assassins even feel guilt?

Swish! Suddenly Song Hwa’s hands were free, the ropes cut cleanly in the middle. Another swift cut swished in the air and the rope around her waist fell too.

“Go.” Dong Su said.

Song Hwa looked up, not believing what she was seeing. “What?”

“Follow the stream downward. Then when you reach the fork, go east. There’s a village there. The mayor is a supporter of your father. He will help you. You have your identification tag on you, don’t you?”

The hopae, an identification tag, was a jade tile with the royal family’s insignia carved onto it along with her name and status. Song Hwa carried it hidden underneath the layers of clothing. Song Hwa touched it now and nodded to Dong Su.

“Good. Here, take this.” Dong Su gave her a dagger. “But don’t stop to fight anyone. Just run, got it?”

This was it, this was what she had been working towards; getting the group to fight each other, manipulating Dong Su, keeping every one agitated and deprived of any peace so that finally, one of their own would turn against them and let Song Hwa go.

While Song Hwa had faith in her plan from the start, the fact that it had worked baffled her now. She was still expecting something to go wrong. She was still expecting Dong Su to rescind his offer but her was still holding out the blade for her.

“You’ll get in trouble.” Song Hwa blurted and then immediately wanted to kill herself for asking something that could jeopardize her plan.

“Dan Ho’s bark is louder than his bite,” Dong Su said. “He always gives big threats, but he’s not that cruel.”

Song Hwa doubted that, but she took the dagger gratefully. Suddenly, there were voices. Shouting of some kind. Song Hwa feared that Dan Ho had noticed her missing and figured out her plan. No doubt the truth would have come out if Eun Dan had explained who had influenced her decision to return the pin to Dan Ho. Song Hwa knew she had to take this chance and run while she could. But there was something that held her back. “Come with me,” she said with urgency.

“Princess, I can’t—”

“I’m not asking you to elope. I’m asking you to return with me. I will get you pardoned, make sure you are accepted as a proper citizen. You can give your girl a proper life, give her the chance to leave the brothel.”

Dong Su paued, “Princess…”

“Come with me.” Song Hwa took his hands into hers. “You’ll get punished if you stay here.”

The shouting neared, there was a clang of swords. Song Hwa knew her time was up now. She could tell whether Dan Ho and Hwang Rin had started fighting each other or were looking for her, but either way, she had to leave. And she could tell, that Dong Su felt the same way.

“Go, Princess. I’ll be fine.” Dong Su told her.

The Princess didn’t wait this time, following the stream downwards, she ran. She threw a glance back at Dong Su who stood there, watching her. Behind him, a figure appeared. He was just a silhouette but Song Hwa couldn’t recognize which one of the assassins it was. Strangely enough, the figure’s attire felt too heavy, it wasn’t the light form fitting uniform that the assassins normally wore.

Song Hwa couldn’t worry about that now. She finally had a chance at freedom. She had Chung Myung waiting for her.

~~~~~~~

Her legs had gotten weak in the last few days since the only exercise she had gotten was going back and forth from the camp to the stream. She had a massive head start and given that Dong Su would be covering for her, it would take them a while to catch up with her.

Still, she ran, despite the protest from her lungs and the pain in her muscles, she ran. This was it. This was her last shot at escape. There would be no other way out.

That figure wasn’t Dan Ho or Hwang Rin, a voice spoke in her mind.

Oh, who cares? Just run! Argued her more rational side.

You heard the voices, there was a fight. What if that was someone else?

Run, you idiot!

Song Hwa didn’t make it that far till she collapsed on the ground. She gasped for air and coughed. Her throat and was dry, her eyes watering. She quickly gulped water from the stream, even though it was unsanitary. The assassins always boiled the water before using it again. But Song Hwa didn’t care. Her throat felt like it would collapse on itself if it didn’t get any water.

Weak, her father’s voice rang in her head, weak and pathetic.

She was weak. She was pathetic. At this pace, the assassins would catch up to her, and all of her scheming would be rendered moot.

“Run, Song Hwa,” she told herself. “Run.”

Song Hwa picked herself up and this time decided to sprint at a reasonable pace. It was better she made progress slowly rather than burn herself out. She had only covered a short distance when she felt voices chasing her.

“There! I see her!”

It wasn’t a voice she recognized. Song Hwa picked up the pace but managed to look behind. A figure appeared from the woods. Then another. Then another. They all carried torches with them.

And they didn’t look like assassins.

The night made it difficult for Song Hwa to figure out what was what. But the torches the men carried illuminated red hanboks—no, red uniforms. Expensive looking uniforms.

Royal Guard uniforms.

Song Hwa stopped and turned. She couldn't believe it. The Royal Guard were here. They were here to rescue her, to save her from the assassins.

Tears welled up in her eyes. She wasn’t forgotten. She wasn’t alone. Someone out there had realized that she was still alive and had sent the guards to save her.

Song Hwa wondered if Chung Myung was among the guards advancing towards her. It was four of them, and they all ran at great speed. Song Hwa stood, waiting for them to come near.

“You idiot! What are you doing? Run!”

“Huh?” Song Hwa said. The voice sounded like Dan Ho.

It all felt like a dream. The guards drew near and Song Hwa saw that they all had their swords drawn. From the trees, Dan Ho emerged on horseback, riding towards her. One of the guards reached her first, with his hand raised up high. Of course, he wouldn’t strike her, would he?

Would he?

Song Hwa remembered too late, about the guards that had attacked her the night of her wedding. She had almost forgotten about them and about the trainer of the guards who had said that the Prince had sent them to kill the assassins. With a sick, sinking feeling she understood that the guards weren’t friends, but foes.

They were there to kill her.

With one fell swoop, Dan Ho collected her on his horse, saving her from the guard. Suddenly, Song Hwa was staring right into Dan Ho’s eyes.

“You idiot! Why didn’t you run?”

“I—I thought they were there to save me.”

“No, they are not.”

Song Hwa remembered the shouting she had heard when she had been talking to Dong Su. She remembered the figure that had emerged behind him as she had left.

“Dong Su, is he—”

“I don’t know. All I know is—” Dan Ho didn’t get to tell her what he knew. The horse rolled over, sending both of them flying to the ground. Someone had shot an arrow in its leg.

Dan Ho and Song Hwa fell in opposite directions. The guards caught up with them preventing them from escaping. One of them had his sword on Song Hwa’s throat. It took three of them to pin Dan Ho to the ground.

“Get them back to the camp.” The one holding Song Hwa ordered. They were hauled back to where the assassins had been staying. Hwang Rin, Eun Dan, Sam Chul and Dong Su were all on their knees, their hands tied up behind them. Dong Su’s nose was bleeding, while Hwang Rin's eye was swelling. Sam Chul looked white as a sheet.

When the four of them looked up and saw Dan Ho captured, their shoulders sagged and their faces lost all traces of hope. Eun Dan looked on in despair as Dan Ho was added to the line of captors. Song Hwa was held apart from them.

One of the guards, clearly the leader, stepped forward and studied Song Hwa from head to toe. He then turned to the assassins. “Clever lot, aren’t you? The entire kingdom is mourning the loss of their Princess, yet here she is, alive and well. I should have guessed that all of the clothes you stole from the village were for her. I almost believed they were for that whore.” The guard pointed his sword to Eun Dan. The metal glowed a strange green color in the firelight. In fact, all of the guards' swords shone with a green tinge.

“Are we sure she’s the Princess?” The guard holding Song Hwa voiced his concern.

“Check her tags.”

The guard began to search through her clothes. “Let me go!” Song Hwa yelled but in vain. The man found her jade tile easily. His eyes nearly bulged out of their sockets.

“Ah! It’s true! It’s the Princess!”

A sound of surprise rose up against the guards. The leader cackled in glee. “I can’t believe this! We were only after you lot,” he waved the sword among the assassins, “the Prince is under a lot of pressure you see. The King is suspicious he had something to do with her death and he really needs you four gone. But look!” the man cackled again, “The Princess is alive! Well not for long though.” The guard added as an afterthought.

“How did you find us?” Dan Ho asked.

“Well it’s not every day that a village gets ransacked for clothes. And all women’s clothes too!”

“I didn’t realize the Royal Guard was so worried about small crimes in secluded villages.” Hwang Rin said mockingly.

The guard tittered, “We don’t. But when a guard visiting home tells us that he saw a ghost steal his wife's clothes, we start taking interest. Especially when we are chasing ghosts ourselves.”

“I don’t suppose offering you a bribe would work?" Song Hwa said, knowing it was a vain attempt. "If you let me go—” 

“You suppose right, Princess. We don’t care for your bribe. The Prince has bigger plans for this Kingdom, and he needs you gone for it.”

“Young Hwa has no damn reason to do this!” Song Hwa yelled, trying to stand up. Her voice broke as she cursed her brother for putting her through this hell. She wanted to attack the lead guard and peel the skin off his face. It was only the cold metal pressed against her throat that prevented her from doing so.

"He has when you threaten his throne."

"I am no threat to his throne."

"Hmm? So you don't know that your father planned to give you the throne once you were married?"

Song Hwa's breath caught in her throat. "He did?" She said weakly.

"Aye, he said you had a better head than your brother. Quite hurt our Prince's feelings."

All her life, the King had told her she was worthless because she was a woman. To hear that he had some faith in her abilities made her feel a strange cocktail of emotions, none of which she could identify given the situation. 

Tears fell down Song Hwa's cheeks. All this for a stupid throne. If only her brother had asked. She would have given him the throne, had he wanted. 

“You know this is your fault.” Dan Ho said, shaking her out of her thoughts.

Song Hwa glared at him, bewildered and offended. "Are you serious?"

"Are you? Do you see the situation you have created for us?"

This situation... Song Hwa looked around, still feeling like she was in a dream. Things had turned sideways so fast that her mind was still comprehending what was going on.

"Look around you. Wake up, Princess. You have just killed us all."

"Yah, shut up." The guard poked Dan Ho's back with his sword.

Song Hwa looked at the guards, searching their faces for any sign that they might be on her side. There were ten of them. Song Hwa had seen the assassins take on more than this with ease. But their hands were tied up and she noticed a four swords lying by the fire, that she knew belonged to them. There were also their bows and arrows and a few daggers that she knew belonged to Hwang Rin. The assassins had been stripped of all weapons.

“Yah! Are you hearing me? This is because of you and your stupid demands!” Dan Ho yelled.

“Quiet!” The guard behind him warned.

Song Hwa ignored him. Ten men, four assassins. If only she could get even a dagger to one of them, they might be able to do something.

“Yah! Aren’t you going to speak now you piece of trash?!”

Song Hwa looked at Dan Ho. His face was angry but his eyes were telling her something. In the corner, Song Hwa saw Hwang Rin’s shoulder shake very slightly. Up, down, up, down it went.

“How is it my fault you useless piece of pathetic shit?” Song Hwa said darkly, eyeing Hwang Rin who she now realized was cutting through his rope.

Apparently, the guards hadn’t gotten all of their weapons.

“Shut up, both of you.” The leader said. “Kill them.” He ordered. But the guards held back as Dan Ho yelled at Song Hwa.

“You useless woman! This is all because you couldn’t handle regular clothes.”

“Oh, and what about you and your stupid head? Why weren't you more careful when you went to the village? Ah-nee, what kind of an idiot gets caught stealing women’s clothes? Aren’t you even ashamed?!”

“Yah. Don’t pin your mistakes on me!” Dan Ho got to his feet, despite the guard attempting to pull him back down.

The leader raised his sword, “Get back down.”

Dan Ho ignored him, “Yah, you pretentious princess, how will you take responsibility for this? Huh? You’re getting all of us killed!”

“It’s not my fault you’re an incompetent loser! You’re an embarrassment to all Shadowmen!” Now Song Hwa got up and two guards came to her side to hold her back.

A guard pushed Dan Ho back while another pulled him from behind. The leader swished his sword around between both of them. “Yah! Sit the hell DOWN!” He screamed.

“I’m an embarrassment? I’M AN EMBARRASSMENT?” Dan Ho yelled, his voice booming like a lion’s roar. “You’re the one who stood still and let the guards catch you!”

All guards were looking at the fighting assassin and Princess. No one noticed that Hwang Rin was gone, and that Dong Su had started cutting away at his ropes too in quite an obvious fashion.

“At least I managed to get out of the way when I pushed myself into one of them.”

“What?”

Song Hwa glanced at Dong Su who gave her a nod, “Get out of the way.”  Before anyone could see what she was doing, Song Hwa rammed her body into the lead guard, taking him down. Dan Ho jumped out of the way and the guard’s head landed on a rock where he passed out.

Dan Ho jumped in the air, kicking the guard behind Song Hwa, with his hands still tied. Dong Su and freed Sam Chul and Eun Dan. Hwang Rin grabbed their swords, throwing it to Sam Chul and Dong Su.

With one sword on each hand, Hwang Rin cut down guards left and right. One, two, three, four, he counted. Five, since the leader was still passed out. Which meant five remained. Two of them were fighting Dan Ho, who managed to dodge their blows despite being tied up. Dong Su and Sam Chul made quick work of another guard. Six down.

Song Hwa was being dragged around by one guard. Hwang Rin took out a dagger from the fold of his collar and threw it right in the man’s neck. Hot red blood spilled all over the Princess as the man fell. She groaned in disgust and crawled backwards. Another guard came to fight Hwang Rin and he quickly sliced through him.

Eight.

“Dan Ho!” Hwang Rin yelled as he threw Dan Ho’s sword up in the air. Dan Ho jumped. The sword went through the ropes, cutting him free. He quickly grabbed the sword just as it landed on the ground and struck down the two guards.

Ten.

Hwang Rin sighed in relief. He was covered in blood. The rest of them had managed to stay relatively clean. Hwang Rin looked over to the Princess who was staring at everything in horror. No doubt she was reliving her wedding night. Hwang Rin went over to her.

“You, okay?”

She nodded, shaking.

“You’ll be fine, Your Highness. We’ll get you cleaned up soon.” He turned to the others, “I think we got them all,” he said.

“How many were there?” Sam Chul asked.

“Ten.” Hwang Rin said.

Sam Chul counted the bodies. "Ten. I think we should start cleaning up. The sun is about to rise."

Dan Ho looked at Hwang Rin and they both laughed in relief. Dan Ho put up his hand first. "I'm sorry, Hwang Rin-ah. About the fight."

Hwang Rin grinned and took his hand. "It's okay Dan--"

The words were cut off by a scream. The leader, who had been passed out, got up, looking wildly at the dead guards. He then turned to Dan Ho and screamed like a madman. “You’re going to die, you bastards!” He yelled.

Sam Chul pushed Dan Ho out of the way but in doing so, ended up in the guard’s path. The two went down and the guard quickly got up looking to stab Dan Ho. Unfortunately for him, Dan Ho was quick with his sword and with two swift movements, had the man bleeding from his chest and his throat. He went fell with a disgusting croaking sound.

"Whoops, must have missed that one.” Hwang Rin laughed. 

“Guys.” Sam Chul said. Their attention turned to the chubby assassin still lying on the ground.

A cut on his torso gurgled blood. The liquid spilled all over the ground at an alarming rate.

“Pressure. Put pressure on the cut!” Dan Ho ordered.

Hwang Rin was quick to Sam Chul’s side. Dong Su held him up from behind. Sam Chul yelped in pain as Hwang Rin pressed the wound. Dan Ho ripped the hem of his vest to make a bandage. Tentatively, he removed Hwang Rin’s hand and examined the cut.

“Alright, nothing to worry about. It’s just a flesh wound.”

Sam Chul’s breath was erratic. He was panicking. “It hurts, Dan Ho-ya, it hurts.” His voice broke into a sob.

“Don’t be a baby.” Dan Ho pulled up his shirt and stopped short. Hwang Rin leaned over to see what made Dan Ho pause.

“It isn’t supposed to look like that.” Hwang Rin said in a very low voice. The skin was blackening where the blade had gone through. Dark veins had spread out from the wound and were traveling up his torso. Dan Ho looked up.

“Sam Chul, did the guard do anything else to you?”

Sam Chul was starting to look a sickly green color. Cold sweat broke out on his face. “No.” He could barely speak. “Dan Ho it really hurts. I mean it.” He cried.

“It’s okay, Sam Chul-ah. Don’t worry.” Dan Ho’s face was a blank sheet, completely unreadable.

Dan Ho looked at the guard’s sword that lay beside his dead body. Most of it was covered in blood. The part that wasn’t, shone green.

It was coated with something. A poison of some kind.

“The blade's covered in—” Dan Ho began.

“Poison.” Hwang Rin completed the sentence. “Dan Ho I don’t know what kind of poison this is.” He said before Dan Ho could ask. “And we don’t have time to run experiments and find out what plant it’s from.”

Sam Chul yelped in pain. “Dan Ho it’s going up my chest! The pain’s in my chest!”

“Where’s the Princess?” Eun Dan’s voice caught everyone’s attention. They all looked up and saw that the Princess was nowhere to be found.

She had run away.

“Damn it!” Dan Ho roared. He almost got up when Hwang Rin pulled him back down.

“What do you want to do about this?” Hwang Rin asked, jerking his head to Sam Chul.

Dan Ho looked down at Sam Chul’s declining state. The chubby assassin had lost all color and had started to wheeze. His friend was dying, he needed Dan Ho to stay here. But the Princess was escaping and he needed to capture her or else the Headmaster would kill them all. Dan Ho wondered if he should send Dong Su after her but decided he needed all of them to remain.

“Let her go.” He said finally. He hated how this defeat came about, but the Princess was finally free. He could not go after her, not with Sam Chul in this condition. They needed to get Sam Chul to a doctor. The Princess was the least of their concerns. “I’ll deal with the Headmaster when we get back home.” Dan Ho said.

Hwang Rin nodded. “What do we do about—”

“I don’t know!” Dan Ho snapped. “Let’s get him to a doctor. How far away is the—”

“Three hours. Dan Ho, he won’t make it.”

“He’ll have to.” Dan Ho got up. “Let’s make a hoist so we can carry him. Have you got—”

“Wait! Don’t touch him!”

All of them turned and watched, bug eyed, as a bloody Princess ran towards them with roots and leafy twigs of some plant in her hands.

“Don’t move him, the poison will spread faster that way.” Song Hwa told them as she rushed to Sam Chul’s side.

 Dan Ho couldn’t believe what he was seeing. Part of him expected the woman before him to be an apparition. As if the Princess had died while escaping and her ghost had returned to haunt them.

“I know what kind of poison they use.” She told Hwang Rin. “Here, chew up these leaves. Make sure they’re crushed completely.” She gave the leaves to Hwang Rin who began chewing immediately. “Although I should warn you it taste like—”

“Poison.” Hwang Rin said, making a disgusted face.

“I will have to appreciate that irony later.” Song Hwa said. “You have to eat this.” She gave the roots to Sam Chul.

“I can’t.” Sam Chul’s words were all choaked. “My throat…”

“Push it down.” Song Hwa forced the root in his mouth and clamped it shut. Sam Chul struggled but Dong Su and Eun Dan held him down. They all let go once he managed to swallow.

Hwang Rin gave her the chewed up leaves and Song Hwa pushed them onto the cut. Almost immediately, the dark, veiny lines permeating from the cut began to recede. “The leaves suck the poison out.” The Princess explained. “I was a little late, though. He should have gotten this sooner. But I couldn’t find these that quickly in the dark.”

A long minute passed, the longest of Dan Ho’s life. Song Hwa took out the leaves she had applied to Sam Chul’s wound. They were all black now. She applied more chewed up leaves to suck the last of the poison out.

“Do you have anything I can stitch him up with?”

“Oh I’ll take care of that. We all know how to stitch up our cuts.” Hwang Rin said.

“You have to eat more of this.” Song Hwa offered up the last of the roots. Sam Chul chewed it easily this time. The wheezing in his breath was gone.

It was when the color returned to Sam Chul’s cheeks that Dan Ho finally spoke up. “You came back.” He was shocked at how hoarse he sounded.

Song Hwa looked up at him, surprised he was still there. He had stood so quietly that she had dismissed his presence completely. “I never left.” She told him.

Dan Ho walked away, feeling overwhelmed. “I’ll clean this place up.” He said over his back.

When Song Hwa turned to watch him leave, she was surprised to see that the sky was no longer black. It was a light, inky blue.

The sun was rising.

“I think we all could use some sleep.” Dong Su said.

“I promise not to yell for pee.” Song Hwa said, smiling genuinely for the first time in a long time.

Chapter Text

Things felt calmer now that the assassins trusted she wouldn’t run away.

They didn’t trust her of course, but they had reached the edge of the woods and all that lay before Song Hwa was a treacherous rocky mountain she knew she couldn’t traverse on her own. Simply put, she had no choice anymore. There was no escape this time, unless she wanted the elements to give her a slow painful death.

She would rather die at the hands of the assassins. Their blows were kinder.

While the situation might have gotten better, there was still a chaos of emotions that Song Hwa had to deal with.

The worry about Sam Chul’s health, the claustrophobia of traveling with strangers and the dread of impending doom; all loomed over her like an executioner’s sword about to separate her head from her body. Her skin felt foreign, her mind was always on high alert and was starting to exhaust from the exertion, her shoulders were persistently hunched. There was a regular tremble in her hands that wouldn’t go away.

This was how it felt when she knew the end was near and her fate was about to be decided.

Song Hwa stood by the edge of a small pool of water. The surface was very still. Not even insects were causing any ripples. The sky reflected within it made it look like a shining portal to another world; like a mirror that would take Song Hwa to another world.

A soft breeze floated by, blowing Song Hwa’s loose hair. The assassins were back at the camp, making sure Sam Chul was ready for the remainder of their journey. He had recovered a bit from the poison and his wound was properly stitched up, but his condition was still bad. Song Hwa knew he needed medical assistance, one only a physician could provide.

This was not a problem, as the assassins claimed there were good doctors at their school. The school they were about to reach now.

Song Hwa gathered that their destination was just beyond the mountains. How long that journey would take, she had no idea. Especially now that they had to carry Sam Chul, which slowed them down significantly. But calculating the amount of time they had been journeying, Song Hwa guessed that they would be there by nightfall.

Song Hwa steadied herself and focused on the lake—the stillness of the water, the sound of the trees, the cool touch of the soft wind. Song Hwa forced herself to think of nothing but these three things.

There were no bindings on her hands, no assassin watching her every move. After returning to her captors, they had agreed to let her roam free. Whether this was a good thing or a bad thing, she didn’t know.

The chaos wouldn’t settle. No matter what she did, the storm in her heart would not calm down. But then, there was a different feeling that arose suddenly and overwhelmed all others. The feeling that she wasn’t alone. Goosebumps rose on her arms and she felt the air shift, as if it was telling her that someone was there.

On instinct, she turned. She saw him standing a way behind her. Despite the contrast of his dark clothing against the greenery, he managed to appear indistinguishable, finding space among the weak shadows. Yet she could clearly seem him, the Shadowman with the cold eyes and the regal posture.

She hadn’t realized it before, but the way he stood and walked carried with it a sort of proud swagger that she had seen on many noblemen and royalty, including her father. Kings had a different way of walking and so did Dan Ho. He moved as if nothing in the world save his own will could move him. A strange confidence of a man who had no master.

“You’re spying on me?” She asked as he came closer.

“You expect me to leave you on your own?” His voice made her shiver. Or perhaps it was the wind. She couldn’t tell.

“I’m not going to run.” She informed.

Dan Ho came and stood right beside her, looking out onto the lake. “Wouldn’t matter if you did. No matter how fast you run or where you hide, I will always find you.”

She knew his words were a threat. But they didn’t sound like it. It sounded more like a promise. She looked away.

They stood silently, not saying or doing anything. His presence made her feel oddly safe. As if nothing could touch her right now. Song Hwa knew it wasn’t right to feel this way, but she attributed it to the many times Dan Ho had saved her, despite him having selfish reasons for doing so.

“I need to know what’s going to happen when we get to where we are going.” What she meant was that she needed to know if this was her last day.

“I am going to speak to the Headmaster on your behalf. You have a contract, so there is a high chance we will have to honor it.”

Song Hwa scoffed. “We both know that piece of paper means nothing.” With her brief experiences in court, Song Hwa had seen many promises be broken or twisted to exploit people. She knew never to trust any man on his word.

As if reading her mind, Dan Ho said, “I do not know what kind of men you have spent your life with, Princess, but Shadowmen honor their commitments. If the Headmaster decides to break the contract, then not only you will die, but I will too, for making such an impossible promise.”

This was news to Song Hwa. “I have heard you are the Headmaster’s favorite. I doubt she would slay you so easily.”

“Then that only makes it more likely that she will let you live.” Dan Ho looked at her sideways, just as she did the same.

The Princess knew not to trust the words of an assassin, but quite unexpectedly, she felt relief. As if the pressure building inside her had found some release. Her shoulders relaxed, her hands stopped trembling, it felt similar to the thaw she felt when she got warm after freezing in the cold.

They stood quietly again as Song Hwa gathered her thoughts. Dan Ho it appeared had nothing to say to her. But he still stood there and the silence made Song Hwa feel awkward. She felt like she had to fill in the gap.

“He’s not doing well,” she said, referring to Sam Chul.

“We’re almost there. The masters at the school will know what to do.”

Song Hwa nodded.

Another pause. She had nothing else to talk to the man about, she realized. Perhaps it was better not to say anything, lest she give something away that would come back to haunt her.

From the corner of her eye, Song Hwa saw Dan Ho shift uncomfortably. The gesture was slight, almost imperceptible, but she still caught it.

“You’re not here just to keep me company. You have something to ask.”

Dan Ho cleared his throat, “You still haven’t told us why you came back.”

Song Hwa sighed, “I don’t know why I came back either,” she said truthfully. “But since we’re almost done… I want to see it through to the end.”

Dan Ho considered this. “Princess… I hope you’re not expecting anything from Sam Chul.”

Song Hwa raised her brows in question.

“I mean… me and my guild… we’re not your friends. I hope you realize that.”

Song Hwa knew what he meant. Getting attached to any one of them was unwise. “I know, Park Dan Ho.”

“My name has no Park in it.” He was quick to correct.

“I know. Force of habit.” Song Hwa shrugged as if she didn’t care.

The conversation died then. Song Hwa expected Dan Ho to leave but he remained. The silence stretched out uncomfortably and Song Hwa decided she would ignore him. She closed her eyes, breathing in the crisp air. The capital didn’t have fresh air like this. And with the threat of death hanging over her, Song Hwa found a new appreciation for such small blessings.

With her eyes shut, Song Hwa noticed that she didn’t feel Dan Ho’s presence beside her. She didn’t hear the soft rhythm of a person’s breathing nor any break in the wind as it blew past him. Even her sixth sense didn’t pick up his presence. Yet when she looked to her right, there he was. All tall and lean and unapproachable. Her eyes outlined him from head to toe. He really was very regal.

Song Hwa quickly looked away, surprised at herself for having stared at him so intently and unabashedly. She was saved from introspection when Dan Ho suddenly spoke.

“I have another question.” Dan Ho said.

“Good for you.”

“I want you to tell me one thing.”

“Are you going to ask it already or am I supposed to guess?”

Dan Ho’s mouth became a hard line. “You said something strange to me when we were at the palace.”

“I’ve said a lot of strange things to you at the palace. You’re going to have to be more specific.”

“Must you be so annoying?”

“I don’t know. Must you be so… so…” Song Hwa couldn’t think of anything.

Dan Ho exhaled. “You said something about me not showing my face in front of the King.” Dan Ho paused, as if waiting for Song Hwa to respond.

“I’m still waiting for the question.”

Dan Ho sucked in his breath in frustration, stepping closer. Song Hwa gulped but tried to mask the gesture.

“Why did you tell me that?”

“Tell you what?”

“Princess!”

“Alright. Alright.” Song Hwa bit the inside of her cheek to keep from smiling. “You’re asking me why I told you not to appear before my father. The answer is simple, my father is always recruiting the people around me to do his bidding, and I didn’t want him to notice you. Otherwise, he would have tried to rope you in his schemes against me. There. That’s it.”

Dan Ho eyed her. “No, that’s not it. You said something specifically about my face.”

Song Hwa tilted her head, “Did I now?”

Dan Ho hissed. The Princess could see that she was getting on his nerves. He stepped closer in an act of intimidation. But all it did was make her aware of the nearness between them. “You said I reminded you of someone. Someone you once knew. You said my face was unforgettable.”

“Well, it is.” Song Hwa said without hesitation. “Although Hwang Rin’s face is handsomer.”

Dan Ho blinked, unable to open his mouth because the only words that would come out were curses.

Song Hwa saw she had pushed him to the limit and relented. “I had mistaken you for someone else.” She admitted.

“Who?”

“I do not have a name, nor a description for this person. But I had thought you were someone my father had once wronged. The circumstances of you coming into the palace were suspicious from the start. It is unorthodox that my brother suddenly hired a guard from an unknown family, and one who was so skilled yet had never trained inside the palace before. I knew you were up to something… I had thought you were there for revenge.”

This vague answer made Dan Ho only more confused. “Who would want revenge against the King?”

“Who wouldn’t? My father has wronged many people to get to where he is. I’m surprised someone has sent assassins after me instead of him.” She smiled ruefully.

“Who was it? Who did you think I was?”

Song Hwa shook her head. “It was a mistake, Park Dan Ho.”

“My name isn’t—”

“I know, I know.” Song Hwa walked away to avoid saying anything else.

“If you thought I was someone out for revenge,” Dan Ho called after her, “why didn’t you have me arrested?” Dan Ho was referring to the multiple times he had crossed the line with her, yet she had ignored it.

“Perhaps I wanted you to succeed.” She answered over her back. “Perhaps I felt guilty,” this she said to herself. Song Hwa had thought herself so smart for thinking that Dan Ho had been the long lost son of the previous King. She had even hoped that Queen Yoo would be the one to find him out, thus removing him as a problem for Song Hwa.

How foolish she felt now, knowing that Dan Ho was no lost prince but just a simple assassin.

Song Hwa turned. Dan Ho was still standing by the lake, staring at the water. The taut spine, the self-assured confidence in his shoulders and the delicate tilt of his head made her reconsider her evaluation. Dan Ho might be just an assassin. But he sure stood tall like a King.

Almost as if royalty was in his blood.

~~~~~~~

Everyone was busy packing up. Dong Su was destroying all evidence of their presence, burning anything they could discard in the fire. The ashes would then be buried underneath a tree, and it would appear like the place had never been disturbed by any person.

Eun Dan and Hwang Rin were packing up the things they would be taking back with them to the school. Dan Ho was absent, gone to collect something Song Hwa was not privy to.

She was with Sam Chul. The assassin lay on a makeshift bed that doubled as a hoist that the assassins used to carry him around. He came in and out of consciousness, gasping every time he remembered where he was and why his sides were hurting so much.

“Gah!” Sam Chul woke again, holding on to the cut.

“Don’t touch it! You’ll break the stitches.” Song Hwa warned, leaning over him.

Sam Chul was starting to get pale again. Song Hwa chewed up some more leaves and applied it to the cut. The poison was nearly out but the wound was still infected. The poison had done a bit of damage while it had been in his veins. Song Hwa cleaned up the cut and ripped up a strip from one of her discarded dressed to cover Sam Chul up.

“Thank you for helping me, Princess Song Hwa.” Sam Chul said for the millionth time.

Song Hwa smiled. “Don’t worry about it.”

“I’ve ruined your chances of running away, haven’t I?” He said guiltily. “If it weren’t for me…”

“I doubt Park Dan Ho would have let me go.” Song Hwa let out an airy laugh. Sam Chul joined her with a chuckle but winced when the movement pinched his cut. “Lie still.” Song Hwa said. “Try to get some more sleep. I think we’ll be moving forward soon.”

“I’ve slept so much already,” Sam Chul grumbled. “I don’t want to sleep anymore.” This was the reality of a patient tied to a bed; it wasn’t the pain or the injury that was the problem. It was the boredom.

Song Hwa patted his hand understandingly, “Talk to me then. Tell me something. Something good.”

Sam Chul thought about it, “My noona used to be able to talk to birds.”

“Pfft!” Song Hwa laughed in surprise, “she did?”

“She really could! She could whistle just like a bird! Sometimes the swallows would circle around her just to listen to her sing in their language.”

“What did she say to them then?”

“I don’t know. Maybe she was telling them my secrets.” Sam Chul shook again with laughter and promptly winced. Song Hwa winced with him.

“Don’t worry now. We’re almost to your school. Dan Ho assures me you’ll get the best care.”

Sam Chul nodded but said nothing.

“In case I don’t get a chance to say this later on... thank you.” Song Hwa bit her lip.

“What for?”

“This wasn’t the easiest of times; being kidnapped and having a contract out for my head. A part of me still wonders whether this is all just a nightmare. But, having you take care of me was a rare comfort. I am really grateful to you for that.” Song Hwa looked at him earnestly.

Sam Chul clasped her hand weakly. “I apologize, Princess, for putting you through this ordeal. But I am confident that Dan Ho will be able to resolve things with the Headmaster. Don’t worry, this nightmare will be over soon.”

Song Hwa doubted this claim but said nothing. “Sam Chul, I want to gift you something. If in case I manage to live, and if in case I return to the palace. I will give you the title of Kim.”

“Princess…” Sam Chul’s eyes widened in surprise. Receiving a last name from royalty was a great honor bestowed upon only the noblest and bravest. “I—I don’t think I have done anything to deserve that.”

“But you have. You may not think it, Sam Chul-ah. But I consider you a friend. Will you not accept it? I believe the name Kim will suit you.”

Sam Chul’s eyes filled up with tears, but he blinked them away. “I will accept, my Princess.”

Song Hwa squeezed his hand. Looking down, she saw the cloth still wrapped around her wrists. She unwound the wrapping, revealing scabbed skin that had just about healed.

“You didn’t scar, did you?” Sam Chul asked.

“No. I did not scar.” Song Hwa said.

“Good. Dan Ho was worried you would scar. Princesses aren’t supposed to have scars, he said.”

“What do you mean?”

“Dan Ho… he had asked me to make sure the ropes didn’t cut you. You should thank him too, since you’re thanking me.”

This was news to Song Hwa. “Did Dan Ho ask you to do anything else?”

Sam Chul never got to answer Song Hwa as Dong Su arrived just then, “Guys! Dan Ho is back! We have to start moving now or we’ll never reach before dark.”

Eun Dan and Hwang Rin appeared from one side while Dan Ho came over from the other. Hwang Rin and Dong Su exchanged a nod, indicating that it was time to move.

However, Dan Ho was still. "Can Sam Chul wait one more day?" He suddenly asked.

Everyone looked at each other.

"I guess..." Dong Su said a little unsurely.

Dan Ho nodded, as if he had made a decision, “I’m going to go ahead with the Princess. I want you all to arrive a day after me.”

Everyone was silent as they absorbed this change of plans.

“Why?” Dong Su asked.

Hwang Rin nodded, as if he understood. “I agree. You should arrive first. That will give you ample time to negotiate.”

“Well he can discuss the Princess with all of us there, can’t he?” argued Dong Su. He had been waiting for a long time to return home and felt too impatient to wait any more.

“Not for the Princess. For Sam Chul.” Dan Ho elaborated.

“Negotiate what?” Eun Dan asked.

The three assassins looked at each other.

“You guys are talking about my punishment, aren’t you?” Sam Chul asked weakly.

“Punishment?” Eun Dan and Song Hwa asked together.

Hwang Rin turned to Eun Dan, “Sam Chul hasn’t graduated yet.”

Eun Dan laughed, “That’s absurd! There’s no way he could do that.” She looked at Sam Chul and her smile faded. “Sam Chul-ah, tell me they’ve got it wrong.”

Song Hwa didn’t understand what they were talking about. But from the look of Sam Chul’s face, she could tell it was something serious.

“We can’t take him back,” Eun Dan said, looking between the men. “Headmaster will behead him!”

“It’s not like we have a choice.” Dong Su said, eyeing Sam Chul’s wound.

Dan Ho didn't wait for any further discussion, “I have to get going now if I want to make it by tonight. You four will arrive tomorrow. Hwang Rin, you’re in charge.”

Dan Ho came over and attempted to pull Song Hwa up by her arm. “I’m not leaving Sam Chul.” She said obstinately, pulling her arm back and refusing to get up.

“You don’t have a choice.”

“I’m not leaving him.”

Dan Ho glared at her as he usually did when she got on his nerves, “He’ll be fine. We have to go now.”

“I don’t care. Either you take him with us... or you go on ahead alone.”

Dan Ho looked to the others in desperation. The rest of them knew that if Dan Ho couldn’t make Song Hwa do something then no one could.

“Fine. Stay, then.” Dan Ho gave in. From the inner folds of his sleeve, he produced something carefully wrapped in cloth.

“Chew on this while I’m gone. We won’t be getting any food till we reach the school so this is all you will have for a while.” He sat down on his knees. “Eat it and give some to Sam Chul too.”

Song Hwa blinked forty times at such a quick change in attitude. Perhaps the time crunch was making Dan Ho more bearable. She unwrapped the cloth and found a delicious looking root inside.

“I had to search high and low for this,” Dan Ho called back as he walked away. “Don’t waste it.”

He was gone just for this? Song Hwa took a miniscule bite and found the thing to be acceptable. She gave some to Sam Chul.

“What was that about you getting punished?” She asked as she chewed.

Sam Chul avoided her gaze, “The assassins can’t start working till we graduate. The school trains us and then there’s a test. Those who pass can leave. Those who can’t, can never leave.”

Song Hwa nodded as she chewed on the root. It wasn’t that tasty but somehow it made her feel relaxed. “And you didn’t pass. Is that truly something punishable by death?”

“It is to the Headmaster.”

“This person you all keep talking about,” Song Hwa said, lying down besides Sam Chul, “are they really that scary?”

“Headmaster is the most terrifying person you will ever meet, Princess.” Sam Chul said, his voice getting slower. Or was it that Song Hwa was registering his words late. Feeling a bit sluggish, Song Hwa decided to rest her eyes.

Just five minutes, she told herself.

Next thing she knew, she was off to sleep. Sam Chul followed a few seconds later.

She felt the ground shift beneath her. The whole world was swinging, and she was floating in air. Strong arms embraced her. She leaned into whoever was carrying her.

“You shouldn’t have given her the whole thing.” Song Hwa heard Hwang Rin say. “They’re out like a light.”

“You guys carry Sam Chul. I’m going ahead.” That demon like voice had to be Dan Ho’s. Song Hwa felt her head swing around and then suddenly, she was sitting up right.

The motion jerked her awake but her eyes still felt heavy. She looked down at the straps that held her onto a horse and felt the warmth of someone saddling in behind her.

In the next blink, she was flying. Trees whizzed past her, the wind blew in her face and made her eyes water.

“You… bastard. Y… drugged me.” Her words came out slurred. She felt the shaking of a chest on her back. Dan Ho was laughing.

“Forgive me, Princess. But I really didn’t have time to argue with you.”

“Bastard.”

“Sleep now. We’ll be there soon.”

“Don’t wanna.”

“You have to. The entrance to the school is a secret.” Song Hwa felt Dan Ho push her head back in an effort to get her to sleep.

“Why?” Her response came with a lag.

“To keep outsiders out.”

Song Hwa chuckled, “Who am I gonna tell? I’ll be dead anyway.”

“I’m hoping it doesn’t come to that.” Song Hwa wasn’t sure whether she actually heard him correctly or dreamt it.

Song Hwa fell asleep. She dreamt the same dream of someone running towards her with a large, bloody sword. When she jerked awake, it was dark. Thinking she was back at the came, she yelled, “I have to pee!” It was almost instinctive now, the affinity to wake up the assassins from their slumber. However, to her surprise, there were no assassins nor any campt. She was still a few feet above the ground which was moving past her.

It was pitch black and Song Hwa’s voice echoed off of something. It took her a full minute to realize they were riding through a tunnel.

“You only say you have to pee to ruin our sleep don’t you?” Dan Ho’s voice in the cave sounded ominous, though his tone was soft.

Song Hwa giggled, still delirious. “How’d you know?”

“Same way I know you ate all our food and threw tantrums just to make us miserable.”

The Princess leaned back, comforted by the fact that she wasn’t completely alone in this horrible darkness. “Are we there yet?”

“Almost. Go to sleep.”

“I can’t.”

“Why not.”

“That man will be back to kill me.”

“What man?”

“I don’t see his face. But he’s always there when I close my eyes. He’s going to kill me.”

Dan Ho was silent for a while. “You’re talking about a nightmare.” He said and realized at the same time.

Song Hwa nodded, her head feeling heavy.

“Don’t worry about that man. I’ll fight him if he comes closer.”

“Promise?”

“Promise. Sleep.”

The man did not bother her in her dreams this time. Instead, Song Hwa found herself in her mother’s chambers, when she had been the Queen. Song Hwa was sitting in the middle of the bed, dressed in all red. Waiting for a husband who would never come.

The curtains of the bed post were all drawn around her. She couldn’t see beyond the billowing sheets. But Song Hwa wasn’t alone in the room. Someone was behind her. A woman. Someone Song Hwa felt she recognized, even though she couldn’t turn around to see who it was. The woman placed a hand on her shoulder. Song Hwa saw she wore a jade ring, something only a Queen would wear.

But the hand was not her mother’s. This was someone else.

“I don’t have much time. So, listen carefully. Do not trust that woman, Princess Song Hwa. She may have once been a brave warrior, but that part of her has long since died. She is nothing but a scorpion. She will poison you.”

“Who will?”

“You must tell him what you know. You’re the only one who does.”

Song Hwa gasped as she woke. Her head hurt like dozen tiny hammers were pounding nails into her skull. She realized she wasn’t moving anymore. This was followed by the observation that she wasn’t even outside. She was in a room, lit by a small lantern placed on a table beside bed.

For a second, Song Hwa wondered whether she had returned home. Whether her ordeals truly had been just a nightmare.

Taking the lantern, she ventured outside. The door to her room was one of many in a long, empty corridor. The stone used in the walls appeared expensive and the carvings in the wooden doors was ornate and lavish.

But it was not the palace. This was some place foreign.

There seemed to be no sign of life about. Everywhere it was dark. Song Hwa deduced that it was nighttime. Quietly, she walked in once direction, hoping it would lead outside. The corridor simply led to another corridor, which led to another. Then finally, she reached the entrance to what looked like a large mess hall. Empty tables were placed at uniform distances. Sitting cushions were piled up on the side. Song Hwa ventured beyond the dining hall and found herself in the kitchens.

A chilling shiver went down her spine. The place seemed abandoned, though the lack of dust or cobwebs told her the place was in use. Song Hwa wondered if she was still dreaming.

“Hello?” She called out into the darkness. Her voice bounced off of the pots and pans. “Anyone here?”

No one responded. Song Hwa tracked her way back to the room she had been in. As she went inside, she saw a small movement from the corner of her eye.

Jumping in fright, she turned and found herself facing a figure shrouded in darkness, except for their eyes which she could clearly see in the light of the lantern.

Song Hwa dropped the lantern, but the figure swiftly caught it. “Where were you? I thought you had run away.” Said a voice from behind the darkness covering the figure’s face.

When the man removed the cloth from his face, Song Hwa realized that it wasn’t darkness that covered the man, it was the black uniform of the Shadowmen.

“Who are you?” Song Hwa asked, her hand over her wildly beating heart.

“I’m supposed to keep an eye on you till you wake. I guess you’re awake now so I can take you to the Headmaster.”

Song Hwa was confused. “Huh?” was all she could manage to say.

“You wanna eat something before we go?” The man asked.

Song Hwa felt that even this query was foreign. Perhaps her brain had lost its ability to comprehend words.

“Dan Ho said you might be hungry.”

Dan Ho. Finally, something Song Hwa recognized. “Where is Dan Ho?”

“With the Headmaster. She’s asked for you, but Dan Ho has requested that you be allowed to rest. Which is crazy. Asking Headmaster for anything. But it makes sense given he’s her favorite.”

None of those words made any sense to Song Hwa.

“Take me to Dan Ho. I want to go to Park Dan Ho.”

“Park Dan Ho?” The man laughed. “Lady, we’re not noblemen.”

For some reason, this was the thing that triggered everything into place. She was at the assassin school. Dan Ho had tricked her into eating a sleeping root and had taken her to the school ahead of everyone else.

“Has anyone besides Dan Ho arrived?” Song Hwa asked.

“No, just you and our golden Sunbae. You ready to go now?” The Shadowman said impatiently.

Song Hwa nodded. There was no point in waiting. Plus, she was anxious in the presence of an assassin she wasn’t familiar with. Odd as it seemed, Song Hwa wished she was near Dan Ho.

The assassin took her through a labyrinth of corridors before they came to an open walkway on the outside. Song Hwa had been right about the time. It was the dead of the night. The sky was dark with a sprinkle of stars here and there.

Song Hwa figured everyone in the school was sleeping. The only people awake were herself and the few Shadowmen she managed to spot, guarding the place. She suspected there were many more guards hiding in the shadows.

“I feel like I should warn you, the Headmaster isn’t someone to take lightly,” the Shadowman slowed down as he led Song Hwa up a flight of stairs.

They went up two floors and all the while the Shadowman kept talking, “Be polite. Always bow. Don’t speak out of turn. She once cut someone’s tongue off for being rude. And if she gets angry, just apologize and pray.”

Song Hwa wondered if the man knew she was a princess. She figured it best not to tell him if he didn’t.

“Here we are.” The Shadowman stopped in front of a door. This corridor was better lit than the rest of the grounds. Song Hwa hadn’t been able to see much of it in the dark, but she could tell this place was huge.

“Are you going to go in with me?”

“No one goes in unless invited. I wasn’t invited. Just instructed to take you here.” He knocked on the door and announced, “Master, I have our guest for you. Shall I bring her in?”

“Yes.” Came the muffled response.

Song Hwa noted the voice. Female. Dignified and commanding. This she got from a single syllable.

The door opened into a well-lit room. The first thing Song Hwa saw was Dan Ho, sitting in a chair.

Something was different about him. He appeared more stony than usual, more in control. His face was unreadable, his posture inscrutable. He glanced at Song Hwa uninterestedly then went back to facing the Headmaster.

The second thing Song Hwa noticed were all the papers and the books that nearly spilled out of every corner and crevice. Towers of books rose upward from the floor, almost touching the roof. And between them, stacks of papers leaked out. The entirety of the wall that faced her was covered in papers: notices and maps—so many maps—and sketches of men and scriptures and small scribbles. The desk that was placed in front of said wall was full of scrolls and papers. Only the center had been cleared away. Only a single piece of paper was placed in that small clearing.

Song Hwa’s contract.

The third thing Song Hwa noticed was the woman sitting behind the desk, silently watching her with a half-smile. She was leaning back leisurely in a large chair, waiting for Song Hwa to absorb her surroundings. Her hair was cut short and she wore a green outfit that was cut differently, more like a man’s than a woman’s. Her build was strong, her shoulders broader than that of any woman’s. Her face was striking, with full lips, sharp cheek bones and intelligent eyes. Despite many wrinkles on her face, she didn’t look a day over forty.

Song Hwa knew for a fact that the woman was above fifty. And she was sure of this because she recognized the woman.

It was a face she had seen in her books of legends and fairytales, in sketches from the forbidden archived and even one scrolls that outlined the history of her Kingdom’s army.

The woman stood up from her place. Despite her impressive height, she moved soundlessly like the other Shadowmen.

“Princess Song Hwa. Dan Ho has told me a lot about you.” The woman said.

In all her life, Song Hwa had never once thought she would come face to face with an actual folk tale. “You… I always thought you were dead.” She blurted out. Song Hwa could feel Dan Ho’s discomfort from this distance, though when she glanced at him, he appeared unconcerned.

The woman laughed. “Many believe I do.”

“I grew up hearing stories about you. You were my idol.”

The woman’s face softened, “I doubt Deok Hwa appreciated that.”

It took a second for Song Hwa to recognize her father’s name. No one dared utter it so casually. But given this woman’s history with the King, Song Hwa wasn’t surprised.

“No, he did not.”

“As you can see, Your Highness. I am alive and well. Though I am surprised to have been recognized. I believe I am too old now to match the descriptions of me in history books. If I indeed still exist there.” The woman sat back down and gestured Song Hwa to do the same.

“In some of them.” Song Hwa confirmed, obediently taking the seat beside Dan Ho.

“And your father lets you read these books?”

“What my father doesn’t know won’t hurt him.” Song Hwa let slip. It was something she had always thought but never said aloud before this. She was surprised at her own candor. But more accurately, it was the aftereffects of the root that were making her so open.

The woman smiled. “You didn’t tell me she was smart.” She said to Dan Ho. “I like her.”

Song Hwa felt like this should have been a good thing. But it made her sick all the same.

“Would you like to eat something before we discuss your situation? I want you to have your wits about you before we do anything.” Without waiting for Song Hwa to answer, the woman said, “Dan Ho, wake up the cook to have something made for the Princess.”

Obediently, Dan Ho got up and bowed. Without a word, he went out, leaving Song Hwa alone with the Headmaster.

Song Hwa looked at the woman, not knowing what to say. The woman smiled back, watching her with unblinking eyes. There was something about her that lulled Song Hwa’s suspicions to sleep. Song Hwa felt like she could trust the woman. Like she was someone who could be reasoned with.

“Am I going to die?” Song Hwa asked when the silence got too much for her.

“Everyone dies in the end, you are no different Princess. Power may fool men into believing that they are gods. But no man is a god. And all men die.”

“And women are left to clean up the mess.” Song Hwa said.

The Headmaster tilted her head back, smiling. “You have a lot of your father in you. I don’t know whether that is good or bad.”

“Is it enough to keep me alive?”

The Headmaster considered. On the table, beside the contract that Dan Ho had scribbled up in a hurry was the jewelry Song Hwa had given as form of payment.

“I have had Dan Ho with me since he was five. He is my best and brightest, the earliest graduate we have ever had. Did he tell you he had started working when he was fourteen?”

Song Hwa shook her head.

“Smartest orphan I ever saved. Pride of my eyes, he is. But never in all these years has he vouched for someone he was sent to kill.” The woman was silent for a while. “Alright, I’ve decided. You are to stay here for three days. After that I shall determine what to do with you. No one here will harm you till then.”

This wasn’t good enough for Song Hwa, who wanted a decision now. She was tired of living in uncertainty about her fate. But she remembered the other Shadowman’s advice and chose not to voice her worries.

The Headmaster appeared harmless, almost friendly. And this was the thing that was raising alarms in Song Hwa’s mind.  In her experience, people rarely appeared as their true selves. And someone prone to cut tongues could hardly be argued with. Song Hwa simply nodded in agreement. She would take this to figure out what her next step was.

“Go now. There will be someone outside to guide you to the kitchens. Eat. Clean yourself up, I will provide the clothes. Rest. We shall talk when you look less gaunt and tortured.”

Song Hwa got up in a daze. She had just met the Headmaster of the Shadowmen. She was in the fabled in the assassin school. She was standing in front of a woman who had changed the course of history forever.

“Something the matter?” The Headmaster asked when Song Hwa didn’t leave.

“I can’t believe this is happening.”

“Believe it. It is happening.”

“How… how are you here?”

The Headmaster smiled. “All good things to those who wait. Rest, and the answers will come.”

Song Hwa walked up to the door and was just about to slide it open when she paused. “How shall I address you?” She asked. “I know you as someone else, but the Shadowmen all call you Headmaster.”

The Headmaster considered, “Address me however you prefer, Princess.” The woman smiled widely. Sharp teeth glittered in the light. Teeth that knew how to bite ferociously.

Song Hwa nodded and opened the door.

“Good night, Princess Song Hwa.” The woman called out to her in almost a motherly fashion.

“Good night… General Ji Ahn.”

END OF PART 2

Chapter Text

PART 3

For a while now, Dan Ho had this peculiar feeling. A small, feeling that lay beneath the surface, never really coming up but always there, constantly riding the pulse of his heart. Like his body had already processed something that his mind was yet to discover.

This feeling he had been carrying with him since the night the Prince had raided their brothel. He had initially chalked it up to worry or fear; the two feelings he was too proud to associate himself with. And when he had discovered the dead bodies of the women in the abandoned fort, he had decided it was grief.

But no, this wasn’t grief, and this wasn’t fear either. It was something he didn’t quite know what to label. But it was always there, like a weight in his chest or a parasite sucking on his energy.

He had thought that returning to the school—to home—would put him at ease. It always did before. But no, even as he sat in the Headmaster’s office, a place he considered his refuge from the world, that feeling remained.

The Headmaster, a tall, statuesque woman of over fifty, sat in her usual seat, behind the sea of papers on her desk. Tonight, this sea had been parted in honor of the unusual piece of paper that lay before her.

“I don’t even know where to begin with you,” she remarked coldly. Dan Ho’s hand trembled slightly even though he knew her words were merely for show. She liked to assert her authority every now and then, though he didn’t see any need for it. He would always be loyal to her. And the fear she struck in him—in all her students—was no match for the admiration he felt for her. In almost every essence, she was the only guardian Dan Ho had ever known.

Which was why his present fear was less about angering her and more about disappointing her.

Tentatively, Dan Ho began with the smallest problem first. He began with Sam Chul. As expected, the Headmaster had been looking for the runaway and was quite ready to behead the trainee.

“This is why I don’t take in teenagers!” The woman had pushed her hair back in frustration. “They never turn out right.” She said, as if she was talking about a plant and not a person.

“Sam Chul can still work, with the right training. I believe under my tutelage—”

“Are you actually vouching for him? Dan Ho, I expected more from you.”

The words stabbed Dan Ho like a hot blade. He hated that he was unable to meet the Headmaster’s expectations.

“Don’t look so sullen.” The woman remarked, seeing the despair seep through Dan Ho’s guarded face. “Fine, tell me why you are willing to vouch for that idiot.” Her voice was light and sweet, as it was with most women. But it carried in it a certain currant that was scarier than Dan Ho’s own demon voice. It lured you in and trapped you. Dan Ho almost wanted to flee.

Sam Chul, you owe me your life! Dan Ho thought vengefully as he carefully put forth his argument to save Sam Chul’s life. Never before had Dan Ho ever negated the Headmaster’s opinion. Never before had he exaggerated the truth to her.

Yet for an assassin he had barely known, Dan Ho did both.

He presented a carefully constructed argument about Sam Chul’s various virtues and the skills that made him a good assassin. In truth, Dan Ho considered Sam Chul unfit for this line of work. He thought the man was too soft and too reluctant to kill. But it was exactly this trait that prompted Dan Ho to defend him. The lovable fool could not possibly survive on his own as a Shadowman. Dan Ho knew he had to protect him.

“If I am put in charge of—”

“Why do you keep saying that you’ll be the one to complete his training? Are you insinuating that our teachers are inadequate?” The Headmaster interrupted, raising a brow.

Shit, Dan Ho hoped he hadn’t messed up by saying the wrong thing. He had to watch his words carefully. The woman was always twenty steps ahead of everyone. It was the trait he admired most about his teacher.

He began, “Sam Chul is a special case. I feel as if—”

“If he is so special that he does not fit within our standards, then we don’t need him.”

“He has particular skills that I believe may be of value.” Dan Ho tried to hide the desperation in his voice. It didn’t help that he was still exhausted and hungry from their journey. Dan Ho almost felt like falling to the floor, but through sheer will, he kept his wits about him.

“Oh really? He has skills? Is that why he failed to pass all these years?”

Dan Ho paused, “He managed to keep the Princess from escaping.” This was true. Song Hwa only stayed because of him. Dan Ho felt that he needn’t elaborate exactly on how Sam Chul achieved this. “He is the reason I was able to bring the Princess here, today.”

“Yes, that is another matter we must discuss.” The Headmaster tapped the contract that lay on her desk.

“Of course.” Dan Ho bowed his head. “Give me a chance to prove to you, Headmaster, that Sam Chul can be a good asset to our guild. Please.”

The Headmaster was silent while she considered her request. Her chin was tilted upwards, lips pursed in thought.

“Tell me of this other matter first. I shall decide on Sam Chul afterwards. I suppose you had thought of bringing him a day later, after you had discussed the affair with me?”

Dan Ho didn’t bother denying it. He nodded firmly.

“Very well. I’ll consider your request. For now, this contract.”

Dan Ho took in a shaky breath as he began, starting from when the Prince had raided their brothel and ending all the way to his arrival at the school. He disclosed everything he thought relevant, leaving out only the useless parts such as the fight over Eun Dan and her pink pin, the times Sam Chul was kind to Song Hwa and especially the part where she came back to save Sam Chul. Revealing about Song Hwa and Sam Chul’s friendship would be like guaranteeing his death sentence.

No, Dan Ho worked around some of the tricky parts of the story. He told the Headmaster about how Song Hwa kept them up at night and ate most of their food to make them miserable. He told her in vague terms about how she got them to fight with each other and he only revealed that Sam Chul had managed to keep her obedient when they had been attacked by the guards.

At this point, Dan Ho felt compelled to lower his head in shame; partly due to the small lies he had told and partly because of the many times the Princess had bested him. It was only when he was listing down the accounts of her escapes that he realized just how close she had gotten to getting away.

“I have no right to ask your forgiveness, Master.” Dan Ho said respectfully. “But I am duly apologetic. The situation… the Princess… I have no excuses.” His head lowered even further.

“Rise.” The Headmaster commanded. She regarded not him, as he was expecting, but the piece of paper on her desk. This disappointed him but he preferred that she bare her frustration out on the contract. Curiously, she didn’t seem frustrated. Her eyes felt busy. As if her mind was calculating something.

“Why give her the handkerchief?” She suddenly asked.

“Huh?”

“You mentioned in your time at the palace, you comforted her. Why?”

“I felt it would be easier to get to her if she trusted me,” Dan Ho replied.

The Headmaster was silent once more as she turned over something in her head. “What is your opinion on the Princess?”

Dan Ho blinked. Out of all of the things he had expected the Headmaster to ask, this question was not one of them. “I, uh… I don’t know.”

“You don’t know?” The Headmaster said critically.

“She… she appears rude, cunning, even mean.”

“But you admire her.” It wasn’t a question but an observation.

Dan Ho paused before answering, “I see her as a threat.”

The Headmaster’s brows shot up, “Oh? I’ve never heard you say that before. A little girl proved too much for you? Or was did your morals of never hurting women that make you see her as a threat?”

Dan Ho had to take a minute of introspection. “I don’t see her as a woman. I do see her as an opponent though,” Dan Ho said with a look of distaste. It was true, Dan Ho always saw the Princess as a challenging person; hard to deal with, harder to be in company of. It was getting to the point that Dan Ho now wished to put the Princess behind him and move on. The less he had to do with her, the better.

“She must be something then, if you see her as a rival.”

Dan Ho’s lips shrunk, “She is unafraid.” And I hate her for it, his tone implied.

The Headmaster’s wide mouth curled at the ends, “Of you, you mean.”

Clenching his jaw, Dan Ho nodded.

“You don’t like that?”

“It is irksome.”

The Headmaster smiled fully, baring sharp, shiny white teeth. “You are just like me. People fear me just as they do you, and it is irksome when you discover someone who isn’t afraid.” The Headmster nodded in approval. “I am disappointed though,” she said and immediately, Dan Ho’s heart fell into a deep pit.

“Why, Master?”

Dan Ho never got the answer. The door opened to reveal the woman herself, Princess Song Hwa, standing there in a daze. Dan Ho masked all emotions from his face, revealing nothing but cold indifference.

The Headmaster welcomed the Princess, “Princess Song Hwa. Dan Ho has told me a lot about you.”

To Dan ho’s surprise, Song Hwa looked like she had seen a ghost. “You… I always thought you were dead.”

Curiously, Dan Ho looked to the Headmaster for some clarity. Did the Princess know his Headmaster? How? Why? When?

The Headmaster had ignored Dan Ho and instead laughed, “Many believe I am.”

“I grew up hearing stories about you. You were my idol.” Song Hwa said.

Dan Ho didn’t know what to make of it, but suddenly he felt a ferocious jealously. A possessiveness. The Headmaster had always been his Master. No way would she associate with someone so rude and pretentious.

But to his horror, the Headmaster’s face did something strange. She almost looked… kind. “I doubt Deok Hwa appreciated that.”

Who’s that? Dan Ho wondered.

“No, he did not.”

“As you can see, Your Highness. I am alive and well. Though I am surprised to have been recognized. I believe I am too old now to match the descriptions of me in history books. If I indeed still exist there.”

“In some of them.”

“And your father lets you read these books?”

“What my father doesn’t know won’t hurt him.”

Dan Ho didn’t care much for this conversation that was making little to no sense to him. He did care that the Headmaster was suddenly smiling, and not in the cold and reserved manner like she usually did.

“You didn’t tell me she was smart.” She said to Dan Ho. “I like her.”

Dan Ho’s mouth shrunk again. This time he bit on the inside of his lower lip, forming a little dent on his chin.

“Would you like to eat something before we discuss your situation? I want you to have your wits about you before we do anything. Dan Ho, wake up the cook to have something made for the Princess.”

It was a useless errand. Dan Ho knew that the Headmaster simply wanted him out of the room. So he obeyed and left, passing on her command to a nearby guard so that the food could be prepared.

Lost in his thoughts, Dan Ho walking, not even noticing that he was making his way to his room.

You didn’t tell me she was smart. The Headmaster’s words echoed in his mind. Dan Ho couldn’t help but feel a little jealous and a little sour. She’s not that smart, he thought. But then couldn’t help but take back the sentiment. Even in bitterness, he couldn’t deny Song Hwa’s capabilities. He didn’t want to acknowledge them either. Especially not with the way she treated him.

He could just picture her condescending eyes staring him down, he could just hear the haughty way she called his name; Park Dan Ho as if he was below the rank of even her servants. He knew what she thought of him, he knew she considered herself superior. Dan Ho wanted nothing to do with such a woman; one with sneaky agendas and an arrogant attitude. Such women were some of the worst, in Dan Ho’s opinion.

Dan Ho didn’t remember falling asleep, but when he came to, he was awake, standing at the end of a long hallway. He remembered this as a place he had been to before but couldn’t recall the exact event.

The hallway was dark. Only the moon shining outside lent some light into the space. Dan Ho followed the path to the end where he knew the Queen’s rooms were. But when he slid open the doors, it wasn’t the bedroom he had been expecting but a small, gaudily furnished room from the brothel he had frequented as a young boy.

She was there, his first handler. She was smiling at him, wearing a simple grey hanbok instead of the gauche dresses the prostitutes normally wore.

“Aw, look at you all grown up,” she beaconed to him and just like that Dan Ho was a child of fourteen again. He walked to her as she held out her hand to stroke his head. “Have you been well?” Dan ho sat in front of her, his head lowered.

“No,” he admitted, rubbing his chest where his heart throbbed painfully, “I haven’t.”

The handler smiled, “You know, I wondered about you a lot since I last saw you. I wondered if you had been doing well, if you had learned to hide yourself, if there was someone to hug you when you fell apart. I prayed that you were safe. I’m glad my prayers were answered.”

Dan Ho put his head in her lap feeling some comfort from the way she stroked his hair. “I went to look for you, when they kicked you out. You were gone before I found you.” Dan Ho’s voice was that of a young boy. He felt small and safe and protected.

“Winter that year was a harsh one,” she said.

They were quiet for a while, till the silence got too much for Dan Ho. That heavy feeling lurked just beneath his skin, making it crawl.

It was there that Dan Ho realized what that feeling was. It was just then that the handler spoke, “Another harsh winter is coming your way, Dan Ho. I hope you are ready.”

The feeling had never been grief or fear. It had been an inclination of impending doom: that something very bad was about to happen.

~~~~~~~

The first thing next morning, Dan Ho joined the Headmaster as she watched over the wide open training grounds. The new batch of students were there, practicing basic movements with wooden swords.

“The lot this time is very weak. Children haven’t been developing properly since the people are starving,” the Headmaster said. Even though Dan Ho had not announced his presence, she could still sense it. “Look at how malnourished they all are.”

“The present King… I have heard the opinion about him is not positive,” Dan Ho said.

“Why would it, when he depletes the Kingdom’s resources from the poor and only takes care of the rich? Tsk-tsk” The Headmaster shook her head. She turned to Dan Ho, “You were a sickly baby too you know. The first month after we brought you, we thought you would die because you were so sick.”

Dan Ho took in this information bit by bit. The Headmaster rarely offered up any information about his origin and what few pieces she did offer mainly focused on the time after he came to the school.

“Lately…” Dan Ho began, “lately, I have been thinking a lot about where I come from.” Dan Ho didn’t know why this was. He suspected it had to do with the strange dreams he had been having. Dreams he never seemed to remember once he woke, but they seemed to leave an invisible impression on him, like an imprint of an idea he was not fully aware of.

The Headmaster turned away from him, “Instead of the past, shouldn’t you be focusing on the present? Or perhaps this is why the Princess has even bested you in ways you are not yet aware of. Having your head stuck in needless things is always a mistake, Dan Ho.”

The Headmaster’s words lashed his back like a whip, making Dan Ho stand straighter. “Master?”

“You told me the Princess made you all miserable so that you three would fight,” the Headmaster tilted her head. Dan Ho remembered telling her that they had fought but he had carefully left out the part where a certain pink pin was involved. The Headmaster did not need to know Hwang Rin’s and his feelings for Eun Dan.

“But how did the Princess escape the night the royal guards attacked?”

“She had been with Dong Su, Master.”

“Yes, but you said you found her some ways down the stream. How did she get there when Dong Su had been so far back? The guards certainly wouldn’t have let her run that far. And then there was the case of her mistaking the guards as her saviors.”

Dan Ho had not thought about that. At the time, all his focus had been on ensuring the Princess’s safety. Because if she died, then all of their struggles would have been for nothing.

“I’m afraid I still don’t quite understand.” Dan Ho admitted reluctantly.

“She played you all. First she got you distracted with the fight. Next she seduced Dong Su into letting her go. It is quite simple when you connect all the dots.”

Dan Ho blinked rapidly. He had deduced enough to see how Song Hwa was turning all of them against each other, but he had failed to notice anything between her and Dong Su. Uncontrollable, Dan Ho let out a scornful chuckle, “She would never have gone for Dong Su. She considers everyone beneath her.” Plus, she had Go Chung Myung.

“Are you sure about that?”

Dan Ho thought back to their time in the woods. All he remembered was the closeness the Princess had with Sam Chul and on occasion, Eun Dan. He couldn’t recall anything with Dong Su. But no, there were these shared looks, the rolling of the eyes when Dan Ho scolded Dong Su, the looks of sympathy and understanding. And all those times Dong Su had been alone with Song Hwa because Dan Ho had told him to watch over her.

Why had the Princess been so far away from their camp? How had she gotten there? When…

“Master, there is no way that any of us would ever fall for some foolish girl’s charms.”

“Hmm, you may not be affected by women anymore but you’re still men. And Dong Su has always been a little… slow.”

Dan Ho had no defense for that.

“I don’t blame Dong Su. Do not worry for your friend. Besides, he is a good assassin. I wouldn’t waste a good resource on a bad mistake.”

Dan Ho visibly relaxed.

“I am simply pointing this out because I believe the Princess may still try something like this again. With you this time.”

“With me?”

“It would make sense. If I were in her place, I would do the same. Get someone from the inside to trust me and break me out. It’s the smartest way.”

“I don’t think the Princess is like that.”

“No? Perhaps I am wrong then.” The Headmaster gave him a pat on the shoulder as she walked past.

She was too far gone when Dan Ho remembered that he had something to ask her, “Wait!” He called after her, but she didn’t hear him.

Or perhaps pretended not to.

~~~~~~~

Dan Ho had forgotten how vast the school grounds were. Their humble abode was located in a hidden valley in the woods, the entrance to which was a secret only the graduates of the school knew. On one side was the rooming house—a multiple story building with halls upon halls of rooms for every student and a large kitchen and dining hall. The building was so vast that there were wings actually not in use, despite the large number of people present. On the other side was the special place designed to store and make weapons. Each assassin’s set of blades and artillery were designed as per their skill and unique way of use.

Dan Ho had been more adept with swords so he mostly carried long blades and a bow for long range targets. Hwang Rin was an expert shot so he carried small daggers, blades and anything that could be thrown.

The rest of the valley was a long, vast plane lush of green, well-manicured grass upon which students could be trained. The open field was divided into several training spots for different skills. And in one corner, was a small arena where students often fought each other in front of a crowd. The place was similar to the games ground in the palace except it was smaller.

Dan Ho normally toured the entire ground when he returned and he did so now, walking by the rooming house. Except his round was soured when he spotted her.

The Princess seemed to have recovered her wits by now and had finally emerged from the room assigned to her. It was the afternoon, she had slept all through morning.

Dan Ho was surprised to find her walking about the place without supervision. He was just about to approach her when a one of the girls cornered him. She was still in training as a consort so her make up felt a little excessive and her clothes were ill fitted.

“Dan Ho! When did you come back!” she squealed, almost jumping on him. Her voice attracted several other girls. Dan Ho tried to greet all of them quickly and leave but they all talked over his small hellos.

“Dan Ho! We missed you! It’s been years.”

“Did you bring us anything?”

“Awwww, why are you empty handed?”

“Did Hwang Rin not come with you?”

“Whyyy? Where is Hwang Rin?”

The girls jumped around him so much so that Dan Ho had to put his hands up in defeat. He couldn’t help but grin at this welcome.

From the corner of his eye, he saw the Princess watching him. He matched her stare, leveling is own gaze at hers. They seemed to have developed a silent agreement that if their eyes locked, they would wait for the other to relent. It was a battle of sorts, one that Dan Ho always one. And like the other times, it was Princess Song Hwa who blinked first and looked away in defeat.

This was the only victory Dan Ho had over her. For some reason it was never satisfying.

The sound of the girls brought Dan Ho back to reality. “Alright! Alright!” His voice boomed with mirth. “One at a time!” He laughed.

The girls took him to the dining hall where lunch was being served. It was a massive room with large rows of long, wide tables laid about for all of the students, servants and guards of the school. Everyone was treated equally here, so anyone was welcome to sit in any place. The room was full of kids now, and they all shouted a welcome as Dan Ho came in.

Some of the newer students, still children, looked to the others for cues about who Dan Ho was. Dan Ho heard the whispers about him as the girls dragged him to a corner of his usual table.

“You remember about the Headmaster’s favorite? The student she is always boasting about? That’s him, Dan Ho.”

“Oh, is that the assassin prodigy?”

“I heard he killed a hundred men in his first year.”

“I heard he graduated at the age of ten.”

Dan Ho rolled his eyes. Every time he returned, they lessened his graduating age.

More girls joined in on the little troupe he had walking with him. They formed a barrier around him as he sat down. They all chatted and caught him up on what had been going on in his absence. It was the warm welcome Dan Ho had been used to.

“Master Dan Ho! You’re back!” A teenage boy ran up and sat across from him at the table, pushing the women away. “I thought you weren’t due for another six months!”

“Certain circumstances made me return.” Dan Ho responded warmly. “You’ve grown so much since I last saw you.”

The boy beamed.

“Oh, just admit it, you missed us, didn’t you?” One of the girls said, hanging from his arm. “That’s why you came home early, isn’t it.”

Dan Ho had to admit, he missed his home. “I did indeed miss all of you.” He smiled warmly.

Suddenly he felt a shiver down his spine. It was the feeling that someone was watching him.

In the farther corner of the hall, was a dark, secluded space where only one person sat in all her gloom and doom. The Princess had apparently been given some food that she had barely touched. She simply sat, watching everything unfold. Dan Ho felt the Princess’s eyes roll over as everyone fawned over him and the crowd around him grew bigger and bigger.

Dan Ho tilted his chin up defiantly. The Princess may have had the home advantage in the palace, but this was Dan Ho’s castle. He was the royalty here.

One of the girls raised a spoon full of stock for Dan Ho to drink from, “Here, won’t you eat? I bet you’re famished.”

Song Hwa raised a critical brow at him. Dan Ho, suddenly feeling embarrassed, took the spoon from the woman and quickly swallowed.

A few more boys came over to say hello. The aging cook also came out to greet him, bringing a tray of special dishes he had prepared just for him. The made the other dishes look stale in comparison.

Dan Ho pointedly ignored the Princess and ate to his heart’s content and listened to the constant chatter of everyone around him. Why shouldn’t he enjoy himself just because the Princess was judging him. This was his home, she had no right to interfere.

But there was a little part of him that felt inadequate. That small part reminded him, that no matter how much everyone here fawned over him, he would never be royalty. He would never be on the same level as the Princess.

She was gone before he had finished. He noticed that she had barely eaten. Everyone around him had calmed down, now content with having spoken with him and eaten a hearty meal. Dan Ho casually excused himself, picking up a round box of sweets. “I’ll take these to my room for later.” He explained to no one in particular.

He went out towards the surrounding forest. The entire place was encircled by either cliffs or forests that led to nowhere. There was a gigantic lake nearby and Dan Ho had a feeling that Song Hwa would be there.

His instincts were correct. She was standing there by the edge, looking out on to the water in silence. He approached her silently and then, when he was within earshot of her, decided to climb up a tree so as to remain undetected.

He didn’t know why, but he felt angry. Angry and … something else. This time he knew what this feeling was and why it was there. He was angry at the Princess for seducing Dong Su, angry at himself for not seeing it. And angry that Dong Su fell for it and almost let the Princess get away.

It was this anger that kept him from making his presence known to the Princess. He didn’t want to take any food to her. He didn’t want to show her any kindness.

He heard her sigh as she stood there in an almost meditative state. He had seen her do this before they came here. She had stood by quietly, just watching, waiting.

Something made the Princess suddenly shiver. She rubbed the back of her neck and turned. Then, as if by magic, her eyes shot up, exactly to where Dan Ho was. She had done this the last time too. He had been well hidden among the trees but she had found him, her eyes locking on his.

Her eyes found his this time too. This made him tighten the grip on the branch he had been holding so fiercely that it snapped with a loud cracking sound. Losing his balance, he fell, but managed to land gracefully enough that it appeared as if he had meant to do that.

The box managed to stay intact. The other hand had a slight cut from the splintered branch.

The Princess said nothing. She appeared well rested yet tired at the same time. She made no move to engage with him and only looked for him to speak.

“Here.” He shoved the box in her chest. “Eat.” He ordered.

The Princess looked down and took the box but didn’t care to open it. She turned back to the water and Dan Ho joined her.

“This place is beautiful.” She finally said, her voice croaking as if she was still weary.

“I know. I love it here.” Dan Ho admitted. Then wanted to slap himself for admitting it. He wasn’t of the habit of talking about himself. But with the Princess, he always turned into a blabber mouth.

Perhaps this was part of the Princess’s ruse to seduce him, as the Headmaster had said. Dan Ho had to watch out for Princess Song Hwa’s cunning.

“You may love it, but I find it awkward. I don’t know anyone here but you.” The Princess said.

“I’m surprised the Headmaster has allowed you to roam free. I was expecting her to lock you up.”

“She’s told me that she’ll make her decision in three days. Till then I am free to do whatever I wish.”

Dan Ho raised his brows but said nothing.

They stood in silence. Dan Ho silently brooding over a question he really wanted to ask, but felt too embarrassed to. It was a pathetic question and there was no reserved way to put it.

“You seduced Dong Su.” He blurted out.

“Yes.” The Princess said plainly, looking at him with a blank face.

Dan Ho blinked, “Don’t you like Chung Myung?”

“I do.” She said this plainly too. Dan Ho was surprised by her audacity. A normal woman would have felt some shyness or even blushed a little when admitting such actions and feelings. Yet the Princess gave it no second thought. Like she didn’t care what he thought.

Like he was beneath her.

“Then why go for Dong Su.” He already knew why. He still felt angry about it. It could be heard in his tone.

“He seemed cool.” The Princess sighed, crossing her hands behind her back.

Dan Ho scoffed, not believing what he was hearing. “Liar. You did it to run away.”

“Why ask the question if you already know the answer?” The Princess said, sounding bored.

“How could you do it?”

The Princess smiled slyly, “Want me to show you?”

Dan Ho’s eyes widened and he backed up. “No! No way!”

The Princess grinned weakly and looked back on to the lake. “Don’t worry. I won’t do it to you.”

Dan Ho stared at her, still bug eyed. Another pause passed while he ariculated his next question, “Why Dong Su?”

The Princess smiled slyly again, looking at him sideways, “Are you asking me why I didn’t seduce you?”

“I was thinking more of Sam Chul. You two are pretty close.”

The Princess looked down at her feet, kicking away a pebble. “Kim Sam Chul is my friend. I would never disrespect him that way.”

“His name isn’t—”

“I’ve given him that title. He will be Kim Sam Chul once all of this is over.”

Dan Ho said nothing. He didn’t know how to process this information. Having a last name was a great honor. The Princess must really have felt something deep for Sam Chul to bestow it on him.

This, for some reason, made Dan Ho even angrier but he kept it in control. “What about Hwang Rin?”

“He was already taken. Going after him would have been a fool’s errand.”

Now Dan Ho was wondering why Song Hwa didn’t consider him. But he couldn’t ask that question. It felt too embarrassing. Song Hwa still answered it for him. “You would have guessed what I was up to, so it couldn’t have been you either. You’re too smart for that.”

It was that last statement that washed away all the annoyance and rage he had been feeling. Dan Ho always knew he was smart. But to have it acknowledged still boasted his ego. He smiled smugly. “Of course. You were right in thinking that.”

The Princess scoffed at him.

Dan Ho didn’t think it wise for him to stay longer in her company. While he was confident that he would not fall for the Princess’s schemes anymore, he still felt uncertain about her intentions. She could have very well just lied to him to make him lower his guard so that she could seduce him like she did Dong Su.

Thinking this, Dan Ho left Princess Song Hwa by the lakeside. She was still looking out on the lake when he turned around to see her once he had walked some way away. He went back to the grounds to see if the Headmaster was available for another chat.

She wasn’t. It turned out she was busy all day. Dan Ho waited till the late hours of the night for an audience with her but her guard told him that he had to come back the next day.

Dan Ho guessed she was working out how to deal with the Princess. It wasn’t a simple matter, there would be things the Headmaster would need to look into before deciding on anything.

Somewhat dejected, Dan Ho went back to his rooms. The rest of the party would be arriving in a couple of hours. He wanted to get some sleep before seeing Hwang Rin and the others again.

As he was walking, he thought he saw the Headmaster by the stables. Hoping to bid her goodnight, he approached her, but stopped when he heard her say, “Are you certain? This cannot turn out to be false like the Princess’s death.”

“I was at the capital myself. It is true,” an assassin said.

“Good. Inform everyone. We must be dressed for the occasion.”

“Alright, Headmaster.”

Clearly this was relating to the Princess. Dan Ho was not surprised that the Headmaster had received false information about the Princess. It was good that everyone had thought her dead. This would work to their advantage.

Dan Ho thought it best not to interfere with the Headmaster when she was working so he walked away quietly. He slept peacefully that night. No strange dreams disturbed him. And if they did, he did not remember.

When he woke up, it was daylight. This was surprising as he had been expecting to be woken once the others arrived.

Wait, what if they didn’t— Dan Ho shot out of bed before finishing that thought. He raced to the Headmaster’s office where he found Hwang Rin, Dong Su and Eun Dan standing outside.

“Dan Ho!” Eun Dan ran to greet him. “We just got free from the Headmaster.” Dan Ho greeted her back with a relieved grin.

“What did you tell her?” Dan Ho asked Hwang Rin in a low voice.

“Only what happened.” Hwang Rin said with a pointed look. Only what we discussed, was what he had actually meant. They had coordinated their answers carefully. Now the Headmaster would not suspect a thing.

“Sam Chul.” Dan Ho asked.

“They took him to the infirmary.”

Dan Ho let out a deep exhale. “How was he.”

“I think he’ll live.” Dong Su said.

Dan Ho grinned again, hugging the three of them. “Come on, let’s eat.”

As they made their way to the dining hall, something strange came to Dan Ho’s attention.

Everyone was wearing white. Everyone except them. White was only worn when someone was in mourning, and if everyone was wearing it, then that could have meant only one thing.

“What’s going on?” Dan Ho asked a young trainee passing by, feeling that sense of dread return like a lump in his throat.

“You didn’t hear Master Dan Ho?”

“Hear what?”

“The King is dead.”

Chapter Text

Death wasn’t the end. It was metamorphosis. It made heroes of cowards and saints of immoral men. But then, Song Hwa had always gone back and forth about what he thought about her father. Some days he was the only person she could turn to. In others, the was the only bane of her existence.

She had been six when he has raised his hand for perhaps not the first time, but it was then that she knew he would keep doing this, again and again. What stuck with her was not the sound of that whack across her cheek nor the sting of that contact, rather she remembered hiding under the small space beneath the palace terrace. He knew, that this was her hiding place. He knew exactly where she would have been and why she was there.

For some strange reason she had hoped that he would arrive and drag her out of that small corner. She had hoped that her father would look for her and try to make amends. She had hoped that he would put up with her tantrum and not ignore her like he always had.

At a much later age, she would realize that what she had been truly hoping for, was an apology.

Instead of her father, it had been her mother who had pulled her out from beneath the terrace. Her shoes all muddy, her clothes all in a disarray, her hair a crow’s nest.

“I’m not going!” Song Hwa had yelled. “I’m not going even if the King himself orders it!” What she had meant was, I’m not going till Father comes to get me. He never did come to get her. Ever.

It continued like this till she was a teenager. By that time, her mother’s role had been taken over by Chung Myung.

“Come back to the Palace, Princess. Everyone’s worried.” Chung Myung said tiredly. He didn’t have the patience Song Hwa’s mother had. Still, he was kinder than most.

“Never. Even if it’s the King’s orders. I won’t return.”

“You won’t be able to survive in a self-imposed exile.” Chung Myung said, looking down his nose.

Song Hwa’s head popped out from behind the bushes that covered the space beneath the terrace, “And why ever not?” She said indignantly.

“You’re too pampered. You’ll never be able to—” Chung Myung never got to finish his sentence.

The Princess stalked out from behind the bushes angrily. “Listen here you, I will have you know—”

“Gotchya!” Chung Myung grabbed both her arms, grinning triumphantly.

“What… you did that on purpose?” The Princess blinked.

“Of course. Now come on. Your father is waiting.”

Song Hwa would argue, that her father was a vile man and that he deserved every ounce of pain he got. But at the same time, Song Hwa couldn’t watch him suffer.

Quietly, she would acknowledge that there were moments where he was a decent human being to her. Times when he held her up in his arms, spinning her around till her laughed. Times when he would keep her safe from the bullying of the Cho Clan boys. Times when he would stay up with her to calm her down, when she would wake from a nightmare. These small things seemed insignificant when he was alive but now that he was gone, this was all she could focus on.

When her mother had died, all Song Hwa had thought about how heroic she had been to endure her father all those years and how sad it was that she never got to know true love in the way that she had wanted. Now, Song Hwa’s father seemed tragic too. He was never truly loved either. He never let anyone come close enough to do so.

Truly, death was not the end, it was a metamorphosis. It made humans of all monsters. It made abusive fathers seem tragic and pathetic mothers seem heroic.

Song Hwa had been sitting with her arms around her knees for hours. She had watched as dawn had broken out and the sky changed from a soft orange to a blazing red. She had watched the clouds pass by as the day delve into evening and the sun disappeared into the purple horizon.

Time passed like water flowed; forward, without pause and with surprising force. The darkness of the night brought her out of her daze.

That and a presence beside her that she suddenly became aware of.

“Everyone’s looking for you.” His demon like voice spoke from the blinding darkness, sending a shiver down her spine. She couldn’t see Dan Ho but knew he stood somewhere behind. He stood so silently that she had almost believed she was mistaken. But no. Even with his uncanny ability to disappear in plain sight, she could still tell he was there.

“I don’t care, I’m not leaving.” Song Hwa croaked. Her voice was broken and hoarse from all the silent crying.

“They’re preparing for the mourning.” He informed.

“Mourn without me, then.”

The sky was all black skies and grey rolling clouds. The lake met with the sky, reflecting all stars as if it Song Hwa was flying instead of rooted to the ground.

He went away then. Song Hwa could hear the distant voices of the Shadowmen as they prepared for the mourning ceremonies. The entire Kingdom wailed and wept after the loss of any King. It bothered Song Hwa that people who didn’t know her father, or even liked her, were pretending to be sad at his passing.

The Princess wanted none of that. She didn’t know what she wanted, but she knew one thing.

She wasn’t going to move.

Some time later, Song Hwa felt another presence. This person let themselves be known through loud footsteps.

“Princess Song Hwa…” Eun Dan’s worried voice came from the dark. Or was it dawn again? Song Hwa had lost track of time. “You have to eat, my Princess.” Eun Dan called to her affectionately.

The Princess acknowledged the kindness of the gesture. But it was this very kindness that angered her.

“Go away. I want to be left alone.”

“Princess, you haven’t eaten since—”

“LEAVE!”

Eun Dan jumped back and fled. Song Hwa felt angry at herself for scaring off the poor girl. And angrier still that she couldn’t control this anger.

“The Headmaster’s calling for you.” Hwang Rin came over next. It was noon by that time. Song Hwa would have loved if it had poured rain but alas, the sky was clear and the birds chirped like it was any other day.

Because it was. People died every day. The world always moved on.

Hwang Rin sat besides Song Hwa, bumping his shoulder with hers. The gesture brought tears to her eyes but she kept them at bay through sheer will. “Would you like to talk about it?”

“No,” she said before his sentence was even finished.

Hwang Rin nodded and stayed silent.

Having spent such a long time with the Shadowmen, Song Hwa was used to their particular brand of silence. It was as if Hwang Rin wasn’t even there. If she didn’t keep glancing at him, she would believe she was alone.

“Won’t they miss you?” She asked him after nearly and hour had passed.

“Who’s they?”

“I don’t know. Everyone?”

“No one would miss me. Dan Ho’s the only one anybody relies on.”

“I’m sure that’s not true.”

Hwang Rin chuckled, “Perhaps not. But Eun Dan is just as worried about you as I am.”

Song Hwa looked at him then, “I don’t peg you lot as the kind to worry about others.”

Hwang Rin matched his gaze, “Fair enough. But we’re not completely heartless, Princess. We’re people too. Just like you.”

Hwang Rin left after a while. Song Hwa wondered if Sam Chul would be there to comfort her to. To her disappointment, another sunset went by without his presence.

“Why exactly are you doing this? Sitting here won’t bring him back.” Dan Ho’s harsh words laced with frustration brought her out of her thoughts.

“Shut up.” Tears welled around her eyes.

“Come back to your room. You haven’t eaten all day and I doubt you’ve slept either.”

Both of those things felt like foreign concepts now. Song Hwa knew she needed to get some rest and to eat. Her eyes were not heavy and her stomach wasn’t grumbling but she could feel the dizziness in her head and the deep, painful pang of hunger.

“You’re only hurting yourself. Is this what your father would have wanted.”

Song Hwa got up then, in both anger and hatred. The sun was still setting and it lit Dan Ho’s face in a strange way, elongating his sharp features. “Go to hell.” She had meant it to be simple, to the point yet scathing. It came out as pathetic and thoughtless.

Dan Ho looked down at her in what appeared to be boredom. He was done with her and her antics and unaffected by whatever glare she threw at him. “Is this another one of your games?” The question appeared genuine. Which felt worse than if it had been rhetorical.

“A game? You think grief is a game?”

“Then what else do you call sitting over here like a statue while the rest of us run around worried sick about you.”

“Who the hell is so worried about me?”

This was meant to be rhetorical. But the strange pinkish color on Dan Ho’s cheeks made Song Hwa think that he had taken her words literally.

Clearing his throat he stuttered out, “Hwa-Hwang Rin. Hwang Rin and Eun Dan.” He didn’t meet her eyes.

Just Hwang Rin and Eun Dan. Two strangers that Song Hwa didn’t even know that well.

Two strangers and no one else.

There was no one else in the world now, who cared about her.

The thought brought tears to her eyes. It wasn’t her father’s passing, but the fact that she was alone that finally made her cry.

Maybe I’m as bad as my father said I was, Song Hwa thought, feeling guilty.

“Wh—why are you crying?” Dan Ho seemed perplexed by her outburst.

“You asshole! The King just died! How can you ask me that?”

Dan Ho rubbed the back of his head. “I’m an assassin. Death means nothing to me.”

This for some reason seemed funny. A man completely unaware of loss. Because all he dealt in was death. Of course all of this would seem trivial to him.

The Princess chuckled.

And then she laughed.

And she didn’t stop laughing. Nor crying. Red hot tears dripped from her eyes as she cackled like a witch gone mad.

Dan Ho’s eyes bulged helplessly. “What are you doing?”

Song Hwa didn’t know what she was doing. Her last hope of returning home was gone. Not just that, there was no home to go back to. Without her father, there was no one to want her back in the palace. All of her life was gone, sizzled up in the air like smoke.

“Okay. Okay, please stop crying. It’s my fault. Please stop.”

Song Hwa couldn’t stop. Her body shook, her breath came in gasps.

Song Hwa gasped once more when she was suddenly surrounded by a pair of skinny yet strong arms. “Now what are you doing?”

“This… this is what you do when people are falling apart.” Dan Ho said, sounding unsure.

Song Hwa stopped laughing. The gesture was not funny at all. Suddenly, she felt relief. Like something had been lifted. And as Dan Ho held her in his arms, her own stubbornness made much more sense.

She had been sitting there out of grief. She had been waiting for her father to come get her.

Except he never would, and never could, ever again.

~~~~~~~

Song Hwa didn’t remember returning but she remembered being served something to eat. And she remembered having to carefully balance her plate on her bed since there wasn’t a table in the small room they had given her.

She must have fallen asleep because she only became fully conscious when she woke up. They had given her white clothes to wear, as was custom when the Kingdom was in mourning, and left her some food to eat.

She ignored the food but was grateful for the clothes. Venturing outside, she found herself being carefully ignored by everyone as they went about their works.

Young Shadowmen in training pointedly did not look her way as they scattered out of the halls. Girls were a little more bolder, secretly whispering amongst themselves and pointing fingers when they thought she wasn’t looking.

Song Hwa felt like a ghost as she wandered around the student housing and made her way to the outer walkway. She hadn’t looked at herself but could feel the heavy bags around her eyes and the matting of her hair from the sweat and dirt. Her legs felt weak as did her mind. She found herself skipping time. She would suddenly find herself waking up from a daze, having walked a long way from where she had started.

The sun was bright. Song Hwa had made her way to the training grounds as young Shadowmen went about practicing with their swords and other weaponry. The sight was eerily similar to how guards were trained back at the palace. Except the trainees here were much younger and the trainings seemed harsher.

Certain men with different uniforms went about observing the students. No doubt they were the masters as they appeared to old to be either student or graduate. Song Hwa watched in fascination as students learned how to move around a sword without making its trademark swishing sound in the air.

“You must not be seen or heard. Being seen is death.” One master was telling a young group of boys.

“Why aren’t there any girls here?” Song Hwa blurted out before she could stop herself. The group of students he had been teaching all stopped and looked at her in concern. Clearly no one was used to questioning the teachers.

Song Hwa’s brain was slow but it did provide the answer before the startled master did. “They’re being trained a different way.” The man said reluctantly and went back to barking orders at the students.

The different way was in the art of seduction. Song Hwa didn’t bother to ask where the “training grounds” for that particular subject would be.

The hairs on the back of her neck rose. Song Hwa swiftly turned and found the Headmaster staring at her from a terrace up above. The woman looked like she wanted to speak to Song Hwa and the Princess wanted nothing more than to avoid her.

Might as well get this over with.

The Headmaster had given her three days. Song Hwa had spent four. The extra day was apparently the only leniency she would be getting for her loss. Without being prompted, Song Hwa went up to the Headmaster’s office.

The woman did not wear white like everyone else had. She kept her usual dark green attire on.

“You’ll forgive me. Your father and I weren’t on the best of terms.”

Song Hwa didn’t reply. Only stared.

The Headmaster picked up the contract Dan Ho had drafted. “I have come to a conclusion. This contract, however well drafted, does not abide by our laws, so I am rendering it null and void.” She ripped the paper in half.

Song Hwa should have felt scared that she would be killed now. Or even worried.

She felt nothing.

“However, I have created a new contract for you. One I think you will like.” The Headmaster took out a long scroll from a drawer.

Song Hwa took it and began to read. It was difficult since her mind was still adjusting to this new reality she was now thrusted in. Words had become strange, meaningless symbols.

The Headmaster waited for her. But her patience ran thin after a few minutes. “Let me summarize it for you. I will agree to get you back to the palace, safe and sound. No harm will come to you. My men will protect you. In exchange, I want you to do something for me. As payment.”

Song Hwa looked up at her.

“Not payment in money. I want something from you. Something only a royal can grant me.”

Song Hwa looked back down on the words written on the paper. Down near the very end was the payment required.

“You want me to grant you an audience with the council?”

The Headmaster tilted up her chin, effectively looking down at Song Hwa through her nose. “Your father banished me to this valley. I want to return to my home.”

“Oh? You still have family in the capital?”

The Headmaster smiled wryly, “Why not just ask me why I want to come back? You know full well I have no family and my father has passed long ago.”

“Fine. I’ll be straight then. What’s in it for you? Simply returning home seems… counterintuitive.”

“Can’t I simply want to return to a city that was once mine?” The Headmaster teased.

These verbal games were once a boring pastime for the Princess. Now they were grating and annoying. Song Hwa decided to get to the point. “What if I don’t agree to get you your audience. Will you simply kill me?”

Death didn’t seem like such a bad thing anymore. And the Princess was sure that the cunning woman was up to something. If only Song Hwa could figure out what. But her mind wasn’t working and all she saw was what she was being told. Not the agenda behind it.

“Yes. You will die.”

Song Hwa looked down at the scroll. “I want more time.”

“You don’t have—”

“I want more time.” Song Hwa glared. “You can kill me if you can’t wait. But you and I both know that only a royal can get a banished person back into the palace. And I’m the only royal here. Unless I’m mistaken.”

The Headmaster’s nostrils flared.

“I guessed not. I want time.”

“One day.”

“No. I want—”

“One day.” Now it was the Headmaster’s turn to be stubborn.

Song Hwa knew that buying time was useless. But still, she nodded her head.

The Headmaster wasn’t as polite as the last time when bidding her goodbye and Song Hwa was grateful for it. Something about the woman’s manners seemed off. As if behind every smile and polite gesture, was resentment.

“Keep the scroll. I suspect you’ll want to study it.” The Headmaster told her on her way out.

~~~~~~~

She had noticed the boy when she had arrived but hadn’t fully registered his presence till he came over to her during lunch. Everyone had been avoiding her all day. Which was what made his sudden presence a surprise.

“I heard your father passed away.”

The unfamiliar voice made Song Hwa’s head jerk up. The voice was soft, almost too soft to hear. It belonged to an equally soft, almost effeminate face.

“I am truly sorry for your loss.” The boy said. He couldn’t have been more than a year older than her, but appeared quite youthful and kind. Something about the naivete in his eyes reminded Song Hwa about Young Hwa, her brother. The Prince had been just like that when he was a child. Always following Song Hwa around with his blanket trailing behind and his thumb in his mouth.

Perhaps Song Hwa was feeling particularly nostalgic of family. Why else would she seek her brother in this stranger?

“May I sit with you?” The boy asked and then proceeded to sit without permission. “My name is Hyun. I heard yours was Song Hwa.”

Hyun didn’t appear to be like the other trainees in the school. For one thing, he wore better clothes. Everyone else had the same, grey, cotton thread uniform on. But Hyun’s clothing was made of more expensive fabric and it was colored a pastel green.

“I didn’t see you in the dining hall last time.” Song Hwa commented.

“I eat with the Headmaster. She doesn’t let me eat here.”

Interesting. “Then why are you here now?”

“I wanted to pay my respects. Loss can be unbearable when you have to face it alone.”

Song Hwa paid attention to Hyun now. “You’re not a Shadowman?” She both said and realized at the same time.

Hyun smiled sheepishly, as if it was embarrassing to admit. “No. I don’t study here. I just live here.”

“Why?”

“I don’t know. Headmaster took me in. Took pity on me. Said that this was the place where the unwanted children of the Kingdom came to. That this was a place where I could belong.”

“How old were you when you were taken?”

“A baby. I don’t even remember my life before this.”

“But you’re not being trained?”

“No.” Hyun chuckled self-consciously. Clearly, he felt out of place.

Song Hwa narrowed her eyes, “Are there other boys like you? Ones not being trained?”

Hyun blushed, scratching his nose. “No. I, uh, Headmaster said I was too weak to be trained.”

Song Hwa gave him a once over. Indeed, he seemed quite skinny. Perhaps the Headmaster wasn’t as heartless with her students as Song Hwa had suspected.

“Aren’t you going to eat?” Hyun nodded to the untouched food in front of her.

Song Hwa shook her head. “I don’t feel like eating.”

Hyun nodded and began to silently eat on his own.

It was just the two of them on that vast table. Song Hwa preferred it that way. But she felt concern that the boy eating with her might feel left out. “Don’t you want to eat with your friends?”

Hyun didn’t look up. “I don’t have a lot of friends here. Hard to connect with them when left out of most things.”

Song Hwa could relate. Given her position in the palace, she was frequently kept out of most activities that everyone else seemed to participate in. All she could do was watch and smile from afar.

Song Hwa put the side dishes from her bowls onto Hyun’s. “Eat.” She commanded in her most authoritative tone. Hyun obeyed.

A small commotion near the entrance caught Song Hwa’s attention. People bowed and made way as the Headmaster in all her dark green glory entered. The way everyone looked up, it was evident that the Headmaster did not frequent the dining hall that the students used.

One of the students, an older looking boy, got up and bowed to her, “Headmaster, it is an honor to have you in our midst.”

The Headmaster waved him away without a word. She walked passed the boy and came straight for Song Hwa.

Is she asking me for my answer already? Song Hwa wondered.

But then the Headmaster’s eyes went to Hyun. “I was expecting you for lunch.”

Hyun gulped audibly, looking down at the ground. “Headmaster, I—”

“Who gave you permission to sit in the dining hall? Do you not know it is reserved for students?”

“Yes Master, but I—”

“Clearly disobeyed my orders.”

“He wasn’t doing anything.” Song Hwa interjected.

The Headmaster gave her such a scrutable glare than Song Hwa trembled. Suddenly, she felt very afraid for her life. She looked at Hyun who subtly shook his head.

“Princess, I do not believe I was addressing you.” The Headmaster said icily. To Hyun she said, “Get up. We have a perfectly good meal in my office.”

Hyun nodded and got up, shoulders hunched, head bowed. “Sorry, Headmaster.”

The Headmaster looked at Song Hwa, “Princess, I believe you have a decision to make. Perhaps you should focus on that before you go seeking out unnecessary friendships.”

Song Hwa wanted to protest that she hadn’t sought out anyone but bit her tongue and simply nodded.

She watched as Hyun was led out of the dining hall. Hwang Rin came running from one corner, seemingly out of no where.

“You fool! Who told you to talk to Hyun?” He whispered harshly, even though there was no one around to hear.

“What’s the problem? I didn’t even exchange more than a few sentences.”

Eun Dan rushed over then, “I just heard,” she told them in a low voice. “Princess, Hyun isn’t someone we’re allowed to interact with.”

“Yes. You can’t just talk to him as you like.” Hwang Rin added fiercely.

“Why ever not?”

“We don’t know. We just know not to mess with him. Or else the Headmaster truly will kill you.”

Interesting. Very interesting, Song Hwa thought.

~~~~~~~

“Where’s Sam Chul?”

Song Hwa had been walking with Hwang Rin and Eun Dan towards the training grounds. One of the trainees had come up to Hwang Rin and called him away so it was just Eun Dan and Song Hwa, walking together awkwardly.

Song Hwa felt awkward as she was still unclear whether Eun Dan was a friend or a foe. Eun Dan was awkward she did not know how to speak to a Princess.

“So…” the both began. Then chuckled.

“Go ahead.” Song Hwa said.

“Sam Chul is in the infirmary. The poison from those guards was quite potent. It will be some time before he recovers.”

Song Hwa took this information in. “I should visit him.”

“You won’t be allowed to. Even I wasn’t.”

Song Hwa frowned. The girls continued to walk aimlessly. Song Hwa had a lot to think about. Time was running out and she had to give the Headmaster an answer soon. No matter how she thought about it, the offer seemed too good to be true. Simply take the Headmaster to the capital? Since the woman had been banished, she would be killed on sight if she attempted to return. Having Song Hwa as her escort was the only way to ensure a safe passage.

But why? What will she gain from the council?

“I am sorry for your loss. About your…” Eun Dan shook Song Hwa out of her thoughts.

Song Hwa simply nodded. Not wanting to touch the subject. She would start bawling if she thought about her father for too long.

“Has the Headmaster said anything about letting you go?” Eun Dan approached the subject gently.

Song Hwa shook her head, “She’s given me an offer. I am still considering it.”

“An offer? That’s brilliant! Does this mean she will let you live?” Eun Dan smiled brightly. Her happiness was touching.

“Only if I actually say yes.”

“Well why won’t you?”

Song Hwa hesitated to answer. “Tell me. What is your opinion of your Headmaster?”

Eun Dan thought about it. “Well… she gave us a home. Gave us a community to belong to. We’re all grateful to her generosity.”

It sounded like a rehearsed answer. “Come on, what do you really think of her? Don’t you find her intimidating?”

“I suppose so.” Eun Dan shrugged. “But she’s like the mother we all wanted but never had. What child isn’t intimidated by their mother?”

Song Hwa looked at Eun Dan but did not state her mind. This wasn’t the time to unpack parental issues. “Would you trust your Headmaster to do what was right by you?”

“Of course! Why wouldn’t I?”

They had arrived near the training grounds. A large crowd had gathered around some show that was going on. Song Hwa could hear shouts and cheers but couldn’t make out what they were saying.

“It’s just…” Eun Dan started but then caught herself.

“What?”

“I just wouldn’t anger her, if I were you. Headmaster she… she is very generous. But she is also swift in her judgements.”

From the corner of her eye, Song Hwa spotted the Headmaster outside on the terrace that overlooked the training ground below. To her right, a very tall and lean Dan Ho stood, watching Song Hwa. To her left was Hwang Rin.

All three appeared very solemn standing together.

Song Hwa realized something, “Hey, I haven’t seen Dong Su around either.”

They were right at the edge of the crowd. Eun Dan didn’t hear Song Hwa. She asked a bystander, “What’s going on? I don’t remember anything being scheduled for today.”

The Shadowman answered, “Headmaster’s doling out a punishment today. A Shadowman apparently ran away so he’s being executed.”

Eun Dan froze in place, her eyes going wide.

“What?” Song Hwa asked. Then seemed to pick up on something. Whether it was Eun Dan’s expression or whether something in the way Hwang Rin and Dan Ho stood up above, but Song Hwa’s instincts pushed her forward through the crowd.

She saw Dong Su first. He held in his hand a bow. He was turned towards the Headmaster, looking to her for the signal to proceed. His eyes were red-rimmed and he looked pale and sickly. His clothes were dirty and worn, as if he hadn’t taken them off since he had gotten there. He had lost some weight too.

The Headmaster raised a hand and the crowed immediately quieted. She addressed the students, her voice booming over everyone, “Today, we punish the transgressors who believe they are above the laws of the shadows.” The crowed booed quietly. “Let us tell those who undermine us, that they cannot violate our sacred coven and live to tell the tale.” Despite the distance, Song Hwa felt the Headmaster look at her when she said, “Let us tell those who underestimate us, that we are not to be taken lightly.”

Song Hwa looked back at Dong Su who had picked her out from the crowd of Shadowmen and the prostitutes in training. He glared at her, almost as if he was blaming her.

Song Hwa’s heart sank when he stepped aside and she saw who exactly he was going to hit with his arrow.

Sam Chul; tied to a pole with his hands above his head. It was the only thing holding him up as his legs had almost given beneath him. His face was a stomach churning green. His eyes red. His hair was stuck to his sweaty forehead. He was barely conscious.

Sam Chul’s side, where his wound was, appeared to still be oozing blood. He was still wearing what he had been when Song Hwa had left him.

It was obvious then, that Sam Chul hadn’t been getting any treatments at the infirmary. He had been rotting in some cell, waiting for this.

“No.” Song Hwa jumped forward before anyone could stop her. Her arms spread out wide, she covered Sam Chul.

“Get out of the way, Princess.” Dong Su said. His voice gravelly.

“No.” Song Hwa said adamantly, shaking her head. She looked up at the Headmaster. “You can’t do this!”

“Don’t tell me what I can and cannot do in my own school.” The woman said in a low and dangerous tone.

“Dan Ho! You can’t let her do this!” Song Hwa appealed to Dan Ho who remained stoic and unreadable. He looked at her with no expression at all. He was completely unaffected. “Hwang Rin?” Song Hwa called out to the other assassin.

Hwang Rin swallowed but also remained unmoving. He at least had the decency to look away and pretend he didn’t hear Song Hwa.

Song Hwa looked at the arrow Dong Su was pointing at her. “Dong Su, you can’t do this!” She yelled.

“Whose fault do you think this is?” Dong Su spat at her, “Why do you think it’s me here and not anyone else?” It was hard to believe that this was once the boy Song Hwa had offered to run away with. Even if it had been a shallow offer, Song Hwa had still meant it back then.

“He’s your friend!” Song Hwa screamed.

“He’s a Shadowman.” Dong Su aimed the bow straight for Sam Chul’s chest.

“Complete your duty, Dong Su.” The Headmaster said, effectively ordering Dong Su to shoot.

“No!” Song Hwa backed up and pressed herself against Sam Chul.

“Princess…” Song Hwa heard Sam Chul speak weakly. He was clearly on his last few breaths. Without any medical treatment, the poison had worked its way through him. His body even smelled like a rotting corpse.

The Princess was crying now, snot running down her nose as she shook her head again and again. “You can’t do this! I won’t let you.”

“Step aside, Princess.” Dong Su said through clenched teeth.

“You step aside!”

“What do I do?” Dong Su asked the Headmaster. “Do I shoot?”

Up at the terrace, Dan Ho leaned towards the Headmaster, “Master, the Princess might get hurt.”

“Let her.” The Headmaster replied curtly.

“You still need her for your contract.” Hwang Rin reminded.

“I will not have that girl insult me in my own territory. A lesson needs to be taught here.”

Hwang Rin and Dan Ho looked at each other gravely but said nothing.

“Do your duty!” The Headmaster yelled to Dong Su who looked back at the Princess sorrowfully. There were tears in his eyes too.

“You don’t want to do this. I know you don’t.” Song Hwa begged him. “Please. He’s all I have left.”

Dong Su sniffed and braced himself. “I’m sorry.”

The arrow was shot. But before it was, Song Hwa heard another whooshing sound. Right as the arrow was about to hit, Song Hwa felt herself pushed out of the way.

Song Hwa felt Dan Ho’s weight on top of her but her eyes were only on Sam Chul. As if the world had slowed, she saw how the arrow pierced his heart and dark, poisoned blood spilled out. Sam Chul’s head fell forward as his life squeaked out of him. His chest deflated and he breathed no more.

There was a scream. It would be much later when Song Hwa would realize that it had been hers. Someone, possibly Dan Ho dragged her away. They locked her up in a cell, somewhere underground. There was no light, no window to the outside. Only stale air and the sound of metal bars closing and opening as they threw her in.

The Headmaster was there, standing on the other side. Song Hwa ran to her, reaching for her throat through the bars. But the woman stood just out of reach, a smug smile on her face.

“You are foolish, just like your father. He never feared me too. But he learned to. Eventually. You will give me what I want. Or you will die. I will let you think about that while you’re in here. Perhaps it will help you clear up your mind. Your fate is in your hands now. Everything that happens from now on, is on you.”

She left Song Hwa there, in the cold darkness. The only source of light was from the torches on the walls. Song Hwa heard the squeaking of mice somewhere near. She heard moaning from nearby cells, from other prisoners. She heard her own heartbeat in the darkness and realized that now she was well and truly alone.

But even alone, she would not lose. As she sat in the darkness, Song Hwa promised herself that she would not let this break her.

She would fight. And she would win. And she would wipe the smug smile off the Headmaster’s face.

Chapter Text

SUMMARY of Chapter 21: Song Hwa is grieving the loss of her father and Hwang Rin, Eun Dan and Dan Ho come to comfort her. The Headmaster gives Song Hwa an ultimatum that she must take the Headmaster to the capital, effectively removing the Headmaster’s banishment, in exchange, the Headmaster will deliver her safely to the palace. Song Hwa asks to think about the offer. Meanwhile, she meets Hyun, a strange boy who seems to be getting special treatment in that he is not being trained. The Headmaster doesn’t like that Song Hwa and Hyun spoke.

Song Hwa later comes across a crowd of Shadowmen and realizes that it’s an execution and the person being punished is Sam Chul for having run away before. Song Hwa tries to save him but Dong Su is forced to shoot Sam Chul and Dan Ho pushes Song Hwa out of the way.

~~~~~~~

It was cold, dark and somewhere water was dripping. A low moan traveled from farther down the dark corridor of the underground prison as another captive shifted about their cell.

Flames from the torches outside her cell danced on their own, causing shadows to shift around like spirits from another world. Princess Song Hwa sat in her cell, her face covered in dried tears, snot and dirt.

Grief restricted access to her brain. She needed revenge. She needed justice. All she got was pain. And despite what the old fables and fairytales said, grief did not suddenly cause a great surge in strength or help her figure out an ingenious way to solve her problems.

Grief only led to pain. And in pain, there were no heroes. There was no scheming. There was only the animal instinct to find a way to stop the pain.

Song Hwa wanted to die. She felt she was dying. Her heart hurt so much that she wanted to wrench it out of her chest and throw it away. But she couldn’t let her grief overcome her. She had to live to survive. Survive long enough to exact the same pain on the Headmaster that she herself felt.

The thought of her enemy caused another pang in her heart. Not for the green clad woman herself but her right hand man. Song Hwa had naively believed that Dan Ho was… what? A friend? A sympathizer? She couldn’t put a name to the feeling.

Whatever Song Hwa had felt, it had clearly been wrong. Someone so ruthless that they would forsake their own friend could not be on her side. She had been foolish to think otherwise.

Hard as she tried, she could not get those last moments with Sam Chul out of her head. How pathetically he had called out to her. How he smelled of rotting flesh. He had been here, suffering and she had no idea, no clue. He had been dying while she had been enjoying herself, eating meals and taking long baths.

She wanted to turn back time to when they were in the woods. She wanted to go back and hug Sam Chul and never let him go. Perhaps it was because this particular loss had happened in front of her, but Song Hwa felt a more visceral pain at Sam Chul’s death than she had at her own father’s.

Now Song Hwa truly didn’t have anyone. Not a single soul who cared for her.

She couldn’t even hold out hope for Chung Myung. He wasn’t even aware that she was still alive. He was probably married to that bandit girl now, having forgotten the long lost Princess he once used to serve.

The Captain of the Guard was now a faded memory for Song Hwa. Now all she had was her cell.

No. I can’t give up. I can’t.

Song Hwa was uncertain about a lot of things. But she knew that she had to get out of the cell or she would go mad.

There was no flow of air, no wind, no light or sound beyond the curious noises of what she suspected were rats. The sensory isolation was driving her insane, disabling her ability to think clearly. It also didn’t help that she was hungry.

She remembered the meal she had ignored back at the dining hall when the curious boy Hyun had approached her. She wished she had eaten then.

Song Hwa got to her feet. She had done enough of sitting down. She needed to clear out certain things in her head.

She went over the events in reverse.

She had been thrown in the cells. Why? Through the flurry of confusing flashbacks that made up her memory of being hauled away from Sam Chul, she remembered some distant voice of the Headmaster telling her, in quite a fury, that her defiance at Sam Chul’s execution was unacceptable and was worthy of execution itself.

Well that answers that question.

Which brought Song Hwa to the second event. The Headmaster had chosen to execute Sam Chul. Why? All he had done was run away. Was it truly a crime befitting death? Unless the Headmaster knew that Sam Chul had been kind to her. It did seem like the thing that would anger her the most. But how did the Headmaster find out about it? Only someone who had traveled with them could have provided that information.

And with Sam Chul, Song Hwa thought of Dong Su. His punishment had been to execute his friend. The Headmaster could have made any of the Shadowmen do it, but no, she chose Dong Su. Had she found out about how he had let Song Hwa go? But how?

All signs pointed to one person, the only person, who could have relayed this information.

Dan Ho.

The man had stood by idly as Sam Chul was shot down like an animal. Song Hwa suspected that he had only jumped in to save her because the Headmaster ordered it.

Suddenly, Song Hwa’s exhausted and overrun mind was clear in its conclusion, even though her head was partially spinning and her thoughts bordering insanity.

Dan Ho was the reason for all of this. He was the reason Song Hwa was here in this cell, the reason Sam Chul was dead, the reason she had been kidnapped in the first place.

All of Song Hwa’s anger and hatred and despair was now pointed in one direction.

But her feelings of hate carried an undercurrent of something else too. Something sad that made her feel lost and small.

She was reminded of the way that he had held her before, in the name of comforting her. It was awkward and stiff, but the gesture coming from Dan Ho spoke more volumes than if it had been someone else. He had seemed more like a regular boy that time, than a ruthless assassin. But Song Hwa told herself that men often had these sides to them. Her father did too. Moments when he had seemed just as breakable as she was.

It was a lie. Designed for her to lower her guard. She was sure the Headmaster was behind it too. Maybe to gain her trust so she would help the assassin leader.

The room began to spin and Song Hwa had to sit back down again. When the spinning didn’t stop, Song Hwa lay down, well aware that rats might come over and bite on her toes.

She didn’t care. She didn’t care about anything anymore.

Light approached the cell. It was a torch, held by a man clad in black. She didn’t hear any footsteps from him but the jangling of the cell keys and the groaning of the jail cell being opened let her know that she had a visitor.

The torch lit the room and Song Hwa could finally see where she was held. The cell was unexpectedly clean. A square room with smooth walls and a bit of grass growing in the corners. There was a small holder to place a torch in on one side.

Song Hwa saw the man do just this with one hand. With the other hand, he held a tray of food.

Her stomach growled at the sight of it. It took all of her will power to keep herself from snatching the tray from the man and scarfing it all down in one bite.

The man lowered the cloth covering his face. It was Dan Ho. Song Hwa half wondered if she had somehow summoned him by thinking about him.

Or was this all a dream?

“I brought you some food.” It was all he had the chance to say before Song Hwa launched herself at him, the tray crashing down on the floor in the process with the sound echoing off the walls in a cacophony of chaos.

“You monster! You bastard!” Song Hwa snarled at him, yanking at his collar. She punched him—in the shoulder, in his chest, wherever her hands could connect, kicked him in his legs, screamed at him like a wild animal. She was surprised at herself, surprised at her own ferocity.

Dan Ho however, didn’t seem surprised at her reaction. He stood there, pathetically taking it all in, flinching in pain with each hit, his mouth grimacing. She called him by every bad curse she could think of. She hurled every venomous thought she could muster.

With each hit, Dan Ho was pushed back till he finally hit the wall behind him. He hissed when his back made contact, eyes shutting in pain. Song Hwa noticed this out of place reaction, but continued to punch him in the chest till she could no longer take it. Her final blow landed weakly over his ribs and stayed there. Tears streamed down her face again. She was sure she looked a fright.

“He was your friend,” she cried. “How could you just watch?”

The flames of the torch illuminated one side of Dan Ho’s face, casting deep shadows on the other side. He looked pathetic and helpless which was absolutely irritating to the Princess because the sight of him, someone so terrifying, looking so desperate broke her heart. She both loathed him and worried for him at the same time. It was a dizzying mix of emotions.

“The Headmaster only did what was best for the school.” Dan Ho rasped, not sounding convincing. He swallowed thickly.

“Best for the school? What a pathetic excuse.” Song Hwa spat at him, to which he flinched again. “Sam Chul was no harm to anybody.”

“He broke the rules. He knew what he was doing.” He sounded like he was trying to convince himself, not her.

“He was your friend and you betrayed him! You sold him out to your precious Hedmaster.” Song Hwa said with as much vitriol as she could muster.

“I didn’t sell him out.” Dan Ho tried to defend.

“Don’t lie to me!” Song Hwa punched him in the chest again, hitting his hard muscle underneath the black uniform.

“I’m not lying!” Dan Ho drew close, pushing himself off the wall. His eyes bore into hers, pleading for her to believe in him. “I tried to save him. The Headmaster didn’t listen.”

“I am sure that in your screwed up mind that it may have seemed like you were saving him by telling the Headmaster everything. You told her about how he treated me, didn’t you? I know that’s why she had him killed. I know it!”

“Woah, woah, woah, I didn’t—” Dan Ho tried to interject but Song Hwa spoke over him.

“There’s no one else who could have done this. You can lie to yourself all you want, but you’re the reason Sam Chul is dead. You’re the reason I am in this mess and you’re the reason…” Song Hwa’s breath quivered as fresh tears poured from her eyes, “you’re… this is all your fault.” She said in a small, broken voice.

Song Hwa had her fingers curled around Dan Ho’s collar. She could feel the lines of his collarbone and the rise and fall of his chest. He stared at her wordlessly, dark eyes betraying nothing and yet it was the absence of anything that let her know that all wasn’t alright. There was no light there, no spark of intelligence and cunning. His face was hollow, made grimmer by the shadows that caressed his face.

There was something else that was wrong with him. Beads of sweat glinted on his forehead and his breath was ragged. His brows furrowed slightly, and his jaw was clenched.

Dan Ho gently pushed Song Hwa back before she could examine his face further, but she resisted letting go of his collar. She tried to push against the wall again, because she liked the feeling of pushing him around. It made him seem weak and her powerful, in control.

He didn’t budge this time, not even an inch. Instead, he grabbed her wrist and tugged till she let go. The strength of his hand and his stance made her realize that he had allowed her to push him back. Had he wanted, he could have simply grabbed both her hands and stopped her from landing even a single hit on him.

The fact that he did not, raised several questions none of which Song Hwa had the strength to articulate.

Dan Ho moved aside, quietly leaving Song Hwa to her thoughts. As he shifted away, she saw strange lines on the wall where his back had hit. Long, crisscrossing slashes. Song Hwa touched one of them and her fingertips came away wet with something slick and red.

Blood.

Song Hwa turned but could only glance upon his back as he went out of sight. His back had been bleeding from long cuts. Why? Was he alright? Had something happened? Concern overwhelmed everything. But then Song Hwa reminded herself about who he was and how she was meant to feel about him.

Song Hwa didn’t think about the thin lines on the wall again, although they taunted her as she sat on the opposite side, her knees to her chest just waiting for something else to happen.

~~~~~~~

It was either the next mealtime or the next day. Song Hwa couldn’t tell. Time moved differently in the cell. All she could do was try not to think about Sam Chul, which only made her think about him even more. And when she wasn’t thinking about Sam Chul, she was thinking about the food that had fallen on the floor when she had attacked Dan Ho.

One bowl of rice lay inverted while some of the dishes were intact on the tray, although they had spilled out of the plate. Song Hwa had debated long and hard whether she would try to salvage the food and eat. She knew she had to. She needed her strength to survive.

And her plan was to survive.

But something stubborn and obstinate prevented her from doing so. She could not bring herself to eat anything offered by the man who had betrayed his friend. Her friend. She could not eat simply because it was what Dan Ho wanted her to do.

Eventually the rats had found their way to the fallen food. Song Hwa’s heart had sank as she saw the curious creatures sniff their way to the plates and begin munching and squeaking, calling to their friends. Soon there was a group of them in her cell.

None of them approached her. Though a few looked up from their meal, staring at her with a question in their beady, black eyes.

You sure you don’t want this, Princess? The rats seemed to be asking.

I would rather die.

Song Hwa watched the rats work their way through the food in fascination. And afterwards she watched them disperse out of the cell. After that she was left to her thoughts of Sam Chul and her regret and not eating what Dan Ho had brought her. Song Hwa jerked in surprise when the cell door opened again and once more, Dan Ho stood there with a tray full of food and a fresh torch.

The torch he had left previously was still burning but the flame had weakened. Dan Ho came over to her where she sat still as stone and placed the tray in front of her.

Another bowl of rice. This time with fish and other fermented vegetables. Song Hwa’s stomach begged her to eat, threatening death by hunger. Song Hwa ignored it.

Dan Ho collected the crockery he had left behind. Some of them had cracked but mostly they were fine. As he picked them up he realized something.

“You didn’t eat?” He looked up from where he was bent over the empty plates.

Song Hwa didn’t answer. She spied rat pellets by the tray. The rats had been efficient in digesting the food.

“Eat. You want to be able to hit me again, don’t you?” Dan Ho left her cell with just that. A small, quiet encouragement. Song Hwa was half tempted to listen to him.

But she couldn’t. She didn’t want anything from the man who had caused Sam Chul to die.

The rats emerged again, sniffing the air as they detected replenishment. Song Hwa kicked the tray away and it slid towards the opposite wall. The rats came to eat the food again. One of them looked up to the Princess again and she was sure that this time, it truly was communicating to her.

I thought you wanted to live. You wanted revenge. The rat seemed to be saying.

I do.

How are you going to do that if you die here?

I don’t know. Perhaps I’ve gone mad.

The rat seemingly satisfied, went back to eating.

Song Hwa couldn’t sit up anymore. She decided to rest on her side, keeping her eyes on the rats lest they get any ideas about devouring her like they were doing the fish. Everything had begun to spin. The flames from the torch seemed to be roaring and out of control. Shadows danced all around her as the room spun like saucers on sticks.

Song Hwa knew a long time passed because the torch in her cell eventually went out, leaving her cell shrouded in darkness again.

Song Hwa didn’t know when she passed out, but she came to with a sharp gasp when someone shook her awake.

“Princess. I’ve brought you food.”

Was it the rats? No, the voice was not squeaky. It was deep and rich. Like a demon. The Princess had a demon in her cell, there to eat her flesh. It was talking of food. It meant to fatten her up.

Song Hwa was too weak to fight against the pull of gravity. Her body refused to move. The demon pulled her up from the floor and into his arms. She should have been afraid of the demon, but instead she leaned into his embrace, feeling comfort from his warmth.

He had no scent. Song Hwa had noticed this when he had hugged her. Just like he had no presence, the man had no scent. Or perhaps he was wearing something that hid it.

“Drink.” She felt the cool metal cup pressed to her lips and the water that flowed down her parched tongue. The drink revived her a bit, enough to feel a jolt of consciousness before her head began to spin again.

Something soft was pressed to her tongue. Rice. Then she tasted metal. A spoon.

Song Hwa turned her face away, crying softly, “No.”

“You have to eat.”

“I can’t. Not when it’s from you.” She whimpered. She could feel him stiffen at this response.

But she could resist no longer. Her mouth and her stomach disobeyed her every command when the spoon was pressed to her lips again. Her lips opened Weakly she chewed on the food. Time flew by and suddenly, she was alone in her cell again. This time something was covering her, to keep her warm.

Song Hwa didn’t know how long she slept but when she woke up, it felt like an entire day had passed by. There was once again, a new torch in her cell, the flaming holding steady. There were no rats in her cell this time. No crockery or discarded tray either.

Song Hwa felt a little better than before, though still weak. She didn’t have much time to process anything as the door to her cell opened again.

It was Eun Dan this time, looking quite afraid.

“Princess!” Eun Dan rushed to Song Hwa’s side, the tray nearly sliding out of her arms and onto the floor. “Are you alright? You look so frightful.”

Song Hwa blinked, not knowing what to say. Eun Dan set the tray down by her side. “I sneaked out as much food as I could, but all the food is rationed here so I could only bring this much.” A half a bowl of rice, some scraps of meat and sparse side dishes. “Sorry, me and Hwang Rin tried to make a whole meal, but we were hungry.”

It took Song Hwa a minute to understand that Eun Dan had snuck out portions of her and Hwang Rin’s meal.

“What was Dan Ho bringing me then?” Song Hwa said weakly, the words forming slowly.

“Whatever was left of his meal.” Eun Dan said simply.

But he was bringing me and entire trayful… didn’t he eat anything?

Having gotten some sleep had cleared her thoughts enough for Song Hwa to realize how foolish her stubbornness was. She could not skip out on the food. She needed to become strong enough to fight back. Quietly, she ate what she was offered while Eun Dan remained, sitting in front of her.

Song Hwa looked at her pointedly.

“I have been ordered not to leave till you’ve eaten everything.”

“And who exactly ordered that?” Song Hwa raised a brow.

“I have been ordered not to say.”

“And who ordered that?”

“Dan Ho, of course.”

Song Hwa couldn’t help but smile.

Eun Dan waited patiently as Song Hwa slowly munched away. Song Hwa didn’t mind the silence between them. Eun Dan’s presence was a warm comfort to her. But she wanted news of what was happening on the outside and she wanted Eun Dan to offer up the information herself instead of probing her for it.

“Are you just going to sit and not talk?” Song Hwa asked.

“Hmm?” Eun Dan’s brows went up. “Well, what can I say?”

“I certainly don’t have anything new to offer,” Song Hwa said. “I just sit here all day. I don’t even know how long I’ve been here.”

“Three days.” Eun Dan offered. “Though I think the Headmaster’s being a little harsh. Anyone would have died if they didn’t eat or drink for three days.”

Song Hwa’s ears perked up at this. “What do you mean?”

“Headmaster’s forbidden anyone to give you any food.”

Song Hwa froze mid-chew. “Then why…”

“Dan Ho thought it was in the Headmaster’s best interest that you be kept alive. He said the Headmaster needed you for something so it was okay if we transgressed a little.”

Song Hwa swallowed carefully. “Is that why you’re here? Because the Headmaster needs me?”

Eun Dan hesitated. “I wanted to help.” She said, raising up her chin.

Song Hwa nodded.

“But…” Eun Dan continued, “I have to confess, I wouldn’t have, if I thought the Headmaster wanted you dead. You have seen the kind of punishment Headmaster gives when angered.”

Song Hwa’s throat went dry.

“No one here would ever want to be on her bad side.”

“Fair enough.” Song Hwa rasped, her voice sounding parched. Although the revelation stung, Song Hwa still appreciated Eun Dan’s honestly. She probably would have done the same had she been in Eun Dan’s shoes.

When Song Hwa was done, Eun Dan gathered up the things and got up to leave.

“Is Dan Ho okay?” The words were out before Song Hwa could stop them.

“A little worse for wear, but he’ll survive.” Eun Dan turned partly towards her.

“What does that mean?”

“He didn’t tell you about the lashing?”

Song Hwa’s brows shot up so high they nearly touched her hairline. She shook her head silently.

“Headmaster gave him twenty lashes him because he pushed you out of the way.”

Song Hwa didn’t look at the long crisscross lines on the wall but she was distinctly aware that they were there. They had dried into a dark brown color that looked almost black in the dim light.

“Dan Ho’s never been punished before.” Eun Dan said, looking at Song Hwa meaningfully. The subtext of her statement lay heavy in the stale air of the cell. That the golden boy of the Shadowmen, the Headmaster’s prodigy and favorite student, was punished solely for her. “I know you have no reason to listen to me, but Dan Ho is my friend. It hurts me to see him like this. I implore you not to do anything that could get us into anymore trouble.”

The comment stung. Was Song Hwa not hurt too? Did she ask to be here, kidnapped, manipulated and punished in such a cruel way, simply for being a Princess? What about her feelings? What about her pain? She didn’t even have anyone left who would defend her like Eun Dan was defending Dan Ho. There was no one to speak up about what she was going through.

Song Hwa felt a rise of anger in her heart. She didn’t say anything as Eun Dan left, seething with rage and feeling sorry for herself.

The food had been good for her. It gave her enough strength to think about her next move.

There was a thin layer of sand on the floor of the cell. The torch that Dan Ho had left was still flickering, but not for long as the embers lowered.

Song Hwa started writing on the ground. Words that couldn’t really be seen but helped her organize her thoughts. One by one, she listed down her options and went over each and every scenario she could come up with to achieve her goal.

It all came down to one thing: getting back to the palace.

She had to return in order to let people know she was still alive. Her greatest disadvantage was that everyone thought she was dead. Which meant that if she really did die, then nothing could be done about it. But if people knew she was alive… if Chung Myung… then she could turn the tide in her favor.

She had to get back home. And there was only one way to do that.

~~~~~~~

Something echoed in his ears. Words of a woman, her voice sounding familiar, as if he had heard it hundreds of times before. He knew someone had said something. He remembered the impression of it. But he couldn’t remember the memory itself.

And just like every other time, the images he saw in his dream were gone, lost forever in the land of sleep.

Dan Ho woke up, lying face down, shirtless, with a searing headache and a bitter taste on the back of his mouth. He knew the cause—the large cuts on his back, but he didn’t understand why the lashes would cause his skull to feel like hammers were pounding inside. As he shifted, he groaned, the pain worsening with each movement.

“I keep telling you, lie down for a day but no, you don’t listen.” The elderly physician of the school complained, getting up from his desk when he spied Dan Ho stirring in bed. Dan Ho was in the infirmary, having passed out yet again from the pain of the lashes the Headmaster had subjected him to.

“Sorry.” He said to the physician, continuing his struggle to sit up.

“Lie down! And take your medicine.”

“It makes me drowsy.”

“It’s supposed to! Now lie.”

“Okay. You are the most handsome man in the world.”

That earned Dan Ho a smack on the back from the old man, who was careful not to hit any of the stitched up wounds.

“Ow! You told me to lie!” Dan Ho said, half-grinning, half-grimacing. He looked around for his shirt to put on.

“Cheeky boy.” The physician said, returning to his desk.

“Did anyone come to see me?” Dan Ho asked, sitting up.

“No. Why? Expecting anyone?”

“Eun Dan.”

The physician’s mouth quirked. “Careful boy. You don’t want the Headmaster finding out.”

“It’s not like that!” Dan Ho said.

“Sure.” The physician said teasingly, a glint in his eye.

Dan Ho rubbed the back of his neck, frowning.

“What’s wrong?”

After a moment of silence, he answered, “Have you ever had a dream, and you know it’s the same dream, but you just can’t ever remember what it was?”

The physician’s pen stopped in the middle of writing. “You having bad dreams?”

Dan Ho thought about it, “They’re not bad, just… lately, I wake up feeling like I am supposed to remember something, but I just can’t remember what.”

“Well maybe you should sleep some more and find out what it is.” The physician went back to his notes.

“Nice try,” Dan Ho said. “I’m not wasting another day here.”

“It’s not wasting. It is called recuperating.”

With some struggle, Dan Ho got to his feet and put his shirt on.

“You never listen, do you?” The physician sighed, not bothering to look up from his paperwork. “Take the vial by your bedside. It will help with the pain. Try not to get into any fights.”

Dan Ho took the vile to his room. On the way there he passed by several Shadowmen and girls who all scurried out of his way as he went past. No one dared to come up to him then. Everyone suspected he would be upset after being humiliated publicly three days ago.

It had shocked everyone when the Headmaster’s golden boy, her right-hand man, had seemingly disobeyed her order and jumped in to save the Princess. The Headmaster had immediately called a public flogging, wherein Dan Ho had explained why he had done what he had done.

“Headmaster, you told me you still needed her. Is this no longer the case?” Dan Ho had asked as he dangled from two poles he was strapped up against. Each of his wrists was bound to a post, his arms open wide, his bare back smooth and still untainted by any such punishment.

“Indeed, I do need her.” The Headmaster tilted her head backwards. “Which is why it is just twenty lashes, and not a hundred.”

Regardless of the number, the punishment still hurt, not only physically but at a deeper level.

He had disappointed the Headmaster, betrayed her trust in him. Dan Ho felt he couldn’t hold his head up anymore, couldn’t look any of the other students in the eye. He no longer deserved to be called a prodigy. The punishment he had faced had been just and well-deserved.

But he believed in his reasoning. The Princess should be kept alive. There was still use for her, especially when there was a scheme to be uncovered.

The Headmaster had taken him into her confidence and revealed that there were certain shifts afoot in the palace.

“They always do this. Everyone is always vying for the crown. The King fears it’s loss so he schemes against his own son. The Prince wants the crown so he schemes against his own sister. And the concubines and consorts all want a piece, so they scheme against anyone and everyone. Everyone in the palace wants the crown. And only the most ruthless survive. But we can use that to our advantage. For too long the Shadowmen have been relegated to working from the sidelines, always afraid of getting caught. No, with the King gone, we must strike. Which is why I want to use the Princess to return to where I belong. Where we all belong.”

Dan Ho felt a surge of admiration for the Headmaster for her plan would mean the betterment of all of the orphans here at the school. He wondered if her plan would succeed. If the Shadowmen could live like ordinary swordsmen instead of monsters of the night. If they could have normal lives.

Perhaps they wouldn’t even have to live as assassins. Perhaps they could serve nobility instead.

Dan Ho reached his quarters, where just outside, Eun Dan stood, waiting for him.

His jaw reflexively clenched as he anticipated what news she would bring.

“Dan Ho!” Eun Dan lit up when she saw him. Her smile caused a lurch in his heart. He couldn’t help but smile back although his was more restrained than her’s.

“Dan-ah.”

“The Princess is looking better.” Eun Dan whispered, hiding her mouth from the side with and open hand, as if it would keep others from hearing.

Dan Ho smiled at her silliness. “Glad to hear.”

“She ate everything, like you wanted.”

Dan Ho nodded as they entered into his room. While the space wasn’t small, it felt constricting with her there. At such close a proximity, Dan Ho felt he would easily lose his cool. Part of him wished he didn’t have to keep it in the first place.

“But is it really wise? Headmaster might—”

“Don’t worry about the Headmaster. She will never know you were involved.”

Eun Dan bit her lip and Dan Ho felt like groaning in despair. “I was worried more about you.”

He felt touched. “Don’t worry, Dan-ah. Nothing bad will happen. I promise.” He smiled assuringly.

“Good.” Eun Dan pressed her lips together.

A moment of awkward silence passed. It wasn’t as if Dan Ho didn’t have anything to say to Eun Dan. In fact, everything he ever wanted to say was to her and her alone. But he knew he couldn’t babble in front of her. Knew he couldn’t complain about his back or rattle of his unnecessary worries to her. He had no right to. Only one person did.

“Well, I just thought I should update you before going back.” Eun Dan said, rolling on her heels. “Don’t worry about dinner. Hwang Rin will cover the night shift.”

“Um-hmm.” Dan Ho simply nodded, biting down his tongue.

Eun Dan still stayed. Dan Ho felt she still had something to tell him but felt reluctant to.

“Is there anything else, Dan-ah?” He probed gently.

Eun Dan bit her lip, “Had Hwang Rin spoken to you about… anything?”

Dan Ho shook his head, “Is there something he has to tell me?”

Eun Dan’s spine straightened up like a rod. “No!” She said, a little too loudly. “There’s nothing! Okay, bye!”

She left abruptly, leaving Dan Ho utterly confused.

Dan Ho stared at the space she occupied in his room for about four seconds before shaking himself out of it. He stared at the vial the physician had given him and decided he would take it before bed. For now, he would endure the pain.

Because pain was something he could deal with. Pain was a good distraction from the problem he was actually avoiding.

Please. He’s all I have left.

Dan Ho closed his eyes, but that made it worse. Every time his eyes shut he saw Sam Chul, looking like a living corpse, hanging by the poles, looking up at him while the Princess stood in front of him with her arms wide open.

Sam Chul had looked utterly betrayed and hopeless. He had turned to Dan Ho in surprise and perhaps hope that Dan Ho would save him.

He was your friend. How could you just watch?

With a shuddered breath, Dan Ho opened his eyes, his nose stinging. He focused on his headache and the throbbing pain on his back and it brought him some peace.

He would get over it. He always did. This was his job, dealing in death. And people died all the time, Sam Chul was no different. If he hadn’t died today, he would have died tomorrow. There was no stopping death.

With this, Dan Ho went collected his weapons and went to the training grounds. He could hear the physician groaning in frustration, scolding him not to make huge movements while his wounds were still healing. But a part of him didn’t want them to heal. Part of him wanted the stinging pain to remain.

Ignoring the side-eyed glances he got from everyone, Dan Ho made his way to the secluded part of the grounds. The heat of the noon sun made him sweat even before he had taken his sword up so he took off his shirt, revealing his lashes for all of the Shadowmen still practicing. They all stared at each other, momentarily pausing before going back to their own practice.

Dan Ho didn’t need the extra exertion. But it helped him think, helped him clear his mind. He took out his sword and began to move it around in a few warm-up moves.

I am sure that in your screwed up mind that it may have seemed like you were saving him by telling the Headmaster everything. You told her about how he treated me, didn’t you? I know that’s why she had him killed. I know it!

Whiplash. Each word felt like a slap across the face. Dan Ho didn’t want to think about the Princess right now. He didn’t even want to acknowledge she existed. He focused on his breathing as his sword swished away at the wind.

After warmups he moved to the wooden pole where he could strengthen his agility and movement with the blade. He started with basic, routine steps before advancing to some harder moves, all the while focusing on his breathing and keeping his hand steady.

You monster! You bastard!

Smack! His wrist ended up hitting the pole. Dan Ho jumped at the sudden pain, rubbing his hand furiously to lessen the bruising.

Well, I am a monster. Why was she expecting anything different?

Dan Ho closed his eyes and breathed, focusing on nothing but the taut pull of his muscles and the welcome pain that came with exercise. He opened his eyes again, focusing on his wooden opponent.

Slash! Slash! Slash! His sword moved through the air like knife through water. Soundlessly, without resistance. He ignored all the voices in his head, all the taunts of certain princesses and all the nightmare-inducing images of dying friends and only focused on his blade.

I am sure that in your screwed up mind that it may have seemed like you were saving him by telling the Headmaster everything. You told her about how he treated me, didn’t you? I know that’s why she had him killed. I know it!

Go away. Dan Ho screamed in his head. Go away, go away, GO AWAY!

But something in the Princess’s words nudged at his brain.

You told her about how he treated me, didn’t you? I know that’s why she had him killed. I know it!

No, no one could have told her. The only people who knew were the only people Dan Ho trusted. None of them could have betrayed Sam Chul that way.

The Princess didn’t know it yet, but the Headmaster was smart. Far more than the average human. Her intelligence was stuff of legend. Dan Ho was certain the Headmaster figured it out all on her own. He put the Princess’s words to rest and focused solely on what was in front of him.

Dan Ho soon became aware of the crowd that was forming around him. This always happened. Even at home, there were always spectators abound. Girls watching from afar giggling giddily. Dan Ho often smirked smugly to himself when he saw the girls fawning over him as they were now. And why shouldn’t they? He was quite handsome after all.

The boys watching from up close, hoping to learn something. But Dan Ho was too quick to be observed. His movements were too fast. No one could ever hope to glean any skill from him unless he taught it himself.

The thought of teaching brought him back to Sam Chul. How he had tried to tech the lovable lug about paying attention, being more shrewd, more ruthless.

Bang! The wooden pole splintered in half as Dan Ho’s sword cut it straight through horizontally, sending splinters flying everywhere. The students gasped. One girl let out a muffled scream. Dan Ho himself stood surprised.

Quickly collecting his sword and it’s sheath, his shirt and other things, he made his way through the crowd and back to his room, shutting the door behind him, as if he could shut out his thoughts too.

His hand was shaking. He pressed his forehead against the door, hoping for some kind of reprieve. Any kind.

Reprieve came in the form of a knock.

“Yah, you in there?”

Hwang Rin. Yes! His friend and only ally. Dan Ho needed a friend right now. Hurriedly he opened the door.

“Man, you’re a sight for sore eyes,” Hwang Rin said, shuffling in to his room. “I was looking for you at the infirmary, but Doc said you’d left.”

“Didn’t feel like staying.”

“I figured. But I couldn’t be too sure. I thought…” Hwang Rin didn’t finish the sentence. Dan Ho knew what he meant. They couldn’t trust the news that one of them was “being treated” anymore. They knew now that sometimes, this was a lie. “Anyway, I’m glad you’re back in shape.”

Dan Ho nodded.

“But something’s bothering you.” Hwang Rin picked up.

Dan Ho rubbed his face. At least in front of Hwang Rin, he didn’t have to hold his tongue. “I can’t stop thinking about it.”

“I know.” Hwang Rin nodded. “Have you been to see Dong Su?”

“He’s shut himself up in his quarters. Won’t come out.” Dan Ho had tried to reach out to the third member of what remained of his group. But Dong Su had withdrawn into himself after killing Sam Chul.

“Well he has to pull himself together. Or else the Headmaster—”

“Don’t. Don’t say it.” Dan Ho said, worrying that if he said it out loud, it would happen.

“We have to be grown ups about this.” Hwang Rin argued.

“We can be grown up tomorrow. Let us be ourselves today.”

Hwang Rin nodded, understanding. “It’s not a big deal. We have to get through this. We’ve been through worse before.”

Dan Ho rubbed the back of his neck but said nothing.

“Listen,” Hwang Rin started, “I have some news.”

Dan Ho nodded, prompting him to continue.

“The Headmaster… she’s granted me marriage with Eun Dan.”

The world stopped spinning for a full minute. Dan Ho stopped breathing.

As selfish as the thought was, Dan Ho had been glad that they were not allowed to marry. It meant that even though Eun Dan was with Hwang Rin, she still couldn’t be his wife. It meant that while Eun Dan could never be his, she could never properly belong to Hwang Rin either.

But now…

“When? H-How? How did she ever—”

“Just today. I decided to tell her. Eun Dan and I… we were tired of hiding all this time. And after I nearly lost her… I couldn’t just sit around and do nothing. What if she had died, Dan Ho? What if I had lost her forever? I wouldn’t be able to live without her. So, we decided we would risk it and… I confessed. And since I did it before she could catch me, she pardoned me.”

Dan Ho couldn’t believe what he was hearing. This was unheard of.

“Hwang Rin, you’re sure she won’t punish you like—”

“No, she’s promised, Dan Ho. She was happy for us and everything.”

Happy? The Headmaster? The world had to have turned upside down. There was no way in Hell or in Heaven that the Headmaster could have allowed something like this.

“Even if she wasn’t. I don’t care. I don’t care if we die now. I know now that life’s too short to worry about all this. Of course, we can’t get married immediately. She said we would have to wait but… It will happen, Dan Ho. At least it’s a possibility now.”

Silence. Hwang Rin was probably waiting for Dan Ho to congratulate him on this accomplishment. No one had ever been pardoned for something like this.

“I… I can’t believe it.” Dan Ho said, forcing a smile on his face. “I’m—I’m happy for you, Hwang Rin.” Dan Ho enveloped Hwang Rin in a hug and awkwardly, Hwang Rin hugged him back.

“Thanks, Ho-ya.”

The air was suddenly heavy in the room. Dan Ho plastered on a wide grin but it didn’t reach his eyes. Hwang Rin pretended not to notice Dan Ho’s lack of enthusiasm.

“I still… I still cannot believe it.” Dan Ho was certain this was a dream and he would wake up from it and promptly forget everything.

But no, it was real. Hwang Rin was sitting in front of him, telling him the impossible had happened.

“Well, I will let you rest. You look like you need it.” Hwang Rin slapped Dan Ho on the back just before remembering that he wasn’t supposed to.

“Oof!” Dan Ho winced, bending forward in pain.

“Ah, sorry!”

“Don’t worry about it.” Dan Ho choked out.

The rest of the day went by in a blur. Dan Ho lost track of time as he processed this new piece of information.

Eun Dan and Hwang Rin. Getting permission from the Headmaster to marry.

How? How had that happened. And more importantly, why?

The only person who could answer that was the Headmaster, and Dan Ho was still too wrecked with guilt to face her. But he was happy for his friend. Despite his feelings, he was happy for the two of them. Marriage meant that Eun Dan could stop working at the brothel. It meant that she could have an honest life. Well, as honest a life as an assassin could have.

Dan Ho didn’t even notice it was nightfall till a junior Shadowman came to collect him for dinner.

“Sunbae, shall I bring you your dinner in your room again?”

Dan Ho had asked for his dinner to be delivered to his room the night before so that he could sneak it away to the Princess. Tonight however, Hwang Rin would be taking care of it for him.

“No,” Dan Ho answered through the closed door. “I’ll be joining everyone in the hall.”

But Dan Ho didn’t feel hungry. So instead of having dinner, he went out for a walk. His feet followed a path of their own as he only followed his thoughts.

Hwang Rin and Eun Dan… allowed marriage.

There had to be a catch somewhere. There had to. The Headmaster didn’t bend her rules for anybody. Not even him.

Somehow, his steps had led him to the dungeons. He was going down the steps that led to the cold, dark cells before he could think twice about it. At this time, the Princess was the last person he wanted to see. But oddly enough, she was also the first.

The dungeons were like a maze, with long corridors of confining cells lining both sides. Dan Ho followed the path that led to Song Hwa. He was just about to turn a corner when he heard voices.

Was Hwang Rin there already to give her the dinner? He was supposed to wait till everyone went to sleep.

Dan Ho hugged the corner wall, straining to see who stood at the end of it.

Three figures, one at the front while the other two stood a little way back. They were just outside the Princess’s cell. It couldn’t have been Hwang Rin. He would have gone inside.

Voices echoed off of the walls and he could barely make out what was being said. But Dan Ho picked up the unmistakable commanding voice of the Headmaster. He didn’t breathe as he eavesdropped on their conversation.

“Perhaps after three days and nights in the cell, you have come to your senses, Princess.”

After the pause, the Princess answered, “I’ll do it. I will take you to the Palace.”

Dan Ho’s chest contracted. The Princess had agreed to the Headmaster’s demands. She would be escorted back to the Palace.

She would be returned home.

Dan Ho wasn’t as happy about the news as he felt he should have been. He didn’t have time to ponder why as the Headmaster continued.

“Splendid!” She said in an uncharacteristic display of emotion. “I am glad I no longer have to starve you down here. My men have food. Eat. And then they will take you to the baths. You will get ready. We will leave tomorrow. The preparations are already done.”

“You knew that I would say yes?”

“Why of course! If you were as smart as I suspect, you would realize that there was no other way.”

The Princess chuckled sardonically, “You’re quite the bully, General Ji Ahn. I can’t believe I looked up to you.”

“I would advise you to continue to do so, Princess Song Hwa. You can learn far more from me than any other pompous old fool who thinks he is above women.”

There was heavy silence.

“Normally people stop speaking ill of someone once they are dead.” The Princess said quietly, making Dan Ho realize that the Headmaster had referred to the King when she had mentioned pompous old fools.

“I have never understood this notion, however. Death does not pardon a man of his crimes.”

“Does it pardon a woman?”

The Headmaster laughed. “Oh, Princess. You are lucky I am in a good mood. Or I would have taken an offence to your sharp tongue.”

“Lucky me.” Dan Ho couldn’t stop the smile tugging at his lips at the Princess’s sarcastic tone.

“Don’t you want to know why I am in a good mood?”

“I suspect you will tell me regardless of my interest.”

Dan Ho heard saw the Headmaster lean close to the bars. He couldn’t catch the entirety of the sentence but he heard the words, “…suspected of killing the precious Princess and her soon to be husband!”

Dan Ho couldn’t hear what was said next. The Princess hissed something at the Headmaster. He could see her hands clutching at the Headmaster’s collar through the bars. The Headmaster didn’t seem concerned, returning the Princess’s hiss with hushed retorts of her own.

Quite abruptly, the Headmaster yanked her collar away from the Princess’s grasp and turned. “Give her something to eat. I can’t have her dying on me.” With long strides, the Headmaster made her way out, towards where Dan Ho was standing.

Dan Ho quickly scrambled to hide in another corridor, waiting for her to pass by. Just as he came out of the Shadows, he heard the footsteps of the two Shadowmen that the Headmaster had left behind to feed the Princess and quickly retreated. He heard them talk as they drew near.

“She didn’t look that hungry if you ask me.” One of the Shadowmen was saying to the other.

“What does it matter? The Headmaster doesn’t care. Did you hear what she said? She’s happy.” The word was emphasized because the restrained and reserved Headmaster rarely expressed any emotion beyond her usual distant demeanor.

“Speaking of which, did you hear? She pardoned some Shadowmen of a huge crime today.”

“What? Who is it? Tell me, tell me.”

“I don’t know who. They’re keeping it very hush. Just think. That fatty Sam Chul could have been saved too, had he waited a day.”

“Sam Chul got unlucky. I heard one of his own party told on him.”

Dan Ho’s ears perked at this. But the Shadowmen were out of earshot now. He had to follow closely behind to catch up on the conversation.

“—and the Headmaster let him live because he snitched on Sam Chul. Otherwise with the crime he committed, she would have killed him too.”

“You can’t trust anybody here.”

“Don’t bother about trust. Just never break the rules. I don’t know why Sam Chul had to go befriending a target. He knows it’s against the rules.”

“Idiot never graduated, remember. I bet he didn’t even study the basics.”

The two Shadowmen sniggered.

They were nearly out. Dan Ho didn’t want to follow them further. He had all the information he needed.

I am sure that in your screwed up mind that it may have seemed like you were saving him by telling the Headmaster everything. You told her about how he treated me, didn’t you? I know that’s why she had him killed. I know it!

Princess Song Hwa had been correct. The Headmaster hadn’t figured it out on her own. Someone had snitched. Someone from his own party. Someone who had gotten pardoned for snitching.

There was only one person Dan Ho could think of.

No. There’s no way.

But that would explain the unexpected shift of mood. Why Headmaster agreed to the impossible. She wouldn’t have just said yes to it. She would have expected something in return.

Something like snitching on a friend.

If Hwang Rin had snitched on Sam Chul, then the Headmaster could have pardoned him. And she would have let Hwang Rin and Eun Dan continue their relationship, maybe even grant marriage.

Dan Ho’s hands were quaking. His feed mindlessly leading him to the only cell that had a torch in it. The rest of the occupants were forced to endure the darkness.

Princess Song Hwa lay in the center of the cell, waling. She sounded like a vengeful ghost as she threw the food on the wall.

Dan Ho said nothing. Just grabbed on the bars of her cell, letting his head rest against the cool metal. She looked up when she felt his presence, her eyes widening at the sight of him.

Whether she hated him or not, whether he hated her or not, it did not matter. What mattered that in that moment, neither had anyone else to share their pain with.

“My brother… has been executed.” The Princess said, her voice drowned by her tears. She sniffed to clear up her throat. “They are saying he’s the one who had me and Cho Beom Pal killed.”

“He is the one who had you and your betrothed killed.” Dan Ho said absently.

Song Hwa looked down at her hands. “Everyone around me keeps dying. I’m starting to wonder if it’s something I’m doing.”

Dan Ho looked at her helplessly. “Cruel things happen, Princess. Sometimes it’s no one’s fault.”

Song Hwa’s eyes snapped up to him. “Cruel things only happen because of others.”

She was right if Dan Ho thought about it.

“Hwang Rin… told the Headmaster about Sam Chul.” Dan Ho confessed.

“Ha! You expect me to believe that? Or are you trying to blame someone else for your crimes.”

“This isn’t about you!” His voice boomed. Then in a much smaller voice, he said, “This is about me.” He gulped, contemplating the weight of his next sentence. “I didn’t lose one friend when Sam Chul died, Princess… I lost two.” 

Dan Ho quietly banged his head against the bars over and over. He gasped when the Princess came over and clasped her hand right above where he was holding the bar, with her pinkie touching his. Dan Ho rested his forehead on one bar. The Princess rested her head on the bar right next to it. They both looked at each other.

"I'm sorry I yelled at you." Dan Ho said.

Song Hwa shook her head. "It's okay," her voice was barely above a whisper.

The two of them remained like this. A strange and quite unexpected source of comfort for each other.

~~~~~~~

After being locked up in his room for the past four days, Dong Su eventually ventured out in the dead of the night, when no one was around.

He didn’t know what he was looking for. Vindication that his actions had been right? Or perhaps forgiveness?

The people he needed forgiveness from didn’t know anything about his crimes. They only saw a man broken from punishment. They had no idea about the leadup to it.

Dong Su poked his head out of his room to check if the coast was clear, then wobbled out, going to the outer walkway of the student house. The reason why he was wobbling was because of the loss of his toes from his left foot. He would forever feel that imbalance in his toes. He supposed he would get used to it eventually and learn to walk properly again.

“Ah, the moon is lovely tonight, isn’t it?”

“Gah!” Dong Su jumped, spinning around. His horror only increased when he found the Headmaster standing there, a full Cheshire grin on her face. “Master.” He clutched his chest as his heart beat like a hummingbird, threatening to jump out at any moment.

“You have always been too cowardly.” The Headmaster put an arm around his shoulders. Any other Shadowman would have envied the gesture, especially from their Headmaster. But Dong Su only felt bile rise up in his throat. “Come, let us take a turn about the grounds.”

She led him outside where a half moon cast a weak glow on the grounds. Torches lit their path but Shadowmen still hid in dark corners.

“I heard you have confined yourself in your room. Why? Worried I might punish you again?”

Dong Su didn’t say anything. He didn’t know what to say.

“Gwenchana!” The Headmaster squeezed his arm affectionately. “I am in a good mood these days. I am pardoning all sorts of crimes. And you, you my boy have proved your loyalty more than those two twits.”

Dong Su’s eyes widened. Surely, she wasn’t referring to Hwang Rin and Dan Ho as twits? But then who else? Those were the only two Shadowmen associated with him.

“You were right to tell me about Sam Chul. That boy would have been useless to our cause. And would have created unnecessary problems. Better to pull out the weeds before they destroy the garden.”

Dong Su felt he would throw up now, even though he hadn’t eaten much since the execution.

Sam Chul’s big eyes, wide in betrayal still haunted him. Dong Su had killed many people. The act itself hadn’t been that hard. But Sam Chul had still been one of them. Dong Su had never imagined he would be executing one of their own.

Let alone betraying him.

But he had no choice. The Headmaster had figured out how Song Hwa had managed to seduce him. And with some careful torturing, had even gotten out of him the fact that he had let her go at one point.

Perhaps if he had held out longer in his torture, maybe let a few more toes fall and a few more careful daggers pierce his torso, Sam Chul might have lived.

But no, Dong Su had caved. In pain, there were no heroes. Only the animal instinct to find a way to stop the pain. And Dong Su had found only one way.

In that moment, he had felt that it was a worthy sacrifice. Sam Chul was dead weight who would only drag their little group down. And he hadn’t even earned the right to be there. Surely, he deserved to be tortured more than him.

It was only now that Dong Su realized, that dying was the easier way out. The more difficult path was living. He had to live with his choices now, and face them everyday, like one faced their reflection in the mirror.

Dong Su was a traitor. It was a label he would carry with him everywhere.

“So what is it? Any crimes to confess?” The Headmaster shook him. “Don’t worry. I am in a very forgiving mood. Better take advantage of it, my boy.”

Dong Su hesitated. “I want to stay here. For a while. If—if that is okay.”

“You want time off?” The Headmaster looked at him. “Alright, done. I will have someone inform Dan Ho.”

The name sent a shiver down Dong Su’s spine. He couldn’t face Dan Ho. Not now. Not ever. If Dan Ho found out, he would kill him. On all matters, Dan Ho was kinder than the Headmaster. But in loyalty, he was harsher.

No, Dong Su was as good as dead if Dan Ho found it. Better to retire for now, become a ghost that Dan Ho could forget. He had no motivation to go back to the outside world anyway. Better to remain in a prison of his own making.

Chapter Text

This wasn’t a dream. This was a memory. But Dan Ho had forgotten all about it till now.

Bright light streaming in through the windows of the class. It was rare that the students were sat inside for a lecture instead of building their bodies on the training ground. But the Headmaster valued the exercise of the mind just as much as she valued the exercise of the body. Hence the lectures on art and poetry, philosophy and debate. The Shadowmen had to build intellect in order to become good assassins. But no one took these classes seriously. No one except one boy who sat on the very end of the last row of the class.

“There is no trust between men. What one feels as trust simply foolishness.” The teacher said, pacing the length of the classroom, not paying attention to the students.

He didn’t have to worry about them. The students knew that even a foot out of place would lead to severe punishment.

Dan Ho felt the brush of his pen scratching the paper as he carefully wrote down the teacher’s words, to be studied and memorized later. No one else had been bothering to write anything down.

No one except one other boy. This boy sat a little to the front, in a diagonal from Dan Ho who could see him scratch something on a piece of paper. From the movement of his brush, it did not seem that the boy was writing down words but rather drawing something.

The teacher spun on his heel and began walking in the opposite direction of the class. “Unfortunately, man is prone to foolishness, so no matter what you do, trust tends to build overtime. Which is a good thing for the Shadowmen, because we use this trust to our advantage. But beware, never to fall into this trap yourself.”

Dan Ho happened to look up just as the boy folded up the paper he was writing in and passed it to another boy sitting right beside him. Dan Ho sucked in his breath in terror. They weren’t allowed to pass notes during class.

The other boy opened up the note and something about it made him giggle uncontrollably. Fortunately, he was out of the sight of the teacher. The boy then passed this note to a third boy behind him. He opened the note and had the same reaction of sudden suppressed laughter. The third boy nearly let out a choking sound but managed to muffle it behind his hand that he slapped over his mouth.

“For if you do begin to trust anyone, even each other, then you have compromised the very nature of your profession. Do not trust anyone, boys. Not even each other. It is a double edged sword that will kill endanger not only the other person, but you as well.”

The note made its way through four other boys before it found its way to a boy in the front. Dan Ho hadn’t paid attention to the teacher since the note had started traveling around among the students. Small titters of laughter rose and fell and Dan Ho was shocked the teacher still hadn’t noticed. He was still holding his breath as the fifth boy opened up the note.

Splack! That’s what it sounded like when a blade went into a person’s throat. Dan Ho discovered that for the first time in that class.

The fifth boy never got to see what was in the note. Dan Ho took a second to realize that a small blade had been thrown into the boy’s neck. Blood spilled out from his throat with a horrifying guttural sound.

The entire class silenced. No one even dared to breathe.

“No one in class is allowed to pass notes.” The teacher said darkly, returning the hand that was extended in a throwing pose back to his side, standing straight and tall..

The boy fell over, the note in his hand now red with his blood.

“Death is nothing to Shadowmen. Death is the truth that all men must face. We simply deliver that truth,” the teacher said casually. “Today you will be learning how to kill using throwing knives.”

Dan Ho eyed the boy who had written the note. The boy had gone green and looked like he was about to throw up.

“Come along, start forming a line. Let’s get you all to the training ground.”

Everyone got up. Everyone except the boy who had written the note.

“What was on it?” Dan Ho found himself whispering, curiosity getting the better of him.

“Huh?” The boy looked up, surprised to find him there. He had striking features but all were frozen in shock.

“The note.” Dan Ho elaborated.

The boy swallowed but said nothing, looking back at the dead trainee whose blood was still pooling on the floor.

No one else seemed to be noticing the dead body. The teacher passed by it nonchalantly, without a second glance.

The students had lined up by the door. Dan Ho knew he couldn’t stay standing so he made a move towards the line.

The boy suddenly grabbed his sleeve, yanking his arm back. “Don’t tell it was me.” He whispered harshly.

Dan Ho looked back to the teacher who was standing outside. The line of boys had started moving. Dan Ho and the other boy were the only ones still at the seat.

“Please.” The boy begged in so low a voice Dan Ho barely heard it.

Dan Ho yanked his hand away and joined the line. The boy joined after him after a second.

Dan Ho didn’t remember much of the lesson that day. Training became tedious after a few years and all lessons blended into one another. But he did remember finding that boy who wrote the note behind the kitchens crying his eyes out.

He was a silent crier which was good for him. Weaklings who showed emotion were unwelcome in the assassin school. When Dan Ho discovered him, the boy jerked his head up, eyes welled up with tears, nose all red and runny. He was hugging his knees to his chest, his entire body shaking.

“I didn’t mean to let anyone die.” He sniffled. “I promise. I didn’t know the teacher was going to do that.”

Dan Ho put his hands on his hips and looked down at the boy derisively. This wasn’t how assassins were supposed to behave. Dan Ho felt like he had to report this to the teacher. Other students seemed to do that as well.

But something in the boy’s earnest eyes stopped him.

There is no trust between men. What one feels as trust simply foolishness.

Part of Dan Ho reminded him that he had a duty to report the boy. The other part made him extend his hand out to help the boy up.

The boy didn’t take it.

Dan Ho, aged eight, bent down and with his little hands wiped the tears from the boy’s face. “What was on the note?” He asked again.

The boy wiped his nose with his sleeve. Then took up a stray stick from the corner and in the sand drew their teacher’s face with exaggerated features, fangs and horns.

Dan Ho couldn’t help but chuckle.

“I’m Dan Ho.” The eight year old offered.

“Hwang Rin,” the other boy said, sniffing. “Thanks for not telling on me.”

He should have listened to the teacher back then. He shouldn’t have trusted the boy he met that day. He shouldn’t have trusted himself to know better than the school’s teachings. For indeed, Dan Ho had made a mistake in trusting Hwang Rin.

I’m sorry seonsaengnim. I’m afraid I was very foolish.

The discovery that Hwang Rin had been the one to reveal Sam Chul’s kinship with the Princess sent Dan Ho spiraling down a dangerously dark hole. He felt his chest constricting with each breath as he tried to hold himself together and appear normal.

It wasn’t as if Hwang Rin had broken a rule. Far from it, this was what Shadowmen were supposed to do. Report any and all incidents of disruptive behavior from other Shadowmen. And befriending the target was the most disruptive thing a Shadowman could do.

But Dan Ho had always thought that he and Hwang Rin had a different understanding of the rules. An understanding that they both abided by.

He had been wrong.

Dan Ho should have felt nothing at Sam Chul’s death. He had seen enough Shadowmen die that way. Yet still, Dan Ho couldn’t shake a nagging feeling that was following him every since he saw Sam Chul die. It was a gnawing feeling like something that was eating away at his heart, chewing with sharp fangs that sank in and made him bleed. The feeling caused a tremor in his hands, forcing him to curl his fingers up in a fist to prevent anyone from noticing.

The tremor began when he first saw Sam Chul be dragged on to the punishment grounds. He had curled his fingers around the balcony balustrade as he stood beside the Headmaster, his knuckles going white from the pressure. He couldn’t dare look at her for he knew what Sam Chul’s punishment implied.

He also couldn’t bear to look at Hwang Rin then, who had been standing on the other side of the Headmaster. He feared that if their eyes locked with each other’s, then the façade would fall and both of them would reveal their true feelings over what was happening.

“Disappointing, isn’t it?” The Headmaster had said, sounding bored. “I lose so many of you this way. If only you all could stay in line.”

Dan Ho had remained silent as he stood on the balcony watching his friend be carried to his death. He knew then and there that his own time was up as well. If the Headmaster was killing Sam Chul, it meant she knew that Dan Ho had fudged the truth. The next punishment would be his. Most likely he would die too, just like Sam Chul.

At that moment, Dan Ho had hoped that Hwang Rin and Dong Su would be spared for his crimes. He had taken the decision to hide Sam Chul’s transgressions all on his own. And he knew the price he would have to pay for it.

Dan Ho had all but accepted his death when the Princess tore through the crowd and jumped in front of Sam Chul. Suddenly Dan Ho wasn’t okay with death anymore.

“Master, the Princess might get hurt.” He heard himself say.

“Let her.”

“You still need her for your contract.” Hwang Rin added. Dan Ho found the strength to look at his friend then. At that time, he was glad to have Hwang Rin standing nearby.

“I will not have that girl insult me in my own territory. A lesson needs to be taught here.” The Headmaster had said.

And indeed, a lesson was learned. Dan Ho knew then and there, that lying to the Headmaster had been a huge mistake. If she had caught him, then by default, she had caught Dan Ho too. He would be the next one to be punished after Sam Chul. Knowing that death was imminent, Dan Ho did the only sensible thing he could think of. He jumped in to save the Princess. He hoped that before going into the ether, he could at least save one life, instead of taking it.

They had dragged her away, down into the smelly dungeons where the Headmaster kept the worst of the transgressors from the Shadowmen. It was a place where prisoners were sent to die in the most painful way; alone, with no food nor water to sustain them.

Some of them managed to survive longer than the others by feeding on the rats and insects that bred in the darkness. But most succumbed to death within a few days.

Dan Ho had no time to worry about that, for as soon as the Princess had been taken away, the Headmaster had called for the Shadowmen to tie him up next.

The crowd had gone silent at this announcement. The Headmaster’s golden boy, her prodigy was being called for punishment. The Shadowmen who had come forth to grab Dan Ho turned up to the Headmaster to confirm what she had ordered.

“You mean Dan Ho, Headmaster? Tie up Dan Ho?” One of them asked.

“Did I stutter?” The Headmaster raised her brow.

The Shadowmen looked at Dan Ho desperately. They all respected him, but their respect was outweighed by their fear of the Headmaster.

Dan Ho hadn’t resisted the punishment. He let himself be carried to the two poles where Sam Chul had been tied up. While the Princess had been taken away, someone had managed to collect Sam Chul’s body. A trail of blood could be seen leading away from the grounds but Dan Ho couldn’t spy his body anywhere.

His hands were tied up to the pole. His shirt ceremoniously removed.

“Bring out the whip. Dan Ho has earned twenty lashes for interfering with the punishment of Sam Chul.”

Dan Ho looked up at her in surprise. She wasn’t punishing him for lying to her about Sam Chul (which technically wasn’t a lie, rather an omission but the Headmaster was not known to bother about technicalities). Instead, she was only punishing him for jumping in to save the Princess.

She was letting him go.

She never let anyone go.

Dan Ho took the lashes without a single sound, though he had to bite down hard on the piece of wood they had given him to hold between his teeth. Once the lashes were done, Dan Ho found he was unable to move even an inch. They had to carry him to the infirmary where he passed out from the blood loss.

Once he came to, the first thought that entered his mind was of the Princess.

“She’s going to die down there.” He said groggily as he pushed away the Physician trying to hold him down.

“You need to rest! Lie down!”

“No. I need to… food…”

Dan Ho did not like revisiting the memories of how he smuggled away food and water for the Princess. For some reason, his own actions made him feel pink in the face. He did not like that feeling, so he pushed it away, along with the memory. If anyone asked, he would tell them it was for the Headmaster. Because clearly, she needed the Princess.

After making sure the Princess was taken care of, Dan Ho went to see the Headmaster in her office, where he immediately fell to the ground, bowing so profusely it felt as if the ground was about to swallow him up.

“Rise, Dan Ho,” the Headmaster said casually.

“I deserve death. I have completely betrayed you.” His voice, which was usually a confident, deep baritone came out broken and whimpering.

“Rise, Dan Ho,” the Headmaster commanded forcefully.

Dan Ho rose, shaking in the knees.

“Relax my child.” My child. She called him her child. This meant she wasn’t mad. Dan Ho let out a breath he hadn’t known he was holding. “Your punishment has been dealt with.”

Feeling the immense weight of the Headmaster’s graciousness, Dan Ho found himself bowing again.

“If it pleases you Headmaster, my life is yours. I will gladly walk myself to the—”

“There is no need,” the Headmaster waved her hand dismissively at the idea. “I have lost enough men to foolishness. And you’re the best we have. I refuse to lose you.” Leaning closer, as if sharing a secret, she said, “Besides, a little favoritism doesn’t hurt from time to time.” She winked.

Dan Ho’s heart swelled, his eyes teared up. Embarrassed, he bowed again. “I am forever in your debt, Headmaster. I am truly grateful—”

“Is there anything else I need to know?” Dan Ho raised his head to find the Headmaster’s eyes narrowed at him.

Dan Ho thought about it. If there was ever a time to come clean, it was now. The Headmaster already had guessed about Dong Su falling for Princess Song Hwa’s wiles. And now she knew about Sam Chul and his friendship with her. The only thing that remained was Hwang Rin and Eun Dan’s relationship. But that was something Dan Ho would never reveal. He would never endanger Eun Dan that way.

He would rather die.

It was a delicate balance. He cared deeply for Eun Dan. But he also valued the Headmaster above all else. And especially now that she had shown him such mercy, could he really turn his back on her like this?

“No Headmaster.” Dan Ho shook his head, knowing full well he was betraying her again. “There is nothing that happened with the Princess.” It was true. Hwang Rin and Eun Dan’s relationship had nothing to do with Princess Song Hwa. Nonetheless, he felt a lump in his throat as he swallowed his own lie. He half wished the Headmaster had killed him like Sam Chul. Then he wouldn’t have had to be in this situation.

“Good. You may leave now.”

Dan Ho thought back to how he had defended Hwang Rin, how he had protected him, his only friend in the entire school. All of his lies had been in vain.

The dots were all connecting now that he knew that Hwang Rin had traded Sam Chul’s life for his own. He had sold out the one innocent Shadowman in the entire school and all so that he and Eun Dan could have each other without the need to hide their relationship.

It was a cunning move. Dan Ho almost admired the intelligence behind it. Perhaps Hwang Rin was smarter than he had originally thought.

Dan Ho’s admiration was short lived however. All he felt now was rage.

He left the Princess in the dungeon. She would be let out of there soon now that she had agreed to whatever it was that the Headmaster had planned for her. It was one less thing to worry about.

Now Dan Ho could focus his rage on one thing and one thing only.

With quite an unusual state of alertness and clarity, Dan Ho went up to his room. He deliberated his options, deciding that there was no way he could confront Hwang Rin without causing an unnecessary ruckus. The best thing to do with what he knew was to pretend that nothing had happened, pretend he knew nothing.

Friends were to be kept close, but enemies, they were to be attached at the hip.

Dan Ho decided he would keep an eye on Hwang Rin, but he wouldn’t trust him with anything anymore. He would adopt a quiet and stealthy strategy for Hwang Rin’s betrayal. And when the moment was right, he would strike.

The plan was sound. Unfortunately, Dan Ho’s mind was not. For as soon as Dan Ho saw him the next day at breakfast in the dining hall, he was lunging for him with all the rage he had bottled up carefully the night before.

Someone screamed in shock. Someone else dropped their tray of food. Everyone else became silent. All eyes were on Dan Ho who was yanking Hwang Rin’s collar and Hwang Rin, who stood there in shock.

“Dan Ho! What are you doing?” Eun Dan’s shriek pulled him out of his fury. He looked at her, but even the sight of a girl he loved could not overcome his anger. Not this time.

Hwang Rin looked at him in calm confusion. “What are you doing, buddy?”

“Don’t.” Dan Ho said through clenched teeth. “I am not your buddy. Not after what you did to Sam Chul.”

Hwang Rin appeared confused. Dan Ho wondered whether the acting was for Eun Dan’s benefit or his. “What are you talking about?”

“I’m talking about you and Eun Dan. How is it that the Headmaster suddenly gave you two her blessing when she has never given such permission to anyone else? Tell me how the impossible happens for you, out of the blue.”

“I-I don’t know, man. She just gave it.”

“Liar!” Dan Ho shook Hwang Rin violently. “You damned liar!”

Eun Dan cried out, grabbing Dan Ho’s hands. “Dan Ho stop. What is wrong with you?”

“I’m not lying!” Hwang Rin yelled.

“You’re lying to me! Tell me what you did! Confess!” Dan Ho shook him with each sentence, ignoring Eun Dan’s weak tug at his hands. He wanted to hear Hwang Rin admit his wrongdoing himself. He wanted to see Hwang Rin’s eyes, perhaps see some guilt there over the death he caused.

“Is this about me or is it about Eun Dan?” Hwang Rin asked, his tone dark and even a little threatening. As if Dan Ho was the one who had crossed a line and not him.

Dan Ho’s hawk like eyes went wide with rage, “Don’t you dare make this about her.”

“Why not? You’re clearly freaking out because you’re jealous.”

“Stop it guys!” Eun Dan gave up trying to pull Dan Ho away.

“Excuse me?”

“You heard me. I could tell by your reaction when I told you about us that you weren’t happy. And you weren’t, were you?” Hwang Rin searched Dan Ho’s eyes for the answer and found in them the truth. That Dan Ho hadn’t been happy for the couple.

“Nice try. Your attempt to make this about me is pathetic—”

“You’ve always been jealous of me and Eun Dan. I let it slide before because you’re my friend—”

“Don’t call me your friend. We’re not friends.”

Silence. Heavy and loaded with a lot that went unsaid. Dan Ho heard thudding in his ears; his heart was pounding like a hammer.

“Is that how you want to act?” Hwang Rin asked quietly. “Just because the Headmaster allowed me and Eun Dan to be together?”

Dan Ho shoved Hwang Rin away, letting him go. “I wish it was you who had died instead of Sam Chul.”

Dan Ho didn’t mean it. But he said it any way. And he would never take it back.

Hwang Rin let out a breath of disbelief. “Fine. Have it your way.” He left, not leaving Dan Ho any chance to goad him again.

A dozen or so pairs of eyes were watching all of this unfold. They turned their faces away as Hwang Rin passed by them. Dan Ho had expected to feel some sort of victory over yelling at Hwang Rin. But all he felt was hollow.

The hollowness deepened when he saw the disappointed look Eun Dan gave him before going after Hwang Rin.

~~~~~~~

Losing Sam Chul was different to losing her father. Perhaps because in the back of her mind, a small part of Song Hwa hoped that she would find her father still alive when she returned home. But with Sam Chul… she knew for a fact that he was gone.

It bothered her how in such a short time, he had managed to become someone so important. She often found herself lost in memory of how he used to treat her and take care of her. And she would come out of her daze in surprise over the tears and dirt that caked her cheeks.

If only she could have had one more moment with him. She would have hugged him and told him how much he meant to her. She could have made sure he knew how important he was.

They had moved her to a different prison now that she had agreed to take the Headmaster back to the palace. It was her only way out and she knew that without the Headmaster on her side, she had no chance of surviving.

The new cell was above ground, well lit with a window on one side and the same door with long bars on the other. A Shadowman came with a meal three times a day. But Dan Ho nor anyone from his group ever came. She was left alone to stew in her grief, only pausing to eat or sleep.

When it was time to leave, three Shadowmen came to escort her. They let her bathe and gave her regal clothing, befitting a princess.

Guess she wants me looking the part, Song Hwa thought to herself wryly as she eyed the dark purple hanbook with black accents. There would be no mistaking who she was in these clothes. But she didn’t have time to ponder on this for long because as soon as she was dressed, the three Shadowmen escorting her rushed her off to the stables where an entire party of Shadowmen were waiting, with the Headmaster in the front.

“Our journey back won’t be as long as the journey here.” The Headmaster said, not bothering with any pleasantries. Which was just was well, Song Hwa didn’t want to exchange any greetings with her either.

The Headmaster wore what appeared to be a Shadowman version of her usual green uniform. The shirt and pants were well fitted around her form and appeared easy to move and fight in. The green was dark enough that within the shadows, the woman looked like just another Shadowman. Her short hair was slicked back and making her look as sharp as a blade.

“I suspect it will be even shorter,” the deep baritone sent shivers down Song Hwa’s spine as the speaker came from behind her, “given her royal Highness decides to play nice.”

Song Hwa eyed Dan Ho as he passed by her, joining the Headmaster. Hwang Rin came a few paces behind him. He stood to the other side of the Headmaster, pointedly not looking at Dan Ho. It was an insignificant gesture for anyone unfamiliar with the two Shadowmen. But Song Hwa knew them well by to decipher that something had happened between them.

“Ah yes, I hope the Princess will not try to escape in my care.” The Headmaster’s body was turned away from her but she was giving her the side eye. With a razor-sharp edge in her voice, she added, “Or else she will find me less generous than her previous captor.”

Song Hwa did not miss the threat. “I have no reason to run away, General Ji Ahn,” Song Hwa said simply. She saw confusion pass over Dan Ho’s face before he realized she was referring to the Headmaster.

Song Hwa did not speak after this. Merely watched as the Headmaster doled out orders to the Shadowmen who were more than happy to receive them. They all appeared in awe of their Headmaster, bowing low to her and staying on their toes, almost appearing hopeful that she would address them in any way, even if it was just to issue a task. The hold she seemed to have over the Shadowmen fascinated the Princess.

“Has he been prepared?” Song Hwa heard the Headmaster ask one of the Shadowmen as the Princess was mounting the horse assigned to her.

“Yes, Master. He is on his way.”

“He has a weak disposition. Make him ride with Dan Ho.”

At this, the Princess’s ears perked up. Immediately her thoughts went back to a dark tunnel and the feeling of strong arms around her as she rode on a horse. Song Hwa dismissed but was unsuccessful in dismissing her curiosity. Just who exactly was so weak that they had to ride with Dan Ho?

The Shadowman quickly went to fetch the person. He came back with the boy called Hyun.

Song Hwa eyed him. The boy did not look to have a weak disposition. True he was skinnier than the other boys and appeared more delicate than the rest. But certainly, if she could ride on her own, then Hyun could too.

Song Hwa tried not to stare as Hyun got on the horse with Dan Ho. Upon spying her, Hyun smiled shyly and gave her a small wave. The gesture reminded her of Sam Chul. She waved back with a reserved smile.

The Headmaster issued the order that they were to leave now. Song Hwa looked left and right before asking the Shadowman nearest to her, “Isn’t Dong Su coming?”

The Shadowman raised his brows and shrugged, “I heard he wasn’t well.”

Song Hwa’s mouth shrunk. She had hoped that at least he would show. After Sam Chul, he was the one she liked the most. She knew she would not be returning to the school after this. Now she wouldn’t even get to say goodbye to him.

"What about Eun Dan?"

"Why would she be here?"

Indeed, there were no women among them, save the Headmaster and herself. Song Hwa felt a pang of disappointment. She wouldn't get to say goodbye to Eun Dan too.

Just as Song Hwa was ready to kick her horse to move, a Shadowman walked up to her and got on her horse.

“Hey! What are you—”

“You are to take this.” From behind, he passed her a small brown bottle with what looked like some form of liquid inside. “It’s a draught to make you sleep.”

“I’m not taking this,” the Princess argued obstinately.

“You do not have a choice.” Hwang Rin called from the front, speaking through a dozen Shadowmen that stood on their horses between him and the Princess. “The entrance to the school is a carefully guarded secret. We cannot have you learning what it is.”

Song Hwa knew there was no point in arguing. She turned back to look at the Shadowman who was to ride with her. His face was hidden behind the cloth wrapped over his nose, hiding all but his eyes. She turned back to see Dan Ho who wasn’t paying an ounce of attention to her.

Without argument, she took the liquid in one go. Being unconscious seemed like the better option.

“I’ll be woken afterwards?” She called to Hwang Rin.

“We’ll see.” He called back.

We better see, Song Hwa thought. My plan can’t work if I’m asleep the entire way.

Chapter Text

She woke with a soft gasp, her heart beating wildly in her chest, threatening to break free from her ribcage.

Water, was her first coherent thought. Her throat was parched. She felt weak. Her hands were shaking slightly.

The sky was purple, like the hanbok she had on, with black clouds rolling with the winds. They had left the school during the day. How much time had passed?

She looked around to where they had set up camp. Two, perhaps three small fires were lit at a distance from each other, each containing a small group of Shadowmen huddled together, eating animals they had caught. They spoke softly and moved soundlessly. Song Hwa had been left to a far corner where no one would bother her while she lay passed out. In the dim light of the fire, with not much help from the moon shining above, Song Hwa could barely make out who was who among the people.

She searched her person for the water bottle they had provided her. The drink revived her a big but she was still woozy from the draught. Whatever they had given her, it was stronger than the root Dan Ho had made her eat when he had brought her to the school. She remembered none of her journey nor had any recollection of being carried to where she was now.

Where were they? The place seemed familiar.

It was a small clearing in the wood. The tree she lay under coaxed some memory from her subconscious but she couldn’t quite place it. Till she remembered that this was the place she had stayed in when the Royal Guard had attacked them, when they had shot Sam Chul.

Song Hwa threw up without warning, her empty stomach retching out only the water she had just drunk and bile, for it had nothing else to deposit. It was only after she was done that she noticed she had retched all over herself.

“Aish! She’s making a mess.” Song Hwa heard someone say nearby.

A flat animal skin container of water fell in front of her. “Clean that up!” A Shadowman yelled.

Song Hwa looked up to find two of them glaring down at her with contempt. She looked around and could not find the Headmaster or Dan Ho and Hwang Rin.

“What are you doing? You’ll stink up the place.” The Shadowman said again.

“Clean up!” His companion added, kicking Song Hwa’s leg.

Humiliation washed over her as she gathered her vomit covered hanbook skirt. Dan Ho and Hwang Rin would have never treated her like this.

“Hey, where do you think you’re going?” One of the Shadowman said. It was hard to tell them apart since they all wore the same black uniform and had their faces covered at all times.

“To the lake. This water container isn’t enough to clean myself up.”

“You’re not going anywhere. Sit back down.” The Shadowman poked her right beneath the collarbone.

Song Hwa glared at him, “You’re the one who complained about the smell. Do you want it gone or not?”

“Nice try,” the other Shadowman said, “but Headmaster’s already warned us about you. You can’t escape.”

“Yeah, we have orders to shoot you if you try to run.”

“You can’t get to the palace if you shoot me.” Song Hwa called their bluff.

The first Shadowman moved closer, glaring right back at her menacingly. “No one ever said anything about killing you. Maiming you, now that’s a separate argument.”

A chill went down Song Hwa’s spine and she swallowed. The assuredness of the Shadowman was enough for her to know that he meant business. He wasn’t going to be as gentle with her as her previous captors had been. These people meant business.

Quietly Song Hwa sat back down, the rancid smell of her bile wafting up her nose, causing her to retch again. But she held the feeling back, using the water from the container to clean herself up as best she could. The two assassins seemingly disappeared but Song Hwa knew they were nearby, watching her.

“How long was I asleep?” Song Hwa tried asking aloud to the group sitting nearby.

No one answered. They didn’t even acknowledge her.

“Are Dan Ho and Hwang Rin not around?”

Pointed silence would have been better. But they were just ignoring her.

“Can I at least get something to eat?”

“Ugh, shut her up!” Someone from far groaned.

Song Hwa didn’t say anything further. She let her mind wake fully, taking in her surroundings. The sky seemed to be getting paler, rather than darker. It was when the birds began to chirp that she understood that it was morning, not night.

She had slept through the entire day.

Daylight brought to her attention the small tents that had been set up nearby. She hadn’t noticed them in her haze and in the dark. She saw the Headmaster come out of one of them, her striking figure, sharp features and green dressing standing out among the black clad men. She gave Song Hwa a nod and went the other way, doling out orders calmly.

Song Hwa looked around. Still no sign of Dan Ho.

From another tent, Hyun emerged, face puffy from sleep. He yawned, looking like a child as he did so, stretching leisurely.

He spotted Song Hwa and his eyes opened up gleefully. He waved at her, grinning.

“Good morning.” He came over. Then he wrinkled his nose as he smelled the remnants of Song Hwa’s vomit. “Goodness, you smell awful.” Then as if catching himself, he said, “Ah! I meant… sorry, I really don’t mean to be rude. It’s just—”

“I puked before.” Song Hwa explained.

“Aaaah!” He exclaimed. “Makes sense. Would you like to go to the stream nearby to wash up?”

The offer was given so casually, Song Hwa felt a whiplash. She looked at the other Shadowmen who had started gathering up the tents, planning on resuming their journey.

“I don’t think I’ll be allowed to.”

“Nonsense! Master would surely want you clean.” He tugged at her arm, prompting her to stand.

Song Hwa followed Hyun. When she was still a Princess in the palace, everywhere she went, people scurried out of the way to make room for her. Sometimes huge crowds would part just for her. Song Hwa had forgotten that feeling ever since she left the palace. But walking behind Hyun reminded her of that.

All of the Shadowmen jumped out of the way as he walked uninterrupted. Although some Shadowmen raised their brows at her, none of them raised any concerns that she was with him. Song Hwa found this to be very interesting.

“So, Hyun,” Song Hwa said casually, “if you’re not a Shadowman, then what is it that you do?”

“Oh, I don’t do much of anything,” Hyun offered without thought. Song Hwa knew then and there that he would be easy to crack.

“Well, you must do something. Everyone at the school works in some way or the other, don’t they?”

Hyun was silent. Song Hwa wondered whether she had misjudged just how simpleminded Hyun could be. They had reached the lake by then and Song Hwa walked up front and saw Hyun’s face.

He was blushing.

“You’re right. Everyone else earns their keep. But I’m weak you see. Headmaster says that if I become ill from exertion then that would cause more problems.” He scratched his nose. Song Hwa looked at him. As lean and gangly as he appeared, he did not seem sickly or weak. “I mostly just stay in my room and study,” he continued.

“Oh yeah? What do you study?” Song Hwa bent by the edge to clean up her skirt. The vomit had partially dried, so Song Hwa had to rub the cloth to get some of it out.

“Just this and that.” Hyun leaned closer, “Between you and me, I really enjoy reading the fables. Headmaster disapproves but I still read them anyway.”

Song Hwa couldn’t help but grin. “I love reading stories too,” she admitted. “My mother used to read them to me and my brother every night. Young Hwa and I used to hate it but then when Eomma passed… Young Hwa started getting nightmares. It always helped to read him something to help him sleep. Then I started reading them just for myself.” Song Hwa sighed. The time when she and her brother were children, and still oblivious to court politics to see each other as competition, seemed so far away now. Song Hwa had almost forgotten the image of her brother who once used to look up to her. Catching herself Song Hwa added, “In secret of course. My father would have a fit if he found out I was more interested in fiction than fact.”

Song Hwa began scrubbing her skirt more furiously. Her eyes began to sting and anger flared in her chest. She hated how sometimes tears would threaten to fall in the most inopportune of moments.

Hyun bent down and gently put his fingers on her knuckles to stop her hands. “Headmaster packed a few extra hanbooks for you. You should change. Perhaps you’d like a bath? Maybe afterwards I can get you breakfast.”

Song Hwa nearly cried. “Okay,” she managed to choke out.

She stayed by the lake while Hyun fetched her a change of clothing. She didn’t even bother to evaluate if she could run away. With so many Shadowmen traveling with her, she was sure she would die before she passed even a mile.

Hyun brought her clothes and then left her to clean herself up. Song Hwa’s first instinct was to group him in the same category as Sam Chul. But she found she couldn’t. She couldn’t let herself like Hyun. The act seemed painful.

Song Hwa bathed quietly, half present, half lost in thought. Absentmindedness had not been one of her traits, and yet she was in this strange state all the time these days. Song Hwa was distractedly rubbing her shoulders when suddenly the hairs on the back of her neck stood up and she found her mind forcing her to be alert.

Someone was watching her.

And to her surprise, she wasn’t unhappy with the thought.

There was only one person whose presence caused her to become so alert. And Song Hwa was all to happy to finally get a moment alone with him. All too recklessly, she turned to see if she could spot Dan Ho.

She found him, hiding up in the trees again. . Dan Ho had mentioned plenty of times that Shadowmen were impervious to the wiles of women so she figured he would not care for her nakedness. Her body was covered under the water of the lake anyway. All anyone could see was her arms and shoulders.

She swam nearer to the edge and almost called out to him. But then she noticed something was off. He was standing… differently. Even though she couldn’t pin point what it was, she could still tell that the Shadowman watching her stood differently. And he was shorter, less graceful looking.

He wasn’t Dan Ho.

Song Hwa’s skin crawled. “I can see you!” She called to the Shadowman. He did not move. “Hey! I can see you!”

Still no movement. Song Hwa turned away, hoping to hide herself as much as she could beneath the water. Mood soured, she quickly scrubbed away the sweat and dirt and got out while holding up her clothes. She had to conduct a contortionist act just to dress herself without revealing any skin.

Sharp irritation caught in her veins like fire catching an alcohol soaked cloth. At the same time, embarrassment flamed her cheeks. She reminded herself that no one knew she was expecting Dan Ho. Then she reminded herself that her own conclusions about her feelings were foolish. Of course she wasn’t waiting for Dan Ho. Last time she was here, he had been the one to keep an eye on her and she had simply become accustomed to his company.

That was all.

Regardless, she felt a desperate need to punch the first Shadowman she saw but restrained herself from doing so when she reached back to their camp.

Food had been set out for the Shadowmen. Many of them bustled about, distributing plates of side dishes and bowls of rice. In the corner where meals were being prepared, Dan Ho stood, working some dish in a pot over a flame. His mask was off and his concentration was on his task.

Her irritation simmered down. From another corner, a hand waved to her.

“Princess, here!” Hyun called.

The Headmaster’s head whipped up from beside him in surprise. She narrowed her eyes at Song Hwa so sharply that Song Hwa nearly choked on her breath.

That woman can make a person’s heart seize just by looking at them, Song Hwa thought fearfully. Despite her reservations, she still joined Hyun for breakfast.

No one raised any issues with her being there so Song Hwa quietly remained by Hyun’s side. No one greeted her either. It was as if she was invisible. Almost like a shadow. So this is how these Shadowmen feel, she wondered.

To the Headmaster’s other side was Hwang Rin. Song Hwa thought back to what Dan Ho had told her in the dungeons. Hwang Rin had told the Headmaster about Sam Chul’s behavior. He had been the one that Sam Chul had gotten killed.

Song Hwa swallowed thickly as she mulled this information over. Her eyes flicked over to Dan Ho who was sitting on the farthest side, eating away quietly.

His posture was different from the rest. He sat straighter than the rest, his frame set in graceful lines and sharp edges. The way he ate also screamed fine breeding. It almost felt like he had been trained in manners since birth.

Song Hwa had to pull her eyes away lest anyone get suspicious of the Princess staring at only one particular Shadowman. She set her eyes on another assassin sitting near Dan Ho, pretending to study him. Then moved on to the one next to him. Then finally, she allowed herself to glance at the Headmaster.

She too sat differently than the rest. But her posture was rigid, almost inflexible. Her motions were restrained and heavy. Every bite at her food was a snap, every swallow felt forceful. Where Dan Ho’s movements were fluid and effortless, hers felt rehearsed and enforced. She sat more like a calloused general and less like someone who could be mistaken as a royal.

Song Hwa went back to her meal and was about to take a bite when she saw something very interesting.

“Eat up. You need your strength.”

The voice almost didn’t sound like General Ji Ahn. It was soft, almost feminine. And tender. She was putting a piece of meat from her bowl on to Hyun’s. Hyun was silently protesting with the shake of his head, purely out of modesty and shyness. The Headmaster jerked up and down her chin to refuse his politeness, coaxing him to take it.

Song Hwa wondered if such attentions were paid to the other students. She found no evidence that they were. The Headmaster seemed only concerned with Hyun’s wellbeing.

“Find anything interesting, Princess?” The Headmaster said suddenly, without looking up. Song Hwa realized she had been staring too conspicuously.

Although she was surprised, Song Hwa pretended not to be affected, “Not really. Watching you all eat is quite boring.”

The Headmaster chuckled. “Perhaps if you find anything entertaining you would share it with me. I find travels to be tedious as well.”

Song Hwa nodded. Then quickly picked up on something. “I thought you weren’t allowed anywhere in the Kingdom.”

“I am not.” The Headmaster said, chewing.

“Then where were you travelling to?”

The Headmaster was silent. Hwang Rin paused in the middle of picking up a pickle with his chop stick. The Headmaster let out an airy laugh. “Clever girl,” she sounded impressed. “I was referring to my time before my banishment, however. I was quite the traveler before your father forced me away in the mountains.”

Song Hwa saw Hwang Rin awkwardly blink as he slowly chewed on both his food and the information being presented to him.

“Why were you banished?” Song Hwa dared to venture further into the conversation. “The historical archives don’t say much about the reason.”

The Headmaster’s eyes flicked to her. “I am going to share that story with you soon enough, Princess.”

And that was the end of that. Song Hwa couldn’t think of anything else to say.

Near the end of the meal however, when Hyun had gotten up after finishing his meal, she came to a conclusion. She leaned in to the Headmaster just as she was getting ready to get up.

“General, your Shadowmen don’t know about who you are, do they?” She said softly. Hwang Rin froze in place.

The Headmaster turned to Song Hwa and it felt as if a beacon had been directed towards her, it’s brilliant light burning Song Hwa’s skin. The Headmaster’s attention felt dangerous and threatening. Song Hwa felt like puking again.

“They only know what they need to stay alive.” It was all she offered before leaving.

Song Hwa didn’t know whether it was a threat or simply the truth. So, she took it as neither. Simply a confirmation that no one else but her knew that the Headmaster was General Ji Ahn. Song Hwa wondered if anyone else had even read about the only female general of their army.

After breakfast everyone set out to collect their things and get ready to continue their travels. Song Hwa found nothing better to do so she walked up to Hyun who also appeared unoccupied.

Hyun was bent over something in his hands when she went near him.

“What have you got there?”

Hyun jumped, startled. “Oh! It’s you.” He held up his hands that appeared to be cupping something. Song Hwa bent closer and saw a small sparrow tucked away in his fingers. The bird chirped, as if happy to be held there, while Hyun gently stroked its head with his thumb.

“Aw! That’s so tiny.” Song Hwa marveled at the tiny creature. It’s beady little eyes looked up at her curiously.

Hyun opened up his fingers and let the bird rest on his hand. The sparrow didn’t seem to be in a hurry to fly away.

“Is the wing broken?” Song Hwa asked.

“No. Animals just like me.” Hyun answered, stroking the bird’s belly, a gesture it seemed to enjoy. He smiled at the little thing as he used his free hand to pull out a piece of bread and offer it to the bird.

The bird nibbled at the bread. Then it broke off a chunk of it and flew away, most likely to share the food with its family.

Song Hwa rolled on her heels. “I like birds too. Want to see me call one?”

Hyun smiled up at her. “Sure.”

Song Hwa let out a low whistle, one taught to her by Lord Ahn Hyun when she was a little girl. She whistled in a small tune then waited for something from the trees. When nothing emerged, she whistled again, sounding like a singing bird.

The branches moved and from between them, a carrier pigeon hopped down from branch to branch, till it reached the branch nearest to Song Hwa.

“Aw, it doesn’t trust me.” Song Hwa pouted.

“Allow me.” Hyun copied the whistle Song Hwa had produced, holding out his delicate hand. Song Hwa was taken aback by how delicate his wrist was. It was daintier than hers.

The pigeon hopped down on Hyun’s fingers. Song Hwa clapped at him. “Woah, that was impressive.”

She held out her own finger for the bird to hop on. The pigeon seemed to be looking at Hyun for approval.

Song Hwa chuckled, “Are you blessed with the language of birds?” She asked.

Hyun shook his head. “No.” Biting his lip he elaborated, “I don’t have much company back at the school. Everyone else is always busy training. The only interaction I get is with animals. It’s not hard to understand them after a while. Headmaster doesn’t like it though. She says they mess up the paperwork in her office.”

Song Hwa’s ears perked up, “You take animals in her office?”

Hyun nodded, “It’s where I study most of the time.”

Interesting, Song Hwa thought. “Does anyone else study there?”

“No. Just me.”

“Where do they study?”

“Oh, they have a library with a huge collection of books.”

“Why don’t you go there too?”

Hyun shrugged, “I dunno. I’ve just always had the office.”

Very interesting.

Hyun brought his fingers closer to Song Hwa’s, almost touching. The bird hopped from his finger to hers and thus, Song Hwa managed to get the pigeon in her hand. She giggled as the tiny talons dug into her skin.

“It tickles.” She said. Hyun grinned back.

Behind Hyun, Song Hwa saw Dan Ho standing, staring at them. From a distance, with their hands so close to each other, the wrong impression might be given. Song Hwa felt a jolt of elation but it quickly died as she realized that if Dan Ho saw them, then others did too.

And others would report to the Headmaster.

Song Hwa quickly distanced herself from Hyun, scaring the pigeon away from her hands. “I should go.” She said, brushing her skirt.

Hyun simply nodded. “Let me know if you want to spend more time with the birds again.”

Song Hwa smiled, “I will.”

Song Hwa couldn’t quite figure out why, but something about Hyun always managed to dislodge a forgotten memory of Young Hwa from when they were both children. Hyun’s ability to attract animals reminded her of how she and Young Hwa used to chase around rabbits in the palace gardens. For some reason they always went to Young Hwa but never her. Song Hwa remembered pushing Young Hwa into a puddle of mud when she got mad that he managed to grab a rabbit and she couldn’t.

The brother and sister still had love between them back then. Now Young Hwa was the reason she was stuck with the Shadowmen while people around her died left and right and she could do nothing to stop it. Song Hwa loathed her brother so deeply that she wanted to strangle him in his sleep.

Strangely enough, with everything that had happened, Song Hwa hadn’t thought about Young Hwa even once before meeting Hyun. Now he was all she could focus on.

Perhaps it was because she had limited options to choose from, given that everyone else was gone.

“Hey, Hyun-ah,” Song Hwa said, deciding that the boy would not mind if she extended a form of familiarity, “you and I seem to have so much in common. I wonder if there are other interests we share. Say for example… do you like to draw?”

“Oh, I love to draw!” Hyun beamed.

“Me too! You wouldn’t happen to have a spare parchment and charcoal, would you?”

~~~~~~~

Dan Ho had developed a strange habit recently.

He had many small daggers hidden under his sleeves. Often when his thoughts would stray to either the Princess or their last visit to this clearing, he would unconsciously slip one of the daggers from his sleeve to his hand and gently press the blade against his palm, pressing it just enough that the blade wouldn’t cut him deeply, but it would leave a slight mark on his skin.

The cool blade on his palm was calming. It helped keep the random trembling episodes at bay. For an assassin was nothing if his hands became useless and lost their precision. He had to keep them steady and for now, this seemed to be doing the trick.

“Where’s the Princess?” One of the Shadowmen asked, not really directing the question at anyone in particular. Dan Ho focused on gathering his things and decided not to look up lest he be called upon to answer.

“She had a tendency to roam, that one.” Another Shadowman commented. “I don’t like it. I’m always anticipating some escape routine.”

“I know. I heard the stories from Hwang Rin. The Princess is a handful.” A third added.

The small dagger slipped into Dan Ho’s hand without second thought. Having it there had become instinct now.

“I’ve never traveled with a…” the first Shadowman lowered his voice for the word, “target before.”

“I know! It feels wrong somehow. I don’t know how Dan Ho bared it for even a day. It feels like living with livestock meant for slaughter.”

He palmed it tightly, making sure it would sting but not cut him.

“Did you see how she’s always chumming up with Hyun?”

Dan Ho hissed and the blade fell with a soft thud. He had accidentally cut himself. Luckily, no one seemed to have noticed.

“I’m surprised the Headmaster is letting her. She would have had our heads for even nearing him.”

“Ah the privilege of the wealthy. Even as a target, royalty gets treated differently.”

“Where’s the Princess?” This question came from a Shadowman who had just walked up to the group. He was one of the few who served the Headmaster directly.

“We don’t know.”

“Well, someone better find her before the Headmaster starts asking. We’re just about ready to leave.”

The Shadowman left. All eyes simultaneously turned to Dan Ho.

“What?” Dan Ho said, his voice the deepest among them.

“You know her the best. Go find her.”

Dan Ho rolled his eyes. “She’s probably by the water. Go look for her there.” He bent down to replace the dagger in his sleeve.

“You think she’s taking another bath?” One of the men asked, grinning from beneath the cloth that covered his lower face.

“Yah! Did I tell you? She spotted me last time.” The Shadowman that had been assigned to watch the Princess previously suddenly exclaimed.

“What do you mean?” the other asked.

“I was hiding among the trees and she just… she just looked at me. Even called out to me. I pretended not to listen, of course. But it was uncanny.” The man shivered. “That’s never happened before.”

“I do not like her. I do not like her at all,” a Shadowman said, shaking her head.

“She’s just a girl.” Dan Ho said, breaking his silence and looking everyone down his nose. “You’ll sound paranoid if you make her anything more than that.”

With that statement, Dan Ho left to find the Princess, knowing exactly where to go.

She stood in the same spot as before, when they had been here with Sam Chul and Dong Su. She was hunched over as she stared out into the calm water. Perhaps views like these helped her cope.

As he neared, something escaped the Princess’s hands and flew up into the sky. A grey, rat like thing. Dan Ho realized it was a pigeon. He remembered seeing her holding one with Hyun.

His mood suddenly soured.

“I just need a minute.” She called back, sensing his presence.

He hadn’t taken any measure to not be heard. But it still bothered him that she could feel him there.

No, not just him. Apparently, she could sense just about anyone. “How do you always do that?”

She gasped at the sound of his voice and turned, clutching her chest. “It’s you!”

“Who else would it be?” He drawled, walking up to stand right beside her.

“One of the others.” She said, appearing shaken that he was there.

“Well apologies for disappointing you, Princess.” He said dryly. Song Hwa looked away from him, seemingly embarrassed.

They stood there in companionable silence, enjoying the view of the lake. After a minute, he spoke, “Headmaster will start asking around if we don’t go back now.”

“Are you worried about angering her or endangering me?” Song Hwa asked without looking at him.

“Obviously her,” Dan Ho said, confused at the question. “What do I have to be worried about for you?” He wasn’t. Song Hwa was pretty much safe for now. No harm would come to her now that she was under the Headmaster's protection.

“Hmm.” She said, not making any moves to leave. Dan Ho decided he had to be patient. The Princess seemed to be in a testy mood.

Song Hwa suddenly sighed. “I like this spot.”

Dan Ho nodded. He liked it too.

Another minute passed. “We should go,” Dan Ho said with more urgency.

“You really are her lapdog.” The Princess said cruelly, finally turning to him with hands behind her back. Dan Ho wasn’t affected by her tone.

“And you’re this lapdog’s captive. So perhaps you shouldn’t be so haughty.”

“Tell me, what is it about her that makes all of you run around her like a bunch of attention starved children?” She narrowed her eyes at him.

Dan Ho mimicked the gesture, “Are you jealous of the Headmaster, Princess?”

She tilted her head, “Not jealous, just curious. I must admit I’m impressed that she can inspire such loyalty through cruelty and manipulation.”

“Our Headmaster is not cruel nor manipulative,” Dan Ho snarled, shooting daggers at Song Hwa while covertly palming the one from his sleeve.

“She kills you Shadowmen off at the slightest offence.” Song Hwa pointed out.

“She has rules, and she expects us to follow them.” Dan Ho argued.

Song Hwa scoffed, “You are defending her? After what she did to Sam Chul?”

“A King does the same thing to subjects he feels have gone against him. And he even gives it a fancy name. Treason. How is that any different from our Headmaster?”

“The King only follows the law of the Kingdom. All you and your Headmaster do is break it.”

“At least we break it willingly. Your subjects are forced to be loyal to you and your family and whatever laws you see fit to impose on them. At least we have a choice.”

“And you choose her? The woman who pits all of you against each other and makes you kill for a living? Honestly, what is it? Huh? You can’t possibly tell me you admire her.”

“Why not?”

“She uses all of you. Like puppets! And makes sure you stay in line by oppressing you. How do you not see that? A leader doesn’t inspire loyalty through fear and intimidation. A leader isn’t supposed to abuse her followers.”

“We don’t fear our Headmaster, Princess,” he spat out her title. “We love our Headmaster. We love her because when all of us were discarded by everyone else and left to die on the streets, she was the one who saved us. She was the one who gave us a home and a place to belong to. There is no fear here. Only respect. And forgive me, but our Headmaster is no different to your father.”

“You better choose your words carefully, Park Dan Ho,” The Princess’s eyes flared in offense at the comparison.

“He sends of his men to wipe out an entire clan from existence simply for questioning his right to rule—”

“The Bandit Clans have committed serious crimes!”

“—and yet when we kill people, a thing, might I add, that we are actually requested to do, suddenly we’re the villains? You have no right to act so high and mighty, Princess, especially when it was your own brother that caused all of this.”

They were both silent. Angry, with their chests heaving from the argument. Song Hwa didn’t say anything but her nose and eyes suddenly got very red and Dan Ho’s face fell. Something tugged his heart down a dark, empty pit. It was the weight of regret.

“I’m sorry, I—”

“I think I would have preferred if someone else had come to collect me.” The Princess crossed her arms over her chest and turned away from him.

Dan Ho bit his lip, holding back a snarl and not wanting to say the next words on the tip of his tongue but they spilled out anyway. “Maybe I’ll send Hyun next time. You seem to enjoy his company so much anyway.” He sounded more scathing than he meant to.

The Princess turned her face to him and scrunched her nose, “Maybe I would. At least Hyun doesn’t ignore me half the time and blame me for this entire ordeal the other half.”

Dan Ho growled. “I thought you were supposed to be smart.”

The Princess whipped around, getting up in his face. “What is that supposed to mean?”

“Can you seriously expect me to act chummy with you after everything that happened?”

“Oh, so you admit it. You’re afraid of her.”

“Afraid of her? No. I am terrified of you, however.”

Song Hwa glared at him. “Of me?”

“Because the last man who was friends with you still has an arrow in his chest.”

Something warm spilled in his hand. The anger seemed to dissipate from the Princess’s face as her eyes caught something below. She gasped, her face falling. “Stop it.” She whispered.

Dan Ho's brows furrowed in confusion.

“Stop doing that.” She said, her voice barely above a whisper, as if she was afraid of speaking loudly. Gingerly, she reached out her hand to his and it was only then he noticed how tightly he was gripping the dagger.

Blood was spilling through his fingers. His palm was cut.

“Don’t touch me!” Dan Ho hissed, feeling a whiplash of emotion now that she had found out this new habit. He hurried away from her. They had to get back anyways.

“Wait!” Song Hwa ran after him and yanked him back from the arm. She whipped out a handkerchief from her pocket and quickly wrapped it around his hand. “You can’t let it bleed like this.”

As she was tying the handkerchief firmly around his cut, he noticed the pattern on the cloth. It was the handkerchief he had given to her.

Has she been carrying this all this time?

“That’s mine.” Dan Ho said quietly as he watched her work with nimble hands.

“I know.”

He didn’t know why he added the next part, perhaps it was because it was awkward to have the Princess tend to him in the middle of a fight. “Eun Dan gave it to me.”

The Princess’s hands paused. She quickly finished by tying up the knot on the handkerchief a little too tightly. “Ow!”

“We should get back. I don’t want your Headmaster to come looking for us.” She said without meeting his eye.

When they reached back they found everyone already on their horses, waiting for them. The Headmaster was stationed at the front with Hyun at her side and an empty horse for where he was to join her. He did not meet Hwang Rin’s eye as they came up.

“Where were you?” The Headmaster asked coolly.

“Forgive me, the Princess was being difficult.” Dan Ho said, mounting his horse.

The Headmaster looked at Song Hwa, “Hopefully not too difficult. Like I said—”

“Yes, yes. I remember what you said.” The Princess said dismissively. Such disrespect earned her a glare from all of the Shadowmen, and a worried look from Hyun.

The Headmaster sighed patiently, “You would do well not to go about alone, Princess. Perhaps I should assign one of my men to you.

“I wasn’t alone,” The Princess mounted her horse. “I was with Park Dan Ho.”

Dan Ho expected the Headmaster to say something. But when he looked at her, her face appeared to have become like stone; carefully guarded and reserved.

“Who?”

“Park Dan Ho.” The Princess pointed casually at him. “Your golden boy.”

The Headmaster looked at him. “Oh.” Was all she said.

And then they were off. With an entire day’s journey ahead of them. Like their usual practice, Dan Ho had already gone up ahead to make sure their path was clear and safe for travel. He knew this route well so he let his mind drift off as they rode, focusing on the handkerchief around his hand.

“Why does she call you Park Dan Ho?” The Headmaster shook him out of his thoughts.

“Because I—” Dan Ho stopped as he spoke, for the Headmaster appeared to have gone completely white. Her eyes were watching him, unblinking and hyper focused. Her mouth set in a determined line. He was so taken aback by her undivided attention that he found it hard to form words, “I-uh-I the Prince, he, he gave us titles to fit in. Mine was Park. Hwang Rin was a Lee.”

 “Why not Kim or Go or Chang?”

“I don’t know. We didn’t get to pick what we got.”

The Headmaster nodded, seemingly satisfied. Then out of the blue she said, “I always told you to change that name. Dan Ho doesn’t suit you.”

Dan Ho’s name was the only remnant he had of his past life, the life before he became a Shadowman. It was his only tie to his parents whom he didn't remember. He would not give it up. Not for the world. Not even for the woman he respected and admired the most.

He kept his silence, for he could never deny the Headmaster anything. They rode on, with Dan Ho stealing glances at her, wondering what it was that made her pale so uncharacteristically.

Chapter Text

She had forgotten his face.

It hadn’t been that long since she had been taken from the palace. But it still felt like a lifetime ago. And in that lifetime, she had forgotten what Chung Myung looked like.

She would still recognize him, of course. And she would always remember what she felt about him. But all she had now was a memory, not the actual feeling. This saddened her because it felt like she had lost an integral part of herself. She wondered if she would ever get it back.

She didn’t have to wonder for long.

Because there he was. Standing in that field, facing the side. The sun was behind him, outlining his profile. And although she couldn’t see his face, every bone, every fiber in her body knew, that this was Chung Myung.

“Chung Myung!” She called out, wanting to run to him. But she found she couldn’t run. She tried raising her hand to wave to him but she found she couldn’t do that either. She couldn’t move anything.

Why can’t I move?

The thought of running was there. So was the will to move. Then why wasn’t her body responding?

As if someone has switched off the light, it all went dark. Her heart was pounding in her ears and she was sweating like she had run a mile. Through the pitch blackness, she found movement again.

“Chung Myung.” Her voice was soft, lazy, hard to use. She stumbled in her steps, her body feeling heavy.

But despite all odds, she ran. She was home now. Back, safe and sound, and in spite of her fears of Chung Myung not remembering her or not being wanted back in the palace, she was happy. This was her home. This was where she belonged. With Chung Myung by her side.

But her eyes couldn’t see anything. At first, she wondered if she had gone blind. She moved around, almost falling a few times, but then she spotted a flicker of movement through the dark.

No, she wasn’t blind. It was night. And so dark that she couldn’t even see her own hand in front of her.

“Oof!” She bumped into something.

“Where are you going?” That something said back. His characteristic demon voice sounding scratchy and tired. As if he had just woken up too.

“I’m… I’m…” Where was she going? Chung Myung wasn’t there. They still had a day and a half more to go.

Her heart sank into the lowest depths of disappointment. It had all been a dream.

“Are we still going back?” She asked to the darkness.

“Yes,” he said. Then added, “That part wasn’t a dream,” guessing her thoughts.

A tornado of emotions whirled around in her chest. She was going back home. Freedom was just this close. She could almost taste the fresh zing of the freshly cut grass of the palace gardens and the warm scents of the food from the royal kitchens. She could hear her sisters bickering and almost see Chung Myung, standing by the stables, waiting for her by her horse, ready to ride off together.

But it couldn’t be real. Escape couldn’t be that straight forward. Nothing else had been so far.

“Let’s get you back.” She felt Dan Ho’s hands on her shoulders as he pushed her forward from behind, guiding her through the dark. Somewhere on the back of her half asleep mind, she acknowledged that Shadowmen were inhuman beings that could see in the dark.

“I can’t see either. I’m just using my sense of direction, which happens to be better than yours.”

Oops, had she spoken out loud?

“I thought all Shadowmen were used to the dark. With all the other monsters that go bump in the night.” She meant it as a jest. But Dan Ho’s lack of response told her that the joke didn’t land.

With him guiding her, they went back to the camp. Song Hwa hadn’t gotten far but she was surprised that no one else had roused. Everyone else seemed sound asleep.

She felt quite awake now. Her ears seemed to be picking up even the slightest of sounds. The soft breathing of people sleeping, the rustling of the leaves in the night wind, Dan Ho’s steady footsteps, the chirping of insects. Her eyes had adjusted to the darkness now and faintly she could make out the outlines of the Shadowmen on their beds and the tent of the Headmaster.

Dan Ho brought her back to her sleeping place; with her cloth bag used as a makeshift pillow and a shawl for covering herself from the cold.

Dan Ho didn’t say any goodbyes. Simply turned to leave. Without thinking, Song Hwa grabbed his sleeve, fisting the cuff tightly in her hands.

“It can’t be that easy, can it? Me, returning home, just like that?”

Dan Ho waited for what felt like an eternity before responding. “No, it probably won’t be.”

“She’s got something up her sleeve, doesn’t she?”

“I suspect the same of you, Princess.”

Song Hwa chuckled softly. “I don’t suppose you would tell me what her plan is?”

“I don’t know what her plan is. And even if I did, I would not tell you.”

“Still loyal to the bone, eh?”

“Of course.”

“Don’t suppose you’d ever consider switched over your loyalties from her to me?”

Silence. Which was his way of saying no.

“Think about it. I would treat you much better than her.”

“After seeing you with your servants, I doubt it.”

“I’d pay you better.”

“I know the wages of the palace guards. Assassins earn higher.”

“Well at least I’d be honest with you.”

“Would you? Would you really?”

A pause. “Yes.”

“Liar.”

“I would,” she insisted. “If I could trust that you would do the same.”

“I won’t.”

The conversation was seemingly done. But Song Hwa still held on to his sleeve. As if she was afraid of letting it go. She felt Dan Ho tug at it gently, but it only made her tighten her grip.

“Tomorrow is the last day,” she said.

“Yes,” was all he said.

“After that… this will all be over.”

“Yes.”

“And… then we will part ways.”

“Yes.”

“And… never see each other again.”

Silence. He gave her nothing. Perhaps it was the rude awakening she had gotten from her sleep or perhaps it was the late hour of the night, but Song Hwa felt bold.

Bold enough to confess something she had been keeping to herself for a very long time.

“Dan Ho… I have something to tell you.” It had seemed logical in her head. But now that she was about to say it out loud, it felt ridiculous. She tugged at his sleeve, preparing herself to confess—

“What are you doing?” The curtness in his voice was like a bucket of cold water thrown in her face. He wrangled his sleeve out of her hand, pushing her away. “Go back to sleep, Princess.”

A little shocked at the abrupt ending to their conversation, Song Hwa simply sat there, staring out into the darkness.

What the—?

“Wait!” She whispered harshly into the darkness. “I really have to talk to you!”

“I don’t want to hear it.” The crunching of leaves and twigs was enough of a sign that he was running away, not even bothering to remain quiet like he usually did.

Song Hwa stared out into the dark, confused at being brushed off so suddenly. Had she said something offensive?

The question was still on her mind as she lay back to sleep again and was still rattling around her brain as she dreamt of shadowy figures chasing after her through the palace halls. Funnily enough, that dream did not bother her. Shadows weren’t as scary as before.

It was in the light of day that clarity dawned on her.

A young woman, holding onto a man’s sleeve, sounding mournful that they were about to part, telling him she had to say something…

“Oh no!” Song Hwa buried her head in her makeshift pillow, her face, neck and ears all going red with embarrassment.

He thought she was going to say that she liked him.

“Stupid. Stupid. Stupid!” Song Hwa wrapped her arms around her head, wishing the ground would swallow her up.

She had been meaning to tell him the answer to the question he had asked long ago. About why she asked him not to appear in front of her father. Song Hwa figured, that if they were to part, she would at least leave him with something he really needed to know.

But she had botched it. And now Dan Ho was thinking she had feelings for him. No wonder he had pushed her away. Her supposed feelings disgusted him. Song Hwa didn’t know which was worse. Being misunderstood or being rejected for those misunderstood feelings.

She had to amend this as soon as possible.

They were almost at the end of this journey. In just one day, they would be at the capital city, and after that it was a just half a day more to the palace. Song Hwa tried to seek out Dan Ho before the party left to ride on but the assassin seemed to have disappeared. She saw glimpses of him once or twice but when she went over to him, he was gone.

“Has anyone seen Dan Ho?” She asked, finally deciding that discreetness was not working.

A few of the assassins looked up from gathering their things. One of them looked around.

“Wasn’t he just here a second ago?” The assassin said.

“Yeah! I thought I saw him,” another agreed.

“Where’d he go?” A third asked, looking confused.

“Dunno.” The others said in unison.

He was avoiding her.

How childish, Song Hwa thought, huffing. “Never mind then.”

She decided she would catch him as they would ride. But when everyone mounted on their horses and formed a line, with Headmaster at the front, Dan Ho was no where to be seen.

“Oh, he’s gone ahead to the next site. We’re almost at the capital so we have to be careful.” One of the Shadowmen riding near her informed.

He’s too childish, Song Hwa thought, snarling to herself, appearing so menacing that some of the Shadowmen were shaken by the expression. They put some space between the Princess and themselves, not wanting to end up on the receiving end of her anger.

~~~~~~~

Sentiment was not considered a virtue among the Shadowmen. The Headmaster made sure to discourage it through her strict rules about relationships. The Shadowmen had no lovers, no friends, even loyalty to each other was seen not as sentimental attachment, but as a duty that resulted in great punishment if it wasn’t upheld.

But when the Headmaster allowed Hwang Rin to marry Eun Dan, then she broke that very ideal that she had instilled amongst her students throughout their lives. If any of the other Shadowmen found out, then there would be an uproar. Others would want the same treatment. And they might start rebelling against the Headmaster when she would refuse them this request.

And if she decided to lift the ban on marriage and lovers altogether? What would happen then? Would Dan Ho be allowed to marry too?

The thought was too much for him. Dan Ho couldn’t even allow himself to fantasize what that would look like. Perhaps a small hut with a beautiful view of some lake or river, away from all the villages and cities, hidden away: protected from outsiders. A small little world of his own, a simple life where no one got hurt, and everyone lived happily. With someone there to welcome him when he returned home from work. And perhaps a little one too. A small family of his own. People who belonged to him just as much as he belonged to them.

No. Thinking about such sentimental impossibilities was useless. It would only invite unnecessary sadness over what could have been. What can never be.

What Hwang Rin had achieved, by gaining permission to marry, not only was unheard of, but it also was quite infuriating. Dan Ho had kept his anger at bay, always appearing cool and unaffected, ignoring Hwang Rin as if they had never been close. But he worried how the others would react if they found out that Hwang Rin had been given a privilege they would never come close to.

Dan Ho wondered whether the Headmaster had taken this step, knowing full well this would happen, or had she allowed it despite the repercussions.

A thought occurred to him. Maybe she hadn’t been thinking.

Nonsense! There is no way Headmaster would make a mistake. She was too smart for it.

It would have been very satisfying to see Hwang Rin be ostracized and hated by the others as much as Dan Ho hated him for what he had done. But Dan Ho wasn’t that kind of man. He wouldn’t betray Hwang Rin’s confidence, even if Hwang Rin had betrayed his. And although he would never admit it, he worried about what would happen to Hwang Rin once the word got out.

Perhaps he really was a bit sentimental.

His worry was in vain, as soon enough, word got out.

One of the Shadowmen came up to them as they were out hunting for what would be their last lunch on this journey. Dan Ho and Hwang Rin had been sent together by the Headmaster. Of course he would never deny the Headmaster anything. But he could pretend that Hwang Rin wasn’t there and that he was only out with the other two Shadowmen who were hunting with them.

Dan Ho saw a deer nearby. He raised his hand—the hand that still had the handkerchief from the Princess wrapped around the cut—to signal to the others to quiet down. Peripherally, he could see that the junior Shadowmen weren’t paying attention, but Dan Ho didn’t pay them any mind. Youngsters were unreliable anyway. And he would be done with this before than they could cause any ruckus.

He poised the arrow on his bow swiftly, ready to shoot. He pulled the bowstring taut and almost had the shot when a half whispered remark caught his attention at the last second, making him miss the shot.

“Sunbae! Is it true? You were granted marriage?”

Dan Ho’s eyes nearly popped out of his head when these other Shadowmen spoke up. The arrow felt flying past the deer and the young buck sprinted away.

“What?” Hwang Rin said, nonchalantly. He did not appear nearly as anxious as Dan Ho suddenly felt.

“You and Eun Dani. I heard from a Shadowman who heard from one of the Headmaster’s personal guard who heard from—”

“You shouldn’t trust rumors.” Dan Ho said authoritatively.

“It’s true.” Hwang Rin said and for the second time, Dan Ho’s eyes bulged.

“What?” said the other two Shadowmen in unison.

What are you doing? Dan Ho mouthed the word to Hwang Rin from behind them.

“It’s true. Headmaster granted me marriage. And I chose Eun Dan.” Hwang Rin said as casually as if he was listing of just another assignment.

The other two Shadowmen were dumbfounded.

“Yah! We have to get back in an hour. Are you two going to waste our time like this?” Dan Ho reprimanded. “I even missed a shot because of your chattering! Go find me a new target.”

“Sorry Sunbae.” The two Shadowmen said, their heads hanging.

Dan Ho let the two junior Shadowmen walk on ahead while he stayed a few steps back with Hwang Rin.

“Have you lost your mind?” He hissed; his voice low.

“I thought we weren’t talking.” Hwang Rin said obstinately, nearly pouting. He didn’t bother keeping his voice low.

“You don’t know how everyone else will react to this news.” Dan Ho still kept his voice low so that the juniors ahead wouldn’t listen.

“Why do you care? We’re not friends anymore, as far as I recall.”

Dan Ho grabbed his arm. “Are you really going to act like a child now?”

Hwang Rin pushed his hand away. “I’m not acting like a child. I know what I’m doing.”

“It’s dangerous—”

“Not if Headmaster’s allowed it. No one will lay a finger on me as long as she’s on my side.”

“And what if she isn’t? What if she changes her mind?”

“Then so be it. I’m not afraid of dying, Dan Ho. I’m surprised that you of all people, are.”

Dan Ho’s mouth shrank. It wasn’t his own death he was worried about. But feeling such sentiment was never wise. Especially knowing what Hwang Rin was capable of.

Hwang Rin sighed, “Ho-ya.” He put his hand on Dan Ho’s shoulder. “Let’s stop this. I don’t care if you like Eun Dan—”

Dan Ho whacked his hand away. “This isn’t about Eun Dan.”

"Oh yeah? Then why do you have her handkerchief around your hand?"

Dan Ho looked down on the handkerchief that the Princess had used to cover his cut. He curled his fingers around it. 

"This isn't about Eun Dan." He insisted.

“Then what is it?”

Dan Ho didn’t bother to answer. Bumping his shoulder into Hwang Rin’s, Dan Ho walked ahead, joining up with the juniors. He was too angry to confront Hwang Rin. If they started talking then there would be a fight. Especially if Hwang Rin talked about Sam Chul. Dan Ho couldn’t bear to have Sam Chul’s name come from Hwang Rin’s mouth.

Dan Ho had thought that his biggest worry would be dealing with how others would react once the news of Hwang Rin’s marriage got out. But when they went back to camp and he spied a sly pair of eyes looking around for him, he knew he had bigger things to focus on.

He avoided the Princess like a plague. Not for any reason he could articulate. He just didn’t want to see her. That was all. His feet jumped on their own every time he saw her looking around for him. And in the brief moments they accidentally locked eyes, it felt like a bolt of energy shot through him, making him run for the hills.

Just one more day. Then she’s gone. Dan Ho told himself. It would be a relief to not have her around anymore: the Princess with the perceptive eyes and the annoying intellect. Finally, Dan Ho could be at ease. The woman made him feel like he had to be on his toes all the time. Without her, he could again become the smartest person around.

Dan Ho had been thinking about the joys of not having Princess Song Hwa in their company when he came across a group of Shadowmen all gathered around Hwang Rin.

Oh no, Dan Ho thought. It’s happening. He rushed over to the crowd.

Would they fight? Would they yell at him? Would they—

“But what’s it like then? Have you and Eun Dan decided if you’ll have a wedding?”

Dan Ho stopped as he listened over.

“I don’t know. We didn’t get a chance to talk over anything. We had to come here.” Hwang Rin replied.

“I once had a groom as a target once!” One Shadowman raised his hand as if he was back in class. “I can tell you all about what I saw.”

“Yah! Killing someone on their wedding night doesn’t make you an expert on marriage!” Someone else reprimanded.

“I still know more than you.” The Shadowman grumbled.

“I don’t think we will do anything huge.”

“Why not?!” The protest rose from multiple men.

“You have to! It’s the first wedding we’ve ever had!”

“Sunbae! You can’t just leave things at that!”

“Think about what Eun Dan might want!”

Dan Ho walked in a daze. They were… happy. The Shadowmen appeared happy.

Shouldn’t they be at Hwang Rin’s throat? Shouldn’t they hate him? He got something none of them would ever get. Weren’t they even the least bit jealous?

“Eun Dan doesn’t like big events either.” Hwang Rin laughed.

“Ayyy, you don’t know that.”

One of the Shadowmen spotted Dan Ho standing there. “Dan Ho sunbae! Did you hear? Headmaster’s allowed Hwang Rin sunbae to marry Eun Dan!”

Dan Ho didn’t say anything. Simply took a seat on a smooth rock nearby.

The awkwardness of his stiff attitude did little to dispel the merry conference of the assassins.

“Hwang Rin sunbae, how do you feel now that you can have an ordinary life.” Someone asked.

This immediately led to the rise of multiple calls of “Yeah! Tell us!”, “How does it feel?” and “We want to know!”

Hwang Rin thought about it for a moment. “I don’t know, to be honest. I haven’t had time to really process it.”

“How can it feel? It’s not like he can stop being an assassin.” Someone said in a jarringly curt tone.

From one corner, a sour looking Shadowman stood up. Dan Ho looked at him approvingly. He appeared just as bitter as Dan Ho had expected most of them to be.

Finally. Someone finally gets it, Dan Ho thought. Although it didn’t make him feel better.

“Yah, nobody asked you.”

“Let sunbae speak.”

“He’s not wrong though,” Hwang Rin said. “I still have to be an assassin.”

“But what about Eun Dan? Will she still be a handler?”

“Are you okay with her continuing her work?”

“I don’t know. Like I said, we haven’t worked out the details yet.” Hwang Rin said noncommittally.

Dan Ho rolled his eyes. Love had made Hwang Rin foolish. Having all possibilities mapped out was a basic skill of any Shadowman. And Hwnag Rin had foregone all of that for the sake of having Eun Dan.

A similar thought seemed to have occurred to the sour Shadowman. “Then why did you ask for permission if you didn’t know the outcome?”

“Yah! That was rude.” Someone said.

Hwang Rin didn’t seem fazed. He answered calmly, “I wasn’t thinking. I had just lost a friend and nearly lost Eun Dan more than once, at the hands of the Royal Guard. I realized that every time I was about to die, I was full of regret. We all know that death is inescapable. I just didn’t want to die with regrets. That’s all I was thinking about.”

The Shadowmen were silent, leaning close, clinging on to Hwang Rin’s every word.

All except the sour Shadowman. “So, you and Eun Dan… you were already together.”

It was against the rules to have a lover. But it was a rule often broken by the Shadowmen. An open secret that all had agreed to keep for one another. Dan Ho had learned this from his very first partner, who frequented brothels more for the women and less for the assignments.

The sour Shadowmen hadn’t seem to be aware of this broken rule, appearing red in the face. “Sunbae, isn’t that breaking the rules?”

“Yah, we all do it from time to time.”

“Sit down. You’re embarrassing us in front of Sunbae.”

“It is. I broke the rules.” Hwang Rin answered. His face was slightly paler. Dan Ho guessed it was due to the mention of breaking rules. Everyone there knew what breaking rules was synonymous with.

Death.

“But he broke the rules,” the sour Shadowman was arguing with the others. “That’s not fair! The rest of us always follow the rules. Yet he gets to get away with it.”

“He isn’t getting away with anything.” Dan Ho spoke over everyone. Everyone silenced at the sound of his voice, shrinking meekly as they would in front of the Headmaster. Even the sour Shadowman seemed subdued. Hwang Rin raised a brow at him which Dan Ho ignored.

Dan Ho continued, “Do you all really think that it’s a gift that Hwang Rin’s allowed to be married? Do you all believe that with just this permission, he’ll be able to live like a regular swordsman? Live an honest life?” Dan Ho scoffed. “He’ll always be a Shadowman, no matter who he marries. His wife will have to accept him, knowing who he is. And even if he’s unfortunate enough to have children, he’ll still be a Shadowman. And his children will have to live with a fact that their father kills people for a living. And when he dies, he will still have regrets. The ghosts of his targets will still haunt him, no matter what he does to run away from them.”

The merriment from a few minutes ago had completely died now. Another victim of the Shadowmen, slain with quickly and efficiently in just a few words.

They all knew Dan Ho was right. They could all cite the logic of not having a family. That families were liabilities. That relationships only held them back. But deep down, all Shadowmen knew that even if all logic failed, even if they found a way to have families and keep them safe whilst doing what they did, they still couldn’t have what normal people got to have. They couldn’t have love. They couldn’t have a family.

Because they were monsters. Creatures of the night that went bump in the dark. Stories mothers told children to get them to sleep. They couldn’t be normal.

They didn’t deserve to be.

Dan Ho broke the morose silence that had taken over. “Now, if you all are quite done here, we have to get back. Otherwise, the Headmaster will start asking questions.” And that Princess will find me if I stay in a place for too long.

In principle, Dan Ho should have felt satisfied with himself. He had successfully thwarted any uprisings that may have been caused by Hwang Rin’s marriage. Now the Shadowmen would think twice about even considering requesting the same for themselves as Hwang Rin. And Hwang Rin would understand why it was that Dan Ho never made any moves on Eun Dan, despite having such strong feelings for her.

Yet despite achieving what he had set out to do, Dan Ho felt empty. His chest felt heavy yet at the same time, it was hollow. He was more than happy to go ahead before the rest of the party was to follow when the Headmaster asked. He would be away from Hwang Rin and away from the Princess as well. And it would give him time to be alone with his thoughts.

They would be at the edge of the capital city by nightfall and by the next afternoon, they would be at the palace.

He should have felt relief at this but instead it made his heart heavier. The feeling didn’t bother him as much as not knowing why he felt the way he did.

The day went by in a blur. And as night took over the sky in inky hues of purple and blue, he felt the need to hold the small dagger again in his hand. As he palmed it, he felt confused as to why he couldn’t feel the cool metal. And then he remembered.

The handkerchief was still wrapped around his hand. He looked at it, tugging lightly at the knot.

Despite the Princess not being there, Dan Ho felt the urge to move. To jump, to run, to be anywhere but the place he was.

His feet led him to a group of assassins who were preparing the dinner for the night. Dan Ho’s earlier speech seemed to have gotten to the Shadowmen, for they seemed down in spirit and easily irritable.

Slam! One Shadowman threw a pot of brewing tea on the ground. “I told you those leaves are poison!”

“They are not if you brew them correctly!”

“Are you trying to kill us?!”

“We don’t have any tea left! That idiot Dae Soo spilled all the leaves at the last site!”

“Kill Dae Soo!”

“No one is killing anybody.” Dan Ho said, calm and commanding. He hoped they would smile at his little joke. But the irony of telling assassins not to kill was lost on the young men. They grumbled to themselves and went on toiling over the fire.

From above him, Dan Ho heard the rapid flapping of wings as a bird took off. The sound drew his attention because birds weren’t normally up and about at night. And when he looked up to the sky, and saw that the bird was a pigeon, his curiosity grew. Because pigeons weren’t nocturnal birds.

“Weird thing to say to a bunch of assassins.” The voice came from above. Dan Ho looked up to find the Princess atop a tree, looking down at him.

Ah, so it was the Princess befriending another bird.

She was partly obscured from the branches. And it didn’t help that the sky behind her had gone all black, blending in with her black and purple hanbook. The warm light from the fires below cast long shadows on her face, making her look sinister.

“What are you doing up there?” Dan Ho asked, squinting his eyes at the Princess and how undignified she looked.

“Well, you lot are always watching me from the top of the trees. I thought I might as well see for myself what it feels like.”

“You’re attempting to spy on a Shadowman?” Dan Ho raised a critical brow as he pointed out the folly of this plan.

“I see your point.” The Princess carefully climbed down the tree, landing a little too close to Dan Ho. He didn’t make a move to step back.

She looked up at him, studying his face. Her eyes roved over his own, traveling down the bridge of his nose, straying to his lips and then finally his jaw. His fingers curled into a tight fist. He searched for signs of what she might be thinking. All he saw was a calculated concentration in her eyes. As if she too was searching for something but with an academic detachment rather than a fascination.

“You’ve been avoiding me,” she said.

“No, I haven’t,” he was quick to answer.

The Princess sighed, “You’ve got the wrong impression. Dan Ho I—”

Dan Ho did an about face and walked away before the Princess could even let out another word. He thought he could bear to hear her say what he thought she was going to say, but he couldn’t. He couldn’t hear it. Couldn’t even acknowledge the thought to himself.

No. Tomorrow this would be the end of it. Tomorrow, it would all be over.

Whatever the Princess had to say would be meaningless by the end. So, it was best just to ignore her.

He didn’t sleep that night. He didn’t feel tired, despite traveling all day long. His mind was abuzz with everything and nothing all at once. He wondered about tomorrow and how it would all go down. He wondered how he would look back on these moments, whether he would miss anything or be glad that it was behind him. Whether the ghosts of the people who died on this quest for the Princess would come to haunt him.

The night went by far quicker than he had imagined. Before he knew it, the sun was out and all of the other Shadowmen were up and ready for breakfast. Dan Ho walked around, feeling nostalgic for a time that had not yet come to pass.

It really is going to be over now.

It was just this thought, and suddenly, he was standing in front of the Princess. His feet had led him right to her.

She was standing by a huge tree. They were out of the woods now, with grassy plains and small hills marking their way back into civilization. The Princess appeared to be stroking something. Upon closer inspection, he realized it was a huge bird.

Not a pigeon this time, but a falcon. A majestic looking creature that seemed right at home on her forearm.

Hyun’s been teaching her well. Dan Ho thought. As he neared her, the falcon flew away and the Princess whipped around spotting him easily.

“What?” She sounded annoyed and somewhat surprised.

Dan Ho sucked in his lower lip, thinking, She was chasing me down before. Now she doesn’t want to see me? “Greetings to you too.” He said tartly.

The Princess sighed. “Sorry. We’re about to return home and I’m a little on edge.” She rubbed circles in her temple.

“Why? You should be happy. You will get to see Captain Chung Myung again.” Dan Ho hadn’t meant to say that last part. Especially not so bitterly. He bit down on his lip before he could say anything further.

“The Captain is the last person on my mind right now,” the Princess said.

“You had something to tell me.” Dan Ho said, preparing himself for the worst.

Song Hwa tilted her head, chin down, mouth shrunk as if she wasn’t sure what to do, eying him curiously. “Park—ah-nee, Dan Ho… do you remember what you asked me, about not showing your face in front of my father.”

Dan Ho recalled that conversation and nodded, “Yes. You told me I reminded you of someone.”

“Yes… listen I am going to sound crazy, but you have to understand, the resemblance is uncanny. If only you could see… but I can’t show you. Unless I could take you to the archives… no that would be impossible. I don’t even know what Ji Ahn has got planned for tomorrow.” The Princess was rambling. Almost to herself.

“Princess?” Dan Ho called for her attention.

“Dan Ho… I am just going to say this. But I really want you to listen. Because I have seen the Seondaewang’s—the Grand Predecessor King’s—portrait. His true face. It is forbidden for anyone to see because King Lee Chang had a nasty scar on his face and no one ever saw him without his mask but… I saw it. And it looks exactly like you.”

Dan Ho’s eyes narrowed in confusion. None of what the Princess was saying made any sense. “Princess, have you gotten any sleep last night? Are you sleep walking again?” He asked, remembering how he had found her running in her sleep, calling out to Chung Myung.

Song Hwa grabbed both his arms. “Listen to me! I am telling you that… I mistook you for Seondaewang’s lost son.”

Dan Ho’s brows shot up. The Princess truly had lost her mind.

“Princess. The Predecessor King’s kin were all killed in the massacre. Even I know that much history.” Dan Ho spoke slowly, as if she were a child.

“No! No!” Song Hwa became frantic. “Queen Daemok escaped the night of the massacre. And she was pregnant. They say the assassin who was sent to kill her actually—”

“Yes, I know that story. But it’s just a story. There’s no merit to it.”

“If you saw the Seondaewang’s portrait, you wouldn’t say that.”

Dan Ho was quiet. “So… you’re telling me that… you think I am that long lost Prince?”

Song Hwa nodded. “Before you turned out to be a Shadowman, I thought you were the Prince. I thought you were there to reclaim the throne since you still have a right over it.”

Dan Ho took a step back, pushing her hands off his arms. Out of everything he had imagined the Princess to say, this did not come even close. The idea was so preposterous that he couldn’t even wrap his head around it.

“I have always thought you intelligent, Princess. Was I wrong? Are you just a madwoman?”

“The idea still isn’t that farfetched,” the Princess insisted, inching towards him.

“Are you listening to yourself?”

“Do you know who your parents were? Do you even remember them?”

“I should think someone would have told me if I was the lost child of King Lee Chang!”

“What if they didn’t know? What if you got lost somehow and ended up—”

“Ended up as a Shadowman? Again, I am forced to ask, do you hear yourself?” He said harshly, hoping to knock some sense into her.

“The Headmaster could be using you, Dan Ho. She favors you, doesn’t she? And she specially called for you on this trip.”

“You are insane!” Dan Ho turned to leave but the Princess jumped in his path.

“Just hear me out.”

“The Headmaster favors many of us. She favors Hwang Rin for his looks. She favors Hyun because he is weak— next thing you know, you’ll start saying that Hwang Rin and Hyun are long lost Princes too.”

“Not Princes but... But Hyun, I suspect he is the General’s son.”

Dan Ho was rendered speechless. His brows shot all the way up to his hairline, eyes wide in bewilderment. “She’s gone mad,” he said to himself, “she’s finally cracked.”

“Have you not noticed the resemblance? Or the way Hyun gets treated?”

“Loony. She’s gone loony.”

“If you had listened to me before and given me enough time, I might have explained this properly!” The Princess said, sounding cross with him. As if it was his fault.

“Completely mad.” Dan Ho was still talking to himself.

“But now we have no time. We’ll be leaving soon, but I still want you to know—”

“That I’m royalty?” Dan Ho laughed.

“I want you to know, that you don’t have to be stuck with her, as Ji Ahn’s slave.”

Dan Ho’s head snapped to her, eyes turning to suspicious slits, “Oh so that’s what this is about? You want me to leave my Headmaster.”

“Dan Ho, you were somebody before she took you in. You had a life—”

“I was dying on the street like a rabid dog.” Dan Ho spoke over her.

The Princess still persisted, “—you had people who cared about you. You may still have family—”

“None of them have ever bothered to look for me.”

“—and you can be somebody who is more than just an assassin.”

“Stop it! Stop with your plans! This is another one of your schemes to escape, isn’t it?”

“This isn’t a plan. I am being honest.”

“You may be able to fool others Princess, but I know how cunning you are. Don’t think for a second that I will underestimate you.”

“You are the only one who hasn’t underestimated me. Ever.” The Princess looked at him earnestly. Her sincerity unmistakable. “Dan Ho I have lost a lot of people since you took me away. My entire family is gone.” She took his hand in hers. The hand with the handkerchief. “You are the last person I can call… well, at least you were Sam Chul’s friend. And that’s enough for me. I am being honest. I think you should look for your family. I think you might actually be King Lee Chang’s son.”

The Princess dropped his hand and stepped back. Dan Ho stared at her, his head spinning. Perhaps it was the sleeplessness, or perhaps the emotional turmoil due to recent events, but his mind was completely rejecting every word out of the Princess’s mouth.

The only think he picked up on, was this, “You thought I was the lost Prince, back when I was acting as your guard?”

Song Hwa nodded.

“If I was the Prince… what did you think I was there for?”

“For revenge.” She said it so casually that it was jarring. As if such a thing was common in the royal court.

“Then why didn’t you do anything to stop me?”

The Princess paused. “I did try to get Queen Yoo after you… but in reality, I wasn’t sure myself.”

“Yet you’re sure now?”

“No. I am not.”

“Then why tell me all this?”

Song Hwa sighed. “Perhaps… I want you to be the Prince.”

“Why?”

Yah! We’re almost done with breakfast!” A Shadowman appeared behind them. He waved an arm to Dan Ho. “Sunbae! Princess! Come and eat. We’ll be leaving in an hour.”

Dan Ho faced him, “Alright. I’ll escort the Princess.” To Song Hwa he said. “Let’s go Princess. Perhaps you need food to set your mind right.”

Dan Ho walked away but the Princess called after him. “If you’re who I think you are, then that means you don’t have to be an assassin anymore.”

“Oh yeah?” Dan Ho called back without turning. “And why would that matter?”

When the Princess didn’t answer, Dan Ho turned back around. She was just a few steps behind him, looking glum.

“Why would that matter, Princess?”

She looked into his eyes, searching for something. A look of resignation took over when she didn’t find what she was looking for. “Maybe it doesn’t matter.” She stepped around him, saying, "Maybe it never did."

Chapter Text

Councilor Gang Yun was a lazy man. It was a trait he himself acknowledged. But he didn’t often get to be lazy on account of his position as both a Lord and a State Councilor. Positions awarded to him due to his belonging to an influential family.

What worked against the Councilor was his own appearance. A tall, lean man with a bony frame, with hair having gone prematurely white as snow, and skin brown from falling asleep too many times in the sun. The Councilor stood out amongst all the other Councilors. And because he stood out, he was called upon the most for matters of state.

Lazy but not irresponsible, the Councilor always did fulfill his duties. But if you asked him, he would admit, that his preferred occupation was napping and eating sweets.

“What’s the point in all this?” the Councilor was frequently heard saying, whilst popping a candied fruit in his mouth. “None of it will matter when we die. Might as well enjoy the few days we have to ourselves.”

Recently all joys had been denied to the Councilor. He had been forced to work day and night to ensure that the Kingdom did not fall apart and that enemies did not seize this opportunity to attack and take over.

It had stated with the assassination of Princess Song Hwa.

They had found her headless body in her room as she had waited to be married. In the other room, her soon to be husband was found slain as well, although his head was still attached to his body.

The King, furious over the loss of his daughter, called for the entire Council to find the perpetrator. He also launched an attack on the Bandit Clans, suspecting them of foul play. Chief Councilor Cho personally looked into the matter, given that the Princess’s husband to be happened to be his son.

He, along with his younger son, Cho Jang Hyun found out that the Crown Prince Young Hwa had been the one who ordered the assassination. It was revealed that the King had planned for Princess Song Hwa and her husband, Cho Beom Pal to inherit the thrown. The Crown Prince was to lose his title on account of him not having proven himself worthy.

The decision was sound. Councilor Gang Yun too inwardly agreed that the Princess was far more competent than the Prince. But he also knew that this decision was not without its politics. The Cho clan had been looking for more power and this was the safest way for one of the Cho clan to become king.

However, the Crown Prince seemed to have caught wind of this and decided to take action before he could be removed from his position.

“Which is foolish!” Gang Yun said to his wife as she unloaded half his food from his plate. “Why did the Prince think that such a crime would go away unpunished. Surely, he knew he would be caught. He used his own personal Guard for goodness sake! How foolish!”

“No one expects the Prince to be wise anyways, dear.” His wife said, pushing the half empty plate to him.

“We even found evidence of the crime from his chambers. Papers where he ordered the hit. Exchanges with some unnamed person about how he hated his father’s treatment. It was as if he wanted to be caught.” The Councilor said as he chowed down on his dinner. “He was even foolish enough to act surprised when we found the papers. As if playacting would help him now.”

“Foolish indeed.” His wife said, pulling the pot of rice away from him when he tried to reach for more.

“Dear, shouldn’t you feed me more after I’ve done so much work?” The Councilor pouted.

His wife whacked her spoon on her husband’s straying hand, “You didn’t do anything. It was all Lord Cho.”

The Councilor’s bruised hand retreated. He nursed it, pouting even further. “How mean.”

“So? What is going to happen to the Prince now?”

“Lord Cho wants him beheaded. But the King is delaying his sentence.”

“Understandable. He just lost one child. He would be reluctant to lose another.”

But eventually the sentence came. The Prince was ordered to be hanged. But grief struck before justice could. The King was found dead in his chambers a week before the Prince was to be punished. Lord Cho suspected foul play again, but Councilor Gang Yun felt the reason wasn’t so cold.

He felt it was heartbreak.

Thus, with no King, no Crown Prince and no heir to the throne who was of age, a power vacuum was created. It left the court ripe for political wrangling.

Queen Yoo struck first. And hard. Her son, a mere child, was the only one left to inherit the throne. Giving her the right to regency till he came of age. But distant cousins of the King, who were older than her son, came up to claim their right to the throne as well. Watching the families fight was like watching a pit of snakes wrestling with each other. Hissing and snapping. Watching their prey silently, waiting for the right time to strike.

The state Council had to remain active during all this for it was their decision to declare who would take the throne next. They had to deliberate over the laws of the Kingdom and figure out who had the most right to the throne.

It didn’t help that Lord Cho had his own agenda for this power vacuum. While there was no king in place, he effectively had the most power. Chief State Councilor became acting king in situations where there was no clear-cut heir. And Lord Cho was quite enjoying this position.

One would think he would need time to mourn.

It would be quite a while before Queen Yoo or any distant cousin of the King would get near the throne while Lord Cho was around.

How quaint it was, that these were the people often citing their loyalty to the King. Now it was these very people who could not wait to bury the King and move on. The mourning period hadn’t even passed yet.

Heavy is the head that wears the crown. But heavier still, is the heart that covets it.

General Ahn Hyun, the former army leader, had once said this to Councilor Gong Yun when he had been just a young scholar. The Councilor had been too young back then to understand the depth of these words. He had been just a young scholar then. But General Ahn Hyun had seen two monarchs—the recently deceased King Deok Hwa and the Seondaewang Lee Chang before him—reign and fall. He had seen two generations of royalty fight each other over the throne.

Councilor Gang Yun disagreed. There seemed to be nothing weighing down the ambitions of the ones fighting over this throne. Their ambitions only lifted them higher, till they felt they were above everyone else.

And they enjoyed it, the lot of them. Even the councilors seemed to be relishing in the fact that no king ruled over them. That they could muck about as they pleased while they pretended to deliberate over who would be king.

Unlike the rest, Councilor Gang Yun was loathing this situation. Not out of any moral grounds or righteousness. But because he was lazy and present matters required him to be always on duty, working hard to ensure that the matter reached a conclusion, making sure the matters of state were running as smoothly and that the citizens were well taken care of.

The Councilor was happy he wasn’t given the responsibility of dispelling foreign threats. The Councior who was looking over the foreign ambassadors didn’t even get time to sleep these days.

At least Gang Yun got to retire at the end of the day.

It was at the end of the day, when he was retiring from dinner—hiding a few dumplings in his sleeve to enjoy in bed—when a messenger came running into his home.

“My Lord,” the man wasn’t able to form a sentence because he was panting too hard, having run all the way.

“Uuuuuuugh,” the Councilor rolled his head along with his eyes, groaning like a ghoul. “Whyyyyyy?”

“My Lord,” the man panted, holding out a scroll, “the city gate… the guards… they sent… they sent… Princess.”

“Gang Yun,” his wife said warningly. She was older than him, and he believed her to be the wiser of them both, so it only took a strong look from her to get the Councilor on his feet, ushering the messenger to his office where they could discuss the message.

“Alright,” the Councilor said, taking his seat with a flourish of his hanbook, “what is it?”

The messenger gave him the scroll. “It is from the city gatekeepers. They claim that they’ve apprehended someone claiming to be Princess Song Hwa.”

~~~~~~~

In the past fifty years, only once had the council been gathered in the late hours of the night. It had happened when King Lee Chang and his entire family had been slaughtered. Now, for a second time, the state council was being called to deliberate on an urgent matter.

“This is ridiculous. How do we know this person isn’t an imposter?”

“The Guard says they verified her identification tag.”

“What if it got stolen? Her tag was declared missing when her body had been found.”

“Don’t you recall? They never found the Princess’s head.”

“The physician himself verified the body. The Princess is dead.”

Councilor Gang Yun yawned as the other councilors deliberated over the situation and scratched his wispy white beard. His white hanbook was hastily wound around his wiry frame. His samo—the hat all councilmen wore—was tilted a bit to the side.

All of the councilors wore white for the Kingdom was still mourning the loss of their king. No one seemed particularly affected though. Councilor Gang Yun would have pondered on this further had he not been disinclined to do so because it would take energy. And he had none to spare.

The sliding doors to the council room opened. Chief State Councilor Cho stood there, eyes glaring, mouth set in a grim line. Everyone in the room quieted abruptly. With a curt greeting, he took his seat at the head of the table.

“Has the news been verified?” He asked, his voice gravelly due to the lateness of the hour.

“Your son, Jang Hyun himself went to verify.”

Lord Cho nodded, “Good. If this person turns out to be an imposter, I want them beheaded by dawn. Disturbing the peace of the council is an outrage.”

Gang Yun knew that the “outrage” was less about disturbing the council’s peace and more about threatening Lord Cho’s current position over the Kingdom. If the Princess was to suddenly turn up alive, then that would change everything. She was the daughter of the first wife of the King. And as such, she had precedence over any children from any other wife, or any other male cousins.  She had legitimate right to the throne, or rather, any man who would marry her would become King.

“There are rumors that the Princess is not alone.” One Councilor spoke up.

“Of course, she isn’t. If she was alive all this time, then it means someone helped her.” Lord Cho said.

The other Councilor went on, “This supposed imposter has asked for an audience with us. For her companion.”

This earned a raised brow from the chief who tilted his chin up to the other Councilor. “What does that mean?”

“I don’t understand it myself. The imposter refused to take names before the council could be called.”

Lord Cho, with his unblinking eyes, leaned closer to the other councilor, “So you are telling me, that I was disturbed from my slumber, because an imposter requested the council to gather?” His tone was measured, but with a dangerous undercurrent.

“Both. First, we verify. Then we decide what to do, based on the results.” The other Councilor said calmly.

Lord Cho nodded, calming down a bit.

The council waited for an hour, during which Councilor Gang Yun almost nodded off to sleep twice. He didn’t bother engaging with the others, nor took part in the meal they were presented as part of their “never ending efforts for the state,” as one Councilor put it. Gang Yun wondered how the cook who had to get up in the middle of the night felt about the council’s never ending efforts.

“You’re not eating?” one of them asked Gang Yun.

“He only eats his wife’s cooking,” another one answered for him as Gang Yun bolted upright, waking from his half-sleep when he realized he was being spoken to.

“Ah. Are you still with that woman?”

That woman. Not only had Councilor Gang Yun broken all societal propriety by marrying a woman older than him, but his wife had also been once divorced due to her inability to produce children. Such women were not allowed in society, yet his wife roamed around proudly as the Lady of a Councilor.

Gang Yun held his tongue. He was always far too lazy to argue anyways.

The doors of the council room slid open once more, “Lord Cho Jang Hyun is here.” The servant announced.

All councilmen sat up straight, alert. They waited with bated breath as Cho Jang Hyun arrived at the door.

He was as pale as a sheet and sweating profusely. As if he had just seen a ghost.

He didn’t need to say anything. His face revealed enough.

Beside him was Captain of the Guard, Go Chung Myung. He too seemed to be shaken, though his face betrayed happiness, not terror the way Jang Hyun’s did. His cheeks were red. His lips couldn’t stop twitching in smile. He seemed to be out of breath.

Jang Hyun ordered Chung Myung away. “Outside, Captain.”

He stepped aside to move out of the room, and behind him, in a black and purple hanbook, embroidered in beautiful silver wire, stood the once dead Princess Song Hwa. The Captain left with one last glance at the Princess. The Princess in turn, appeared to be ignoring him.

There was no doubt that it was her. The arrogant scowl, the disdain in her eyes and the way she looked down her nose; it was unmistakable. This was the very Princess who had terrorized the court with her tantrums and cruel behavior.

But she seemed less of herself now. Her eyes had dark circles around them. She had lost weight and thus looked a bit gaunt. Her coloring had darkened, and her lips were horribly chapped. Her eyes too, as she assessed the room, seemed to have lost their usual spark. There was a haunted quality to her countenance. She seemed to have lost her sheen.

“I see you all have been stuffing your mouths while my father rots in his grave. Or have you also mistaken someone else’s body for his and declared him dead?” Her voice still carried its usual vitriol. She was still the terrifying Princess.

Lord Cho was the one the speak up first. He stood, eyeing the Princess not as a royal, but as the threat she was. He bore his eyes into her, as if he could will her dead just by looking at her.

“I would have been disinclined to believe you were Princess Song Hwa. But having heard your greeting, I can verify, that you are indeed the Princess.” He did not seem happy by the tone of his voice. But he kept it measured enough to not betray his distress.

The Princess stepped forward and behind her, two men stepped in. They seemed to have emerged from the shadows themselves. Gang Yun found himself rubbing his eyes to confirm that indeed he had seen the men and wasn’t dreaming.

They were dressed in all black. And very striking looking. The one on the Princess’s left was beautiful enough to rival even the most popular concubines of the Kingdom. And the one to her right was equally striking, though not entirely for his handsome face.

There was something about him, about the way he stood and held himself, about the way his hawk like eyes assessed the room. It made Gang Yun instinctively lean forward, as if he should be bowing to this person. He stood like a king, reminiscent of how the Princess’s own father used to stand, how kings were often painted standing.

Like he owned the room.

“I see you brought friends.” Lord Cho observed, purring like a cat. He eyed the two men and Gang Yun could tell what he was wondering. Were either of the men the Princess’s husband?

Because if they were, then Lord Cho had cause for the Princess to be stripped of her title. He could build a case that she had run away with a lover and ordered the assassination of his son.

“They’re not friends.” The Princess clarified. “Nor lovers, in case you were wondering,” a small knowing smile tugged at one corner of her lips.

The regal looking man looked at the Princess from the corner of his eye. Gang Yun felt he was surprised at the Princess’s tone and attitude.

“Please, Your Highness. Be seated.” Lord Cho gestured towards the empty chair at the end of the table. “I am sure you have much to tell us about your ordeals.”

The Princess placed her hands on the chair back but did not move to sit. “I will. But before we do, I have a promise to fulfill.” Her hands shook a little as she gave a nod to the beautiful man on her left.

The man nodded back and swiftly slipped away. It felt like he had disappeared into the shadows. Again, Councilor Gang Yun was forced to rub his eyes.

Were these men ghosts? Or demons? That would explain the Princess’s return.

The beautiful man returned and whispered something into her ear.

“Understood.” She said to the man. To the room she said, “My companion will be a moment,” she pulled out the chair, taking a seat. “In the meantime, I feel I should apprise you all as to how I am here when I was once declared dead.”

Lord Cho waited for the Princess to sit before he sat back down as well. Gang Yun felt exhausted already. The court games had begun. For even this gesture of sitting after the Princess was part of it. Lord Cho was not acting gentlemanly. Normally the most powerful person in the room took the seat last.

Lord Cho was telling the Princess that within the council room, he had more power. And the Princess seemed to let this offense slide.

When she spoke, she spoke in precise, short sentences about how her brother ordered the Shadowmen—a name that earned a gasp from almost everyone but Lord Cho—to kill her and Cho Beom Pal.

“So, they are real? These Shadowmen?” A councilor asked.

“Who do you think my companions are?” The Princess jerked her head towards the two men.

Of course, Councilor Gang Yun realized, they disappear right into the shadows.

Some of the councilmen paled. One of them gulped. Councilor Gang Yun’s hair seemed to have whitened even more somehow.

“And you are… in cohorts with them?” The same councilor prodded.

“We have made an exchange. Of which I will explain further.” The Princess then went on to describe the most unbelievable account of how the Shadowmen were attacked by her brother’s Royal Guard after having mistaken her servant’s death as her own. And then the Shadowmen used her servant’s body to disguise her own state of still being alive. She did not elaborate on how the Shadowmen came to save her life, but she let them know that they delivered her to their Headmaster, who was the person that determined her fate.

Councilor Gang Yun felt she had skimmed over quite a bit, providing only three sentences of what she saw at the school of assassins. “It was a place in the mountains, the location of which I cannot disclose because I myself do not know. I went and met with their Headmaster. She agreed to let me return home under the protection of her men, provided that I give her something in return.”

“She?” Lord Cho leaned forward, one hand gripping the edge of the table. “The Assassin Lord is a woman?”

The Assassin Lord was the name used among the councilors exclusively to refer to the unnamed, unseen leader of the till now fictitious Shadowmen. It had been a joke. That some insane lord had gone rogue and was training men to become assassins. Now the idea didn’t seem as funny anymore.

“You know her, Lord Cho. And she needed my help in returning to her home. Since she had been banished by my father.”

Lord Cho drew a raggedy breath. Some of the men’s eyes nearly fell out of their sockets.

“Your Highness, you can’t possibly mean—”

“Yes, she means me.”

Beyond the sliding doors of the council room, the corridor was lit by low lanterns. But given the time of night, shadows still danced about the hall. From these shadows, like a ghost, emerged the once revered, the once feared and the once disgraced General Ji Ahn; the previous leader of the Kingdom’s army.

She had gotten old, Councilor Gang Yun observed. He had seen portraits of her, never having seen her in-person as he had still been a student at the time. Her face was striking, at once cunning, at once radiant. Thick short hair that was well known as her usual style. Sharp nose, even sharper cheeks and a beautiful, swooping mouth that curved into a knowing smile. A smile that made everyone think that she knew everything, even their hidden thoughts.

She was tall, taller than most women. Even taller than some of the men in the room. And well built, statuesque. She wore green, which stood out among the white that everyone was wearing. It was an act of blatant disrespect.

But then, so was the black and purple hanbook the Princess wore. Councilor Gang Yun wondered whether it had been her choice to wear it or whether she had been made to.

“Good evening, Councilors,” her voice was beguiling yet commanding. It both wooed and directed one to listen. “I don’t suppose you all remember me. I have been gone for almost two decades now.”

Lord Cho rose abruptly, “Princess, have you lost your mind?!”

General Ji Ahn spoke in the Princess’s stead, “Tsk, tsk. Is that any way to speak to your Princess?”

A small glimmer of discomfort passed over Princess Song Hwa’s face but it vanished in an instant. “Calm down, Lord Cho,” she said in her most diplomatic tone.

“Calm down! This woman was banished! And for good reason! Guards!” The Lord was red in the face.

The Princess stood, “She is my guest. I have lifted her exile, as is within my right.”

“Your Highness,” another councilor spoke pleadingly, “I implore you to revoke your statement.”

The Princess shook her head, “It is done. General Ji Ahn’s exile is lifted.”

An uproar of protests rose among the councilors, with Gang Yun the only exception as he couldn’t be bothered to rise up, despite feeling quite worried himself. But he could tell, that this decision was not in the Princess’s hands. Her deal with the General surely meant either her death or the General’s return. Gang Yun would not tell the Princess to retore an exile that could cost her, her life.

“That’s not all, councilors,” the General’s voice rose above the men’s comingled buzzing, and they all settled down.

The Princess spoke up. Just before she did, Gang Yun saw her swallow thickly, “General Ji Ahn requests your audience.”

All men, save Gang Yun, exclaimed disbelievingly.

“Why not just make her General again?”

“Or better yet, give her the throne while you’re at it.”

“Princess, what are you doing?”

“Did you get brainwashed by the Shadowmen?”

“Enough!” General Ji Ahn yelled, slamming a hand at the table. “Will you sit and listen or will you yawp like women in a brothel?”

Crude choice of words, but effective, nonetheless. All of the men settled down. Lord Cho shot daggers at General Ji Ahn, hoping to kill her with his eyes alone.

A seat was fetched for the General. She sat right beside the Princess at the end of the table, pushing her out slightly so that the Princess was more in the background.

Only then did Councilor Gang Yun notice the other men in black, standing in every corner of the corridor beyond the open council doors and the men standing near the door. They all flickered in and out of the shadows, like ghosts in the walls.

The entire image was disconcerting. Even more so when one realized that there were supposed to be members of the Royal Guard standing there instead. What had happened to them?

“Lord Cho, would you do me the honor of recounting the exact reasons behind my exile.” The General began.

“You can recount it far better than I.” All of them—the General included—knew  this was Lord Cho’s way of saying Go to hell.

The General was unaffected. “The offences laid against me were stated to be so heinous, that even records do not show what they were. I shall recount to you all, Councilors, the reasons behind my severe sentence, and the reasons why I was not beheaded instead. Which would have been a more apt punishment, had I not been falsely accused.”

Princess Song Hwa seemed surprised by this statement.

“The King himself investigated your crimes,” one of the councilors said indignantly. “Are you claiming he lied?”

“Yes.” The General said with a smile, a word that alone would have gotten her a punishment by death. “We all remember the massacre of King Lee Chang and his family. The brutal murder of his wife and children by unknown parties who were then identified as the Bandit Clans.”

The General paused to let the councilors nod in confirmation.

“But there was another party identified by the investigators of that time as the instigator of the attack. The investigators at that time included the then Chief State Councilman and the current late King Deok Hwa, the retired General Ahn Hyun and a young scholar by the name of Cho Hak Ju, whom you all know as Lord Cho.” The General leveled her gaze at the man at the other end of the long table.

“The three investigators decided to lay blame for orchestrating the massacre on the General of the army. Me. But, in fact, a conspiracy had taken place. One with King Deok Hwa, Lord Cho and General Ahn Hyun at the center of it.”

“What kind of nonsense are you spouting!” Lord Cho rose once more in a fit of fury. His chair scraped the wooden floor noisily.

“Let her speak.” One of the Councilors spoke. The others looked to the General to continue.

“She’s speaking lies!” Lord Cho protested.

“I have proof.” Swiftly, General Ji Ahn produced from her green sleeve, a bunch of folded documents. She handed them over to the nearest councilman who examined the papers while Ji Ahn spoke.

“The three men ran a conspiracy. A plot to kill King Lee Chang and his family.”

“Stop telling these lies!” Lord Cho bang his fist on the table with such force that everything on it bounced. A cup of water spilled. A pot of ink too. Councilman Gang Yun also jumped, along with two men to his right.

The General raised her voice to speak over Lord Cho’s protests, “They were against the King’s reforms to help the Bandit Clans. The King once had a lover. Hae Soo, a girl from the Bandit Clan. She turned him sympathetic to the plight of the needy and the destitute. The King decided he would take money from the nobility of the Kingdom and funnel it to peasants and common folk. What insolence! From a King who was put in a position of power by the very people he was going to strip of their wealth! Isn’t that what you said, Hak Ju-ya?”

The General stared wildly at Lord Cho, the familiar form of address she used was jarring and unexpected.

“Stop your nonsense!” The Lord stalked towards her around the table. In three strides he had reaced her but the beautiful Shadowman to the left suddenly had his sword on the Lord’s neck, rendering him immobile. The Lord stood, frozen in place, his eyes on the cold blade pressing at his throat.

“I’m not done, Lord Cho.” The General spat out the honorific, as if it tasted bitter on her tongue.

The councilor who had been examining the papers spoke up, “She speaks the truth. These papers here are an agreement between Lord Cho and King Deok Hwa for plans to assassinate King Lee Chang and all his kin.” The councilor passed the papers to the councilor next to him, who studied the agreement, and the signatures present at the bottom. Along with seals belonging to the men who signed it. Seals that could not be replicated by anyone else.

“Forgery!” Lord Cho said, the sword at his throat holding him in place even though he struggled to move against its pressure.

The Princess stood up, rushing over to the councilor that held the papers. “No, this can’t be true,” she snatched the document from behind the man, her eyes quickly going over it’s content.

Even the Princess couldn’t deny it. The evidence was irrefutable.

The councilor turned back and took the papers from the dumbfounded Princess who stumbled back against the wall. Her breath had become shallow. Her eyes wide.

But she didn’t seem surprised, Councilor Gang Yun noted.

“There is no mention of Lord Ahn Hyun.” The first councilor who had examined the papers said to General Ji Ahn.

“Ahn Hyun is too clever to leave any traces.” Ji Ahn replied, her words dripping with venom.

Everyone knew that it had been Lord Ahn Hyun who had trained General Ji Ahn and even promoted her to his position when he had retired. To have her show him such disrespect, to refer to him by his name alone, betrayed just how much the General hated her former mentor.

“But Deok Hwa and Hak Ju, they were foolish enough to write everything down. Even the date they planned to strike.”

The papers were passed around the table. One by one, the councilors saw with their own eyes, evidence that proved the General’s ridiculous claim. Even Gang Yun saw, that the document was indeed real and quite incriminating.

“If you had such evidence in your possession, why not bring it forth back then?” A councilor asked.

The General let out a long breath, “I was not exiled initially. The King tried to have me killed. When he failed to do so, and I managed to run away, he had me declared an enemy of the Kingdom, exiled to the mountains, to be killed upon sight. I had no way of returning. I needed someone to let me back in.” The General gestured to the Princess.

“Additionally…” the General paused, “these papers… I only came into possession recently. I had nothing, not even a coin, with me when I ran. I had my men retrieve these papers from the King’s personal quarters after he had passed away.”

“You mean you had your men steal it?” the councilor asked.

“You may see it as stealing. I see it as gathering evidence for the truth.”

No one objected.

With everyone’s focus on the papers, Lord Cho got a chance to unsheathe his own sword, although he was not as fast as the beautiful Shadowman keeping him in place. He was on his back within a second. The Shadowman moved almost too quick to follow.

The General got up and walked over to the fallen Lord, standing over him, leaning down menacingly, “The position of Chief State Councilor is a double-edged sword is it not? So close to power, you can almost taste it, yet so far away, that you can never have it. You were smart, Lord Cho. You chose to peacefully gain power by marrying your son off to the Princess. Pushing the King to forego his son over his daughter, when really, the poor Prince was simply misguided. He would have made a good king, under the right tutelage of course.” She spoke merrily now, relaxed that her task was done.

Except she was far from done. She had only just started.

The General stood up straight, motioning for the regal looking Shadowman. “Fetch Hyun.”

The Princess spoke up now as she pushed herself off the wall to stand tall and face the General. “General Ji Ahn. Our agreement has been fulfilled. Your audience has been granted. But enough is enough.”

“Silence! I will not have my actions dictated by a child!” The coldness in the General’s voice shook everyone in the room.

The Princess jumped back but kept her ground, “Remember who you speak to, General. I am still the Princess of this Kingdom.”

The General smiled wickedly, “No, child. Proving that your father murdered the Seondaewang not only exonerates me from my exile but also disqualifies your father as king. Meaning—”

“You are no longer a Princess.” The final councilor, the last to see the papers, spoke.

The Princess still did not look surprised. Councilor Gang Yun found himself curiously intrigued by her.

“I know what you have planned for Hyun, Ji Ahn,” the Princess used the same tone for the General as the one the General used when referring to Lord Ahn Hyun. “No one will believe he is anything but your son.”

The General laughed. “My son? My dear, I was declared barren quite some time ago. And quite publicly. The announcement was made by your own father, if I recall. A means of declaring me unfit to be a bride.”

The Princess sucked in her breath.

From her sleeve, the General produced another item. It dangled from her fingers, a long jade tablet with a hole on one end where a piece of twine was threated through. A few wooden tabs also were threated through the twine.

They were identification tags. And from the carving of the dragon on the jade tile, anyone could easily see that the identification tags belonged to a member of the royal family.

The General threw the tags on the table. They slid over to the right where the councilor sitting right next to Gang Yun picked them up and examined them.

The councilors eyes nearly popped out of his head.

“This can’t be…”

“Deok Hwa too, wanted more power. But he preferred violence over cunning. He chose to erase everyone who could claim the throne. And blame the Bandit Clans while he was at it, to irradicate the peasants who threatened the hierarchy of the Kingdom. But he made a mistake. He let one person slip away. Similar to how the Princess managed to fool everyone into thinking she was dead.”

Princess Song Hwa’s face paled Everyone knew the only other person who was rumored to be alive but declared dead because another woman’s body had been found in her clothing.

Queen Daemok.

“This is a lie.” The Princess declared.

“The tags don’t lie.” The General stated. “Hyun is the missing prince, the long lost child of King Lee Chang and the rightful heir to the throne!”

“She could have easily stolen the tags.”

“Check Hyun’s age.”

“A hundred men are his age!”

“Who are you going to believe? The daughter of a murderer or a woman who was wronged in the worst way possible by the man you all trusted to be just and fair!”

The councilors all turned to the Princess, who looked back at them, searching for anyone to take her side. No one was. It was comical how tides turned so quickly. All of these men had been so opposed to General Ji Ahn’s presence in the beginning.

The Princess’s eyes rested on Councilor Gang Yun, who looked away, hoping the Princess would not call on to him for anything. He was far too lazy to be involved in these political dramatics.

Did it matter now that King Lee Chang’s son was still alive? Would his bloodline make him a good fit for a king? Would all these theatrics give the General back the years she spent in exile and bring justice to what was done? The answer to all those questions was no. Because none of these matters were related to the most important question.

Who deserved to become king?

Gang Yun knew this question was useless. No one ever questioned the validity of the person on the throne. The seat was open to all those willing to fight tooth and nail, cross any line and betray any friend and family for it. The throne demanded sacrifice. Of one’s own humanity, of dignity, of decency.

Perhaps this is what General Ahn Hyun had meant when he had said that the head of the one who coveted the crown was heavier than the one who wore it.

Councilman Gang Yun yawned. Such strenuous deliberations made him tired.

The regal looking Shadowman returned with a boy in tow. The boy appeared fragile and frail. He was thin, effeminate, and looked around the room with eyes wide with naivete and wonder.

No one in the room mistook the boy as anything more than what he really was. A pawn.

“Councilmen, I present to you, Prince Hyun, son of King Lee Chang, and the heir to the throne.”

The boy appeared surprised at this declaration but said nothing. He looked too stunned to speak.

“And on that note,” the General said, “seize the Lady Song Hwa. She is no longer a Princess of the crown, nor is she welcome in this palace.”

The Princess did not resist her capture, but she did glower at the General.

“Seize Lord Cho. And tell the others to seize Queen Yoo as well. I have some interesting revelations about her too.”

Chapter Text

Once again, Dan Ho found himself throwing the Princess into yet another prison. She did not resist at all whilst leaving the council room. Since then, she had been eerily quiet and complacent. Quietly going along with Dan Ho as he took her away.

Hwang Rin brought the man called Lord Cho. Now he was one who had resisted hard, spitting curses at Hwang Rin, trying to escape using various swords, daggers and knives hidden in his hanbook. All of his efforts were useless. He was no match for a Shadowman.

“You knew this would happen.” Dan Ho said once he closed the prison door on the Princess. His hand was wrapped around one of the door bars.

“I had a feeling she would try something. I didn’t know she had evidence against my father.” Princess Song Hwa said quietly with her back turned to Dan Ho.

“And about Hyun?” Dan Ho recalled the conversation he had with Song Hwa prior to coming to the palace.

“He is not the prince.” Song Hwa put a hard emphasis on each word. “I am telling you he is not.”

“He cannot be the Headmaster’s son either.”

“I don’t care what was declared. Can’t you see it in his face? Are you really that blind?” She turned a little his way.

“Dan Ho,” Hwang Rin called to him, “we have to go.”

“I’ll come back for you.” Dan Ho whispered to the Princess before leaving.

He didn’t know what he would come back for. But he felt he had to return. Their conversation was not over. With this new information of Hyun brought to light, Dan Ho could not help but wonder, what had happened all those years ago, when King Lee Chang had been killed. And why had the Headmaster never mentioned it till now?

Oddly enough, he felt the only person he could discuss this with was the Princess.

But soon Dan HO discovered, that he would not get to have another conversation with the Princess. For the very next morning, the entire Kingdom awoke to the greatest shock of their life.

First, the discovery of King Deok Hwa’s betrayal of the Grand Predecessor King Lee Chang spread like wildfire. The Council had deliberated overnight and had concluded that indeed the Headmaster’s account of that event was true. Since General Ahn Hyun’s name was not in the document the Headmaster had provided, he had not been charged.

Next, the Kingdom got to know about the Princess’s return and how she was no longer their Princess. This people didn’t care much about as they had already mourned the loss of Princess Song Hwa and in their mind, she was already gone.

Finally, it was announced that Lord Cho would be hanged for his crimes. Along with Queen Yoo who turned out to have poisoned the King to death. And with those two, a third person was being hanged.

The Princess.

The charges against her were vague. Something about her being a false Princess who had enjoyed a position she did not deserve. Dan Ho found it to be preposterous. It wasn’t the Princess’s fault that she was born into such a situation.

I should speak to the Headmaster, Dan Ho thought. But hesitated. What will I say when she asks why I am speaking on the Princess’s behalf? Dan Ho had no reason to care whether the Princess lived or not. And if he said it was for sentimental reasons… then he would be getting a hanging too.

“You’re worried about her?” Hwang Rin was suddenly standing in front of Dan Ho as he was roaming the palace halls.

“Get out of my way.” Dan Ho shoved Hwang Rin with his shoulder as he walked around him.

“Yah, till when are we going to fight like this?”

Dan Ho hissed, spinning on his heels and grabbing Hwang Rin’s collar. “Till all eternity.”

“This can’t just be about Eun Dan.” Hwang Rin said.

“I told you. It wasn’t.”

“Then what the hell, Dan Ho? How exactly am I supposed to apologize if I don’t know what it is I’m sorry for?”

Dan Ho swallowed thickly, his tongue tasting like ash. “If you have to ask… then I can’t explain it to you.” Dan Ho pushed him away.

“Bull shit! You tell me what this is right now, or… or…”

“Or what? You’ll tell on me too?” The words just tumbled out.

“Too? You think I told on someone?” Hwang Rin got into his space, his eyes curiously searching Dan Ho’s.

“I know you did. Sam Chul… he was a fool but he didn’t deserve to die.” Dan Ho’s lower lip quivered. He couldn’t say Sam Chul’s name without his eyes stinging.

Hwang Rin’s eyes squinted in confused, “Wait… I wasn’t the one who… wait, are you telling me you think I’m the one who informed the Headmaster?”

“Don’t pretend, Hwang Rin.” Dan Ho said through clenched teeth. “Just don’t.”

“Ho-ya, I’m not pretending. I don’t know what gave you this idea. But it wasn’t me. You know I wouldn’t—”

“Oh, stop that!” Dan Ho pushed him away, “You did it so you could get permission for Eun Dan, didn’t you?” It was embarrassing to see Hwang Rin act this way. It made Dan Ho feel angrier.

“I didn’t say anything!” Hwang Rin yelled.

Dan Ho got up in Hwang Rin’s face, “You. You better stay away from me. Or else I really will kill you.” He walked away before Hwang Rin had a chance to say anything further, going around the corner of the hall.

“Wait!” Hwang Rin ran after him but as soon as he turned around the corner, Dan Ho was gone. Vanished into thin air. Just like a true Shadowman.

“Ugh! Why do we all do that?” Hwang Rin groaned.

~~~~~~~

The sun was low when Princess Song Hwa heard soft footsteps approach her jail cell. She did not recognize them but knew they could not belong to a Shadowmen as they would never make any sound.

The footsteps stopped right at the edge of her cell. From where she sat, she could not see the person but from his shadow, she could tell he was very tall.

He yawned. Song Hwa recognized the gesture.

“You are either very brave, or very foolish, Councilor Gang Yun.” Song Hwa said. “You yawned back in the council room too. Just when things were getting interesting.”

“I was tired.” The Councilor did not hesitate to answer.

“You wasted all day before coming to see me.” Song Hwa said. She had almost given up hope that he would come.

“I was catching up on sleep.”

Song Hwa rolled her eyes.

The Councilor came forward. He looked like a ghost, all tall and gangly, dressed in a white hanbook, with hair too as white as snow, even though he was younger than most councilors. Song Hwa stood in greeting. He bowed to her respectfully.

“I am curious, Your Highness. How come you weren’t surprised by what happened yesterday?” He asked just as she opened her mouth to speak.

Song Hwa let out a long, strained, breath. “I already was expecting her to try something.”

“Why not prevent it?”

“She would have killed me.”

“You’re dead anyways.” The Councilor pointed out.

“I am hoping it won’t come to pass.”

“And you need my help.”

“Yes. And also, one other thing.”

“I don’t like getting involved in things, Princess.” The Councilor scrunched up his face like he had bit into a lemon.

“Yes, yes. Don’t worry. You don’t have to do much.”

Councilor Gang Yun relaxed visibly, “As long as it doesn’t involve too much work.”

Song Hwa shook her head. The man had once refused to attend a ceremony that had been held to honor and praise him, purely because it had been “too much work”. The Princess wondered how it was that such a man had ended up on the council.

“I need to send a message to the Captain of the Guard.”

“That’s it?” the Councilor piped up. “Sure! I can happily—”

“And I need you to get Queen Yoo in the cell next to me.”

At this, the Councilor deflated. His eyes narrowed, “You said this wouldn’t be much work,” he whined.

“It isn’t.”

“There is no way I can get Queen Yoo placed right beside you without rousing suspicion. And then the people I will have to cajole, ugh. All that yawping… with people. Ugh.” The man shuddered.

Song Hwa rolled her eyes again. Harder this time.

“People are so draining. Why one must interact with anyone is beyond me.”

“Interacting with you is no easy task either.” Song Hwa said dryly.

“So, you understand!” The Councilor appeared genuinely touched.

The Princess’s face blanked. This man was a complete child. Perhaps she needed to give him a child’s payment. “I have heard you have a penchant for sweets.”

“My wife’s sweets.” He clarified.

“Oh? And if I were to tell you where I hid the cake jar in my room, you wouldn’t be interested?” Song Hwa cajoled.

The Councilman looked to a corner as if contemplating a dire decision. “I’d have to sneak into your room. Then I’d have to search. And it would require stealth and further bribing. Ugh, so much work,” he shook his head as if dismissing the idea, “It’s easier to just get you the Queen.”

“So, you’ll do it?”

“I shall bear this difficulty and get you Queen Yoo,” he said self-sacrificingly.

Song Hwa opened her mouth, but the Councilor quickly bounced backward on his feet, “Now, now. I am sure that is all, isn’t it? Well, I should be on my way. Thank you and goodbye!” The Councilor jogged off.

“Wait! The message! The message for the Captain!” The Princess called after him.

The Councilor came sprinting back, “What is it?”

“Tell, the Captain to call the falcon home. He will know what it means.”

“I am sure he will. Goodbye, Princess.” And the man ran off before Song Hwa could give him something else to do.

~~~~~~~

Song Hwa did not find out whether her message had been delivered. That day, every hour, every minute, every second, seemed to stretch into eternity. Where time in the prison back at the assassin school seemed to pass by in a hurry. Here, it seemed to crawl slowly into oblivion.

Song Hwa paced back and forth in her cell, working out every which way her plan could go wrong. And she discovered there were more ways for her plan to fail than there were for it to succeed.

Eventually, the Princess’s legs began to ache, and she could move no longer. She settled into the hard bed given in one corner of the cell, hoping for some sign, some confirmation that the Councilor had done as she had asked.

She didn’t notice when she had fallen asleep. She only realized when she jerked awake at the sound of the cell door creaking open. Someone was being moved into the cell next door.

Various sounds could be heard: jangling chains, the quiet whimpering of someone scared, shuffling of what sounded like sheets but were most likely extravagant skirts, a loud clang of the barred door being closed and the turning of a rusty, iron key. Then foot steps shuffling away, the sound fading down the corridor.

Song Hwa waited till some time had passed after the guard left before walking up to the end of the cell that connected with the other one. She leaned as far out through the cell bars as she could.

“Queen Yoo? Are you there?” Song Hwa whispered.

The prisoner in the other cell stirred. They gasped, as if rousing from some delirium, which Song Hwa deducted the Queen must be suffering from. A woman like Queen Yoo could never imagine something like this happening to her. Despite her cunning, she was fragile. The woman had never spent a single second where she didn’t have someone waiting on her hand and foot. Being caged in a cell with no servants and no allies must have made her lose her mind.

In a broken voice, the Queen said, “It can’t be… they must have been lying. You were dead. You were finally dead.”

Finally dead. As if the Queen had been hoping for Song Hwa’s demise for quite some time. Song Hwa had already known this. But hearing it acknowledged was still jarring and disturbing. But the Princess shoved her feelings aside. She needed information right now. And the dastardly woman was the only way to get it.

“Think of me as a ghost if it makes you feel better,” the Princess said.

“There are ghosts that roam the halls of the palace,” the Queen said gravely, in a hushed voice. “A woman. She calls for her child.”

“Focus!” Song Hwa hissed. She had no time for the Queen’s hysterics. “Answer my question. Or this ghost will haunt you into the afterlife.”

“No,” the Queen whimpered. “Leave me! Don’t haunt me.”

“Then tell me this. You didn’t poison my father.” It wasn’t a question. Song Hwa knew in her gut it to be true. It was too much of a coincidence that her father, her brother and even her to-be husband were all killed one after the other. Something didn’t add up. “You didn’t poison the King.”

A low wail rose from the other cell. “I would not dare! The King would have found out and hung me! But she did it! That green viperess. That fiend.”

Green. There was no one else Song Hwa knew who wore that color so boldly. “You know Ji Ahn?”

“How could I not? She promised me the throne for my son, pretended to be an ally, and then ruined me.”

“She promised the throne?”

“Yes! I hated her but she made things happen, gave me information when I needed it. And like a fool… like a fool…”

“How did you two communicate?”

“In person. In the palace.”

“You called her here?”

“She came herself.”

“Were her visits frequent?”

“Too frequent. I would have rather not seen her.”

“And she got in herself?”

“I already told you, didn’t I?”

“Would you say she got in easily?”

“She never appeared to have trouble traveling anywhere.”

“What do you mean?”

A loaded pause.

“You’re going to be hanged, Queen Yoo. What good will holding your tongue do now?” Song Hwa pushed.

“You’ll die too. What good will knowing all this do?”

“I want closure. I don’t fancy haunting the palace, looking for answers.” Song Hwa hoped that the Queen was out of it enough to fall for such an obvious lie.

Whether the Queen bought it or not was unclear. But still, she said, “Do you remember the crisis of the western salt mines? When the Northern threatened a siege?”

“Yes.” Song Hwa remembered it well. Queen Yoo had sent her own envoy to calm the Northern clans and forge a treaty. No one knew quite how the Queen had managed to pull it off, but it had earned her the respect of the King and the Council.

“It was her. Ji Ahn. She gave me letters from the leader of the North. Incriminating letters.”

“You blackmailed the Northern clan leader?” Song Hwa’s brows shot up.

“How else would he have backed down?”

“What was in the letters?”

“I was instructed not to open them. Simply to send them back to the clan leader. The rest took care of itself.”

“And you never asked Ji Ahn why she helped you?”

“She said she wanted my son in power. So that he could grant her amnesty.”

“How did she get the letters?”

“She told me she stole them. From the Northern tribe.”

“Herself?”

“It sounded like it.”

“And you never bothered to ask her why she needed amnesty from exile when she could easily travel to the North?”

Silence.

Song Hwa took a minute to absorb this information. What bothered her most was the timeline. It appeared that Ji Ahn had been working towards this plan for quite some time.

“When did she begin to contact you?” Song Hwa asked.

“Since I became Queen.”

Song Hwa’s heartbeat dropped. A little over a decade. The General was a very patient woman. And this couldn’t be a simple coup. There was a great amount of planning behind it.

“What else can you tell me about her?”

“Don’t trust her. That’s all I can say. And don’t listen to her. She has a way of convincing people. Especially men. She’s always had a way with men.”

This Song Hwa took the last sentiment with a grain of salt. Ever since the General had come into the limelight as the first female warrior, many a rumor had spread about how she had gotten her position. No one could fathom that a woman had the skill to be a warrior, so the common narrative became that Ji Ahn was too beguiling for any man to resist and thus had charmed her way in. It didn’t help that the General happened to be quite beautiful.

Song Hwa was wise enough to read between the lines of history’s misogyny. But it didn’t surprise her that the Queen—herself a woman—believed in it.

Song Hwa sat down in the farther corner, feeling exhausted. A question weighed heavy on her mind. It was something she didn’t want to know the answer to. “Did my father… really kill the Seondaewang?”

The Queen slowly got to her feet, her clothes rustling as she moved to the end of her cell that was joined to Song Hwa’s. She grabbed the bars of her prison cell. Song Hwa only saw her dainty fingers curl around the round, black metal. “Your father never admitted it. But I felt that the ghosts of the men he wronged were around him. Your father was a man haunted. He never believed me, but I saw them. The ghosts. They were after him.”

Ghosts again, Song Hwa thought skeptically.

“I wasn’t there, but there were nights when it was just your father and I,” Song Hwa cringed, “when he admitted that he had done terrible things to get to the throne. He made me promise I would not betray him. I would not do to him what he did to his closest friend.”

Song Hwa let out an exhale of disbelief. The audacity of that man… she thought bitterly. And how foolish he was to say this to a social climbing consort.

The Queen continued, “But did you know the one thing he did admit to? That before he was king, he was with her.”

“Who?” Song Hwa asked with furrowed brows.

“Ji Ahn. They were lovers.”

At this the Princess stood up and went over to the where the two cells met. “For how long?”

“From when she joined the Army, till her exile.”

“And my father said this?”

“From his very lips.”

“I don’t believe you.” Song Hwa said determinedly.

“Think about it. Everyone who was even suspected of being involved in King Lee Chang’s murder was killed. Without trial. Deok-Hwa even killed his own men that he claimed were involved. At the time everyone thought it was out of loyalty. But I see it now—”

“He was killing witnesses.” Song Hwa said.

“Ji Ahn led the massacre, but on your father’s orders.” This checked with what Ji Ahn had revealed to the council. “And she was the one they all laid the entire blame on once the dust settled. Yet, she was never executed. Why?”

“Ji Ahn said that my father tried to have her killed.”

“If he had wanted her dead she would be. Why didn’t he send men after her later? Why announce only an exile?”

“She has the Shadowmen protecting her. Perhaps my father wasn’t able to capture her.”

The Queen laughed mockingly. “The Shadowmen are nothing compared to the Royal Guard. And beyond them, General Ahn Hyun’s men are invincible. The almighty King, with all these warriors at his disposal, was unable to catch one single woman? No, my dear. He let her get away. He let her live. He loved her—well as much as his cold, black heart could love. She had a place that nor I, nor your own mother could capture.”

Song Hwa shook her head to herself. This was all the conjecture of a bitter wife. There couldn’t be any truth to it.

Yet it made sense. Keeping Ji Ahn alive was a grave mistake on her father’s part. And he wasn’t one to make mistakes like that. In fact, he was the kind to kill two birds with one stone. He wouldn’t have let this happen unless he had other reasons of keeping her alive.

The thought made Song Hwa sick to her stomach.

The Queen went on, “That woman… is a monster. She beguiled your father. And she will beguile the council now. Just like she beguiled me into thinking she was helping me.”

“What did you do for her?”

“I gave her information. She wanted to know about the King’s movements. And about his children. Young Hwa in particular. In return, she did little things for me. Gave me information. And guided me.”

Song Hwa’s ears perked up at the mention of her brother. “Young Hwa?”

“She became interested in him when he got his title of Crown Prince. I thought she was helping me by spying on him. But no, she was only helping herself. I bet she beguiled him too. I was starting to wonder how he could be foolish enough to end up losing his title. And then… your assassination. That brat never appeared the type to kill his own kind.”

The cogs in Song Hwa’s head began turning. Indeed, Young Hwa, a once innocent child had grown to become such a spoilt and mean young man. Song Hwa had always attributed his change in behavior to the pressures of the court. Not once had she suspected that external influences had been involved.

But now that the Queen had said this, certain things seemed to be falling into place. The Princess felt she understood General Ji Ahn’s plan a little.

If she and my father were lovers, then my father was clearly using her. He made her fall in love with him and used her to carry out his plot to take the throne. Then he discarded her after she killed the King and all of his heirs. I can only imagine how angry must have been at my father’s betrayal. This was all revenge then. All of it. She started gathering the orphans of the Kingdom, children no one would notice missing and she built a little army of her own. Meanwhile, she dismantled the court from within. First, she turned the King’s children against each other and broke apart the royal family. Then one by one, all of the people who could have inherited the throne died… just like the Seondaewang and his family’s massacre… And when that was done, she goes after the thing that my father, her lover, betrayed her for.

The crown.

With everyone else out of the way, there was only one person who had an indisputable right to the throne.

The Grand Predecessor King’s only remaining heir.

Song Hwa understood why the Queen was afraid of General Ji Ahn. Song Hwa felt a little afraid too. And more so because she came to understand one more thing.

“What did she promise you?” Song Hwa asked. “You said she beguiled you. She must have promised you something to do that.”

“The throne. For my son.”

Of course. It was the throne. It was always the throne.

Her brother had been after it too. So had Cho Beom Pal.

The General had used the very thing that had caused her ruin as a tool to ruin everyone else. She had used everyone’s greed for the throne against them.

Heavy is the head that wears the crown. Heavier still, is the heart that covets it.

General Ahn Hyun used to say this to her when Song Hwa had been a little girl.

“I know what that first part means,” the young Princess had said, scrunching up her nose. “It means the throne is a position of great responsibility. But what’s the rest about?”

Song Hwa remembered vividly, the old man’s shaky voice as he had explained, “It means, my dear Princess, that coveting the crown is just as much of a burden as it is to wear it. For the person who wants the crown, the throne, and all that comes with it, must be willing to sacrifice everything they hold dear. And to pay that price, and then live with yourself afterwards, is indeed quite a burden.”

“Do you understand now? What I mean? That woman’s a monster.”

Although Song Hwa shuddered, she still said, “The worst thing than underestimating an enemy, is overestimating them. The General is smart, but she’s no monster. She’s human like you and me. And like you and me, she has weaknesses.” And I intend to find them, the Princess decided resolutely.

“That woman has no weaknesses,” the Queen retorted, “I have never seen a more terrifying being. She knows everything, and everyone. She can read you like a fortune teller and see your next move before you’ve even decided on it.” Song Hwa could hear the Queen shiver. “She’s a monster. She’s not human. She’s a monster.”

“There’s no such things as monsters,” the Princess said flatly. “Only people.” And they were the worst kind of monster. The kind that went against their own.

“She is a monster,” the Queen insisted. “Have you ever seen the shadows cling to a person the way they cling to her?”

Indeed, Song Hwa had not.

~~~~~~~

Dan Ho’s hands were shaking uncontrollably. Even holding the dagger in his had did nothing to help this time.

It was sunrise and the palace staff were busy preparing the execution grounds.

The Princess was going to be hung today.

Of course, many others would be hung before her. But she was the only one Dan Ho was focused on.

He walked around the palace grounds, searching for some way to rid himself of the heavy feeling in his heart. But no matter where he went, he was reminded of her.

The Headmaster had been provided a space to stay in, within the palace grounds. A small housing of a former Royal Concubine. All her entourage, the Shadowmen she had come to the capital with, were staying there as her own personal staff. No royal servant was allowed in.

Dan Ho went over to their housing but it was too near to the grounds that the Princes had once run away to when her father had slapped her. Dan Ho remembered going after her and offering her the handkerchief Eun Dan had given him.

When he went into the main palace halls he was reminded of the Princess’s wit when she had been forced into an audience with Cho Beom Pal. He decided to go left from the main halls but ended up at the Princess’s housing which made his heart leap. And when he went right, he came to the guard house where Dan Ho had stayed whilst pretending to be a Royal Guardsman.

Dan Ho wondered if the guards he had befriended remembered him. Surely not. But he hadn’t seen any of them either. Perhaps they had been removed along with Prince Young Hwa when he had been punished.

Eventually he ended up where he had started. The prison where Song Hwa was kept. He dared not go in for he didn’t trust himself. But his feet had other intentions.

“It is time already?” The Princess said as soon as he stepped in front of her cell. She didn’t bother getting up from where she lounged on the ground, against the farthest wall where she had one leg propped up and her hand balanced on the knee.

“Is it time?” The worried sound from the adjacent cell surprised Dan Ho. What surprised him further was the occupant who had spoken. The former Queen. Her hair had gone all white overnight. She looked a pale imitation of her former, cunning, self. She pressed her face against the bars as she stared, bug eyed, at Dan Ho. The assassin chose to ignore her.

“How quaint. You’re the one who started this mess. I guess Ji Ahn wants you to be the one who finished it.” The Princess sounded disconcertingly bored. She seemed unaffected by the fact that she had mere hours to live.

“You’ve got something planned.” Dan Ho stated as a way of asking, sounding more hopeful than he wanted to. “Otherwise, you wouldn’t speak so callously.”

“Nope. I’ve just accepted my fate. And what would come from worrying anyways? It’ll just be a waste of time. Especially since I’m about to run out of it.”

“How can you speak so carelessly about your execution?” Dan Ho scolded, annoyed. Here he was, worried sick about her. Yet she appeared to not care at all.

“I’m guessing you’re not here to escort me after all. Else you wouldn’t be wasting my time with idle chit chat.”

“Idle--?” Dan Ho gripped one of the bars angrily, “What is wrong with you? You’re about to die!” He hissed in a low tone, not wanting the Queen to hear.

“Ho-ho, someone’s anxious.” The Princess tilted her head, looking every bit like a cat having fun playing with its prey. “Why? Are you going to miss me, Shadowman Dan Ho?”

Dan Ho’s mouth clamped shut.

The Princess got to her feet, walking slowly, purposefully, towards him. “Are you?” This time, her question was genuine. Her eyes searched his for an answer.

Dan Ho remembered then, the events that took place upon their return to the capital. They had been stopped at the city gates where all of them had been imprisoned till the Princess’s identity was verified.

To confirm who she was, Cho Jang Hyun, Lord Cho’s son and the Captain of the Guard had been sent.

Dan Ho could never forget, how the Princess had lit up from the depth of her being when she had seen Go Chung Myun riding in the distance.

Her unfiltered cry of absolute joy, “Chung Myung!”, still echoed in his mind. The way she had run right into Chung Myung’s arms after pushing against all of the guards who tried to hold her back. The way she had held on to him and cried.

The way he had held her back and cried too.

“I guess not.” The Princess said when he hadn’t spoken for a while. “You didn’t care that Sam Chul died. I bet you don’t care about anyone dying.”

Dan Ho swallowed. “Of course not. I’m an assassin. Death is my occupation.”

“Tell me, will they cut my head off or does Ji Ahn prefer more showmanship?” The Princess gave a sardonic smile.

“It is a hanging.” Dan Ho informed simply.

“Ah.” Was all the Princess said as she begun to leisurely walk away from him.

“I don’t… I’m not happy… that you are being hanged.” Dan Ho struggled to form the right words.

The Princess did not respond. He couldn’t decipher her expressions either since she had her back to him.

Clinging to the cell bars, he said in a small voice, “I do hope you have something up your sleeve.”

“And if I do? Will you inform your Headmaster?” She asked in an equally small voice.

Dan Ho thought about it. “Perhaps if we form another contract that binds me from doing so…”

“Alright. Have a contract with me.” The Princess slowly spun on her heels and walked back to him keeping her gaze fixed on his.

“You need payment.” He informed.

“I gave all I had to you when we made our first deal.”

Dan Ho eyed the pin on her head. A cheap thing that the Headmaster had given her to hold back her hair. Song Hwa took it out and part of her hair spilled around her face. She wordlessly handed it to him.

She didn’t say anything. But the fact that she had agreed to a contract was enough of an indication. Dan Ho felt relieved.

Dan Ho palmed the pin. It was golden with red imitation cherries decorating it.

He did not dare say goodbye. So, he willed his reluctant legs to walk away.

“Was that man a prince?” He heard the Queen ask the Princess.

“No.”

“He sure looked like one.”

“He isn’t a Prince.”

When he came out of the prison, he was met with Shadowmen walking his way.

They had come to collect the Princess.

The execution grounds had been set. It was meant to be a spectacle. People wore colors again since the previous King was now disgraced. The mourning for his death had been lifted and anyone wearing white was considered a betrayer of the Kingdom.

All of the councilors had gathered in their bright burgundy uniforms, with the Headmaster at the helm, wearing a particularly festive dark green suit.

Dan Ho felt sick. But he appeared as stoic and unreadable as ever.

Like always, he stood to the Headmaster’s right. Hwang Rin stood to her left. Hwang Rin sent Dan Ho a look of concern. Dan Ho ignored it.

Someone announced the charges. Someone else announced the penalty. A few more words were said. Dan Ho’s eyes were focused on the horizon. The line of trees beyond the palace grounds. And the sky beyond it.

It was a beautiful day. Not a gloomy cloud in the sky. But Dan Ho felt like rain.

The first person to be executed was Lord Cho. He yelled a million curses to the Headmaster. And claimed she had fooled everyone. The next person was Queen Yoo, who seemed too lost in her mind to care. She did gather enough of her wits to ask about what would happen to her children. The Headmaster said they would be put to work into her school.

The Queen seemed satisfied, blissfully unaware that going to the Headmaster’s school meant that her son would become an assassin and her daughters prostitutes.

Two more men were executed. Ones who had gone against Hyun’s right to the throne, cousins of the disgraced King Deok Hwa who would not be referred to as Seondaewang—a title given to the latest preceding King.

Finally, it was the Princess’s turn.

Dan Ho held his breath and palmed a dagger from his sleeve. It was on the tip of his fingers.

The Princess was read her charges. She heard them without flinching a muscle, giving no reaction but boredom. Similar to how Dan Ho was holding himself.

Then she was asked her last words.

Dan Ho looked to the horizon, to the trees and the sky beyond. The dagger cut into his freshly healed palm. Up in the sky a bird’s cry rang.

It was a falcon.

Huh. Suddenly, he was thinking of pigeons. Why? He remembered the Princess and how she tried to befriend birds during their journey back.

“Well, don’t you have anything to say?” The Headmaster called to the silent Princess.

Not birds, pigeons, Dan Ho reminded himself. Carrier pigeons. The kind that could send messages.

Something moved in the trees. But that something was sneaky. Even Dan Ho’s sharp eyes couldn’t catch what it was.

“I want you to remember something, General Ji Ahn. If you can spend two decades on your revenge, then so can I!”

The Headmaster scoffed, “Perhaps in another life, Princess.”

The executioner opened the trap door beneath the Princess’s feet and she fell.

An arrow flew through the air, slicing past Dan Ho, going right for the Princess. But it didn’t hit the Princess, it hit the rope she was hanging from. The arrow was timed to her fall so that she would hit the ground directly without snapping her neck.

What followed happened swiftly and quickly, within what seemed like a second. The Princess held her hand up and another arrow sliced through the air, through the rope around her wrists, setting her free.

The guards around the hanging post leapt for her but from the sides, men emerged, riding horses, with swords on the ready. They were wearing white, as if still mourning the disgraced King’s death. Their faces were hidden with white cloth covering their faces below the nose. Dan Ho felt he had seen them before but didn’t have time to process it.

“Stop her!” The Headmaster commanded and Hwang Rin and Dan Ho jumped in, along with the Royal Guard and the other Shadowmen.

One Shadowman got to Princess Song Hwa before anyone else, his sword held high. Just as he was about to strike her, a dagger hit his throat. Blood spurted from his neck and onto the horrified Princess. The Princess looked to where the dagger came from.

Had Dan Ho been even a millisecond too late to kill the Shadowman, the Princess would have gone. But he wasn’t late, because he had already been palming the blade.

“What are you doing, Sunbae?!” Another Shadowman shouted. “You missed the Princess!”

The same Shadowmen went for the Princess but someone else stabbed him from behind. As his body fell, Captain Chung Myung came into view. He too, was in white.

The Captain eyed Dan Ho but didn’t bother wasting time on him. He went straight for the Princess and fought off the men looking to finish what the executioner had started.

The men in white ambushed them from all sides, dismounting their horses to join the fight.

“Don’t let them get away!” The Headmaster shouted.

Dan Ho noticed that the men in white uniform had already taken over the field. Every Shadowman, every Royal Guard was fighting one of them.

From the distance, another group of the men emerged, with one elderly man at the center. The falcon from the sky landed on the elderly man’s shoulder. Behind him, riding with more men in white, were the three Princesses and the young Prince; children of Queen Yoo.

Dan Ho recognized the elderly man as Lord Ahn Hyun. And he recognized the falcon as the one he had seen before, with the Princess.

Dan Ho had no choice. He couldn’t simply stand around and do nothing. It would be his own death sentence. And he had a clear path to the Captain and the Princess.

The Princess had picked up a fallen sword and was swinging it around pitifully. She lacked the strength but she seemed adept enough to keep her attackers at bay, just long enough for Chung Myung to finish them off.

Dan Ho looked around. Everyone else was already occupied. Hwang Rin was fighting off two men at a time.

The men in white who were ambushing them seemed just as capable as the Shadowmen. Normally, the Shadowmen were quick to turn the tide in their favor. Even in small numbers. But the men in white appeared to be giving all of them a hard time.

Their fighting style was strange. Not in any foreign way, but rather in its familiarity. In a way, it was as if Dan Ho was watching Shadowmen fight with each other.

“AHN HYUN!” The Headmaster’s cry was that of a madwoman. Dan Ho could only stare as he saw in her, an unbridled rage that he had never seen before.

The Headmaster jumped into the battle field, slicing men down left and right. “Come and fight me you COWARD, Ahn Hyun!”

She was going towards the Lord, ignoring the Princess completely.

“I see you’ve abused all that I taught you, Ji Ahn-na.” Lord Ahn Hyun’s address to the Headmaster was oddly paternal. In contrast, the Headmaster looked like a child raging through a tantrum.

“YOU COWARD! Come and give me the fight you owe me!” Left and right, men fell by the Headmaster’s sword. She even struck down a Royal Guard in her rage, unaware that he was on her side.

“Dan Ho!” Hwang Rin called Dan Ho out of his haze, “Get the Princess!”

Dan Ho shook his head, snapping himself out of his thoughts. What am I doing? I’m a Shadowman! I can’t act like this! He reprimanded himself as his anxiety and worry all washed away. He was left cold and numb like he always was. He was left just a Shadowman with a duty to fulfill.

He ran to Chung Myung, who spun around just in time to deflect his strike.

“Chung Myung, watch out!” The Princess cried at the same time.

Dan Ho fought the Captain. The Captain fought back. He was well trained. But he was also tired, having fought six men before Dan Ho. And Dan Ho was a Shadowman, trained for speed and endurance.

Dan Ho could tell he was going to win.

A horse ran into the field. It was the Captain’s horse. It circled Dan Ho and the Captain, waiting for the Captain to mount it.

Dan Ho could see an opening where to strike the panting Captain of the Guard. What he did not see, was the Princess using the horse as a cover to get close and attack him.

She came from behind the horse, aiming a sword at him. It caught him by surprise and gave Chung Myung an opening to strike Dan Ho. Dan Ho deflected the blow but the Princess was quick too. She struck again.

And stabbed Dan Ho in his side.

He could have stopped it. Could have deflected it. But if he had done so, he would cut her.

The pain wasn’t that unbearable. But the blood loss was immediate and Dan Ho stumbled backwards, holding his wound.

He looked up at the Princess in bewilderment.

The Captain pulled her and himself on his horse and quickly rode off.

Dan Ho fell, his line of sight falling on the group of men in the distance.

The Headmaster was trying to make her way to them but every time she took a step forward, a soldier in white got in her way.

“AHN HYUN I WILL NOT FORGET THISSSS!” The Headmaster hissed.

While he lie bleeding, Dan Ho remembered the time he had first met Lord Ahn Hyun during his visit to the Princess. How similar in aura his men had felt to the Shadowmen.

Almost as if they had been trained by the same person.

Lord Ahn Hyun had trained General Ji Ahn when she had joined the army, Dan Ho remembered. King Deok Hwa had been the General at that time whilst Ji Ahn had been a colonel.

Had the Shadowmen been learning Lord Ahn Hyun’s teachings all this time?

“I apologize, I don’t have long to chat.” Lord Ahn Hyun called to them, turning his horse around, “But I suspect we will be seeing each other again, soon!”

The Lord along with the Captain and Princess Song Hwa, all rode off whilst what remained of Lord Ahn Hyun’s men stayed back to fight.

“Stand down. You all are no match for us.” Dan Ho heard someone say.

“We all are here to die, Shadowman.” A soldier in white replied.

The Headmaster came up behind the Lord’s man, putting her entire sword through him. Blood spread around his chest as he fell forward with a squeak.

The Headmaster stood over him, her face contorted in rage. She put the edge of her sword to his throat and said, “Did you miss?” She was referring to the dagger her had thrown that had killed one of her men and saved the Princess, effectively allowing her to escape.

Dan Ho himself did not know. His hand had acted on its own accord.

Lie. The voice in his head was not his own. But he recognized it from somewhere. It was a woman.

Lie. The woman ordered again.

Dan Ho shook his head, feeling morose that his last act in life was to be his first ever lie to the Headmaster.

He retracted her sword and nodded.

Then everything faded to black.

~~~~~~~

Fire. Reds, oranges, yellows. A flurry of color, a picture of rage, shadows dancing in the background.

A shrill scream. A baby crying. Blood splattering over walls. The sound of flesh being cut.

A man and a woman running. The woman falling. Swords slicing through air. A child curling it’s small fingers around her mother’s thumb.

“Slow down.” A voice said in his head. Let me guide you.

A hand took his. Dan Ho could feel a large jade ring around the ring finger of this hand. The kind of ring only women of great privilege wore.

“Let me take you to the start.”

Dan Ho saw the images stop to a single vision. He was in a plain, grassy hill. The moon was out in its full glory. A man and a woman sat by the lake, the water rippling where they both were skipping stones.

“Lord Ahn Hyun is so mean.” The woman said and immediately, Dan Ho recognized the voice. She sounded younger. Her hair was longer. Her body less statuesque though still tall.

It was the Headmaster.

“He’s extra hard on you because he wants to disprove those nasty rumors.” The man said. He sounded familiar too but Dan Ho couldn’t place him.

“Why does he believe them in the first place?” Ji Ahn angrily threw a stone in the water. The force of it sent huge ripples down the lake.

“He doesn’t.” The man pulled her to his side by the waist. From that gesture alone, Dan Ho knew, they were lovers. “But he doesn’t want anyone else to believe it either.”

Ji Ahn put her chin on the man’s shoulder, looking up at him with eyes wide with affection. “You’re the General, Deok Hwa. You’re the one everyone listens to.”

“But Lord Ahn Hyun is the one everyone respects. He trained me and he trained Lee Chang. You’re being trained by the best. Take it for the honor it is.”

Deok Hwa kissed Ji Ahn, smiling as he dipped his mouth to meet hers.

“This is your way of manipulating me into submission, isn’t it?” Ji Ahn purred once they parted.

“Um-hmm.” Deok Hwa grinned.

“Good. I approve.” She smiled at him, in a way Dan Ho had never expected her to smile. With her teeth all out and her eyes crinkling like crescents of the moon. The woman’s face held a warmth he had never seen. A side to her that perhaps no longer existed.

They kissed again.

The silver moonlight shifted into the flame of a lantern. They were in a room now, where warm light danced around slippery shadows.

Ji Ahn and Deok Hwa sat in a room. A third man sat with them. Dan Ho barely recognized the young Lord Cho. He looked completely different from the jaded man he had seen in the council room.

“I still think this matter can be settled peacefully if we just talked to him.” Ji Ahn implored to the two men. Dan Ho had never heard such a desperate tone from the Headmaster.

“Lee Chang isn’t willing to listen.” Deok Hwa said harshly.

“Let me speak with him, then.”

Deok Hwa sucked in his breath, baring his teeth, “Why can’t you see reason for once?! Always with the sentiment! Do you not see? This is the only way. Lee Chang is willing to forsake everyone who has supported him for his precious dead wife—”

“Don’t talk about Hae Soo like that.” Ji Ahn said but Deok Hwa spoke over Ji Ahn’s reprimand.

“—and lead this Kingdom to ruin.”

“I don’t see how a little tax will ruin the Kingdom. He is trying to build it up!”

“He is taking away what is rightfully ours.” Lord Cho, not yet a Lord, spoke up.

“Well if this is the way both of you have chosen then count me out! I will have none of this!” Ji Ahn got up and stormed out.

The two men looked at each other.

“She’s going to tell.” Lord Cho said.

“She won’t.”

“I told you not to trust her.”

“We need her.”

“She’s going to tell!” Lord Cho said desperately.

“No, she won’t.” Deok Hwa quickly got to his feet and ran out.

Ji Ahn was stalking away and sensed the Chief State Councilor running after her. She guessed his thoughts. “You already know I won’t tell. But I won’t be a part of this either.”

Deok Hwa stopped in front of her and cut her off in her path. “I know,” he panted, “but I need you. You know I need you.” Then, with a meaningful pause, he added, “I’ve always needed you.” He took her hand in his.

Ji Ahn looked down at their intertwined hands.

“Ji Ahn-na. You’ve always told me that Lee Chang might be your King, but you would only obey me. Obey me now, my love. I cannot do this without you.”

Ji Ahn looked away, her face torn between what she wanted to do and what she knew she had to do.

“I am nothing without you.”

Ji Ahn looked at him, tears in her eyes. “I am nothing without you.”

A shrill scream. And suddenly they were inside the palace. The shadows were more sinister. The flames spread all around.

Men in black sliced through necks of men, women, children, anyone they saw in their path.

Dan Ho followed a bloody corridor where time seemed to move differently. He felt like he was walking through water, his limbs heavy, and everything moved slowly. Men ran out of their rooms with assassins in black chasing after them.

The assassins wore black, but it wasn’t quite the uniform that Shadowmen wore today. Dan Ho got the sense that these men were not yet Shadowmen. And by the hilt of their swords, he recognized them as men of the army. General Ji Ahn’s men.

He came to a room at the end of a very long hall. Servants lay on the ground, bleeding out, most of them already gone.

The doors to the King’s quarters were open. Warm light spilled out onto a small space in the hall. Dan Ho came to the room where the General herself stood with her back to Dan Ho, wearing black.

Dan Ho walked up behind the Headmaster and looked over her shoulder to the person sitting up on the bed.

It was a man. He was in a silky black hanbook with a large dragon embroidered in golden thread. The dragon revealed his position as king. He wore a mask to cover his face. Dan Ho remembered what the Princess had said. That no one had ever seen the King’s full face.

In regal speech, King Lee Chang spoke, “I gave you the chance to serve me, as all men serve me, and you betrayed me, General Ji Ahn?”

“You betrayed your people first.” In one swift motion, the General sliced the King’s throat. Her movement was so quick that Dan Ho didn’t even see the blade, except when it stopped, with blood covering the edge.

The King fell back. One of Ji Ahn’s men moved forward softly, lifting his hand to remove the King’s mask. General Ji Ahn held up her hand.

“No. The King did not want his face seen. I want those wishes respected. Cover his body. He may be dead but he is still king.”

Dan Ho felt it odd that even in betraying him, the Headmaster still respected the King.

And when she turned, he saw in her face, the unmistakable expression of pain. She closed her eyes, brows furrowed together as a tear fell from one eye.

Dan Ho raised his hand to see if he could touch the Headmaster. As soon as he did, the lights in the room went out and with it, went all of the people.

The woman who was still, holding his other hand, yanked at it and they were taken to another room. This one was similar to the King’s but decorated differently.

Dan Ho recognized it. Within this vision, he remembered that he had been there before.

A large bed lay in the center of the room, the curtains on the bed posts drawn all around.

“I can hear you.” From behind the curtain came the familiar soft sound of the woman who he often met in his dream.

Someone else was in the room. A man in black, emerging from the shadows.

“Then you should know why I’m here.”

Sounds of muffled screams filled the night. Swords clashing. Men falling. The smell of blood floated heavy in the air.

The man tightened his hand around his unsheathed sword.

“I don’t suppose begging for my life would make a difference.” The woman behind the curtain wrapped her hand around the opening. She did not sound afraid.

The man appeared more afraid than her. “You could try. Everyone else does.”

“I am not like everyone else. I am a Queen.”

“I should have expected a Queen to be so haughty.”

The woman chuckled. The man’s eyes widened. His hand was trembling.

“I don’t suppose you could tell me who sent you.”

“No.”

The woman paused. “I don’t need to ask, however. I already know…”

The man raised his hand to strike but paused as she continued to speak.

“She does this out of jealousy. There is no benevolence in this.”

He lowered his hand slightly. Unsure of what to do.

“Tell me… was there a way I could have avoided this?”

“I don’t know.” The man lowered his hand fully.

“Only following orders, I see.”

“Yes.”

“Just another one of her soldiers?”

“Yes.”

“Is she worth it? Is she worth this loyalty?”

The question was the same one the Princess has posed to Dan Ho. Ironically, they were about the same person.

“Are you, your Majesty? You expect it from your subjects, don’t you?” The assassin argued

She countered quickly, “Is the Kingdom’s ruin worth this loyalty?”

He hesitated. “The Kingdom will be set right by this.”

“Do you believe that?” The curtain parted. “Do you really believe that, Park Dan Ho?”

It was the woman Dan Ho had seen before in his dreams. He hadn’t seen her face then, but his heart told him it was the same woman.

She had a small face. Long dark hair. Sly looking eyes and a small mouth with lips like flower petals.

She wasn’t speaking to Dan Ho, she was speaking to the man in the room, who Dan Ho was realized also had the name Park Dan Ho.

This other Park Dan Ho’s face faltered at the sight of the Queen.

Dan Ho was transported to a bright day. The Queen riding in a palanquin, parting the curtain to gaze out.

A guard’s eyes fell on her. The guard was the other Park Dan Ho. When the Queen’s sharp gaze caught his wandering eyes, he immediately turned red and looked the other way.

Another place, by a gazebo. Guards stood on watch as women adorned in luxurious clothing sat around and drank tea. One of the guards was Park Dan Ho.

While the women spoke, Park Dan Ho stole glances at the Queen. The Queen caught his eye now and again, but did not reprimand him for what was clearly a breach of propriety.

“But dear,” one of the women said to the Queen. “Does the King lay with you? It has been so long and yet, no heir to the throne. All of his other consorts have given him children. Are you unwell.”

The woman who had spoken so audaciously was the Queen Mother. This became evident with the reigning Queen addressed her, smiled awkwardly. “I am quite well, Queen Mother. But Lee Chang is quite busy.”

The Queen Mother appeared unsatisfied. “I was quite glad when you said you would get rid of that wench, Hae Soo. But you never managed to capture my son’s heart did you?”

The Queen’s smile fell, although she tried her best to keep it up.

Another place. This time by the sea. The Queen was there with her entourage.

Palace maids whispered amongst themselves. “Wasn’t the King supposed to come?”

“The Queen waited and waited. I think she came just to spite him for not showing up.”

“She still hasn’t had a child. The throne will surely go to the son from Concubine Jin Hee.”

The guard, Park Dan Ho threw a warning glare their way and the palace maids stopped whispering. He walked over to the Queen who was standing by the water, staring out aimlessly into the horizon.

“Thank you,” she said.

“I didn’t do anything, my Queen.”

They were silent. Watching the waves together.

The Queen decided she wanted to dip her toes in the water, so she took off her shoe. But the second she did, a wave came in and took her shoe away.

“Oh!” She started after it but the shoe went out into the tide.

“Don’t go out that far!” Park Dan Ho pulled the Queen back.

“The King gave me those shoes on our wedding!” The Queen shrieked.

Park Dan Ho ran after it. The water was almost up to his waist by the time he reached the runaway shoe. He had to swim back to the shore.

Like a dog, he went to the Queen while the rest of her party tried to attend to him. He shooed them all away. “My… Queen.” He panted, putting the shoe down.

The shoe was wet. And had covered in sand. Uncomfortable to wear and unacceptable for someone like the Queen. But without breaking eye contact from Park Dan Ho, the Queen put her foot into the shoe. It squelched as she did so.

Dan Ho was back in the dark room, on the night of the massacre. The Queen too seemed to have remembered the moments he had just witnessed.

“You are wrong, my Queen.” The guard Park Dan Ho said. “This isn’t about jealousy. And perhaps this isn’t about the Kingdom either. But the truth is that the General is just following orders. As am I.”

“Does that order involve the murder of someone who hasn’t even been born yet.” The Queen put her hand on her slightly protruding belly.

She was pregnant.

Park Dan Ho’s face fell. He had not been expecting this.

“When… when…”

“Was it worth it? Leaving me to go serve Ji Ahn? Did it get you the position you always wanted? You left my guard to serve her. And now you return, after an entire year, here to kill me.”

Something went unspoken between the guard Park Dan Ho and the Queen. And the assassin Dan Ho had just enough clues to decipher it.

This was Queen Daemok. Who had supposedly run away with an assassin who had come in the night to kill her. The legend said that she had tricked him into falling in love with her but now Dan Ho understood that it was no trick.

He had already been in love with her from the start.

The guard Park Dan Ho clenched his jaw, deciding on his next course of action.

At the same time, a palace maid rushed in. “My Queen! We have to run! The General—” She stopped at the right of Park Dan Ho. The palace maid screamed but Park Dan Ho sent his sword flying her way, hitting her squarely in the chest.

Park Dan Ho turned back to Queen Daemok. “Quick, change your clothes with hers.”

They were outside. Running. Park Dan Ho held Queen Daemok’s hand. She was struggling to keep up but he kept pushing her to run.

The images sped past faster now.

“I would like some things to remain mine.” The voice of the woman holding Dan Ho’s hand said.

Dan Ho moved forward, forcing the images to slow. Now that he was here, he wanted to see. Dan Ho could only catch a few glimpses. But the few he did, revealed everything.

The Queen, in raggedy clothes, now with a full belly, complaining to Park Dan Ho about their peasant lives as he rubbed her feet quietly. The Queen crying, as she tried to shush a baby in her arms but he refused to stop crying. And Park Dan Ho, coming over to take the baby from her. The Queen holding a sleeping child of one year in her arms, as Park Dan Ho lay asleep on the floor, his head by her legs. The Queen reaching out to the sleeping Park Dan Ho, to stroke his face. And Park Dan Ho, jerking awake from her touch.

Park Dan Ho working in the day to make do, and then running away with the Queen in the night, to stay alive. The same routine repeating over and over for over three years.

And a kiss. Soft and chaste. From the Queen to Park Dan Ho, who jumped back in surprise, sending a silver plate clanging down on the floor, waking up a three year old boy sleeping in a worn down cot nearby.

The images stopped. To a night once again filled with blood.

Park Dan Ho lay dead on the ground, throat slit from a quick slice. The Queen held his lifeless body in her hands, glaring up with eyes that bled tears of great grief and anger.

General Ji Ahn stood there. Eyes now cold in tempered anger. Her face having lost all the warmth Dan Ho had seen. She was no longer General. He could tell this from her clothing. And by how all her hair was chopped off.

“You can either join this betrayer, or you can tell me where the child is, and I might let you live.” The Headmaster now spoke in the cold tone that Dan Ho was familiar with.

“You have already killed me once.” The Queen said. “What’s another death?”

The Headmaster struck down the Queen.

And the images finally ended.

They were standing in the Queen’s room again. It was empty, with just the moon light covering everything in silver. Dan Ho looked now, to the woman holding his hand.

It was Queen Daemok.

“She lies. Do not listen to her. Find the truth for yourself.”

“Dan Ho.” This voice too was feminine. Yet so different. He knew this voice.

“Wake up. We don’t have much time.”

She was whispering. Why was she whispering?

Everything around him began to dissolve until only the Queen remained. She still held on to his hand.

“Find the truth.”

She let go of his hand.

Dan Ho gasped awake. Someone pushed their hand over his mouth.

The Princess.

Wait… what?

It all rushed back. The battle of the execution ground. The attack of the white clad swordsmen who fought like Shadowmen. Lord Ahn Hyun’s arrival. The Princess running away.

The Princess running away.

Dan Ho tried to move his hands to catch her. But his body was weighed down by drowsiness. It had to be the medicine that they no doubt gave him.

The Princess’s mouth moved before the words registered in his mind.

“Listen carefully. I need you to remember this.”

Dan Ho struggled against his drowsiness. His assassin training kicked in automatically, as if he had regressed to his base instincts.

He had to get up. He had to capture her.

The Princess pushed him down by his shoulders to keep him in place. She body was half over his and Dan Ho found himself staring.

She was saying something. He didn’t know what.

The room he was in was lit by a dim lamp. Half her face was lit while the other half was shrouded in shadows. She looked more haggard than ever, her eyes puffy, her lips chapped and cracked, but nonetheless still red.

“Red.” He heard his groggy voice.

She was speaking. Her mouth was moving. His ears weren’t listening nor his brain registering any of the words.

She looked at him then shook him. “Are you listening?”

No, he wasn’t. But her words felt less foreign now.

“I need you to remember.” She came close. First, he thought she was going to kiss them. But she moved her mouth to his ear, and he decided to press his cheek against hers.

Her words echoed in his mind long after she pulled back. “The forbidden archives are hidden behind a false wall at the very back of the historic archives. Go to the very back. In the right corner there is a door that is made to look like the rest of the wall. Go inside it. Go to the thirty-third shelf. The fourth row from the top. There you will find records of King Lee Chang. If you don’t believe me, see the face of Queen Daemok. You will understand why I mistook you for the lost Prince.”

She looked at him now, eyes roaming over his face. Dan Ho felt uncomfortably exposed. She appeared to move forward, only to hesitate and move back again.

“This is goodbye, Park Dan Ho. We won’t see each other again.”

Then as if hesitating for a second time, she came forward and kissed his forehead.

Dan Ho passed out after this. And came to only two mornings later, when the physician had stopped giving him his medicine.

He remembered none of what he had seen in his visions, nor the Princess’s visit. But he did have the unshakable feeling that he had something important to do. An unfinished task that nagged at his mind.

If only he could remember.

He was given food. Told he could have a bath and was informed that the Headmaster was too busy with the new King Hyun to make time for any visit from him.

While in the bath, as he shed his clothes. He found a pin. A cheap looking thing with gold coloring and fake cherries as decoration.

This is goodbye, Park Dan Ho. We won’t see each other again.

Dan Ho touched his forehead and suddenly in his mind, the words of the Princess echoed.

The forbidden archives are hidden behind a false wall at the very back of the historic archives. Go to the very back. In the right corner there is a door that is made to look like the rest of the wall. Go inside it. Go to the thirty-third shelf. The fourth row from the top. There you will find records of King Lee Chang. If you don’t believe me, see the face of Queen Daemok. You will understand why I mistook you for the lost Prince.

He remained quiet the entire day as he stewed over the words.

The Princess had come to see him. Even after escaping. She had returned.

Or had it been a dream and he had imagined it all?

Dan Ho was ready to dismiss the Princess’s words. But like before, something was nagging at him. He couldn’t let it go, whatever it was.

That night he found himself sneaking past the guards, past the Shadowmen now found in every corner of the palace, and into the historic archives.

Just as the Princess had said, there was a false wall in the back. Dan Ho found it fairly easily. The historians were foolish if they thought it would be enough to keep people out.

The room was dark, dusty and smelled of books and ink. Dan Ho was lucky he had the foresight to bring a lantern with him as there were no windows nor anything to let in any sort of light.

With his heart beating in his ears, Dan Ho walked over to the thirty-third shelf. The light from his lantern lit only a long triangle in front of him. Beyond it, it was so dark that Dan Ho half expected some monster to reach out.

The fourth row from the top.

It was filled with books.

Does she expect me to look through all of this?

Dan Ho held up the lantern closer and saw labels on the books. He hoped they would glean some clue as to which book he was supposed to look at.

Veritable Records of King Lee Chang, Volume 3.

That had to be it. There appeared no book titled Volume 1 in the entire shelf. Dan Ho realized it must be on the other shelves.

Setting the lantern down—flinching as his wound still hurt quite a bit—Dan Ho pulled out the book. It was incredibly long and Dan Ho found his elbow banging into the shelf behind him. When the book was out, it fell with a loud thud on the floor, sending dust flying everywhere.

It had been too heavy. And he was still injured. His hand couldn’t hold it up.

Dan Ho held in his breath, wondering if someone had heard the sound. When two minutes passed without a sound, Dan Ho allowed himself to breathe again.

He bent down, making sure not to press on his wound, and opened the book. He had expected pictures of King Lee Chang. But the book started off with a list of his consorts and concubines.

Dan Ho went through almost the entire book when he came across an image for Queen Daemok.

She seemed familiar. Not just in the slight resemblance she had with him—in the swoop of her mouth and the intelligence behind her eyes. But more so that, he felt he had met her before.

But from where? And how? Queen Daemok was dead.

This book clearly wasn’t what he was looking for. Dan Ho searched through the row again and this time found the right book.

Veritable Records of King Lee Chang, Volume 1.

Within it, were hand drawn sketches of King Lee Chang at every age. From when he was a child to when he was an adult. Dan Ho opened the book directly in the middle because he figured that if there were to be a resemblance, there had to be one where they were the same age.

Before each portrait, came a listing of the King’s features. His height, weight, and physical descriptions. These were followed by a hand drawn sketch of his liking.

Clenching his jaw, he turned over the page with the physical description, to the page with the portrait.

The first thing he noticed was the scar. A big, jagged, ugly looking line on the left side of the King’s face. The second thing he noticed was that the King glared. As if angry that the picture was being drawn.

But Dan Ho felt his heart stop as he remembered, where he had seen Queen Daemok. And he remembered, all that she had shown him. Dan Ho wordlessly put the book down and just stared, not knowing how to react.

For he found that it was his own face, staring out at him from the page.

END OF PART 3

Chapter Text

PART 4

One Year Later

Nestled between the rocky mountain ranges that marked the beginning of the western desert lands and the sparse wood at the edge of the western valleys, was a small patch of land that was the home to a small group of perhaps twenty villagers. These inhabitants consisted of elderly miners and a few young couples who did not have the means to travel to the big cities for a better life.

Every morning, the men of this village went into the desert mountains to mine the minerals there and the women went into the wood to do their laundry and wash their crockery from the day before. While the people were away, the village lay bare. Their loosely bricked huts with roofs thatched with straw remained unattended. Mice freely roamed around the muddy lane they had carved out as a street. While the area looked lived in, the dead silence made it seem like only ghosts inhabited it.

It was at this moment in time, when there was no one in sight, that the walls began to move. Not the structure itself, but rather the texture on it. The sandy of the walls began to walk, taking the form of a person.

Had anyone been there, they would have fainted for the sight was quite incredible. However, if they had carried their wits about them and looked closely, they would have realized that it wasn’t the walls that were moving. There were people about, wearing clothes wrought with so much dust and grit and sand, that it appeared like the surface of the desert.

There were five of these people, three men and two women, covered head to toe in sand colored clothes, their heads and faces covered in the cloth, save for their eyes. These people did not move with the authority of any trained spy of the King, nor with the finesse of the elusive Shadowmen. They were sneaky enough but could still be easily spotted with a keen enough eye.

They had no reason to hide, however. There was no one around to raise any objection. The people went into the humble huts, ransacking the living spaces for the sparse items of food they could find. They did not bother to hunt for any coin or gold for they knew these people had none. And their clothing was more tattered than their own. So, food it was.

In one hut, were a woman with long hair tied up in a ponytail and a tall, lean man. The man looked through the hut before he came across a four-foot tall, earthen storage jar wherein rice was stored. He began to haul the jar outside when the woman stopped him, placing a hand on his arm.

“Do we have to take the whole thing?”

“Of course! This isn’t even enough to feed our children. We must get food for the entire clan, you know.”

The woman tightened her grip on the man’s arm, urging him with her eyes, “These people are obviously saving this for the winter. If we take it now, they’ll starve.”

“We’ll starve too, Highness. You want to go through another winter without food? Then be my guest. But I for one, am not eating tree bark anymore.” He yanked his arm back and continued to haul the jar out as the woman sighed.

As she was about to turn her eye caught something in the corner and she did a double take.

Inside the lower corner of a half-closed closet, behind ratty hanbooks that dangled from hooks, she spotted a keen pair of tiny eyes looking at them. At first, she thought the pair of eyes belonged to some animal. But as she stared on, she realized it was a child—a little girl—hiding inside the closet.

As covertly as she could, the woman put a finger to her lips, telling the child to remain quiet. Attempting to remain calm, she turned to help her companion carry the jar out faster, so that he wouldn’t see the hidden child.

“Oh, thank you.” Her companion huffed as they both hauled the jar out.

“Achoo!” A tiny sneeze sounded.

The woman’s eyes went wide for a second before recovering herself.

“What was that?” The man asked.

“I don’t know. A mouse maybe.”

“That didn’t sound like a mouse.” The man stood up and stood in the middle of the hut. The child in the corner shivered as she tried to cover her mouth to subdue another sneeze. It caused the clothes to flutter a bit, the movement catching the eye of the man.

He unsheathed his sword with a whoosh and made towards the closet. He pushed the clothes away to reveal the dirty looking girl hugging her knees.

“Yah! Didn’t you survey the room?” The man said to the woman.

“It’s just a child. I doubt she’ll say anything.” The woman reasoned.

“No witnesses. That’s the law.” The man turned back to the child and raised his sword. “Kiddo. Sorry. I’ll try not to let this hurt.”

Whack! The man’s face contorted in pain as he fell to the side, the sword falling from his hands. Behind him, the woman stood, with her hand still raised with the hilt of her sword facing forward. She had knocked him out on impulse, as was evident by her widened, unblinking eyes.

“Oh no. What did I do?” She said under her breath.

From outside, she heard the whistle of her companions, signaling that it was time to leave.

Song Hwa turned, then turned back. She took one step to the side then another in the opposite direction. She grabbed her hair and looked at the child desperately.

The whistle sounded again, clearly meant for her and her male friend now lying on the ground.

Song Hwa bent down to the child. “Little girl. Listen to your Unnie now. I want you to stay here and keep quiet, okay? I’m going to close this closet. And I don’t want you to come out till your mommy and daddy come back, okay?”

The child nodded silently.

“Good girl,” Song Hwa patted her head. “Don’t tell anyone about Unnie and her friend, okay? I want you to pretend that we weren’t here. Can you do that for me?”

Again, the little girl nodded.

Song Hwa wasn’t sure whether the child would live up to her word. But there wasn’t anything else she could do about this situation.

Closing the closet doors tightly, Song Hwa pressed her doors against the hard wood and breathed. Steadying herself, rolled back her shoulders and put on an arrogant expression.

Acting like the bad guy was a specialty of the former Princess.

She stalked out of the hut, making sure she put her sword back in its sheath before anyone could see.

Everyone was gathered in the middle of the lane. The villagers were going to be back soon, but no one was worried about being seen. The men and women were each carrying some form of food in their hands, ready to be loaded on their horses.

“What was taking so long?” Complained one of the sandy clothed men. He was their leader for this expedition, but Song Hwa had yet again, forgotten his name—something she had been told repeatedly but couldn’t manage to remember.

“Go and collect your man,” she jerked her head towards the hut behind her. “He’s drooling on the floor.”

The leader put his hand on his hip, giving her a no-nonsense look. “What exactly does that mean?”

Song Hwa smirked and even though it could not be seen beneath the cloth that covered her face, the snark still showed in the crinkle of her eyes. “Look for yourself.”

She held her breath but maintained her smirk as two of the sandy clothed men went inside the hut.

Song Hwa eyed the leader. He was a reasonable enough man with a pleasant face and kind looking eyes that he tried very hard to make intimidating. She liked him well enough. She just could never remember his name.

Young Su? Yan Do? Han Woo?

“Yeon Woo, she’s knocked out Do Sun!” Called one of the men from the hut.

Ah, right. It’s Yeon Woo.

“She did WHAT?” Yeon Woo’s eyes went comically wide.

“We have to leave.” The girl beside Yeon Woo reminded.

Yeon Woo’s eyes were glaring at Song Hwa when he ordered he ordered, “Put him on his horse. Joon Suk, you ride with him. Everyone else, grab all that you can carry. Let’s deal with this back home.”

Song Hwa didn’t bother to pick anything up. She lazily sauntered towards the wood where their horses were waiting for them.

“Hey! Where do you think you’re going?” The leader whose name she forgot, yet again, called after her.

Song Hwa called back without stopping, “To the horses, like you ordered.” She waved her hand as the leader cursed after her. Good, she thought, they’ll be so angry at me that they won’t notice the child.

And they didn’t.

The five of them rode into towards the mountains where the men of the village had gone mining. This was the last of the mountains where any minerals could be found, for beyond the mountains was only a desert where brittle, flowerless plants grew. A mountain range outlined the desert, and this was where the thieves were headed.

They took a hidden pass through the mountain that led them through the grey rocky hills of the Abandoned Lands. The sun wasn’t too hot this time of the year as winter was approaching, yet still, it burned their faces as they all traveled in a single line.

Song Hwa heard the low moan of the man she had knocked out once when he had begun to stir. But just as suddenly, he passed out again, this time from the heat.

Sand blew in small whirlpools, blinding them. But the horses knew the way, without their riders guiding them, so sight wasn’t necessary.

Soon enough they came towards the large, looming pile of grey and brown rocks that were high enough to be deemed as mountains.

They went up these rocks, through a narrow passage way, that had the grey mountain wall on one side whilst on the other was the edge of the mountain that would lead to a painful fall should the horse falter even a step. The edge only affected Song Hwa, as she closed her eyes and let her horse take charge. The others were already used to the mountain and rode smoothly, without pause.

Soon enough, they came to a large tunnel that led through to the other side.

With the sun hidden behind the mountain, the party relaxed. The path on this side of the mountain led down to a wide space of plain rock surrounded by the mountain on all sides. Low sounds of people talking far below, and the smell of smoking wood welcomed the travelers back home. Even the horses felt excited, as they picked up speed, trotting forward to the base of the mountain where the Bandit Clan resided.

People in the same sandy clothes drifted about. Some carried wood to warm themselves in the night that was as chilly as the day was hot. Some were setting up new tents with better sheets to protect them in the night. Some were sitting on flat rocks, chatting and laughing.

Song Hwa mentally prepared herself for the punishment that was to come. Although she was a refugee amongst them, there were still rules she had to follow.

The sun had been scorching back at the village, yet here in the shade of the mountain, the air was cooler, and when the wind flew, there was hardly any sand to sting the eye.

 In the center of it all, were cooks, preparing fires for the large pots and pans that were meant to be filled with the haul that Song Hwa and her party were bringing. When the Bandits spotted them, they all came forward for the greeting.

Only a few stayed behind to continue what they were doing. Song Hwa noticed them because she was keeping her eyes off of everyone that came towards them.

Soft greetings rose all around. But no one spoke to Song Hwa; not the party she had accompanied nor the people greeting them back. The Bandits generally stayed away from her, either out of fear or contempt. Mainly it was the latter.

Song Hwa paid no mind to being ignored, although the gesture always managed to bite. Instead, she went on ahead as the rest of her party began to unload their haul.

“Yah! Help us take these to the cooks.” The girl called after Song Hwa.

Never before had the former Princess been spoken to by a commoner in such a manner. But want as she may, she couldn’t go too far with her rudeness. The palace staff couldn’t touch her. But here, she was an unwanted guest. So, swallowing the pride that had been hammered into her since birth, she turned back around and helped everyone else carry the stolen goods to the center of the glade where women toiled over boiling pots and pans.

Song Hwa said nothing and greeted no one as she placed the items for the cooks to take away. The cooks returned the gesture, not saying anything to her, not even acknowledging her. They only sent sidelong glances of apprehension, then gave each other loaded looks when they thought she wasn’t looking.

Song Hwa kept one eye on the food as she went back and forth to carry it to the cooks, and the other on the man she had knocked out. They carried him to the farthest tent towards the right of the mountain, where they had set up a makeshift infirmary. Though they did not have any physicians, they still had someone who managed to provide them with rudimentary care in case any upset stomachs or small injuries came up.

Song Hwa had offered her services to the Bandit Clan when General Ahn Hyun had left her with them, but they had all refused. No one wanted to be treated by the daughter of the man who had banished them from the Kingdom.

“We would rather die,” one elder woman had said, spitting at the ground she stood on.

Song Hwa saw the leader, whose name she once again forgot, go into up a path on the mountain, cut by men to resemble stairs. It led to a cave that hard been carved further to resemble a room. There, in the cool pocket of the mountain, was the Bandit Clan’s room where he met all his followers and dealt with any people who wanted to meet him. Song Hwa had no doubt that the leader was going to tattle on her antics on this expedition.

She took a deep breath to steady herself, listing all of the facts of the situation one by one to clear her mind.

One, she had not admitted to knocking out the man who was with her. She went back and forth on what she had said to her companions when she had come out of the hut and she was sure, that it was nothing incriminating.

Two, there was no evidence that she had been the one to hurt him.

Three, except for the man she had knocked out, no one had seen her.

All of this concluded to one course of action: deny the allegation entirely. If she admitted it, she would have to come up with a reason, and she didn’t have any she was willing to admit.

“Highness Lady,” a young Bandit came up just as Song Hwa was about to finish carrying the last pack of fermented vegetables. “Chief’s calling you.”

Alright, time for the show. Song Hwa nodded to the boy in acknowledgement. He ran off as she casually sauntered behind him, then took a sharp turn not to the chief’s room, but to the place where they kept the injured.

The small tent had only one bed, a single wooden shelf lined with jars of herbs and medicinal roots and a sole occupant: her companion, whom she had knocked out. With great timing, he began to stir just as Song Hwa entered the tent. He flinched in pain as he came to.

“Ugh. Where am I?” He asked groggily, eyes squinting in pain.

 Song Hwa grabbed his collar and shook him so violently that his eyes flew open. “Back home.” She gave him a sly smile.

“You—you, you knocked me out! Because of that child!”

“There was no child. All that happened was you tripped while trying to move the jar of rice.” Song Hwa snarled at him.

“W-Wait. You’re lying.”

“Of course, I am, you cretin.” She twisted his collar, pulling him close, so hard that he was halfway off the bed, almost nose to nose with her. “You’re not going to tell anyone about the child. You’re not going to get the chief to send out the party back to that village to kill that little girl. Because if you do, I will kill you. All of those rumors you heard about me before I came here, you remember those? Rumors about how I was vicious and cruel to my servants? And about how I train myself at night to kill you all?” She asked, referring to the whisperings she often heard about herself.

He nodded, eyes nearly popping out of their sockets as sweat beaded on his brow. “Well guess what? They’re all true. And you know something else? I’ve even been to the school of Assassins where Shadowmen are trained.”

“Shadowmen aren’t real.” The Bandit whimpered.

“Who do you think kidnapped me? It was the Shadowmen. I’ve seen them. And they’ve taught me things, Jun Song. Horrible things.”

“My-my name’s Do Sun.”

“I don’t care. But you should. You should care that I don’t sneak into your room at night and choke you as you sleep. If you don’t want that to happen, Do Jun. You’re going to tell the chief exactly what I tell you to, got it?”

Do Sun nodded vehemently.

“Good.” She released the collar, straightening up. “When the chief calls you, you tell him the rice jar was too heavy for you, but that I refused to help. And when you had to carry it yourself, you tripped and knocked your head and lost consciousness, got it?”

Do Sun nodded.

Swallowing, Song Hwa steeled her face to keep any emotion from showing. However, she found herself reaching out to smoothen Do Sun’s crinkled collar. From the poorly made shelf of various herbs and roots, she picked one out and handed it to Do Sun.

“This will help with the headache.”

She forced herself out of the tent before she could do something else unnecessary. As fast as she could, she made her way to the chief’s room up the small path which gave her nightmares about falling off the other side that had no railing nor any wall.

The first thing that everyone noticed when they entered the chief’s room, was the wide table in the center. This was because there was barely anything else to notice, for the room only had the one table with tall stones used as stools for sitting and one large wooden chair that served as the Chief’s seat, upon which he addressed anyone who wanted to speak with him. Beyond this, there was no furnishing in the room.

At a glance, the Chief of the Bandit Clan appeared no more noble than a common peasant. He wore the same clothes as the rest, that had faded under the sun and had sand stuck between the weaves of the fabric. His beard was matted with sand as well. Yet, his restrained manners and practiced speech revealed that there was more beneath the surface.

Song Hwa knew from history, that all of the nobility of the Bandit Clan had been hunted down and killed. But she learned from whispered, drunken confessions, that the Chief was the last remaining Lord the Bandit Clan had. With this, she understood why the man hunched forward as if the weight of the world was upon him. With him, rested the last hope his people had.

Yet with everything the Bandit Clan had to face; exile, lack of resources, the threat of the state, the Chief was stuck with having to deal with a runaway Princess.

The man did not look up at her when she approached. He started to rub his temples with his forefinger and thumb.

Beside his seat, stood one of his three advisors and the eader of her group, whose name she kept forgetting. To the Chief’s other side, was the former Captain of the Royal Guard and disgraced swordsman, Go Chung Myung. Song Hwa felt both grateful and resistant to his presence. She was glad there was someone in the room who would take her side, but just by looking at him she felt her existence be reduced to rubble. She curled her fingers into a fist, digging her nails into her palm.

The Chief rubbed his temple more furiously, “Starting fights with the women, stealing swords from my men, getting lost in the mountain caves—we wasted so much time searching for you—and now this, now you’ve started assaulting my people.”

Song Hwa began with the pretense of humility, “My noble Lord, if I could just can explain—”

“Young lady, I know you well enough by now to know you will probably have come up with a very credible excuse.” His words were gentle, yet his tone was firm. It was a jarring mix of authority and kindness. Song Hwa was not used to being addressed in such a fashion. It made goosebumps rise on her arm as she anticipated the man to explode in a fury.

Yet he never did.

Instead, he looked up, his eyes weary and puffy from a continuous lack of sleep. His dark circles had darkened since she had arrived. “Lord Ahn Hyun had said that the rumors about you being a mean spirited, selfish princess had been false. Yet here you are, proving them to be true.”

Song Hwa shrank. She wished the man would yell at her or throw something at her. That way she would feel less guilty.

He continued, “I understand that we owe him a huge debt. We are forever grateful that Lord Ahn Hyun protected us from your father. But must we suffer your selfish behavior because of it? Is it not enough that we have so generously granted you protection, even though you are the kin of the very man who ruined us?”

Song Hwa could have swallowed her own tongue.

The Chief huffed, “I should never have listened to Man Wol. She’s the one who said it would be politically advantageous to house the Princess.” He sent an accusatory sideways glare at Chung Myung. The former Captain kept his head down. He had learned from past experience that it was better to let the Chief vent than to reason with him at times like this.

At the mention of the name Man Wol, the hair on Song Hwa’s arm rose up. Her mouth twitched with how much she hated that name and more so, the woman it belonged to.

The Chief leaned forward, jabbing a finger in her direction, “You. You sabotaged the last run on purpose, didn’t you? We didn’t get anything because you alerted the village elders with your clumsiness. I let that go. But now you’ve started knocking my men out. Next time I’m sure—”

“I didn’t knock him out!” Song Hwa spoke up, before she could lose the nerve to. “He fell and hit his head. Ask him!” Song Hwa rambled.

“She’s lying!” The Leader with the easily forgettable name stepped forward energetically. “Do Sun had been knocked out by force. I examined the bruise myself. There was no one else with him but her.”

Song Hwa snarled at the Leader before snapping her eyes back to the chief. “That fool Go Song—”

“His name is Do Sun,” the Leader corrected condescendingly.

“—tried to move a huge jar of rice and accidentally fell. Ask him, if you don’t believe me.” Song Hwa lifted her chin in challenge towards the Leader.

“She’s lying.” The Leader said again.

“Calm down, Yeon Woo.” The Chief said patiently. Again, his tone felt jarring.

Yeon Woo visibly calmed down, his puffed up chest deflating.

“Do we know if Do Sun has awakened?” The Chief asked. Song Hwa bit her tongue from answering yes.

“He’s still unconscious.” Yeon Woo explained.

“Bring him to me once he wakes.” The Chief said, waving his hand in dismissal.

As Yeon Woo left, he gave Song Hwa a warning glare, to which Song Hwa replied in kind, with a cocky brow raised in challenge.

Bring it on, Young Su, Song Hwa thought as she started to follow behind him, beginning to forget his name once more.

“Not so fast, Song Hwa,” the Chief called out to her. “I am still not done with you.”

Song Hwa paused, gulped down her anxiety and turned back around.

The man stood. He was not very tall. Nor intimidating. But he still stood above Song Hwa, so he had to lean forward a little to meet her eyelevel. “I am very angry, Song Hwa,” he said sternly.

Song Hwa prepared for the worst.

This was it. This was the time the Chief finally lost it. He had been more than kind to her offenses from before but now she had finally crossed the line. They were going to kick her out of the Clan. She would have no where to go from now on.

The man raised his hand. Song Hwa flinched out of instinct and attempted to mask it by forcing her face into a stony expression.

She failed.

But the Chief was only raising his hand to rub his temples again. “You are to apologize to Do Sun, understood?”

Song Hwa blinked. That’s it?

As if reading her mind, he added, “Of course that is not it. You are going to take his place in all subsequent expeditions,” Song Hwa tried not to roll her eyes at the Bandit Clan’s synonym for looting, “till he is well enough to resume his duties.”

“I don’t want to steal anymore.” Song Hwa said firmly, squaring her shoulders.

The Clan leader stopped rubbing his forehead, “And why not?”

Song Hwa stammered, feeling foolish as she said, “It’s… it’s wrong.”

The Chief let out a loud, sarcastic guffaw. “Wrong? Stealing is wrong? That’s your reasoning? Ah-nee, if only such fancy words had been said when your father had declared a war on my people.” His sarcastic smile dropped and an icy edge took over his voice, “We… don’t have anything to go on. We are not welcome in any part of this Kingdom, people fear in even pitying us because they might end up in trouble if they help. Stealing is they only way we can live.”

He retreated, walking back to his seat.

“But—but must we steal from people who have so little to start with? Those people we just robbed. They won’t have anything to eat for—”

“—the winter, yes, yes, I have argued enough with Yeon Woo on this matter.” The Chief nodded dismissively, “We have no choice but to stick to places where there’s no policing. The new Royal Guard is far stricter than in your father’s time. The new King is less inclined to restore our name than King Deok Hwa.”

Song Hwa’s nose stung at the mention of the new King. “You can still continue robbing the Lords and Ladies who take the mountain pass, like you used to before.”

The Chief tilted his head, looking at Song Hwa as if the answer should be obvious, “We cannot loot the mountain pass anymore. If you recall, a certain Princess got attacked at that pass. And a certain Clan got falsely accused for that crime.”

Song Hwa bit her tongue again. This time she tasted blood. The Bandit Clan still did not know how she had conspired to have the last of them hunted down and almost succeeded in wiping them out before her kidnapping. She knew that if word of her actions got out, then she would be in more danger with them than with Ji Ahn. But the guilt of her folly weighed heavily on her, making her spine tremble.

The Chief did not notice her discomfort and went on, “Because of that accusation, certain paths were cut off for us entirely. And since the new King has no interest in the restitution of our land, our wealth and our title, we are going to have to make do with what we get.”

“Those people…” Song Hwa argued, “they are just like us. They don’t have resources, just like your clan.”

“That is how it is for us peasants, Song Hwa,” the Chief raised a brow. “Your kind stays behind the four walls of your palace, eating the best our Kingdom’s soil has to offer, drinking to your heart’s content, while us peasants are left to fight over the scraps you leave behind. This is how it has always been.”

His word was final. Song Hwa knew not to push her luck any further.

The Chief shook his head, “I’m done. I have much more pressing matters to attend. Go,” he waved her away. “Apologize, take responsibility, make amends. You should know how to do this much. And if you don’t, then you should curse that father of yours for not teaching you basic human decency.” He paused, and then as an afterthought added, “Or knowing your father, perhaps I am in the wrong for expecting him to teach you any humanity at all.”

Song Hwa had nothing to say to that. She didn’t dare look at the others or what expressions they might have on their faces. She imagined them grinning smugly, happy at her downfall. But she knew that they were gazing at her with pity. And that felt worse.

So, she bowed her head and took her leave. She had been humiliated many times in the past, but never before had it felt justified. She could always lay the blame on her father being abusive or the Queen being jealous or the courtiers being political. Now she had nothing to blame but herself.

Chung Myung followed Song Hwa out.

“You knocked him out.” He didn’t bother asking. They went down the steps together, with Song Hwa pressing herself to the mountain wall. “Your Highness,” he added after a pause.

“Haven’t you heard? I’m no longer a Princess,” Song Hwa said dryly, focusing more on the stairs and less on Chung Myung.

“I’d like to know why.”

It irked her that Chung Myung was concerned about the Bandits. She knew exactly why. They were her people. Man Wol’s people.

“He was about to kill a little girl. I couldn’t let him do that.” She said plainly as they reached the bottom of the steps.

Chung Myung was silent.

“Leaving a witness is especially dangerous for you.” He added quietly, following Song Hwa.

“She didn’t see my face.”

“She might not have to. Everyone knows what you look like.”

Ji Ahn had Song Hwa’s face plastered over every wall in the Kingdom, with an announcement for a reward for anyone who would bring her head.

After Hyun had officially been announced as the new King, Ji Ahn took on the post as the Chief State Councilor. Whether or not this was questioned, Song Hwa could not say. But she could say that Ji Ahn fully utilized her new authority to send out the entire Kingdom’s guards and soldiers after her.

The most obvious place to look were Lord Ahn Hyun’s and his family’s estates. Which was why he took Song Hwa and her sisters to their cousins from Queen Yoo’s clan. The cousins agreed to take in her sisters, but not her.

“The new Chief State Conucilor is after her,” Queen Yoo’s cousin had said, referring to Ji Ahn in her new role, “She has declared her a criminal. She isn’t after the younger Princesses. Just her. Take her away!”

Without any other choice, Lord Ahn Hyun had delivered her to the Bandit Clan, asking them for their protection.

The Chief had originally declined, and only agreed when one of his robbers, a commoner named Man Wol pointed out how saving the Princess could help the Clan gain more political advantage, should the Princess choose to rise against the current King. To the Bandits, having Hyun in power meant nothing. For them, it was merely a change of dictators.

Chung Myung stopped following her. Song Hwa kept walking, although her heart kept tugging her to turn back.

“Don’t anger the Chief any further!” He called after her. “You can’t have him turning you out.”

Song Hwa made no promises.

She knew that she was walking on thin ice. Already she had made enemies of the entire clan.

It started with the food. The Princess was not used to living on scraps. And more so, was unaware that here among the Bandits, the elderly and children were always fed first. To make matters worse, when one of the elder women started whacking her with a stick, she ended up pushing the woman away harder than intended, causing the elder to fall back and injure herself.

It was an honest mistake. And if Song Hwa had explained herself, the Chief would have understood. But she hadn’t known that then. She had been expecting the same punishment her father, the disgraced King, had given her all her life.

Song Hwa still remembered how she had flinched when the Chief had raised his hand to quiet the crowd of elders gathered around the wide table of the Chief’s room while she stood, holding her hands, in front of the Chief’s chair. Song Hwa had mistaken the Chief’s gesture for something else entirely and the Chief was taken aback by her response.

He didn’t say anything, but Song Hwa knew, that he felt sorry her. It was in his eyes and the downward turn of his mouth. She wished he would slap her instead.

“Didn’t anyone tell you that elders get the first serving?” The Chief’s kind tone had felt all wrong. Song Hwa didn’t know how to respond to it. The only other person that had spoken to her this way was Lord Ahn Hyun. But she could not speak to the Chief the way she could to him. So, she didn’t speak at all.

“Did you know, that we normally take turns?” The Chief tried again. And again, Song Hwa didn’t know how to respond. The Chief then gave up on her with a sigh and addressed the angry mob of elders instead.

“Perhaps our Princess is not used to our ways.” The Chief said. “We should give her our understanding and our patience to settle in.”

“How can we when she is so rude?” The elders had yelled.

“Look at her! Look at how stubbornly she stands. She doesn’t even respect the Chief!”

“She should be on her knees, begging for an apology!”

“Where are her manners? Is this what a Princess is like nowadays?”

“The rumors are true! She is worse than her father.”

Song Hwa hadn’t known it then, but that wasn’t the worst offence she would commit. The worst came later, when she was caught stealing one of the Bandit’s swords for practice.

She had been living with the clan for a month then. And had managed to become a ghost among them. They were too afraid to approach her, and she felt too awkward to make the first move. She wasn’t one of them, and she was reminded of this every time she woke up and saw the others hard at work.

Everyone seemed to know what they were meant to do, and Song Hwa merely roamed around, watching them but trying not to appear as if she was staring. No one would give her any work. They all let her be. Only Chung Myung ever spoke to her. But he quickly adapted to the Clan’s lifestyle and soon he would be gone for hours and hours along with Man Wol.

Song Hwa knew that eventually, she would have to defeat Ji Ahn. She didn’t know how or when. But she knew that someday, she would be facing the woman who had ruined her life. And she didn’t want to wait another day simply being useless.

She started working with wooden sticks, slashing at the barren trees of the desert, trying her best to follow what instructions she remembered from her teachers in the palace. Chung Myung found her once and thought she was lashing out in anger.

“Why punish the tree? The poor thing has done nothing to you.”

He eventually began to teach her with his own sword. They conducted their lessons in away from the clan, because Song Hwa had felt embarrassed by her childish fighting skills. Eventually, as she got better, they realized they needed another sword so that she could properly spar with Chung Myung.

Chung Myung’s request for a sword had been rejected. They didn’t want the outsiders having weapons of their own. Not one to be deterred so easily, Song Hwa decided on her own to pinch one of the weapons from their arsenal. She did not realize however, that given their limited resources, the Bandits kept a close eye on the count of their weaponry. After all, they had no means to forge their own and what little they had was stolen. They noticed when even one sword had gone missing.

When it was discovered with Song Hwa, a riot ensued. All of the Bandits were in a rage over the outsider who as it appeared, attempted to use their weapons against them.

“She’s going to turn on us! How can we give her weapons?”

“How will I be able to sleep knowing that she can kill us?”

“I think that’s a little over dramatic.” Chung Myung had defended. But the crowd overpowered him.

“She’s the evil King’s daughter. How do you expect her to be any different from him?”

“Yah, yah, yah. Look at you all, clucking like chickens.” Man Wol had spoken up, with her pinkie stuck in one ear as if the noise hurt. “Who cares if she can kill us in the night? If she wants a weapon, give it to her. If you ever saw her fight, you’d understand that the only person getting hurt from her is herself. So just calm down, okay?”

Song Hwa had felt insulted at having been defended by a woman she hated. But beggars couldn’t be choosers and Man Wol was one of the two people there who ever took her side. The other being Chung Myung.

“I’m going to defeat Ji Ahn,” Song Hwa declared and immediately felt foolish, but continued. “My fight is not with you. But with her. I’m going to fight her and take back what she stole from me. And when I win, I will make sure that you all—"

“Stole from you?” one Bandit said. “What about the throne that your father stole? What about us? Our lives?

“That’s what I’m saying. I will restore what was stolen from—”

A disbelieving scoff rose among the crowd, “You think you can simply turn back time and make things the way they were before? That time has gone and nothing can bring it back.”

Song Hwa knew all too well about how impossible it was to go back to a time once before. When she had been with the Shadowmen, all she had wanted was to go back home. And now, there was no home.

There was nothing to go back to.

This led to her third offence. One she would never admit the cause to.

When Lord Ahn Hyun had brought her to the Abandoned Lands, Song Hwa had assumed that he would stay there as well.

“No, my girl,” the former General informed. “If we stay together, then Ji Ahn will no doubt find you. We have to split up. I will have her chase me. While you stay here—”

“And do what? I might as well get caught if I am to spend the rest of my life hiding.” Song Hwa had argued, teary eyed.

“Princess,” Lord Ahn Hyun cupped her face with both his hands. They were thick with muscle and calloused with the use of his sword yet carried a warmth in them that Song Hwa had only felt with her mother. “You cannot defeat her if you are dead. Right now I want you to focus on living. Build your strength. Recuperate. Then, when the time is right, strike.”

With the departure of possibly the only person who made her feel safe, Song Hwa felt bitterly alone. There was no one else amongst the Bandits she could talk to. No one she could unburden her heart with.

No one except Chung Myung.

Song Hwa hated to admit it, but despite the chaos in her life, she still felt happy that Chung Myung was with her. He granted her respite from her pain and suffering, from the tornado that always whirled around in her stomach. But he also caused her the most pain, for he was already taken by another.

She hadn’t seen him for a while and managed to catch a glimpse of him amongst the rocks. He was going somewhere, carrying a lantern, and she decided she would tag along. He went inside one of the openings in the mountain, in the many entrances to the catacombs of caves where the Bandits stored food and other items for protection from heat and other dangers.

She trotted behind him soundlessly, following the light from his lantern till she felt the need to call after him. She raised her hand and was about to say his name when she spotted Man Wol waiting for Chung Myung with a lantern of her own in hand.

“So here you were,” Chung Myung said, in an unfamiliar whine like sound that made Song Hwa wonder if it even was his voice.

“I don’t even know why I was waiting. You were obviously occupied by more important things.” Man Wol put the lantern down and crossed her arms. She was short and tiny, but still appeared to have a taller presence than any man before her.

Chung Myung playfully leaned closer to her, “I didn’t take you as the jealous type.”

“Yah,” Man Wol hit Chung Myung who laughed. “Who’s jealous? I’m not jealous.” Man Wol said, pouting jealously. “I’m just worried about the Princess. She seems really… attached,” Man Wol emphasized.

“She’s just lonely because she doesn’t know anyone here.” Chung Myung explained.

Song Hwa’s face became set like stone. She told herself she felt nothing. And indeed, she felt nothing. Not sadness, nor anger. Nor happiness or joy. Nothing.

And nothing was not a foreign feeling for the Princess.

“That’s the excuse you gave last time. That you only spoke to her because she got bored in her travels.”

Chung Myung put his arms around Man Wol’s waist, pulling her closer. “See? That’s how handsome I am. Imagine what would happen to the other women here if I became friendly with them.”

“Yah! Don’t you dare!” Man Wol pushed him playfully, but started laughing too.

Song Hwa decided she had seen enough. She went back, careful not to send any echoes bouncing off the cave walls. But she didn’t have any source of light with her and the caves were dark and cold. Soon enough she realized she was lost and could not find the way out of there.

After hours and hours of walking around the caves, Song Hwa gave up and fell to the ground sobbing. She felt the despair of a broken heart, but the darkness that covered the caves did not scare her. It was instead, a source of comfort, for it hid her embarrassing tears and allowed her to feel without fearing if anyone could see just how cowardly she truly was.

They found her eventually. She heard their sounds coming from far away, amplified by the caves to make it sound like a million people were looking for her. It was the Leader who reached her first.

He began scolding the second he laid his eyes on her, “Yah! Where the hell were you? Why are you hiding out in the caves? Were you trying to run away? Are you mad? Did you know how worried everyone was for you?”

Worried? Song Hwa had thought, I doubt that worry was about my safety.

But she soon found that indeed, many of the Bandits had been worried. She was went through a crowd of them, all bombarding her with reprimands on getting lost and thoughts of concern about her well being. A few women wrapped her in blankets in case she caught a cold. Someone thrust a cup of tea in her hand while someone else brought her in for a hug.

“You insolent child! Do you know these caves? How dare you go inside without one of us!” It was the elder woman she had pushed back before. She looked equally frightened and angry. Song Hwa didn’t know how to respond to this strange form of concern. Was this anger or fondness?

It was difficult to navigate her way through the Bandits and their mannerisms. They were not overtly gentle of kind. The elements had rendered them harsh of tongue and spirit. Yet they were also sincere. There were no games to be played among them. No politics. No hidden agendas. They were who they said they were. They got angry when they were worried. And insulted the people closest to them. They were quick of wit and always ready with a sarcastic remark.

They were nothing like the people of court with their genteel upbringing. Nor were they like elusive and secretive Shadowmen.

The cave incident was where she saw true anger in the Chief’s eyes for when he asked her about her reason for getting lost, she could not answer. How could she admit that she was following Chung Myung and saw him with Man Wol? The shame of that alone would kill her.

So Song Hwa kept her silence. And it turned everyone’s concern for her into contempt.

“See? She was trying to escape.”

“How ungrateful. We took her in, and she decided to run away.”

“If she’s so unhappy here then she can leave!”

“We spent all that time looking for her… such a waste.”

Song Hwa didn’t correct them. They already had made up their minds about her. It was easier to be hated than to expose her feelings. She feared those would be ridiculed too. She couldn’t even imagine what Man Wol and Chung Myung would discuss if they both found out.

So Song Hwa braced herself for the stares, the whispered discussions and the exaggerated stories that would spread about her. In this regard, the Abandoned Lands were no different than the palace. There too, Song Hwa had been vilified, partly from her own design, partly due to misunderstandings she preferred not to clear up.

Song Hwa was content this way. It meant less people approached her. And if there was one thing she had learned as a Princess, it was that the less people in her life. The better it was.

~~~~~~~

The council gathered every day in the morning, to have an audience with the new King and his Chief State Councilor, Jang Ji Ahn. This was nothing out of the ordinary in times like this. The Kingdom was still reeling from the death of the previous King and his fall from grace after his crimes were revealed. The Council needed to work every day to stabilize matters of state.

Daily meetings were also necessary to help the new council members integrate with the system. The Chief State Councilor, with the order of the young King, had removed nearly half of the noblemen who made up the previous King’s council. Those men were deemed traitorous to the new King and were promptly killed, along with their kin.

The King was oddly absent during the punishment.

Some of the new councilors were quite unfamiliar to the norms of the palace, so they were often seen arriving earlier than the older council members, who were used to arriving right on time.

Two of the new members rushed to the council room now.

“Do you think he’ll be there today too?” One said to the other, a little out of breath as they sprinted down the halls.

“Can’t imagine it. We’re an hour early.” The other replied.

“Yes, but he is always there. No matter who comes in. No matter what time.”

“That’s ridiculous. He can’t possibly be in the council room an hour before the—” They went around the turning and straight into the open doors of the council room. The new councilmen both gulped together when they saw Councilor Gang Yun, sleeping on his seat with his hands folded over his flat belly.

“He’s there again!” The first councilor said to the other in a hushed whisper to avoid waking up the sleeping Councilor Gang Yun. “I told you!”

“But… but… how? Does he live here?”

The councilors took their seat at the end of the table, far `away from the councilor sleeping at the other end. The meeting would not begin for another fifty-nine minutes. And it would be twenty-nine minutes before anyone else would arrive.

“Is he really asleep?” The first councilor whispered

“I think so. I can hear him snoring.”

“The audacity! How can one sleep in the council room?”

“That’s not the half of it. I’ve seen him sneakily eating sweets that he smuggles in his sleeves while Chief State Councilor is talking. I still don’t understand how she hasn’t caught him yet.”

“Hey, have you ever actually seen Councilor Gang Yun working on anything? I don’t think I’ve seen him contribute anything at all. He doesn’t even speak up unless to simply say yes with the others.”

“I can’t say that I have, either.”

“Then… why do you think he is still on the council?”

The other councilor leaned in forward, whispering even more softly, “I’ve… heard things. From the older councilors.” With a pause for effect, he continued, “They said that Councilor Gang Yun, is actually a dangerous viper. He’s said to be quite cunning. He has a terrifying intellligence. But he pretends to be a simpleton so that he doesn’t get anything assigned to him.”

“Is that so?”

“Yes. Apparently, that is why the old King kept him on the council, and why the Chief Councilor doesn’t remove him. He has a bit of a reputation as one of the most strategic minds in the Kingdom.”

Both councilors turned to look at the sleeping Councilor Gang Yun. The sleeping man’s mouth was slightly ajar and drool was dripping from one side.

“That man is not cunning.” The first councilor said, shaking his head in disbelief and shaking with a silent laugh.

“I was told he’s always sleeping and craving sweets because his mind is powerful.” The second said but did not sound too sure.

“Have you actually seen any account of this supposed intelligence?”

The other councilor puffed up his cheek, thinking. Then shook his head in a no. “Councilor Oh seemed so certain though.”

“Councilor Oh needs to retire. The man is hitting eighty.”

“Hmm,” the second councilor said. He then looked up and squinted his eye. “Hey, where did the councilor go?”

The first looked up too and found that the chair where Gang Yun had been resting was now empty. There had been no sound. No indication of any movement. Yet he was gone.

The light behind them became blocked by a long shadow. The two councilors turned.

“Eek!” They both squealed.

“Punctuality is a virtue. But I wonder what arriving unnecessarily early indicates.”

“C-c-councilor Gang Y-yun. What a surprise!”

“We thought you were sleeping.”

The councilor stood behind them like a tall ghost, his white hair adding to his intimidating effect. “I was asleep. But certain unnecessary yapping woke me.”

“A-apologies,” the first councilor said. “We did-did not mean to disturb you.”

“This is the Coun-council room, though.” The second argued.

Councilman Gang Yun tilted his head. “And what inspired you both to arrive an hour early?”

“W-w-well, we wanted to g-get here before everyone else. Since-since the Chief Councilor is always ten minutes ahead of everyone.”

“Hmm.” Councilman Gang Yun looked at them accusingly.

“W-why are you here?” The first asked.

The Councilor shot him a most threatening glare. The other man shrunk into his seat.

“Are you trying-trying to arrive early too?” The second councilor asked.

Councilor Gang Yun answered while he glided back to his seat, “Perhaps. Perhaps I too am interested to learn what you young’uns whisper about when the elderly aren’t around.” He said, giving the two of them a loaded glare that let them know he had heard their quip about Councilman Oh.

Councilor Gang Yun took his seat, “You know, those rumors about me. They are true.” He flicked a brow.

“They are?” The two councilors said in unison.

Councilor Gang Yun grinned, “Are they? Maybe I spread them so that people wouldn’t give me work thinking I was to terrifying to approach.”

The two councilors blinked. “That’s it, isn’t it?” The first said.

“Of course. Makes sense.” The second agreed.

They both visibly relaxed.

“But then again,” Councilor Gang Yun said mysteriously, “if I am intelligent enough to spread such a rumor… then maybe I do have viper like, terrifying intelligence. Which, in that case, would mean quite a lot of problems for you two, wouldn’t it?”

The two councilors began quaking in their seats.

Councilor Gang Yun could not continue his amusing game further for the newly appointed Captain of the Royal Guard burst in with a group of his men behind him.

“The Council meeting has been cancelled,” he announced. His face red as if he had been running. “The Chief State Councilor has been called away for more urgent business.”

“What’s more urgent than taxing poor citizens?” Councilman Gang Yun said, impressively sounding both sarcastic and concerned.

“After a year of evading our guard, Lord Ahn Hyun has finally been captured.” The Captain said.

The other two councilor’s gasped elatedly. Councilor Gang Yun betrayed no emotion.

“When was this?” Gang Yun asked.

“This morning. One of the Chief’s own men caught him.”

“Who?” All three councilors asked, for the man who caught Lord Ahn Hyun was about to become very richly favored by the Chief Councilor.

“The Shadowman Dan Ho.”

Chapter Text

They had been given surnames.

Since the establishment of their Headmaster as the Chief State Councilor, the Shadowmen had been liberated from hiding in the dark, to living in broad daylight as respected citizens.

No longer were they feared assassins, monsters of the night. They were honorable swordsmen, serving their master, the King, and no one else. They had been given housing within the capital and a new base from where they trained in their traditional way. They were assigned work that didn’t make them feel ashamed—though the nature of it remained the same. They now moved amongst the people as one of them, not having to play pretend like before.

They were normal people now.

And they had surnames.

Except for Dan Ho.

He was still just Dan Ho. And this slight did not go unnoticed.

The Headmaster never announced it, but ever since he failed to kill the Princess she had been punishing him. She sent him away on tasks that left him months away at a time. And when he returned, she refused to see him.

The once golden boy of the Shadowmen was now looked upon with either pity or contempt by the other assassins. Those who used to fear and admire him now saw him as a cautionary tale. Of how even the best of them could fall into the black books of the Headmaster if they did not meet her expectations.

Dan Ho did not mind her little punishments. They kept him away from the palace. And the farther away from that place, the better he felt. Because he had noticed a strange pattern every time he was within, or even near the palace. He had nightmares.

He never used to remember them before. But now, he remembered each and every excruciating detail. Details he could not discuss with anyone for they sounded too fantastical and unbelievable.

Being away from the palace had other perks. It gave him the freedom to do some investigations into his dreams, and what the former Princess had told him.

The Headmaster had first sent him back to the school to oversee their migration from the hidden valley in the mountains to the capital. While the Headmaster stayed within the palace, watching King Hyun like a hawk, she sent her most trusted men, and Dan Ho, to the school.

The Headmaster’s personal guard were among their most ruthless and most skillful fighters. But they weren’t very smart. Dan Ho suspected this was on purpose, but he didn’t worry over it since this worked out in his favor.

None of them suspected a thing when he sneaked into the Headmaster’s offices to find any evidence to prove what he had been shown in his dreams.

Her office, with all its papers stacked to the ceiling, and the maps pinned to the walls, invoked a special blend of nostalgia. He felt a weight lift off him, as if he had been on an arduous journey and had just returned home. But his memories here were also tainted with what he now understood about his Headmaster.

Dan Ho still remembered vividly all of the times he spent here with the Headmaster. The praises he received on any new accomplishments, the words of wisdom and stories that the Headmaster would offer only to him and no one else.

Everyone thought that the Headmaster was a woman of unparalleled intelligence and divine knowledge. In reality, Dan Ho knew first hand, that the Headmaster’s greatest strength, was her vast network of spies and her meticulous planning.

She had stationed many a Shadowmen to serve as her eyes and ears all over the Kingdom. They would fetch back crucial information about key people from powerful families. And once the information had been gathered, she spent hours and hours meticulously analyzing every piece of even seemingly useless information, till she had developed a deep enough understanding of a person, that she could predict with accuracy, their next course of action.

There was one night, when Dan Ho returned late to his school, and saw an opportunity to meet the Headmaster. One of the girls was taking a glass of milk and some medicine to the Headmaster in her office. Dan Ho intercepted the girl, taking the tray himself instead.

“Oh! What a pleasant surprise.” The Headmaster had said, genuinely happy to see him. She was sitting on the floor, papers strewn all around her. The room appeared as if a tornado had passed through.

Dan Ho hesitated, not seeing a way from the office door to her desk amongst all of the papers.

“Just walk over. Don’t worry about my mess.”

Dan Ho deposited the tray on the table but instead of scurrying away like anyone else would have, he stayed to ensure that the Headmaster took her medicine.

He stood there, waiting for her to get up. But she kept on working, picking up papers from the floor to examine them, then writing something down in her own notebook.

The writings on her notebook looked like a map of sorts. She seemed to be tracing something. Vein like lines spread out on the pages, connecting then separating into their own trails. Dan Ho couldn’t help but stare, trying to work out what it all meant. From his angle, it looked like she was drawing a river that spread out over various parts of land then converged at various points.

“I do not appreciate being watched,” she said sternly, without looking up or stopping her writing.

“You should take this,” he said respectfully.

“I will. Leave.”

Dan Ho did not leave.

The Headmaster kept on working, eventually forgetting that Dan Ho was standing there. His skills as a Shadowman—being able to blend into the background like a shadow—aided in this regard.

Dan Ho observed her, how absolutely lost she was in her work. When she let her guard down, she appeared her age. From the side, he could see the wrinkles of her face, the sagging skin below her jaw, and the lines on her face that had formed from years of frowning.

Dan Ho felt a surge of warmth for who was essentially, the only parental figure he had in his life. But his thoughts were abruptly halted when the Headmaster suddenly sat up straight, holding up a piece of paper.

“This is it! I’ve found it! The winning course of action.”

Her sudden exclamation after such an intense amount of silence made Dan Ho jump. This motion reminded the Headmaster that he was still there with her.

He expected her to be mad. But instead she called him to her, motioning for him to come near.

“Let me teach you a secret, boy. Come over.” She stood up, her bones cracking as she stretched tall. They went over to her desk where Dan Ho eagerly awaited for her guidance.

“Everyone always thinks that I have some divine intelligence. Or that I am some demon. I am neither. I am a person, just like you and the other boys.” Dan Ho nodded for her to continue. “What I do have, is hard work. You can have all the talent and brains in the world, but hard work beats all of them. See here. See what this is?”

Dan Ho bent over the notebook with the lines spreading throughout the pages, connecting then spreading out. Each line started at some source point. And each point had an alphabet assigned to it, most likely to mask what that source really was. There was tiny hand writing beside each line. As Dan Ho looked closer, he found that each line represented an action. The source points were people, and every time the line divided into two, three or even four more lines, it meant that the person had two, three and four actions that they could take.

It was a decision map. If created carefully enough, it could help a person determine which course of action was the best to take, and what course of action the other actors in the scenario had to take to achieve the goal.

“This is how I plan things. I work out each and every action of every player in the game. Do you know how Go works?” It was a board game with black and white stones used to represent opposing sides. The object was to strategically capture the other side’s territory, similar to how war worked. “You win at that game by trying to guess the enemy’s moves and coming up with ways to either curb their plans or use them to your advantage. Well, that's exactly what this is. I map out each and every action my enemies can come up with. And if I do that, I can have a countermeasure for every step they take against me. You know what happens when I do that?”

“You win.” Dan Ho said, looking at the meticulous detail in which the Headmaster had written down her moves. The writing was confusing. Dan Ho couldn’t make sense of it. But he could understand that all of it required a lot of hard work and a lot of knowledge gathering for such maps could not be made if one did not have a thorough understanding of the players involved.

“People think that men win from strength, and women from cunning. But I will show them. I will show everyone that you only need the will to win, and nothing else. Even if I don’t have the strength of a warrior, or the cunning of a courtesan, I will still win.”

Dan Ho looked around the empty office now. The papers, the files, the rolled-up scrolls, the wooden desk where he had sat on the opposite end. So much planning, so much scheming. How much time and effort the Headmaster must have put in to become the Chief State Councilor, with Hyun as the King? How much of herself had the old woman wasted to get revenge?

Dan Ho felt a wave of sadness wash over him. But he pushed against it and went over to the tall cabinet where he knew she kept files on all of the graduates of the school.

He began pulling out file after file, opening them up to find a listing of the students. He sat in the room for three hours and after going through what felt like a hundred record books, he finally came across one that had been pushed way back beyond all of the items in the cupboard.

It was a ratty old book, with the pages almost decaying. When he cracked it open, he found it to be a listing of names, same as the others. And finally, as his spine was aching from having sat there for so long, Dan Ho found the listing of a student named Park Dan Ho.

Dan Ho closed the book to examine the cover and he realized that this book wasn’t for any graduates. This was a list of soldiers. It was the record of the men who had served under General Ji Ahn.

Park Dan Ho was listed as one of her men, from the time she served King Lee Chang.

And not since then, had any student had the name Dan Ho.

Dan Ho remembered very little of when he was first brought to the school. But seeing the name Park Dan Ho jolted his memory of when the Headmaster had asked him to change his name from Dan Ho to anything else.

“Why not have a cool name that everyone will love? Dan Ho is so old fashioned.” She had said.

“I want to keep it,” little Dan Ho had replied. “My family gave it to me.”

There was nothing in the cabinet to shed more light on Park Dan Ho; who he was and what he had done. But the fact that the name existed was proof enough to Dan Ho that his dreams were not just dreams.

They were visions.

From the office he learned a few more things about his Headmaster.

She was a key influencer in certain political issues, including a crisis of the salt mines and a civil war that almost broke out but was quelled by Lord Ahn Hyun. On the subject of Lord Ahn Hyun, he found a great deal of material but all of it written in harsh sentiment and even harsher penmanship. As if hurting the paper would hurt the man himself. There was even a picture of him with his eyes scratched out. It had been done with such violence that Dan Ho unconsciously gulped.

Old records revealed how the Headmaster started the school with only a few of her soldiers, who remained loyal to her after her banishment and helped her gather orphans for her new school.

Dan Ho also came across scrolls upon scrolls detailing the lives of King Deok Hwa and his family. In particular, Dan Ho found reports on the Crown Prince Young Hwa, from the time he was declared as the next heir.

Dan Ho wondered what this implied about the Prince’s actions when he attacked the Shadowmen’s brothel. He could not ponder on this thought for long for his heart wouldn’t let him. The suggestion that his Headmaster allowed her own people to die for her scheme was too painful to bear. Even if it was foolish to not see the connection, Dan Ho preferred ignorance over realizing just how cruel his Headmaster was.

From one dusty corner, he found a sketch of a man wearing the General’s uniform. The picture resembled the Crown Prince Young Hwa but given how worn it was, it appeared too old to have been a sketch of the Prince. Dan Ho deduced that it was King Deok Hwa in his youth.

The picture had been carefully encased in a cylindrical metal seal but the marks on its edges suggested it had been unrolled over and over again. Someone—most likely the Headmaster—had viewed the picture, but was careful not to damage it. 

One piece of the puzzle that Dan Ho had been hoping to find, appeared to be missing. There was no record of Hyun as a student. Search as he may, Dan Ho could not find a single paper, scroll, even any object that contained any information on Hyun. Before he could ponder on what that meant, he heard shuffling from the outside.

The Headmaster’s personal guard were there to pack up her office. Which meant it was time to leave.

But before leaving, Dan Ho quickly opened up her desk drawer, knowing exactly where to look, and took out a cloth wrapped around something heavy that clinked in his hands. It was the payment Princess Song Hwa had given him when he had made the contract with her to keep her alive. Pocketing it, Dan Ho left the Headmaster’s room.

Dan Ho never went back into her office again. He and the others quickly boarded up the school and left the mountains, never to return again. When Dan Ho reached the capital, he found his pulse quickening, for the nightmares would begin again.

He did not have to fear for long, because the second he arrived, he was sent back again.

“She wants you to hunt down the former Princess Song Hwa.” The messenger explained to him. “You are to leave immediately. Rest on your way, but not here.”

“The Princess has the entire Royal Guard after her. I’m not needed.” Dan Ho tried pushing past the messenger, but the man stopped him, looking ever so apologetic for doing so.

“I’m—I’m—I’m so sorry, but I was given strict instructions to make you leave immediately,” the poor man looked terrified of Dan Ho.

Dan Ho’s nostrils flared, “Why me? Why now?” He already knew the answer. But he was tired and irritable, and the messenger was a pushover who was shivering in his presence. “Aish, nevermind. Get lost.” He waved the messenger away, mounting his horse again.

“Bu-bu-But, she said, she said—”

“Don’t bully the messenger.” Hwang Rin—no, Lee Hwang Rin, since they all had proper names now— said, riding up behind the shivering man. “I’m here to go with you. The Royal Guard haven’t produced anything in eight months. She thinks it’ll be faster if we do it.” By “we”, Hwang Rin meant the Shadowmen.

True, the Royal Guard were highly skilled, but it was the Shadowmen who knew the hidden routes and secret pockets of the Kingdom that the upper crust and the noble turned a blind eye to. They would know exactly where to look for a person shrewd enough to evade capture for eight months.

Dan Ho stared Hwang Rin down. He looked to the other Shadowmen accompanying him, tired from their journey from the school.

“You three. You’re with me.” He said to the Shadowmen.

One of them shook his head. “I don’t think so. We just came back.”

“Yes,” another said, “and the Headmaster ordered you. Not us.”

Before, no one would have dared to raise an argument against Dan Ho’s orders. But now that he was no longer the Headmaster’s favorite, they all treated him like he was still a green trainee.

“Don’t you idiots know how to talk to a sunbae?” Hwang Rin said, his soft voice low and dangerous.

The three Shadowmen immediately lowered their heads to Hwang Rin in humility. “Sorry, Sunbae.” They all said.

“You’re not coming.” Dan Ho said to Hwang Rin, glaring.

“You don’t get to decide that.”

Hwang Rin maneuvered his horse around Dan Ho and slowly began to trot away. The three Shadowmen looked to each other in confusion but followed after him.

Dan Ho blew out a furious exhale through his flared nostrils before catching up to Hwang Rin.

“I’m not going with you.”

“You think the kids will listen to you without me?”

Dan Ho could not deny that Hwang Rin had a point. While he wanted to protest, he clenched his jaw and continued riding.

~~~~~~~

It was his eyes that drew everyone’s attention.

The past eight months had changed him. The Headmaster had been keeping him out of her sight by sending him on useless missions to other parts of the Kingdom. Whether it was this unusual punishment, or the travel itself, no one knew. But they all agreed, Dan Ho had become a different person.

While his entire face appeared sunken in, it was his eyes that all at once made people stare and also made them uncomfortable enough to look away when he glanced at them. They had lost their sharp glean, their spark of intelligence. And they were puffy, with deep, dark circles that made his gaze appear intense and stern.

It helped that he was always spacing out, staring into corners as if his mind was lost somewhere. It allowed others to look at him long enough to come up with their own conclusions as to what was wrong with him.

He had also become very quiet. This, no one but Hwang Rin noticed. Dan Ho had always been reserved but this silence was new. It was as if he had withdrawn into himself and it ached Hwang Rin’s heart to see his once lively friend become so hollow.

There were five of them, traveling east where Lord Ahn Hyun’s men were last spotted. They had to travel for weeks and with all that spare time, the Shadowmen, save for Hwang Rin and Dan Ho himself, had nothing to do but discuss what was wrong with Dan Ho sunbae.

Dan Ho was feeling guilty about angering the Headmaster; that was the most prevalent theory so far. It made sense. Dan Ho had always been the Headmaster’s favorite. And now she wouldn’t even look at him. She would always send him away from home. And he wouldn’t even protest. Which made Hwang Rin think that perhaps Dan Ho wanted to be away from the palace, but that he kept to himself.

Dan Ho had fallen in love with a girl; that was the theory the three Shadowmen always brought up unwarranted. Almost as if this was the one they wanted to be true the most. That their sunbae had found a girl but she rejected him so he was depressed.

Dan Ho’s previous victims were haunting him; that was one theory that Hwang Rin had come up with. He had noticed that Dan Ho didn’t sleep much, often volunteering to keep watch at night.

“Yah, you’ll die if you don’t rest.” Hwang Rin had said to him.

Dan Ho’s looked at him wearily and said in a groggy voice, “It’s only while we’re near the palace. I’ll sleep once we’re away from that wretched place.”

Hwang Rin’s theory was given further proof after the incident with the sheet.

It happened thus. Hwang Rin wished to reconcile with his old friend, but his old friend was proving stubborn and incorrigible. Dan Ho wouldn’t even speak to him, only sending him messages through the junior Shadowmen. So in an effort to break this wall between them, Hwang Rin decided he needed a way to break this barrier between them.

One of them normally traveled ahead to ensure that the way was safe and left behind markers to let the others know that they could continue following the path. This was unnecessary as Shadowmen were now free citizens, but old habits died hard, so one of them always went up ahead and waited for the others to catch up.

That day, it was Hwang Rin’s turn. He left just before sunset, leaving behind markers for the others to follow.

The juniors all traveled in silence as Dan Ho led them forward. It was night by the time they reached their last marker.

“Are we meant to go on ahead?” One of the juniors asked the others since they could not see Hwang Rin anywhere.

“I don’t think so. This is supposed to be the final mark.” The other junior replied.

Dan Ho did not seem perturbed. He got off his horse and started to unload the horse.

One junior knocked his elbows with the other, prompting him to speak. The other junior shook his head in silent protest. The third rolled his eyes and came forward.

“Sunbae, are you sure we stop here? I can’t see Hwang Rin sunbae.”

Dan Ho looked at him, eyes half drooping with sleep. “What?”

The Shadowman repeated himself.

Dan Ho blinked as if just noticing that there were only four of them, instead of five.

Something fell from above, right between the two other juniors. The jumped away with a “woah!” when they noticed that the object that had fallen was a bloody doll.

The four of them circled around the doll. They were quiet, with only their breaths making any sound.

“Wha-What is that?” One of the juniors whispered.

A branch cracked. They all jumped.

A bird’s wings flapped rapidly in the dark sky.

Suddenly the light of their flaming torches seemed too weak. The three Shadowmen jumped behind Dan Ho as they looked around.

Something moaned up above. Something inhuman.

They all slowly looked up and to their horror, saw a something white floating up above.

“It’s a—it’s a…”

“GHOST!”

It was white and bloody. The three Shadowmen screamed and ran while Dan Ho stayed rooted in one spot.

The ghost descended, jumping down from above the tree. It bent over, cackling like a witch. Then it straightened up and removed the sheet from its head.

Hwang Rin was red with laughter. He wiped the tears from his eyes.

Dan Ho glared at him, unaffected.

“Come on!” Hwang Rin said, “Don’t pretend like you weren’t scared. I got you, didn’t I?” He grinned.

But Dan Ho didn’t even flinch. “Ghosts don’t look like that,” was all he said. Then he turned and went back to unloading the horses.

Hwang Rin’s grin slowly faded. He stared at Dan Ho, who was slouching as he carried their food to a small patch of land where they would set up their fire.

“What do you mean by that?” Hwang Rin asked.

Dan Ho did not answer the question. But did say, “You’ve ruined that sheet.”

Things seemed to fall into place for Hwang Rin. Since that night, he was certain that Dan Ho’s problem wasn’t the Headmaster’s subdued rage or heartbreak.

He was being haunted.

Hwang Rin looked at Dan Ho now as they rode on to their next destination. The man who once walked as gracefully as a king, now slouched. His head that was once held up proudly, almost arrogantly in fact, now hung from his neck like a great burden. And the hollowness in his eyes that bothered Hwang Rin so much… yes, Dan Ho was being haunted. Hwang Rin was certain.

He slept better now though. So there was some improvement. They were far from the palace and had been through a few towns and small villages where the Princess might have been hiding. They had not found her yet and Hwang Rin wasn’t sure they would. Dan Ho didn’t seem interested in finding her. They didn’t even have a plan. Just a general understanding that they would be traveling to all of the places that Lord Ahn Hyun’s men had been seen. Just like the Royal Guard before them had done.

“Are you trying to help her stay hidden?” Hwang Rin asked Dan Ho quietly as they rode ahead of the others.

“What?” Dan Ho frowned at him. His dark circles had lightened a little but they still made his gaze look intense.

“What’s the gameplan, Ho-ya? Are you even trying to find the girl?”

“If you’ve got a better idea, then say it.” Dan Ho snapped.

“I don’t. But you know that. Why are we only going over what the Royal Guard has already covered?”

“To make sure they didn’t miss anything.”

“Bull shit.”

“Sure.” Dan Ho shrugged and did not elaborate further.

Hwang Rin huffed. “I didn’t tell on Sam—”

Dan Ho sped up his horse.

“Just listen to me!” Hwang Rin yelled after him, but Dan Ho didn’t slow down.

“What’s up?” the juniors brought their horses up to Hwang Rin.

“Nothing. Your sunbae is just riding up ahead to see if it’s all clear.” Hwang Rin lied as Dan Ho disappeared out of sight.

As they traveled on, they noticed the lack of markers left by Dan Ho.

“Are we sure this is the right track? I haven’t seen a marker for several miles.”

Hwang Rin was worried too but didn’t show it. “We’re on the right track. I know which city we’re supposed to go to. Perhaps Dan Ho forgot to mark the way.”

“Sunbae has been out of it lately.” The junior agreed. And just like that, the debate over what was wrong with Dan Ho started again.

“I am telling you, it’s a girl. There’s no other explanation for it.”

“The ban of marriage has been lifted! It makes no sense for Sunbae to be depressed.”

“Ban on marriage has nothing to do with being rejected.”

“Pfft, no girl would reject Dan Ho sunbae. Have you seen his face?”

“A year ago, I would have agreed. But now? Have you seen his face?”

Hwang Rin blocked out the remaining conversation. But something caught his eye up ahead. Something in the woods.

“Shut up!” He whispered harshly to his party and all three Shadowmen immediately quieted. All of them were on high alert as they all sensed a presence nearby.

“This can’t be sunbae taking revenge for your prank, can it?” a junior whispered.

“Shh!” Hwang Rin took out his sword.

They wore white. And they came from all sides. Hwang Rin didn’t figure it out at first but when the first man struck, and the movement seemed uncannily familiar, he knew they had come across Ahn Hyun’s men.

There were more of the men in white than there were men in black, so naturally, Hwang Rin ordered his juniors to surrender. Lord Ahn Hyun’s men didn’t seem interested in killing them. They tied the Shadowmen’s hands behind their backs and took them to a nearby clearing.

Dan Ho was there, on his knees, with his face all bloody and his hands behind him. His headband was tilted to the side, his hair spilling from its tie.

When he saw them his eyes widened in fury. “You idiots! What’s the rule on not finding any markers!”

They shouldn’t have gone ahead. That was the rule. Hwang Rin didn’t get to respond as their captors pushed him forward from behind and lined him up with Dan Ho.

Lord Ahn Hyun stood in all his elderly glory, looking at the men he had captured with glee.

The man was a strange paradox. His face was wise and kind. But his eyes moved like a snake’s. He appeared old and fragile, but moved with the weight of a man who could kill someone with one blow. His gaze was thoughtful, but his grin was mischievous. And then there was the glint of humor in his eyes. Even at a time like this, the man wasn’t bothered by anything. He appeared calm and collected, as though meeting old acquaintances.

“My, my. It appears we have visitors.”

“We caught them nearby, my Lord. They appear to be—”

“Shadowmen!” Lord Ahn Hyun laughed. “Ji Ahn-ni is so childish. What kind of a name is Shadowmen?”

“It is because we hunt in the shadows,” one of the juniors defended, gritting his teeth. “We are men of the night, monsters that mothers warn their—”

“Do you hear yourselves, kiddo? Men of the night. What does that even mean? Phoey!” Lord Ahn Hyun spat on the ground, “She’s been filling your head with nonsense! Men are men! The day is for working. The night for sleeping. Staying awake at night is what naughty children do! Phoey! All you lot achieve by sneaking around is bad sleeping habits. Look at this one!” He pointed his sheathed sword to Dan Ho. “Poor boy looks like he’s about to fall over!”

The four of them looked to Dan Ho who was shooting daggers at Lord Ahn Hyun. The old man went closer to Dan Ho, bending forward to meet his eyes.

“Now you actually do look like a ghost,” he said. Hwang Rin felt confused at the statement but Dan Ho seemed to understand what it meant. His glare softened and a question formed on his face.

The Lord straightened. “Bring this one with me. Feed the rest. They look famished.”

Three men in white dragged Dan Ho away whilst the rest of them held the other four Shadowmen back.

“Wait. Wait! Where are you taking him! Wait!” Hwang Rin tried to break free from the clutches of their captors but they held him back steadfastly.

“I didn’t do it, Ho-ya! You have to believe me!” Hwang Rin yelled at the top of his lungs, hoping his voice would reach his friend, not knowing if these were the last words he would get to say to him.

~~~~~~~

It was the welcome Dan Ho should have received every time he came back home, Hwang Rin thought. He realized it now, why the Headmaster had sent Dan Ho after the Princess. It wasn’t to keep him banished from the palace. It was to give him a chance to redeem himself. To allow him to correct his mistake in letting her go in the first place.

Bells rang at their arrival. Festive horns sounded at their arrival. It had been five that had left to capture the Princess. And all five returned.

The four of them looked the same as they had on the day they left four months ago. Only Dan Ho looked worn and ragged. He had bruises on his face that were still healing and cuts on his fingers and arms as if he had been in a terrible sword fight.

Behind the four men, wrapped in a comical amount of rope, mounted on a white horse, was Lord Ahn Hyun. He looked ahead stoically, as if restraining himself from expressing great despair. People of the capital rushed forward as their little party traveled through the streets towards the palace.

At first the people were confused. Then, as they realized what had happened, they rushed forward with rotten fruit and vegetables to throw at Lord Ahn Hyun. The sentiment towards the man had soured quite significantly since the current Chief State Councilor had begun “educating” the public on Lord Ahn Hyun’s many war crimes and traitorous alliances. So it was no surprise that his presence was met with such hate and animosity.

Some of the rotten fruit ended up on the Shadowmen. But oddly enough, none of the items ever landed on the old man. He seemed to move ever so slightly, either forwards, backwards or to the side, so that nothing ever touched him. Hwang Rin would have blamed the people for having bad aim, had he not already known that all of the reflexes he himself had been taught at the assassin school were direct teachings of Lord Ahn Hyun.

The Headmaster greeted them at the palace gates. She rushed forth to hug Dan Ho.

“Well done my boy! I knew that if it had to be someone, it would be you who would bring back the girl!” She pulled back, slapping his shoulder.

Hwang Rin noticed that Dan Ho didn’t seem too happy to be greeted by the Headmaster. This was quite out of character, but what Dan Ho said next made Hwang Rin realize that he was simply worried. “We didn’t get the Princess.”

The Headmaster’s face twitched, “What?”

“The Princess. We didn’t get her.”

The Headmaster’s hands fell from Dan Ho’s arms. “Then what was this announcement? I heard—”

“We caught Lord Ahn Hyun. But the Princess was not with him.”

Hwang Rin gulped. He wondered what the Headmaster would do to them since technically, they came home with only half the job done. Ideally, they should have brought back Song Hwa. But Dan Ho had insisted that they take Lord Ahn Hyun back to the palace or else the old man would escape once more.

The new Chief State Councilor tilted her head slightly to look past her Shadowmen, towards the captured Lord Ahn Hyun.

“Good to see you again, Ji Ahn-na.” Lord Ahn Hyun waved through his bindings.

The Headmaster’s face lit up again. “No matter.” She squeezed Dan Ho’s arms once more, grinning ear to ear. “You caught that traitorous bastard. That is good enough.” To the other Shadowmen, she announced, “Come! You must all be tired. Rest!”

She turned to her servants who always followed her around, “Get a feast ready. My champion has returned home!”

A few guards approached them to take their baggage from them. One of them asked Hwang Rin, “How did you do it? How did you all capture the Lord Ahn Hyun.” The guard said the as “thee” as if it went with Lord Ahn Hyun’s title. The implication being that no one could ever capture the man.

Hwang Rin looked at the guard blankly, unsure of how to word his thoughts. “I don’t know.” He said honestly, “Dan Ho did it on his own.”

“What does that mean?”

“It mean I actually don’t know. One minute we were caught by the Lord and his men. And the next minute Dan Ho had knocked him out and was helping us escape and fight. We just fought off Ahn Hun’s henchmen. They all ran away but we managed to capture Ahn Hyun.”

The guard’s brows shot up. “Wow. I hadn’t realized that Dan Ho was so capable.”

Hwang Rin looked at the back of his friend, his brows furrowed in what looked like worry. “I hadn’t either.”

~~~~~~~

“What do you mean he cannot be hanged?!” The Chief State Councilor banged the table, her eyes blazing in white hot rage as she snarled at the council room where all court officials—councilors and courtiers alike—had gathered.

“He helped the Princess—”

“Former Princess.” The Chief State Councilor corrected the councilor.

The councilor bowed his head, “Former Princess escape. But there is no evidence that he was involved in the murder of King Lee Chang. Or in the conspiracy you highlighted about the previous royal family.”

The Chief State Councilor banged her fist on the table once more, “I am telling you, he was involved! What more do you need than that!”

“Actual proof might be nice,” Councilor Gang Yun drawled, combing his fingers through his stark white beard. If looks could kill, then the look the Chief State Councilor sent him would have incinerated him.

“He helped the traitorous Song Hwa—”

“Princess Song Hwa was not a traitor.” The previous Councilor spoke again.

“Former!” The entire council corrected him once more before the Chief Councilor could.

“Yes. Right. The former Princess simply had the misfortune of having Deok Hwa as her father. I do not think she has any intentions against the crown. And to target a young girl—”

“That young girl could grow up to take revenge for her father! What will you do then if she turns up to kill your King!”

The councilor sniggered. “Chief Councilor, I do not think that a mere girl could do much harm.”

The Chief State Councilor put both of her palms on the table, raising her brow critically. “I was once a little girl too councilor.”

“Yes. But you are but one exception. A single woman fighting as a soldier does not suddenly change the rules.”

The Chief Councilor lowered her head and drew out a long breath to calm herself. “Councilor, this debate is not about whether or not women are capable of fighting. Ahn Hyun deserves to be hanged. I want him hanged!”

A low chatter rose among everyone as they deliberated over what was to be done.

Councilor Gang Yun spoke up, “If he really is a danger, why not let the King decide?”

“That’s the right call.” Another councilor leaned in, agreeing. “This should be a decree by the King. We should let the King decide.”

Someone said in a low voice, “It’s time he started calling the shots anyways.”

“Yes! Ask the King!”

“The King should deliberate!”

“SILENCE!” The Chief Councilor banged her hand on the table, this time breaking a plate.

All voices stopped. Not even breathing could be heard.

Blood spilled from the cut in the Chief State Councilor’s hand. A maid quickly rushed to her side to cover it.

“Get the King.” The Chief Councilor said, her voice hoarse from the shouting.

Councilor Gang Yun sat up. And since he never did so, the councilors sitting near him stared.

“What’s wrong with you?” One of them asked quietly.

“My back’s aching. This is taking too long.” He said absently. His eyes were on the door to the right corner from where the King was to enter.

After what felt like hours, the young King Hyun entered the room. They all stood and bowed before him as he took his seat in the elevated platform at the very front of the room. He was young. Too young. And more so, naïve. This was evident from his hapless expression and innocent eyes.

He addressed the room in a standard kingly manner, as all kings before him had. His words were clearly rehearsed as they sounded programmed and disingenuous.

The King had shown up for only three council meetings before this. In those three instances, the Chief Councilor had been by his side, attached at the hip. It was not common to have anyone by the King, but alas, the excuse was given that he was young and still learning the proper way of address.

The Chief Councilor kept whispering in the King’s ear every time a question was asked or a decision had to be made. It became abundantly clear to everyone that the Chief Councilor was the one holding the reins. But no one could question this, as they feared that the Chief Councilor would send her Shadowmen after them if they spoke up.

This was not an irrational fear for many of them had disappeared without a trace or found dead without a head.

Having the King here now was meaningless. But Councilor Gang Yun had his eyes open. He had eaten the sweets his wife had made for him and his brain was fully charged to work.

“Your Highness,” The oldest councilor spoke, “We apologize for disturbing your peace.”

The King blushed, as if ashamed. “Not at all, Councilor.”

The Chief Councilor took over, “The court would like you to deliberate on the matter of Lord Ahn Hyun. He was captured this morning and brought over as a prisoner. It is our duty to—”

“Who is Lord Ahn Hyun?” The King asked innocently.

The Chief Councilor’s face twitched as the rest of the council looked to each other in worry. If this King did not know the people of his own Kingdom, how was he to rule?

Through gritted teeth, the Chief Councilor said, “He is the man who helped Song Hwa escape.”

“Oh. Right.” King Hyun said, turning even more red as he realized his mistake. It was better not to ask any questions, than to ask and let others know of his ignorance.

The Chief Councilor droned on while Councilor Gang Yun weighed his options. The councilor on his right was an easily influenced fellow. Gang Yun could have him singing in court with the right push. But the one on his left was a thinker. He needed a little extra convincing, so Gang Yun decided to speak to him first.

Leaning to his left, Councilor tilted his head, as if resting it to the side. With his beard and mustache masking his mouth, he whispered to the other councilor, “Why do we bother bringing out the King? He only does what that woman tells him,” Councilor Gang Yun emphasized the word woman for good measure.

The Councilor to his left nodded, forgetting that it was Gang Yun who asked for the King to begin with.

“Quite right.” The Councilor whispered back to Gang Yun. “She’s always latched to his ear.”

“A King should learn to think for himself.” Gang Yun said. “Poor boy. The Chief won’t let him leave her shadow.”

With a yawn, Councilor Gang Yun shifted to his right. The oldest Councilor had begun speaking again. Due to his age, he was the default member who spoke for the entire council. As he apprised Hyun about the situation, Councilor Gang Yun began whispering to the man on his right.

“Shame, isn’t it? Everyone hated King Deok Hwa because of his stern rule.”

“They did?” The Councilor said in a low voice.

Gang Yun nodded almost imperceptibly, “I heard whisperings on the street that the people had been hoping to get a merciful King. And with this boy being so young… I suppose the people were naïve to hope.”

“Merciful kings are synonymous with weak kings.”

“That’s old news!” Gang Yun whispered. “Don’t you hear what the scholars say these days? Sentiments have changed. Now mercy is strength. And given the last King’s reputation… well I would hope this King would want to be popular with his people. At least Deok Hwa had his clan behind him. Who does King Hyun have? His entire family was massacred so he has no clan. How long will the fear of the Shadowmen last?”

The councilor to his right shifted to lean in closer.

Councilor Gang Yun continued, “It won’t be long till the other tribes realize that the power vacuum in court still remains. And if Ahn Hyun’s clan comes to fight…” Gang Yun trailed off, letting the words take effect.

Now he sat back comfortably, letting his words do their job.

The elder councilor finished, letting the King deliberate on the situation.

King Hyun furrowed his brows as he thought things over. Councilor Gang Yun felt bad for the poor boy. He was completely ill-equipped for the politics of court.

“So, you are all suggesting we spare Lord Ahn Hyun despite his crimes?” King Hyun asked his court.

“If I may,” the Councilor to Gang Yun’s right leaned forward, “Your Majesty, with all due respect, I believe it would be most beneficial to you if you were to spare Ahn Hyun’s life as a gesture of mercy—”

The Chief Councilor interrupted, “Mercy? What King has ever gained respect over mercy? The people want a strong King who knows when to strike down on his enemies.”

“On his enemies yes. But on the people of his own Kingdom?” The Councilor continued. “I would suggest that by showing mercy, he would gain a more loyal following. Like his father.”

“It would have been what King Lee Chang would have done.” Gang Yun said, adding fuel to the little fire he had started.

Other councilors nodded and began to join in agreement.

“Yes. King Lee Chang gained quite the following amongst all of the five clans due to the loyalty he inspired.” One said.

“And he did so without the show of strength.” Another added.

“Kindness over cruelty. He used to say that, didn’t he?”

“That was Lady Hae Soo’s influence. He was different before her.”

“Yes but he became popular after her.”

“Do we really want the loyalty of peasants?” One of the newly appointed councilors said haughtily.

“I also don’t think that having the favor of the… how shall I put it, lower clans would be suited for the King.”

“These lower clans make up most of the Kingdom’s people.”

Gang Yun laid back and watched as the councilors began to argue the virtues and vices of elitism, completely ignoring the King before them as he watched the council grow helplessly sidetracked.

“Enough! You dare squabble before the King?” The Chief Councilor’s voice boomed above all others. The room immediately fell silent.

“Apologies, your Highness.” The oldest Councilor lowered his head.

“Oh no, please. Do not lower yourself on my account,” King Hyun said, thinking he was being polite. But immediately, looks of doubt passed amongst the councilors. The boy King seemed to realize this as he cleared his throat. “Chief Councilor, what do you have to say about the matter at hand.”

Before the Chief State Councilor could speak, the Councilor to Gang Yun’s left spoke up. “Why should the King rely on the Council for such simple matters as this?” He said scathingly. “Come now boy, have you no mind of your own? It is a simple matter! Does Ahn Hyun deserve to die or not?”

King Hyun blinked unsurely but kept his voice steady, “Well I don’t think I have all the facts. And I don’t think a King should take decisions too rashly.”

“Ah, perhaps the boy has hope.” Councilor Gang Yun said. This earned him a stern look from the Chief Councilor.

“Well if the King needs more time, then we should hold on the decision for now,” the oldest Councilor said.

“No. We must—”

“As the King has stated, decisions must not be made rashly.” The Councilor on Gang Yun’s left stated. “And as he is our King, we must obey him. Don’t you agree, Chief Councilor?”

The way the man said it made it so that the Chief Councilor could not help but nod. If she said no, she would end up looking like she was disobeying the King directly, thus acting treasonously.

This wasn’t the win Gang Yun wanted. But at least he now had time to breathe.

His stomach suddenly growled in hunger. He rubbed his belly morosely. “Time for lunch I think,” he stated out loud, earning looks from all the councilors. “We’re done here, aren’t we?” He asked innocently.

If looks could kill, the look that the Chief Councilor gave him would have turned him to ash.

~~~~~~~

Stealing the clothes of one of the guards was not the hard part. The hard part was hiding his white hair. Covering his head and face was never enough. His brows were still in full view so he had to tie his headband unusually lower, which again, caught everyone’s attention.

Still, Councilor Gang Yun managed to enter the prisons unnoticed. He had bulked up his garments for good measure, lest someone pick out his lean form or his lazy gait.

“You can’t be that smart if you got caught that easily.” This was how the Councilor greeted Lord Ahn Hyun.

The Lord sat in the middle of his cell, with his legs crossed and his eyes closed. He was meditating. His shirt was off, revealing sinewy muscle, lean and well defined through years of fighting. But he was thinner than before. There was less of the man now that his age was getting to him. It did not help that he had been on the run for an entire year.

“Is this how you greet your elders, you brat?” Ahn Hyun said, without opening his eyes.

“Only when elders are foolish enough to get caught.” Councilor Gang Yun pouted.

Lord Ahn Hyun peeled one eye open, “I know what this is. You are mad you had to make the effort to come see me.”

“It took me a whole hour to appear presentable. Do you know how much I had to stand while Yoo Jin wrapped my hanbok around all this padding?”

“Che,” Ahn Hyun clicked his tongue disapprovingly, “you made your wife dress you? How despicable.”

“She knows I won’t do it properly.” He shrugged.

Lord Ahn Hyun opened both eyes, narrowing them into judgmental slits. “Men should not be lazy.”

Councilor sighed slouching, “I should have been a rock instead.”

“A man does not slouch either.”

The Councilor made a despairing face.

“Well, if you came all this way, you must have a purpose.”

Councilor Gang Yun’s eyes suddenly gleaned sharply, “I want to say the same to you.”

The men were silent. The Councilor did not blink nor waver as he stared at Lord Ahn Hyun, who in turn, also returned the gave with a measured, unreadable look.

Lord Ahn Hyun was the first to blink.

“Get me the King.”

“Ha!” Councilor Gang Yun let out an involuntary laugh. Just a single “ha” that conveyed both his surprise and disbelief at the ridiculous request. “Why don’t I bring you General Ji Ahn’s head too, while I’m at it? Perhaps you would like the throne next?”

“If you could please.” Lord Ahn Hyun gave a mirthless grin.

“Old man, that prodigy of yours is brutal. If she finds that I even spoke to you—”

“Yet here you are, speaking to me.” Ahn Hyun’s grimness disappeared. His mouth now spread in a cheshire smile, reaching his ears but not his eyes. “Come on, Gang Yun. You are better than that! Figure it out. Or are you telling me you are not smart enough?”

The Councilor leaned in close, “That trick doesn’t work on me anymore, my Lord,” he flicked a brow.

“Pity.”

“Although I will give you this,” from his wide sleeve, the Councilor produced a rolled-up parchment, a brush and a very small pot of ink. “I always have something to write my thoughts on. I cannot get you the King. The General watches him like a hawk. Doesn’t leave his side. She’s almost his shadow.”

The Lord’s face soured at this news.

Gang Yun continued, “But perhaps I can get you to the King instead.”

Now Lord Ahn Hyun’s dry smile reached his eyes in genuine appreciation, “Clever boy.” He took the items from the Councilor. “Come visit me tonight. I will have a letter ready for the King.”

“The night is for sleeping.” Councilor Gang Yun’s eyes were slits again. The corners of his mouth tugged down.

“You can sleep when the rightful heir is on the throne.”

“And who might that be, exactly?” Gang Yun leaned in closer, his face pressing against the prison bars.

Lord Ahn Hyun leveled with him, “I do not know who. But I know, it is not that boy. He is not Lee Chang’s son.”

“It is not Princess Song Hwa either, if that is your intention.” The Councilor raised his chin. “Her father was no King.”

Lord Ahn Hyun drew in a thoughtful breath. “You’re right. That child does not belong here. The court is no place for her,” he said, choosing his words carefully.

Councilor Gang Yun knew the old man favored Song Hwa like a daughter. But Gang Yun had no such attachments. He only cared about doing the right thing. With only the bare minimum effort, of course. What use was a brain if not to lessen work?

“I mean it. I will help you get away if I must. But I will not let Deok Hwa’s child rule.”

Lord Ahn Hyun nodded.

“I will be back after dinner.” Councilor Gang Yun took a step back from the prison bars.

“Give Yoo Jin my best.”

As the Councilor reached the middle of the long hall of prison cells, he heard Lord Ahn Hyun call after him. The old man’s voice echoed off the walls, amplifying. “You still call her General?”

The Councilor’s steps slowed to a halt. He bit his lower lip before calling back, “I told you, didn’t I? You were too harsh. And it shows.”

Lord Ahn Hyun's silence said more than any words could.

Chapter Text

Once upon a time, there was a mean-spirited princess. This princess was not kind, nor pretty like princesses of fairytales. She yelled at her servants, argued with her mother, cursed her father in secret and made everyone’s lives difficult with how many times she tried to run away from the palace.

Everyone hated the young princess, but no one understood why she was the way she was. No one knew that she looked down on others because that is how her father saw the world. They didn’t know that she argued with everyone because she thought it was a way to show affection because of how the King and Queen spoke to each other. They didn’t know that she ran away because she wanted to be away from her father, away from the man who showed no restrained in his anger towards her.

Tired of her attitude, the servants of the palace left the Princess on her own. Her sisters had no interest in her. Her mother eventually died of her heartache and her brother became a different person as he grew older. Eventually, the Princess became very lonely.

And this made her lash out even more.

The worst suffering came for the Princess’s personal guard. When they failed to keep her locked away in the palace, they were punished by the King. And if they managed to somehow keep the Princess inside, they suffered her relentless bullying.

No one was willing to remain her guard for longer than a month. Many men ran away and eventually there was no one left to take the position.

The leader of the Go clan offered the services of his son. The Go clan was not well known nor were they well received in the palace. They offered no political advantage to the King, and hence were mostly ignored. Having one of them as the Princess’s guard would provide them a much better position in court.

Knowing this, Princess Song Hwa decided she would be extra mean to the young heir of the Go clan.

His name was Chung Myung. And despite not wanting to, the Princess could not deny that he was quite handsome.

“Good morning, Your Highness.” He greeted her on the first day of his appointment with a wide, open smile.

The Princess thought, ‘Tch, he’s only here to gain the royal family’s favor,’ and scowled at him.

“Aigoo, what a pretty scowl. Everyone sure is right about our pretty Princess.” He grinned, leaning just a tad too close.

The Princess blinked. Was this new guard openly flirting with her?

Deepening her scowl, she walked past him without bothering to acknowledge his presence.

Throughout his first day, the Princess tortured Go Chung Myung.

“Go Chung Myung,” she ordered, flicking her finger, “go fetch me that apple.”

The guard dutifully climbed up the tree and fetched the Princess the reddest apple. Bowing, he offered his catch to her. She took it, examining it with a raised brow. Then promptly threw it behind her.

“Not this one, you idiot. That one.” She pointed again, vaguely, towards the tree.

“Oh? Which one?”

“Can’t you figure it out? I thought you were the prized heir of your clan?” The Princess tilted her head.

She expected him to appear shocked at her rudeness. Instead, he just grinned. “Of course, Your Highness. My humblest apologies. I will fetch your apple right away.”

Up he went, fetching the apple closest to where she had pointed.

Her lip curled in disgust at his second offering, “Yah. Do you even have eyes? I want that one! That one!” She said, pointing to nowhere in particular.

Again, with a grin, the guard apologized and went back up the tree.

This went on over and over till there were barely any apples left. The court ladies accompanying them were beginning to pass each other looks of concern. The guard was panting now. Beads of sweat were dripping from his headband. The pits of his arms had also darkened with sweat.

“Is this,” he said through labored breath, “is this it, Your Highness?”

Song Hwa swallowed the guilt lodged in her throat. Normally a guard would have stopped by now and walked away in a huff. But Go Chung Myung kept on climbing, over and over, no matter how many times she insulted him that he brought the wrong apple.

By the time he brought her the very last apple from the tree, he could barely speak. He panted, offering her the bruised, overripe fruit.

Clenching her jaw, Song Hwa took it from his hands. “Well done,” she said quietly, biting into it. Her voice hoarse from all the insults she had thrown at him.

He smiled triumphantly, pumping his fist in the air. “Yes!” He fell on the ground, exhausted from the exercise.

“Now get up and collect all these apples from the ground. You will carry them back for the cooks.”

“What? Really?” Go Chung Myung lifted his head, looking at her incredulously.

“You didn’t think this job was easy, did you?” The Princess mocked, chewing on her apple.

The court ladies decided to help the poor guard with gathering the apples the Princess had thrown away. She had not prompted them to, but she did not hold them back either. She lazily munched on her apple while the others scrambled about collecting every last fruit from the tree.

After her morning excursion to the palace orchards, the Princess made a stop at the training grounds where the Captain of the Guard was overseeing duels with his swordsmen.

The Captain of the Guard was an ailing man. Song Hwa felt he should retire. But her father favored him as he was from an influential clan.

“Captain,” she greeted him. “Have you met my new guard?”

Go Chung Myung bowed to the Captain.

“Ah, yes. We tested him out ourselves,” the Captain said, licking his decaying teeth.

“Good. I want to see him fight you.” The Princess declared, earning wide eyed gazes from everyone around her.

“Excuse me?” The Captain said.

“You heard me. You are supposed to be the best fighter in the Royal Guard. I want to see how my personal guard holds up to your… skill.” The Princess smiled, her lips curling slyly.

“That’s not necessary, is it, Your Highness?” Go Chung Myung said, looking a little worried. “My aptitude has already been approved by your father.”

“Yes. By my father. Not by me, however.” Song Hwa’s smile only grew as Go Chung Myung squirmed under her gaze.

Like her father, Princess Song Hwa liked to kill two birds with one stone. She had been looking for a way to get the Captain of the Guard replaced with someone more capable for years, but her father had refused her proposal. By challenging the Captain, she would manage to humiliate both him and her guard, jeopardizing both of their positions. For Chung Myung, it was especially disastrous for if he were to win against someone from such an affluent family then all his dreams of gaining political favor would go up in smoke. And if he lost, then his position as the Princess’s personal guard would be put into question and soon enough, he would be sent back home.

The stage was set. Go Chung Myung was given the left corner. The Captain of the Guard was on the right. And the duel began.

Go Chung Myung was very young. And very gifted. He danced around the old man easily, without catching any of his blows. But the Captain had experience. He saw many of Chung Myung’s moves coming ahead of time.

The Princess watched, her lips pursed, her eyes unblinking.

Go Chung Myung danced around and around the Captain, thrusting his sword this way and that. The Captain defended, quickly building up a sweat. His movements became slower and slower with each passing minute.

The Princess noted that Chung Myung too, began to slow. Not from exertion. It was intentional. Her eyes narrowed as she saw Chung Myung deliberately miss a hit and nearly catch a clumsy blow from the Captain.

Inwardly, she smiled as she realized what he was doing. ‘Clever boy’, she thought. Outwardly, her face was stone; completely unreadable and thus, intimidating.

The fight dragged on till the two fighters started to appear exhausted. The Captain looked about ready to fall. But Chung Myung too, despite the absence of much sweat, looked about ready to faint. His feet wobbled and his movements became uncoordinated.

“How about we call… this a draw?” Chung Myung said with exaggerated panting. The Captain nodded, his body swaying as if he would fall over any second. Neither man ended up humiliated as both seemingly proved themselves as capable of facing each other.

The Princess put her fingers over her lips to hide her uncontrollable smile. ‘What a rascal’, she thought.

Thus, Chung Myung managed to complete her second trial without damaging his and the Captain’s position.

“Don’t think I didn’t notice what you did,” the Princess told him as they walked back from the training grounds.

“What did I do, Your Highness?” Chung Myung asked, blinking innocently while his mouth quirked.

The Princess swiveled so that she stood in Chung Myung’s path. “Don’t pretend to be so oblivious.” She bore her eyes into his, staring for any tells on his face.

It was quite a handsome face.

And then he smiled. His smile was cheeky. As if he knew something Song Hwa didn’t. “How could I ever pretend in front of you, Your Highness?”

Song Hwa would have retorted with a pithy remark, but she found her mind to be void of anything but the smile of the man before her. She felt her cheeks flame and immediately turned around.

“You are dismissed for the day,” she called back, retreating to her quarters.

The next day, the Princesses were to travel to Queen Yoo’s cousins. Princess Song Hwa spent half of the morning making the servants run about attempting to complete her insane demands. The other half of the morning was spent yelling at the servants for not fulfilling her demands.

Silk ribbons were thrown about. Dressed were packed and then unpacked. Breakfast was prepared thrice to appease the Princess’s fickle tastes. Palace ladies ran around like madwomen, looking for the exact shoes the Princess wanted.

When Chung Myung arrived at the Princess’s quarters, the servants all crowded around him saying;

“She’s on a rampage today.”

“Especially today, since she hates Queen Yoo and her cousins.”

“Run, Go Chung Myung. You seem like a sensible lad. Tell your father to take you away.”

“Make the King assign you to one of the other daughters.”

“They are much more amiable than this one. This one will work you to the bone, then feed your bones to her dog.”

“She’ll make you pick out the entire orchard yourself. Trust us, just go away.”

“No one will blame you if you do.”

Chung Myung laughed, “Aigoo, I am touched by such concern! But do not worry. The Princess can do me no harm.”

“Is that so?” Everyone gasped when they turned and saw Princess Song Hwa leaning against a pillar, lazily enjoying an apple.

Everyone bowed as the head palace woman spoke in their place, “Princess. We did not expect you there.”

“Of course, you didn’t. You wouldn’t be badmouthing me if you did,” The Princess said, taking a bite.

The head palace woman gulped, at a loss for words. Surely, she would lose her head now.

Chung Myung waved to the Princess, smiling widely. “Good morning, Your Highness.”

The Princess’s sly smile fell. She cleared her throat, “What’s so good about it? I have to put up with the likes of you all, all day.”

“Aw, don’t be like that. Your servants only want you to be happy.”

‘Lies’, the Princess thought, clicking her tongue. “You will earn no points by flattery.” She told him. To her servants, she said, “Aren’t you all getting back to work?”

Like mice they all scurried away, leaving only Chung Myung and the Princess behind.

Chung Myung walked up to her, “A princess should be kind.”

Song Hwa glared at him for his audacity. “A guard should know when to hold his tongue.”

Chung Myung, unaffected by her anger, laughed. It was the sound of gurgling streams. The call of birds in the morning. The soft chiming of wind chimes. It was all the sounds that Song Hwa liked.

“Everyone tells me that. That my tongue is too sharp. But I make it up with good looks, don’t I?” He said brazenly.

Again, Song Hwa felt her face flame. But she held her ground. “You won’t be so handsome when you lose your head.”

He walked up to her, studying her face.

“What?” She demanded, feeling suddenly very naked despite the layers and layers of her hanbook.

In a soft yet solemn voice, he said, “How could you say such a scary thing?”

Song Hwa blinked. No one had ever managed to make her feel so ashamed with just one sentence.

“Princess!” Her maid came running, “We must finish the preparations! You are already an hour late and Queen Yoo is throwing a fit.”

Song Hwa gladly welcomed the reprieve from her guard’s questioning eyes. “Alright.” Was all she could manage to say.

The maid’s brows shot up at the Princess’s obedience. She shot a look of gratitude towards Chung Myung. She didn’t know what he was doing, but whatever it was, it seemed to be working.

It was Chung Myung’s first time traveling with the Princess. He was surprised to see that her palanquin would be empty and that her maids would be riding separately.

“Traveling without any companions? Surely you must get bored all on your own?” He asked as he helped her up the palanquin.

Song Hwa whipped around, surprised to see him there. She looked down at where their hands touched and immediately pulled away as if burned.

“I don’t need company,” she said curtly before disappearing into the palanquin.

The other princesses proved far better company than Princess Song Hwa. Chung Myung heard them chattering away with their companion maids and each other. They would pass notes to one another through their guards, who were also welcome to the conversation.

Near Princess Song Hwa’s palanquin however, it was dead silence.

“Ah, what a peaceful afternoon!” Chung Myung said to no one in particular. The other guards on their horses nodded, some turned to him in surprise at the noise. But no one said anything.

From the palanquin, not even the sound of moving could be heard. The small curtains from the palanquin window flapped aimlessly in the soft breeze. It almost felt empty.

“Look at the other Princesses. Chattering away like buzzing bees. Our Princess Song Hwa is far more civilized than them, no?” He directed his question at the other guards this time. They looked at each other, not sure of what to make of Chung Myung’s comments.

Again, nothing came from inside the palanquin.

“Ah, yes.” One guard dared to speak, sounding unsure of himself. The others kept looking at each other for more signs on what to do.

“Ah, sweet silence. We don’t get to enjoy that much, do we? It’s odd how people think that engaging in conversation is  actually a good thing. When in reality--”

The curtain of the palanquin swished aside as an angry Princess Song Hwa poked her head out, her mouth pulled down in a deep frown. She glared at Chung Myung, who only laughed at her expression.

“My, my, what a testy Princess we have.”

The Princess’s glare only darkened.

“Did I ever tell you lot about the time my father took me to the Northern Tribe?” Chung Myung said, addressing Song Hwa casually, “Those people tame wolves there. It’s fascinating to watch.” Chung Myung began to recount his adventures with the Northern tribe and their wolves in quite detail. He droned on and on, tiring Song Hwa from having to maintain her angry expression. Eventually the Princess gave up. She leaned back into her seat, disappearing behind the flapping palanquin curtains.

Chung Myung continued to reveal how he made friends with one particular wolf, but the Northern Chief did not approve as he wanted the wolves to be loyal to only him. So, he had the wolf killed.

“I didn’t tell anyone, but I cried the night they skinned my Bokshiri for his coat. I still miss that rascally dog.”

Chung Myung abruptly stopped. His silence was only substituted by the sound of the horses as they crawled their way to their destination.

“What happened next?” Only the top of the Princess’s head poked out. Her voice was just above a whisper.

She couldn’t see him, but she could hear his smile.

“I got my revenge of course. I stole my Bokshiri’s pelt and wore it around the Northern Chief’s bedroom, pretending to be Bokshiri’s ghost. You should have seen him when I howled! I sounded just like a wolf.”

Song Hwa bowed her head as she silently laughed, disappearing again into the palanquin.

“Ah-nee, if that entertains you then wait till you hear how I used to scare my sisters.” Chung Myung said, beginning another anecdote from his quite eventful life.

Before that day, Princess Song Hwa had hated traveling. It was long, tedious, and there was nothing to keep her occupied. But since that day, she never bored of any journey. Chung Myung it appeared, was quite the story teller. And when he wasn’t telling her stories, he was telling her gossip he heard from the other palace ladies.

Song Hwa got to know about her sister’s secret lovers, about Queen Yoo’s strange farting habits, about her brother having full conversations with himself at night and other funny goings on within the palace.

They always traveled together, the Princess and her Guard. Always a pair they were. Wherever she was, he would be there. Whenever she was in danger, he would protect her. And protect her he did for Chung Myung proved himself a capable swordsman, and an even more capable strategist.

Within a year, he was promoted to the position of the Captain of the Guard. A position that lent him less time for the Princess, but more time on training others on how to keep her safe. Despite his position, Chung Myung always made time to travel with Song Hwa.

Where ever the Princess went, the Guard was sure to follow. In every town, in every city, when the Princess entered, there standing to her right, was her guard. Protecting her from both the dangers of her position, and the boredom of her loneliness.

Princess Song Hwa had come to expect, that it would always be this way. That her guard would always be with her, as her constant companion.

As maybe more.

And perhaps this would be her story. The angry, lonely Princess rescued from her cage of misery by a noble guard.

Except, life wasn’t a fairytale. There was no happy ever after, no noble guard looking to rescue a trapped Princess. There was only Go Chung Myung who had a friendly demeanor and managed to endure her treatment. And there was only the Princess, who was so starved of affection that even basic decency managed to woo her.

 His chatty attitude, charismatic smile and friendly demeanor was not limited to her. She often found him sharing his life stories with the other guards or amicably flirting with the other court ladies. She felt foolish that she hadn’t realized then that he did not return her feelings. That he didn’t see their future together, the way she saw it.

This became more evident when she saw Chung Myung with Man Wol.

He still rode by her side as if she was the Princess and he, her guard. They still traveled together on most occasions, though not when they had to raid villages for then Chung Myung did not participate on principle. But when they did ride together, as they did now, he was always with her right by her side, close enough that if anyone were to attack, he could cover her.

The youngsters were all traveling to a river up a nearby wood. There was no ample water supply for the Bandit Clan so they had to travel out far and wide to find water enough to bathe in. The elderly who could not travel far made do with the little water reserve they had back in the rocky mountains. But the ones who were able to ride and fight always went with the group once every three days to clean themselves up and gather supplies from the cities.

They were dressed in regular clothes. Cotton cloth dyed in blues, greys, dull reds and pinks. Such clothing was reserved for when the Bandits had to disguise themselves and blend in. Even they knew the impact of the sun and the sand on their regular wear.

Due to the Princess’s presence, they all had cloth wrapped around their faces. Song Hwa's face was well known and they could not risk having her seen. This Song Hwa did not mind, for no one could see her scowl as Chung Myung kept turning around to steal glances at Man Wol.

It was in his smile. And the way his entire being lit up at the sight of her. And how he seemed to gravitate towards her, even when Song Hwa was by his side. Song Hwa had never seen such expressions on his face. Or seen him be so concerned outside of his duty as a guard.

And the chatting.

Chung Myung droned on and on and on. At first it was his stories, but then it was mundane things. Strange dishes he once ate, scars on his arms that he received during training, petty fights between guards he had to handle. Man Wol would always tell him off about his incessant chatting, sounding irritated and annoyed. Even Song Hwa would roll her eyes sometimes.

But then Song Hwa would spy the smallest of crinkles in Man Wol’s eyes. The barest of quirks on her cheeks. Sometimes she would bite her cheeks from the inside to keep herself from smiling. Hard as she tried to hide it, Man Wol enjoyed Chung Myung’s talks.

When they weren’t traveling, Chung Myung was always gone. Song Hwa didn’t like to think about what he was doing during those times. She preferred not to repeat the incident in the caves.

“Guys! I see the waterfall up ahead!” Someone from the front yelled. The others, grimy and sweaty from the past week’s activities, charged up ahead.

Man Wol raced her horse alongside the others. Song Hwa swallowed before she said, “Chung Myung, go ahead. I will follow.” It was not an order. But Chung Myung took it like one.

Song Hwa saw him speed up his horse to catch up with Man Wol. From behind, Song Hwa saw how Chung Myung teased her by riding her horse too close. Man Wol faced him and grinned in challenge and sped up her horse. The two raced to the waterfall that Song Hwa could hear, but not see. What she did see was another pair of eyes also trailing the young couple.

The Leader boy. He wasn’t leading them now, but it was the only title she could give him as yet again, she had forgotten his name. Young Ho? Ho Young? What was it again? Song Hwa thought desperately.

After her first month with the Bandits, two things had become abunduntly clear. One, that she had to let Chung Myung go. This Song Hwa was still struggling with. Two, that she wasn’t the only one heart broken over the pairing of Song Hwa and Chung Myung.

There was another heart also secretly in love with someone who could never be theirs. Song Hwa had expected that she and the Leader person might discover a kinship over their lost loves. Unfortunately, with her reputation preceding her, no such friendship was formed.

“Was it that you never told her or did she reject you?” Song Hwa bit her tongue as soon as the words came out. She sounded catty instead of friendly as she had intended when she had rounded up her horse near the Leader’s.

The Leader snapped his head to her, surprised to find her there. “I could ask the same of you. Although judging by how you fume every time your guard runs over to Man Wol, I guess you haven’t confessed either.” He smirked smugly, as if he had outsmarted her.

But Song Hwa smirked back, “Either? So, you are in love with her. I was just shooting a dart in the dark. I didn’t actually know I was right.” Song Hwa did know. But she wanted the Leader to think he had messed up. And just like she wanted, the smugness was wiped from the man’s face.

His mouth shrunk as Song Hwa added, “And you haven’t confessed. So that answers my question.”

“You are a terror,” The Leader let out a half-whistle half-exhale.

“I know.” Song Hwa grinned. All of a sudden, she felt an overwhelming longing for such conversation. A banter where she could be as mean as possible, and not have to worry about hurting the other person’s feelings. Song Hwa didn’t know exactly when she had developed a need for this kind of back and forth. But she felt like arguing. So, she said, “By the way, couldn’t you have chosen a more memorable name?”

“What do you mean?”

“I keep forgetting it.”

Here, she wanted the Leader to say something scathing like, It’s not my fault your memory is bad. Or perhaps he could go the cheeky route and say, Good, I don’t want you knowing my name. And maybe he could tell her, How annoying and simply ride off. Any of those options would have worked. But instead, the Leader sighed, as if tired, and responded, “Yeon Woo. If you forget it again, ask.”

His response had an air of finality to it and Song Hwa knew he would not stand for anything else from her. To make his point clear, he whipped his reins and pulled his horse ahead just as they reached the waterfall. Song Hwa felt herself deflating.

The men bathed first. Song Hwa felt this was unfair but it made the most sense. They had to stand guard in case they got caught and the women would have a harder time jumping out of the water with no clothes on than the men would.

While the men bathed, one of the women went out scouting for nearby cities where they could buy supplies from.

“Guys, guys, guys!” The animated bandit said as she came running back. “I just heard the most amazing news! They’re having a festival today! I saw the villagers setting up the tents and the fireworks. I wanna go. Can we go?”

“Festival?” Song Hwa asked, “What for?”

 “I’m sure they have some unnecessary excuse about celebrating the end of winter or the beginning of spring.” Man Wol said scathingly, picking out dirt from under her nails.

“But it’s neither the end of winter nor the beginning of spring.” Song Hwa pointed out.

“Who cares? Can we go? Please, please, please!” The Bandit girl asked the others. They all turned to Man Wol.

Man Wol narrowed her eyes at the animated bandit girl, “How many food stalls do they have set up?”

“Dozens! I even saw a man preparing rice cakes and dumplings. Just the way you like em.”

Man Wol grinned wolfishly, “Then we leave after sunset!” She declared. The Bandit girl hopped around excitedly.

A chatter rose up amongst the women as they discussed what they were going to buy—rather take when no one was looking—and what entertainment they were most excited to see. Song Hwa didn’t join in on the conversation. She sat with her brows furrowed trying to remember if there was an anniversary she was forgetting.

Quite accidentally her eyes fell on Man Wol, who was watching her closely. Song Hwa hated the woman. Hated how beautiful she was. Hated how capable she was with a sword. Hated how she seemed to have more intelligence in her than she revealed.

And even though Song Hwa hated the woman, she could not do anything about it. For she was at the mercy of the Bandits, and by extension, Jang Man Wol.

The boys called them over then, appearing damp and clean with water still dripping from their faces and ankles.

The women quickly ran to the river. Some of them climbed up the rocks to jump off from the top of the waterfall. Song Hwa, who had an aversion to things that could injure her, decided to stay behind at the water bank.

The few women that remained below jumped right in, enjoying the cool and refreshing water. Their enthusiasm was contagious. This was one part of the week that Song Hwa actually felt a little relieved. All of the dirt, grime and the constant sticky feeling kept her in a perpetual state of discomfort.

She could not complain about it. Not even to herself. Because it was a wonder just to be alive and she didn’t want anything beyond that. But Song Hwa was slowly discovering how truly blessed she had been before.

The squalor of the Bandit Clans, in contrast to the splendor of the palace, made her heart ache. How long had they been living like this? Surviving on scraps and bones while she had thrown away trays upon trays of food during her tantrums. How did anyone live like this when there were people sleeping alone in such large rooms that they could fit twenty?

Song Hwa’s heart collapsed in on itself every time she thought about how close she had come to having these people be hunted down. And for what? Jealousy? It felt so petty now. Song Hwa felt true shame in her actions. This shame led her to slide into the water, and remain under it till she could no longer breathe.

She resurfaced with a huge gasp, shaking her hair off her face. Underwater was where her thoughts disappeared. Underwater, she could find escape.

After all was done and Song Hwa was wrapped up in dark blue cotton, they returned from the waterfall to where they had set up camp. The men had caught food and had already cooked it.

“Yah! We’re going to the festival. Don’t fill up here.” Man Wol declared.

“The festival? You sure that’s wise?” Yeon Woo asked, tilting his head towards Song Hwa.

“We’ll wear masks. Everyone does during festivals.” Man Wol said, taking a seat on the same log he sat at, though with a little distance between them. “And if we have to call her, then we’ll call her Mira.”

Song Hwa cringed at the name. She preferred her own name, but understood the necessity behind the change.

“Good idea. We can’t go around calling her by her actual name.” A Bandit said mid chew.

Man Wol bumped her shoulder with Chung Myung. She wanted him to stop eating. Song Hwa knew why. Chung Myung tended to overeat. And then he would get sick. Song Hwa felt happy that it wasn’t only Man Wol who knew this. But she also felt sad that it wasn’t only her either.

“We’ll get better food there.” Man Wol said when Chung Myung offered her the leg of meat he was about to start on.

“You can eat though. Your stomach is like an endless pit of—” Chung Myung never got to finish his sentence as Man Wol kicked him away off the log.

“What did I do?” Chung Myung asked, bug eyed and confused.

Song Hwa’s shoulders shook but she did not let out a laugh. Jang Man Wol did would not get any laughs from her.

Song Hwa decided to eat. She knew that if any food was to be taken from the festival, it would be stolen. None of the Bandits had any coin to exchange. The former Princess preferred to eat the animal they had hunted.

They waited till it was dark before venturing into the city. Yeon Woo—Song Hwa rejoiced internally for finally remembering his name—went into the city to get them all masks so that Song Hwa and Chung Myung could not be recognized.

Every street was lit with large street lamps and twinkling tiny lanterns dangling from ropes. The air was alive with a cacophony of chattering in street corners and exchanges between merchants and loud calls to customers walking by. Smell of sizzling meat, boiling dumplings, cracking of fresh greens and marinated fish rose from a row of food carts. Man Wol grabbed Chung Myung’s hand without looking and dragged him away. The others scattered around the streets, leaving Song Hwa alone.

If she had been a princess, Chung Myung would have stayed behind. She wouldn’t have had to hide behind a mask. And they would be walking together. She would point out things she liked. And he would buy them for her. If she had been a normal girl, and he a normal swordsman, then perhaps they could have been more than just a Princess pining after her guard.

She was no longer a princess. And could not call herself a normal girl. She was a fugitive on the run. And she had dragged him down with her. As Song Hwa walked down the streets, she eyed the fathers carrying their little girls over their shoulders, she eyed the young girls out with their first loves, she eyed the grown women leaning against their husband’s arms. She happened to pass by a stall where a tall mirror was propped up. The woman was selling cheap pins and hair accessories. She had set up a mirror for girls to try things out in.

Song Hwa hadn’t seen her reflection properly in a year. The closest she had gotten was the slightly transparent image in the pool of water when they went bathing. But now she saw, that there was a loop of hair sticking out from the top of her head where she had tied up her ponytail incorrectly.

No one had pointed it out. Song Hwa wondered if anyone had even paid enough attention to notice. She quickly took off her mask and undid her hair and combed through it.

Her hair, that had once been silky and straight, now fell in frizzy, dry strands. Even though she had washed it, it still smelled a bit of sweat. Song Hwa remembered the various soaps they used to lather into her hair. How the palace women used to massage her head and her shoulders.

Her skin had become tanned too. And how skinny she had become. Her face looked gaunt. Haunted. Her cheeks had sunken in. Her eyes looked hollow without their usual twinkle. There were scratch marks all over her face, her neck and when she looked down, her hands. Her skin that had once glowed like the moon was now dirty and scarred from the little spots that tended to break out. Her lips that had once been naturally red, were now brown and flaky with dry skin.

Song Hwa had considered herself beautiful once. Even though she knew, that her beauty was the result of the treatments and creams and soaps that the palace women had used on her. It was the result of her rank and her privilege. Without those, she was nothing but a street rat.

Her beauty was gone and with it, her last hope of finding a man who would want her. No one would want her now. Not like this.

With this, her old life was erased. She forever would be, just Song Hwa. No, not even Song Hwa. She was now Mira.

Song Hwa was gone.

“A pretty pin for the pretty girl?”

Song Hwa jumped when the stall’s owner suddenly came up behind her in the mirror, holding up a pretty red hairpin. “Old lady you scared me!” Song Hwa realized with horror, that she had taken her mask off. But much to her relief, no one seemed to have noticed her. Her transformation was so stark, that the people didn’t recognize their own princess.

The lady whacked Song Hwa’s arm, “Shush! You children. So whiney. You want it or not?” She held up the pin. Song Hwa realized she had been standing at the stall for a long time and there were customers waiting in line.

“Oh. Sorry.”

“Buy the pin. Then there’s no need to be sorry.” The old woman held up the pin.

It was pretty. But Song Hwa had no money.

She held her hands up, “I can’t pay for it.”

“Gah! Then get out of my stall!” The woman shoed her away. Song Hwa stepped aside as another customer stepped in her place.

Red in the face, Song Hwa continued on her path through the streets of the city.

Dark grey clouds rolled forward up above. The sky appeared a shade of dark red, an effect caused by the lights below. Everything was so well lit and inviting. Yet Song Hwa felt a stranger in her own Kingdom.

Song Hwa focused on her walking. She tried to look for the other bandits, but so many people were wearing the same masks and similar clothing that she couldn’t quite figure out who was a civilian and who was a Bandit.

Eventually she gave up and decided to go back to where they had split up. On her way, she passed by the old lady again.

A girl was arguing with her. She was in silks, with her hair done up high and a prissy painted face. A clear sign of her high-status background. She was accompanied by two other girls, all of the same age, dressed the same way.

“You sold me a bad pin! It completely broke when I put it in my hair!” The girl was saying, holding a broken pin in her open palm. It was the same red pin that the woman had offered to Song Hwa.

“I don’t make em! Take your money back if it broke.” The old woman was fighting back.

The noble lady whacked the old woman with her fan. “You think I am short of money? How dare you suggest I want the money?”

The old lady rubbed her arm where the fan had hit her. “You brat! You don’t want the money? Fine! Take another pin.”

“Why would I want another stupid pin?” The girl threw the pin in the old woman’s face. “You’re a con artist. I’m going to report you.”

The girl turned and the old woman went white. She grabbed onto the girl’s hand, “Young Lady, I did not mean disrespect,” the old woman’s voice was at once humble. “I apologize. I will give you another pin. A better pin. I will give you the money back too!”

“See?” the young noblewoman said to her companions, “Look at this con artist. First, she fools us then she tries to hide her crime when I threaten to report her. How typical. Peasants like her deserve none of our kindness.”

Song Hwa unconsciously took a step forward before she caught herself and stopped. This wasn’t a situation she could involve herself in. The commoners might not have recognized her, but nobility would. There was nothing else to do but watch as the noble lady kicked the dirt on the ground in a huff and left, with her posse trailing behind.

The tough old woman looked defeated now. A sheen of sweat reveals her worry. The customers walking by were looking at her and whispering to each other but no one was going to her stall. Why would they? Someone from higher rank had just made a scene there. People were surely terrified of getting caught up in the same problem.

Song Hwa went over and without a word, bent down to pick up the broken pin that the noble lady had thrown in the old woman’s face. “If she wanted to report you, she would have done so before coming to complain.” Song Hwa said.

“Aye. But no one’s gunna buy from me now.”

Song Hwa looked at the broken pin. “You don’t need this one so I’m keeping it.” She softly declared.

“Gah!” The old woman sat down on a stool. She was hefty and wrinkled and by sitting down it seemed she had melted somewhat.

Song Hwa joined her since there was nothing else in this festival that she could do. There was no one to have fun with. And being on her own felt embarrassing. So instead Song Hwa sat on a stool next to the woman and tried to do her hair in a way that the broken pin could fit in it.

After she failed for the fifth time, the old woman clicked her tongue and got up.

“Didn’t anyone teach you how to tie up your hair?” She complained as she swatted Song Hwa’s hands away and began to comb through it with her grubby fingers. The old woman pulled violently and Song Hwa hissed but it went ignored. Eventually her hair had been tied up into a plain bun, with just the pin sticking out from the top.

“Even broken things have their use,” the woman said. Her words touched Song Hwa, who had been feeling quite broken herself recently. “Now you can properly celebrate in the festival.”

The woman smiled, revealing a few gaps in her teeth. Song Hwa’s heart warmed. She began to delicately touch the pin on her head. “What exactly are we celebrating?” She asked without thinking.

“The Chief State Councilor has ordered the Kingdom to celebrate. They caught some war criminal or something.” The woman closed her eyes as she tried to recall. “The man who ran away with the runaway Princess I think.”

Song Hwa froze. “Lord Ahn Hyun?” She said without thinking.

“Ah! That’s the name! I almost forgot it.” The old woman said as she began to gather her things. There was no point in keeping her stall open, so it was best to close it up and go home. “He was a famous General, wasn’t he?” She tried to remember. When she got no answer, she turned to find that the the young lady who had been kind enough to keep her company was gone.

~~~~~~~

It was the middle of the night, when all the world was asleep, save a few shadows lurking about in places they should not be in.

In the prison cells, Lord Ahn Hyun sat in a meditative position. A dim lantern was lit inside, casting a triangle of warm glow outside. No other cell was lit. Unlike the other prisoners, he was not asleep, though his eyes were closed.

There was a sound of soft footsteps. Then a metal door groaning open. Then closed.

The footsteps came closer and Lord Ahn Hyun opened his eyes.

“You lived amongst the Shadowmen all your life. Didn’t Ji Ahn teach you any skills?” He asked the very young and naïve looking man standing outside his cell.

“Skills?”

“Silence. In both your tongue and your movements. I could hear you walking a mile away.”

Hyun swallowed. “She didn’t let me train.” He whispered.

“You should pick up a few tricks from this friend of ours.” Ahn Hyun jerked his chin to the seemingly empty air behind Hyun.

It was dark, for most of the lanterns had been put out. Behind Hyun, it was darker. Lord Ahn Hyun’s keen eyes picked out the faintest of outlines of someone else standing behind Hyun.

Dan Ho stepped into the light. “You should hurry up before the Headmaster notices him gone.”

“She won’t. She’s too drunk on my capture to notice much right now.” Ahn Hyun got up. From his hair, he produced a thin, wiry pin. With said pin, he reached out through the bars and began to tinker with the door lock.

Within a minute, the cell door creaked open. “Oh, I do wish you could get me some oil, young Dan Ho. These noises make my life quite difficult.”

“You want the Headmaster to start asking who oiled the hinges of your cell?” Dan Ho argued. Although he wasn’t exactly whispering, his voice was still low enough not to be noticed by anyone except the person standing right in front of him.

“Who says it has to be just mine?” Ahn Hyun grinned as he stood by his cell door. With a flourish he welcomed Hyun in.

Hyun blinked, “Your letter... Are you two trapping me?”

Lord Ahn Hyun laughed soundlessly, “My boy, would we tell you if we were? No, this is no trap. Only a conversation. Please, I would much rather not have my new King stand outside so uncomfortably. The door can remain open if you prefer.”

Hyun looked between Dan Ho and Lord Ahn Hyun, thoroughly confused and terrified of the implications of this situation. He turned to Dan Ho for any sign of clarity. But he got nothing from Dan Ho’s stoic face.

Cautiously, Hyun stepped in. If they were going to imprison him here, then there would be nothing of it. He would eventually be discovered. But if he fought back, he could end up hurt. And with Dan Ho’s skill, he could even end up dead. Cooperation was the only way.

“Thank you for escorting His Highness here.” Lord Ahn Hyun said to Dan Ho after Hyun had gone inside. “I knew he couldn’t move around without help.”

Dan Ho bowed his head in response. “You’ll need to get someone else to take him to you for the next few weeks.” Dan Ho informed.

Lord Ahn Hyun’s brows went up, “Another mission?”

Dan Ho shook his head, “The same one. My task is still incomplete, as you might be aware.”

“Ah. The Princess... yes.” Ahn Hyun looked down to his feet, thinking. “And where are you actually going?” He still faced the ground but his eyes snapped up, sharp and unblinking.

Dan Ho swallowed. From his back pocket, he produced a worn piece of folded paper. “It was tough to get this because she hides it in her chambers. But I managed to break in and see what information she had and I found this in the Ledger of Students.”

Lord Ahn Hyun took the paper and delicately opened it. It listed off students, the dates and places of their discovery and their new names along with several other details of identification. Only one name on the list did not have a new name.

A little boy who insisted his name remain Dan Ho.

“It’s where she discovered me. I am hoping that if I start there... I might be able to find where I came from.”

Lord Ahn Hyun nodded and silently folded the paper just as it had been before. Dan Ho took it from him and put it back into his pocket.

“How are the visions you’ve been having? Have they reduced since you returned?”

Dan Ho shook his head again, “They’ve gotten worse. I think Queen Daemok genuinely haunts me.”

“And is that not proof enough for you?”

“Dreams and silly speculations are not proof. Lots of people have similar faces. I am sure there are a dozen boys my age who look like Lee Chang. No, I need to find actual evidence of where I come from. If what the Princess told me is the truth... then I must discover that for myself.”

Lord Ahn Hyun eyed Dan Ho. It was unnerving how similar his gaze was to the Headmaster’s. Not in appearance but the gesture itself.

“I don’t suppose you would want to stay long enough to join us?” Lord Ahn Hyun said, referring to Hyun who had started sweating through his regal clothing.

“No. I will return to take him back once you’re done. But you’ll need someone else if you want to meet again.”

“Yes, yes. I understand.” Lord Ahn Hyun stepped back. “Goodbye, Dan Ho. I hope we get a chance to meet again.” He turned to Hyun and said, “Now, my good King. We shall begin with your lessons.”

“Lessons?” Dan Ho heard Hyun say as he walked down the prison corridor.

“Yes. You are just a boy. One not ready for the Royal Court. But we shall make a King out of you yet.”

Show them in masks. that's how Song Hwa hides among the public [AA1] [AA1]

Chapter Text

Clang! Clang! Clang! The sound of metal against metal echoed through the mountain walls as two swords groaned against the strikes of their wielders.

“Princess, if you’re worried about your safety—” Chung Myung said through clenched teeth as he successfully blocked Song Hwa’s moves. “—don’t. I will always protect you.” With a final blow, he managed to knock Song Hwa off the ground and her sword out of her hands.

He stood above her, panting. Wiping the sweat from his brow, he grinned as the Princess bared her teeth in anger. “Is that enough for today?” He said, offering her a hand.

Song Hwa knocked it away. “It’s enough when I say it’s enough.” She got to her feet, quickly retrieving her rusty sword from the ground. “Again!” She said, taking a fighting stance.

“Princess. You will burn yourself out if you push too hard.” Chung Myung said, casually mirroring her pose.

The Princess’s brows furrowed, and her gaze intensified. I’m not doing this to protect myself, she thought, I’m doing this so I can fight! With a cry, she launched herself towards Chung Myung who easily dodged her blow.

This was how Song Hwa began her training with the sword. This was not the childish lessons she had been taught in the palace. This was real fighting. Where she got cuts and bruises and fell over and over and over. She fought till she passed out. She fought till her legs could no longer work.

With the boredom and isolation that Song Hwa felt in her life of hiding, fighting was the only reprieve. Her muscles ached in protest, her bones creaked under her weight, but the feeling that she was working towards something and slowly moving forward gave her joy in her bleak situation.

“You don’t fight will full force.” She complained to Chung Myung in one of their sparring sessions. She had begun to notice how he always held back with her, only increasing his strength as much as she improved.

“If you get seriously injured now, then everything you have worked for will have been in vain.” Chung Myung countered.

Song Hwa growled, “Then how will I improve if you don’t take me seriously?!” She thrust at him, almost getting him but Chung Myung managed to dodge out of the way.

“You have my word; I will fight you head on once I know you are ready. For now,” Chung Myung attacked, knocking Song Hwa on the ground once more. “Try not to fall.” He grinned.

Song Hwa looked at her sword now, in the darkness of the night. Her old sword had broken from how hard she had trained with it. Chung Myung had managed to procure her a better one. She wished she had been given more time to train and get better. But Lord Ahn Hyun was in danger, and she had not a second to waste.

The others were still back at the festival. Song Hwa debated whether she should tell the others about Lord Ahn Hyun. Chung Myung could go with her. But he would never leave without telling Man Wol. And knowing that woman, she would want to join to protect him. And that would alert everyone.

Song Hwa gripped the hilt of her sword tightly. If the Bandits became involved, they would be captured instantly. They were nothing against the Shadowmen. Endangering an entire clan did not sit well with the former Princess. She had no Kingdom anymore, but she still had the Bandits. And a Princess, even a disqualified one, still had a duty to protect her people.

This was why she left alone, without a word or a goodbye. She stole Chung Myung’s horse and left in the middle of everything. The others would never find out what had happened to her. If she made it back, there would be a huge punishment awaiting her. And if she didn’t… then at least the damage would be limited to her.

~~~~~~~

Five Days Later

Intelligence came in many forms. Some minds were swift in calculations. Some in making decisions. Others managed to remember everything in detail. Song Hwa’s intelligence came from her powers of observation. She managed to notice things others missed and managed to piece together truths hidden in plain sight.

When she had lived with the Shadowmen, she had observed their movements closely. How they walked without a sound, how they managed to sneak about and how they seemingly disappeared into thin air. While she could not call herself proficient in their skills by any means, she had managed to pick up a few tricks here and there and even practiced some moves back at the Bandit Clan’s hideout.

The Shadowmen never walked in the light. This tactic seemed obvious. But in practice, this was difficult to do. Song Hwa took advantage of the night, but even still she had to work out the corners and patches of wall bathed in shadow and how she would walk to those corners and patches without coming into the light. It was all a little embarrassing. Extending one foot before whipping the rest of her body forward. Crouching down awkwardly and trying to take the form of a triangle when she had to press herself in a corner.

Song Hwa hoped no one would see her. Not only because it would lead to her capture, but also because she couldn’t live with the embarrassment of being caught moving so ridiculously.

Shadowmen also kept eyes on the other person’s line of sight. This came as instinct to them, but for Song Hwa, it was a struggle. She didn’t have anyone to practice this particular move with so now whenever she heard the sound of footsteps approaching, she had to first press herself against the corner of a wall and make sure to adjust her position if she came into any guard’s eyeline.

Those Shadowmen… how do they make all this look so impressive? This is so humiliating, Song Hwa thought as she had to awkwardly extend one leg to the right whilst putting her entire weight into the other leg folded beneath her. She managed to adjust her body within the shadow space of the corner, so that she wasn’t even visible when the guards passed by.

The guards patrolling the outer wall were of the Royal Guard. Song Hwa could not spy a Shadowman among them. This was just as well, as a trained Shadowman would have been able to see through her juvenile attempts in an instant.

The Shadowmen would be present inside however. But Song Hwa had a way to avoid them. She just needed to get past the outer wall.

A gate in the outer wall was open as a small unit of guards passed by. Song Hwa sneaked right by them to get inside. Once she had scurried to a safe corner, she exhaled in relief. From there, she knew of the hidden tunnel system that had been built under the palace grounds to help the royal family escape in case of an attack. A precautionary measure put in by her father after the massacre of King Lee Chang’s family.

It was funny how things worked out.

The inner tunnels were poorly lit with low burning torches. Song Hwa still remained inside the shadows, a decision that paid off many times when a few guards passed by her, seemingly on their patrol of the tunnels. None of them noticed her hiding in the corners. But each time they came around, Song Hwa felt her heart stop.

She reached the end of the tunnel with her life still intact, though she suspected she had sustained at least two heart attacks. The exit led to the outer gardens where she had often escaped to when her father used to beat her around. The familiar landscape made her heart lurch in longing.

Ahn Hyun. I must rescue Ahn Hyun, she reminded herself, focusing on the task at hand.

The prisons were farther down the path, near the training grounds. Song Hwa had to pass by hoards of guards in order to reach Lord Ahn Hyun. But she wasn’t worried.

Song Hwa knew exactly where to go. She was quite familiar with the path to the Captain’s quarters and this knowledge made her blush. Thankfully, the Captain was out. She could sneak in, retrieve his uniform and sneak out.

With a guard’s uniform, she wouldn’t be easily noticed. After that, all she had to do was find the cell that Lord Ahn Hyun was trapped in.

As she exited the Captain’s quarters. She looked around. There was no trace of Chung Myung left there. None of the maps he used to pin to the wall, nor the ornaments he had received from his family. Someone new had moved in and claimed this space as their own. Song Hwa wished she could have brought Chung Myung with her. The Princess felt incomplete without her guard by her side.

No, she told herself, I’m not someone that others have to protect. I am someone who fights. Even as she told herself this, Song Hwa could feel her weaknesses weighing her down. The difference between her and the other guards was simply too vast. Just one of them would be enough to take her on. And this place with crawling with a legion of guards and Shadowmen.

She wasn’t someone who could fight. She was still too weak.

Gathering herself, Song Hwa sneaked out of the Captain’s rooms. She couldn’t wait around to mull over her insecurities. She had to move.

She had a Lord to rescue.

~~~~~~~

At the outer palace wall, a group of guards were out on their nightly patrol.

“Ugh, a stone got in my shoe,” one of them complained, tapping his heel on the ground. A tiny stone had gotten in his shoe and was cutting into the skin of his feet. “Wait up, I gotta fix this or else it’ll keep poking me.”

The others turned.

“Ugh, come on!”

“You’ll make us late to the check post.”

“Captain hates tardiness.”

“Just a second!” The guard said, taking his shoe off and tapping it upside down.

Once the tiny stone hit the ground, the guard sighed in relief and put his shoe back on.

“Sorry guys! I’m all done—hey what’s this?” He bent down and from the dark corner of the wall, picked up a broken hairpin. It was red and glinted in the light of the lanterns.

“What’s a woman’s hairpin doing here?”

~~~~~~~

They brought him dinner.

“Here you go, old man,” the guard assigned to Lord Ahn Hyun said in his usual drawl as he threw the tray into his cell. The tray slid across the floor and stopped just an inch away from the man.

Lord Ahn Hyun was in his usual pose, meditating. He peeled one eye open, his brow arching high, as he looked at the unappealing food that had been offered.

When the guard closed the cell gate, it did not creak. Nor did it groan. Lord Ahn Hyun waited for the guard to notice but he went away, scratching his back and yawning.

Ahn Hyun giggled to himself. “Youngsters are always so ignorant.” He said to himself.

“Not all of us I hope.”

With a loud gasp Lord Ahn Hyung jumped to his feet like a startled cat.

At the bottom of the cell window, a pair of unblinking eyes stared out from the darkness. Only the top of Song Hwa’s head was visible. The cell window was too high.

On the outside, she was standing on top of a large barrel that she had dragged to his window. A long trail followed the barrel as the Princess had pushed it by each window in the row of cells until she came across the right one.

It hadn’t been a very effective plan as it had wasted a lot of her time, but it had worked.

“Princess? Is that you?” Lord Ahn Hyun approached the window, his eyes bulging.

Song Hwa pushed herself up on her toes, the barrel wobbling a bit beneath her. She pulled down the cloth covering her face. “Yes, Lord Ahn Hyun. I’m here to save you.” She reached out through the window for Ahn Hyun’s hand in a moment of rare sentimentality. She was happy that by some miracle, the Headmaster hadn’t killed the old man. He was the only father figure she had in her life. It would kill her to lose him. This she realized now when she saw him after such a long time.

The moment soured however, when Lord Ahn Hyun smacked her hand away with a fan. “You foolish child! Who told you to come here? Where’s Chung Myung? How dare he allow you to come.”

“Ow!” Song Hwa retreated her hand away from the window, shaking off the pain from the smack. “Chung Myung isn’t here?”

Ahn Hyun’s eyes widened even further. Quick as a whip, he reached through the window and grabbed Song Hwa’s collar. “You brat… Chung Myung would never leave you alone… you ran away?”

Song Hwa grimaced against Ahn Hyun’s fierce gaze. “I had no choice. I had to come save you.”

“Argh! You little…” Ahn Hyun gritted his teeth together, “…what makes you think I needed saving? I bet you didn’t even consider—” The sound of stomping feet made Ahn Hyun pause. Song Hwa hanging from his cell window was too conspicuous. She was most likely to get caught if they continued their conversation like this.

“Come inside,” he said in a rush, “The guards in this cell are going to change their posts in seven minutes exactly. Count the seconds till then, then sneak in.”

“How do you know the guards will change posts?”

“I just do. They always change posts after bringing me dinner. Now don’t argue with me.”

“But—”

“No buts! Obey, Princess! Or Heaven help me…” He hissed.

The stomping of feet moved closer. Song Hwa knew she had no time. She jumped off the barrel and ran away from sight just as two guards rounded the corner.

“Oh?” One of them said, spying the barrel, “Who put that there?”

~~~~~~~

Song Hwa counted down the seconds till exactly seven minutes had passed. She saw the guard leave out the entrance to the prison.

The sky was turning from inky black to dark blue. Dawn was about to break. But there were still shadows about. Song Hwa made the most of them and sneaked inside.

None of the prisoners bothered to look up as she passed by their cells. She was still dressed as a guard. All they saw was the second guard coming to his post.

Song Hwa came to Ahn Hyun’s cell where he waited arms crossed. As soon as she neared, his hands shot through the cell bars to grab her shoulders. He shook her, not violently but enough to make her head bob. The prisoner in the next cell was surprised to see a guard being shaken so comically.

“You… foolish… stubborn… brat!” Ahn Hyun hissed. “Who told you I needed rescuing? When have I ever needed rescuing? You stand before the greatest General of the Kingdom! You dare suggest I am in need of a mere brat like you?”

“Well, you’re the one behind bars, old geezer,” Song Hwa said, feeling chastened. Although Lord Ahn Hyun’s words were harsh, his tone was laced with worry. He was angry at her not out of a sense of pride in his skill. He was angry because she had put herself in danger. She hadn’t been scolded with such love in a long time. It made Song Hwa smile.

“Smiling? You’re smiling at a time like this?”

“I missed you, old man.”

“Why would you miss me?! I’m not going anywhere!” He burst out in half-whisper.

“Ji Ahn will take no chances in killing you. I wasn’t about to let that happen.” Song Hwa answered seriously. Ahn Hyun’s grip on her loosened. “Now let’s get you—” As soon as her hands pushed against the bars, the gate opened. “Huh? It wasn’t locked?”

Ahn Hyun pulled a pin he had pushed on the hem of his sleeve and put it back in his hair. “Like I said. I am in no need of rescuing. You have committed a foolish mistake by coming here.” His tone was no longer that of an angry parent. Now, he sounded grave. Like a General who had realized his plan was about to fail. “If you get caught, all of this will have been for nothing.”

Song Hwa blinked, still processing what she was seeing. An open gate, and a Lord Ahn Hyun who was telling her he had every means of escaping but was choosing not to do so. “You—you’re here… on purpose?”

“Yes. You will learn as you grow, Princess, that not all battles are fought on the ground. Some have to be done the cowards way. Through politics.”

Song Hwa blinked again, “But… but Ji Ahn. She will kill you.”

“She can’t lay a finger on me unless I let her. She may be King from the shadows for now. But she will soon learn that even Kings are powerless in the court. Here war tactics are useless. Your father understood this. That was why he was able to remain King for so long. Ji Ahn… I have taught her many things…” for a second, Lord Ahn Hyun’s face clouded over, “…many things…” and just as quickly, that cloudiness vanished.

He looked up, “Politics is not one of them.”

~~~~~~~

A prison guard sauntered lazily to the prisons. He had been late to his post because a messenger had stopped him on the way to discuss something they had discovered outside the outer palace walls.

“A hairpin? All this fuss over a hairpin?” the prison guard scoffed to himself. “That Chief State Councilor sure has made the Guard quite paranoid.”

If anyone found out he had been late to report to duty, the new Captain of the Guard would have his head. But he knew that with so many guards and Shadowmen roaming about, that there was nothing to worry about. Just as he was about to enter the prisons, a pair of guards came up to him.

“Hey, did you see anyone go by here?”